Control Builder Components Reference Epdoc Xx15 en 520a
Uploaded by
Gabor Jozsef TothControl Builder Components Reference Epdoc Xx15 en 520a
Uploaded by
Gabor Jozsef TothExperion PKS
Release 520
Control Builder Components Reference
EPEPDOC-XX15-en-520A
June 2021
Experion PKS
Release 520
Control Builder Components Reference
EPDOC-XX15-en-520A
June 2021
Disclaimer
This document contains Honeywell proprietary information. Information contained herein is to be used
solely for the purpose submitted, and no part of this document or its contents shall be reproduced,
published, or disclosed to a third party without the express permission of Honeywell International Sàrl.
While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a purpose and makes no express warranties
except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any direct, special, or consequential damages. The
information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.
Copyright 2021 - Honeywell International Sàrl
Contents
Chapter 1 - About This Document 15
1.1 Introduction 15
1.1.1 Use of this document 15
1.1.2 Notation 15
1.1.3 Acronyms and Definitions 16
1.1.4 Overview of EHG Parameters 18
1.1.5 Parameter and Algorithm Definitions 67
1.2 Alphabetical Listing of Parameters 68
1.2.1 -A- 69
1.2.2 -B- 85
1.2.3 -C- 94
1.2.4 -D- 102
1.2.5 -E- 111
1.2.6 -F- 114
1.2.7 -G- 116
1.2.8 -H- 117
1.2.9 -I- 124
1.2.10 -K- 133
1.2.11 -L- 136
1.2.12 -M- 137
1.2.13 -N- 142
1.2.14 -O- 147
1.2.15 -P- 156
1.2.16 -R- 198
1.2.17 -S- 211
1.2.18 -T- 231
1.2.19 -U- 237
1.2.20 -V- 240
1.2.21 -X- 240
1.2.22 -Y- 240
1.3 Template Defining tab 241
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components 242
2.1 Component Categories and Types 243
2.2 Hardware relation category 243
2.2.1 Physical equipment block types 244
2.3 Functional relation category 246
2.3.1 Functional block types 246
2.4 Component Libraries 248
2.4.1 Auxiliary (AUXILIARY) Library 248
2.4.2 Device Control (DEVCTL) Library 248
2.4.3 Data Acquisition (DATAACQ) Library 248
2.4.4 Input/Output Channel (IOCHANNEL) Library 249
2.4.5 Exchange Library (ControlNet Interoperability) 249
2.4.6 Pulse Input Channel/Module Library 249
2.4.7 Input/Output Module (IOMODULE) library 249
2.4.8 Logic (LOGIC) Library 252
2.4.9 Math (MATH) Library 252
2.4.10 Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI) 253
2.4.11 Power Generation (POWERGEN) library 253
2.4.12 Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO) 253
2.4.13 Series C Input/Output Library 255
2.4.14 Regulatory Control (REGCTL) library 257
2.4.15 Sequential Control Module (SCM) library 258
2.4.16 System (SYSTEM) Library 258
2.4.17 Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Library 258
2.4.18 Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Library 258
2.4.19 Utility (UTILITY) Library 259
2.4.20 Rail I/O Modules -Series H (RAIL_IO_HAZ) Library 259
2.4.21 HART I/O Modules (HARTIO) Library 259
2.4.22 DeviceNet Interface (DNETIF) Library 259
2.4.23 PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library 259
2.4.24 Rail I/O Modules - Series A (RAIL_IO) Library 260
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types 261
3.1 Auxiliary Blocks 266
3.1.1 AUXCALC (Auxiliary Calculation) block 266
3.1.2 AUXSUMMER (Auxiliary Summer) block 269
3.1.3 CTUD (Counter Up/Down) Block 270
3.1.4 DEADTIME block 271
3.1.5 ENHAUXCALC (Enhanced Auxiliary Calculation) block 272
3.1.6 ENHGENLIN (Enhanced General Linearization) block 274
3.1.7 FLOWCOMP (Flow Compensation) block 275
3.1.8 GENLIN (General Linearization) block 275
3.1.9 LEADLAG (Lead Lag) block 276
3.1.10 ROC (Rate of Change) block 276
3.1.11 SIGNALSEL (Signal Selector) block 277
3.1.12 Selection methods 280
3.1.13 TOTALIZER block 281
3.2 Device Control Block 282
3.2.1 DEVCTL (Device Control) block 282
3.3 Data Acquisition Block 284
3.3.1 DATAACQ (Data Acquisition) block 284
3.4 IO Channel Blocks 285
3.4.1 AICHANNEL 285
3.4.2 AOCHANNEL 286
3.4.3 DICHANNEL 286
3.4.4 DOCHANNEL 287
3.4.5 PWMCHANNEL 287
3.4.6 SIFLAGARRCH 288
3.4.7 SINUMARRCH 288
3.4.8 SITEXTARRCH 289
3.5 Exchange Blocks (ControlNet Interoperability) 290
3.5.1 REQFLAGARRAY (Request Flag Array) block 290
3.5.2 REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block 290
3.5.3 REQTEXTARRAY (Request Text Array) block 291
3.5.4 RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block 291
3.5.5 RSPNUMARRAY (Response Number Array) block 292
3.5.6 RSPTEXTARRAY (Response Text Array) block 292
3.6 HART DEVICE Block 293
3.6.1 HART DEVICE (Generic HART Device) 293
3.7 Pulse Input Channel/Module Blocks 293
3.7.1 Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff 293
3.7.2 Pulse Input Channel 294
3.7.3 Pulse Input Totalizer 295
3.7.4 Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081 295
3.7.5 Pulse Input Module Block CC-PPIX01 296
3.7.6 PI Channel 296
3.8 Logic Blocks 297
3.8.1 AND block 297
3.8.2 CHECKBAD block 298
3.8.3 CHECKBOOL block 298
3.8.4 CHGEXEC (Change Execution) block 299
3.8.5 CONTACTMON (Contact Monitoring) block 299
3.8.6 DELAY block 300
3.8.7 EQ (Equal) block 300
3.8.8 FTRIG (Falling-edge Trigger) block 301
3.8.9 GE (Greater than or Equal to) block 301
3.8.10 GT (Greater Than) block 302
3.8.11 LE (Less than or Equal to) block 302
3.8.12 LIMIT block 303
3.8.13 LT (Less Than) block 303
3.8.14 MAX block 304
3.8.15 MAXPULSE block 304
3.8.16 MIN block 305
3.8.17 MINPULSE block 305
3.8.18 MUX (Multiplexer) block 305
3.8.19 MUXREAL (Real Multiplexer) block 306
3.8.20 MVOTE (Majority Voting) block 306
3.8.21 NAND block 306
3.8.22 NE (Not Equal) block 307
3.8.23 nOON (n out of N voting) block 307
3.8.24 NOR block 308
3.8.25 NOT block 308
3.8.26 OFFDELAY block 309
3.8.27 ONDELAY block 309
3.8.28 OR block 309
3.8.29 PULSE block 310
3.8.30 QOR (Qualified OR) block 310
3.8.31 ROL (Rotate Output Left) block 311
3.8.32 ROR (Rotate Output Right) block 311
3.8.33 RS (Reset dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block 311
3.8.34 RTRIG (Rising edge Trigger) block 312
3.8.35 SEL (Binary Selection) block 312
3.8.36 SELREAL (Real Selection) block 312
3.8.37 SHL (Shift Output Left) block 313
3.8.38 SHR (Shift Output Right) block 313
3.8.39 SR (Set dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block 313
3.8.40 STARTSIGNAL block 314
3.8.41 TRIG (Rising or Falling edge Trigger) block 314
3.8.42 WATCHDOG block 315
3.8.43 XOR block 315
3.8.44 2OO3 (2 out of 3 voting) block 316
3.9 Math Blocks 316
3.9.1 ABS block 316
3.9.2 ADD block 317
3.9.3 DIV block 317
3.9.4 EXP block 317
3.9.5 LN block 318
3.9.6 LOG block 318
3.9.7 MOD block 318
3.9.8 MUL block 319
3.9.9 NEG block 319
3.9.10 POW block 320
3.9.11 ROUND block 320
3.9.12 SQRT block 320
3.9.13 SUB block 321
3.9.14 TRUNC block 321
3.9.15 ROLLAVG block 322
3.10 Power Generation Blocks 322
3.10.1 GRPCAPRBK (Group Capability and Runback ) block 322
3.10.2 HTMOTOR (HT Motor Drive Control) block 323
3.10.3 LEVELCOMP (Drum Level Computation) block 325
3.10.4 LTMOTOR (LT Motor Drive Control) block 325
3.10.5 MAINIBV (Main IBV Logic) block 326
3.10.6 SOLENOID (Solenoid Valve Drive Control) block 327
3.10.7 VALVEDAMPER (Valve/Damper Drive Control) block 328
3.11 Regulatory Control Blocks 330
3.11.1 AUTOMAN (Auto Manual) block 330
3.11.2 ENHREGCALC (Enhanced Regulatory Control Calculator) block 332
3.11.3 FANOUT block 335
3.11.4 OVRDSEL(Override Selector) block 337
3.11.5 PID block 339
3.11.6 PIDER block 341
3.11.7 PID-PL block 344
3.11.8 PIDFF (PID Feedforward) block 347
3.11.9 POSPROP (Position Proportional) block 350
3.11.10 PULSECOUNT block 353
3.11.11 PULSELENGTH block 354
3.11.12 RAMPSOAK block 355
3.11.13 RATIOBIAS block 357
3.11.14 RATIOCTL block 359
3.11.15 REEOUT (Remote EEOUT) block 362
3.11.16 REGCALC (Regulatory Control Calculator) block 363
3.11.17 REGSUMMER (Regulatory Control Summer) 366
3.11.18 REMCAS block 368
3.11.19 SWITCH block 370
3.12 Sequential Control Module Blocks 373
3.12.1 HANDLER Block 373
3.12.2 STEP Block 373
3.12.3 SYNC Block 374
3.12.4 TRANSITION Block 375
3.13 System Blocks 376
3.13.1 CONTROL MODULE block (Continuous Control) 376
3.13.2 SEQUENTIAL CONTROL MODULE block (Sequential Control) 377
3.13.3 Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block 377
3.13.4 Unit Control Module (UCM) Block 378
3.13.5 Master Recipe (MR) Block 378
3.13.6 Proxy Master Recipe (MR) Block 378
3.13.7 Proxy FTEB Block 378
3.13.8 Proxy Node 378
3.13.9 Proxy Sequential Control Module (SCM) Block 378
3.13.10 Proxy Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block 378
3.14 Thermodynamic Utility Function Block 379
3.14.1 STEAMPROP (Steam Property) block 379
3.15 Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Block 380
3.15.1 UCNOUT block 380
3.15.2 EUCNOUT block 381
3.16 Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Blocks 381
3.16.1 HIWAYOUT block 381
3.17 Hiway Responder Block (HRB) 382
3.17.1 Basic Controller Hiway Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_CB) 383
3.17.2 Extended Controller Hiway Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_EC) 383
3.17.3 Analog Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_AI) 384
3.17.4 Digital Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_DI) 384
3.17.5 Regulatory Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_REG) 385
3.17.6 Processor Interface Unit Analog Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block
(HRBALG_PIUAIA) 386
3.17.7 High Level Processor Interface Unit Analog Output Algorithm Hiway Responder
Block (HRBALG_HLPIUAO) 387
3.17.8 High Level Processor Interface Unit Digital Input Algorithm Hiway Responder
Block (HRBALG_HLPIUDI) 387
3.17.9 High Level Processor Interface Unit Digital Output Algorithm Hiway Responder
Block (HRBALG_HLPIUDO) 388
3.17.10 High Level Processor Interface Unit Counter Algorithm Hiway Responder
Block (HRBALG_HLPIUCO) 388
3.18 Utility Blocks 389
3.18.1 ALMWINDOW (Alarm Window - Alarm Annunciator) block 389
3.18.2 ANNPANEL (Annunciator Panel - Alarm Annunciator) block 390
3.18.3 DIGACQ (Digital Acquisition) block 390
3.18.4 EXECTIMER 392
3.18.5 FIRSTOUT (First Out Detection) block 392
3.18.6 FLAG block 394
3.18.7 FLAGARRAY block 395
3.18.8 MESSAGE block 395
3.18.9 NUMERIC block 396
3.18.10 NUMERICARRAY block 397
3.18.11 PUSH block 397
3.18.12 TEXTARRAY block 398
3.18.13 TEXTCOMMENT (Text Comment) block 399
3.18.14 TIMER block 399
3.18.15 TYPECONVERT block 399
3.19 EtherNet/IP channel blocks 400
3.19.1 EtherNet/IP IO channel blocks 400
3.19.2 EtherNet/IP drive and relay channel blocks 402
3.20 IOREFERENCES Blocks 404
3.20.1 AIREF block 404
3.20.2 AOREF block 405
3.20.3 DIREF block 406
3.20.4 DOREF block 407
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block
Types 409
4.1 Control Processor Module Block 413
4.1.1 CPM Block (C200 Controller) 413
4.1.2 C200E Controller 414
4.1.3 C300 Block 415
4.1.4 UOC BLOCK 416
4.1.5 Application Control Environment (ACE) Block 420
4.2 Control Execution Environment Block 420
4.2.1 CEEC200 Block 420
4.2.2 CEEC200E Block 421
4.2.3 CEEC300 Block 422
4.2.4 C300 - 20mS CEE 424
4.2.5 CEEACE Block 426
4.3 Input/Output Link Interface Module Block 426
4.3.1 IOLIM block 426
4.4 Input/Output Link Block 426
4.4.1 IOLINK block 427
4.4.2 IOLINK Block (C300 Controller) 427
4.4.3 IOLINK Block (C300 - 20mS CEE) 428
4.5 OLE for Process Control Server Block 429
4.5.1 OPC block 429
4.6 Inter Cluster Gateway Block 429
4.6.1 Inter Cluster Gateway (ICG) Block 430
4.7 Redundancy Module Block 430
4.7.1 RM block 430
4.8 Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge Module Block 431
4.8.1 FTEB block 431
4.9 Input Type I/O Module Blocks 432
4.9.1 TC-HAI081/TK-HAI081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Input) 432
4.9.2 TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 – 1756-IF6I (6 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Isolated -
Analog Input) 433
4.9.3 TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 – 1756-IF16 (16 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non-Isolated -
Analog Input) 433
4.9.4 TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 – 1756-IA16 (16 Channel - 120Vac Non-Isolated - Digital
Input) 434
4.9.5 TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 – 1756-IB32/B (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated - Digital
Input) 434
4.9.6 TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 – 1756-IB16I (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated - Digital Input) 435
4.9.7 TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 – 1756-IA16I (16 Channel - 120Vac Isolated - Digital
Input) 435
4.9.8 TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 – 1756-IM16I (16 Channel - 220Vac Isolated - Digital
Input) 436
4.9.9 TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 – 1756-IA8D (8 Channel - 120Vac Diagnostic Input) 436
4.9.10 TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 – 1756-IB16D (16 Channel - 24Vdc Diagnostic Input) 437
4.9.11 TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 – 1756-IT6I (6 Channel - Thermocouple Input) 437
4.9.12 TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 – 1756-IT6I2 (6 Channel - Thermocouple Input) 438
4.9.13 TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 – 1756-IR6I (6 Channel - RTD Input) 438
4.10 Output Type I/O Module Blocks 438
4.10.1 TC-HAO081/TK-HAO081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Output) 439
4.10.2 TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 – 1756-OF6CI (6 Channel - 4 to 20mA - Analog
Output) 439
4.10.3 TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 – 1756-OF6VI (6 Channel - 10V - Analog Output) 440
4.10.4 TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081(1756-OF8) (8 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non-Isolated
- Analog Output) 440
4.10.5 TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 – 1756-OB16I (16 Channel - 120 Vac Non-Isolated -
Digital Output) 441
4.10.6 TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 – 1756-OB32 (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated
Digital Output) 441
4.10.7 TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 – 1756-OB16I (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated Digital
Output) 442
4.10.8 TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 – 1756-OA16I (16 Channel - 120 Vac Isolated - Digital
Output) 442
4.10.9 TC-ODX081/TK-ODX081 – 1756-OA8D (8 Channel - 120Vac- Diagnostic
Output) 443
4.10.10 TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 – 1756-OB16D (16 Channel - 24Vdc- Diagnostic
Output) 443
4.10.11 TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 – 1756-OX8I (8 Channel - 8 n.c., 8 n.o. 5-150Vdc, 10-
265Vac Isolated - Relay Output) 444
4.10.12 TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 – 1756-OW16I (16 Channel, 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac
Isolated - Contact Output) 445
4.11 Serial Interface Module (SIM) I/O Module Block 445
4.11.1 TC-MUX021/TK-MUX021 (Up to 32 Array Channel Function Blocks) 445
4.12 Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO) Blocks 446
4.12.1 AICHANNEL (PMIO) block 446
4.12.2 HAICHANNEL (PMIO) block 446
4.12.3 AOCHANNEL (PMIO) block 447
4.12.4 HAOCHANNEL (PMIO) block 447
4.12.5 DICHANNEL (PMIO) block 448
4.12.6 DOCHANNEL (PMIO) block 448
4.12.7 HLAI block 449
4.12.8 HLAIHART block 449
4.12.9 LLMUX block 450
4.12.10 STI_MV block 450
4.12.11 AO16 block 451
4.12.12 AO16HART block 451
4.12.13 DI24V block 452
4.12.14 DISOE block 452
4.12.15 DI block 453
4.12.16 DO32 block 453
4.13 Series C Input/Output (I/O) Blocks 453
4.13.1 AICHANNEL (Series C) 453
4.13.2 AOCHANNEL Series C 454
4.13.3 DICHANNEL Series C 455
4.13.4 DOCHANNEL Series C 455
4.13.5 AI-HART 456
4.13.6 AI-LLMUX 456
4.13.7 AI-LLAI 456
4.13.8 AO-HART 457
4.13.9 DI-HV 457
4.13.10 DI-24 458
4.13.11 DO-24B 458
4.14 Series CIEC 61850 Interface Module (850M) blocks 458
4.14.1 IEC61850M/IEC61850MSEC block 458
4.14.2 IEC61850LINK block 458
4.14.3 IED 458
4.14.4 Logical device block 458
4.14.5 Logical node block 459
4.15 Speed Protection Module (SPM) 459
4.15.1 Speed Protection Module (SPM) Block 459
4.15.2 SP_AI 459
4.15.3 SP_AO 459
4.15.4 SP_DI 460
4.15.5 SP_DO 461
4.15.6 SP_SPDVOTE 461
4.15.7 SP_SPEED 462
4.16 Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module 463
4.16.1 Servo Positioner Valve Module (SVPM) Block 463
4.16.2 SVP_AI 463
4.16.3 SVP_AO 464
4.16.4 SVP_DI 465
4.16.5 SVP_REGCTL 465
4.17 Universal Input/Output (UIO) Module 466
4.17.1 UIO module 466
4.17.2 UIO module Phase 2 (UIO-2) 468
4.18 Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI) Blocks 470
4.18.1 PCDI_MASTER (Peer Control Data Interface Master device) Block 470
4.18.2 PCDIFLAGARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Flag Array Channel) Block 471
4.18.3 PCDINUMARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Numeric Array Channel) Block 472
4.18.4 PCDITEXTARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Text Array Channel) Block 473
4.19 PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Blocks 474
4.19.1 PROFIBUS Module Gateway (PGM) Block 474
4.19.2 PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Secondary Block 474
4.19.3 Protocol Block (PBLINK) 474
4.19.4 Device Support Block (DSB) 474
4.19.5 PROFIBUS HART Input/Output Module (PBHIOM) Function Block 475
4.19.6 PROFIBUS Input/Output Module (PIOM) Block 475
4.19.7 PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library 475
4.19.8 PBAICHANNEL 475
4.19.9 PBAOCHANNEL 475
4.19.10 PBDICHANNEL 475
4.19.11 PBDOCHANNEL 476
4.20 Foundation FieldBus Interface Module (FIM) Blocks 476
4.20.1 FIM Block 476
4.20.2 FIMS Block 476
4.20.3 FIM4 Block 476
4.20.4 FIM4SEC Block 476
4.20.5 FIM8 Block 476
4.20.6 FIM Block 476
4.20.7 FFLINK 477
4.21 Enhanced High-Performance Process Manager (EHPM) Block 477
4.21.1 EHPM block 477
4.22 ELCN Engineering tools 480
4.22.1 EHPM Platform Block 480
4.22.2 EHPM Configuration Form Reference 486
4.22.3 EHPM Point template Configuration Form Reference 512
4.22.4 xPM Platform Block 539
4.22.5 ELCN AM Platform Block 541
4.22.6 ELCN AM Configuration Form Reference 552
4.22.7 AM Point template Configuration Form Reference 580
4.22.8 CEEELCN Node Configuration Form Reference 623
4.23 EtherNet/IP blocks 624
4.23.1 Input and output type EtherNet/IP I/O module blocks 624
4.23.2 EtherNet/IP drive and relay module blocks 633
4.24 ControlLogix and UDT blocks 635
4.24.1 User Defined Tag block 635
4.24.2 ControlLogix gateway block 636
4.25 Experion LCN (ELCN) Blocks 637
4.25.1 ELCN Bridge (ELCN_BRG) block 637
4.25.2 ELCN Bridge Configuration Form Reference 641
4.25.3 ELCN Node (ELCNNODE) block 685
4.25.4 ELCN Appliance Node Configuration Form Reference 689
4.26 TCMI platform block 742
5.1 C300 Process Manager 747
5.1.1 C300PM Platform Block 747
5.1.2 C300PM Configuration Form Reference 753
Chapter 6 - Common tabs 782
6.1 Server History tab 782
6.2 Server Displays tab 783
6.3 Control Confirmation tab 785
6.4 QVCS tab 785
6.5 Identification tab 785
6.6 Dependencies tab 786
6.7 Projected Parameters tab 788
6.8 Block Pins tab 788
6.9 Configuration Parameters tab 788
6.10 Monitoring Parameters tab 788
6.11 Block Preferences tab 788
6.12 Template Defining tab 788
CHAPTER
1 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
This document provides a brief technical reference for function blocks configured through Control
Builder. It includes a list of configurable parameters associated with a given block.
Revision History
Revision Date Description
A June 2021 Initial release of the document
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Use of this document 15
1.1.2 Notation 15
1.1.3 Acronyms and Definitions 16
1.1.4 Overview of EHG Parameters 18
1.1.5 Parameter and Algorithm Definitions 67
1.1.1 Use of this document
Use this publication during configuration and operation when you need detailed information about
EHG parameters.
For use in Function Block configuration, this publication provides definitions for each entry that can be
made on the Data Hiway, Box/Slot, and Data Point Forms in the Implementation/Configuration Forms
binder.
For use in process operation, this publication provides information about the parameters that appear
for EHG Device Function Blocks.
1.1.2 Notation
Parameter names that are listed in this publication are the mnemonics that appear instead of the long
names of the parameters on the configuration forms when the show parameter checkbox is selected.
These parameter names consist of up-to-sixteen alphabetic or alphanumeric characters. The
Chapter 1 - About This Document
parameter names are in boldface, with all capital letters such as NAME, BOXNUM, CALIBOFF, etc.
The algorithm names that are used in this publication identify the Basic Controller (CB), and Advanced
Multifunction Controller (AMC) algorithms that are enumerations of the ALGIDDAC parameter.
Algorithm names are distinguished from the parameter names in that, only the first letter is capitalized.
The algorithm names are in boldface type. Examples of algorithm names are Das, Pidnorm, Switch, etc.
Notes are provided in BOLD UPPERCASE.
1.1.3 Acronyms and Definitions
Acronym Definition
AC Analog Composite
ACE Application Control Environment
ACS Advanced Control System
AI Analog Input
AMC Advanced Multifunction Controller
AO Analog Output
ASD Alarm Summary Display
BOS Basic Operator Station
C200 PlantScape Controller
CB Basic Controller
CBldr Control Builder
CC Control Counter
CCA Control Component Architecture
CCL Control Component Library
CDA Control Data Access
CEE Control Execution Environment
CF Control Function
CHG CCA-HG
CHGDHI CHG Data Hiway Interface
CHGSNI CHG Supervisory Network Interface
CI Counter Input
CK Control Kernel
CM Control Module
CO Counter Output
COM Component Object Model
CPM Control Processor Module
CPr A CCA Parameter
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Acronym Definition
DC Digital Composite
DCS Distributed Control System
DDI Dual Digital Input
DFB Device Function Block
DFS Detailed Functional Specification
DH Data Hiway
DHEB Data Hiway Ethernet Bridge
DHN Data Hiway Navigator
DHP Data Hiway Port
DI Digital Input
DO Digital Output
EC Extended Controller
EE Execution Environment
EHG ExperionPKS Hiway Gateway
EOS Enhanced Operator Station
ERDB Engineering Repository Data Base
EU Engineering Unit
FB Function Block
FFB Faceplate Function Block
FFD Focused Function Development
FIFO First In First Out
FTE Fault Tolerant Ethernet
FW Firmware
GEE Gateway Execution Environment
HAIM High level Analog Input Module
HG Hiway Gateway
HI Human Interface
HIM Hiway Interface Module
HLPIU High Level Process Interface Unit
HMUX High level Analog Multiplexer
HTD Hiway Traffic Director
IO Input / Output
IOMFB IO Module Function Block
LCN Local Control Network
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Acronym Definition
LE Low Energy
LEPIU Low Energy Process Interface Unit
LLPIU Low Level Process Interface Unit
NIC Network Interface Card
OLE Object Linking and Embedding
OPC OLE for Process Control
PAD Preferred Access Device
PDL Program Design Language
PIU Process Interface Unit
RCD Reserve Controller Director
RegCtl Regulatory Control
RTP Remote Terminal Panel
RTP-D Digital IO Remote Terminal Panel
RTP-I Analog Input Remote Terminal Panel
RTP-O Analog Output Remote Terminal Panel
RVAI Remote Variable Analog Input
SCAN Supervisory Control And Networks
SCM Sequential Control
SIM-ACE Simulation personality of ACE
SIM-EHG Simulation personality of EHG
STDCM Smart Transmitter Digital Communication Module
SW Software
TPN TotalPlant Process Network
TPS TotalPlant System
UAC Uninterrupted Automatic Control
UCN Universal Control Network
WDT Watch Dog Timer
XXPIU Refers to - HLPIU, LLPIU, and LEPIU
1.1.4 Overview of EHG Parameters
The multiple subsystems of Experion PKS use an Execution Environment (EE) called Gateway Execution
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Environment (GEE). Within the GEE, the data and algorithms are organized as Function Blocks (FBs).
The data contained by FBs are exposed as parameters. The name of a parameter serves as the public
name of the datum. Parameter names associated with a block name are universally recognized within
the naming domain of Experion PKS .
EHG supplies most of its functional contents to Experion PKS , by virtue of supporting EE block parameter
data model. The engineering configuration of EHG is done as slots of block parameters. Monitoring and
on-process displays obtain data by read access to block parameters.
By default, EHG is a redundancy-enabled system. It has two physical EHG nodes associated as a single
system. One node is designated as the Primary or the active node that services the clients of the EHG
and the other node is designated as the Secondary or the passive node that serves as a backup for the
primary EHG. The secondary EHG is equipped to takeover as the primary EHG when a failure is
identified in the primary EHG node.
FBs within GEE can be classified into the following functional categories:
l Management FBs (MFBs)
l Device FBs (DFBs)
l FFBs (FFBs)
Overview of Management FBs
MFBs present information about the EHG system on the status of its communication network and
resource usage. Configuration data and command parameters for overall EHG or DH operating states
are typically supported on Management FBs.
The EHG supports two types of Management FBs:
l EHG FB
l GEE FB
EHG
Primary EHG FB
The primary EHG FB serves as the access point for all data related to the EHG Box itself or the DH. It
publishes the following:
l Configuration parameters related to EHG box and the DH
l Function Block State information
l Statistical parameters
The tables in the following sections give a summary description of each EHG FB parameter:
l General parameters
l DHEB parameters
l Description of indexes used in parameters
The following table gives a summary description of EHG FB parameters:
BOXNUM HWYACT
BOXNUM_SEC HWYNUM RDNROLESTATE TOTALMEMINK
Chapter 1 - About This Document
CEECOMMAND HWYSTAT RDNSYNCABORT UPGRADESTATE
CEESTATE HWYSWAP RDNSYNCATMPT USEDMEMINK
CONFBOXNUM IMAGEVER RDNSYNCPROG
CPMCOMMAND INALM RDNSYNCSTATE
CPMSTATE INITHWYADDIAG RDNSYNCTIME
DHEBOK IPADDRESS SCANASSOCDSP
DSBLSYNCCMD IPGWYDHEB SCANCTRLLVL
ENBLSYNCCMD IPMASKDHEB SCANGRPDTL
FREEMEMINK IPNODEDHEB SCANPNTDTL
LOADSCOPE SECMODNAME
GTWBASEPRD MAXFREEINK SIMSTATE
HLTHINDEX MODISREDUN SOESYNENB
HWYCTLST RDNROLECHNG SYNCENBLSTAT
The use of indices for each EHG FB DHEB statistics parameter is described in the following table. Note
that the table also describes parameters ERRCNT() and RTRCNT(). These are actually parameters of
Device FBs, rather than EHG FB. However, ERRCNT() and RTRCNT() are related to EHG FB
parameters in the way they are named and in the way their indices work.
Block Parameter Index Scheme
Type
EHG DHEBERRCNT (Error Type, “I” ranges over the types of DHEB errors. “J” ranges over
FB Time Span) the time span of data collection.
EHG DHEBERRCNTALL (Time “I” ranges over the time span of data collection.
FB Span)
Device ERRCNT (Error Type, Time “I” ranges over the types of Box errors. “J” ranges over the
FB Span) time span of data collection.
Device ERRCNTALL (Time Span) “I” ranges over the types of Box errors.
FB
EHG BOXERRCNTALL (Hiway “I” ranges over Hiway addresses. “J” ranges over the time
FB Address, Time Span) span of data collection.
EHG TTLERRCNT (Error Type, Time “I” ranges over the types of Box errors. “J” ranges over the
FB Span) time span of data collection.
EHG TTLERRCNTALL (Time Span) “I” ranges over the time span of data collection.
FB
Device RTRCNT (Error Type, Time “I” ranges over the types of Box errors. “J” ranges over the
FB Span) time span of data collection.
Device RTRCNTALL (Time Span) “I” ranges over the types of Box errors.
FB
EHG BOXRTRCNTALL (Hiway “I” ranges over Hiway addresses. “J” ranges over the time
FB Address, Time Span) span of data collection.
EHG TTLRTRCNT (Error Type, Time “I” ranges over the types of Box errors. “J” ranges over the
FB Span) time span of data collection.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Block Parameter Index Scheme
Type
EHG TTLRTRCNTALL (Time Span) “I” ranges over the time span of data collection.
FB
EHG RTRCNFG (Error Type) “I” ranges over the types of Box errors.
FB
EHG CMDCNT (Command Type, “I” ranges over the type of command. “J” ranges over the
FB Time Span) time span of data collection.
EHG MAXHWYCMDRAT (Time “I” ranges over the time span of data collection.
FB Span)
EHG CMDHSTRY (Command or “I” selects command word or data word. “J” ranges over
FB Data, Sequence) the command history sequence.
EHG ERRHSTRY (Command or “I” selects command word or data word. “J” ranges over
FB Data, Sequence) the command history sequence.
EHG DEVSTATS (DHEB Statistics) “I” ranges over a set of statistics maintained by DHEB
FB
EHGS
Secondary EHG FB
The secondary EHG FB serves as a backup for the primary EHG FB. It has the capacity to take over as
the primary EHG in the event of failures in the primary EHG.
The following table gives a summary description of the secondary EHG FB parameters:
BOXNUM IMAGEVER RDNSYNCSTATE
HWYBOXNUM INALM SCANASSOCDSP
CPMCOMMAND IPADDRESS SCANCTRLLVL
CPMSTATE IPGWYDHEB SCANGRPDTL
DHEBOK IPMASKDHEB SCANPNTDTL
IPNODEDHEB SIMSTATE
HLTHINDEX MODISREDUN
HWYACT
HWYNUM PRIMODNAME
HWYCTLST RDNROLESTATE
GEEFB
GEE FB allows viewing and manipulation of the attributes that affect GEE as a whole. GEE FB publishes
the following information:
l State of the FB Execution Environment
l Statistics data related to FB execution and parameter access
Chapter 1 - About This Document
The table below gives a summary description of GEE FB parameters:
CEECOMMAND NOTIFINHIBIT SCANCTRLLVL
CEESTATE NUMACCRQUAVG SCANGRPDTL
CRCYCLEOVRN NUMACCRQUMAX SCANPNTDTL
DESC NUMCCLRQU SIMENABLE
DISPREFPRD NUMNTFRQUAVG SIMSTATE
GTWBASEPRD NUMNTFRQUMAX STATSRESET
HWYACCRATE NUMPARRSPAVG SUBSCPERIOD
HWYREADRATE NUMPARRSPMAX PEERRDREQDELAYED
HWYWRITERATE OPSNPD PEERWRREQDELAYED
INALM P2PACCRATE DISPWRREQDELAYED
LOGENABLE RATE1PERIOD
LSCYCLEOVRN SCANASSOCDSP FTEACCRATE
AVGNTFACCRATE
Device FBs
A Device FB (DFB) publishes properties of a whole, physical box residing on the DH. There is one DFB
instance for every box. DFBs publish parameters pertaining to status and operation of the device as a
whole and have little to do with slot algorithm processing.
The list of DFBs available in EHG is as follows:
l CB
l DHP
l AMC
l HLPIU
l LLPIU
l LEPIU
l CBRCD
l AMCRCD
CB
The following table lists the Configuration parameters of CB:
ADHI BOXUAC RCDNAME
ADLO CBREVISION RCSTATUS
BOXCOMMAND CHNGDTFREQ SCANASSOCDSP
BOXDIAGDESC DESC SCANCTRLLVL
Chapter 1 - About This Document
BOXFSTAT EXECSTATE SCANGRPDTL
BOXNUM INALM SCANPNTDTL
BOXRCDAD KEYWORD SIMSTATE
BOXSTAT MASTER
BOXTYPE
AMC
The following table lists the configuration parameters for AMC:
ADHI CHNGDTFREQ RCDNAME SUBSLOTNUM
ADLO DESC RCSTATUS
BOXCOMMAND EXECSTATE REGNAME(x,y)
BOXCRDST[x] INALM SCANASSOCDSP
BOXDIAGDESC IOADHI SCANCTRLLVL
BOXFSTAT IOADLO SCANGRPDTL
BOXNUM KEYWORD SCANPNTDTL
BOXRCDAD MASTER SIMSTATE
BOXSTAT MCREV SLOTNO (1-16)SLOTNO (1-30)
BOXTYPE NMBRBCFL MCCARDOPTION[x]
BOXUAC MCCARDTYPE[x]
DHP
The following table lists the configuration parameters for DHP:
ACTSCANTIME BOXTOG1, BOXTOG2 SCANASSOCDSP
BOXCOMMAND BOXTYPE SCANCTRLLVL
BOXDIAGDESC BOXVDB SCANGRPDTL
BOXFSTAT CHNGDTFREQ SCANTIME
BOXNUM DESC SIMSTATE
BOXPROT EXECSTATE SLOTNO (1-16)SLOTNO (1-30)
BOXSIZE INALM SLOTTYPE
BOXSTART KEYWORD
BOXSTAT MASTER
BOXTOG1, BOXTOG2
Chapter 1 - About This Document
HLPIU
The following table lists the configuration parameters for HLPIU:
BOXCOMMAND EXECSTATE SCANPNTDTL
BOXDIAGDESC INALM SIMSTATE
BOXFSTAT IONAME SLOTNO (1-16)SLOTNO (1-30)
BOXNUM KEYWORD SLOTTYPE
BOXSIZE MASTER
BOXSTAT
BOXTOG1, BOXTOG2 PIUREVLVL
BOXTYPE SCANASSOCDSP
CHNGDTFREQ SCANCTRLLVL
DESC SCANGRPDTL
LLPIU
The following table lists the Configuration parameters for LLPIU:
BOXCOMMAND DESC SCANGRPDTL
BOXDIAGDESC EXECSTATE SCANPNTDTL
BOXFSTAT INALM SIMSTATE
BOXNUM KEYWORD SLOTNO (1-16)SLOTNO (1-30)
BOXSIZE MASTER SLOTTYPE
BOXSTAT
BOXTYPE PIUREVLVL
BOXVDB SCANASSOCDSP
CHNGDTFREQ SCANCTRLLVL
LEPIU
The following table lists the Configuration parameters for LEPIU:
BOXCOMMAND DESC SCANCTRLLVL
BOXDIAGDESC EXECSTATE SCANGRPDTL
BOXFSTAT INALM SCANPNTDTL
BOXNUM KEYWORD SIMSTATE
BOXSIZE MASTER SLOTNO (1-16)SLOTNO (1-30)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
BOXSTAT SLOTTYPE
BOXTYPE PIUREVLVL
CHNGDTFREQ SCANASSOCDSP
CBRCD
The following table lists the Configuration parameters for CBRCD:
BOXCOMMAND MASTER SCANASSOCDSP
BOXDIAGDESC SCANCTRLLVL
BOXNUM PRIADDR (1..8) SCANGRPDTL
BOXSTAT PRINAME (1..8) SCANPNTDTL
BOXTYPE PRISTAT (1..8) SIMSTATE
DESC RCCOMMAND UACCOMMAND (1..8)
EXECSTATE RCDFWREV UACSTATE (1..8)
INALM RCERRSTAT (1..11/17)
KEYWORD RCFWLVL
AMCRCD
The following table lists the parameters for AMCRCD:
BOXCOMMAND MASTER SCANGRPDTL
BOXDIAGDESC SCANPNTDTL
BOXNUM PRIADDR (1..8) SIMSTATE
BOXSTAT PRINAME (1..8) UACCOMMAND (1..8)
BOXTYPE PRISTAT (1..8) UACSTATE (1..8)
DESC RCCOMMAND
EXECSTATE RCERRSTAT (1..11/17)
INALM SCANASSOCDSP
KEYWORD SCANCTRLLVL
FFBs
There is one GEE FFBs (FFB) per slot; it largely represents algorithmic properties of slots within a DH
box. They support read, write of control algorithms, and process live data from DH boxes. They also do
supplementary processing to make the data view of DH slots consistent with Experion PKS standards.
The FFBs can be classified into two types:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l I/O FFBs
l Regulatory FFBs
I/O FFBs
The I/O FFBs represent the IO slots of DH boxes. They are of following types:
l Analog IO
o AI
o AO
o AC
l Digital IO
o DI
o DO
o DC
o DDI
o DDO
l Counter
o CO
o CC
The table below provides the FFB applicability for each box type:
FFB Box Slot/Subslot Resource Applicability
Type CB DHP HLPIU LLPIU LEPIU AMC
Analog Composite (AC) NA A A NA NA A
Analog Input (AI) A A A A A A
Analog Output (AO) NA A A NA NA A
Counter (CO) NA A A NA NA A
Control Counter (CC) NA A A NA NA NA
Digital Composite (DC) NA A A NA NA A
Digital Input (DI) NA A A NA NA A
Digital Output (DO) NA A A NA NA A
Dual Digital Input (DDI) NA A A NA NA A
Dual Digital Output (DDO) NA A A NA NA A
Regulatory (REG) A NA NA NA NA A
A Applicable NA Not Applicable
Chapter 1 - About This Document
AMCAC
ALDLOPT DLYTIME OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM1 PVSOURCE
ALFMT (AMCREG) EUDESC PNTSTATE PVSRCOPT
BADPVALM.FL FLTRCNST PVCHAR PVSTS
BADPVALM.PR PVCLAMP PVTEMP
BADPVALM.SV HIALM.SV PVEUHI PVTP
BOXNUM HIALM.TYPE PVEULO PVTV
BOXTYPE INPTCOND PVFORMAT RCASENB
CALIBOFF INPTSUBSLOTNUM1 PVHIALM.FL REDTAG
CASREQ MODE PVHIALM.PR SHEDMODE
DESC MODEATTR PVHIALM.SV TOGINTSL(1..8)
DEVHIALM.FL MODEPERM PVHIALM.TP
DEVHIALM.PR NORMMODE PVLOALM.FL
DEVHIALM.SV NORMMODEATTR PVLOALM.PR
DEVHIALM.TP OPTOLERANCE PVLOALM.SV
DEVLOALM.FL ORDERINCM PVLOALM.TP
DEVLOALM.PR OUTIND PVP
DEVLOALM.SV OUTPTSLOTNUM PVRAW
DEVLOALM.TP OUTPTSLOTTYPE PVRNGOP
DHPAC
ALDLOPT HIALM.SV PCCONFO1 PVRNGOP
ALFMT (Analog) HIALM.TYPE PNTBOXIN PVP
BOXNUM INPTSLOTNUM PNTBOXOT PVRAW
BOXTYPE INPTSLOTTYPE PNTPCTY PVSOURCE
CALIBOFF INPTSUBSLOTNUM1 PNTSTATE PVSRCOPT
CASREQ MODE PVALDB PVSTS
DESC MODEATTR PVCLAMP PVTV
DEVHIALM.FL MODEPERM PVEUHI RCASENB
DEVHIALM.PR NORMMODE PVEULO REDTAG
DEVHIALM.SV NORMMODEATTR PVFORMAT RNGCODE1
DEVHIALM.TP OPTOLERANCE PVHIALM.FL RNGCODE2
DEVLOALM.FL OUTIND PVHIALM.PR SHEDMODE
Chapter 1 - About This Document
DEVLOALM.PR OUTPTSLOTNUM PVHIALM.SV TOGINTSL(1..8)
DEVLOALM.SV OUTPTSLOTTYPE PVHIALM.TP UNREASALM.FL
DEVLOALM.TP OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM1 PVLOALM.FL UNREASALM.PR
DLYTIME PCADDRI1 PVLOALM.PR UNREASALM.SV
EUDESC PCADDRO1 PVLOALM.SV
PCCONFI1 PVLOALM.TP
HLPIUAC
ALDLOPT PIUSMOTH PVRNGOP
ALFMT (Analog) HIALM.SV PNTSTATE PVSOURCE
BOXNUM HIALM.TYPE PVCHAR PVSRCOPT
BOXTYPE INPTCOND PVCLAMP PVSTS
CALIBOFF INPTSLOTNUM PVEUHI PVTEMP
CASREQ INPTSLOTTYPE PVEULO PVTV
DESC PVFORMAT RCASENB
DEVHIALM.FL MODE PVHIALM.FL REDTAG
DEVHIALM.PR MODEATTR PVHIALM.PR SCANFREQ (HLPIU)
DEVHIALM.SV MODEPERM PVHIALM.SV SHEDMODE
DEVHIALM.TP NORMMODE PVHIALM.TP TOGINTSL(1..8)
DEVLOALM.FL NORMMODEATTR PVLOALM.FL UNREASALM.FL
DEVLOALM.PR OPTOLERANCE PVLOALM.PR UNREASALM.PR
DEVLOALM.SV OUTIND PVLOALM.SV UNREASALM.SV
DEVLOALM.TP OUTPTSLOTNUM PVLOALM.TP
DLYTIME OUTPTSLOTTYPE PVP
EUDESC OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM PVRAW
AMCAI
ALDLOPT DEVHIALM.SV PVEUHI PVTV
ALFMT (Analog) DEVHIALM.TP PVEULO RVSCANPRD
AVCONFIG DEVLOALM.FL PVFORMAT SLOTNUM
AVCUTOFF DEVLOALM.PR PVHIALM.FL SLOTTYPE
AVEUHI DEVLOALM.SV PVHIALM.PR STATE
Chapter 1 - About This Document
AVEULO DEVLOALM.TP PVHIALM.SV STRTSTOP
AVFORMAT DLYTIME PVHIALM.TP SUBSLOTNUM
AVOPTION EUDESC PVLOALM.FL AVGNTFACCRATE
AVP FLTRCNST PVLOALM.PR
BADPVALM.FL HIALM.PR PVLOALM.SV
BADPVALM.PR HIALM.SV PVLOALM.TP
BADPVALM.SV HIALM.TYPE PVP
BOXNUM INPTCOND PVRAW
BOXTYPE INPTSLOTTYPE PVRNGOP
CALIBOFF INPTSLOTTYPE PVRNGOP
DESC PVALDB PVSOURCE
DEVHIALM.FL PVCHAR PVSTS
DEVHIALM.PR PVCLAMP PVTEMP
RVAI
ALDLOPT DEVLOALM.TP PVHIALM.FL PVSTS
ALFMT (Analog) DLYTIME PVHIALM.PR PVTEMP
BOXNUM EUDESC PVHIALM.SV PVTV
BOXTYPE HIALM.PR PVHIALM.TP RVSCANPRD
CALIBOFF HIALM.SV PVLOALM.FL SLOTNUM
DESC HIALM.TYPE PVLOALM.PR SLOTTYPE
DEVHIALM.FL INPTCOND PVLOALM.SV SUBSLOTNUM
DEVHIALM.PR PNTBOXIN PVLOALM.TP TD
DEVHIALM.SV PVCHAR PVLOALM.TP UNREASALM.FL
DEVHIALM.TP PVCLAMP PVRAW UNREASALM.PR
DEVLOALM.FL PVEUHI PVP UNREASALM.SV
DEVLOALM.PR PVEULO PVRAW
DEVLOALM.SV PVFORMAT PVRNGOP
DHPAI
ALDLOPT EUDESC PVHIALM.PR SLOTNUM
ALFMT (Analog) HIALM.PR PVHIALM.SV SLOTTYPE
Chapter 1 - About This Document
BOXNUM HIALM.SV PVHIALM.TP STATE
BOXTYPE HIALM.TYPE PVLOALM.FL SUBSLOTNUM
CALIBOFF PCADDRI1 PVLOALM.PR TD
UNREASALM.FL PCCONFI1 PVLOALM.SV UNREASALM.FL
DEVHIALM.FL PNTBOXIN PVLOALM.TP UNREASALM.PR
DEVHIALM.PR PNTPCTY PVP UNREASALM.SV
DEVHIALM.SV PNTSTATE PVRAW
DEVHIALM.TP PVALDB PVRNGOP
DEVLOALM.FL PVCLAMP PVSOURCE
DEVLOALM.PR PVEUHI PVSRCOPT
DEVLOALM.SV PVEULO PVSTS
DEVLOALM.TP PVFORMAT PVTV
DLYTIME PVHIALM.FL RNGCODE1
HLPIUAI
ALDLOPT DLYTIME PVFORMAT PVSTS
ALFMT (Analog) EUDESC PVHIALM.FL PVTV
BOXNUM FLTRCNST PVHIALM.PR SCANFREQ (HLPIU)
BOXTYPE HIALM.PR PVHIALM.SV SLOTNUM
CALIBOFF HIALM.SV PVHIALM.TP SLOTTYPE
DESC HIALM.TYPE PVLOALM.FL STATE
DEVHIALM.FL INPTCOND PVLOALM.PR SUBSLOTNUM
DEVHIALM.PR INPTSLOTTYPE PVLOALM.SV UNREASALM.FL
DEVHIALM.SV PIUSMOTH PVLOALM.TP UNREASALM.PR
DEVHIALM.TP PNTSTATE PVTV UNREASALM.SV
DEVLOALM.FL PVCHAR PVRAW
DEVLOALM.PR PVCLAMP (HLPIUAI) PVRNGOP
DEVLOALM.SV PVEUHI PVSOURCE
DEVLOALM.TP PVEULO PVSRCOPT
LEPIUAI
ALDLOPT DEVLOALM.TP PVEULO PVSOURCE
Chapter 1 - About This Document
ALFMT (Analog) DLYTIME PVFORMAT PVSRCOPT
BOXNUM EUDESC PVHIALM.FL PVSTS
BOXTYPE INPTCOND PVHIALM.PR PVTEMP
CALIBOFF OPNTHR.FL PVHIALM.SV PVTV
DESC OPNTHR.PR PVHIALM.TP SCANFREQ (LEPIU)
DEVHIALM.FL OPNTHR.SV PVLOALM.FL SLOTNUM
DEVHIALM.PR PIUOTDCF PVLOALM.PR SLOTTYPE
DEVHIALM.SV PIUSMOTH PVLOALM.SV STATE
DEVHIALM.TP PNTSTATE PVLOALM.TP SUBSLOTNUM
DEVLOALM.FL PVCHAR PVP
DEVLOALM.PR PVCLAMP (LEPIUAI) PVRAW
DEVLOALM.SV PVEUHI PVRNGOP
LLPIUAI
ALDLOPT DEVLOALM.TP PVEUHI PVRNGOP
ALFMT (Analog) DLYTIME PVEULO PVSOURCE
BOXNUM EUDESC PVFORMAT PVSRCOPT
BOXTYPE INPTCOND PVHIALM.FL PVSTS
CALIBOFF OPNTHR.FL PVHIALM.PR PVTEMP
DESC OPNTHR.PR PVHIALM.SV PVTV
DEVHIALM.FL OPNTHR.SV PVHIALM.TP SCANFREQ (LLPIU)
DEVHIALM.PR PIUOTDCF PVLOALM.FL SLOTNUM
DEVHIALM.SV PIUSMOTH PVLOALM.PR SLOTTYPE
DEVHIALM.TP PNTSTATE PVLOALM.SV STATE
DEVLOALM.FL PVALDB PVLOALM.TP SUBSLOTNUM
DEVLOALM.PR PVCHAR PVP
DEVLOALM.SV PVCLAMP (LLPIUAI) PVRAW
AMCAO
BOXNUM NORMMODE SLOTNUM
BOXTYPE NORMMODEATTR SLOTTYPE
CASREQ OUTIND SUBSLOTNUM
Chapter 1 - About This Document
DESC PNTSTATE TOGINTSL(1..8)
MODE RCASENB
MODEATTR REDTAG
MODEPERM SHEDMODE
DHPAO
BOXNUM NORMMODEATTR REDTAG
BOXTYPE OUTIND RNGCODE2
CASREQ PCADDRO1 SHEDMODE
DESC PCCONFO1 SLOTNUM
MODE PNTBOXOT SLOTTYPE
MODEATTR PNTPCTY SUBSLOTNUM
MODEPERM SLOTTYPE TOGINTSL(1..8)
NORMMODE
HLPIUAO
BOXNUM MODEPERM SHEDMODE
BOXTYPE NORMMODE SLOTNUM
CASREQ NORMMODEATTR SLOTTYPE
DESC PNTSTATE SUBSLOTNUM
MODE RCASENB TOGINTSL(1..8)
MODEATTR REDTAG
AMCDI
ALMOPT.PR HIALM.SV PVSOURCE
ALMOPT.SV HIALM.TYPE PVSTS
BOXNUM INPTDIR SLOTNUM
BOXTYPE INPTSLOTNUM SLOTTYPE
DESC INPTSLOTTYPE STATETEXT
DIGALFMT IPCRDOP SUBSLOTNUM
DLYTIME PNTSTATE
HIALM.PR PV (DI)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
DHPDI
ALMOPT.PR INPTDIR PV (DI)
ALMOPT.SV INPTSLOTNUM PVSOURCE
BOXNUM INPTSLOTTYPE PVSTS
BOXTYPE IPCRDOP SLOTNUM
DESC PCADDRI1 SLOTTYPE
DIGALFMT PCBITI1 STATETEXT
DLYTIME PCCONFI1 SUBSLOTNUM
HIALM.PR PNTBOXIN
HIALM.SV PNTPCTY
HIALM.TYPE PNTSTATE
HLPIUDI
ALMOPT.PR HIALM.SV PVSTS
ALMOPT.SV HIALM.TYPE SLOTNUM
BOXNUM INPTDIR SLOTTYPE
BOXTYPE INPTSLOTNUM STATETEXT
DESC INPTSLOTTYPE SUBSLOTNUM
DIGALARM IPCRDOP SUPPNRPT
DIGALFMT PNTSTATE
DLYTIME PV (DI)
HIALM.PR PVSOURCE
AMCDO
BOXNUM NORMMODEATTR REDTAG
BOXTYPE OPCRDOP SHEDMODE
CASREQ OUTIND SLOTNUM
MODE OUTPTSLOTNUM SLOTTYPE
MODEATTR OUTPTSLOTTYPE STATETEXT
MODEPERM PNTSTATE SUBSLOTNUM
MOOUTIND PULSEWTH TOGINTSL(1..8)
NORMMODE RCASENB
Chapter 1 - About This Document
DHPDO
BOXNUM NORMMODEATTR RCASENB
BOXTYPE OUTIND REDTAG
CASREQ OUTPTSLOTNUM SLOTNUM
DESC OUTPTSLOTTYPE SLOTTYPE
MODE PCADDRO1 STATETEXT
MODEATTR PCBITO1 SUBSLOTNUM
MODEPERM PCCONFO1 TOGINTSL(1..8)
MOOUTIND PNTBOXOT
NORMMODE PNTPCTY
HLPIUDO
BOXNUM OPCRDOP REDTAG
BOXTYPE OUTIND SHEDMODE
CASREQ OUTPTSLOTNUM SLOTNUM
DESC OUTPTSLOTTYPE SLOTTYPE
MOOUTIND PNTSTATE STATETEXT
NORMMODE PULSEWTH SUBSLOTNUM
NORMMODEATTR RCASENB TOGINTSL(1..8)
AMCDDI
ALMOPT.PR HIALM.SV PVSOURCE
ALMOPT.SV HIALM.TYPE STATETEXT
BOXNUM INPTDIR
BOXTYPE INPTSUBSLOTNUM1
DIGALFMT INPTSUBSLOTNUM2
DLYTIME INPTSUBSLOTNUM2
HIALM.PR NMBRINPT
DHPDDI
ALMOPT.PR HIALM.TYPE PCCONFI2
Chapter 1 - About This Document
ALMOPT.SV INPTDIR PNTBOXIN
BOXNUM INPTSUBSLOTNUM1 PNTPCTY
BOXTYPE INPTSUBSLOTNUM2 PVSOURCE
DESC IPCRDOP STATETEXT
DIGALFMT PCADDRI1 SUPPNRPT
DLYTIME PCBITI1
HIALM.PR PCBITI2
HIALM.SV PCCONFI1
HLPIUDDI
ALMOPT.PR DIGALFMT INPTSUBSLOTNUM1
ALMOPT.SV DLYTIME INPTSUBSLOTNUM2
BOXNUM HIALM.PR IPCRDOP
BOXTYPE HIALM.SV PVSOURCE
DESC HIALM.TYPE SUPPNRPT
DIGALARM INPTDIR
AMCDDO
BOXNUM NORMMODE SHEDMODE
BOXTYPE NORMMODEATTR STATETEXT
CASREQ OPCRDOP TOGINTSL(1..8)
DESC OUTIND
MODE OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM1
MODEATTR PNTSTATE
MODEPERM PULSEWTH
MOOUTIND RCASENB
NMBROUTPT REDTAG
DHPDDO
BOXNUM OPCRDOP PNTBOXOT
BOXTYPE OUTIND PNTPCTY
CASREQ OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM1 PNTSTATE
Chapter 1 - About This Document
DESC OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM2 RCASENB
MODE PCADDRO1 REDTAG
MODEATTR PCADDRO2 SHEDMODE
MODEPERM PCBITO1 STATETEXT
MOOUTIND PCBITO2 TOGINTSL(1..8)
NORMMODE PCCONFO1
NORMMODEATTR PCCONFO2
HLPIUDDO
BOXNUM NORMMODE RCASENB
BOXTYPE NORMMODEATTR REDTAG
CASREQ OPCRDOP SHEDMODE
DESC OUTIND STATETEXT
MODE OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM1 TOGINTSL(1..8)
MODEATTR OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM2
MODEPERM PNTSTATE
MOOUTIND PULSEWTH
AMCDC
ALMOPT.PR INPTSLOTTYPE OUTPTSLOTNUM
ALMOPT.SV INPTSUBSLOTNUM1 OUTPTSLOTTYPE
BOXNUM INPTSUBSLOTNUM2 OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM1
BOXTYPE IPCRDOP OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM2
CASREQ MODE PULSEWTH
DESC MODEATTR PVSOURCE
DIGALFMT MODEPERM RCASENB
DLYTIME MOOUTIND REDTAG
FBTIME MOOUTIND SHEDMODE
HIALM.PR NMBRINPT STATETEXT
HIALM.SV NORMMODE TOGINTSL(1..8)
HIALM.TYPE NORMMODEATTR
INPTDIR OPCRDOP
INPTSLOTNUM OUTIND
Chapter 1 - About This Document
DHPDC
ALMOPT.PR INPTSUBSLOTNUM1 OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM1 PNTPCTY
ALMOPT.SV INPTSUBSLOTNUM2 OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM2 PVSOURCE
BOXNUM IPCRDOP PCADDRI1 RCASENB
BOXTYPE MODE PCADDRO1 REDTAG
CASREQ MODEATTR PCADDRO2 SHEDMODE
DESC MODEPERM PCBITI1 STATETEXT
DIGALFMT MOOUTIND PCBITI2 SUPPNRPT
DLYTIME NMBRINPT PCBITO1 TOGINTSL(1..8)
FBTIME NMBROUTPT PCBITO2
HIALM.PR NORMMODE PCCONFI1
HIALM.SV NORMMODEATTR PCCONFI2
HIALM.TYPE OPCRDOP PCCONFO1
INPTDIR OUTIND PCCONFO2
INPTSLOTNUM OUTPTSLOTNUM PNTBOXIN
INPTSLOTTYPE OUTPTSLOTTYPE PNTBOXOT
HLPIUDC
ALMOPT.PR HIALM.SV MODEPERM OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM2
ALMOPT.SV HIALM.TYPE MOOUTIND PVSOURCE
BOXNUM INPTDIR NMBRINPT RCASENB
BOXTYPE INPTSLOTNUM NORMMODE REDTAG
CASREQ INPTSLOTTYPE NORMMODEATTR SHEDMODE
DESC INPTSUBSLOTNUM1 OPCRDOP STATETEXT
DIGALFMT INPTSUBSLOTNUM2 OUTIND SUPPNRPT
DLYTIME IPCRDOP OUTPTSLOTNUM TOGINTSL(1..8)
FBTIME MODE OUTPTSLOTTYPE
HIALM.PR MODEATTR OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM1
AMCCO
AV (AMCCO) PRESET
AVCONV PRESLOCK
Chapter 1 - About This Document
AVFORMAT PV
BOXNUM RESETCMD
BOXTYPE SLOTNUM
CNTLLOCK SLOTTYPE
DESC STATE
EUDESC STRTSTOP
PDEVTP SUBSLOTNUM
PNTSTATE
HLPIUCO
ALFMT (Analog) PNTSTATE
AV (DHPCO, HLPIUCO, HLPIUCC) PRESET
AVCONV PRESLOCK
BOXNUM RESETCMD
BOXTYPE SLOTNUM
DESC SLOTTYPE
EUDESC SUBSLOTNUM
IPCRDOP
HLPIUCC
AV (DHPCO, HLPIUCO, HLPIUCC) IPCRDOP
AVCONV PNTSTATE
BOXNUM SLOTNUM
BOXTYPE SLOTTYPE
DESC SUBSLOTNUM
EUDESC
Alarms
The Regulatory FB parameters related to alarming are summarized in the following table:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Function Parameter Name Description
Slot Configuration ALFMT Alarm Format
Current Alarm State of FB INALM In Alarm Indication
HIALM.PR Priority of Highest Alarm
HIALM.SV Severity of Highest Alarm
HIALM.TYPE Type of Highest Alarm
Bad PV Alarm (AMC) BADPVALM.FL Bad PV Alarm Flag
BADPVALM.PR Bad PV Alarm Priority
BADPVALM.SV Bad PV Alarm Severity
PV Low Alarm (CB, AMC) PVLOALM.FL PV Low Alarm Flag
PVLOALM.PR PV Low Alarm Priority
PVLOALM.SV PV Low Alarm Severity
PVLOALM.TP PV Low Alarm Trip Point
PV High Alarm (CB, AMC) PVHIALM.FL PV High Alarm Flag
PVHIALM.PR PV High Alarm Priority
PVHIALM.SV PV High Alarm Severity
PVHIALM.TP PV High Alarm Trip Point
Deviation Low Alarm (CB, AMC) DEVLOALM.FL Deviation Low Alarm Flag
DEVLOALM.PR Deviation Low Alarm Priority
DEVLOALM.SV Deviation Low Alarm Severity
DEVLOALM.TP Deviation Low Alarm Trip Point
Deviation High Alarm (CB, AMC) DEVHIALM.FL Deviation High Alarm Flag
DEVHIALM.PR Deviation High Alarm Priority
DEVHIALM.SV Deviation High Alarm Severity
DEVHIALM.TP Deviation High Alarm Trip Point
Unreasonable Alarm (CB, AMC) UNREASALM.FL Unreasonable Alarm Flag
UNREASALM.PR Unreasonable Alarm Priority
UNREASALM.SV Unreasonable Alarm Severity
Positive Rate of Change Alarm (AMC) ROCPOSALM.FL Positive Rate of Change Alarm Flag
ROCPOSALM.PR Positive Rate of Change Alarm Priority
ROCPOSALM.SV Positive Rate of Change Alarm Severity
ROCPOSALM.TP Positive Rate of Change Alarm Trip Point
Negative Rate of Change Alarm ROCNEGALM.FL Negative Rate of Change Alarm Flag
(AMC)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Function Parameter Name Description
ROCNEGALM.PR Negative Rate of Change Alarm Priority
ROCNEGALM.SV Negative Rate of Change Alarm Severity
ROCNEGALM.TP Negative Rate of Change Alarm Trip
Point
AMCREG
The following table lists the algorithms associated with AMCREG:
Algorithm
Autobias - Pid Auto Bias
Automan - Auto Manual
Autratio - Pid Auto Ratio
CBSumr - Summer
Das - Data Acquisition
Dividr - Divider
HiSel - Hi Selector
Leadlag
LoSel - Lo Selector
Mult - Multiplier
Multwman - Multiplier (with Manual)
Overhisl - Override Hi Selector
Overhisl - Override Hi Selector
Pidcm - Pid CM
Pidcma - Pid CMA
Pidersqg - Pid Error Squared on Gain
Pidersqi - Pid Error Squared on Integral
Pidgap - Pid Gap
Pidnorm - Pid Normal
Pidratio - Pid Ratio
Pidspc - Pid Setpoint Control
Sqrt - Square Root
Sumrwman - Summer (with Manual)
Switch
Chapter 1 - About This Document
REG
CBREG
The following table lists the algorithms associated with CBREG:
Algorithm
Autobias - Pid Auto Bias
Automan - Auto Manual
Autratio - Pid Auto Ratio
CBSumr - Summer
Das - Data Acquisition
Dividr - Divider
HiSel - Hi Selector
Leadlag
LoSel - Lo Selector
Mult - Multiplier
Multwman - Multiplier (with Manual)
Overhisl - Override Hi Selector
Overhisl - Override Hi Selector
Pidpl50 - PD + 50%
Pidpl50C - PD + 50% (CMA)
Pidcm - Pid CM
Pidcma - Pid CMA
Pidersqg - Pid Error Squared on Gain
Pidersqi - Pid Error Squared on Integral
Pidgap - Pid Gap
Pidnorm - Pid Normal
Pidratio - Pid Ratio
Pidspc - Pid Setpoint Control
Sqrt - Square Root
Sqrtprod - Double Square Root
Sumrwman - Summer (with Manual)
Sumsqrt - Sum of Square Roots
Switch
PIDPL50 and PIDPL50C are supported only in CB with firmware version 1C.
Autobias - Pid Auto Bias
Chapter 1 - About This Document
ALFMT (AMCREG) ITLOLM PVCHAR SLOTNUM
ALMDIS (AMCREG) K PVCLAMP SP
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODE PVEUHI SPHILM
BOXNUM MODEATTR PVEULO SPLOLM
CALIBOFF MODEPERM PVFORMAT SPSIGNAL
CTLACTN NORMMODE PVFORMAT SPSLTSRC
CTLEQN NORMMODEATTR PVSIGNAL (AMCREG) SPTOLERANCE
DESC OPHILM PVSLTSRC T1 (Lag Time Constant)
EUDESC OPLOLM PVSOURCE T2 (Derivative Time)
INITCONF OPTOLERANCE PVSRCOPT TD
INPTCOND OUTIND PVTRAKOPT
ITHILM PSTMODE RATIO
Automan - Auto Manual
ALFMT (AMCREG) NORMMODEATTR PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
ALMDIS (AMCREG) OPHILM PVSLTSRC
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) OPLOLM PVSOURCE
BOXNUM OPTOLERANCE PVSRCOPT
CALIBOFF OUTIND SLOTNUM
DESC PSTMODE TD
EUDESC PVCHAR
INPTCOND PVCLAMP
MODE PVEUHI
MODEATTR PVEULO
MODEPERM PVFORMAT
NORMMODE PVRNGOP
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Autratio - Pid Auto Ratio
ALFMT (AMCREG) ITLOLM PVCLAMP SPHILM
ALMDIS (AMCREG) K PVEUHI SPLOLM
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODE PVEULO SPSIGNAL
BOXNUM MODEATTR PVFORMAT SPSLTSRC
BIAS MODEPERM PVRNGOP SPTOLERANCE
CALIBOFF NORMMODE PVSIGNAL (AMCREG) T1 (Lag Time Constant)
CTLACTN NORMMODEATTR PVSLTSRC T2
CTLEQN OPHILM PVSOURCE TD
DESC OPLOLM PVSRCOPT
EUDESC OPTOLERANCE PVTRAKOPT
INITCONF OUTIND RATIO
INPTCOND PSTMODE SLOTNUM
ITHILM PVCHAR SP
Chapter 1 - About This Document
CBSumr - Summer
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODE PVEUHI SPSLTSRC
ALMDIS (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVEULO TD
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODEPERM PVFORMAT
BOXNUM NORMMODE PVRNGOP
CALIBOFF NORMMODEATTR PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
DESC OPHILM PVSLTSRC
EUDESC OPLOLM PVSOURCE
INITCONF OPTOLERANCE PVSRCOPT
INPTCOND OUTIND SLOTNUM
K PSTMODE SPHILM
K1 (AMCREG) PVCHAR SPLOLM
K2 (AMCREG) PVCLAMP SPSIGNAL
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Das - Data Acquisition
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODE PVCLAMP PVSRCOPT
ALMDIS (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVEUHI SLOTNUM
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODEPERM PVEULO SPSIGNAL
BOXNUM NORMMODE PVFORMAT SPSLTSRC
CALIBOFF NORMMODEATTR PVRNGOP TD
DESC OPTOLERANCE PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
EUDESC OUTIND PVSLTSRC
INPTCOND PVCHAR PVSOURCE
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Dividr - Divider
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODE PVCLAMP SPLOLM
ALMDIS (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVEUHI SPSIGNAL
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODEPERM PVEULO SPSLTSRC
BOXNUM NORMMODE PVFORMAT TD
BIAS NORMMODEATTR PVRNGOP
CALIBOFF OPHILM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
DESC OPLOLM PVSLTSRC
EUDESC OPTOLERANCE PVSOURCE
INITCONF OUTIND PVSRCOPT
INPTCOND PSTMODE SLOTNUM
K PVCHAR SPHILM
Chapter 1 - About This Document
HiSel - Hi Selector
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODEPERM PVEULO SPSIGNAL
ALMDIS (AMCREG) NORMMODE PVFORMAT SPSLTSRC
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) NORMMODEATTR PVRNGOP TD
BOXNUM OPHILM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
CALIBOFF OPLOLM PVSLTSRC
DESC OPTOLERANCE PVSOURCE
EUDESC OUTIND PVSRCOPT
INITCONF PSTMODE PVTRAKOPT
INPTCOND PVCHAR SLOTNUM
MODE PVCLAMP SPHILM
MODEATTR PVEUHI SPLOLM
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Leadlag
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVCLAMP T1 (Lag Time Constant)
ALMDIS (AMCREG) MODEPERM PVEUHI T2 (Lead Time Constant)
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) NORMMODE PVEULO TD
BOXNUM NORMMODEATTR PVFORMAT
CALIBOFF OPHILM PVFORMAT
DESC OPLOLM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
EUDESC OPTOLERANCE PVSLTSRC
INPTCOND OUTIND PVSOURCE
K PSTMODE PVSRCOPT
MODE PVCHAR SLOTNUM
Chapter 1 - About This Document
LoSel - Lo Selector
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODE PVCLAMP SLOTNUM
ALMDIS (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVEUHI SPHILM
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODEPERM PVEULO SPLOLM
BOXNUM NORMMODE PVFORMAT SPSIGNAL
BIAS NORMMODEATTR PVRNGOP SPSLTSRC
CALIBOFF OPHILM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG) TD
DESC OPLOLM PVSLTSRC
EUDESC OUTIND PVSOURCE
INITCONF PSTMODE PVSRCOPT
INPTCOND PVCHAR PVTRAKOPT
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Mult - Multiplier
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVEUHI SPSIGNAL
ALMDIS (AMCREG) MODEPERM PVEULO SPSLTSRC
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) NORMMODE PVFORMAT TD
BOXNUM NORMMODEATTR PVRNGOP
CALIBOFF OPHILM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
DESC OPLOLM PVSLTSRC
EUDESC OPTOLERANCE PVSOURCE
INITCONF OUTIND PVSRCOPT
INPTCOND PSTMODE SLOTNUM
K PVCHAR SPHILM
MODE PVCLAMP SPLOLM
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Multwman - Multiplier (with Manual)
ALFMT (AMCREG) K2 PSTMODE PVSRCOPT
ALMDIS (AMCREG) MODE PVCHAR SLOTNUM
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVCLAMP SPHILM
BOXNUM MODEPERM PVEUHI SPLOLM
CALIBOFF NORMMODE PVEULO SPSIGNAL
DESC NORMMODEATTR PVFORMAT SPSLTSRC
EUDESC OPHILM PVRNGOP TD
INITCONF OPLOLM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
INPTCOND OPTOLERANCE PVSLTSRC
K OUTIND PVSOURCE
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Overhisl - Override Hi Selector
ALMDIS (AMCREG) NORMMODEATTR SGNLTY12, SGNLTY34, SGNLTY56,
SGNLTY78
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) OPHILM SLOTNUM
BOXNUM OPLOLM TD
DESC OPTOLERANCE
EUDESC OUTIND
MODE PSTMODE
MODEATTR OVINSS1 - OVINSS8
MODEPERM OVINSS1 - OVINSS16
NORMMODE OVSGSS1 - OVSGSS16
Overlosl - Override Lo Selector
ALMDIS (AMCREG) NORMMODEATTR SGNLTY12, SGNLTY34, SGNLTY56,
SGNLTY78
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) OPHILM TD
BOXNUM OPLOLM
DESC
EUDESC OUTIND
MODE PSTMODE
MODEATTR OVINSS1 - OVINSS16
MODEPERM OVSGSS1 - OVSGSS16
NORMMODE SLOTNUM
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Pidcm - Pid CM
ALFMT (AMCREG) K PVCHAR SLOTNUM
ALMDIS (AMCREG) MODE PVCLAMP SPHILM
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVEUHI SPLOLM
BOXNUM MODEPERM PVEULO SPSIGNAL
CALIBOFF NORMMODE PVFORMAT SPSLTSRC
CTLACTN NORMMODEATTR PVRNGOP SPTOLERANCE
CTLEQN OPHILM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG) T1 (Integral Time)
DESC OPLOLM PVSLTSRC T2 (Derivative Time)
EUDESC OPTOLERANCE PVSOURCE
INPTCOND OUTIND PVSRCOPT
ITHILM PVTRAKOPT
ITLOLM PSTMODE RATIO
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Pidcma - Pid CMA
ALFMT (AMCREG) ITLOLM PSTMODE SLOTNUM
ALMDIS (AMCREG) K PVCHAR SP
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODE PVCLAMP SPHILM
BOXNUM MODEATTR PVEUHI SPLOLM
CALIBOFF MODEPERM PVEULO SPSIGNAL
CTLACTN NAME PVFORMAT SPSLTSRC
CTLEQN NORMMODE PVRNGOP SPTOLERANCE
DESC NORMMODEATTR PVSIGNAL (AMCREG) T1 (Integral Time)
EUDESC OPHILM PVSLTSRC T2 (Derivative Time)
INITCONF OPLOLM PVSOURCE TD
INPTCOND OPTOLERANCE PVSRCOPT
ITHILM OUTIND PVTRAKOPT
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Pidersqg - Pid Error Squared on Gain
ALFMT (AMCREG) ITLOLM PSTMODE SLOTNUM
ALMDIS (AMCREG) K PVCHAR SP
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODE PVCLAMP SPHILM
BOXNUM MODEATTR PVEUHI SPLOLM
CALIBOFF MODEPERM PVEULO SPSIGNAL
CTLACTN NAME PVFORMAT SPSLTSRC
CTLEQN NORMMODE PVRNGOP SPTOLERANCE
DESC NORMMODEATTR PVSIGNAL (AMCREG) T1 (Integral Time)
EUDESC OPHILM PVSLTSRC T2 (Derivative Time)
INITCONF OPLOLM PVSOURCE TD
INPTCOND OPTOLERANCE PVSRCOPT
ITHILM OUTIND PVTRAKOPT
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Pidersqi - Pid Error Squared on Integral
ALFMT (AMCREG) ITLOLM PSTMODE PVTRAKOPT
ALMDIS (AMCREG) K PVCHAR SLOTNUM
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODE PVCLAMP SP
BOXNUM MODEATTR PVEUHI SPHILM
CALIBOFF MODEPERM PVEULO SPLOLM
CTLACTN NAME PVFORMAT SPSIGNAL
CTLEQN NORMMODE PVRNGOP SPSLTSRC
DESC NORMMODEATTR PVSIGNAL (AMCREG) SPTOLERANCE
EUDESC OPHILM PVSLTSRC T1 (Integral Time)
INITCONF OPLOLM PVSOURCE T2 (Derivative Time)
INPTCOND OPTOLERANCE PVSRCOPT TD
ITHILM OUTIND
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Pidgap - Pid Gap
ALFMT (AMCREG) ITLOLM PSTMODE SLOTNUM
ALMDIS (AMCREG) K PVCHAR SP
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODE PVCLAMP SPSIGNAL
BOXNUM MODEATTR PVEUHI SPSLTSRC
CALIBOFF MODEPERM PVEULO T1 (Integral Time)
CTLACTN NAME PVFORMAT T2 (Derivative Time)
CTLEQN NORMMODE PVRNGOP TD
DESC NORMMODEATTR PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
EUDESC OPHILM PVSLTSRC
INITCONF OPLOLM PVSOURCE
INPTCOND OPTOLERANCE PVSRCOPT
ITHILM OUTIND PVTRAKOPT
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Pidnorm - Pid Normal
ALFMT (AMCREG) ITLOLM PVCHAR T1 (Integral Time)
ALMDIS (AMCREG) K PVCLAMP T2 (Derivative Time)
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODE PVFORMAT TD
BOXNUM MODEATTR PVRNGOP
CALIBOFF MODEPERM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
CTLACTN NAME PVSLTSRC
CTLEQN NORMMODE PVSOURCE
DESC NORMMODEATTR PVTRAKOPT
EUDESC OPHILM SLOTNUM
INITCONF OPLOLM SP
INPTCOND OUTIND SPSIGNAL
ITHILM PSTMODE SPSLTSRC
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Pidratio - Pid Ratio
ALFMT (AMCREG) ITHILM PSTMODE RATIO
ALMDIS (AMCREG) ITLOLM PVCHAR SLOTNUM
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) K PVCLAMP SP
BOXNUM MODE PVEUHI SPSIGNAL
BIAS MODEATTR PVEULO SPSLTSRC
CALIBOFF MODEPERM PVFORMAT T1 (Integral Time)
CTLACTN NAME PVRNGOP T2 (Derivative Time)
CTLEQN NORMMODE PVSIGNAL (AMCREG) TD
DESC NORMMODEATTR PVSLTSRC
EUDESC OPHILM PVSOURCE
INITCONF OPLOLM PVSRCOPT
INPTCOND OUTIND PVTRAKOPT
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Pidspc - Pid Setpoint Control
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODE PVCLAMP SPHILM
ALMDIS (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVEUHI SPLOLM
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODEPERM PVEULO SPSIGNAL
BOXNUM NAME PVFORMAT SPSLTSRC
CALIBOFF NORMMODE PVRNGOP SPTOLERANCE
CTLACTN NORMMODEATTR PVSIGNAL (AMCREG) T1 (Integral Time)
CTLEQN OPHILM PVSLTSRC T2 (Derivative Time)
DESC OPLOLM PVSOURCE TD
EUDESC OPTOLERANCE PVSRCOPT
INITCONF OUTIND PVTRAKOPT
INPTCOND PSTMODE SLOTNUM
K PVCHAR SP
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Pidpl50 - PD + 50%
ALFMT (AMCREG) NAME PVRNGOP
BOXNUM NORMMODE PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
CALIBOFF NORMMODEATTR PVSLTSRC
CTLACTN OPHILM PVSOURCE
CTLEQN OPLOLM PVSRCOPT
DESC OPTOLERANCE PVTRAKOPT
EUDESC OUTIND RATIO
INITCONF PSTMODE SLOTNUM
INPTCOND PVCHAR T2 (Derivative Time)
K PVCLAMP TD
MODE PVEUHI
MODEATTR PVEULO
MODEPERM PVFORMAT
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Pidpl50C - PD + 50% (CMA)
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVCLAMP SLOTNUM
BOXNUM MODEPERM PVEUHI SPSIGNAL
CALIBOFF NAME PVEULO SPSLTSRC
CTLACTN NORMMODE PVFORMAT T2 (Derivative Time)
CTLEQN NORMMODEATTR PVRNGOP TD
DESC OPHILM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
EUDESC OPLOLM PVSLTSRC
INITCONF OPTOLERANCE PVSOURCE
INPTCOND OUTIND PVSRCOPT
K PSTMODE PVTRAKOPT
MODE PVCHAR RATIO
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Sqrt - Square Root
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODE PVCLAMP SPSIGNAL
ALMDIS (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVEUHI SPSLTSRC
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVEULO TD
BOXNUM NAME PVFORMAT
CALIBOFF NORMMODE PVRNGOP
DESC NORMMODEATTR PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
EUDESC OPHILM PVSLTSRC
INITCONF OPLOLM PVSOURCE
INPTCOND OPTOLERANCE PVSRCOPT
K OUTIND SLOTNUM
K1 (AMCREG)K1 (CBREG) PSTMODE SPHILM
K2 (CBREG)K2 (AMCREG) PVCHAR SPLOLM
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Sqrtprod - Double Square Root
ALFMT (AMCREG) NAME PVFORMAT
BOXNUM NORMMODE PVRNGOP
CALIBOFF NORMMODEATTR PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
DESC OPHILM PVSLTSRC
EUDESC OPLOLM PVSOURCE
INITCONF OPTOLERANCE PVSRCOPT
INPTCOND OUTIND SLOTNUM
K PSTMODE SPSIGNAL
K2 (CBREG)K2 (AMCREG) PVCHAR SPSLTSRC
MODE PVCLAMP TD
MODEATTR PVEUHI
MODEPERM PVEULO
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Sumrwman - Summer (with Manual)
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODEATTR PVCHAR SLOTNUM
BOXNUM MODEPERM PVCLAMP SPSIGNAL
CALIBOFF NAME PVEUHI SPSLTSRC
DESC NORMMODE PVEULO TD
EUDESC NORMMODEATTR PVFORMAT
INITCONF OPHILM PVRNGOP
INPTCOND OPLOLM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
K OPTOLERANCE PVSLTSRC
K2 (CBREG)K2 (AMCREG) OUTIND PVSOURCE
MODE PSTMODE PVSRCOPT
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Sumsqrt - Sum of Square Roots
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODE PVCHAR SLOTNUM
BOXNUM MODEATTR PVCLAMP SPSIGNAL
CALIBOFF MODEPERM PVEUHI SPSLTSRC
DESC NAME PVEULO TD
EUDESC NORMMODE PVFORMAT
INITCONF NORMMODEATTR PVRNGOP
INPTCOND OPHILM PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
K OPLOLM PVSLTSRC
K1 (AMCREG)K1 (CBREG) OPTOLERANCE PVSOURCE
K2 (CBREG)K2 (AMCREG) OUTIND PVSRCOPT
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Switch
ALFMT (AMCREG) MODEPERM PVFORMAT SPSLTSRC
ALMDIS (AMCREG) NAME PVRNGOP SPTOLERANCE
ANLGCARD (AMCREG) NORMMODE PVSIGNAL (AMCREG) T1 (Integral Time)
BOXNUM NORMMODEATTR PVSLTSRC T2 (Derivative Time)
CALIBOFF OPHILM PVSOURCE TD
DESC OPLOLM PVSRCOPT
EUDESC PSTMODE SLOTNUM
INITCONF PVCHAR SP
INPTCOND PVCLAMP SPHILM
MODE PVEUHI SPLOLM
MODEATTR PVEULO SPSIGNAL
1.1.5 Parameter and Algorithm Definitions
Format
This section describes the format used to define the parameters listed in the forthcoming sections of this
publication.
Parameters
Each parameter definition in this manual contains a description of the parameter, the source of the
parameter, its default value, the access-lock level, the value type and value range as follows:
l Source—For the EHG data points, the source of the parameter can be either the User or the System.
l User—Parameter is defined during configuration and may or not may not be changed during system
operation, depending on the access lock.
l System—Parameter value is provided by the system and may or may not be changed, depending on
the access lock.
l Default Value—Value that is automatically assigned to the parameter by the system when the user
does not supply the value.
l Access Lock—Indicates who can “write” to a parameter to change the value of the parameter. Each
request to change the value of a parameter carries with it an access level that identifies the
requester. If a value is to be changed and the appropriate access level is not included in the access
lock, the system will reject the request for a value change.
The ExperionPKS system supports six access levels. Each parameter includes an Access Lock attribute
that defines the access level, a program or operator must have in order to change the value of a
parameter. The following table lists these access levels and the relationship between the access lock
and the access level.
The EHG provides the following access levels and access locks:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Access Level
Operator Supervisor Engineer Program
Operator X X X X
Supervisor X X X
Engineer X X
View Only
Application Developer only
Engineer/Application Developer X
Program X
Other Function Block X
Control
Engineer Only X
Parameters that cannot be read from ACE
The following table provides a list of EHG parameters that cannot be read from ACE:
AUXDESC ORDERINCM
BOXTYPE OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM2
DESC PARENTASSET
EENAME PRIMODNAME
EUDESC QUALSTATE
HOSTIPPRI SCANAREA
INPTSUBSLOTNUM2 SECMODNAME
IOMTYPE SECNAMESTRG
IPADDRESS SECTMPNAME
IPCRDOP SHEDMODE
KEYWORD STATETEXT
MODISREDUN USERSYMNAME
MULREDUNSTAT VERSION
OPCRDOP
1.2 Alphabetical Listing of Parameters
1.2.1 -A- 69
1.2.2 -B- 85
Chapter 1 - About This Document
1.2.3 -C- 94
1.2.4 -D- 102
1.2.5 -E- 111
1.2.6 -F- 114
1.2.7 -G- 116
1.2.8 -H- 117
1.2.9 -I- 124
1.2.10 -K- 133
1.2.11 -L- 136
1.2.12 -M- 137
1.2.13 -N- 142
1.2.14 -O- 147
1.2.15 -P- 156
1.2.16 -R- 198
1.2.17 -S- 211
1.2.18 -T- 231
1.2.19 -U- 237
1.2.20 -V- 240
1.2.21 -X- 240
1.2.22 -Y- 240
1.2.1 -A-
ACTSCANTIME
Applicable to DHP DFB
This parameter defines the actual scan time in seconds during which the DHP updates all the PC data
points in DHP database.
Data Type Float Range 0 - 25.5 secs
Default 0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters SCANTIME Checkpoint Yes
ADHI
This parameter is valid for CB and AMC only. It defines the A/D HI (100%) conversion value.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Real Range 0% - 100%
Default 100% Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters ADLO Checkpoint Yes
ADLO
This parameter is valid for CB and AMC only. It defines the A/D LO (0%) conversion value.
Data Type Real Range 0% - 100%
Default 0% Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters ADHI Checkpoint Yes
AINAME[x]
This parameter indicates the name of the EHG CBRVAI function block configured for each of the eight
slots in aCB box. The name is of the form <Control Module Name.fb name>.
Note: x is the index for the slot number.
Data Type BlockId Range N/A
Default Null String Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters REGNAME(1..8) Checkpoint No
ALDLOPT
Alarm Delay Option
FFB Applicability: (Applicable for CB and AMC Regulatory)
l AC faceplate of any analog input
l AI FFB of any analog input
This parameter, in conjunction with the DLYTIME parameter is intended to reduce the number of
unnecessary alarms reported by analog input points during periods when the process is unstable
(startup/shutdown/upsets/spikes).
The $ALDLOPT parameter can be used to implement an on-delay or an off-delay. The off-delay option
delays turning off alarms for the specified period by the DLYTIME parameter. It minimizes the effect of
an input value oscillating in and out of alarm. The on-delay option delays turning alarms on for the time
period specified by the DLYTIME parameter to suppress the reporting of transient alarms, or to
suppress alarms which are not important to the operator unless they stay in alarm for a minimum
amount of time.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
The time of reporting of the alarm/return-to-normal events, which underwent alarm delay, is the time
when the delay timer expired and not the actual time of occurrence of the event.
WARNING
Out-of-the-ordinary situations and configurations can cause peculiar results. Therefore, the
alarm delay option can be used in such a way that critical safety related alarms would not be
suppressed or delayed by the alarm delay option. The effect of alarm delay in different
scenarios should be understood before configuring any point with this option.
Data Type Enumeration Range NoDly (0)- Alarm is not filtered, each alarm or RTN event
is time stamped at the time of occurrence. OnDly (1) -
Multiple “going into alarms”are filtered after first
occurrence while occurring in DLYTIME timeframe. A
new alarm event is not generated and time stamped until
DLYTIME has elapsed. OffDly (2) - Multiple RTNs are
filtered after first occurrence while occurring in DLYTIME
timeframe. A new RTN event is not generated and time
stamped until DLYTIME has elapsed.
Default NoDly Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer / Residence EHG
Lock Application
Developer
Related DLYTIME Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
ALFMT (Analog)
Alarm Format (Analog Data Point)
This parameter defines the type of alarming (PV, deviation, and so on) to be used for an analog data
point. (The alarm trip point values for the selected alarm format are entered on the configuration form in
the lines that follow the ALFMT line.)
WARNING
For a point with aliases, modify the alarm format only when the point is not in alarm.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default Alfmt00 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH EHG (for CBRVAI)
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l For a CB RV data point:
o No Alarm = No alarms are to be detected by this data point.
o Alfmt00 = PV alarming (PVLOTP & PVHITP)
l For a DHP, HLPIU, LEPIU, LLPIU, or AMC analog data point:
o Alfmt00 (0) = PV alarming (PVLOTP & PVHITP)
o Alfmt01 (1) = Deviation alarming (DEVLOTP & DEVHITP)
This parameter defines the type of alarming (PV, deviation, and so on.) to be used for a CB regulatory
data point. (The alarm trip-point values for the selected alarm format are entered on the configuration
form in the lines that follow the ALFMT line.)
For a point with aliases, modify the alarm format only when the point is not in alarm.
WAR-
NING
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed below
Default Alfmt00 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
For a CB regulatory data point, the alarm formats depend on the selected algorithm as follows:
Algorithm Number Name Alarm Formats
Alfmt00 Alfmt01
00 Das X X
01 Pidnorm X X
02 Pidratio X X
03 Autratio X X
04 Autobias X X
05 Pidcma X X
06 Pidcm X X
07 Pidsp X X
10 Pidersqg X X
11 Pidersqi X X
12 Pidgap X
13 Pidpl50 X X
14 Pidpl50c X X
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Algorithm Number Name Alarm Formats
Alfmt00 Alfmt01
20 Leadlag X (NOTE)
23 Sumrwman X
24 Multwman X
25 Automan X
26 Switch X
30 Cbsumr X
31 Mult X
32 Dividr X
33 Sqrt X
34 Sqrtprod X
35 Sumsqrt X
36 Hisel X
37 Losel X
Alfmt00 = PV alarming (PVLOTP & PVHITP)
Alfmt01 = Deviation alarming (DEVLOTP & DEVHITP)
Algorithms 20-37 do not require a selection of an alarm format because only PV alarming (PVLOTP and
PVHITP) is applicable to these algorithms.
ALFMT (AMCREG)
Alarm Format (AMC Regulatory Data Point)
This parameter defines the type of alarming (PV, deviation, and so on) to be used for an AMC regulatory
data point. (The alarm trip-point values for the selected alarm format are entered on the configuration
form in the lines that follow the ALFMT line.)
WARNING
For a point with aliases, modify the alarm format only when the point is not in alarm.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default Alfmt00 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
For an AMC regulatory data point, the alarm formats depend on the selected algorithm as follows:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Algorithm Number Name Alarm Formats
Alfmt00 Alfmt01 Alfmt02
00 Das X X X
01 Pidnorm X X X
02 Pidratio X X X
03 Autratio X X X
04 Autobias X X X
05 Pidcma X X X
06 Pidcm X X X
07 Pidsp X X X
10 Pidersqg X X X
11 Pidersqi X X X
12 Pidgap X X X
20 Leadlag X X
23 Sumrwman X X
24 Multwman X X
25 Automan X X
26 Switch X X
30 Cbsumr X X
31 Mult X X
32 Dividr X X
33 Sqrt X X
36 Hisel X X
37 Losel X X
A1fmt00 = PV alarming (PVLOTP & PVHITP)
A1fmt01 = Deviation alarming (DEVLOTP & DEVHITP)
A1fmt02 = PV rate of change negative and positive alarming (PVROCNTP & PVPOCPTP)
ALGIDDAC (CBREG)
Algorithm (CB Regulatory Data Point)
This parameter defines the algorithm to be used for a CB regulatory data point. The parameters
applicable to each algorithm are contained in separate listings, and can be found by looking for the
name of the algorithm in this publication.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed below
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Default Das Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence DH
Related Parameters PNTBOXTY Checkpoint No
Range:
Das = Data Acquisition, Algo. 00
Pidnorm = PID Normal, Algo. 01
Pidratio = PID Ratio, Algo. 02
Autratio = PID Auto Ratio, Algo. 03
Autobias = PID Auto Bias, Algo. 04
Pidcma = PID CMA, Algo. 05
Pidcm = PID CMA, Algo. 06
Pidspc = PID SPC, Algo. 07
Pidersqg = PID Error Squared on Gain, Algo. 10
Pidersqi = PID Error Squared on Integral, Algo. 11
Pidgap = PID Gap, Algo. 12
Pdpl50 = PD + 50%, Algo. 13 (See note)
Pdpl50C = PD + 50% (CMA), Algo. 14 (See note)
Leadlag = Lead Lag, Algo. 20
Overhisl = Override Hi Selector, Algo. 21
Overlosl = Override Lo Selector, Algo. 22
Sumrwman = Summer (with Manual), Algo. 23
Multwman = Multiplier (with Manual), Algo.24
Automan = Auto-Manual, Algo. 25
Switch = Switch, Algo. 26
Cbsumr = Summer, Algo. 30
Mult = Multiplier, Algo. 31
Dividr = Divider, Algo. 32
Sqrt = Square Root, Algo. 33
Sqrtprod = Double Square Root, Algo. 34
Sumsqrt = Sum of Square Roots, Algo. 35
Hisel = Hi Selector, Algo. 36
Losel = Lo Selector, Algo. 37
The Pdpl50 and Pdpl50c algorithms are applicable only if revision of CB is 1C.
ALGIDDAC (AMCREG)
Algorithm (AMC Regulatory Data Point)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter defines the algorithm to be used for an AMC regulatory data point. The parameters that
are applicable to each algorithm are contained in separate listings, and can be found by looking for the
name of the algorithm in this publication.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed below.
Default Das Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence DH
Related Parameters PNTBOXTY Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Das = Data Acquisition, Algo. 00
Pidnorm = PID Normal, Algo. 01
Pidratio = PID Ratio, Algo. 02
Autratio = PID Auto Ratio, Algo. 03
Autobias = PID Auto Bias, Algo. 04
Pidcma = PID CMA, Algo. 05
Pidcm = PID CMA, Algo. 06
Pidspc = PID SPC, Algo. 07
Pidersqg = PID Error Squared on Gain, Algo. 10
Pidersqi = PID Error Squared on Integral, Algo. 11
Pidgap = PID Gap, Algo. 12
Leadlag = Lead Lag, Algo. 20
Overhisl = Override Hi Selector, Algo. 21
Overlosl = Override Lo Selector, Algo. 22
Sumrwman = Summer (with Manual), Algo. 23
Multwman = Multiplier (with Manual), Algo.24
Automan = Auto-Manual, Algo. 25
Switch = Switch, Algo. 26
Cbsumr = Summer, Algo. 30
Mult = Multiplier, Algo. 31
Dividr = Divider, Algo. 32
Sqrt = Square Root, Algo. 33
Hisel = Hi Selector, Algo. 36
Losel = Lo Selector, Algo. 37
This parameter's value is stored in the EHG and the box. If MASTER contains EHG, the EHG detects
any changes made to the value in the box from some other source updates its value to match that of the
box.
ALMDIS (AMCREG)
Alarm Output (AMC Regulatory)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter selects the alarm output option that determines whether digital outputs SOA and SOB for
control slots 1-8 is driven by CL/AMC and logic blocks, or by the alarms in control slots 1-8.
Data Type Enumeration Range Disable - allows CL/AMC and logic blocks to drive digital
outputs SOA and SOB Enable - allows alarms in control
slot 1-8 to drive digital outputs SOA and SOB
Default Disable Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer Residence DH
Lock
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
ALMENBSTATE
Alarm Enable State
This parameter defines the alarm reporting function that is to be used when an alarm condition is
detected by a function block or one of its components. When enabled, Device FB system diagnostic
alarms are reported to ASD. When disabled, alarm flags are set within the EHG FB but alarms are not
reported. When ALMENBSTATE transitions from OFF to ON, all existing alarms are regenerated.
Data Type Boolean Range Off, On
Default On Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Operator Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
ALMOPT.PR
FFB Applicability:
l Applicable for all DI / DDI and DC FFBs
This parameter defines the alarm priority.
Data Type Enumeration Range None, Journal, Low, High, Urgent
Default Low Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
ALMOPT.SV
FFB Applicability:
l Applicable for all DI / DDI and DC FFBs
This parameter defines the alarm severity.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range 0-15
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
ANLGCARD (AMCREG)
Analog Output Card Option - defines whether the output of this slot is connected to an analog output
card. SLOTNUM must be greater than eight for this parameter to apply.
Data Type Enumeration Range Notsel - analog output card is not used Sel -
analog output card is used
Default Notsel Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Residence DH
Developer
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
A Sel entry is valid for control slots 9-16 if an analog output card is present in the following point card
file locations:
l Point card file slot 1, subslots 1-4 for control slots 9-12
l Point card file slot 2, subslots 1-4 for control slots 13-16
ARWNET[1]
Anti-Reset Windup Status on set point - provides the windup status of the set point for this block.
Data Type Enumeration Range Normal = The set point is not wound-up. Hi = The set
point is wound-up high. Lo = The set point is wound-up
low. Hilo= Set point is being initialized or changing the
set point value does not affect downstream data points.
Default Normal Configuration No
Load
Access View Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related ARWOP Checkpoint No
Parameters
ARWOP
Anti-Reset Windup Status on Output
This parameter provides the windup status of the output for this block.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range Normal = The output is not wound-up. Hi = The output is
wound-up high. Lo= The output is wound-up low. Hilo=
Output is being initialized or changing the set point value
does not affect downstream data points.
Default Normal Configuration No
Load
Access View Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related ARWNET[1] Checkpoint No
Parameters
AUXDESC(N)
Auxiliary Descriptor
This is a system parameter not visible to users. It is a string array parameter used for declaration of text
strings, which are displayed along with notification reports. Its value is fixed at system initialization time.
Thereafter, it is read but never written. The particular set of values assigned depends on the type of
system diagnostic alarms to be supported.
Data Type String Range Variable index range based on string messages required for
notification set of particular block type.
Default Configuration
Load
Access Lock Read Residence SR
Only
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
AV (DHPCO, HLPIUCO, HLPIUCC)
Accumulator Value
FFB Applicability:
l CO FFB of a DHP counter or HLPIU normal counter
l CC FFB of HLPIU expanded counter
This parameter is the current accumulated value of the specified counter.
Data Type Real Range HLPIU 32-bit counters: 0 to 999999 HLPIU 16-bit
counters and DHP counters: 0 to 65535*AVCONV
Default 0.0 Configuration No
Load
Access Operator Residence Data Hiway
Lock
Related AVCONV on DHP Checkpoint No
Parameters & HLPIU Counter
Chapter 1 - About This Document
AV (AMCCO)
Accumulator Value
CO FFB of AMC counter
This parameter is the total accumulated counts of the specified counter
Data Type Real Range See the list detailed below
Default 0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range depends on AVFORMAT value as follows:
AVFORMAT AV Value
00 Accumulated value
01 (Accumulated Value)/10
02 (Accumulated Value)/100
03 (Accumulated Value)/1000
AVCONFIG
Accumulation Configuration
AI FFB of AMC analog having accumulation
This parameter defines the time base, scaling, and maximum time during which the PV value is to be
accumulated, as related to the PV decimal format (PVFORMAT).
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed below
Default 1 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related Parameters AV, AVCUTOFF Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Entry Time Base Scaling (S) Max. Time
1 Hour 2 1 Hour
2 Hour 1 10 Hours
3 Hour 0 36 Hours
4 Minutes 1 10 Minutes
5 Minutes 0 100 Minutes
6 Minutes -1 1000 Minutes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Constraint: Values are to be selected such that DA = D + S where:
DA = Accumulator Decimal Point Value 0 through 5 (see AVFORMAT).
D = PV Decimal Point Value 0 through 3 (see PVFORMAT).
S = Scaling Value where S is not less than -1 or greater than 2.
AVCONV - Scale Factor
FFB Applicability:
l CO FFB of DHP, and HLPIU normal counter
This parameter defines the scale factor that determines the total number of counts in the AV. For
example, if AVCONV=0.01 and PV=100 pulses, the AV is incremented by one count.
Data Type Real Range 0.0, and 0.00006 to 1.0
Default 1.0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Residence DH EHG resident parameter for
Developer HLPIU
Related AV on DHP & HLPIU Checkpoint No
Parameters Counters
AVCONV
Scale Factor
FFB Applicability:
l CO FFB of AMC counter
l CC FFB of HLPIU
This parameter defines the scale factor that represents the number of pulses required to increment the
counter by one count.
Data Type Real Range See the list detailed
below
Default 1.0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Residence DH
Developer
Related AV on AMC Counters Checkpoint No
Parameters
Range: Value depends on AVFORMAT value as follows:
AVFORMAT AV Value
00 Accumulated value
01 (Accumulated Value)/10
Chapter 1 - About This Document
AVFORMAT AV Value
02 (Accumulated Value)/100
03 (Accumulated Value)/1000
For HLPIU CC block, AV is accumulated pulses. AVCONV for HLPIU CC is always zero. PV is the delta
value and the delta time is 10 seconds. Therefore, PV is number of pulses in 10 seconds. Delta time is
FIXED and cannot be configured. Therefore, the delta count required for any other delta time must be
calculated in ACE.
AVCUTOFF
Accumulation Cutoff
FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of AMC analog having accumulation.
This parameter defines the low cutoff value for accumulation.
Data Type Enumeration Range Cutoff0 (0) = when the non-filtered current value is >
0%, accumulate it. Cutoff1 (1) = when the non-filtered
current value is > 10%, accumulate it.
Default Cutoff0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer / Residence DH
Lock Application
Developer
Related AV, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters AVCONFIG
AVGNTFACCRATE
Average Notification Rate (GEE FB)trip point:
This parameter specifies the alarm trip for average notification rate). Once average notification rate
exceeds this value; system alarm for EHGFB will be generated and the INALM flag will SET.
Data Type Integer Range 0-10
Default 3 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
AVEUHI
Accumulator Range Hi End
FFB Applicability:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l AI FFB of AMC analog having accumulation
This parameter indicates the predefined high end of the accumulator range.
Data Type Real Range Predefined high end of accumulator range; AVEUHI
= 999999.0
Default NA Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock View Residence EHG
Only
Related AV, AVP Checkpoint No
Parameters
AVEULO
Accumulator Range Lo End
l FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of AMC analog having accumulation
This parameter indicates the predefined low end of the accumulator range.
Data Type Real Range Predefined high end of accumulator range;
AVEULO = 0.0
Default NA Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock View Residence EHG
Only
Related AV, AVP Checkpoint No
Parameters
AVFORMAT
Accumulator Decimal Point Position
FFB Applicability:
l All CO
l AI FFB of AMC analog having accumulation
This parameter defines the position where the decimal point is to be displayed in the accumulated value
(AV).
Data Type Enumeration Range D0 (0) = XXXXXX D1 (1) =
XXXXX.X D2 (2) = XXXX.XX D3 (3)
= XXX.XXX D4 (4) = XX.XXXX D5
(5) = X.XXXXX
Default NA Configuration Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Load
Access For AMC Analog Input Data Point: Residence DH EHG (for DHP and HLPIU)
Lock Read Only For HLPIU, DHP, and
AMC Counter Data Points: Engr
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
Counter Data points have formats D0-D3.
AVOPTION
Accumulation Option
FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of AMC analog having accumulation.
This parameter selects the accumulation option.
Data Type Enumeration Range Disabled (0) = Data point does not accumulate the PV
value. Enabled (1) = Data point is to accumulate the PV
value.
Default Disable Configuration Yes
Load
Access Application Residence DH
Lock Developer
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
AVP
Accumulator Value As Percent
FFB Applicability:
l DHPCO FFBs
l AMC AI FFBs
This parameter is the percentage equivalent total accumulated counts of the specified counter based on
the full range of counts.
Data Type Real Range 6.86% to 106.86%
Default 0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
1.2.2 -B-
BADPVALM.FL
FFB applicability -
l Applicable to AMC Regulatory, AI, and AC FFBs only
This parameter indicates whether the Bad PV Alarm is currently active for the block.
Data Type Boolean Range Off, On
Default Off Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters BADPVALM.PR, BADPVALM.SV Checkpoint No
BADPVALM.PR
FFB applicability -
l Applicable to AMC Regulatory, AI, and AC FFBs only
l Bad PV Alarm Priority- defines the priority for the Bad PV Alarm.
Data Type Enumeration Range None (0) Journal (1) Low (2) High (3)
Urgent (4)
Default Low Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related BADPVALM.SV, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters BADPVALM.FL
BADPVALM.SV
Applicable to AMC Regulatory, AI and AC FFBs only
The Bad PV Alarm Severity parameter defines the severity for the Bad PV Alarm.
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 15
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters BADPVALM.PR, BADPVALM.FL Checkpoint Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
BIAS
This parameter defines the bias value that is added to the setpoint (Y) input value when Mode is Cas.
Data Type Real Range -99.99% to 99.99%
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock OPER Residence DH
Related Parameters SP Checkpoint Yes
Mode attributes and the control interlocks determine whether and by whom the value in this parameter
can be updated.
BOXCOMMAND
This parameter is used to issue a command to a device to force it to a specific state.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list in the following.
Default None Configuration Load No
Access Lock ENGINEER Residence EHG
Related Parameters BOXSTAT Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l None (0) (Applicable to all Hiway boxes)
l Start (1) (Applicable to all Hiway boxes)
l Idle (2) (Applicable to AMC only)
l EnableProc (3) (Applicable to AMC and XXPIU)
l Ack (4) (Applicable to XXPIU, DHP)
l RDB(5) (Applicable for DHP)
BOXCRDST[x]
Box Card Status (AMC)
This parameter indicates the status of an I/O card in the specified hiway box. Note that “x” is the index
for Slot Number.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l Running (0) = Card is operational (OK).
l Fail (1) = Card has failed, as detected by the process box.
l Uncertn (2) = Hiway security tests have not yet been performed to determine card status during
startup of the hiway box. After the hiway security tests have been performed, each card will be in
one of the following two states.
BOXDIAGDESC
Box Diagnostic Descriptor
This parameter displays the diagnostic details of the Hiway box.
Data Type Array of 10 strings Range 0 to 10 strings
Default Null String Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
BOXERRCNTALL(I,J)
Box Error Count All (DHEB EHG FB)
This is a statistics parameter, which gives total count of all types of communication errors, experienced
by the DHEB for each box on the Hiway. The box address is indicated by the first index. The time span
over which the count has been kept is indicated by the second index.
Possible values of the first index [I] and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
l 0: Address 0 is illegal on the hiway. This array element always returns zero.
l 1 - 4: Addresses 1 - 4 are reserved for Preferred Access Devices (PADs). Since DHEB does not
communicate with PADs, these array elements always return zero.
l 5 - 63: DHEB may communicate with any boxes in this range. These array elements return
substantive error counts.
Possible values of the second index [J] and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
l 0. Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of
the EHG FB.
l 1. Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
l 2. Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the
next hour.
BOXERRCNTALL() is derived from the BoxErr[], BoxErrCurHr[] and BoxErrHour[] fields of the DHEB's
DHEB status structure.
Data Type Long Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 0 to 63 Second
Integer Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
BOXFSTAT
This parameter indicates the functional State of the Hiway Box. It indicates whether Displays and
Supervisory Controllers can read and/or write to the box.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed in the following:
Default Basic Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range:
Read (0) = Supervisory controllers can read data from this box, but cannot write data to this box.
Full (1) = Supervisory controllers can read data from this box, and can write data to this box.
Basic (2) = Supervisory controllers can neither read data from this box nor write data to this box.
Not applicable (3)
Uncertain (4)
With Operator access level, you can promote the value of BOXFSTAT from Basic to Read or Full.
However, Supervisor or higher access levels is required to demote the value of BOXFSTAT.
BOXNUM
This parameter defines the physical address of the Hiway Box in which the block resides. In the case of
the EHG FB, it indicates the Primary DHEB address. DH address is set by DIPswitch at the DHEB.
For the boxes with an option of Box Size Regular and Box Size Extended, the range gets restricted to 5-
31. The extended portion automatically takes up the addresses 32 - 63.
Data Type Integer Range 1 to 63*
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related Parameters PNTBOXTY, SLOTNUM Checkpoint No
*BOXNUM 1-4 is not applicable for polling devices (like PIU, DHP) and is applicable only for PAD/EHG
BOXNUM.
BOXNUM_SEC
This parameter indicates the Secondary DHEB address. DH address is set by DIPswitch at the DHEB.
Data Type Integer Range 1 to 63*
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related Parameters BOXNUM Checkpoint No
*BOXNUM 1-4 is not applicable for polling devices (like PIU, DHP) and is applicable only for PAD/EHG
BOXNUM.
BOXPROT
Box Protocol
The parameter defines the type of protocol (message format) to be used by the programmable
controllers connected to this DHP.
Data Type Enumeration Range Notconfg (0) = Protocol is not configured. Allenbrd (1) =
of BOXPROT Allen-Bradley Modicon (2) = Modicon Honywell (3) =
Honeywell/ISSC
Default Allenbrd Configuration Yes
Load
Access Application Residence Data Hiway
Lock Developer
Only.
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
BOXRCDAD
RCD Box Number
This parameter defines the address of the Reserve Controller Director (RCD) on the Data Hiway.
Data Type Integer Range 0-63
Default 0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
BOXRTRCNTALL(I, J)
Box Retry Count All (DHEB EHG FB)
This is a statistics parameter which gives total count of retries for all types of communications errors
experienced by the DHEB for each box on the Hiway. The box address is indicated by the first index.
The time span over which the count has been kept is indicated by the second index.
Possible values of the first index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l 0: Address 0 is illegal on the hiway. This array element always returns zero.
l 1 - 4: Addresses 1 - 4 are reserved for Preferred Access Devices (PADs). Since DHEB does not
communicate with PADs, these array elements always return zero.
l 5 - 63: DHEB may communicate with any boxes in this range. These array elements return
substantive error counts.
Possible values of the second index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of the EHG
FB.
Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the next
hour.
BOXRTRCNTALL() is derived from the Retry Errors [], RetryErrCurHr[] and RetryErrHr[] fields of the
DHEB's DHEBBoxErrors structure.
Data Type Long Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 0 to 63 Second
Integer Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
BOXSIZE
This parameter indicates the size of the DHP or PIU.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default Regular Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l For the DHP:
o Regular (0) = 15 slots (slots 1-15)
o Extended (1) = 30 slots (slots 1-15 & 17-31)
l For the HLPIU, LEPIU, and LLPIU:
o Regular (0) = 16 slots (slots 1-16)
o Extended (1) = 32 slots (slots 1-32)
BOXSLTSTATUS
This parameter displays the status of all slots of DHP box.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type ENUMERATION Range UNCERTAIN, Running, FAILED
Default Uncertain Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
BOXSTART
Box Startup
This parameter defines the state the box during startup.
Data Type Enumeration Range Cold = DHP does not enter its normal operating state
of after startup; it remains in a reset state. Hot = DHP enters
BOXSTART its normal processing after startup.
Default Cold Configuration Yes
Load
Access Application Residence Data Hiway
Lock Developer
Only.
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
BOXSTAT
This parameter defines the status of the particular hiway box.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list in the following.
Default UNCERTAIN Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l Uncertain (0) =Box status has not yet been determined by the hiway security tests during box
startup.
l Run (1) =Box is OK and is in the processing state.
l Runsoftfail (2) = A soft failure such as A/D drift has been detected during normal operation; box is
still OK
l Runpartfail (3) = A failure has been detected in a card during normal operation; box is still OK
l Idle (4) = Box is in idle state
l Idleprtfail (5) = A partial failure has been detected while the box is in the idle state
l Idlesftfail (6) =A soft failure has been detected while the box is in the idle state
l Failhdw (7) = Hiway address error or continued communication error has been detected.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l Failcom (8) = Communication failure has been detected on the hiway; box is not responding.
l Reset (9) = Box is in reset state
l Runspf (10) = This condition indicates that the box is operational but with reduced functionality.
Both Soft and part failure has been detected during normal operation.
l Idlespf (11) = This condition indicates that both Soft and part failure has been detected while box is
in IDLE state.
l OK (12)
l BAD (13)
BOXTOG1, BOXTOG2
These parameters allow the user to define two time-out intervals (in seconds), either of which can be
used as the time-out interval for a particular slot in this box as specified by the TOGINTSL (Slot TOG
Interval) parameter. The time-out interval is the length of time between two successive transmissions
from a supervisory controller to a particular slot in this hiway box. If the time-out interval is exceeded, the
slot sheds from the cascade mode to the shed mode.
If you do not want this slot to shed, enter a 0 for this parameter.
Data Type Integer Range 0..9999 seconds
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock EngineerAppDev Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters TOGINTSL Checkpoint Yes
BOXTYPE
Hiway Box Type
The type is not configured by the user but is implied when the user selects a Device Function Block from
the Control Builder library and creates an instance.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed in the
following:
Default CB Device FB = CB, AMC Device FB = Configuration No
AMC,and so on. Load
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
Range:
l CB (0) = Basic Controller
l AMC (1) = Advanced Multifunction Controller
l LLPIU (2) = Low-Level Process Interface Unit
l HLPIU (3) = High-Level Process Interface Unit
l DHP (4) = Data Hiway Port/IPCD 620 Hiway Interface Module
l CBRCD (5) =Basic Controller Reserve Controller Director
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l AMCRCD (6) = Advanced Multifunction Controller Reserve Controller Director
l AMCRCD (6) =Multifunction Controller Reserve Controller Director
l LEPIU (7) = Low-Energy Process Interface Unit
l DHN (8) = Data Hiway Navigator
l UNKNOWN (9)
l DHN (8) = Data Hiway Navigator *
l UNKNOWN (9)
*DHN is associated with EHG FB and cannot be instantiated separately from the Control Builder library.
BOXUAC
Uninterrupted Automatic Control State
This parameter defines the state of a box in relationship to its Reserve Controller Director (RCD).
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default None Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l None (0) = this controller is not being backed up and testing is not being performed.
l Save (1) = indicates the controller is being backed up because it has failed.
l Test (2) = indicates the controller is being backed up during a test.
l Disabled (3)
l Locdisabled (4)
l Diagdisabled (5)
l Softsave (6) = indicates the controller is being backed up because of a soft failure.
Softsave and Tested can be overridden by a failure of a controller.
BOXVDB
Box Variable Alarm Deadband
This parameter defines whether an LLPIU or DHP box will use the Variable Alarm Deadband option.
Variable Alarm Deadband allows the setting of a variable deadband value in percent of engineering
units for analog input points instead of using the default setting of 1% of engineering unit range.
The variable deadband value may be entered in the PVALDB parameter. This option requires special
variable deadband firmware to be installed in the LLPIU (part#38120017) and/or DHP
(part#38120019).
Data Type Boolean Range See the list detailed below
Default Off Configuration Load No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Engineer Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Off = Variable alarm deadband processing is turned off. PVALDB will be initialized to 1% when special
deadband firmware is present on a box load and BOXVDB is OFF.
On = Variable alarm deadband processing is turned on. It indicates that variable deadband values in
PVALDB are allowed. It is necessary to have BOXDVB set to “ON” before a box load if PVALDB values
are NOT to be initialized. BOXSIZE is required to be EXTENDED and the special variable deadband
firmware must be present before BOXVDB can be set ON.
1.2.3 -C-
CALIBOFF
Calibration Offset
FFB Applicability: (Applicable to CB and AMC Regulatory)
l AC FFB of any box type's analog input
l AI FFB of all analog inputs
This parameter allows the user to specify a positive or negative offset value (in engineering units) to
adjust the value of the PV input received from the field, thereby eliminating minor variations that may
exist between the same types of field devices.
Data Type Real Range -9999.0 to 9999.0
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Calibration Offset adjusts the PV value used for alarming, if the PVSOURCE is MAN/SUB. For CBRVAI
CALIBOFF, the offset is adjusted irrespective of the PVSOURCE.
CASREQ
Remote Cascade Mode Request Flag
This parameter indicates that the remote cascade mode for has been requested for a block. The
remote-cascade mode exists when MODE contains Cas and RCASENB contains “On.” When a request
to change MODE to Cas is received from an Operator station or a program, MODE does not
immediately change to Cas. Instead, CASREQ contains Request and “-C” appears to the right of the
mode indicator on the operator displays. Then when continuous control in the Experion PKS -AM
determines that CASREQ contains Request, it requests MODE to go to Cas, and changes CASREQ to
Notreq.
Should the block shed while it is in the remote-cascade mode, MODE goes to the state defined in
SHEDMODE, and CASREQ goes back to “Request.”
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed below
Default Notreq Configuration Load No
Access Lock Program Residence EHG
Related Parameters MODE, RCASENB Checkpoint No
Range:
Notreq = Remote cascade mode request flag is not set (operator has not requested cascade mode or
RCASENB is false).
Request = Remote cascade mode request flag is set (operator has requested cascade mode and
RCASENB is true).
CASREQ can be updated only when RCASENB contains “On.”
CASREQS
Remote Cascade Mode Request Source
This parameter indicates whether the cascade mode request flag has been set by the operator, or by
the fact that the block is shedding from the cascade mode to the shed mode.
Data Type Enumeration Range MMI - cascade mode has been requested by the
operator Shed - block has shed from the cascade
mode
Default N/A Configuration No
Load
Access View Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related MODE, Checkpoint No
Parameters RCASENB,
CASREQ
CBREVISION
Basic Controller Revision Number
This parameter defines the revision level of the specified CB box.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default RevUnknown Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence CB
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l Cb1a (0) = CB revision level is 1A.
l Cb1c (1) = CB revision level is 1C.
l Cb1d (2) =CB revision level is 1D.
l UNKNOWN (3) =Revision level has not been determined because hiway security tests have not yet
been performed during box startup.
l Cb1e (4) = CB revision level is 1E.
CEECOMMAND
GEE Command (EHG FB, GEE FB)
This parameter allows the user to issue commands to the GEE. Storing NONE to CEECOMMAND has
no effect. The access levels for this parameter depend on the commands issued.
Data Type Enumeration Range IDLE (0), RUN (1), NONE (2)
COLDSTART (3), WARMSTART (4)
Default None Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Operator->Idle to Run Residence EHG
Engineer->Run to Idle
Related CEESTATE Checkpoint No
Parameters
CEESTATE
(EHG FB, GEE FB, CM, Device FBs)
This parameter provides information about the operational state of the GEE.
Data Type Enumeration Range Idle (0), Run (1), Fail (2) NotLoaded
(3)
Default Idle Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related CEECOMMAND Checkpoint No
Parameters
CHKPTSVSTS
Data Type Enumeration Range OK (0), NOTOK (1)
Default Configuration Load
Access Lock Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint
Chapter 1 - About This Document
CHNGDTFREQ
Change Detection Frequency
This parameter indicates frequency at which EHG fetches changes made from other PADs to a box. This
parameter is enabled for all hiway boxes when there is more than one MASTER for the box. For AMC,
this parameter is always enabled. Zero value indicates that EHG need not look for changes from other
PADs. This value is used if there are no other PADs that are used to store hiway data.
Data Type Enumeration Range 15 (15), 30 (30), 45 (45), 60 (60), 90 (90), 120
(120), 180 (180), 240 (240)
Default 60 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Residence EHG
Developer
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
CINAME[x, y]
The Name of the EHG Counter input function block configured for each of the eight sub-slots in an A-
AMC. The name is of the form <Control Module Name.fb name>. Note that “x” is the index for Slot
Number and “y” represents the index for Subslot Number.
Data Type BlockId Range N/A
Default Null String Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
CMDCNT(I,J)
Command Count (DHEB EHG FB)
This is a statistical parameter, which indicates the count of commands received by the DHEB. The
particular type of command is indicated by the first index. The time span over which the count has been
kept is indicated by the second index.
Possible values of the first index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
l 0 - Count of DHEB commands
l 1 - Count of Hiway commands
l 2 - Count of READ commands
l 3 - Count of WRITE commands
l 4 - Count of ACTIVATE commands
l 5 - Count of ABORT commands
l 6 - Count of CALLUP commands
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l 7 - Count of POLL commands
l 8 - Count of NORMAL ATTENTION MODE commands
l 9 - Count of LISTEN commands
l 10 - Count of HIWAY SWITCH commands
Possible values of the second index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
l 0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of
the EHG FB
l 1 - Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
l 2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the
next hour.
CMDCNT()
CMDCNT() is derived from the Cmds[], CmdsCurHr[] and CmdsHour[] fields of the DHEB's DHEBStatus
structure.
Data Type Long Integer Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 1 to 11
Second Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related STATSRESET Checkpoint No
Parameters
CMDHSTRYIDX
Command History Index (DHEB)
Index to the to the newest circular list entry in the command history buffer represented by parameter
CMDHSTRY(). The index is initialized to 0 when the DHEB is restarted.
Data Type Integer Range 0-99
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related This parameter is derived from the CommandIdx element of the Checkpoint No
Parameters DHEB's CommandHistory type
CMDHSTRY(I,J )
Command History (DHEB EHG FB)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter represents a circular list (queue) of up to 100 Hiway commands, which have been
received by the DHEB. The first index selects either the command word or the data word. The second
index corresponds to the sequence in which the commands were received. Values are initialized to 0
when the DHEB is first started. Values of 0 indicate no information.
Possible values of the first index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
l 0: Value corresponds to the command word of the request. Value corresponds to the data word of
the request. Data can either be the value written to the Hiway (if ‘Fnc’ field of the corresponding
command word was WRITE) or the value read from the Hiway (if ‘Fnc’ field of the corresponding
command word was READ). Possible values of the second index and the corresponding data
interpretation are as follows.
l 0 - 99: This index is used as the queue element selector. The most recent command or data word is
at the index given by the value of parameter CMDHSTRYIDX. The next most recent value is at the
index (CMDHSTRYIDX - 1) MOD 100. The oldest value is at the index (CMDHSTRYIDX + 1) MOD
100.
CMDHSTRY()
CMDHSTRY() is derived from the LastCommands[] and LastData[] fields of the DHEB's
CommandHistory structure.
Data Type Long Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 0 to 1 Second
Integer Index: 0 to 99
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
CNTLLOCK
Operator Control Lock
FFB Applicability:
l CO FFB of AMC counter.
This parameter defines whether the operator is permitted to start, stop, and reset the counter or timer.
Data Type Enumeration Range Permit = Operator is allowed to start, stop, and reset the
counter or timer. Nopermit = Operator cannot start, stop,
and reset the counter or timer.
Default Permit Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer / Residence EHG
Lock Application
Developer
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
Chapter 1 - About This Document
CONFBOXNUM
Configured Box Number
Specifies address loaded by the user for the box on the data Hiway. In case of EHG FB, this is loaded
from Configuration side.
Data Type Integer Range 0-63
Default None Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock AppDevOnly Residence EHG
Related Parameters BOXNUM Checkpoint No(Doubt)
CPMCOMMAND
EHG Command (EHG FB)
This is a parameter used for commanding the EHG application. Storing “NONE” to this parameter has
no effect.
Data Type Enumeration Range NONE (0), SHUTDOWN (1)
Default None Configuration Load No
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters CEESTATE Checkpoint No
CPMSTATE
EHG State ( EHG FB)
This is a parameter of EHG FB. It provides information about the behavior of the EHG. It provides a high
level view of the EHG's health.
Changes in CPMSTATE are affected through writes to the associated parameter CPMCOMMAND.
CPMSTATE provides information about the EHG as a general processing subsystem on its host PC.
Data Type Enumeration Range Offnet (0), Testing (1), Backup (8), Notloaded
Booting (2), Alive (3), (9), NoCEE (10),
Loading (4), OK (5), CEEIDLE (11),
Failed (6), PIREADY (7), CEERUN (12), CEEMIX
(13)
Default EEIdle (for primary Configuration
EHG FB) Backup Load
(for secondary
EHG FB)
Access Read Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related CPMCOMMAND Checkpoint No
Parameters
Chapter 1 - About This Document
CPMSTATE Meaning
EEIdle Indicates that this is a primary EHG containing a GEE in Idle state.
EERun Indicates that this is a primary EHG containing a GEE in Run state.
BackUp Indicates that this is a secondary EHG.
NoEE Indicates that there is no database within the EHG. This state changes to EEIdle after
restore of a Checkpoint, load of the entire GEE configuration database or load of a EHG
FB together with GEE FB.
Failed Indicates that the EHG has failed and is non-operational. In most conditions that cause
failure, parameter access is inoperative so that the value of CPMSTATE cannot be
viewed. Failures may show up on displays as no response status for parameter
requests.
CRCYCLEOVRN
Current <hour's count of> Cycle Overruns (GEE FB)
Count of cycle overruns in current hour. CRCYCLEOVRN is reset to 0 once an hour. Reset time is not
synchronized with wall clock time.
Data Type Integer Range 0 - 32767
Default 0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
CTLACTN
Control Action - defines whether the slot uses direct or reverse control action.
Data Type Enumeration Range Direct - value of output increases as the PV increases
Reverse - value of output decreases as the PV increases
Default Direct Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer Residence DH
Lock
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
CTLEQN
Control Equation
This parameter defines whether the control equation used by the slot. Refer to information about each
algorithm for what equations are supported.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range EqA EqB EqC
Default EqA Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer / Application Developer Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
1.2.4 -D-
DESC
<block> Descriptor (GEE FB, CM, Device FBs, FFBs)
This is a 24-character string parameter, which holds a general description of the device function block.
Data Type String - 24 characters Range N/A
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence SR
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
DEV
Deviation
This parameter provides the current deviation (PV minus SP) for the block in percentage.
Data Type Real Range -113.7% to 113.7%
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related Parameters PV, SP Checkpoint No
DEVLOALM.FL
(Deviation Low Alarm Flag)
DEVHIALM.FL
(Deviation High Alarm Flag)
These parameters indicate if the Deviation Alarm is currently active for the block.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Boolean Range Off, On
Default Off Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters DEVxxALM.PR, DEVxxALM.SV, DEVxxALM.TP Checkpoint Yes
DEVLOALM.PR
(Deviation Low Alarm Priority)
DEVHIALM.PR
(Deviation High Alarm Priority)
These parameters define the priority for the Deviation Alarms.
Data Type Enumeration Range None (0) Journal (1) Low (2)
High (3) Urgent (4)
Default Low Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related DEVxxALM.SV, DEVxxALM.TP, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters DEVxxALM.FL
DEVLOALM.SV
(Deviation Low Alarm Severity)
DEVHIALM.SV
(Deviation High Alarm Severity)
These parameters define the severity of the Deviation Alarms.
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 15
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters DEVxxALM.PR, DEVxxALM.TP, DEVxxALM.FL Checkpoint Yes
DEVLOALM.TP
(Deviation Low Alarm Trip Point)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
DEVHIALM.TP
(Deviation High Alarm Trip Point)
These parameters define the trip point for the Deviation Alarms.
Data Type Real Range 0.0% to 113.7% for High Alarms -
113.7% to 0.0% for Low Alarms
Default 0.0% Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related DEVxxALM.PR, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters DEVxxALM.SV,
DEVxxALM.FL
DEVSTATS(I)
Device Statistics (DHEB EHG FB)
This is a statistics parameter, which gives information on DHEB firmware statistics, DHEB board
revision levels, and DHEB pinning configuration. The index selects the data value returned.
Possible values of the index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
l 0 - Total memory used
l 1 - Total memory available
l 2 - Size of the largest contiguous memory block
l 3 - Number of memory allocation errors
l 4 - Lowest available memory
l 5 - Memory unavailable for messages
l 6 - Device messages queue full
l 7 - Unused
l 8 - Unused
l 9 - Firmware version as a single character. Possible values range from 65 (A) to 90 (Z)
l 10 - Firmware revision. Possible values range from 01 to 99
l 11 - FPGA hardware version as a single character. Possible values range from 65 (A) to 90 (Z)
l 12 - EPROM version and revision as four packed characters (e.g. XX.X)
l 13 - The logical DHEB Hiway Number as configured by the user on the DHEB motherboard (via
DIP switch S3). Any value other than “1” is an error.
l 14 - Preferred Access Device number (Hiway address, 1 - 63) as configured by the user on the
DHEB motherboard (via DIP switch S1). There is an error if this value is not equal to parameter
BOXNUM
l 15 - Count of Network Buffer Errors
l 16 - Count of Network Dropped Connections
l 17 - Count of Network Invalid Connection Requests
l 18 - Count of Network MG Timeouts
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l 19 - Count of Network CM Timeouts
l 20 - Count of Network MG Bad Hardware (message dropped) indications
l 21 - Count of Network MG Bad Headers
l 22 - Count of Network Connection Handles (since reboot)
DEVSTATS() is derived from the Stats[] fields of the DHEB's DHEBStatus structure
Data Type Long Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 0 to 3 Second
Integer Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related BOXNUM Checkpoint No
Parameters
DHEBERRCNT(I,J)
Error Count (EHG FB DHEB)
This is a statistics parameter, which gives counts of occurrences of different types of errors tracked by
the DHEB. The particular type of error is indicated by the first index. The time span over which the count
has been kept is indicated by the second index.
Possible values of the first index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
l 0 - Count of Firmware command errors.
l 1 - Count of Hiway Grant errors.
l 2 - Count of Hiway / FPGA timeout errors.
l 3 - Count of Poll request timeout errors.
Possible values of the second index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
l 0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of
the EHG FB.
l 1 - Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
l 2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the
next hour.
DHEBERRCNT() is derived from the NumDHEBErrrs[], NumDHEBErrrsCurHr[] and NumDHEBErrrsHr[]
fields of the DHEB's DHEBStatus structure.
Data Type Long Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 0 to 3 Second
Integer Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
Chapter 1 - About This Document
DHEBERRCNTALL(I)
Error Count All (EHG FB DHEB)
This parameter gives the sum of counts of all types of errors tracked by the DHEB. The specific periods
in which the counts have been kept are indicated by the index. The error counts that are included in the
sum are as follows:
l 0 - Count of Firmware command errors
l 1 - Count of Hiway Grant errors
l 2 - Count of Hiway / FPGA timeout errors
l 3 - Count of Poll request timeout errors
Possible values of the index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
l 0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of
the EHG FB.
l 1 - Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour
l 2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the
next hour
DHEBERRCNTALL() is derived from the NumDHEBErrrs[], NumDHEBErrrsCurHr[] and
NumDHEBErrrsHr[] fields of the DHEB's DHEBStatus structure.
Data Type Long Integer Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Parameters DHEBERRCNT() Checkpoint No
DHEBOK
This parameter indicates the status of the DHEB.
Data Type Enumeration Range Bad (0), OK (1), Uncertain (2)
Default Uncertain Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
DHPSLOTTYPE1.31
This parameter indicates the DHP slot type.
Data Type Enumeration of Range ANALOGIN (0), ANALOGOUT (1), DIGIN (2),
CARDTYPE DIGOUT (3), COUNTER (4), NONE (5)
Default None Configuration Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Load
Access Lock Application Residence Data Hiway
Developer Only
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
DHPREVISION
This parameter indicates the DHP revision number.
Data Type Enumeration Range See Range list.
Default - Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read-only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range:
Enumeration Parameter value
- 0
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 5
F 6
G 7
H 8
I 9
J 10
K 11
L 12
M 13
N 14
O 15
P 16
Q 17
R 18
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Enumeration Parameter value
S 19
T 20
U 21
V 22
W 23
X 24
Y 25
Z 26
DIGALARM
Alarming Function
FFB Applicability:
l DI faceplate of HLPIU digital input(s) - Only for CD and SOE Card Types.
This parameter defines whether alarm conditions are to be detected by a digital input. This parameter is
filled in only when Chngdect or SOE has been entered for the IPCRDOP (Point Card Option). This
parameter maps to the appropriate Alarm Suppress bit in the HLPIU's CD or SOE slot database. When
set, and the CD or SOE input goes TRUE, an alarm is also generated by HLPIU for that subslot.
Data Type Enumeration Range Enable = Alarms are to be detected. Disable =
Alarms are not to be detected.
Default Enable Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Residence DH
Application
Developer
Related IPCRDOP Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
DIGALFMT
Alarm Format
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any box type's digital input(s)
l DI FFB of any box type's digital input(s)
This parameter defines the selection choice of the digital input alarm conditions available for a given
FFB. The permitted choices (x) are defined in the following table:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
DHP HLPIU AMC
DI DC DI DC DI DC
SINGLE None X X X X X X
OFN_ST1 X X X X X X
OFN_ST2 X X X X X X
ChngOfSt X X X
CmdDis X X X
DUAL None X X X X X X
Inpt1 X X X X X X
Inpt2 X X X X X X
ChngOfSt X X X
CmdDis X X X
Either X X X X X X
Both X X X X
Data Type Enumeration Range
Default None Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Residence DH for AMC DI/DC EHG for HLPIU DI/DC
Developer and DHP DI/DC
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
DISPREFPRD
Display Refresh Period
Specifies the rate at which the dynamic parameters are updated in the cache residing in DFBs, for the
dynamic parameters (PV, OP, SP). The purpose of this cache is to service display requests coming from
Control Builder, Flex Stations, and Console Stations. This helps to reduce the load on the Hwy, by
servicing the fast display requests from the cache, updated at a slower rate.
Data Type Enumeration Range 1GwyBasePrd (1), 2GwyBasePrd (2), 3GwyBasePrd
(3), 4GwyBasePrd (4), 5GwyBasePrd (5).
Default 2 Configuration Yes
GwyBasePrd Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
Chapter 1 - About This Document
DISPWRREQDELAYED
This parameter indicates the number of write requests from the display source that are not serviced after
one second.
Data Type UINT64 Range <=0
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence CHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint
DLYTIME
Alarm Delay Time
FFB Applicability:
AC FFB of any box type's analog input
AI FFB of any box type's analog input
DC FFB of any box type's digital input(s)
DI FFB of any box type's digital input(s)
This parameter causes suppression of redundant alarms. For digital inputs, it prevents multiple alarm
events caused by chattering digitals by maintaining the original alarm for a specified time interval
configured in the DLYTIME parameter. For analog input alarms, it works in conjunction with ALDLOPT
for controlling suppression of multiple analog alarm events. When ALDLOPT = NoDly, DLYTIME for
analog inputs is not activated.
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 60 (seconds) - for DI/DC 0 to 9999
(seconds) for AI / AC / Regulatory
Default 0 Configuration Yes No for AMC DI/DC
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Residence EHG
Application
Developer
Related ALDLOPT Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
A NaN or negative value is not allowed.
Exception: For a CHNGOFST alarm, when the delay timer expires, if the PV is in the same state as it
was when the timer had started, future state changes are immediately alarmed. If it is in the opposite
state, a second CHNGOFST alarm is produced and the delay timer is restarted.
DSBLSYNCCMD
Disable Synchronization Command (Primary EHG FB)
This is a button control used for disabling automatic synchronization operation in a redundant EHG pair.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Boolean Range ON, OFF
Default OFF Configuration Load No
Access Lock ENGR Residence EHG
Related Parameters DSBLSYNCCMD Checkpoint No
1.2.5 -E-
ENBLSYNCCMD
Enable Synchronization Command (Primary EHG FB)
This is a button control used to command initial synchronization operation in a redundant EHG pair.
Data Type Boolean Range ON, OFF
Default ON Configuration Load No
Access Lock ENGR Residence EHG
Related Parameters DSBLSYNCCMD Checkpoint No
ERRCNT(I,J)
Error Count (DHEB, Device FB)
This parameter gives the accumulated count of each type of error experienced by the DHEB for the box
represented by the Device FB. The error type is indicated by the first index. The time span over which
the count has been kept is indicated by the second index.
Possible values of the first index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
0 - Count of BCH errors. This is related to the error called ‘H4’ on BOS displays.
1 - Count of Busy Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H5’ on BOS displays.
2 - Count of No Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H2’ on BOS displays.
3 - Count of Improper Command Word / User Error errors. This is related to the error called ‘H9’ on BOS
displays.
4 - Count of Echo errors. This is related to the error called ‘H7’ on BOS displays.
5 - Count of Illegal Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H10’ on BOS displays.
6 - Count of Range Overflow errors. This is related to the error called ‘H11’ on BOS displays.
7 - Count of Security Check, BCH errors. This is related to the error called ‘H12’ on BOS displays.
8 - Count of Security Check, Illegal Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H13’ on BOS
displays.
9 - Count of Security Check, No Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H14’ on BOS
displays.
10 - Count of Over Hiway Access errors. This is related to the error called ‘H16’ on BOS displays.
11 - Count of Security Check, Echo errors. This is related to the error called ‘H15’ on BOS displays.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
12 - Unused
13 - Unused
14 - Unused
15 - Index normally represents No Grant errors. However, this is meaningless for an individual Hiway
box.
Possible values of the second index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of the
EHG FB.
1 - Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the next
hour.
ERRCNT() is derived from the BoxErrors[], BoxErrCurHr[] and BoxErrHr[] fields of the DHEB's
DHEBBoxErrors structure.
Data Type Long Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 0 to 15 Second
Integer Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
ERRCNTALL(I)
Error Count All (Device FB)
This is a statistics parameter, which gives total count of all types of communications errors for the box.
The index indicates the time span over which the count has been kept.
Possible values of the index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of the
EHG FB.
1 - Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the next
hour.
ERRCNTALL() is derived from the BoxErr[], BoxErrCurHr and BoxErrHour fields of the DHEB's
DHEBStatus structure.
Data Type Long Integer Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
ERRHSTRY(I,J )
Error History (DHEB EHG FB)
This parameter represents a circular list (queue) of up to 100 Hiway commands, which incurred errors
during processing by the DHEB. The first index indicates either the command word or the data word.
The second index corresponds to the sequence in which the commands were received. Values are
initialized to “0” when the DHEB is first started. “0” does not indicate any information.
Possible values of the first index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
0 - Value corresponds to the command word of the request.
1 - Value corresponds to the data word of the request. Data can either be the value written to the Hiway
(if ‘Fnc’ field of the corresponding command word was WRITE) or the value read from the Hiway (if ‘Fnc’
field of the corresponding command word was READ).
Possible values of the second index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
l 0 - 99: This index is used as the queue element selector. The most recent command or data word is
at the index given by the value of parameter ERRHSTRYIDX. The next most recent value is at the
index (ERRHSTRYIDX - 1) MOD 100. The oldest value is at the index (ERRHSTRYIDX + 1) MOD
100.
ERRHSTRY() is derived from the LastErrorCmds[] and LastErrorData[] fields of the DHEB's
CommandHistory structure.
Data Type Long Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 0 to 1 Second
Integer Index: 0 to 99
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
ERRHSTRYIDX
Error History Index (DHEB)
This parameter is the index to the to the newest circular list entry in the error history buffer represented
by parameter ERRHSTRY(). The index is initialized to 0 when the DHEB is restarted.
Data Type Integer Range 0-99
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related This parameter is derived from the ErrorIdx element of the Checkpoint No
Parameters DHEB's CommandHistory type
Chapter 1 - About This Document
EUDESC
Engineering Unit Descriptor (FFBs , GEE FB)
This is a text parameter, which is used to hold a description of the engineering units used within the
block configuration.
Data Type String Range 16 characters
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence SR
Related Parameters DESC Checkpoint No
EXECSTATE
Execution State (CM, Device FBs, GEE FB)
This parameter is used to control the execution state of the function blocks. When the value is Active,
blocks are executing. When the value is Inactive, blocks have suspended execution and any live inputs
are typically set to a fail-safe value. EXECSTATE = Active is overridden by CEESTATE = Idle. In the
case of CM, setting EXECSTATE = Inactive causes the CM itself and all component FBs to cease
execution. In order to reload FBs, EXECSTATE must be set to Inactive if CEESTATE = Run.
Data Type Enumeration Range Inactive (0), Active (1)
Default Inactive Configuration Load No
Access Lock Supervisor Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
1.2.6 -F-
FBTIME
Feedback Time
FFB Applicability: DC FFB of any box type's digital composite
This parameter defines the duration (in seconds) for which alarming is suppressed following an output
command from a digital composite data point that has been configured for command disagree alarming.
This parameter resides in the box's digital input subslot database.
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 1023 (seconds)
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
FLTRCNST
Filtering Constant Code
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of an AMC analog input
l AI FFB of an AMC analog input
This parameter defines the filtering time constant (in minutes) for the PV input to this data point.
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed below
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Entry Filter Time Constant (In Minutes)
00 0.0
01 0.006
02 0.015
03 0.028
04 0.046
05 0.072
06 0.109
07 0.161
08 0.234
09 0.339
10 0.517
11 1.050
12 2.117
13 4.250
14 8.517
15 17.05
FREEMEMINK
Free Memory In Kilobytes (EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the total amount of unused memory within the pool used for function blocks.
Units are 1024 bytes.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Integer Range
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
FTEACCRATE
FTE Access Rate (GEE FB) trip point:
This parameter specifies the alarm trip for FTE access rate (total responder rate). Once FTE access rate
exceeds this value; system alarm for EHGFB will be generated and the INALM flag will SET.
Data Type Integer Range 0-8000
Default 3000 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
FTESTATUS
FTE Status ( EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the status of the supervisory network as reported by the partner node.
Data Type Enumeration Range OK (0), FAIL (1), UNCERTAIN (2)
Default UNCERTAIN Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
1.2.7 -G-
GAPHILM
Gap High Limit
This parameter defines the high limit of the gap in percentage for an AMC based Pidgap algorithm.
Data Type Real Range 0.0% to 113.7%
Default 0.0% Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters GAPLOLM, KMODIFGAP Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
GAPLOLM
Gap Low Limit
This parameter defines the low limit of the gap in percent for an AMC based Pidgap algorithm.
Data Type Real Range -113.7% to 0.0%
Default 0.0% Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters GAPHILM, KMODIFGAP Checkpoint No
GTWBASEPRD
Base Period (GEE FB)
This parameter indicates the cycle period of GEE in seconds. As GEE supports only one period of
execution for all contained FBs, the value of PERIOD for each CM and DFB tracks the value of
GTWBASEPRD. GTWBASEPRD is continuously adjusted to allow throughput load on the DH to be
reduced in extraordinary configurations where required. GTWBASEPRD can be changed on process,
without load of the EHG FB.
Data Type Float Range 1 to
1.5
Default 1.0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related PERIOD of individual block types, RATE1PERIOD of Checkpoint Yes
Parameters GEE FB
1.2.8 -H-
HLTHINDEX
Health Index ( EHG FB)
This value is periodically calculated by the EHG application based on the CPU and memory usage of
the EHG nodes.
Data Type Integer Range 1-10
Default 10 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
HIALM.PR
Highest Alarm Priority
This parameter indicates the priority of the highest-level alarm that currently exists for the FB.
Data Type Enumeration Range None (0) Journal (1) Low (2) High (3)
Urgent (4)
Default None Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related HIALM.TYPE, HIALM.SV, Checkpoint No
Parameters INALM
HIALM.SV
Highest Alarm Severity
This parameter indicates the severity of the highest-level alarm that currently exists for the FB.
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 15
Default 0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters HIALM.TYPE, HIALM.PR, INALM Checkpoint No
HIALM.TYPE
Type of Highest Alarm
This parameter indicates the type of the highest-level alarm that currently exists for the FB. In
determining the highest (most important) alarm for an FB, the configured Priorities are first examined.
When multiple alarms with the same Priority are active, the FB reverts to a default order of most to least
important alarms for the FB.
Data Type Enumeration Range Specific per FB type - see
Range list
Default NoAlarm Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related HIALM.PR, HIALM.SV, Checkpoint No
Parameters INALM
Range:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l AMC-AI
o NOALARM (0)
o PVLOW (1)
o PVHIGH (2)
o DEVLOW (3)
o DEVHIGH (4)
o BADPVALM (5)
l AMC-DI
o NONE (0)
o OFN_ST1 (1)
o OFN_ST2 (2)
o CHNGOFST (3)
o INPT1 (4)
o INPT2 (5)
o EITHER (6)
o BOTH (7)
o CMDDIS (8)
l CBRVAI
o NOALARM (0)
o PVLO (1)
o PVHI (2)
o DEVLO (3)
o DEVHI (4)
o UNREAS (5)
l XXPIU FFBs
o NOALARM (0)
o PVLOW (1)
o PVHIGH (2)
o DEVLOW (3)
o DEVHIGH (4)
o UNREASALM (5)
o OPENTHRALM (6)
l REG FFBs
o NOALARM (0)
o PVHI (1)
o PVLO (2)
o DEVHI (3)
o DEVLO (4)
o ROSPOS (5)
o ROCNEG (6)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
o BADPV (7)
o UNREAS (8)
o OPHI (9)
o OPLO (10)
HTDOPT
Hiway Traffic Director Option (DHEB)
This parameter reflects the configuration by the user on the DHEB motherboard (via DIP switch S1) as
to the presence of (need for) an external HTD. The value of HTDOPT does not reflect the actual
presence of an HTD. The value is EXTHTD if the DHEB is configured to need an external HTD and
NOEXTHTD otherwise. A configuration yielding a FALSE value is always an error.
Data Type Enumeration Range EXTHTD (0),
NOEXTHTD (1),
UNCERTAIN (2)
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Read Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related This parameter is derived from the HTD Checkpoint No
Parameters Configured element of the DHEB's Device Info
type.
HWY
Hiway Input
This parameter provides the current value (in percent) that a regulatory block in a hiway box is receiving
from the hiway (otherwise known as the hiway location). This parameter is used to accomplish setpoint
control (SPC) or direct digital control (DDC) depending on the algorithm. For SPC-type algorithms, the
hiway location is used as the Y-input when the mode is remote cascade (Mode = Cas and RCASENB =
On). For DDC-type algorithms, the output value is written to the hiway location when in the remote
cascade mode. In both cases, HWY is a Read Only parameter.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86%
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only / Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
HWYACCRATE
Hiway Access Rate (GEE FB)
This parameter specifies number of reads and writes requested from EHG per refresh cycle to DHEB.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Integer Range 400-2200
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
HWYACT
Hiway Active <Cable As Viewed Through DHEB> (DHEB)
This parameter reflects the active Hiway cable. A value of ACTA indicates that cable A is active. A value
of ACTB indicates cable B is active.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed
in the following.
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Read Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related This parameter is derived from the ActiveCable Checkpoint No
Parameters element of the DHEB's DeviceInfo type.
Range:
l ACTA (0) = Hiway cable A is active.
l ACTB (1) = Hiway cable B is active.
l Uncertain (2) = Neither of the hiway cable is active.
HWYBOXNUM
Hiway Box Number (EHG FB)
This parameter specifies address of the box on the data Hiway. This is set by DIPswitch settings in the
DHEB.
Data Type Integer Range 0-63
Default 0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
HWYCTLST
Hiway Control State (EHG FB)
This parameter defines the access right from supervisory controllers to boxes on the DH. Read and
write status from display interfaces to DH boxes is supported for all values of HWYCTLST.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access right for the supervisory control is as follows:
l Basic: Supervisory control has neither Read nor Write access
l Read: Supervisory control has Read but not Write access
l Full: Supervisory control has both Read and Write access
The access rights controlled by HWYCTLST apply to all parameters of DH boxes. This includes
parameters such as SP, OP, tuning constants and all the others.
If the value of HWYCTLST indicates a more restrictive DH access than BOXFSTAT, then the value of
HWYCTLST replaces the value of BOXFSTAT.
Data Type Enumeration Range Read (0), Basic (1), Full (2), Not applicable (3),
Uncertain (4)
Default Basic Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Supervisor Residence EHG
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
HWYHSAST
Hiway Swap Algorithm <diagnostic> State (EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the diagnostic state of the Hiway swap algorithm. “ON” indicates that the swap
algorithm is enabled. “OFF” indicates that the swap algorithm is disabled.
Data Type Boolean Range ON, OFF
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters HWYSWAP, HWYSWCMD, HWYSWST Checkpoint No
HWYNUM
Hiway Number (EHG FB)
This parameter specifies address of the hiway on the data Hiway. This is set by DIPswitch setting in the
DHEB.
Data Type Integer Range 0-63
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
HWYREADRATE
Hiway Read Rate (GEE FB)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter specifies number of reads requested from EHG per refresh cycle to DHEB.
Data Type Integer Range 0-32767
Default 0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
HWYWRITERATE
Hiway Write Rate (GEE FB)
This parameter specifies number of writes requested from EHG per refresh cycle to DHEB.
Data Type Integer Range 0-32767
Default 0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
HWYSTAT
Hiway Status (DHEB)
HWYSTAT is a read-only parameter of the EHG FB. It indicates whether Hiway communications are
operational.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the details listed in the following.
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range:
l Uncertain (0) =An HG has not finished startup or there is no HG box configured on the hiway.
l Init (1) = Hiway is being initialized.
l Run (2) = Hiway is operating properly.
l Failed (3) =HG cannot communicate with any of the boxes on the hiway.
HWYSWAP
Hiway Swap <command> (EHG FB)
Writing ON to this parameter causes the hiway cables to swap. HWSWAP is an edge-triggered
parameter. It always returns the value OFF when read. When OFF is written to it there is no effect.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Boolean Range ON, OFF
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Operator Residence EHG
Related Parameters HWYSWCMD, HWYHSAST, HWYSWST Checkpoint No
HWYSWCMD
Hiway Swap <enable> Command (EHG FB)
This parameter may be written to enable or disable the Hiway Swap Algorithm. It is a companion
parameter to HWYSWST, which shows whether the swap algorithm is currently enabled or disabled.
HWYSWCMD itself always returns a value of None. Writing None to HWYSWCMD has no effect.
Data Type Enumeration Range Disable (0) Enable (1)
None (2)
Default None Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Operator Residence EHG
Related HWYSWCMD, HWYHSAST, Checkpoint No
Parameters HWYSWST
HWYSWST
Hiway Swap <enable> State (EHG FB)
This parameter indicates whether Hiway cables have been automatically swapped from primary to back
up since the last time the Hiway Swap Algorithm was enabled.
l Ok- Indicates that the cables have never been swapped. The algorithm is enabled and monitoring.
It may also indicate that previously hiway cables have been swapped properly because of
detection of failure by algorithm which is currently disabled.
l Failed- Indicates that the operator either disables the swap algorithm or that it has been
automatically disabled because of error triggered swap. It indicates the swap commanded by
Hiway swap algorithm has failed during last attempt of swapping the cable to backup. Algorithm is
disabled after the attempt.
Data Type Enumeration Range Ok (0), Failed (1)
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related HWYSWAP, HWYSWCMD, Checkpoint No
Parameters HWYHSAST
1.2.9 -I-
Chapter 1 - About This Document
IMAGEVER
Image Version ( EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the GEE software version and revision number. This indicates the real-time
value in the following format:
<ProductIdentification><500>.<Point500>-<MajorBuildNumber>.<MinorBuildNumber>
For example, EXP series release 100, build 13 will be indicated as:
l EXP100.0-13.0
l The first point release for EXP series release 100, build 13 will be indicated as:
l EXP100.1-13.0
l The first service pack that follows the point release that will be indicated as:
l EXP100.1-13.1
Data Type String Range 16 characters
Default Blank Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
INALM
In Alarm (EHG FB, GEE FB, CM, Device FBs, FFBs)
This parameter indicates if an alarm condition is present in the block. ‘On’ indicates the presence of an
alarm. In the case of EHG FB, this parameter is set when any persistent alarm condition has been
detected.
Data Type Boolean Range On, Off
Default Off Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters HIALM.TYPE, HILAM.PR, HIALM.SV Checkpoint Yes
INITCONF
Initialization Configuration
This parameter defines whether the slot will participate in initialization or not.
Data Type Enumeration Range NoInit - initialization is not to be performed Init -
initialization is to be performed
Default NoInit Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
Chapter 1 - About This Document
INITHWYADDIAG
Initialize Hiway Address Diagnostic (EHG FB)
When set to “True,” this parameter instructs the EHG to initialize the Hiway Address Diagnostic. The
parameter always returns value when read.
Data Type Boolean Range False, True
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Supervisor Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
INITMAN
This parameter indicates whether a downstream block is initializing the output of the block.
Data Type Boolean Range Off - initialization is not being done On - initialization
is being done
Default Off Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Residence DH
Only
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
INITVAL
Initialization Value
This parameter provides the initialization value provided to this block from the downstream block
requesting initialization.
Data Type Real Range -5.0% to 105.0%
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related Parameters INITMAN Checkpoint No
INPTCOND
Input Conditioning
This parameter defines the type of input conditioning for the PV input of the analog and regulatory slot.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range Linear (0) SquareRoot
(1)
Default Linear Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Read-only (for Residence DH
CBRVAI)
Related PVCHAR Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
INPTDIR
Input Direction On Digital Input
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any digital input
l DI FFB of any digital input
This parameter defines how the state of the digital input is interpreted for display purposes. If INPTDIR is
zeroed (Direct), then a closed contact on the input results in the digital input being TRUE (applies to
normally open contacts). If set to “one” (Reverse), then a closed contact results in the digital input being
FALSE (applies to normally closed contacts).
Data Type Integer (single bit) Range 0 = Direct
1=
Reverse
Default 0 (Direct) Configuration Yes
Load
Access Application Developer Residence DH for
Lock AMC
DI/DC
EHG for
HLPIU
and DHP
DI/DC
Related This has been expanded in EHG to support all digital input Checkpoint Yes
Parameters types. For AMC this parameter is located in hiway box's
digital input subslot database. For all other digital inputs, it is
located in EHG - perhaps in the digital input subslot
database in the DFB for that hiway box.
INPTSLOTNUM
Input Slot Number
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any box type's analog input
l DC FFB of any box type's digital input
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter specifies the slot number where the input of this data point resides in the file. (For the
DHP, it specifies the software slot rather than the hardware slot.)
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed
below
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related INPTSUBSLOTNUM, Checkpoint No
Parameters INPTSLOTTYPE
Range: The slot number ranges for the various data points are as follows:
Data Point Type Slot Number Range
CB RV 1-8
CB Regulatory 1-8
DHP AI & AC 1-15, 17-31
DHP DI & DC 1-15, 17-31
DHP Counter 1-15, 17-31
HLPIU AI & AC 1-32
HLPIU DI & DC 1-32
HLPIU Counter & Control 1-32
Counter
LEPIU AI 1-32 (Slots 1 & 2 are in Remote Box 1, slots 3 & 4 are in Remote
Box 2, etc.)
LLPIU AI 1-32
AMC AI (W/Accum) 7-8
AMC AI & AC 7-8
AMC DI & DC 1-32
AMC Counter 1-32
AMC Process Module 1-16
AMC Regulatory 1-16
AI = Analog Input
DI= Digital Input
RV = Remote Variable
AC= Analog Composite
DC= Digital Composite
INPTSLOTTYPE
Input Slot Type
Chapter 1 - About This Document
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any box type's analog input
l DC FFB of any box type's digital input
This parameter specifies the slot type where the input of this data point resides in the file.
Data Type Enumeration Range AI - Analog Input AO - Analog Output DI - Digital
Input DO - Digital Output COUNTER - Counter
RVAI - AI (for CB only)
Default DI for DC & DDI AI Configuration No
for AC Load
Access View Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related INPTSLOTNUM, Checkpoint No
Parameters INPTSUBSLOTNUM
INPTSUBSLOTNUM1
First Input Subslot
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any box type's analog input
l DC FFB of any box type's digital input
This parameter specifies the first input sub-slot that is to be used as the input to this point.
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed
below
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related INPTSLOTNUM, Checkpoint No
Parameters INPTSLOTTYPE
Range:
The subslot number range for the various data points are as follows:
Data Point Type Subslot Number Range
DHP AI & AC 1-6
DHP DI & DC 1-16 (single-input data point)
1-15 (for the first input of a dual-input data point)
DHP Counter 1-8
HLPIU AI & AC 1-8
Chapter 1 - About This Document
INPTSUBSLOTNUM2
Second Input Subslot
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any box type's analog input.
This parameter specifies the second input sub-slot to be used as the input to this point.
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed
below
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related INPTSLOTNUM, Checkpoint No
Parameters INPTSLOTTYPE
Range:
The subslot number range for the various data points are as follows:
Data Point Type Subslot Number Range
DHP AI & AC 1-6
DHP DI & DC 1-16 (single-input data point) 1-15 (for the first input of a dual-input data point)
DHP Counter 1-8
HLPIU AI & AC 1-8
IOADHI
This parameter defines the A/D HI (100%) conversion value.
Data Type Real Range 0% - 100%
Default 100% Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters IOADLO Checkpoint Yes
IOADLO
This parameter defines the A/D LO (0%) conversion value.
Data Type Real Range 0% - 100%
Default 0% Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters IOADHI Checkpoint Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
IONAME
This parameter shows the list of Subslots associated with the DHP/HLPIU slot.
Data Type Block ID Range NA
Default None Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters SLOTNUM, SLOTTYPE Checkpoint No
IPADDRESS
Floating IP Address ( EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the floating IP address of the EHG node.
Data Type String Range A maximum of 15 characters
Default 0.0.0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Application Developer only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
IPCRDOP
Input Card Option
FFB Applicability:
l DC faceplate of HLPIU digital input(s)
l DI faceplate of HLPIU digital input(s)
This parameter is used for the following two purposes:
1. During off-process configuration, it is used for configuring the digital input card option for HLPIU.
This selects one of the following:
a. Notified Digital Status With Input Tracking, or
b. Change Detect, or
c. Sequence Of Events options.
2. During on-process operation, it is used to display mismatches between the configured input card
option and the actual input card option installed in the same hiway box slot.
Data Type Enumeration Range Notifyst = Notify Status Chngdect = Change
Detect SOE =Sequence of Events
Default Notifyst Configuration Yes
Load
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Application Residence DH
Developer / View
Only
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
IPEERCONSTS
Data Type Enumeration Range NoState (0), Initialized (1), OpenPending (2), Open
(3), ClosePending (4)
Default Configuration
Load
Access Lock Residence
Related Checkpoint
Parameters
IPGWYDHEB
IP Gateway Data Hiway Ethernet Bridge (DHEB)
This parameter is the UNICODE string representing the IP Gateway address of the DHEB.
Data Type String Range XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
IPMASKDHEB
IP Mask Data Hiway Ethernet Bridge (DHEB)
This parameter is the UNICODE string representing the IP address Mask of the DHEB.
Data Type String Range XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
IPNODEDHEB
IP Node Data Hiway Ethernet Bridge (DHEB)
This parameter is the UNICODE string representing the IP Node address of the DHEB.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type String Range XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
ITHILM
Integral High Limit
FFB Applicability:
l CB and AMC regulatory data points
This parameter defines the integral high limit in percentage.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86%
Default 105.0% Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock SUPV Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
ITLOLM
Integral Low Limit
FFB Applicability:
l CB and AMC regulatory data points
This parameter defines the integral low limit in percentage.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86%
Default -5.0% Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock SUPV Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint
1.2.10 -K-
Gain Constant
This parameter defines the gain constant for Pid and Lead/Lag algorithms of CB and AMC. If the gain
constant is specified as 0, the gain function is disabled.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Real Range 0.0, 0.1 to 99.99
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters T1, T2 Checkpoint Yes
Scale Factor
This parameter defines the scale factor for the following CB and AMC algorithms: Sumrwman, Cbsumr,
Multwman, Mult, Dividr, Sqrt, Sqrtprod, Sumsqrt.
Data Type Real Range -9.999 to 9.999
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters K2 Checkpoint Yes
K1 (AMCREG)
K1 (Auxiliary Constant on X Input; AMC Regulatory Data Point)
This parameter defines the auxiliary constant on the X input for an AMC regulatory data point that has
been configured for the Sumrwman, Cbsumr, or Sqrt algorithm.
Data Type Real Range -9.999 to 9.999
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters K2 Checkpoint Yes
K1 (CBREG)
K1 (X Scale Factor; CB Regulatory Data Point)
This parameter defines the X scale factor for a CB regulatory data point configured for one of the
following algorithms: Sumrwman, Cbsumr, Sqrt, or Sumsqrt.
Data Type Real Range -9.999 to 9.999
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters K2 Checkpoint Yes
K2 (CBREG)
K2 (Auxiliary Bias Coefficient; CB Regulatory Data Point)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter defines the auxiliary bias value for a CB regulatory data point configured for one of the
following algorithms: Sumrwman, Cbsumr, Multwman, Dividr, Sqrtprod, Sqrt, Sumsqrt, or Mult.
Data Type Real Range -99.99 to 99.99
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters K2 Checkpoint Yes
K2 (AMCREG)
K2 (Auxiliary Bias Coefficient; AMC Regulatory Data Point)
This parameter defines the auxiliary bias coefficient for an AMC regulatory data point configured for one
of the following algorithms: Sumrwman, Cbsumr, Mult, Dividr, or Sqrt.
Data Type Real Range -99.99 to 99.99
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters K2 Checkpoint Yes
KEEPALIVEADD
This parameter shows the Keep Alive Address for PC device number selected in PCNO parameter.
Data Type String Range Allenbrd, Modicon,
Honeywell
Default ALLENBRD Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related PCNO, PORTNO, DEVADD, Checkpoint No
Parameters MODELTYPE
KEYWORD
Keyword (GEE FB, CM, Device FBs)
This parameter is used to provide a brief block description on schematic displays where DESC is too
long.
Data Type String Range 16 characters
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence SR
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
1.2.11 -L-
Loop Manual
This parameter indicates the state of the Loop Manual mode in the slot.
Data Type Boolean Range Off - Loop Manual mode not enabled On - Loop Manual
mode is enabled
Default Off Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Residence EHG
Only
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
LOADSCOPE
Load Scope (EHG FB)
LOADSCOPE controls the target devices for load operations that go through EHG. When LOADSCOPE
is GtwyOnly, EHG resident data is loaded to the EHG, but DH resident data does not go through to the
DH. DH resident data is simply ignored. When LOADSCOPE is All, both types of data reach their final
destinations. LOADSCOPE applies to both configuration load operations and ‘Checkpoint restore’
operations.
LOADSCOPE typically has the value All. It is changed to GtwyOnly when an engineer wishes to create
FBs in EHG without overwriting slot data already present in DH boxes. Load of FBs under GtwyOnly
causes a warning status to be returned when the FB is created. This helps to prevent confusion when
GtwyOnly loads are done unintentionally.
Data Type Enumeration Range All (0), GtwyOnly (1)
Default GtwyOnly Configuration Load No
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
LOGENABLE
Enable log (GEE FB)
This parameter is used for enabling or disabling error log on the GEE FB. By enabling this parameter,
all EHG application errors can be stored in the location - C:\EHGLOG on the EHG system. The errors
are logged in a file called EHGLOG_<a>.txt, where “a” is in the range of 0-5. The maximum size of the
file EHGLOG_<a>.txt is 1 MB. When the log exceeds the maximum size for all the six files, the files are
overwritten beginning at EHGLOG_0.txt. If the GEE hangs or does not respond, a separate log file
called EHGLOG_<a>.txt_MM_DD_HH_Min is created, where
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l “a” is any number in the range of 0 through n (n is any positive integer)
l MM indicates month
l DD indicates day
l HH indicates hours
l Min indicates minute.
Data Type Boolean Range Yes/No
Default 0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Operator Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
LSCYCLEOVRN
Last <hour's count of> Cycle Overruns (GEE FB)
This parameter indicates the count of cycle overruns in last hour. LSCYCLEOVRN acquires the value of
CRCYCLEOVRN once an hour. Transfer time is not synchronized with wall clock time.
Data Type Integer Range 0 - 32767
Default 0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
LSP
Local Set point - This parameter represents the local set point value of the block. The LSP location is
typically used as the Y input when the mode is AUTO.
Certain algorithms do not use this LSP location. In this case, the LSP is referred to as a “free variable”
and may be used at the discretion of the user. When the LSP is a “free variable,” its value is displayed in
percentage, and it may be changed through the supervisor or engineer access lock. When LSP is not a
“free variable,” its value is displayed in engineering units and it has an access lock of View Only.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86% when LSP is a free variable -6.86% to
106.86% scale of engineering units when LSP is not a free
variable
Default 0.0 Configuration No
Load
Access View Only / Residence DH
Lock Supervisor
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
1.2.12 -M-
Chapter 1 - About This Document
MASTER
This parameter specifies the owner of a box for co-existence of multiple preferred access devices
(PADS) on the Data Hiway. Many features of the box can support only one preferred access device.
Data Type Enumeration Range EHG (0), Other (1)
Default Other Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
MAXFREEINK
Maximum Free <memory block size> In Kilobytes (EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the largest contiguous block of memory (in bytes) within the pool used for
function blocks.
Data Type Integer Range
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
MAXHWYCMDRAT(I),MAXHWYCMDRAT(J)
Maximum Hiway Command Rate (DHEB)
This parameter gives the maximum rate at which DHEB has issued commands per second to the Hiway
during the time span of observation. Units are in commands per second. The index indicates time span
over which the rate has been accumulated.
Possible values of the index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
0 - Data for maximum rate computation has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to
parameter STATSRESET of the EHG FB.
1 - Data for maximum rate computation has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
2 - Data for maximum rate computation was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the
hour and is static for the next hour.
MAXHWYCMDRAT() is derived from the Cmds[0], CmdsCurHr[0] and CmdsHour[0] fields of the DHEB's
DHEBStatus structure.
Data Type Long Integer Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
MCCARDOPTION[x]
Card (Slot) Option
This parameter defines the card option for an I/O slot. The value range of the card option depends on
the type of card configured for the I/O slot. Note that “x” is the index for slot number ranging from 1 to 16.
Data Type Enumeration Range Uncertain (0), Status (2), Latchin (3), Latchout
(6), Pulseout (7)
Default None Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Residence Hiway
Developer
Related AMCCARDTYPE Checkpoint No
Parameters
MCCARDTYPE[x]
Card(Slot) Type
This parameter defines the type of card in a particular slot where x is the slot number index ranging from
1 to 16.
Data Type Enumeration Range None (0), Analogin (1), Digin (2), Analogot (4),
Digout (6), Counter (8)
Default None Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Residence Hiway
Developer
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
MCREV
AMC Revision
This parameter defines the revision level of an AMC box.
Data Type Enumeration Range Rev20 (0), Rev30 (1), Rev31 (2),
Rev32 (3)
Default No Default Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Residence Hiway
Developer
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
Chapter 1 - About This Document
MODE
This parameter on a configuration form in the Project side, does not contain any entries and serves only
to remind that this data point is in the manual mode after the data point is loaded with loadscope = ALL.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed
below:
Default Manual Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Operator Residence DH
Related MODEATTR, NORMMODE, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters PSTMODE
Range:
l Man = Manual; this mode provides the operator or the discontinuous program with direct control
over the output value of the data point regardless of any automatic control strategy. Manual mode
is applicable to regulatory data points, analog output and analog composite data points, and digital
output and digital composite data points. HG points must be in Manual mode before they can be
deleted.
l Auto = Automatic; in this mode, the output value is computed by the slot's configured algorithm
(ALGIDDAC) and the setpoint comes from the local setpoint (LSP) location in the controller slot. An
operator or a discontinuous program can change the setpoint value. Automatic mode applies to
only regulatory data points.
l Cas = Cascade; in this mode, the data point receives its setpoint/output value from a primary data
point. (This is applicable for PIDCMA, PIDSPC, and PIDCM algorithms.) For other algorithms like
PIDNORM, PIDRATIO, and so on, this mode corresponds to BCAS mode in PIDCMA, PIDSPC, and
PIDCM algorithms. When the entry for RCASENB is “On” (true), the data point is in the remote
cascade mode. This means that the setpoint/output value comes from a primary data point that is at
a higher level of control, such as from a program or in the ACE. This mode corresponds to the
hiway-based computer mode. When an operator or discontinuous control program selects the
cascade mode for a data point, the data point does not immediately go into the cascade mode.
Instead, a cascade request (CASREQ) is generated. This condition is displayed at the Universal
Station as “-C” to the right of the current operating mode, and it indicates to the primary data point
that it may take over control of the data point. Later, when the ACE requests the cascade mode, the
cascade request is removed and the data point goes into the remote cascade mode. When
RCASENB is “Off” (false), the data point is in the local cascade mode. This means that the data
point is to receive the setpoint value from a primary data point that is in the same hiway box. This
corresponds to the cascade mode in hiway-based systems and it is applicable to only regulatory
data points. When the operator or a discontinuous control program selects the cascade mode, the
data point immediately goes into the cascade mode because the cascade request function does
not apply. The cascade mode applies regulatory data points, analog output and analog composite
data points, and digital output and digital composite data points.
l Bcas = Backup cascade; this is the local cascade mode where a data point receives its setpoint
from a primary data point that is in the same hiway box. This mode corresponds to the cascade
mode in hiway-based systems. This mode is applicable only for PIDCMA, PIDSPC, and PIDCM
algorithms. For other algorithms, CAS mode corresponds to the BCAS mode.
MODEAPPLFL[1..4]
Mode Applicability Flags
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter indicates the four boolean values corresponding to the four operating modes - Man,
Auto, Cas, BCas. A true value indicates that the mode is allowed for this block. These modes are
represented by MODEAPPLFL_MAN, MODEAPPLFL_AUTO, MODEAPPLFL_CAS and MODEAPPLFL_
BCAS. The MODEAPPLFL_[1…4] flags represent the particular mode value can be set, for the present
algorithm based on the present configuration.
Data Type Boolean Range Off - mode not allowed On - mode is
allowed
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related Parameters MODE Checkpoint No
MODEATTR
Mode Attribute
This parameter defines the attribute of the current mode of the block. The attribute denotes the authority
to change certain parameters of the block.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list
Default Operator Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Operator Residence EHG Data Hiway (for AMCREG, AMCAO,
AMCDO)
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
Range:
l None (0)
l Operator (1) = Operator can supply setpoint, output value, mode, ratio, and bias for a data point
(operator-access level).
l Program (2) =Program can supply setpoint, output value, mode, ratio, and bias for a data point
(program access level)
l Normal (3) = When MODEATTR is changed to normal; the value for MODEATTR is set to whatever
was configured as the normal mode attribute (NORMODEATTR).
CAUTION
Be aware of the AMC firmware limitation. For Checkpoint restore, the box must be in IDLE state.
However, when the box is in IDLE state, the value of MODEATTR parameter cannot be modified.
Hence, MODEATTR parameter may not be restored. In such a scenario, User you must manually
correct the value of AMC MODEATTR parameter after the Checkpoint restore operation.
MODEPERM
Mode Permit
This parameter defines whether the Operator access level is allowed to change the Mode of the block.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range Permit - operator access level can change Mode
Nopermit - Operator access level cannot change Mode
Default Permit Configuration No
Load
Access Engineer Residence EHG
Lock
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
MODISREDUN
Module Is Redundant (Primary EHG FB)
This parameter indicates that the EHG is redundant. By default, it is enabled. It is disabled only if the
EHG Simulation personality is configured.
Data Type Boolean Range On, Off
Default On (On-process EHG) Off (EHGSIM) Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
MOOUTIND
Momentary Output Indication
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any box type's digital output(s)
l DO faceplate of any box type's digital output(s)
This parameter specifies whether the latched single/dual digital outputs, or the digital outputs in a
digital-composite are to be momentary (“doorbell” action) or non-momentary (latched/pulsed action).
Data Type Enumeration Range Nomoment = Action is to be non-momentary, can be
either latched or pulsed. Moment = Action is to be
momentary
Default Nomoment Configuration Yes
Load
Access Application Residence EHG
Lock Developer
Related PNTOPOP Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
1.2.13 -N-
Chapter 1 - About This Document
NAME
Function Block Name
This parameter defines the name of the FB.
Data Type FB Name Range See below
Default Derived from block type Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence System
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
NAME is not a true parameter of the block, but a parameter-like entry on configuration forms used to
specify the block name.
NMBRBCFL
Number of I/O Files
This parameter defines the number of I/O files attached to an AMC.
Data Type Enumeration Range 0 (0), 1 (1), or 2
(2)
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related AMCCARDTYPE, AMCCARDOPTION Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
NMBRINPT
Number of Inputs
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any box type's digital input(s)
l DI FFB of any box type's digital input(s)
This parameter defines the number of inputs for a digital input or digital composite data point. For
HLPIU/DHP DI/DC, the number of both the sub slots should be given, as the sub slots need not be
sequential. For AMC DI/DC, if a value of “2” is entered for this parameter (to specify that two inputs
apply), the system automatically assigns the number of the second sub slot as described for the
INPTSUBSLOTNUM (Input sub slot) parameter.
Data Type Integer Range 1 to 2
Default 1 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related Parameters INSSLTNUM Checkpoint Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
NMBROUTPT
Number of Outputs
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any box type's digital output(s)
l DO faceplate of any box type's digital output(s)
This parameter defines the number of outputs for a digital output or digital composite data point. For
HLPIU/DHP DO/DC, both the sub slots number should be given, as the sub slot need not be sequential.
For AMC DO/DC, if “2” is entered for this parameter (to specify that two outputs apply), the system
automatically assigns the number of the second sub slot as described for the OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM
(Output Sub slot) parameter.
Data Type Integer Range 1 to 2
Default 1 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer / Application Developer Residence EHG
Related Parameters OTSSLTNUM Checkpoint No
NORMMODE
Normal Mode
This parameter defines the normal Mode for the block.
Data Type Enumeration Range Man Auto Cas Bcas None
Default None Configuration Load No
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG Data Hiway (for AMCREG)
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
NORMMODEATTR
Normal Mode Attribute
This parameter defines the normal Mode Attribute for the block.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default None Configuration Load No
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG Data Hiway (for AMCREG)
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l None(0) = Implies NORMMODEATTR is not configured.
l Operator (1) = Operator can supply setpoint, output value, mode, ratio, and bias for a data point
(operator-access level).
l Program (2) = Program can supply setpoint, output value, mode, ratio, and bias for a data point
(program access level).
NOTIFINHIBIT
Notification Inhibit
This parameter lets you inhibit display of notifications associated with the CEESCE and its contents on
the Station's Alarm Summary during simulation.
Data Type Boolean Range True - Inhibit False - Do Not Inhibit
Default False Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence CEE
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
NUMACCRQUAVG
Number Acyclic <parameter> Requests <per second> Average (GEE FB)
This parameter indicates the rolling average of acyclic, peer-peer parameter requests throughput.
Average can be restarted from present by store to STATSRESET. Within EHG, acyclic peer-peer
communication requests are generally used only in connection with redundancy synchronization
maintenance.
Data Type Float Range >= 0.0
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
NUMACCRQUMAX
Number Acyclic <parameter> Requests <per second> Maximum (GEE FB)
This parameter indicates the historical maximum of acyclic, peer-peer parameter request throughput
since last store to STATSRESET. Within EHG, acyclic peer-peer communication requests are generally
used only in connection with redundancy synchronization maintenance.
Data Type Float Range >= 0.0
Default 0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
NUMCCLRQU
Number Cyclic <parameter> Requests <per second> (GEE FB)
This parameter indicates the number of cyclic parameter requests for peer-peer data per second. This
value does not fluctuate in time. Within EHG, cycle peer-peer communication requests are generally
used only in connection with redundancy synchronization maintenance.
Data Type Float Range >= 0.0
Default 0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
NUMNTFRQUAVG
Number Notification Requests <per second> Average (GEE FB)
This parameter indicates rolling average of notification request throughput. Units are notification reports
per second. Averaging restarts from present when STATSRESET is stored.
Data Type Float Range >= 0.0
Default 0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
NUMNTFRQUMAX
Number Notification Requests <per second> Maximum (GEE FB)
This parameter indicates the historical maximum of notification request throughput since last store of
STATSRESET. Units are notification reports per second.
Data Type Float Range >= 0.0
Default 0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
NUMPARRSPAVG
Number Parameter Responses <per second> Average (GEE FB)
This parameter gives a running time average of the number of parameter get/store responses per
second serviced by GEE. Units are parameter responses per second. Averaging restarts from the
moment the parameter, STATSRESET is stored. Characteristic time constant of the average is 1 minute.
Wait for two to three minutes to be sure averaging has fully settled.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Float Range >= 0.0
Default 0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
NUMPARRSPMAX
Number Parameter Responses <per second> Maximum (GEE FB)
This parameter gives a historical maximum of the number of parameter get/store responses per second
serviced by GEE. Units are parameter responses per second. The search for maximum restarts from the
when parameter STATSRESET is stored.
Data Type Float Range >= 0.0
Default 0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
1.2.14 -O-
OP
Digital Output Value
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any box type's digital output(s)
l DO faceplate of any box type's digital output(s)
This parameter is the current output state of the specified digital output or digital composite data point.
Output state can also be supplied by the operator, or by sequence (if it is a AMC digital output)
depending on the mode of the point.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed below.
Default NA Configuration Load No
Access Lock Operator Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range:
For a data point with a single output:
0 = STATE 1
1 = STATE 2
For a data point with dual outputs:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
0 = Neither STATE 1 nor STATE 2
1 = STATE 1
2 = STATE 2
3= Both STATE 1 and STATE 2
Output Value for Analog and Regulatory Data Points
This parameter is the current output value (in percentage) of the specified analog or regulatory data
point. An operator can also supply output value, by a TPS module, or by CL/AMC (if it is an AMC data
point) depending on the mode of the data point.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to
106.86%
Default 0.0 Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Operator Residence
Related See the AVCONV and AV parameters that apply to Checkpoint No
Parameters the DHP Counter Data Point
To update the value in this parameter, unless BOXSTAT contains Idle or Reset, MODE must contain
Man. If a program or continuous control is to update the value in this parameter, HWYCTLST (for this
hiway) and BOXFSTAT (for this box) must contain “Full.”
Overwrite Accumulator
FFB Applicability:
l CO FFB of DHP counter
A DHP scan puts the contents of a PLC register into the Accumulated Value (AV), after scaling by the
AVCONV parameter. When the operator writes to the OP parameter, the DHP internally writes to the
PLC's corresponding accumulator counter register. The value written is the reverse computed integer
value of OP/AVCONV. OP has no display and is essentially a write only parameter.
Data Type Real Range 0 to
65535*
AVCONV
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Operator Residence DH
Related See the AVCONV and AV parameters that apply to Checkpoint No
Parameters the DHP Counter Data Point
OPCRDOP
Output Card Option
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of HLPIU digital output(s)
l DO faceplate of HLPIU digital output(s)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter indicates a conflict between the card option configured for the slot and the actual card
option installed in the hiway box slot. OPCRDOP specifies the card option installed in the hiway box
slot. The configured card option is also displayed and the user should be aware of any mismatches.
Data Type Enumeration Range None = Output slot option is not configured.
Pulseout = Pulsed output. Latchout = Latched
Output.
Default N/A Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer / Application Residence DH
Lock Developer / View Only
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
OPNTHR.PR
FFB Applicability:
l Applicable to xxPIU AI FFBs
This parameter indicates the open thermocouple priority.
Data Type Enumeration Range None, Journal, Low, High, Urgent
Default Low Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
OPNTHR.FL
FFB Applicability:
l Applicable to xxPIU AI FFBs
This parameter indicates the existence of open thermocouple alarm.
Data Type Enumeration Range Off, On
Default Off Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
OPNTHR.SV
FFB Applicability:
l Applicable to xxPIU AI FFBs
This parameter indicates the open thermocouple severity.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range 0-15
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
OPHIFL
OP High Limit Exceeded Flag
This parameter indicates whether the output value of the block has reached or exceeded the configured
high limit.
Data Type Boolean Range Off - limit not reached or exceeded On - limit is
reached or exceeded
Default Off Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Residence EHG
Only
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
OPHILM
OP High Limit
This parameter defines the output high limit in percentage. The output limits do not apply when the
block is in Manual mode. However, they do apply when the block is in P-Manual mode (MODEATTR is
Program).
Data Type Real Range -5.0% to 105.0%
Default 105.0% Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock SUPV Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
OPLOFL
OP Low Limit Exceeded Flag
This parameter indicates whether the output value of the block has reached or exceeded the configured
low limit.
Data Type Boolean Range Off - limit not reached or exceeded On - limit is
reached or exceeded
Default Off Configuration No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Load
Access Lock View Residence EHG
Only
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
OPLOLM
OP Low Limit
This parameter defines the output low limit in percentage. The output limits do not apply when the block
is in Manual mode. However, they do apply when the block is in P-Manual mode (MODEATTR is
Program).
Data Type Real Range -5.0% to 105.0%
Default 0.0% Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock SUPV Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
OPSNPD
OP Scan Period (GEE FB)
This parameter defines the frequency at which OP of regulatory FFBs are scanned for OP alarm
detection. This is applicable to all Regulatory FFBs in the EHG. Zero value disables OP alarming for
entire EHG.
Data Type UINT16 Range 0-60
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
OPTOLERANCE
This parameter defines the tolerance limit for a manually entered OP. The difference between a new OP
and a current OP is compared against OPTOLERANCE. If the tolerance is violated in either a positive or
negative direction from the current value of the OP, operator confirmation is required before the value is
stored. A value of 0.0 disables this check.
Data Type Real Range 0 to 106.9
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
ORDERINCEE
Order In CEE (GEE FB)
This parameter is supported for display compatibility only. It has no function in GEE. Though write-able,
its value never changes.
Data Type Integer Range 0
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
ORDERINCM
Order In Control Module (GEE FB)
This parameter sets the execution order of a component block relative to other component blocks within
the same CM. Execution goes in order of increasing value.
Data Type Integer Range
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
OUTIND
Output Indication
FFB Applicability: (Also applicable for Regulatory DFBs)
l AC FFB of any box type's analog output
l AO FFB of any box type's analog output
l DC FFB of any box type's LDO/MDO digital output(s)
l DO FFB of any box type's LDO/MDO digital output(s)
For applicability to digital outputs in DC/DO FFBs, this parameter is used in conjunction with the
PNTOPOP (Output Type). It specifies the output action and the type of output that is to be provided by
the single and dual outputs. It does not apply to pulsed (PDO) type of digital outputs since the hiway box
can only transition these to the “1” state for the pre-programmed time, at which upon expiration the
output returns to the “0” state.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default Direct Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH, EHG
Related Parameters PNTOPOP Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l Direct:
o 4 mA output is displayed as 0%;
o 20 mA output is displayed as 100%
l Reverse:
o 20 mA output is displayed as 0%;
o 4 mA output is displayed as 100%
The references to the state of the Output Relay Coil (energized, de-energized) must be interpreted
differently for the HLPIU, AMC, and DHP as follows:
l HLPIU and AMC — The relay is an integral part of the Output Card in the slot. The terminal panel
has connections to both “Normally Open” and “Normally Closed” relay contacts.
l DHP — The DHP is a communications device that sends messages to the “configured coil” of the
associated programmable controller (or other device) to energize or de-energize the coil. Because
the DHP supports the interface to a wide variety of devices, the user should determine how to
implement the coils in the device by reading the documentation provided by the PC manufacturer.
OUTPTSLOTNUM
Output Slot Number
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any box type's analog output
l DC FFB of any box type's digital output(s)
This parameter specifies the slot number where the output of this data point resides in the file. (For the
DHP, it specifies the software slot rather than the hardware slot.)
Data Type Integer Range See the detailed list
below
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM, Checkpoint No
Parameters OUTPTSLOTTYPE
Range:
For DHP:
l 1-15 when entry for BOXSIZE parameter is Regular
l 1-15 and 17-31 when entry for BOXSIZE is Extended
For HLPIU:
l 1-16 when entry for BOXSIZE parameter is Regular
l 1-32 when entry for BOXSIZE parameter is Extended
For AMC:
l 1-16 when entry for NMBRBCFL (Number of I/O Files) is 1
l 1-32 when entry for NMBRBCFL is 2
Chapter 1 - About This Document
OUTPTSLOTTYPE
Output Slot Type
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any box type's analog input
l DC FFB of any box type's digital input
This parameter specifies the slot type where the input of this data point resides in the file.
Data Type Enumeration Range Analog points: 1,2,3 or 4 Digital
points:1,2,3,4,5,6,7 or 8
Default 1 Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related OUTPTSLOTNUM, Checkpoint No
Parameters OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM
OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM
Output Sub slot Number
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any box type's analog output.
This parameter specifies the output on the selected card (slot) to be used as the output from an analog
or digital data point.
Data Type Integer Range 1,2,3 or 4
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related Parameters OUTPTSLOTNUM, OUTPTSLOTTYPE Checkpoint No
OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM1
First Output Subslot Number
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any box type's digital output
This parameter specifies the output on the selected card (slot) to be used as the output from this analog
or digital data point.
Data Type Integer Range 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 or 8
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related OUTPTSLOTNUM, OUTPTSLOTTYPE Checkpoint No
Parameters
OUTPTSUBSLOTNUM2
Second Output Subslot Number
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any box type's digital output.
This parameter specifies the output on the selected card (slot) to be used as the output from an analog
or digital data point.
Data Type Integer Range 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 or 8
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related Parameters OUTPTSLOTNUM, OUTPTSLOTTYPE Checkpoint No
OVINSS1 - OVINSS8
Slot1 Selection to Slot 8 Selection
This parameter defines the CB slots to provide input signals to the override selector (Overhisl or
Overlosl algorithm). The override selector can handle a maximum of eight inputs. These inputs are the
remote variables or output signals from the respective eight CB slots. The type of input signal that is to
be applied to each slot is specified by the SGNLTY12-SGNLTY78 (Signal Type Slots 1&2 - Signal Type
Slots 7&8) parameters.
Data Type Enumeration Range Nosel - slot does not provide an input signal Sel -
slot does provide an input signal
Default Nosel Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related SGNLTY12- Checkpoint Yes
Parameters SGNLTY78
OVINSS1 - OVINSS16
Slot1 Selection to Slot 16 Selection -
This parameter defines the AMC slots to provide input signals to the override selector (Overhisl or
Overlosl algorithm). The override selector can handle a maximum of eight inputs. These inputs are the
PVs or output signals from any eight of the 16 AMC slots. The type of input signal that is to be applied to
each slot is specified by the OVSGSS1-OVSGSS16 parameters.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range Nosel - slot does not provide an input signal Sel -
slot does provide an input signal
Default Nosel Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related OVSGSS1- Checkpoint Yes
Parameters OVSGSS16
OVSGSS1 - OVSGSS16
Signal Type
This parameter defines the type of signals applied to the inputs of the AMC-based override selector
(Overhisl or Overlosl algorithm).
Data Type Enumeration Range Output Pv
Default Output Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related Parameters OVINSS1-OVINSS16 Checkpoint No
1.2.15 -P-
P2PACCRATE
Peer Access Rate (GEE FB)trip point:
This parameter specifies the alarm trip for EHG peer access rate. Once peer responder rate exceeds
this value; system alarm for EHGFB will be generated and the INALM flag will SET.
Data Type Integer Range 0-1500
Default 1500 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence EHG
PARENTASSET
Parent Asset (All FBs and Modules)
The value of this parameter assigns the FB to a particular area within the operations display server.
Data Type String Range
Default Configuration Load Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PC1ALIVE to PC8ALIVE
Keep Alive Address
These parameters define the keep-alive addresses for the PCs. The keep-alive address is the address
within the PC that must be updated periodically by the DHP, to inform the PC that it is “alive”. If the DHP
is not “alive”, all the output data points (if the PC is configured appropriately) are switched to PC ladder
logic control.
Data Type Integer Range For Allen-Bradley: - 0 to 1777(Octal) For Modicon or
Honeywell: 0 to 9999 (Decimal)
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Residence Data Hiway
Developer
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
PC1ALVBT to PC8ALVBT
Keep Alive Bit Position
This parameter defines the keep alive bit position for the keep alive address of an Allen-Bradley PC.
Data Type Integer Range 00 to 17 Octal
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PC1ALVSP to PC8ALVSP
Keep Alive Specifier
This parameter defines the specifier code for the keep alive address of a Modicon or Honeywell PC (or
the 620 HIM). No entry is required for this parameter because the default value is zero, which is the
required specifier code. This is read only in EHG.
Data Type Integer Range 00
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Read Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PC1PORT to PC8PORT
Port Number
This parameter defines the DHP port assigned to the PC.
Data Type Integer Range 1 (0), 2(1), 3(2), 4(3)
Default 1 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PC1PORTA to PC8PORTA
Port Address
This parameter defines the address of the PC on a DHP port. A zero (0) entry indicates that the PC is
not configured.
Data Type Integer Range 0= Undefined 1 to 377(Octal) for Allen-Bradley 1 to
247(Decimal) for Modicon or Honeywell
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Residence Data Hiway
Developer
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
PC1TYPE to PC8TYPE
PC1to PC8 Model Type
This parameter defines the model type for the PC.
Data Type ENUMERATION Range If Modicon is entered for the BOXPROT parameter:
of PCTYPE Notconfg (0) = Not configured M384 (1) = Model Type
384 M484 (2) = Model Type 484 M584 (3) = Model
Type 584 (Select M584 if Modicon 884 is to be used.)
If Allenbrd has been entered for the BOXPROT
parameter: - Notconfg= Not configured. Aplc (8) =
Model type PLC Aplc2 (9) = Model type PLC2
Aplc215 (10) = Model type PLC215 Aplc220 (11) =
Model type PLC220 Aplc230 (12) = Model type
PLC230 Aminplc2 (13) = Model type Mini PLC2 If
Honeywell has been entered for BOXPROT
parameter: - Notconfg=Not configured Ipc620 (17) =
DHP Supports all Honeywell PC Models and 620
HIM types.
Default Notconfg Configuration Yes
Load
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Application Residence Hiway Box
Lock Developer Only
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
PCADDRI1
Input PC Address
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any DHP's analog input
l AI FFB of any DHP's analog input
l CO FFB of any DHP's counter input
l DC FFB of any DHP's digital input(s)
l DI FFB of any DHP's digital input(s)
This parameter defines the input's address located in the PLC for the DHP's analog/counter, or single
digital input or the first input of a dual digital input.
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed
below
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Developer Residence DH
Related PNTPCTY, SPECIFI1, PCBITI1, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters PCCONFI1
Range:
If Allenbrd has been entered for the PNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter, input PC Address has a range
from 1 to 1777 (octal).
If Modicon or Honeywell has been entered for the PNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter, input PC address
has a range of 1 to 9999 (decimal). The PCADDRI1 parameter works with Specifier Code parameter
SPECIFI1 to determine the address location in the PC as follows:
Specifier code is 3 or 4 as For Modicon 384 and 484, input PC address range is from 1 to 999
defined by SPECIFI1 (decimal). For Modicon 584 and Honeywell 620 LCS, Input PC
parameter in a separate line on address range is from 1 to 9999 (decimal). The selected address is
the configuration form. entered for this parameter.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PCADDRI1, PCADDRI2
l PCADDRI1 - Input 1 PC Address (DHP Digital Data Point)
l PCADDRI2 - Input 2 PC Address
These parameters define the addresses in the PC (or the 620 HIM) of the current states of input 1 and
input 2 for a digital input or digital composite data point. For a digital data point with a single input or
dual inputs, the PC address of the first input (Input 1) is defined by the PCADDRI1 (Input 1 PC Address)
parameter. For a digital data point with dual inputs, the PC address of the second input (Input 2) is
defined by the PCADDRI2 (Input 2 PC Address) parameter.
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed below
Default 0 Configuration Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range: If Allenbrd has been entered for the PNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter, Input PC Address has a
range from 100 to 177717 (octal). This address is divided into two parts as follows (using address
177717 as an example):
The four most-significant digits The two least-significant digits (17) represent the portion of the
(1777) represent the portion of the Input PC Address that is to be entered for the PCBITI1 (Input 1
Input PC Address that is to be Bit Position) or PCBITI2 (Input 2 Bit Position) parameter. This
entered for the PCADDRI1 or portion of the Input PC Address is entered on another line of
PCADDRI2 parameter. Range is the configuration form. Range is from 00 to 17, octal.
from 1 to 1777, octal.
If Modicon or Honeywell has been entered for the PNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter, output PC address
has a range of 1 to 9999 (decimal). The PCADDRI1 parameter works with Specifier Code parameter
SPECIFI1 to determine the address location in the PC as follows:
Specifier code is 0 or 1 as defined by For Modicon 384 and 484, input PC address range is
SPECIFI1 parameter in a separate line on the from 1 to 999 (decimal). For Modicon 584 and
configuration form. SPECIFI2 works in Honeywell 620 LCS, Input PC address range is from
conjunction with PCADDRI2. 1 to 9999 (decimal).
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PCADDRO1
Output PC Address (DHP Analog Data Point)
For an analog output or analog composite data point, this parameter defines the address in the PC (or
620 HIM) of the current output value for this data point.
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed below
Default 0 Configuration Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range: If Allenbrd has been entered for the PNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter, output PC Address has a
range from 1 to 1777 (octal).
If Modicon or Honeywell has been entered for the PNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter, output PC address
has a range of 1 to 9999 (decimal). The PCADDRO1 parameter works with Specifier Code parameter
SPECIFO1 to determine the address location in the PC.
PCADDRO2
Output2 PC Address (DHP Digital Data Point)
For a digital output or digital composite data point, this parameter defines the address in the PC (or 620
HIM) of the current state of Output 1. For a digital data point with dual outputs, the PC (or 620 HIM)
address of Output 2 is defined by the PCADDRO2 (Output 2 PC Address) parameter.
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed below
Default 0 Configuration Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range: If Allenbrd has been entered for the PNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter, output PC Address has a
range from 1 to 1777(octal).
If Modicon or Honeywell has been entered for the PNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter, output PC address
has a range of 1 to 9999 (decimal). The PCADDRO1 parameter works with Specifier Code parameter
SPECIFO1 to determine the address location in the PC.
PCBITI1
1stInput PC Address Extension
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any DHP's digital input(s)
l DI FFB of any DHP's digital input(s)
This parameter defines the address extension of the input address located in the PLC for the DHP's
single digital input or the first input of a dual digital input. It applies when the PLC type is entered as
Allenbrd (Allen-Bradley) for the PCNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Integer Range 00-17
(Octal)
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Developer Residence DH
Related PNTPCTY, PCADDRI1,SPECIFI1, PCCONFI1, Checkpoint No
Parameters PCBITI2
PCBITI2
2nd Input PC Address Extension
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any DHP's two digital inputs
l DI FFB of any DHP's two digital inputs
This parameter defines the address extension of the input's address located in the PLC for the DHP's
second input of a dual digital input. It applies when the PLC type is entered as Allenbrd (Allen-Bradley)
for the PCNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter.
Data Type Integer Range 00-17
(Octal)
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Developer Residence DH
Related PNTPCTY, PCADDRI2,SPECIFI2, PCCONFI2, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters PCBITI1
PCBITO1
1st Output PC Address Extension
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any DHP's digital output(s)
l DO FFB of any DHP's digital output(s)
This parameter defines the address extension of the output address located in the PLC for the DHP's
single digital output or the first output of a dual digital output. It applies when the PLC type is entered as
Allenbrd (Allen-Bradley) for the PCNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter.
Data Type Integer Range 00-17
(Octal)
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Developer Residence DH
Related PNTPCTY, PCADDRO1, SPECIFO1, PCCONFO1, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters PCBITO2
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PCBITO2
2nd Output PC Address Extension
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any DHP's two digital outputs
l DO faceplate of any DHP's two digital outputs
This parameter defines the address extension of the output address in the PLC for the DHP's second
output of a dual digital output. It applies when the PLC type is entered as Allenbrd (Allen-Bradley) for
the PCNTPCTY (PC Type) parameter.
Data Type Integer Range 00-17
(Octal)
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Developer Residence DH
Related PNTPCTY, PCADDRO2,SPECIFO2, PCCONFO2, Checkpoint No
Parameters PCBITO1
PCCONFI1
Input 1 Bad Configuration Status
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any DHP's analog input
l AI FFB of any DHP's analog input
l CO FFB of any DHP's counter input
l DC FFB of any DHP's digital input(s)
l DI FFB of any DHP's digital input(s)
This parameter is a status set by the DHP that indicates if its input for the analog/counter, or single
digital input, or the first input of a dual digital input has been configured properly.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed
below
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related PNTPCTY, PCADDRI1,SPECIFI1, PCBITI1, Checkpoint No
Parameters PCCONFI2
Range:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l Notconfg = this input has not been configured.
l Uncertn = configuration of this input has not been checked.
l Bad = this input has been configured incorrectly.
l Ok = this input has been configured correctly.
PCCONFI2
Input 2 Bad Configuration Status
FFB Applicability:
l DC faceplate of any DHP's two digital inputs
l DI FFB of any DHP's two digital inputs
This parameter is a status set by the DHP that indicates if the second input of the dual digital input has
been configured properly.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed
below
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related PNTPCTY, PCADDRI2,SPECIFI2, PCBITI2, Checkpoint No
Parameters PCCONFI1
Range:
l Notconfg = this input has not been configured
l Uncertn = Configuration of this input has not been checked
l Bad = this input has been configured incorrectly
l OK = this input has been configured correctly
PCCONFO1
Output 1 Bad Configuration Status
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any DHP's analog output
l AO FFB of any DHP's analog output
l DC FFB of any DHP's digital output(s)
l DO faceplate of any DHP's digital output(s)
This parameter is a status set by the DHP. It indicates if the analog output, single digital output, or the
first output of a dual digital output has been configured properly.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed
below
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related PNTPCTY, PCADDRO1, SPECIFO1, Checkpoint No
Parameters PCBITO1, PCCONFO2
Range:
l Notconfg = this output has not been configured
l Uncertn = Configuration of this output has not been checked
l Bad = this output has been configured incorrectly
l OK = this output has been configured correctly
PCCONFO2
Output 2 Bad Configuration Status
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any DHP's two digital outputs
l DO FFB of any DHP's two digital outputs
This parameter indicates the status set by the DHP that indicates if the second output of a dual digital
output has been configured properly.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed
below
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related PNTPCTY, PCADDRO1,SPECIFO1, Checkpoint No
Parameters PCBITO1, PCCONFO2
Range:
l Notconfg = this output has not been configured.
l Uncertn = Configuration of this output has not been checked.
l Bad =this output has been configured incorrectly.
l OK =this output has been configured correctly.
PCNO
This parameter is added to show the status of PC devices on Control Builder and is not a DHP
operational parameter.
Data Type Enumeration Range Device 1 to
Device 8
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Default Device 1 Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related MODELTYPE, PORTNO, DEVADD, Checkpoint No
Parameters KEEPALIVEADD
PCSTATUS
This parameter indicates the status of the PC in DHP.
Data Type STRING Range NA
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PDEVTP
Prealarm Value
FFB Applicability:
l CO FFB of AMC counter
This parameter defines the first alarm trip point for an AMC counter. When the accumulated value is
greater than or equal to the preset value minus this prealarm value, this alarm occurs as a warning.
When the accumulated value (AV) exceeds the preset value (PRESET), an additional alarm will occur.
Data Type Real Range 0.0 to 9999.0
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PEERRDREQDELAYED
This parameter indicates the number of read requests from the PEER source that are not serviced after
one second.
Data Type UINT64 Range >=0
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence CHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PEERWRREQDELAYED
This parameter indicates the number of write requests from the PEER source that are not serviced after
one second.
Data Type UINT64 Range >=0
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence CHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint
PERIOD
(EHG FB, GEE FB, CM, Device FBs)
This is a configuration parameter for execution period in EEs, which supports multiple execution
periods. In EHG this configuration, option is not supported. Parameter PERIOD is supported merely for
consistency in the user view of displays. In the CM, the GEE FB and the EHG FB of the EHG parameter
PERIOD always has the value DEFAULT.
Data Type Enumeration Range Default
Default Default Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence EHG
Related PERIODSEC, GTWBASEPRD of GEE FB, Checkpoint No
Parameters RATE1PERIOD of GEEFB
Range:
Parameter value Enumeration value
Default 0
NONE 14
5mS 1
10mS 2
20mS 3
25mS 13
50mS 4
100mS 5
200mS 6
500mS 7
1sec 8
2sec 9
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Parameter value Enumeration value
5sec 10
10sec 11
20sec 12
30sec 15
1min 16
2min 17
5min 18
10min 19
20min 20
30min 21
1hr 22
2hr 23
4hr 24
8hr 25
12hr 26
24hr 27
PERIODSEC
(EHG FB, GEE FB, CM, Device FBs)
This parameter indicates the execution period of the block. The value of PERIODSEC always matches
the value of the GEE FB parameter GTWBASEPRD.
Data Type Float Range 0.5 to 5.0 seconds
Default 1.0 seconds Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters GTWBASEPRD of GEE FB Checkpoint No
PHASE
(EHG FB, GEE FB, CM, Device FBs)
This parameter is supported for display compatibility only. It has no function in GEE. Though write-able,
its value never changes.
Data Type Integer Range
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range:
If Digin has been entered for PIUCRDTYPE:
l Notifyst = Notify Status
l Chngdect = Change Detect (Latched)
l SOE = Sequence of Events
If Digout has been entered for PIUCRDTYPE
l Pulseout = Pulsed Output
l Latchout = Latched Output
If Counter has been entered for PIUCRDTYPE
l Countr16 = 16-bit pulse counter
l Countr32 = 32-bit control counter
PIUCARDTYPE1 to PIUCARDTYPE32
For the DHP, it defines the type of slot rather than the card type because the slots are software slots
rather than hardware slots.
Data Type Enumeration Range Analogin (0) = Analog Input Data Points. Digin (1) =
Digital Input Data Points. Analogot (2) = Analog Output
Data Points Digout (3) = Digital Output Data Points
Counter (4) = Counter Data Points None (5) = This slot is
not used For LEPIU and LLPIU only Analogin (0) and
None (1) are applicable.
Default None Configuration Yes
Load
Access Application Residence Data Hiway
Lock Developer
Only
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
PIUCARDOP(1..32)
This parameter indicates the Card Option for each DI, DO, CTR type slot in an HLPIU box.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default None. Read from the Box. Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence PIU Box
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Range:
For HLPIU:
l NOTIFYS (0)
l CHNGDECT (1)
l SOE (2)
l PULSEOUT (3)
l LATCHOUT (4)
l COUNTER16 (5)
l COUNTER32 (6)
l NONE (7)
For LXPIU:
l NONE
PIUCARDTYPE(1-32)
This parameter indicates the type of card for each Slot in a PIU box.
Data Type Enumeration Range None, AI, AO, DI, DO, CTR (Only AI & None are
available for LLPIU/LEPIU)
Default None Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Application Residence PIU Box
Developer Only
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
PIUFWPRTNUM
Last three digits of Honeywell F/w Part number 51120xxx. Value is available at PIU DB location /3776. It
is applicable only to Extended PIU Boxes.
Data Type Integer Range 000 to 999
Default 000 Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence PIU Box
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PIUOTDCF
Open Thermocouple Detection Flag
FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of a LE/LLPIU analog input
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter determines whether an open thermocouple condition is to be detected. This parameter
applies to certain sensor types attached to LLPIU slots.
Data Type Enumeration Range Disable - Open thermocouple condition is not to be
detected. Enable - Open thermocouple condition is to
be detected.
Default Disable Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer / Residence DH
Lock Application
Developer
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
PIUREVLVL
This parameter indicates the ASCII code for the alpha revision label. Value is available at PIU DB
location /3776. It is applicable only to Extended PIU Boxes.
Data Type Enumeration Range See Range list.
Default None. Always read from the box. Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence PIU Box
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range:
Parameter value Enumeration
- 0
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 5
F 6
G 7
H 8
I 9
J 10
K 11
L 12
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Parameter value Enumeration
M 13
N 14
O 15
P 16
Q 17
R 18
S 19
T 20
U 21
V 22
W 23
X 24
Y 25
Z 26
PIUSMOTH
Smoothing Coefficient
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any xxPIU analog input
l AI FFB of any xxPIU analog input
This parameter defines the smoothing coefficient used to calculate the filter time constant for a PIU
analog input.
Tf = Ts(1-SMC) SMC, where:
Tf = filter time in seconds,
Ts = scan period in seconds, and
SMC = selected smoothing coefficient.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed
below
Default None Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Residence DH
Developer
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
Range:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l None = No smoothing (1.000)
l Code01 = 0.7500
l Code02 = 0.5312
l Code03 = 0.3750
l Code04 = 0.2656
l Code05 = 0.1875
l Code06 = 0.1328
l Code07 = 0.0938
l Code08 = 0.0664
l Code09 = 0.0469
l Code10 = 0.0332
l Code11 = 0.0234
l Code12 = 0.0166
l Code13 = 0.0117
l Code14 = 0.0083
PIUTYPE
This parameter indicates the type of Equipment. Value is available at PIU DB location /3776. It is
applicable only to Extended PIU Boxes.
Data Type Enumeration Range See Range list.
Default None Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence PIU Box
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range:
l - (0)
l HLPIU (1)
l LLPIU (2)
l LEPIU (3)
l DHP (4)
l DHPII (5)
l - (6)
l DHP_LL_VDBFW (7)
PNTBOXIN
Input PC Box Index
FFB Applicability:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l AC faceplate of any DHP's analog input
l AI faceplate of any DHP's analog input
l CO faceplate of any DHP's counter input
l DC faceplate of any DHP's digital input(s)
l DI faceplate of any DHP's digital input(s)
This parameter defines the index of the address of the PC associated with DHP input.
Data Type Integer Range 1-8
Default 1 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PNTBOXOT
Output PC Box Index
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any DHP's analog output
l AO FFB of any DHP's analog output
l DC FFB of any DHP's digital output(s)
l DO FFB of any DHP's digital output(s)
This parameter defines the index of the address of the PC associated with a DHP output.
Data Type Integer Range 1-8
Default 1 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PNTOPOP
Output Type
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any HLPIU or AMC's digital output(s)
l DO faceplate of any HLPIU or AMC's digital output(s)
This parameter defines the digital output (base) type, of either or latched.
Data Type Enumeration Range Pulseout = Pulsed Output Type Latchout =
Latched Output Type Notcnfg.
Default PulseOut Configuration Yes
Load
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Application Residence DH
Developer
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
The usage relationship (x) by digital outputs in various boxes (DHP, HLPIU, AMC) of PNTOPOP with
MOOUTIND, and OUTIND is as follows:
DHP HLPIU AMC
PNTOPOP -- X X
OUTIND X X --
MOOUTIND X X X
If Pulseout has been entered, also make an entry for the PULSEWTH parameter to specify the duration
of the pulsewidth. For AMC digital output and digital composite data points do not make an entry in
OUTIND parameter if Pulseout is entered.
PNTPCTY
PC Type
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any DHP's analog input
l AI FFB of any DHP's analog input
l CO FFB of any DHP's counter input
l DC FFB of any DHP's digital input(s)
l DI FFB of any DHP's digital input(s)
This parameter indicates the manufacturer of the PLC connected to the DHP for the given counter,
digital input(s), or digital output(s).
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed
below
Default Allenbrd Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Developer Residence DH
Related PCADDRI1, SPECIFI1, PCADDRO1, Checkpoint No
Parameters SPECIFO1
Range:
l Allenbrd = Allen-BRADLEY
l MODICON =Modicon (if GE Series 6 PCs are to be used, select Modicon as the entry for this
parameter).
l Honywell = Honeywell
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PNTSTATE
FFB Point State
FFB Applicability:
l All I/O FFBs
This parameter provides an indication of the FFB's current point state.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default NA Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l Uncertn (0) = No hiway security tests have been performed or hiway status is uncertain.
l Ok (1) = Data point is operating properly.
l Failed (2) = Box has failed.
l Reset (3) = Box is in reset state.
l Idle (4) = Box is in idle state (AMC only).
l Softfail (5) = Soft failure such as A/D drift has been detected in box (AMC only).
l Test (6) = Box is being tested.
PORTNO
This parameter indicates the Port number configured for the PC selected in PCNO parameter.
Data Type String Range Allenbrd, Modicon,
Honeywell
Default ALLENBRD Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related PCNO, PORTNO, DEVADD, Checkpoint No
Parameters KEEPALIVEADD
PRESET
Preset Value
FFB Applicability:
l CO faceplate of any box type's counter
l CC FFB of HLPIU 32 bit counter
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter specifies the value at which a counter data point goes into an alarm condition
(accumulated value exceeds the preset value). If a HLPIU counter, then counter rolls over when the
counter value equals this preset value.
On entry, the real value in PRESET is calculated into counts via AVCONV and AVFORMAT before
storing into box.
The LCN-HG aliases this parameter to the SP. Setting this SP parameter establishes that 100% value
corresponding to the 100% graphic position on the point's detail display. An alarm is generated when
AV equals or exceeds the PRESET (SP) value. The actual implementation of the EHG may choose not
to use a SP alias parameter reference to PRESET.
Data Type Real Range See the list detailed below
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Operator Residence DH
Related Parameters AVFORMAT Checkpoint No
Range:
For DHP Counter Data Point: 0 to 65535
For HLPIU Counter Data Point: 0 to 65535
For AMC Counter Data Point, range depends on AVFORMAT selection as follows:
AVFORMAT Range
D0 0 to 999999
D1 0 to 99999.9
D2 0 to 9999.99
D3 0 to 999.999
If the value entered exceeds the maximum value, the HG clamps it to the maximum value.
PRESLOCK
Operator Preset Change
FFB Applicability:
l CO FFB of an AMC counter
This parameter defines whether the operator is allowed to change the preset value of a counter data
point.
Data Type Enumeration Range Permit = Operator is allowed to change the preset
value. Notperm = Operator cannot change the preset
value.
Default Permit Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer / Residence DH
Lock Application
Developer
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
PRIMODNAME
(Secondary EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the primary EHG's name as displayed on the secondary EHG FB.
Data Type String Range NA
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PSTMODE
Past Mode Recall
This parameter defines whether this data point is to be placed in its previous mode after a power-down
condition has been corrected. This parameter is not applicable when the regulatory data point has been
configured for the Das algorithm for the CB or AMC.
Data Type Enumeration Range Nopastmr - No Past Mode recall Pastmr - Past
Mode recall
Default Nopastmr Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related MODE Checkpoint No
Parameters
PRIADDR (1..8)
This parameter indicates the Hiway address(es) of primary controller(s), associated with the RCD.
Data Type Integer Range 5-63
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read-Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PRINAME (1..8)
This parameter indicates the DFB tag name(s) of the primary controller(s), associated with the RCD.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This information is taken from the primary DFB(s).
Data Type BlockId Range N/A
Default Null Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read-Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PRISTAT (1..8)
This parameter indicates the status of the primary controller DFB(s) associated with RCD Box. This
information is taken from primary DFB(s).
Data Type Enumeration Range *+ UNCERTAIN, *+ RUN, *+ RESET, + RUNSFTFL, +
RUNPRTFL, + IDLE, + IDLEPRTFL, + IDLESFTFL, +
IDLESPF *+ FAILHDW, *+ FAILCOM, + RUNSPF
Default UNCERTAIN Configuration No
Load
Access Read Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
PTNREHGSTATE
This parameter indicates the CPMSTATE of the configured partner. See description of CPMSTATE for
details.
Data Type Enumeration Range NoEE EERun EEIdle EEFail
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
PTNRVISIBLE
This parameter indicates whether the partner node is physically configured and visible. On establishing
the availability of the partner, each node (primary and secondary) sets this parameter to “True.” On
detection of a connection loss or on switchover where the primary node has failed, this parameter is
reset. On manual swap, this parameter continues to hold its last status.
Data Type Enumeration Range Not Applicable, FALSE, TRUE
Default Not Applicable Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PULSEWTH
Pulse Width
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of DHP or HLPIU digital output(s)
l DO FFB of DHP or HLPIU digital output(s)
This parameter defines the pulse width (in milliseconds) of the single or dual outputs.
Data Type Real Range 16.0 to 4096.0 msec for HLPIU 16.0 to 992.0 msec
for AMC
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Operator Residence DH
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
PV (DI)
Current Digital Input State
FFB Applicability:
l All DI and DC FFBs
This parameter provides the current single or dual input state of the specified FFB.
Data Type Enumeration Range For Single Input: 0 = STATE1 1 = STATE2 For Dual
Inputs: 0 = Neither 1 = STATE1 2 = STATE2 3 = BOTH
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Operator Residence DH
Lock
Related DIGALFMT Checkpoint No
Parameters
PV (CO)
Current Value of Counter
FFB Applicability:
l CO FFB of a AMC counter
This parameter provides the (previous scan's) current value of the specified AMC counter that has been
added to AV. The current accumulated value is shown in parameter AV.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 65535
Default NA Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read-only Residence DH
Related Parameters AV Checkpoint No
PV
Process Value
This parameter provides the current value of the PV input of the block, in engineering units.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86% of scale in engineering
units
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock Operator Residence DH
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
PVALDB
PV Alarm Deadband
AI FFB of a DHP or LE/LLPIU analog input.
This parameter defines the alarm dead band for the PV high limit and PV low limit for the given analog
input.
Data Type Real Range 0.00347% to 7.11% of full scale in engineering
units
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
PVAUTO
Process Value Automatic
This parameter is the current PV value (in engineering units) read from the selected Hiway box. This
parameter is used in conjunction with the PV parameter when the PVSOURCE is manual or substituted.
For these values of PVSOURCE, the PV is read/stored to the EHG database; it is not read from the
process box (with the exception of AMC digital input and digital composite data points and PIU mailbox
PVs). This allows the user to see the manual/substituted PV value (PV) and the PV value from the
process box (PVAUTO).
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86% of scale in engineering
units
Default N/A Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related PV, Checkpoint No
Parameters PVSOURCE
PVCHAR
Characterization (General Note)
The following Tables contain the temperature ranges for the PVCHAR parameter that are supported by
the EHG.
Temperature Ranges forPVCHARParameter Entries for CB, HLPIU, and AMC
Entry Degrees in Farenheit Degrees in Celsius
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
Btherm 1472.0 3092.0 800.0 1700.0
Etherm -328.0 1832.0 -200.0 1000.0
Jtherm or Sensr317 -100.0 2000.0 -73.3 1093.3
Ktherm or Sensr318 700.0 2500.0 371.1 1371.1
Rtherm -58.0 3200.0 -50.0 1760.0
Rptherm 32.0 3218.0 0.0 1770.0
Stherm or Sensr320 0.0 3200.0 -17.8 1760.0
Ttherm or Sensr319 -300.0 750.0 -184.4 398.9
Burnsrtd or Sensr322 -300.0 1200.0 -184.4 648.9
Dinrtd -350.0 1200.0 -212.2 648.9
Jisrtd -328.0 1166.0 -200.0 630.0
Radiamat or Sensr323 Sensr322 1100.0 3200.0 593.3 1760.0
Temperature Ranges forPVCHARParameter Entries for LEPIU and LLPIU
Entry Degrees in Farenheit Degrees in Celsius
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
Sensr401 or Sensr501 -328.0 2012.0 -200.0 1100.0
Sensr402 or Sensr502 -101.2 2501.6 -74.0 1372.0
Sensr403 or Sensr503 -328.0 752.0 -200.0 400.0
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Entry Degrees in Farenheit Degrees in Celsius
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
Sensr404 or Sensr504 -58.0 3200.0 -50.0 1760.0
Sensr405 or Sensr505 -328.0 1832.0 -200.0 1000.0
Sensr406 or Sensr506 -58.0 3200.0 -50.0 1760.0
Sensr408 -4.0 176.0 -20.0 80.0
Sensr409 -20.2 219.2 -29.0 104.0
Sensr410 -59.8 480.2 -51.0 249.0
Sensr411 or Sensr511 -300.0 1200.0 -184.4 648.9
Sensr415 or Sensr515 1099.4 3200.0 593.0 1760.0
PVCHAR (HLPIU)
Characterization (HLPIU)
This parameter defines the type of display characterization for an HLPIU analog input or analog
composite data point. Refer to the general note under PVCHAR for a listing of the supported
temperature ranges.
Data Type Enumeration of VALCHAR Range See the list detailed below
Default Undefined Configuration Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint
Range:
l Sensr300 (0) = Unimplemented
l Sensr308 (16) = 0 to 5 volts (+A/D) Linear (Note 2) (LO)
l Sensr309 (17) = -5 to 5 volts (+A/D) Linear (Note 3) (LO)
l Sensr317 (18) = Type J T/C (Note 4) (TD)
l Sensr318 (19) = Type K T/C (Note 4) (TD)
l Sensr319 (20) = Type T T/C (Note 4) (TD)
l Sensr320 (21) = Type S T/C (Note 4) (TD)
l Sensr321 (22) = Square Root (Note 4) (LS)
l Sensr322 (23) = Platinum RTD (Note 4) (TD)
l Sensr323 (24) = RH Radiamatic (Note 4) (TD)
l Sensr324 (25) = +1 to 5 volts (+A/D) Linear (Note 2) (LS)
l Sensr325 (26) = +1 to 5 volts (+A/D) Linear (Note 3) (LS)
l T/C = Thermocouple
Linearization or Display Types are as (Note 1 & 6) as follows:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l LO—Linear Only
l LS—Linear or Square Root
l TD—Temperature Display
Note:
l Sensr300—this code causes the PIU firmware to stop scanning the selected board, effectively
taking the board out of use and enabling the PIU to run with the board removed.
l Sensr308 & Sensr324—Preferred operation (unipolar) with jumper option on ADC card in this
position.
l Sensr309 & Sensr325—may be required if “-5 to 0 volts” or “-5 to 5 volts” ranges are measured.
l Sensr317-Sensr323—These ranges can be measured with the A/D pinned for either Unipolar or
Bipolar.
l If an LO or LS input/sensor type has been entered for this parameter, also make entries in
INPTCOND (Input Conditioning) and PVFORMAT (Decimal Format) lines of the configuration form.
If a TD (Temperature Display) input/sensor type was entered for this parameter, also make entries
in the PVFORMAT (Decimal Format) and PVTEMP (Temperature Display) lines of the
Configuration Form.
l Internal parameter IPCRDTY is displayed as None when PVCHAR = Sensr300. This is compatible
with the TPS Basic and Enhanced Operator Stations that display UNDEF in this case.
PVCHAR (LEPIU)
Characterization (LEPIU)
This parameter defines the type of display characterization for an LEPIU analog input data point. Refer
to the general note under PVCHAR for a listing of the supported temperature ranges.
Data Type Enumeration of VALCHAR Range See the list detailed below
Default Undefined Configuration Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range:
l Sensr500 (50) = Unimplemented
l Sensr501 (51) = Type J T/C (FC)
l Sensr502 (52) = Type K T/C (FC)
l Sensr503 (53) = Type T T/C (FC)
l Sensr504 (54) = Type S T/C (FC)
l Sensr505 (55) = Type E T/C (FC)
l Sensr506 (56) = Type R T/C (FC)
l Sensr511 (57) = RTD 100 Ohms at 0 Deg. C - Platinum (FC)
l Sensr515 (58) = Radiamatic Sensor (FC)
l Sensr516 (59) = 1 to 5 Volt (Normalized) (LS)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l Sensr520 (60) = -5 mV to +20 mV (Normalized) (LO)
l Sensr521 (61) = -10 mV to +40 mV (Normalized) (LO)
l Sensr522 (62) = -20 mV to +80 mV (Normalized) (LO)
l T/C = Thermocouple
Linearization or Display Types are as (Note 1 & 3) follows:
l LO—Linear Only
l LS—Linear or Square Root
l FC—Degrees F or Degrees C
Note:
1 - Sensr500—this code effectively causes the PIU firmware to stop scanning the selected board, taking
the board out of use, and enabling the PIU to run with the board removed.
2 - If a Linear Only (LO) or Linear or Square Root (LS) input/sensor type has been selected for this
parameter, also make entries in INPTCOND (Input Conditioning) and PVFORMAT (Decimal Format)
lines of the Configuration Form.
3 - If a Degrees F or Degrees C (FS) input/sensor type has been selected for this parameter, also make
entries in PVTEMP (Temp Display) and PVFORMAT (Decimal Format) lines of the Configuration Form.
4 - Internal parameter IPCRDTY is displayed as None when PVCHAR = Sensr500. This is compatible
with TPS Basic and Enhanced Operator Stations that display UNDEF in this case.
PVCHAR (LLPIU)
Characterization (LLPIU)
This parameter defines the type of display characterization for an LLPIU analog input data point. Refer
to the general note under PVCHAR for a listing of the supported temperature ranges.
Data Type Enumeration of VALCHAR Range See the list detailed below
Default Undefined Configuration Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Range:
l Sensr400 (0) = Unimplemented (Notes 1 & 4)
l Sensr401 (27) = Type J T/C (FC)
l Sensr402 (28) = Type K T/C (FC)
l Sensr403 (29) = Type T T/C (FC)
l Sensr404 (30) = Type S T/C (FC)
l Sensr405 (31) = Type E T/C (FC)
l Sensr406 (32) = Type R T/C (FC)
l Sensr408 (33) = CJR RTD (FC) (Cabinet Temp.)
l Sensr409 (34) = RTD 10 ohms at 25 Deg. C - Copper (FC)
l Sensr410 (35) = RTD 120 ohms @ 0 Deg. -Nickel
l Sensr411 (36) = RTD 100 ohms @ 0 Deg. - Platinum
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l Sensr415 (37) = Radiamatic Sensor (FC)
l Sensr416 (38) = 2.5 to 12.5 mV (Normalized) (Note 2) (LS)
l Sensr417 (39) = 5 to 25 mV (Normalized) (Note 2) (LS)
l Sensr418 (40) = 10 to 50 mV (Normalized) (Note 2) (LS)
l Sensr419 (41) = 20 to 100 mV (Note 2) (LS)
l Sensr420 (42) = + 12.5 mV (Normalized) (Note 2) (LO)
l Sensr421 (43) = + 25 mV (Normalized) (Note 2) (LO)
l Sensr422 (44) = + 50 mV (Normalized) (Note 2) (LO)
l Sensr423 (45) = + 100 mV(Normalized) (Note 2) (LO)
l Sensr424 (46) = 0 to 12.5 mV (Normalized) (Note 2) (LS)
l Sensr425 (47) = 0 to 25 mV (Normalized) (Note 2) (LS)
l Sensr426 (48) = 0 to 50 mV (Normalized) (Note 2) (LS)
l Sensr427 (49) = 0 to 100 mV (Normalized) (Note 2) (LS)
Linearization or Display Types are as follows:
l LO-Linear Only
l LS-Linear or Square Root
l FC-Degrees F or Degrees C
Notes:
1 - Sensr400—this type causes the PIU firmware to stop scanning the selected board, effectively taking
the board out of use and enabling the PIU to run with the board removed.
2 - Sensr416 through Sensr427 can be used with attenuator daughter boards that can be scaled for the
range of 1V to 5 V.
3 - If a Linear Only (LO) or Linear or Square Root (LS) input/sensor type was selected for this
parameter, also make entries in INPTCOND (Input Conditioning) and PVFORMAT (PV Decimal Format
lines) of the Configuration Form. If Degrees F or Degrees C (FC) input/sensor type was selected for this
parameter, also make entries in PVTEMP (Temp Display) and PVFORMAT (Decimal Format) lines of
the Configuration Form.
4 - Internal parameter IPCRDTY is displayed as “None” when PVCHAR = Sensr400. This is compatible
with the TPS Basic and Enhanced Operator Stations that display UNDEF in this case.
5 - The following sensor type values are applicable only if the “PV Alarm Deadband Enhancement”
option has been purchased. This enhancement requires special firmware in the LLPIU. For the LLPIU,
the enhancement provides a configurable PV Alarm Deadband, as well as the following zero-based
sensor types. Contact a Honeywell salesperson or Project Manager to request a quote for this option
from the Engineering Services group.
PVCHAR (AMC)
Characterization(AMC)
This parameter defines the type of display characterization for AMC analog and regulatory data points.
Refer to the general note under PVCHAR for a listing of the supported temperature ranges.
Data Type Enumeration of VALCHAR Range See the list detailed below
Default Linear Configuration Load
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Engineer Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l Linear (0) = Linear
l Jtherm (1) = Type J Thermocouple
l Ktherm (2) = Type K Thermocouple
l Ttherm (3) = Type T Thermocouple
l Etherm (10) = Type E Thermocouple
l Rtherm (8) = Type R Thermocouple
l Rptherm (9)= Type R' Thermocouple
l Stherm (4) = Type S Thermocouple
l BurnsRTD (6) = Burns Resistance Temperature Device
l Radiamat (7) = RH Radiamatic
l DinRTD (12) = DIN Resistance Temperature Device
l JisRTD (13) = JIS Resistance Temperature Device
If Linear is entered for this parameter, make entries in the INPTCOND (Input Conditioning) and
PVFORMAT (Decimal Format) lines on the configuration form. If an entry other than Linear is entered for
this parameter, make entries in the INPTCOND and PVTEMP (Temp Display) lines on the Configuration
Form.
PVCHAR (CB)
Characterization (CB)
This parameter defines the type of display characterization for CBRVAI data points. Refer to the general
note under PVCHAR for a listing of the supported temperature ranges.
Data Type Enumeration of VALCHAR Range See the Range list
Default Linear Configuration Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l Linear (0) = Linear
l Jtherm (1) = Type J Thermocouple
l Ktherm (2) = Type K Thermocouple
l Ttherm (3) = Type T Thermocouple
l Stherm (4) = Type S Thermocouple
l Sqrroot (5)
l BurnsRTD (6) = Burns Resistance Temperature Device
l Radiamat (7) = RH Radiamatic
Chapter 1 - About This Document
If Linear or Sqrroot is entered for this parameter, make entries in the INPTCOND (Input Conditioning)
and PVFORMAT (Decimal Format) lines of the Configuration Form. If an entry other than Linear or
Sqrroot is entered, make entries in the INPTCOND (Input Conditioning) and PVTEMP (Temp Display)
lines.
PVCLAMP
PV Clamp Option
This parameter defines whether the PV value is clamped when it is outside the configured range
established by PVEULO and PVEUHI.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default NoClamp Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters PVRNGOP, PVEULO, PVEUHI Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Noclamp (0) = PV values outside the configured range are not clamped to the specified extended
range. PV is displayed as “------” (Not A Number).
Clmp (1) = Configured range is clamped to the specified extended range and the clamped value is
displayed for the PV.
Clamp Value Option for Basic Controller 1C (with Input Conditioning Configured for Sqrroot)
PVRNGOP PVCLAMP Actual PV value PV PV Status
indicated/clamped
at
None No Clamp X, where: X< -2.9% -2.9% < =X Nan X Nan Bad Normal Bad
<=102.9% X>102.9%
None Clamp X, where: X< -2.9% -2.9% < =X -2.9 X 102.9 Uncertain Normal
<=102.9% X>102.9% Uncertain
CLMPZERO No Clamp X, where: 0% <= X <= 102.9% x Normal
CLMPZERO No Clamp X, where: -2.9% <= X < 0% 0 UnCertain
CLMPZERO No Clamp X, where: X < -2.9% OR X > 0 NaN Bad
102.9%
CLMPZERO Clamp X, where: 0% <= X <= 102.9% x Normal
CLMPZERO Clamp X, where: X < 0% OR X > 102.9% 0 102.9% UnCertain
FULLRNG No Clamp X, where: -2.9% <= X <= 102.9% x Normal
FULLRNG No Clamp X, where: X < -2.9% OR X > NaN NaN Bad
102.9%
FULLRNG Clamp X, where: -2.9% <= X <= 102.9% x Normal
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PVRNGOP PVCLAMP Actual PV value PV PV Status
indicated/clamped
at
FULLRNG Clamp X, where: X < -2.9% OR X > -2.9% 102.9% UnCertain
102.9%
This table is applicable only when PVSOURCE = Auto.
PVCLAMP (HLPIUAI)
PV clamping option
FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of HLPIU AI
This parameter is used for clamping the value of PV. This differs for various PVCHARS.
EHG does not process PV value from the box if the box has declared the PV value as
UNREASONABLE. In PIUs, the box sets the UNREASONABLE bit in the current value location. So
irrespective of PVCLAMP values, EHG will set the PV to NaN and PVSTS as BAD if current value is
marked as UNREASONABLE by PIU box. LCN-HG behaves in a similar way.
Please refer the attached screen shot from the PIU Guide.
Hence value clamping may not be possible even if PVCLAMP = CLAMP when the input value exceeds
the allowable extended range (that is, -2.9 to 102.9%). This occurs because while PVSOURCE=AUTO,
the box will detect the over range as an A/D converter overflow and set the Unreasonable bit which
forces the PV to NaN.
Data Type Enumeration Range Clamp NoClamp
Default NoClamp Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters PVRNGOP Checkpoint No
PVCLAMP (LLPIUAI)
PV clamping option
FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of LLPIU AI
EHG does not process PV value from the box if box has declared the PV value as UNREASONABLE. In
PIUs the box sets the UNREASONABLE bit in the current value location. So irrespective of PVCLAMP
values, EHG will set the PV to NaN and PVSTS as BAD if current value is marked as UNREASONABLE
by PIU box. LCN-HG behaves in the same way.
Please refer the attached screen shot from the PIU Guide.
Hence value clamping may not be possible even if PVCLAMP = CLAMP when the input value exceeds
the allowable extended range (i.e., -2.9 to 102.9%) because, while PVSOURCE=AUTO the box will
detect the over range as an A/D converter overflow and set the Unreasonable bit which forces the PV to
NaN.This value clamps at the specified value if the PVCLAMP option is Clamp else goes to Nan when
PVCLAMP option is NoClamp.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range Clamp NoClamp
Default NoClamp Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters PVRNGOP Checkpoint No
PVCLAMP (LEPIUAI)
PV clamping option
FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of LEPIU AI
This parameter is used for clamping the value of PV. This differs for various PVCHARS.
EHG does not process PV value from the box if box has declared the PV value as UNREASONABLE. In
PIUs the box sets the UNREASONABLE bit in the current value location. So irrespective of PVCLAMP
values, EHG will set the PV to NaN and PVSTS as BAD if current value is marked as UNREASONABLE
by PIU box. LCN-HG behaves in the same way.
Please refer the attached screen shot from the PIU Guide.
Hence value clamping may not be possible even if PVCLAMP = CLAMP when the input value exceeds
the allowable extended range (i.e., -2.9 to 102.9%) because, while PVSOURCE=AUTO the box will
detect the over range as an A/D converter overflow and set the Unreasonable bit which forces the PV to
NaN.
Data Type Enumeration Range Clamp NoClamp
Default NoClamp Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters PVRNGOP Checkpoint No
PVEUHI
PV Range High
This parameter defines the 100% range in Engineering Units.
Data Type Real Range -9999 to 9999
Default 100.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related Parameters PVEULO Checkpoint Yes
PVEULO
PV Range Low
This parameter defines the 0% range in Engineering Units.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Real Range -9999 to 9999
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related Parameters PVEUHI Checkpoint Yes
PVEXHIFL
Process Value High Limit Flag
PVEXLOFL
Process Value Low Limit Flag
This parameter indicates that the current PV value has exceeded the configured high or low range
(PVRNGOP).
Data Type Boolean Range Off - limit not exceeded On - limit is
exceeded
Default Off Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related PVRNGOP Checkpoint No
Parameters
PVFORMAT
PV Decimal Format
This parameter defines the position of the decimal point for real numbers of the block.
Data Type Enumeration Range D0 (0) - XXXX D1 (1) - XXX.X D2 (2) - XX.XX D3 (3) -
X.XXX AMC Numeric points also support: D4 - XX.XXXX
D5 - X.XXXXX
Default D0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer Residence DH
Lock
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
PVLOALM.FL
PV Low Alarm Flag
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PVHIALM.FL
PV High Alarm Flag
This parameter indicates whether the PV Alarm is currently active for the block.
Data Type Boolean Range Off, On
Default Off Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters PVxxALM.PR, PVxxALM.SV, PVxxALM.TP Checkpoint Yes
PVLOALM.PR
PV Low Alarm Priority
PVHIALM.PR
PV High Alarm Priority
This parameter defines the priority for the PV Alarm.
Data Type Enumeration Range None (0) Journal (1) Low (2) High
(3) Urgent (4)
Default Low Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related PVxxALM.SV, PVxxALM.TP, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters PVxxALM.FL
PVLOALM.SV
PV Low Alarm Severity
PVHIALM.SV
PV High Alarm Severity
This parameter defines the severity for the PV Alarm.
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 15
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters PVxxALM.PR, PVxxALM.TP, PVxxALM.FL Checkpoint Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PVLOALM.TP
PV Low Alarm Trip Point
PVHIALM.TP
PV High Alarm Trip Point
This parameter defines the trip point for the PV Alarm.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86% of full scale of engineering
units, defined by PVEULO and PVEUHI
Default 0.0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer Residence DH
Lock
Related PVxxALM.PR, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters PVxxALM.SV,
PVxxALM.FL
PVP
Process Value Percent
This parameter provides the PV as a percentage of range.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86%
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters PV, PVEULO, PVEUHI Checkpoint No
PVRAW
Raw Process Value
This parameter provides the current value of the PV after A/D conversion, digital filtering, and PV square
rooting.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86%
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related Parameters PV, PVAUTO Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PVRNGOP
PV Range Option
This parameter defines the range of the PV input.
Data Type Enumeration Range None (0) - -6.86% to 106.86% (no clamping) Fullrng (1) -
-2.9% to 102.9% (no clamping) Clmpzero (3) - 0.0% to
102.9% (clamped at zero)
Default None Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer Residence EHG
Lock
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
PVSIGNAL (CBREG)
PV Signal Type(CB Regulatory Data Point)
PV Signal Type - specifies which of the signals is to be applied to the PV input for this slot.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the details listed below
Default PV Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence DH
Related Parameters PVSLTSRC Checkpoint No
Range:
l Output = PV input to this data point is the output from the data point specified by PVSLTSRC.
l Pv = PV input to this data point is the PV at the data point specified by PVSLTSRC.
l Rv = PV input to this data point is the remote variable at the data point specified by PVSLTSRC.
l Lsp = PV input to this data point is the local setpoint at the data point specified by PVSLTSRC.
To update the value in this parameter, MODE must contain Man and INITCONF must contain Noinit. If
you specify ALGIDDAC = Das, this parameter must contain Pv.
PVSIGNAL (AMCREG)
PV Signal Type (AMC Regulatory Data Point)
This parameter determines the signals at the data point (specified by PVSLTSRC) to be applied to the
PV input of a regulatory data point.
Data Type Enumeration Of SIGNAL Range See the details listed below
Default PV Configuration Load
Access Lock Application Developer Residence
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Range:
l Output = PV input to this data point is the output from the data point specified by PVSLTSRC.
l Pv = PV input to this data point is the PV from the data point specified by PVSLTSRC.
l Ai = PV input to this data point is the analog input at the data point specified by PVSLTSRC.
l Lsp = PV input to this data point is the local setpoint at the data point specified by PVSLTSRC.
l Sqv = PV input to this data point is the sequence variable of the data point specified by PVSLTSRC.
To update the value in this parameter, MODE must contain Man and INITCONF must contain Noinit.
PVSLTSRC
PV Input Source
This parameter defines the tag name of the block that supplies the signal to the PV input of this slot.
Data Type FB Name Range See the NAME
parameter
Default Tag Name from Line 1 of the Configuration Yes
Configuration Form. Load
Access Lock Application Developer Residence DH
Related PVSIGNAL Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
The data point that supplies the input signal must be in the same hiway box as this regulatory data
point. The type of signal supplied is determined by the PVSIGNAL (PV Signal Type) parameter.
PVSOURCE
PV Source
This parameter defines the possible values for PVSOURCE.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range list.
Default Auto Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Operator Residence EHG
Related Parameters PVSRCOPT Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l Sub (0) = Substituted; program and continuous control access levels in an AM can be used to
change the PV value of this data point.
l Man (1) = Manual; operator, supervisor, or engineer access level can be used to change the PV.
l Auto (2) = Automatic; the PV value is obtained from the hiway box. Changes to the PV value are not
allowed.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
PVSRCOPT
PV Source Option
This parameter defines the possible values for PVSOURCE.
Data Type Enumeration Range OnlyAuto (0) All (1)
Default OnlyAuto Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters PVSOURCE Checkpoint Yes
PVSTS
PV Status
This parameter provides the status of the PV value for the block.
Data Type Enumeration Range BAD (0) UNCERTN (1) NORMAL (2) MANUAL (3)
INITACK (4) INITREQ (5) INITBAD (6)
Default N/A Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related PV Checkpoint No
Parameters
PVTEMP
This parameter indicates the PV temperature scale for display.
Data Type Enumeration Range FAHRENHEIT (0), CELSIUS (1)
Default FAHRENHEIT Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
PVTP
Analog Target Percent
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of a DHP/HLPIU/LLPIU/AMC analog input
l AI FFB of a CBRV/DHP/HLPIU/LLPIU analog input
l AI FFB of an AMC analog input without accumulation
This parameter is the corresponding percentage for that value in PVTV.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
AC FFB is not permitted to occur with an AMC analog input having accumulation.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86%
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related Parameters PVTV Checkpoint No
PVTRAKOPT
PV Tracking Option
This parameter defines whether PV tracking should be used with the slot. If PV tracking is selected,
when Mode is Man, the slot?s LSP tracks its own X (PV) input.
Data Type Enumeration Range NoTrack Track
Default NoTrack Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related Parameters PV, SP Checkpoint No
PVTV
Analog Target Value
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of a DHP/HLPIU/LLPIU/AMC analog input
l AI FFB of a CBRV/DHP/HLPIU/LLPIU analog input
l AI FFB of an AMC analog input without accumulation
This parameter defines the target (setpoint) value in engineering units for analog input data points and
for the input portion of analog composite data points.
If the AI FFB is of a CBRV then PVTV comes from the RV of that CB slot, not the modulating PV of that
slot.
Data Type Real Range See the list detailed below
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Operator Residence DH
Related Parameters PVTP Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Target value can have a range from -6.86% to 106.86%.
The configured range established by PVEULO and PVEUHI defines value that is entered.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
1.2.16 -R-
RATIO
This parameter contains the ratio value used for Pidratio, Autratio, and Autobias algorithms. When
Mode is Cas, the configured Y input (SP) is multiplied by the value in RATIO.
Data Type Real Range 0.1 to 9.999
Default 1.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock OPER Residence DH
Related Parameters SP Checkpoint Yes
RATE1PERIOD
Rate One Period (GEE FB)
This is a read only parameter, which shows the period at which certain blocks do some of their
processing. Some blocks do all of their processing at the rate of GTWBASEPRD. Others do a portion of
their processing at the rate of GTWBASEPRD and a portion at the slower rate of RATE1PERIOD.
RATE1PERIOD always has a value reasonably close to 5 seconds. However, its actual value is
determined by the best scaling that can be achieved from the value of GTWBASEPRD. For example, if
GTWBASEPRD is 1.0 seconds, RATE1PERIOD is 5.0 seconds. If GTWBASEPRD is 1.5 seconds,
RATE1PERIOD is 4.5 seconds. Units are seconds.
Data Type Float Range near 5
seconds
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related GTWBASEPRD of GEE FB, PERIOD of individual Checkpoint No
Parameters block types
RCASENB
Remote Cascade Enable
This parameter specifies whether supervisory control from an Experion PKS module can be used for the
slot. The local cascade mode is not affected. This is automatically set for Pidcma, Pidcm, and Pidspc
(05, 06 and 07) algorithms, because it uses the hiway based computer mode.
Data Type Boolean Range Off - supervisory control cannot be used On -
supervisory control can be used
Default Off Configuration Yes
Load
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Residence EHG
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
The following comparison of the TPS versus hiway-based modes shows the effect of RCASENB on
supervisory control:
RCASENB Experion Mode Hiway-based Mode
On MAN AUTO BCAS CAS MAN AUTO CAS COMP
Off MAN AUTO BCAS CAS MAN AUTO Not allowed CAS
RCCOMMAND
These commands can be sent to the reserve controller through RCD.
Data Type Enumeration Range SWBACKPRI, STARTRC
Default None Configuration Load No
Access Lock Engineer Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
RCDFWREV
This parameter shows the current RCD firmware revision level number. (Applicable to CBRCD only)
Data Type Enumeration Range 1 to 8
Default 1 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read-Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
RCFWLVL
This parameter indicates the Reserve Controller firmware revision level. (Applicable to CBRCD only)
Data Type Enumeration Range 1C to 23
Default 1C Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read-Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
RCDNAME
This parameter indicates the name of the Reserve Controller Director for a primary controller. The name
is in the format <Control Module Name. Device FB Name>
Data Type BlockId Range N/A
Default Null String Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters BOXRCDAD Checkpoint Yes
RCERRSTAT (1..11/17)
This parameter shows the errors occurred in the reserve controller along with their error codes. A
Maximum of 11 errors can be reported from CBRCD 17 from AMCRCD.
Data Type String Range N/A
Default Null String Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read-Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
RCSTATUS
Redundant Controller Status
This parameter indicates the status of the Redundant Controller. It is an array of string values.
Data Type String Range 0-10
Default “ ” [Blank] Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read-Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
RDNCONFIG
This parameter indicates the redundancy configuration of the EHG. It takes two values: NONREDUND
and REDUND.
Data Type Enumeration Range NONREDUND, REDUND
Default NA Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
RDNROLECHNG
Redundancy Role Change ( EHG FB)
This parameter displays an array of last four reasons for a redundancy role change. The role of an EHG
node may change due to on-process migration, commanded swap, or switchover.
Data Type Enumeration Range NOATTEMPT (0), SWAPCMD (1), PRINOTVISIBLE (2),
PRILONELYFTE (3), PRIDHEBBAD (4), PRIHWYBAD
(5), MIGRATION (6)
Default NOATTEMPT Configuration No
Load
Access Read Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
RDNROLESTATE
Redundancy Role State ( EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the role of the node in a redundant EHG pair.
Data Type Enumeration Range UNDEFINED (0),
NONREDUND (1),
PRIMARY (2),
SECONDARY (3)
Default PRIMARY (for primary EHG) NONREDUND Configuration Yes
(for EHG simulation personality) Load
SECONDARY (for secondary EHG)
Access Read Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
RDNSYNCABORT
Redundancy Synchronization Abort ( EHG FB)
This parameter displays an array of last four results of initial synchronization attempts.
Data Type Enumeration Range NONE (0) PTNERABSENT (1), PTNERNOTCMPT (2),
PTNERSTRTUP (3), SYNCSEQERR (4),
PRISYNCABORT (5), SECSYNCABORT (6),
PRIAPPERR (7), SECAPPERR (8), PRIBUSY (9),
SECBUSY (10), ABORTCMD (11), FTEERR (12),
SECDHNBAD (13), SECHIWAYBAD (14)
Default None Configuration No
Load
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Read Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
Application errors like PRIAPPERR/SECAPPERR and FTEERR are not recoverable. Manual
intervention is required to rectify the error.
RDNSYNCATMPT
Redundancy Synchronization Attempt ( EHG FB)
This parameter displays an array of last four results of synchronization attempts.
Data Type Enumeration Range NOATTEMPT (0), SUCCESS (1), ABORT
(2)
Default NOATTEMPT Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
RDNSYNCPROG
Redundancy Synchronization Progress ( EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the progress of the initial synchronization in percentage.
Data Type Float Range 0.0-100.0
Default 0.0 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
RDNSYNCSTATE
Redundancy Synchronization State ( EHG FB)
This parameter provides detailed information about the synchronization condition of a redundant EHG
pair. RDNSYNCSTATE is a read-only parameter, valid only if MODISREDUN = REDUND.
RDNSYNCSTATE can be viewed from either the primary or secondary EHG FB. It shows the same
value in either place.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the list detailed in the following
table.
Default Not Applicable Configuration Load No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
Range Description
NotInSync Indicates that Primary and Secondary do not have synchronized databases, nor are
(0) they in the process of synchronization. If the Primary fails in this state, the Secondary
cannot take over. This value is a transient state when both the nodes of a redundant
EHG pair are present and functional. This state can be persistent when the Secondary
cannot sustain synchronization. This is the initial state of the Secondary after
configuration/load.
PartnerVisbl A transient state, which indicates that the EHG has detected its partner node on the
(1) FTE network.
SyncInProg Indicates that Primary and Secondary are communicating to create a synchronized
(2) database within the Secondary. If the Primary fails in this state, the Secondary cannot
take over.
SyncMaint Indicates that the Primary and Secondary are fully synchronized. The secondary
(3) database is being updated as EHG resident parameters are written to the Primary from
the supervisory network. If the Primary fails in this state, the Secondary takes over as
Primary. Once the EHG pair enters the SyncMaint state, the Secondary CPMSTATE
becomes Backup. When RDNSYNCSTATE = SyncMaint the secondary EHG is
sometimes referred to as “qualified”.
Stdby (4) This state can only show up in the Secondary EHG. It indicates that the Secondary is
not synchronized with the current database, but if failure of the Primary occurs, the
Secondary will take over using the database it has. This state is used in on-process
SW upgrade scenarios. An EHG, which is not the primary, enters StandBy
automatically when it recognizes that the loaded SW version does not match that of the
Primary.
Nonredund Indicates the EHG configuration is non-redundant.
(5)
NoPartner Indicates the EHG does not have a partner node.
(6)
SyncFail (7) During initial synchronization operation, or during synchronization maintenance, the
synchronization did not go through.
Incompatible Indicates the EHG application on the partner node is incompatible.
(8)
Apperror (9) Indicates that an application error has occurred in the EHG.
Uncertain Indicates the EHG is not configured for redundancy. This is also the initial state of the
(10) Primary on configuration/load until the Secondary is not physically confirmed to be
present by the periodic scan. On detection of the Secondary, this state changes to
NotInSync.
RDNSYNCTIME
Redundancy Synchronization Time ( EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the time last taken for the node to transition from initial synchronization to
maintenance synchronization phase.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Time Range NA
Default Blank Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
REDTAG
This parameter specifies if a “red tag” is in effect for this block. When a data point is red-tagged, OP and
MODE cannot be changed. It is possible that changes to OP could be caused by functions on the Data
Hiway.
Data Type Boolean Range Off On
Default Off Configuration Load No
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
When a data point is red-tagged, all aliases of the data point are automatically red-tagged by the EHG.
REGNAME(x,y)
This parameter indicates the name of the EHG Counter input function block configured for each of the
sixteen slots in an A-AMC. The name is of the form <Control Module Name.fb name>. Note that “x”is the
index for Slot number and “y” is the index for Subslot number.
Data Type BlockID Range N/A
Default Null String Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
RESETCMD
Reset Command
FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of AMC analog input having accumulation
l CC FFB of a HLPIU expanded (32 bit) counter
l CO FFB of a HLPIU normal (16 bit) counter or AMC counter
This parameter allows the operator to reset the accumulating action of the specific input.
Data Type Enumeration Range Reststrt (0) = Accumulator, counter, or timer is
running. Reset (1) = Accumulator, counter, or timer is
stopped. None (2)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Operator Residence DH
Lock
Related STATE, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters STRTSTOP,
PRESLOCK
RNGCODE1
PC Analog Input Range Code
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any DHP's analog input
l AI FFB of any DHP's analog input
This parameter specifies the range that is to be used by the DHP when it converts PC values to B12E
format for the analog input.
Data Type Integer Range 0 = 0-999 1 = 0-4095 2 = 0-9999 3-7 =
Defaults to 0-9999
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Residence DH
Developer
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
RNGCODE2
PC Analog Output Range Code
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any DHP's analog output
l AO FFB of any DHP's analog output
This parameter specifies the range to be used by the DHP when it converts PC values to B12E format
for the analog output.
Data Type Integer Range 0 = 0-999 1 = 0-4095 2 = 0-9999 3-7 =
Defaults to 0-9999
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Residence DH
Developer
Related ROCALM.FL Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Parameters
Data Type Boolean Range Off, On
Default Off Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related ROCALM.PR, ROCALM.SV, Checkpoint No
Parameters ROCALM.TP
ROCALM.PR
Rate of Change Alarm Flag
This parameter indicates whether the Rate of Change Alarm is currently active for the block.
Data Type Enumeration Range None Journal Low High
Urgent
Default Low Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related ROCALM.SV, ROCALM.TP, Checkpoint No
Parameters ROCALM.FL
ROCALM.SV
Rate of Change Alarm Severity
This parameter defines the severity for the Rate of Change Alarm.
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 15
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters ROCALM.PR, ROCALM.TP, ROCALM.FL Checkpoint No
ROCALM.TP
Rate of Change Alarm Trip Point
This parameter defines the trip point for the Rate of Change Alarm.
Data Type Real Range 1.0% to 999.0% per
minute
Default 1.0 % per minute Configuration Yes
Load
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related ROCALM.PR, ROCALM.SV, Checkpoint No
Parameters ROCALM.FL
ROCNEGALM.FL
Negative Rate of Change Alarm Flag
ROCPOSALM.FL
Positive Rate of Change Alarm Flag
These parameters indicate whether the Rate of Change Alarm is currently active for the block.
Data Type Boolean Range Off, On
Default Off Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters ROCxxALM.PR, ROCxxALM.SV, Checkpoint No
ROCxxALM.TP
ROCNEGALM.PR
Negative Rate of Change Alarm Priority
ROCPOSALM.PR
Positive Rate of Change Alarm Priority
These parameters define the priority for the Rate of Change Alarm.
Data Type Enumeration Range None Journal Low High
Urgent
Default Low Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related ROCxxALM.SV, ROCxxALM.TP, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters ROCxxALM.FL
ROCNEGALM.SV
Negative Rate of Change Alarm Severity
Chapter 1 - About This Document
ROCPOSALM.SV
Positive Rate of Change Alarm Severity
These parameters define the severity for the Rate of Change Alarm.
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 15
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters ROCxxALM.PR, ROCxxALM.TP, Checkpoint Yes
ROCxxALM.FL
ROCNEGALM.TP
Negative Rate of Change Alarm Trip Point
ROCPOSALM.TP
Positive Rate of Change Alarm Trip Point
These parameters define the trip point for the Rate of Change Alarm.
Data Type Real Range 1.0% to 999.9% per minute for Positive ROC
-999.9% to -1.0% per minute for Negative
ROC
Default 1.0 % per minute Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer Residence DH
Lock
Related ROCxxALM.PR, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters ROCxxALM.SV,
ROCxxALM.FL
RTRCNFG(I)
Retry Configuration (DHEB EHG FB)
This parameter shows the pre-configured retry limit according to error type. The index selects the type of
error. RTRCNFG() is not a configuration parameter. It is a read-only parameter, which shows values
established using the configuration tool of the DHEB. Possible values of the index and the
corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
0 - Retry limit for BCH errors. This is related to the error called ‘H4’ on BOS displays.
1 - Retry limit for Busy Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H5’ on BOS displays.
2 - Retry limit for No Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H2’ on BOS displays.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
3 - Retry limit for Improper Command Word / User Error errors. This is related to the error called ‘H9’ on
BOS displays.
4 - Retry limit for Echo errors. This is related to the error called ‘H7’ on BOS displays.
5 - Retry limit for Illegal Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H10’ on BOS displays.
6 - Retry limit for Range Overflow errors. This is related to the error called ‘H11’ on BOS displays.
7 - Retry limit for Security Check, BCH errors. This is related to the error called ‘H12’ on BOS displays.
8 - Retry limit for Security Check, Illegal Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H13’ on
BOS displays.
9 - Retry limit for Security Check, No Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H14’ on BOS
displays.
10 - Retry limit for Over Hiway Access errors. This is related to the error called ‘H16’ on BOS displays.
11 - Retry limit for Security Check, Echo errors. This is related to the error called ‘H15’ on BOS displays.
12 - Unused
13 - Unused
14 - Unused
15 - Retry limit for No Grant errors.
RTRCNFG() is derived from the Retries[] fields of the DHEB's DHEBStatus structure.
Data Type Long Integer Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 Index: 0 to 15
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
RTRCNT(I,J)
Box Retry Count (Device FB)
This parameter gives the accumulated count of retries for each type of error experienced by the DHEB
for the box represented by the Device FB. The error type is indicated by the first index. The time span
over which the count has been kept is indicated by the second index.
Possible values of the first index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
0 - Count of BCH errors. This is related to the error called ‘H4’ on BOS displays.
1 - Count of Busy Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H5’ on BOS displays.
2 - Count of No Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H2’ on BOS displays.
3 - Count of Improper Command Word / User Error errors. This is related to the error called ‘H9’ on BOS
displays.
4 - Count of Echo errors. This is related to the error called ‘H7’ on BOS displays.
5 - Count of Illegal Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H10’ on BOS displays.
6 - Count of Range Overflow errors. This is related to the error called ‘H11’ on BOS displays.
7 - Count of Security Check, BCH errors. This is related to the error called ‘H12’ on BOS displays.
8 - Count of Security Check, Illegal Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H13’ on BOS
displays.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
9 - Count of Security Check, No Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H14’ on BOS
displays.
10 - Count of Over Hiway Access errors. This is related to the error called ‘H16’ on BOS displays.
11 - Count of Security Check, Echo errors. This is related to the error called ‘H15’ on BOS displays.
12 - Unused
13 - Unused
14 - Unused
15 - Index normally represents No Grant errors. However, this is meaningless for an individual Hiway
box.
Possible values of the second index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of the
EHG FB.
1 - Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the next
hour.
RTRCNT() is derived from the RetryErrors [], RetryErrCurHr[] and RetryErrHr[] fields of the DHEB's
DHEBBoxErrors structure.
Data Type Long Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 0 to 15 Second
Integer Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
RTRCNTALL(I)
Retry Count All (Device FB)
This is a statistics parameter, which gives the total count of retries for all types of communications errors
experienced by the box. The index indicates the time span over which the count has been kept.
Possible values of the index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of the
EHG FB.
1 - Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the next
hour.
RTRCNTALL() is derived from the RetryErrors [], RetryErrCurHr[] and RetryErrHr[] fields of the DHEB's
DHEBBoxErrors structure.
Data Type Long Integer Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration Load No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
RVSCANPRD
RV Scan Period
FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of CB's RV analog input
This parameter specifies the rate at which the RV input and its target value is scanned. It has a
configurable value of zero that disables scanning. In addition, it has a configurable scanning (enabled)
range of 1 second to 2 hours.
Although RVSCANPRD is floating point, not all the values are permitted. The entry is rounded to the
nearest multiple of GTWBASEPRD.
Data Type Float Range 0 - Scanning Disabled 0.0 to
7200.0 (2 hrs)
Default 60 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Residence EHG
Developer
Related Infrastructure parameter of Checkpoint Yes
Parameters GTWBASEPRD
The EHG Syncfail occurs when CBRVAI is configured with the RV Scan Period lower than Gateway
Base Period. The RVSCANPRD must always be set greater than GTWBASEPRD (1.5 Secs).
1.2.17 -S-
SCANASSOCDSP
SCAN Associated Display (All FBs and modules)
This parameter represents the name of an operations display to be associated with the block.
Data Type String Range
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence SCAN
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
SCANCTRLLVL
SCAN Control Level (EHG FB, GEE FB, CM, Device FBs)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter indicates the control level of the function block in the domain of the operations display
server.
Data Type Integer Range
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence SCAN
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
SCANFREQ (HLPIU)
Scan Frequency (HLPIU)
This parameter defines the rate at which this analog input or analog composite data point is sampled. In
the HLPIU, the maximum scan rate is 400 points/second. The number of data points in a scan class
must be less than the maximum allowed for the scan class. Refer to PIU General Description in the
Product Manual in the BASIC System book set. If too many points are assigned to the faster scan
classes, this could cause a processing-overload condition to occur.
Data Type Enumeration.of SCANFREQ Range See the list detailed below
Default Offscan Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence Data hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l Offscan = No scanning
l Scan60= 60 seconds
l Scan15= 15 seconds
l Scan5= 5 seconds
l Scan1= 1 second
l Scan25 = 0.25 second
l Scan05 = 0.05 second
Reserved = Mailboxing is a technique used to set up a PIU slot as an information transfer buffer. This
way, a computer (which can interface to more than one hiway) can take information from one device on
one hiway and write it to a PIU located on another hiway where it can be viewed by another operator
station which does not have access to the original device.
SCANFREQ (LEPIU)
Scan Frequency (LEPIU)
This parameter defines the rate at which this analog input data point is sampled. In the LEPIU, the
maximum scan rate is 16 points/second. The number of data points in a scan class must be less than
the maximum allowed for the scan class. Refer to PIU General Description in the Basic System Product
Manual binders. If too many points are assigned to the faster scan classes, this could cause a
processing-overload condition to occur.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration of SCANFREQ Range See the list detailed below
Default Offscan Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence Data hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l Offscan= No scanning
l Scan60 = 60 seconds
l Scan15 = 15 seconds
l Scan5 = 5 seconds
SCANFREQ (LLPIU)
Scan Frequency (LLPIU)
This parameter defines the rate at which this analog input data point is sampled. In the LLPIU, the
maximum scan rate is 160 data points/second without OTD and 73 data points/second with OTD. The
number of data points in a scan class must be less than the maximum allowed for the scan class. Refer
to PIU General Description . If too many points are assigned to the faster scan classes, this could cause
a processing-overload condition to occur.
Data Type Enumeration of SCANFREQ Range See the list detailed below
Default Offscan Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence Data hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l Offscan= No scanning
l Scan60= 60 seconds
l Scan15= 15 seconds
l Scan5= 5 seconds
l Scan1= 1 seconds
l Scan25= 0.25 second
SCANGRPDTL
Scan Point Group <display> (All FBs and Modules)
This parameter appears as a configuration entry in the EHG FB configuration form. It allows an on-
process group detail display to be associated with the EHG FB.
Data Type String Range
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence Server
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
SCANPNTDTL
Scan Point Detail <display> (GEE FB, EHG FB, CM, Device FBs)
This parameter appears as a configuration entry in the EHG FB configuration form. It allows an on-
process point detail display to be associated with the EHG FB.
Data Type String Range
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence PlantScape Server
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
SCANTIME
This parameter defines the scan time (in seconds) during which the DHP updates all the PC data points
in the DHP database. A scan time of 0 seconds is considered as being free-running.
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 15 Seconds
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
SECDATA
Back Calculation Out
This parameter provides information to the primary block whose output is storing to this block. The
contained information includes initialization and windup status, among other things.
The user need not configure connections for this parameter or view its contents. The system will
automatically set up all required connections to this parameter.
Data Type Structure Range N/A
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence CHG
Related Parameters SP, OP Checkpoint No
Chapter 1 - About This Document
SECMODNAME
Secondary Module Name
This parameter identifies the EHG FB of the secondary EHG. Only the Monitoring side of CBldr uses it. It
has type BLOCKID so that it may be used to request data from the SR. Parameter SECMODNAME is a
BLOCKID representation of the same string name contained in parameter SECNAMESTRG, which has
type String.
Data Type BLOCKID Range
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence SR
Related Parameters SECNAMESTRG Checkpoint No
SECNAMESTRG
Secondary Name String (Primary EHG FB)
This is associated as the tag name for the secondary EHG FB and the server communicates using this
tag name.
Data Type String Range 16 characters
Default <Name of the primary EHG>SEC Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence SR
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
SETRTRCNFG(I)
Set Retry Configuration
Used to change the default number of retries the DHEB will perform for specific Data Hiway errors, as
well as retry options (uses a DHEB API custom structure). The index selects the retry configuration.
Possible values of the index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows:
0 - BCHerrorRetries
1 - busyRetries
2 - noResponseRetries
3 - userErrorRetries
4 - echoRetries
5 - illegalResponseRetries
6 - rangeOverflowRetries
7 - secBCHretries
8 - secIllegalRetries
9 - secNoResponseRetries
10 - overHiwayAccessRetries
Chapter 1 - About This Document
11 - secEchoRetries
12 - noGrantRetries
13 - maxRetriesAll
14 - retryStartingPoint
Data Type Long Integer Range 0 - 2147483647
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Engineer Residence DHEB
Related Parameters TTLRTRCNT(I,J) Checkpoint Yes
SGNLTY12, SGNLTY34, SGNLTY56, SGNLTY78
Signal Types Slots 1 & 2 - Signal Types Slots 7 & 8 - defines the type of inputs to the override selector
(Overhisl or Overlosl algorithm). Signal type selection is accomplished separately for each pair of slots
(slots 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8).
Data Type Enumeration Range See the details listed below
Default Rv Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence DH
Related Parameters OVINSS1 - OVINSS8 Checkpoint Yes
Range:
l Output = Output signals from the respective pair of slots are to be the input signals to the override
selector.
l Rv = The remote variables at the respective pair of slots are to be the inputs to the override
selector.
SHEDMODE
This parameter defines the Mode to which this block sheds, when communication with supervisory
control level is lost. Box/slot time-out gates are used for monitoring the status of communications with
the supervisory level.
Data Type Enumeration Range Man (0) Auto (1) Cas (2) Bcas (3) None
(4) Normal (5)
Default Man Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only for CB and Residence DH
AMC
Related MODE Checkpoint No
Parameters
Chapter 1 - About This Document
SHEDSTAT
Shed Status
This parameter indicates whether the block has shed to its shed mode.
Data Type Boolean Range On - block has shed Off - block has not
shed
Default N/A Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related SHEDMODE, Checkpoint No
Parameters MODE
SIMCOMMAND
Data Type Enumeration Range NONE (0) SIMRUN (1) SIMFREEZE (2)
SIMDISABLE (3)
Default None Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer/Application Residence EHG
developer
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
SIMENABLE
Simulation Enable (GEE FB)
This parameter enables user to configure on-process or simulation personalities of EHG. This
parameter can be changed only on Project view in Control Builder and the change can be loaded only
when GEE has not been loaded to the Monitoring view.
Data Type Boolean Range True False
Default False Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related Parameters CEESTATE Checkpoint Yes
SIMSTATE
Simulation State
This parameter indicates the current state of the simulation.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range NONE (0), SIMRUN (1), SIMFREEZE (2),
SIMDISABLE (3)
Default NONE Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read only Residence EHG
Related CEESTATE Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
SLOTNO (1-16)
This parameter indicates the Slot Number.
Data Type Enumeration Range See Range list.
Default SLOT1 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Operator Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Parameter value Enumeration value
SLOT1 0
SLOT2 1
SLOT3 2
SLOT4 3
SLOT5 4
SLOT6 5
SLOT7 6
SLOT8 7
SLOT9 8
SLOT10 9
SLOT11 10
SLOT12 11
SLOT13 12
SLOT14 13
SLOT15 14
SLOT16 15
Chapter 1 - About This Document
SLOTNO (1-30)
This parameter is used for selecting a slot for viewing the slot type and the CM configured for that slot.
Data Type Enumeration Range See Range list
Default SLOT1 Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters SLOTTYPE, IONAME Checkpoint No
Range:
Parameter value Enumeration value
SLOT1 0
SLOT2 1
SLOT3 2
SLOT4 3
SLOT5 4
SLOT6 5
SLOT7 6
SLOT8 7
SLOT9 8
SLOT10 9
SLOT11 10
SLOT12 11
SLOT13 12
SLOT14 13
SLOT15 14
SLOT16 15
SLOT17 16
SLOT18 17
SLOT19 18
SLOT20 19
SLOT21 20
SLOT22 21
SLOT23 22
SLOT24 23
SLOT25 24
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Parameter value Enumeration value
SLOT26 25
SLOT27 26
SLOT28 27
SLOT29 28
SLOT30 29
SLOT31 30
SLOT32 31
SLOTNUM
Slot Number
This parameter defines the slot number of the card/box of the Hiway Box in which the block resides.
Data Type Integer Range See the details listed below
Default 1 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence EHG
Related Parameters PNTBOXTY, BOXNUM Checkpoint No
The slot number ranges for the various data points are as follows:
Data Point Type Slot Number Range
CB RV 1-8
CB Regulatory 1-8
DHP AI & AC 1-15, 17-31
DHP DI & DC 1-15, 17-31
DHP Counter 1-15, 17-31
HLPIU AI & AC 1-32
HLPIU DI & DC 1-32
HLPIU Counter & Control 1-32
Counter
LEPIU AI 1-32 (Slots 1 & 2 are in Remote Box 1, slots 3 & 4 are in Remote Box
2, and so on)
LLPIU AI 1-32
AMC AI (W/Accum) 7-8
AMC AI & AC 7-8
AMC DI & DC 1-32
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Point Type Slot Number Range
AMC Counter 1-32
AMC Process Module 1-16
AMC Regulatory 1-16
AI= Analog Input
DI= Digital Input
RV = Remote Variable
AC= Analog Composite
DC= Digital Composite
SLOTTYPE
This parameter shows the type of slot for any SLOTNUM.
Data Type Enumeration Range See Range list.
Default None Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters SLOTNO Checkpoint No
Range:
l REGCTL (0)
l RVAI (1)
l AI (2)
l AO (3)
l AC (4)
l DI (5)
l DO (6)
l DC (7)
l Counter (8)
l MCRegCtl (9)
l BoxSlot (10)
l None (11)
l DDI (12)
l DDO (13)
SOESYNENB
This parameter allows you to enable/disable SOE time synchronizing per EHG
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range DISABLED (0) ENABLED (1)
Default DISABLED Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
SP
Target or Setpoint
This parameter defines the local setpoint (LSP) for a CB and AMC Regulatory block. The SP value must
be in engineering units and can be anywhere from -6.86% to 106.86% of full scale.
Data Type Real Range -9999 to 9999
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Operator Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
To update the value in this parameter the conditions defined below must be met:
Change Permission Chart for CBs:
ALGIDDAC (L) Man (Init) Man Auto Lcas
Rcas Man
Das Pidpl50, 00 0 0 0 0
Pidpl50c, Leadlag, Overhisl, Overlosl Automan 00 0 0 0 0
Pidnorm, Pidratio, 20 2 2 1 0
Autratio, Autobias Pidcm, Pidspc, Pidersgg, Pidersqi 22 2 2 1 0
Pidgap Pidcma
Switch 00 0 0 3 3
Sumrwman, Multwman, 00 0 0 1 0
Cbsumr, Mult, Dividr Sqrtm, Sqrtprod, Sumsqrt, Hisel,
Losel
Key:
Abbrev. Basic System Terms LCN Terms
(L)Man Local Manual MODE = Man
(Init)Man Initialization manual MODE = Man, INITMAN = Init
Man Manual mode MODE = Man
Auto Auto mode MODE = Auto
Lcas Local cascade MODE = Cas, RCASENB = Off
Rcas Remote Cascade MODE = Cas, RCASENB = On
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Values:
l 0 = SP cannot be changed or does not exist.
l 1 = SP can be changed.
l 2 = SP can be changed if PVTRACK = Notrack.
l 3 = SP can be changed if SPSIGNAL = Lsp and SPSLTSRC = (this Tag Name).
SP Change Permission Chart for AMCs:
ALGIDDAC (L) Man (Init) Man Auto Lcas
Rcas Man
Das 00 3 3 0 0
Pidnorm, Pidratio, Autratio, Autobias, Pidcm, Pidspc, 20 2 2 1 0
Pidersgg, Pidersqi, Pidgap
Leadlag, Overhisl, Overlosl, Automan 00 0 0 0 0
Pidcma 22 2 2 1 0
Switch 00 0 0 1 1
Sumrwman, Multwman 00 0 0 1 0
Cbsumr, Mult, Divdr Sqrt, Hisel, Losel
Key: Same as shown above for CB.
SPECIFI1
1stInput Specifier Code
FFB Applicability:
l AC FFB of any DHP's analog input
l AI FFB of any DHP's analog input
l CO FFB of any DHP's counter input
l DC FFB of any DHP's digital input(s)
l DI FFB of any DHP's digital input(s)
This parameter specifies the input type associated with the PLC address of an analog/counter input, or
single digital input, or first digital input of a dual digital input.
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed
below
Default 3 for AI and AC 1 for DI,DC and Configuration Yes
DDI Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Developer Residence DH
Related PCADDRI1 Checkpoint No
Parameters
Range:
For Analog Input:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l 3 Read Only
l 4 Read and Write
For Digital Input:
l 0 Read and Write
l 1 Read Only
For Counter Input:
l 4 Read Only
SPECIFI2
2ndInput Specifier Code
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of any DHP's two digital inputs
l DI FFB of any DHP's two digital inputs
This parameter specifies the input type associated with the PLC address of the second digital input of a
dual digital input.
Data Type Integer Range See the list detailed
below
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Residence DH
Developer
Related PCADDRI2 Checkpoint No
Parameters
Range:
For Analog Input:
l 3 Read Only
l 4 Read and Write
For Digital Input:
l 0 Read and Write
l 1 Read Only
For Counter Input:
l 4 Read and Write
SPECIFO1
1stOutput Specifier Code
FFB Applicability:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l AC faceplate of any DHP's analog output
l AO faceplate of any DHP's analog output
l DC faceplate of any DHP's digital output(s)
l DO faceplate of any DHP's digital output(s)
This parameter specifies the output type associated with the PLC address of an analog/digital output, or
first digital output of a dual digital output.
Data Type Integer Range Analog data point: 4 Digital data
point: 0
Default 0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer / Application Residence DH
Developer
Related PCADDRO1 Checkpoint No
Parameters
SPECIFO2
2ndOutput Specifier Code
FFB Applicability:
l DC faceplate of any DHP's two digital outputs
l DO faceplate of any DHP's two digital outputs
This parameter specifies the output type associated with the PLC address of the second digital output of
a dual digital output.
Data Type Integer Range Digital data point: 0
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer / Application Developer Residence DH
Related Parameters PCADDRO1 Checkpoint No
SPHIFL
SP High Limit Exceeded Flag
This parameter indicates whether the setpoint value of the block has reached or exceeded the
configured high limit.
Data Type Boolean Range Off - limit not reached or exceeded On - limit is
reached or exceeded
Default Off Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Residence EHG
Only
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
SPHILM
SP High Limit
This parameter defines the high alarm limit of the SP in engineering units. SP limits are from -6.86% to
106.86%.
Data Type Real Range -9999 to 9999 Allowable values depend on range
established by PVEUHI/PVEULO in AMC
Default 0.0 Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
SPLOFL
SP Low Limit Exceeded Flag
This parameter indicates whether the setpoint value of the block has reached or exceeded the
configured low limit.
Data Type Boolean Range Off - limit not reached or exceeded On - limit is
reached or exceeded
Default Off Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Residence EHG
Only
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
SPLOLM
SP Low Limit
This parameter defines the low alarm limit of the SP in engineering units. SP limits are from -6.86% to
106.86%.
Data Type Real Range -9999 to 9999 Allowable values depend on range
established by PVEUHI/PVEULO in AMC
Default 0.0 Configuration Yes
Load
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
SPP
Setpoint Percent
This parameter provides the SP as a percent of range based on PVEUHI/PVEULO range in AMC.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86%
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters SP, PVEULO, PVEUHI Checkpoint No
SPSIGNAL
SP Signal Type
This parameter specifies which of the signals is to be applied to the SP input for this slot.
The SP Signal Types are the same as those listed for PVSIGNAL; refer to the description of the
PVSIGNAL parameter.
Data Type Enumeration Range See PVSIGNAL range
Default SP Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Residence DH
Related Parameters SPSLTSRC Checkpoint No
SPSLTSRC
SP Input Source
This parameter defines the tag name of the block that supplies the signal to the SP input of this slot.
Data Type FB Name Range See the NAME
parameter
Default Tag Name from Line 1 of Configuration Yes
Configuration Form Load
Access Lock Application Developer Residence DH
Related SPSIGNAL Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
To update the value in this parameter, MODE must contain “Man,” and, INITCONF must contain “Noinit.”
Chapter 1 - About This Document
SPTOLERANCE
This parameter defines the tolerance limit for a manually entered SP. The difference between a new SP
and a current SP is compared against SPTOLERANCE. If the tolerance is violated in either a positive or
negative direction from the current value of the SP, operator confirmation is required before the value is
stored. A value of 0.0 disables this check.
Data Type Real Range 0 to 9999
Default 0.0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
STATE
Counter/Timer State
FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of an AMC analog input having accumulation
l CO FFB of an AMC counter
This parameter indicates the current state of the given AMC input.
Data Type Enumeration Range See the Range
list
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Residence DH
Related RESETCMD, STRTSTOP, Same enumeration Checkpoint Yes
Parameters as TMST
Range:
l Reset (0) = Data point is in the reset condition.
l Stopped (1) = Accumulation, counter, or timer has been stopped.
l Running (2) = Accumulation, counter, or timer is running.
l Complete (3) = Accumulation, counter, or timer has reached the maximum limit.
l Reserved (4) = Reserved for future use.
STRTSTOP
Start/Stop Command
FFB Applicability:
l AI FFB of an AMC analog input having accumulation
l CO FFB of an AMC counter
This parameter allows the operator to start and stop the given accumulating input.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Enumeration Range Start (0) = Start the counter or accumulator. Stop (1) =
Stop the counter or accumulator.
Default NA Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Operator Residence DH
Related RESETCMD, Checkpoint No
Parameters STATE
SUPPNRPT
Suppress Notification Reporting
FFB Applicability:
l DC FFB of a DHP/HLPIU digital input
l DI FFB of a DHP/HLPIU digital input
This is a new parameter added for EHG (not present in LCN-HG). When set, it suppresses notification
reporting of state changes that occur on the given NSWIT digital input.
Note: When enabled this also suppresses notification from occurring when any alarm condition occurs
on the NSWIT input. This is because NSWIT alarm occurrences are reported via the Command
Disagree Change Report (Class 001, Type 011) only and not in the DHP/HLPIU alarm buffer.
Data Type Boolean Range 0 = Notification of both NSWIT input changes and alarms
occur by causing the DHP or HLPIU to build a
corresponding entry in the Command Disagree Report
buffer 1 = Notification of both NSWIT input changes and
alarms are suppressed
Default 0 (Direct) Configuration Yes
Load
Access Engineer / Residence DH
Lock Application
Developer
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
STATETEXT
FFB Applicability:
l Applicable for DI / DDI FFBs only
This parameter defines the state of different PV values.
Data Type SDENUMERATION Range For DI - LOWER, UPPER For DDI - LOWER,
UPPER, NONE, BOTH
Default Configuration No
Load
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Access Lock Application Residence Server
Developer Only
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
CAUTION
Ensure to enter unique strings for each PV state. If the same string is entered for each PV state,
the resultant behavior of PV and OP would be unpredictable.
STATSRESET
Statistics Reset (EHG FB, GEE FB)
Store to this parameter causes initialization of EHG statistics parameters. This applies to both statistics
values resident in EHGSNI and those residents in DHEB. Reading parameter STATSRESET always
returns a value of OFF.
Data Type BOOLEAN Range On, Off
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Operator Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
SUBSCPERIOD
Subscription Period (GEE FB)
This parameter gives the subscription period for cyclic peer read requests initiated by the GEE. There
are no peer-peer control connections in EHG. Thus, EHG uses peer communication only in connection
with redundancy synchronization and tracking between the primary and secondary EHGs. The value of
SUBSCPERIOD is shown below:
Data Type Enumeration Range Default (0), 10msec (1), 20msec 500msec (6), 1sec (7),
(2), 50msec (3), 100msec (4), 2sec (8), 5sec (9),
200msec (5), 10sec (10)
Default 2 sec Configuration No
Load
Access Engineer Residence EHG
Lock
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
SUBSLOTNUM
This parameter displays the Subslot number associated with the FFB.
FFB applicability:
Chapter 1 - About This Document
l Applicable to all FFBs except CB RV FFBs.
Data Type INT Range 1-4
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Application Developer Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint Yes
SWAPCTRLCMD
Swap Control Command (Primary EHG FB)
This is a button control used for swapping roles of primary EHG and secondary EHG.
Data Type Boolean Range ON, OFF
Default OFF Configuration Load No
Access Lock ENGR Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
SYNCENBLSTAT
Synchronization Enable State (Primary EHG FB)
This parameter indicates the enabled/disabled status of automatic synchronization.
Data Type Boolean Range ON, OFF
Default ON Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read-only Residence EHG
Related Parameters ENBLSYNCCMD, DSBLSYNCCMD Checkpoint No
1.2.18 -T-
T1 (Integral Time)
This parameter defines the integral time for a block configured with a Pid algorithm.
Data Type Real Range 0.01 to 9999 for CB 0.02 to 9999 for
AMC Value greater than 91.02 turns off
the integral action
Default 0.01 minutes per repeat for Configuration Yes
CB 0.02 minutes per repeat Load
Chapter 1 - About This Document
for AMC
Access Supervisor Residence DH
Lock
Related K, T2 Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
T1 (Lag Time Constant)
This parameter defines the lag time constant in minutes for the Leadlag algorithm.
T2 divided by T1 should be less than or equal to 16.
Data Type Real Range 0.01 to 91.02 for CB 0.02 to 91.0 for AMC
Value less than 0.02 turns T1 off
Default 0.01 minutes for CB 0.02 Configuration Yes
minutes for AMC Load
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related T2 Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
T2 (Derivative Time)
This parameter defines the derivative time for a block configured with a Pid algorithm. If the derivative
time is specified as being less than 0.01 minutes (for CB) or 0.02 minutes (for AMC), the derivative
action is disabled.
Data Type Real Range 0.0 to 97.04 for CB 0.02 to
99.13 for AMC
Default 0.0 minutes for CB 0.03 minutes Configuration Yes
for AMC Load
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related K, T1 Checkpoint No
Parameters
T2 (Lead Time Constant)
This parameter defines the lead-time constant in minutes for the Leadlag algorithm.
Data Type Real Range 0.01 to 99.99 for CB 0.03 to
99.99 for AMC
Default 0.01 minutes for CB 0.03 Configuration Yes
minutes for AMC Load
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related T1 Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
Chapter 1 - About This Document
TD
Filter Constant
This parameter defines the filter time constant. A value of 0.0 eliminates the digital filter action.
Data Type Real Range 0.0 to 91.02 minutes for CB 0.02 to 91.0
minutes for AMC
Default 0.02 for AMC 0.005 Configuration Yes
for CB Load
Access Lock Supervisor Residence DH
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
THISNODEROLE
This parameter indicates if the current node is a Primary or Secondary.
Data Type Enumeration Range STANDALONE, PRIMARY
SECONDARY
Default STANDALONE Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Checkpoint Yes
Parameters
TOGINTSL(1..8)
This parameter defines which time-out interval (BOXTOG1 (TOG Interval 1) or BOXTOG2 (TOG Interval
2)) parameter is to be used for the specified slot in this box.
Data Type Enumeration Range See Range list.
Default Interv1 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters BOXTOG1, BOXTOG2 Checkpoint Yes
Range:
Interval1 (0) = Time-out interval specified by BOXTOG1 parameter is to be used for this slot.
Interval2 (1) = Time-out interval specified by BOXTOG2 parameter is to be used for this slot.
For HLPIU the range is from 1 - 32.
TOTALMEMINK
Total Memory In Kilobytes (EHG FB)
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Total amount of memory allocated to the pool used for function blocks. Units are 1024 bytes.
Data Type Integer Range
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
TTLERRCNT(I,J)
Total Error Count (DHEB EHG FB)
This parameter gives the accumulated count of each type of error experienced by the DHEB summed
over all boxes on the Hiway. The error type is indicated by the first index. The time span over which the
count has been kept is indicated by the second index.
Possible values of the first index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
l 0 - Count of BCH errors. This is related to the error called ‘H4’ on BOS displays.
l 1 - Count of Busy Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H5’ on BOS displays.
l 2 - Count of No Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H2’ on BOS displays.
l 3 - Count of Improper Command Word / User Error errors. This is related to the error called ‘H9’ on
BOS displays.
l 4 - Count of Echo errors. This is related to the error called ‘H7’ on BOS displays.
l 5 - Count of Illegal Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H10’ on BOS displays.
l 6 - Count of Range Overflow errors. This is related to the error called ‘H11’ on BOS displays.
l 7 - Count of Security Check, BCH errors. This is related to the error called ‘H12’ on BOS displays.
l 8 - Count of Security Check, Illegal Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H13’ on
BOS displays.
l 9 - Count of Security Check, No Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H14’ on BOS
displays.
l 10 - Count of Over Hiway Access errors. This is related to the error called ‘H16’ on BOS displays.
l 11 - Count of Security Check, Echo errors. This is related to the error called ‘H15’ on BOS displays.
l 12 - Unused
l 13 - Unused
l 14 - Unused
l 15 - Count of No Grant errors.
Possible values of the second index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
l 0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of
the EHG FB.
l 1- Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
l 2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the
next hour.
TTLERRCNT() is derived from the BoxErrors[], BoxErrCurHr[] and BoxErrHr[] fields of the DHEB's
DHEBBoxErrors structure.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Long Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 0 to 15 Second
Integer Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
TTLERRCNTALL(I)
Total Error Count All (DHEB EHG FB)
This is a statistics parameter, which gives the total count of all types of communications errors
experienced by the DHEB for all boxes on the Hiway. It is effectively the sum over all Hiway addresses
of the elements of parameter BOXERRCNTALL().The time span over which the count has been kept is
indicated by the index.
Possible values of the index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of the
EHG FB.
1 - Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the next
hour.
TTLERRCNTALL() is derived from the BoxErr[], BoxErrCurHr[] and BoxErrHour fields[] of the DHEB's
DHEBStatus structure.
Data Type Long Integer Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 Index: 0 to
2
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related BOXERRCNTALL() Checkpoint No
Parameters
TTLRTRCNT(I,J)
Total Retry Count (DHEB EHG FB)
This parameter gives the accumulated count of retries for each type of error experienced by the DHEB,
summed over all boxes on the Hiway. The error type is indicated by the first index. The time span over
which the count has been kept is indicated by the second index.
Possible values of the first index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
0 - Count of BCH errors. This is related to the error called ‘H4’ on BOS displays.
1 - Count of Busy Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H5’ on BOS displays.
2 - Count of No Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H2’ on BOS displays.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
3 - Count of Improper Command Word / User Error errors. This is related to the error called ‘H9’ on BOS
displays.
4 - Count of Echo errors. This is related to the error called ‘H7’ on BOS displays.
5 - Count of Illegal Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H10’ on BOS displays.
6 - Count of Range Overflow errors. This is related to the error called ‘H11’ on BOS displays.
7 - Count of Security Check, BCH errors. This is related to the error called ‘H12’ on BOS displays.
8 - Count of Security Check, Illegal Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H13’ on BOS
displays.
9 - Count of Security Check, No Response errors. This is related to the error called ‘H14’ on BOS
displays.
10 - Count of Over Hiway Access errors. This is related to the error called ‘H16’ on BOS displays.
11 - Count of Security Check, Echo errors. This is related to the error called ‘H15’ on BOS displays.
12 - Unused
13 - Unused
14 - Unused
15 - Count of No Grant errors.
Possible values of the second index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of the
EHG FB.
1 - Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the next
hour.
TTLRTRCNT() is derived from the RetryErrors [], RetryErrCurHr[] and RetryErrHr[] fields of the DHEB's
DHEBBoxErrors structure.
Data Type Long Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 First Index: 0 to 15 Second
Integer Index: 0 to 2
Default Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
TTLRTRCNTALL(I)
Total Error Count All (DHEB EHG FB)
This is a statistics parameter that gives the total count of retries for all types of communications errors
experienced by the DHEB for all boxes on the Hiway. It is effectively the sum over all Hiway addresses
of the elements of parameter BOXRTRCNTALL().The time span over which the count has been kept is
indicated by the index.
Possible values of the index and the corresponding data interpretation are as follows.
0 - Count has been accumulated since power-on or since last write to parameter STATSRESET of the
EHG FB.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
1 - Count has been accumulated since the start of the current hour.
2 - Count was accumulated over the last hour. This value changes on the hour and is static for the next
hour.
TTLRTRCNTALL() is derived from the RetryErrors [], RetryErrCurHr[] and RetryErrHr[] fields of the
DHEB's DHEBBoxErrors structure.
Data Type Long Integer Range Value: 0 to 2147483647 Index: 0 to
2
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG (DHEB)
Related BOXRTRCNTALL() Checkpoint No
Parameters
1.2.19 -U-
UACCOMMAND (1..8)
These are the commands that can be sent to the primary controller(s) through RCD.
Data Type Enumeration Range: STARTPRI, DSBLBKUP, ENBLBKUP,
TESTBKUP, BACKUP
Default N/A Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence Data Hiway
Related UACSTATE Checkpoint No
Parameters (1..8)
UNREASALM.FL
Unreasonable Alarm Flag
This parameter indicates whether the Unreasonable Alarm is currently active for the block. The
Unreasonable alarm occurs when either a low alarm trip point has been set above the high alarm trip
point, or a data point has been taken off scan, or the A/D converter has failed for a block.
Data Type Boolean Range Off, On
Default Off Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters UNREASALM.PR, UNREASALM.SV Checkpoint No
UNREASALM.PR
Unreasonable Alarm Priority
Chapter 1 - About This Document
This parameter defines the priority for the Unreasonable Alarm.
Data Type Enumeration Range None Journal Low High
Urgent
Default Low Configuration Yes
Load
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related UNREASALM.SV, Checkpoint Yes
Parameters UNREASALM.FL
UNREASALM.SV
Unreasonable Alarm Severity
This parameter defines the severity for the Unreasonable Alarm.
Data Type Integer Range 0 to 15
Default 0 Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters UNREASALM.PR, UNREASALM.FL Checkpoint Yes
UACSTATE (1..8)
The status of the primary controller(s) associated with the RCD Box.
Data Type Enumeration Range *+ NORMAL, *+ DISABLED, *+ TEST, *+ SAVE
+SOFTSAVE
Default N/A Configuration No
Load
Access Lock Read Only Residence Data Hiway
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
* - Supported by CBRCD DFB only.
+ - Supported by AMCRCD DFB only.
*+ - Supported by AMCRCD and CBRCD DFBs.
UNITTEXT
Unit Text (CM)
This parameter holds a text label, which can be used to associate the block and all events generated by
its component blocks with a particular unit.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type String Range 2 characters
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Operator Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
UPGRADESTATE
Upgrade State ( EHG FB)
The UPGRADESTATE is a read-only parameter of the EHG FB. It provides information about the
upgrade state of the EHG during an on-process software upgrade.
Data Type Enumeration Range None (0), VerMatch (1), NewVerDBNull (2),
NewVerDBPrimed (3), OldVerDBNull (4),
OldVerDBPrimed (5), IncompatiblePartner (6)
Default None Configuration No
Load
Access Read Only Residence EHG
Lock
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
None: Indicates that there is no applicable software upgrade performed during that time. The primary
EHG always shows a value of None for UPGRADESTATE.
VerMatch: Indicates that software version installed on the secondary EHG and the primary EHG are the
same.
NewVerDBNull: Indicates that the secondary EHG has a new version of the software and the primary
has an older version of the software. It also indicates that the secondary EHG's database is empty. This
state is transient and occurs just after a new version is installed on the secondary EHG and its database
is not loaded.
NewVerDBPrimed: Indicates that the secondary EHG has a new version of the software installed and its
database is loaded.
OldVerDBNull: Indicates that the secondary EHG has an older version of the software installed and its
database is empty.
OldVerDBPrimed: Indicates that the secondary EHG has an older version of the software and its
database is loaded.
USEDMEMINK
Used Memory In Kilobytes (EHG FB)
Total amount of memory already used within the pool allocated for function blocks. Units are 1024
bytes.
Data Type Integer Range
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Default Configuration Load No
Access Lock Read Only Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
1.2.20 -V-
VERSION
(CM, GEE FB)
This text parameter can be used by application developers to record information about the engineering
version of the control strategy contained within the block.
Data Type String Range 7 characters
Default Configuration Load Yes
Access Lock Engineer Residence EHG
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
1.2.21 -X-
XINPUT
Configured X Input
This parameter provides the current value of the X (PV) input for the LeadLag algorithm.
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86%
Default N/A Configuration Load No
Access Lock View Only Residence DH
Related Parameters Checkpoint No
1.2.22 -Y-
Y Input
This parameter provides the current value of the Y input in engineering units.
Chapter 1 - About This Document
Data Type Real Range -6.86% to 106.86% percent of scale in
engineering units
Default N/A Configuration No
Load
Access Lock View Residence DH
Only
Related Checkpoint No
Parameters
1.3 Template Defining tab
This form allows you to view and configure information specific to defining the parameters for a template
configuration of the block. You must have the Template license to use this form. Enter the necessary
configuration parameters on the form, then click OK to enter the configuration and return to the Control
Builder application frame window.
CHAPTER
2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS
2.1 Component Categories and Types 243
2.2 Hardware relation category 243
2.2.1 Physical equipment block types 244
2.3 Functional relation category 246
2.3.1 Functional block types 246
2.4 Component Libraries 248
2.4.1 Auxiliary (AUXILIARY) Library 248
2.4.2 Device Control (DEVCTL) Library 248
2.4.3 Data Acquisition (DATAACQ) Library 248
2.4.4 Input/Output Channel (IOCHANNEL) Library 249
2.4.5 Exchange Library (ControlNet Interoperability) 249
2.4.6 Pulse Input Channel/Module Library 249
2.4.7 Input/Output Module (IOMODULE) library 249
2.4.8 Logic (LOGIC) Library 252
2.4.9 Math (MATH) Library 252
2.4.10 Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI) 253
2.4.11 Power Generation (POWERGEN) library 253
2.4.12 Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO) 253
2.4.13 Series C Input/Output Library 255
2.4.14 Regulatory Control (REGCTL) library 257
2.4.15 Sequential Control Module (SCM) library 258
2.4.16 System (SYSTEM) Library 258
2.4.17 Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Library 258
2.4.18 Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Library 258
2.4.19 Utility (UTILITY) Library 259
2.4.20 Rail I/O Modules -Series H (RAIL_IO_HAZ) Library 259
2.4.21 HART I/O Modules (HARTIO) Library 259
2.4.22 DeviceNet Interface (DNETIF) Library 259
2.4.23 PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library 259
2.4.24 Rail I/O Modules - Series A (RAIL_IO) Library 260
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
2.1 Component Categories and Types
We divide the Control Builder components into these two major categories:
l Functional relation category
l Hardware relation category
2.2 Hardware relation category
The hardware relation category includes the physical equipment block types provided in Control
Builder. These block types let you quickly integrate the related control hardware into your control
strategy. The following figures show the physical equipment that relates to the corresponding hardware
covered in this document for a typical non-redundant system and redundant system.
Figure 2.1 Physical Equipment reference for corresponding hardware in typical non-redundant system
architecture
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
Figure 2.2 Physical Equipment reference for corresponding hardware in typical redundant system
architecture
2.2.1 Physical equipment block types
Table 1 identifies the physical equipment block types provided to represent corresponding major control
hardware components. The Control Execution Environment (CEE) block is included as one of these
block types because of its relationship with the Control Processor, although it is a functional type more
than a physical one.
Table 2.1 Physical equipment block types.
Physical Equipment Blocks
Type Description
Control Processor Defines name/location and Control Execution Environment (CEE) assignment
Module Block for Primary and Secondary CPMs in connected C200 Controllers. This CPM is
redundancy compliant.
Control Execution Supports block execution and communications in given CPM.
Environment Block
Input Type I/O Provides links for I/O channels to interface physical I/O module to given
Module Blocks Control Processor Module. This includes Series R, Series H, Series A and
HART Input modules.
Output Type I/O Provides links for I/O channels to interface physical I/O module to given
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
Physical Equipment Blocks
Type Description
Module Blocks Control Processor Module. This includes Series R, Series H, Series A and
HART Output modules.
Pulse Input Module Serves as the interface board between the C200 Process Controller and field
Block TC- transducers such as tachometers, flow meters, and magnetic pickups.
MDP081/TK-
MDP081
Pulse Input Module Serves as an interface between the C300 Controller and pulsed output
Block CC-PPIX01 transducers such as tachometers, flow meters, and magnetic pickups.
Redundancy Module Defines name/location of Primary and Secondary Redundancy Modules in
Block Redundant Chassis Pair. This module is redundancy compliant.
Fault Tolerant Provides link to Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE) supervisory network. This
Ethernet Bridge includes C200 Process Controller and Fieldbus Interface Module chassis.
Module Block
Serial Interface Provides configuration and communication software to enable devices to
Module (SIM) I/O communicate via an ASCII serial protocol to perform bi-directional data
Module Block exchange directly with the Control Processor.
Input/Output Link Provides links for Process Manager I/O channels to interface physical
Interface Module Input/Output Processors (IOPs) to given controller.
Block
Input/Output Link Supports interface communications in given IOLIM.
Block
IOLINK Block (C300 - Defines communication path to external OPC server.
20mS CEE)
Inter Cluster Makes CDA data from one Experion cluster available to a second Experion
Gateway Block cluster, allowing regulatory control cascades to span separate Experion
clusters
Process Manager Provides links for I/O channels to interface physical I/O Processors to given I/O
Input/Output (PMIO) Link Interface Module.
Blocks
Series C Input/Output Provides links for Series C I/O channels to interface Series C I/O modules with
(I/O) Blocks Series 8 the C300.
Input/Output (I/O)
Blocks
Speed Protection Provides links to Honeywell's Safety Manager as well as Modbus TCP native
Module (SPM) devices and serial RTU devices through a Modbus TCP gateway/bridge.
ELCN Bridge Provides parameters and properties of the redundant ELCN Bridge to
(ELCN_BRG) Block configure its hardware, commands to control its redundant operation, statistics
to view its performance, and indication of soft failures.
ELCN Node (ELCN_ Provides parameters and properties of an ELCN Appliance Node (such as the
NODE) Block ENIM and AM) to configure its hardware, commands to control its redundant
operation (if redundant), statistics to view its performance, and indication of
soft failures.
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
2.3 Functional relation category
Our Control Builder application includes comprehensive libraries of function blocks that streamline the
control strategy configuration process. You simply “drag and drop” selected blocks into a Control
Module and/or Sequential Control Module container to emulate the necessary functional requirements
of your process.
Please refer to Control Building Guide for details about how to configure a control strategy.
The functional relation category conveniently groups function blocks according to a related functional
block type or component library. The component libraries provide a convenient way to group related
function blocks for easy access and reference.
Figure 3 shows the general graphic orientation and Windows look-and-feel of the Control Builder
application for reference.
Figure 2.3 Typical view of control module configuration in Control Builder.
2.3.1 Functional block types
Table 2 identifies the functional block types used to represent a group of corresponding function blocks
provided in Control Builder. These block types are used as a way to simplify information retrieval for a
given function block, and do not necessarily correspond to an actual Control Builder function.
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
Table 2.2 Functional block types
Functional Block
Type Description
Auxiliary Blocks Includes block types for performing auxiliary control functions, such as: calculation,
general linearization and totalization.
Data Acquisition Provides signal conditioning for a process input value from another function block.
Block
Device Control Provides a multi-input/multi-output function that provides an interface to discrete
Block devices such as motors, pumps, solenoid valves, and motor-operated valves.
IO Channel Includes channel block types (analog input, analog output, digital input, digital
Blocks output, pulse width modulator) to represent I/O points that are device independent;
each I/O channel type has a standard interface with control function blocks. This
category also includes array channel blocks to support communications with the
associated Serial Interface Module and the connected Field Terminal Assembly
(FTA) device. You assign an array channel block to one of the SIM block's 32
channels as well as designating which of the two FTAs it is associated with. The
array channel block types are flag, numeric, and text.
HART DEVICE Provides a standard interface to the HART AI module TC-HAI081and HART AO
Block module TC-HAO081.
Pulse Input Provides a standard interface to the Pulse Input Module TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081.
Channel/Module
Blocks
Exchange Includes block types for performing ControlNet Interoperability functions, such as:
Blocks Flag, Numeric and Text storage.
(ControlNet
Interoperability)
Logic Blocks Provides a set of Boolean, selection and comparison functions to be used as a
basis for integrated logic control.
Math Blocks Provides a set of math functions to be used for basic calculations.
Power Includes block types for building control strategies that support power generation
Generation applications.
Blocks
Regulatory Includes block types for building internal control loops.
Control Blocks
Sequential Includes block types for building a sequential control function.
Control Module
Blocks
System Blocks Control Module (CM) is a Control Builder “container” that uses predefined
continuous (discrete) control function blocks to define a given process control
strategy. Sequential Control Module (SCM) is a Control Builder “container” that
uses predefined sequential control function blocks to define the sequential
operation for a given process control strategy.
Universal Provides a configurable function for creating regulatory control cascade strategies
Control Network between the Application Control Environment (ACE) supervisory controller and
Interface Process Manager controllers residing on a Universal Control Network in a
(UCNIF) Block connected TPS system.
Hiway Interface Includes block types for creating regulatory control cascade strategies between the
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
Functional Block
Type Description
(HIWAYIF) Application Control Environment (ACE) supervisory controller and Data Hiway
Blocks controllers residing on a Data Hiway in a connected TPS system.
Utility Blocks Includes block types for performing utility control functions, such as: status flag,
numeric storage and timer capabilities. Blocks have been added for message,
data array, and parameter type convert support.
2.4 Component Libraries
2.4.1 Auxiliary (AUXILIARY) Library
The Auxiliary Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the
subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference Data for
Functional Block Types.
l AUXCALC (Auxiliary l Reference Data for l CTUD (Counter Up/Down)
Calculation) block Functional Block Types Block
l CTUD (Counter Up/Down) l ENHAUXCALC (Enhanced l ENHGENLIN (Enhanced
Block Auxiliary Calculation) block General Linearization)
block
l ENHGENLIN (Enhanced l GENLIN (General l LEADLAG (Lead Lag)
General Linearization) Linearization) block block
block
l ROC (Rate of Change) l SIGNALSEL (Signal l TOTALIZER block
block Selector) block
2.4.2 Device Control (DEVCTL) Library
The Device Control Library includes the DEVCTL (Device Control) block. A detailed description is given
in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference Data for
Functional Block Types.
2.4.3 Data Acquisition (DATAACQ) Library
The Data Acquisition Library includes the DATAACQ (Data Acquisition) block. A detailed description is
given in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference
Data for Functional Block Types.
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
2.4.4 Input/Output Channel (IOCHANNEL) Library
The Input/Output Channel Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are
given in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference
Data for Functional Block Types.
l AICHANNEL l DOCHANNEL
l AOCHANNEL l PWMCHANNEL
l DICHANNEL l SIFLAGARRCH
l SINUMARRCH l SITEXTARRCH
2.4.5 Exchange Library (ControlNet Interoperability)
The Exchange Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the
subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference Data for
Functional Block Types.
l REQFLAGARRAY (Request Flag Array) l RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array)
block block
l REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) l RSPNUMARRAY (Response Number Array)
block block
l REQTEXTARRAY (Request Text Array) l RSPTEXTARRAY (Response Text Array)
block block
2.4.6 Pulse Input Channel/Module Library
l Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff
l Pulse Input Channel
l Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081
l Pulse Input Totalizer
2.4.7 Input/Output Module (IOMODULE) library
The Input/Output Module Library includes the Input/Output Module (IOM) function blocks listed below.
Blocks are identified by the given Honeywell model number. The models with a TC prefix are not
conformally coated and those with a TK prefix are conformally coated. Detailed descriptions are
presented in the following section titled Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types.
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
IOM Function Blocks Number Type Rating Isolated
of
Channels
TC-HAI081/TK-HAI081 (8 channel 8 HART / Non-HART Analog 10 V and 4 Yes
HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Input to 20 mA
Input)
TC-HAO081/TK-HAO081 (8 channel 8 HART / Non-HART Analog 10 V and 4 No
HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Output to 20 mA
Output)
TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 – 1756-IA8D 8 Diagnostic Input 120 Vac Yes
(8 Channel - 120Vac Diagnostic
Input)
TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 – 1756-IA16 16 Digital Input 120 Vac No
(16 Channel - 120Vac Non-Isolated
- Digital Input)
TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 – 1756-IA16I 16 Digital Input 120 Vac Yes
(16 Channel - 120Vac Isolated -
Digital Input)
TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 – 1756- 32 Digital Input 24 Vdc No
IB32/B (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-
Isolated - Digital Input)
TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 – 1756- 16 Diagnostic Input 24 Vdc Yes
IB16D (16 Channel - 24Vdc
Diagnostic Input)
TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 – 1756-IB16I 16 Digital Input 24 Vdc Yes
(16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated -
Digital Input)
TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 – 1756-IF6I 6 Analog Input 10 V and 4 Yes
(6 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA to 20 mA
Isolated - Analog Input)
TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 – 1756-IF16 16 Analog Input 10 V and 4 No
(16 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non- to 20 mA
Isolated - Analog Input)
TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 – 1756- 16 Digital Input 220 Vac Yes
IM16I (16 Channel - 220Vac Isolated
- Digital Input)
TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 – 1756-IR6I 6 Resistance Temperature Resistance Yes
(6 Channel - RTD Input) Detector (RTD) Input
TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 – 1756-IT6I (6 6 Thermocouple Input Low level No
Channel - Thermocouple Input) mV
TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 – 1756-IT6I2 6 Thermocouple Input Low level No
(6 Channel - Thermocouple Input) mV
TC-ODX081/TK-ODX081 – 1756- 8 Diagnostic Output 120 Vac Yes
OA8D (8 Channel - 120Vac-
Diagnostic Output)
TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 – 1756- 16 Digital Output 120 Vac No
OB16I (16 Channel - 120 Vac Non-
Isolated - Digital Output)
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
IOM Function Blocks Number Type Rating Isolated
of
Channels
TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 – 1756- 16 Digital Output 120 Vac Yes
OA16I (16 Channel - 120 Vac
Isolated - Digital Output)
TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 – 1756- 16 Diagnostic Output 24 Vdc Yes
OB16D (16 Channel - 24Vdc-
Diagnostic Output)
TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 – 1756- 32 Digital Output 24 Vdc No
OB32 (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-
Isolated Digital Output)
TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 – 1756- 16 Digital Output 24 Vdc Yes
OB16I (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated
Digital Output)
TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 – 1756- 8 Relay Output 24 Vdc Yes
OX8I (8 Channel - 8 n.c., 8 n.o. 5- and
150Vdc, 10-265Vac Isolated - Relay 120/220
Output) Vac
TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 – 1756- 16 Contact Output 24 Vdc Yes
OW16I (16 Channel, 5-150Vdc, 10- and
265Vac Isolated - Contact Output) 120/220
Vac
TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 – 1756- 6 Analog Output 4 to 20 mA Yes
OF6CI (6 Channel - 4 to 20mA -
Analog Output)
TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 – 1756- 6 Analog Output 10 V Yes
OF6VI (6 Channel - 10V - Analog
Output)
TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081(1756-OF8) 8 Analog Output 10 V and 4 No
(8 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non- to 20 mA
Isolated - Analog Output)
TC-MUX021/TK-MUX021 (Up to 32 Up to 32 Bi-directional data exchange Modbus
Array Channel Function Blocks) FTA with devices using ASCII FTA or A-B
Array serial protocol FTA
Points communications
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
2.4.8 Logic (LOGIC) Library
The Logic Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the
subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference Data for
Functional Block Types.
l AND block l MIN block l ROL (Rotate Output Left)
block
l CHECKBAD block l MINPULSE block l ROR (Rotate Output Right)
block
l CHECKBOOL block l MUX (Multiplexer) l RS (Reset dominant SR-
block FLIP-FLOP) block
l CHGEXEC (Change l MUXREAL (Real l RTRIG (Rising edge Trigger)
Execution) block Multiplexer) block block
l CONTACTMON (Contact l MVOTE (Majority l SEL (Binary Selection) block
Monitoring) block Voting) block
l DELAY block l NAND block l SELREAL (Real Selection)
block
l EQ (Equal) block l NE (Not Equal) block l SHL (Shift Output Left) block
l FTRIG (Falling-edge Trigger) l nOON (n out of N l SHR (Shift Output Right)
block voting) block block
l GE (Greater than or Equal to) l NOR block l SR (Set dominant SR-FLIP-
block FLOP) block
l GT (Greater Than) block l NOT block l STARTSIGNAL block
l LE (Less than or Equal to) l OFFDELAY block l TRIG (Rising or Falling edge
block Trigger) block
l LIMIT block l ONDELAY block l WATCHDOG block
l LT (Less Than) block l OR block l XOR block
l MAX block l PULSE block l 2OO3 (2 out of 3 voting)
block
l MAXPULSE block l QOR (Qualified OR)
block
2.4.9 Math (MATH) Library
The Math Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the
subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference Data for
Functional Block Types.
l ABS block l LOG block l ROUND block
l ADD block l MOD block l SQRT block
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
l DIV block l MUL block l SUB block
l EXP block l NEG block l TRUNC block
l LN block l POW block l ROLLAVG block
2.4.10 Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI)
The Peer Control Data Interface Library includes the PCDI device and Array Request Channel function
blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are provided in the following section titled Reference Data for
Physical Equipment Block Types.
l PCDI_MASTER (Peer Control Data l PCDINUMARRCH (Peer Control Data
Interface Master device) Block Interface Numeric Array Channel) Block
l PCDIFLAGARRCH (Peer Control Data l PCDITEXTARRCH (Peer Control Data
Interface Flag Array Channel) Block Interface Text Array Channel) Block
2.4.11 Power Generation (POWERGEN) library
The Power Generation library includes the function blocks listed in the following table. Detailed
descriptions are given in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the section titled
Reference Data for Functional Block Types.
l GRPCAPRBK (Group Capability and l MAINIBV (Main IBV Logic) block
Runback ) block
l HTMOTOR (HT Motor Drive Control) block l SOLENOID (Solenoid Valve Drive Control)
block
l LEVELCOMP (Drum Level Computation) l VALVEDAMPER (Valve/Damper Drive
block Control) block
l LTMOTOR (LT Motor Drive Control) block l STEAMPROP (Steam Property) block
2.4.12 Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO)
The Process Manager Input/Output Module (PMIO) Library includes the Input/Output Processor (IOP)
function blocks listed below. Blocks are identified by block name and by Honeywell model number. The
models with a MU prefix are not conformally coated and those with a MC prefix are conformally coated.
Detailed descriptions are presented in the following section titled Reference Data for Physical
Equipment Block Types.
IOP and Related Number Type Rating CE
Channel Function of Compliant
Blocks Channels
AICHANNEL (PMIO) n/a Represents an AI n/a n/a
block point.
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
IOP and Related Number Type Rating CE
Channel Function of Compliant
Blocks Channels
HAICHANNEL (PMIO) n/a Represents a n/a n/a
block HART AI or non-
HART AI point.
AOCHANNEL (PMIO) n/a Represents an n/a n/a
block AO point.
HAOCHANNEL (PMIO) n/a Represents a n/a n/a
block HART AO or non-
HART AO point.
DICHANNEL (PMIO) n/a Represents a DI n/a n/a
block point.
DOCHANNEL (PMIO) n/a Represents a DO n/a n/a
block point.
HLAI block, MU- 16 High Level 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0.4 to 2 V 4 to 20 Yes
PAIH01, MU/MC- Analog Input mA
PAIH02, or MU/MC-
PAIH03
HLAIHART block, MC- 16 HART Analog 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0.4 to 2 V 4 to 20 Yes
PHAI01 Input mA
LLAI, MU-PAIL01, 8 Low Level T/C, RTD, or Voltage Yes
MU/MC-PAIL02 Analog Input
LLMUX block, MU/MC- 32 Low Level T/C, RTD, or linear mV Yes
PLAM02 Analog
Multiplexer
RHMUX, 32 Remote T/C, Linear mV Yes
MU/MCPRHM01 Hardened
Multiplexer
STI_MV block, MU/MC- 16 Smart Honeywell DE protocol Yes
PSTX03 Transmitter
Interface
Multivariable
AO16 block, MU/MC- 16 Analog Output 4 to 20 mA Yes
PAOY22
AO16HART block MC- 16 HART Analog 4 to 20 mA Yes
PHAO01 Output
AO8, MU-PAOX01, 8 Analog Output 4 to 20 mA Yes
MU-PAOX02, or
MU/MC-PAOX03
DI24V block, MU- 32 Digital Input 24 Vdc Yes
PDIX01, MU/MC-
PDIX02, or MU/MC-
PDIY22
DISOE block, MU/MC- 32 Digital Input 24 Vdc, 120 Vac, or 240 Vac Yes
PDIS12 Sequence of
Events
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
IOP and Related Number Type Rating CE
Channel Function of Compliant
Blocks Channels
DI block, MU-PDIX01, 32 Digital Input 120 Vac or 240 Vac Yes
or MU/MCPDIX02
DO32 block MU/MC- 32 Digital Output 24 Vdc isolated, or 240 Vac/125 Yes
PDOY22 Vdc relay
DO16, MU-PDOX01 or 16 Digital Output 24 Vdc, 3-30 Vdc, 31-200 Vdc, Yes
MU/MC-PDOX02 120/240 Vac, 120 Vac/125 Vdc
relay, or 240 Vac/125 Vdc relay
2.4.13 Series C Input/Output Library
The CEE C300 - 20mS CEE controller does not support PMIO modules.
The Series C Input/Output Module (Series C I/O) Library includes the Series C Input/Output Module
(IOM) function blocks, Speed Protection Module (SPM),and Servo Valve Positioner Module (SVPM)
listed below. Blocks are identified by block name and by Honeywell model number. The models with a
CU prefix are not conformally coated and those with a CC prefix are conformally coated. Detailed
descriptions are presented in the following section titled Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block
Types.
IOM and Related Number Type
Channel Function of
Blocks Channels
AICHANNEL (Series n/a The AI channel block represents a single analog input point on
C) one of the following Series C Processors: AI-HART; AI-LLMUX,AI-
LLAI
AOCHANNEL n/a The AO channel block represents a single analog input point on
(Series C) the Series CAO-HART Processor
DICHANNEL (Series n/a The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on a
C) Series CDI-HV, or DI-24 Processor.
DOCHANNEL n/a The DO channel block represents a single discrete input point on
(Series C) a Series CDO-24B I/O Processor
PI (Series C) n/a The PI channel block represents a single pulse input point on a
Series C Pulse Input Module.
AI-HART CU-PAIH01 16 High Level Analog Input with HART
CC-PAIH01
AI-HART 8U-PAIH51 16 High Level Analog Input with HART
8C-PAIH51
AI-HL 8U-PAIN01 16 High Level Analog Input
8C-PAIN01
AI-LLMUX CU- 64 Low Level Mux Input
PAIM01 CC-PAIM01
AI-LLMUX 8U- 64 Low Level Analog Input Mux
PAIM01 8C-PAIM01
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
IOM and Related Number Type
Channel Function of
Blocks Channels
AI-LLAI CC-PAIM51 16 Low Level Analog Input
AO-HART CU- 16 Analog Output with HART IOP
PAOH01 CC-
PAOH01
AO 8U-PAON01 8C- 16 Analog Output
PAON01
AO-HART 8U- 16 Analog Output, HART Capable
PAOH51 8C-
PAOH51
DI-24 8U-PDIL51 32 Low Voltage (24DC) Digital Input
8C-PDIL51
DI-SOE 8U-PDIS01 32 Digital Input – Sequence of Events
8C-PDIL51
DO-24B 8U- 32 Bussed Low Voltage Digital Output
PDOD51 8C-
PDOD51
PA 8U- PDIP51 8C- 32 Low Voltage Pulse Accumulation Module (24volts DC)
PDIP51
DI-HV CU-PDIH01 32 High Voltage Digital Input (IOM supports both 120 and 240 volts
CC-PDIH01 AC)
DI-24 CU-PDIL01 32 Low Voltage Digital Input (24 volts DC)
CC-PDIL01
DO-24B CU- 32 Bussed Low Voltage Digital Output (24 volts DC)
PDOB01 CC-
PDOB01
SP_AI (Series C) n/a The AI channel block represents a single analog input point on
Speed Protection (SP) Module.
SP_AO (Series C) n/a The AO channel block represents a single analog output point on
the Speed Protection (SP) Module.
SP_DI (Series C) n/a The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on
the Speed Protection (SP) Module.
SP_DO (Series C) n/a The DO channel block represents a single discrete output point on
the Speed Protection (SP) Module.
SP_SPEED (Series n/a The SP_SPEED channel represents a pulse input on the Speed
C) Protection (SP) Module.
SP_SPDVOTE n/a The SP_SPDVOTE channel performs voting logic functionality on
(Series C) the speed inputs.
SVP_AI (Series C) n/a The AI channel represents an LVDT/RVDT input or a single
analog input on the Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module.
SVP_AO (Series C) n/a The AO channel supports unipolar and bipolar current output
besides the standard 4-20 mA analog output supported by Series
C AO-IOM.
SVP_DI (Series C) n/a The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
IOM and Related Number Type
Channel Function of
Blocks Channels
the Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module.
SVP_REGCTL n/a The SVP_REGCTL channel block performs the regulatory control
(Series C) function for valve positioning.
SP IOM CC-PSP401 26 Speed Protection Module (SPM) supports the following channels.
l 8 AI channels (SP_AI)
l 1 AO channel (SP_AO)
l 8 DI channels (SP_DI)
l 4 DO channel (SP_DO)
l 4 Speed channel (SP_SPEED)
l 1 voting logic channel (SP_SPDVOTE)
SVP IOM CC- 8 Servo Valve Positioner Module (SVPM) supports the following
PSV201 channels.
l 2 LVDT / RVDT / Analog input channels (SVP_AI)
l 2 Digital input channels (SVP_DI)
l 2 Servo / Analog output channels (SVP_AO)
l 2 Regulatory control channels (SVP_REGCTL)
UIO IOM CC-PUIO01 32 In the Universal Input/Output Module, each channel can be
configured as one of the following channels.
l Analog Input channel
l Analog Output channel
l Digital Input channel
l Digital Output channel
UIO-2 IOM CC- 32 In the Universal Input/Output Module Phase 2 (UIO-2), each
PUIO31 channel can be configured as one of the following channels.
l Analog Input channel
l Analog Output channel
l Digital Input channel
l Digital Output channel
UIO16 IOM CC- 16 In the Universal Input/Output Module-2 16 Channel (UIO16), each
PUIO51 channel can be configured as one of the following channels.
l Analog Input channel
l Analog Output channel
l Digital Input channel
l Digital Output channel
2.4.14 Regulatory Control (REGCTL) library
The Regulatory Control Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are
given in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference
Data for Functional Block Types.
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
l AUTOMAN (Auto l ENHREGCALC (Enhanced l FANOUT block
Manual) block Regulatory Control Calculator) block
l PIDER block l OVRDSEL(Override Selector) block l PID block
l POSPROP (Position l PID-PL block l PIDFF (PID
Proportional) block Feedforward) block
l RAMPSOAK block l PULSECOUNT block l PULSELENGTH block
l REEOUT (Remote l RATIOBIAS block l RATIOCTL block
EEOUT) block
l REMCAS block l REGCALC (Regulatory Control l REGSUMMER
Calculator) block (Regulatory Control
Summer)
l SWITCH block
2.4.15 Sequential Control Module (SCM) library
The Sequential Control Module Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions
are given in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled
Reference Data for Functional Block Types.
l HANDLER Block l STEP Block l TRANSITION Block
2.4.16 System (SYSTEM) Library
The System Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the
subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference Data for
Functional Block Types.
l CONTROL MODULE block l SEQUENTIAL CONTROL MODULE block
(Continuous Control) (Sequential Control)
2.4.17 Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Library
The Universal Control Network Interface Library includes the UCNOUT block and the EUCNOUT block.
A detailed description is given in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following
section titled Reference Data for Functional Block Types.
2.4.18 Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Library
The Hiway Interface Library includes the function block listed below. A detailed description is given in
the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference Data for
Functional Block Types.
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
l HIWAYOUT block
2.4.19 Utility (UTILITY) Library
The Utility Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the
subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled Reference Data for
Functional Block Types.
l ALMWINDOW (Alarm Window l ANNPANEL (Annunciator l DIGACQ (Digital
- Alarm Annunciator) block Panel - Alarm Annunciator) Acquisition) block
block
l FIRSTOUT (First Out l FLAG block l FLAGARRAY block
Detection) block
l MESSAGE block l NUMERIC block l NUMERICARRAY
block
l PUSH block l TEXTARRAY block l TEXTCOMMENT
(Text Comment)
block
l TIMER block l TYPECONVERT block
2.4.20 Rail I/O Modules -Series H (RAIL_IO_HAZ) Library
The Series H I/O Library includes the IOM blocks associated with the RIOM-H components designed for
use in locations with potentially explosive atmospheres. Refer to the Series H Rail I/O Implementation
Guide for complete details about the Series H I/O Modules.
2.4.21 HART I/O Modules (HARTIO) Library
The HART I/O Library includes the interface blocks for linking HART compatible devices with the
Experion system through Chassis I/O. Refer to the HART I/O Implementation Guide for complete details
about the Chassis HART I/O components.
2.4.22 DeviceNet Interface (DNETIF) Library
The DeviceNet Interface Library includes the interface blocks associated with linking DeviceNet devices
with Experion PKS system through the interface modules. Refer to the DeviceNet Interface
Implementation Guide for complete details about the DeviceNet Interface components.
2.4.23 PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library
The PROFIBUS Interface Library includes the interface blocks associated with linking PROFIBUS
devices with the Experion system through the interface modules. Refer to the PROFIBUS Interface
Implementation Guide for complete details about the PROFIBUS Interface components.
Chapter 2 - Control Builder Components
2.4.24 Rail I/O Modules - Series A (RAIL_IO) Library
The Series A I/O Module library includes the IOM blocks associated with the RIOM-A components
designed for use in general purpose locations. Please refer to the Series A Rail I/O Implementation
Guide for complete details about the Series A I/O Modules.
CHAPTER
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL
BLOCK TYPES
3.1 Auxiliary Blocks 266
3.1.1 AUXCALC (Auxiliary Calculation) block 266
3.1.2 AUXSUMMER (Auxiliary Summer) block 269
3.1.3 CTUD (Counter Up/Down) Block 270
3.1.4 DEADTIME block 271
3.1.5 ENHAUXCALC (Enhanced Auxiliary Calculation) block 272
3.1.6 ENHGENLIN (Enhanced General Linearization) block 274
3.1.7 FLOWCOMP (Flow Compensation) block 275
3.1.8 GENLIN (General Linearization) block 275
3.1.9 LEADLAG (Lead Lag) block 276
3.1.10 ROC (Rate of Change) block 276
3.1.11 SIGNALSEL (Signal Selector) block 277
3.1.12 Selection methods 280
3.1.13 TOTALIZER block 281
3.2 Device Control Block 282
3.2.1 DEVCTL (Device Control) block 282
3.3 Data Acquisition Block 284
3.3.1 DATAACQ (Data Acquisition) block 284
3.4 IO Channel Blocks 285
3.4.1 AICHANNEL 285
3.4.2 AOCHANNEL 286
3.4.3 DICHANNEL 286
3.4.4 DOCHANNEL 287
3.4.5 PWMCHANNEL 287
3.4.6 SIFLAGARRCH 288
3.4.7 SINUMARRCH 288
3.4.8 SITEXTARRCH 289
3.5 Exchange Blocks (ControlNet Interoperability) 290
3.5.1 REQFLAGARRAY (Request Flag Array) block 290
3.5.2 REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block 290
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.5.3 REQTEXTARRAY (Request Text Array) block 291
3.5.4 RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block 291
3.5.5 RSPNUMARRAY (Response Number Array) block 292
3.5.6 RSPTEXTARRAY (Response Text Array) block 292
3.6 HART DEVICE Block 293
3.6.1 HART DEVICE (Generic HART Device) 293
3.7 Pulse Input Channel/Module Blocks 293
3.7.1 Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff 293
3.7.2 Pulse Input Channel 294
3.7.3 Pulse Input Totalizer 295
3.7.4 Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081 295
3.7.5 Pulse Input Module Block CC-PPIX01 296
3.7.6 PI Channel 296
3.8 Logic Blocks 297
3.8.1 AND block 297
3.8.2 CHECKBAD block 298
3.8.3 CHECKBOOL block 298
3.8.4 CHGEXEC (Change Execution) block 299
3.8.5 CONTACTMON (Contact Monitoring) block 299
3.8.6 DELAY block 300
3.8.7 EQ (Equal) block 300
3.8.8 FTRIG (Falling-edge Trigger) block 301
3.8.9 GE (Greater than or Equal to) block 301
3.8.10 GT (Greater Than) block 302
3.8.11 LE (Less than or Equal to) block 302
3.8.12 LIMIT block 303
3.8.13 LT (Less Than) block 303
3.8.14 MAX block 304
3.8.15 MAXPULSE block 304
3.8.16 MIN block 305
3.8.17 MINPULSE block 305
3.8.18 MUX (Multiplexer) block 305
3.8.19 MUXREAL (Real Multiplexer) block 306
3.8.20 MVOTE (Majority Voting) block 306
3.8.21 NAND block 306
3.8.22 NE (Not Equal) block 307
3.8.23 nOON (n out of N voting) block 307
3.8.24 NOR block 308
3.8.25 NOT block 308
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.8.26 OFFDELAY block 309
3.8.27 ONDELAY block 309
3.8.28 OR block 309
3.8.29 PULSE block 310
3.8.30 QOR (Qualified OR) block 310
3.8.31 ROL (Rotate Output Left) block 311
3.8.32 ROR (Rotate Output Right) block 311
3.8.33 RS (Reset dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block 311
3.8.34 RTRIG (Rising edge Trigger) block 312
3.8.35 SEL (Binary Selection) block 312
3.8.36 SELREAL (Real Selection) block 312
3.8.37 SHL (Shift Output Left) block 313
3.8.38 SHR (Shift Output Right) block 313
3.8.39 SR (Set dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block 313
3.8.40 STARTSIGNAL block 314
3.8.41 TRIG (Rising or Falling edge Trigger) block 314
3.8.42 WATCHDOG block 315
3.8.43 XOR block 315
3.8.44 2OO3 (2 out of 3 voting) block 316
3.9 Math Blocks 316
3.9.1 ABS block 316
3.9.2 ADD block 317
3.9.3 DIV block 317
3.9.4 EXP block 317
3.9.5 LN block 318
3.9.6 LOG block 318
3.9.7 MOD block 318
3.9.8 MUL block 319
3.9.9 NEG block 319
3.9.10 POW block 320
3.9.11 ROUND block 320
3.9.12 SQRT block 320
3.9.13 SUB block 321
3.9.14 TRUNC block 321
3.9.15 ROLLAVG block 322
3.10 Power Generation Blocks 322
3.10.1 GRPCAPRBK (Group Capability and Runback ) block 322
3.10.2 HTMOTOR (HT Motor Drive Control) block 323
3.10.3 LEVELCOMP (Drum Level Computation) block 325
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.10.4 LTMOTOR (LT Motor Drive Control) block 325
3.10.5 MAINIBV (Main IBV Logic) block 326
3.10.6 SOLENOID (Solenoid Valve Drive Control) block 327
3.10.7 VALVEDAMPER (Valve/Damper Drive Control) block 328
3.11 Regulatory Control Blocks 330
3.11.1 AUTOMAN (Auto Manual) block 330
3.11.2 ENHREGCALC (Enhanced Regulatory Control Calculator) block 332
3.11.3 FANOUT block 335
3.11.4 OVRDSEL(Override Selector) block 337
3.11.5 PID block 339
3.11.6 PIDER block 341
3.11.7 PID-PL block 344
3.11.8 PIDFF (PID Feedforward) block 347
3.11.9 POSPROP (Position Proportional) block 350
3.11.10 PULSECOUNT block 353
3.11.11 PULSELENGTH block 354
3.11.12 RAMPSOAK block 355
3.11.13 RATIOBIAS block 357
3.11.14 RATIOCTL block 359
3.11.15 REEOUT (Remote EEOUT) block 362
3.11.16 REGCALC (Regulatory Control Calculator) block 363
3.11.17 REGSUMMER (Regulatory Control Summer) 366
3.11.18 REMCAS block 368
3.11.19 SWITCH block 370
3.12 Sequential Control Module Blocks 373
3.12.1 HANDLER Block 373
3.12.2 STEP Block 373
3.12.3 SYNC Block 374
3.12.4 TRANSITION Block 375
3.13 System Blocks 376
3.13.1 CONTROL MODULE block (Continuous Control) 376
3.13.2 SEQUENTIAL CONTROL MODULE block (Sequential Control) 377
3.13.3 Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block 377
3.13.4 Unit Control Module (UCM) Block 378
3.13.5 Master Recipe (MR) Block 378
3.13.6 Proxy Master Recipe (MR) Block 378
3.13.7 Proxy FTEB Block 378
3.13.8 Proxy Node 378
3.13.9 Proxy Sequential Control Module (SCM) Block 378
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.13.10 Proxy Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block 378
3.14 Thermodynamic Utility Function Block 379
3.14.1 STEAMPROP (Steam Property) block 379
3.15 Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Block 380
3.15.1 UCNOUT block 380
3.15.2 EUCNOUT block 381
3.16 Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Blocks 381
3.16.1 HIWAYOUT block 381
3.17 Hiway Responder Block (HRB) 382
3.17.1 Basic Controller Hiway Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_CB) 383
3.17.2 Extended Controller Hiway Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_EC) 383
3.17.3 Analog Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_AI) 384
3.17.4 Digital Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_DI) 384
3.17.5 Regulatory Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_REG) 385
3.17.6 Processor Interface Unit Analog Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_
PIUAIA) 386
3.17.7 High Level Processor Interface Unit Analog Output Algorithm Hiway Responder Block
(HRBALG_HLPIUAO) 387
3.17.8 High Level Processor Interface Unit Digital Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block
(HRBALG_HLPIUDI) 387
3.17.9 High Level Processor Interface Unit Digital Output Algorithm Hiway Responder Block
(HRBALG_HLPIUDO) 388
3.17.10 High Level Processor Interface Unit Counter Algorithm Hiway Responder Block
(HRBALG_HLPIUCO) 388
3.18 Utility Blocks 389
3.18.1 ALMWINDOW (Alarm Window - Alarm Annunciator) block 389
3.18.2 ANNPANEL (Annunciator Panel - Alarm Annunciator) block 390
3.18.3 DIGACQ (Digital Acquisition) block 390
3.18.4 EXECTIMER 392
3.18.5 FIRSTOUT (First Out Detection) block 392
3.18.6 FLAG block 394
3.18.7 FLAGARRAY block 395
3.18.8 MESSAGE block 395
3.18.9 NUMERIC block 396
3.18.10 NUMERICARRAY block 397
3.18.11 PUSH block 397
3.18.12 TEXTARRAY block 398
3.18.13 TEXTCOMMENT (Text Comment) block 399
3.18.14 TIMER block 399
3.18.15 TYPECONVERT block 399
3.19 EtherNet/IP channel blocks 400
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.19.1 EtherNet/IP IO channel blocks 400
3.19.2 EtherNet/IP drive and relay channel blocks 402
3.20 IOREFERENCES Blocks 404
3.20.1 AIREF block 404
3.20.2 AOREF block 405
3.20.3 DIREF block 406
3.20.4 DOREF block 407
This section provides detailed reference data for each functional block type that is part of the functional
relation category for the Control Builder. It presents the block types associated with a given component
library. The reference data is organized alphabetically by component library/ block type, and then
alphabetically within each type by the function block name.
The reference data for each block covers these topics, as applicable:
l Description
l function
l inputs and input ranges
l outputs and output ranges
l parameters
Note that the data varies, based on what is pertinent for each block.
3.1 Auxiliary Blocks
3.1.1 AUXCALC (Auxiliary Calculation) block
Description Lets you write up to eight expressions for computing a Process Variable (PV) value.
Function Each expression can contain any valid combination of inputs, operators and functions
and may perform arithmetic or logic operations, test conditions, and so on. Status
information is made available for input as well as the expression results. You can
assign the result of an expression, a status, or an input to PV and PVSTS parameters
which are then processed like the result of any other Auxiliary function block.
Inputs Accepts up to six optional inputs (P[1] to P[6]) - none are required.
l No inputs are required
l All inputs must be fetched from other function blocks.
l The number of process input connections are equal to the number of inputs; the
default is 1.
l Configure P inputs contiguously (without breaks) in arrays.
Outputs Produces these outputs according to the values you assign to them.
l PV and its status PVSTS, as well as a Boolean flag, PVSTSFL.BAD, to indicate to
other function blocks, that this block's PV status is bad.
l Up to eight expression results (C[1] to C[8])
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Operators Table 3 lists the expression operators and functions supported by this block for
and reference.
Functions
Parameter You must specify a parameter by its full tag name. For example,
Identification “CM25.PumpASelect.PVFL”, or “CM57.PID100.MODE”. In effect, tag names allow
expressions to have an unlimited number of inputs and work with any data type.
However, do not use more than six parameter references in an expression. The
expression syntax has been expanded. Delimiters (') can be used in an expression
containing an external reference component. The format for the delimiter usage is as
follows:
l TagName.'text'
Expression l Must include full tag.parameter name for P inputs in the expression and enclose
Rules identification number in brackets instead of parenthesizes. For example,
CM151.AUXCALC BLOCK.P[1] * CM151.AUXCALC BLOCK.P[2] is valid.
l Expressions cannot contain an assignment operation (a colon and equal sign
with the current syntax) For example, “CM1.PID1.MODE:=X[1]” is invalid.
l Each expression produces a single value (arithmetic or logical which is
automatically stored in a “C” parameter. For example, if you write four
expressions, the result of the first expression is stored in C[1], the result of the
second is stored in C[2], etc. You can use these results, by name, in succeeding
expressions. In this example, you could use C[1] as an input to expressions 2, 3,
and 4.
l You can mix and nest all operators and functions (including conditional
assignments) in any order as long as types match or can be converted.
l You can use blanks between operators and parameter names, but they are not
required.
l You can use all data types in expressions, including enumerations. They are all
treated as numeric types.
l You must configure calculator expressions contiguously (without breaks) in the
arrays.
l A short description can be provided for the expressions using the expression
descriptor parameter (EXPRDESC[1..8]). The results of the expressions, which
use the CONST[1…8] parameters, are affected if you change the values of these
parameters on the Constants tab.
l With R410 , non-CEE controllers such as PMD and Safety Manager and
Experion PKS server points such as TPS and SCADA, can be configured in the
Expressions.
l With R410, when you write the expressions using the TPS point's parameter
references, ensure that the TPS reference parameter is configured using the
parentheses “()”to specify array index. However, when you write the expressions
using the other non-CEE points, you can use the brackets “[].”
Parameters C[1..8] CONFIGCODE[1..8] CONFIGDESC NAME ORDERINCM P[1..6] PSTS[1..6]
[1..8] CONFIGSTS[1..8] CONST[1…8] PV PVFORMAT PVSRC PVSTS
CONSTACCLOCK CONSTENABLE CSTS PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
[1..8] DESC EUDESC EXECCODE[1..8] PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
EXECDESC EXECDESC[1..8] EXECSTS PVSTSSRC PVVALSTS
EXECSTS[1..8] EXPR[1..8] EXPRDESC[1…8]
EXPRPCODE[1..8] HIALM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
AUXCALC Block.
Do not use equality operands = and <> to compare FLOAT64 and FLOAT32 floating point values in
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
expressions. Use inequality operands Less Than (<), Less Than or Equal To (<=), Greater Than (>), or
Greater Than or Equal To (>=) instead.
Table 3.1 Expression Operators and Functions Reference
Operators Description
Unary +-
Binary Arithmetic + - * / MOD (x MOD y) ^ (x^y)
Logical AND OR NOT
Relational = <> <= >= < >
Conditional ? : (For example, X ?Y : Z; similar to IF, THEN, ELSE)
Parenthesis ()
Array Syntax []
Unary Functions
ABS absolute value LOG Base 10 logarithm of a number
ATN arc tangent RND round value
COS1 cosine SGN sign of value (returns -1,0 or +1)
EXP e to the power of x SIN1 sine
INT convert to integer SQR square of a number
ISFIN is finite SQRT square root
ISNAN is Not a Number TAN1 tangent
LN Natural logarithm of a number (log to
the base of e)
Multiple Argument Functions
MIN minimum of n arguments (ignore bad MID medium value of n arguments
values). If this function has a NAN (average of middle values for even
argument (bad value), it returns NaN. n). If this function has a NAN
argument (bad value), it returns NaN.
MAX maximum of n arguments (ignore bad MUL product of n arguments This function
values). If this function has a NAN ignores NaN values. However, if all
argument (bad value), it returns NaN. agruments are NaN, then it returns 1.
AVG average of n arguments. This function SUM sum of n arguments. This function
ignores NaN values. However, if all ignores NaN values. However, if all
arguments are NaN, then it returns agruments are NaN, then it returns 0.
NaN.
String Support Functions
LEN Returns an integer length of the string NUMSTR Takes the input parameter, casts it to
a Float64 and converts it to a string
MIDS Takes a string, an integer starting STRNUM Takes the string input parameter and
position and an integer length. The converts it to a Float64
function returns the specified portion of
the original string.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Operators Description
Time Support Functions
ABSTOD Takes an absolute time data type and DTIMNUM Takes a delta TIME data type and
strips off the year and date and returns returns a 64-bit float representing the
a 64-bit float representing the time of number of milliseconds.
day in milliseconds.
NOW Returns the current local date and time NUMDTIM Takes a 64-bit float representing
as an absolute time data type some number of milliseconds and
converts it to a delta TIME data type.
NUMTIM Takes a 64-bit float representing the STRTIM Takes a string input parameter and
number of milliseconds since Jan 1, converts it to an Absolute time. The
1972 and converts it to absolute TIME string must be in the same format as
data type. an Absolute time constant.
TOD Returns the current local time of day as TIMNUM Takes an Absolute TIME data type
Time of Day data type and returns a 64-bit float
representing the total number of
milliseconds since Jan 1, 1972.
UTCTOD Returns the current UTC time of day as UTCNOW Returns the current UTC date and
Time of Day data type time of day as an absolute time data
type
Case Sensitive Strings for Special Value Constants
NAN IEEE NaN value
+INF IEEE + Infinity value
-INF IEEE - Infinity value
PI PI (3.14159. . .)
E e (2.718. . .)
1
Be sure you specify the trigonometric functions cosine, sine, and tangent in radians and not
degrees.
3.1.2 AUXSUMMER (Auxiliary Summer) block
Description Lets you configure up to ten separate inputs to calculate a process variable (PV) value
that can be scaled and biased.
Function The AUXSUMMER block fetches values from other function blocks and determines their
statuses in every execution cycle of the Control Module. It evaluates up to ten inputs and
determines their statuses. It derives values for PV and PV status based on its calculation
of the inputs and the configuration entries for the overall PV scale factor (CPV) and
overall PV bias factor (DPV) parameters.
Inputs This function block accepts as many as ten inputs (P[1…10]).
l At least one input (P[i]) must be configured for the block to operate.
l All inputs must be fetched from other function blocks
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l The number of process input connections (NUMPINPT) that can be made to other
blocks is equal to the number of inputs. The default is 1.
Outputs This block produces the following outputs:
l PV and its status, PVSTS
Parameters C[1..10] CPV D[1..10] DESC DPV PDESC PENABLE PSTS[1..10] PSUB PV
EUDESC NUMPINPT NAME PVFORMAT PVSTS PVSTSFL.BAD
ORDERINCM P[1..10] PVSTSFL.MAN PVSTSFL.NORM
PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
AUXSUMMER Block.
3.1.3 CTUD (Counter Up/Down) Block
Description A new general purpose Up-Down Counter (CTUD) is introduced in the Auxiliary library
to simplify event count strategies. The counter function block starts functioning based on
the configured algorithm. The count inputs may be wired to other function blocks or
stored by a program.
Function The CTUD block is an up-down counter function block. The counter of the CTUD block
can change its state (Up or Down) depending on the configuration of Count Up Flag
(CNTUPFL) and Count Down Flag (CNTDNFL) parameter. The counting also depends
on a valid IN (ININT32/INFLOAT64) configuration if the input is fed through wired
connection. Up-down counting is evaluated as edge trigger quantity or level trigger
quantity depending on the value configured for Count On Level (CNTLVLFL)
Parameter. The CTUD Block supports pause (PAUSEFL), load (LOADFL) and reset
(RESETFL) operation for the counter. If the Count Up and Count Down flags are set to
“TRUE”, the same block execution results in a net internal counter change of zero.
Inputs l The CTUD block accepts a combination of Integer 32, Boolean, and Float 64
inputs.
l Either of ININT32 or INFLOAT64 can be used during block execution. Selection of
which IN parameter to use is determined by Input Specifier (SELINT32FL)
parameter.
l If SELINT32FL is set to “TRUE”, value of ININT32 parameter is used.
l If SELINT32FL is set to “FALSE”, value of INFLOAT64 parameter is
used.
l All inputs are processed synchronously with the block execution.
Outputs l The current Counter output value is available in Float 64 (OUTFLOAT64) and
Integer 32 (OUTINT32) formats.
l CARRYUPFL is set to TRUE for one block execution following a counter overflow.
l CARRYDNFL is set to TRUE for one block execution following a counter
underflow.
l QUFL indicates count Up reached.
l QDFL indicates count Down reached
l The output values are fetched through a wired connection or read directly by a
program.
l An output connection to an input that can be initialized does not create a back
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
calculation or function block connections.
The flag outputs (QUFL, QDFL, CARRYUPFL, and CARRYDNFL) are transitory.
Downstream blocks, which sample these outputs, should sample at a rate at least twice
the execution rate of the counter block in order to recognize all transitions.
Equations You can configure CNTEQN to specify how the block must handle the overflow and
underflow conditions.
l By default, Equation A is selected.
l Ideal configuration of the Equation D and H to start the counting is:
l For equation D - the input value must be greater than zero.
l For equation H - the input value must be less than zero. If not, then the
counter excludes a gap of zero to the input value in both equations.
Platforms Counter block can be used with the following Control Execution Environments (CEE).
supported l C300
l C200E
l ACE
l ACE-T
l SIM-C300
l SIM-C200E
l SIM-ACE
Parameters BLOCKTYPENAME BLOCKTYPNAME EUDESC GLOBSCMMON INCLAMPOPT
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 INFLOAT64 ININT32 OUTFLOAT64
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 OUTINT32 LOADFL NUMBLOBS
CARRYDNFL CARRYUPFL ORDERINCM PAUSEFL QDFL QUFL
CBBLOCKPROP CBBLOCKPROPI RESETFL SELINT32FL USERSYMNAME
CNTDNFL CNTEQN CNTLVLFL
CNTUPFL DESC DYNSTATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the CTUD
Block.
3.1.4 DEADTIME block
Description Provides calculated output (PV) in which value changes may be delayed from the time
that the corresponding change occurred in the P1 input. The delay time can be fixed, or
it can vary as the inverse of another input (P2).
Function Applies a fixed or variable delay to a process input value
Inputs Requires on input value (P1); a second input (P2) is optional.
l P1 and P2 must be fetched from other function blocks
Outputs Produces the following output:
l PV and it's status, PVSTS and PVSTSFL
Operators Table 4 lists the expression operators and functions supported by this block for
and reference.
Functions
Delay Is used to accomplish the desired delays in the input (P1). P1 values are stored and
Table shifted through the table at a rate that is calculated to produce the desired Deadtime.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l The sample rate of the P1 value (TS). This is the execution rate of the function
block.
l The delay time (DELAYTIME). If fixed delay is selected, user specifies the delay; if
variable delay is selected, the delay is derived from P2.
l The number of entries to use in the delay table (NUMLOC). The table has a
maximum of 60 entries, but the user may request to use fewer than that (by sorting
to NUMLOC).
Delay Type Two types of delay are supported:
l Fixed Delay
l Variable Delay
Parameters C1 C2 CPV CUTOFF.LM D1 D2 NUMLOC NAME ORDERINCM P1 P1STS P2
DELAYTABLE[1..60] DELAYTIME P2STS PV PVFORMAT PVSTS PVSTSFL.BAD
DELAYTYPE DPV EUDESC PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
INITREQ PVVALSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DEADTIME
Block.
3.1.5 ENHAUXCALC (Enhanced Auxiliary Calculation) block
Description The ENHAUXCALC block provides the following enhancements over the AUXCALC
block.
l Expands existing arrayed input parameters PSTS and P from six to ten.
l These arrayed parameters are added to correspond to each of the ten inputs.
l Input Description
l Scaling Factor
l Enable/Disable Switch
l PSUB Substitute Parameter
l PP Scaled Input
l Both the ENHAUXCALC and AUXCALC blocks are optimized so that
expressions use memory based on the number of expressions configured,
pcode size of each expression, the number of references in the expression and
the offset needed for each expression.
Function Each expression can contain any valid combination of inputs, operators and functions
and may perform arithmetic or logic operations, test conditions, etc. Status information
is made available for input as well as the expression results. You can assign the result
of an expression, a status, or an input to PV and PVSTS parameters which are then
processed like the result of any other Auxiliary function block.
Inputs Accepts up to 10 optional inputs (P[1] to P[10]) - none are required.
l No inputs are required
l All inputs must be fetched from other function blocks.
l The number of process input connections are equal to the number of inputs; the
default is 1.
l Configure P inputs contiguously (without breaks) in arrays.
Outputs Produces these outputs according to the values you assign to them.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l PV and its status PVSTS, as well as a Boolean flag, PVSTSFL.BAD, to indicate to
other function blocks, that this block's PV status is bad.
l Up to eight expression results (C[1] to C[8])
Operators AUXCALC (Auxiliary Calculation) block lists the expression operators and functions
and supported by this block for reference.
Functions
Parameter You must specify a parameter by its full tag name. For
Identification example,“CM25.PumpASelect.PVFL”, or “CM57.PID100.MODE”. In effect, tag names
allow expressions to have an unlimited number of inputs and work with any data type.
However, do not use more than six parameter references in an expression. The
expression syntax has been expanded. Delimiters (') can be used in an expression
containing an external reference component. The format for the delimiter usage is as
follows:
l TagName.'text'
The size of each expression in the ENHAUXCALC block is limited to 255 characters.
You can use the following additional arrayed parameters in expressions.
l CP[1..10]
l PP[1..10]
l PENABLE[1..10]
l PSUB[1..10]
l PCODESIZE[1..8]
l NUMSRCCONN[1..8]
Expression l Must include full tag.parameter name for P inputs in the expression and enclose
Rules identification number in brackets instead of parenthesizes. For example,
CM151.AUXCALC BLOCK.P[1] * CM151.AUXCALC BLOCK.P[2] is valid.
l Expressions cannot contain an assignment operation (a colon and equal sign
with the current syntax) For example,“CM1.PID1.MODE:=X[1]” is invalid. Each
expression produces a single value (arithmetic or logical which is automatically
stored in a“C” parameter. For example, if you write four expressions, the result of
the first expression is stored in C[1], the result of the second is stored in C[2], etc.
You can use these results, by name, in succeeding expressions. In this example,
you could use C[1] as an input to expressions 2, 3, and 4.
l You can mix and nest all operators and functions (including conditional
assignments) in any order as long as types match or can be converted.
l You can use blanks between operators and parameter names, but they are not
required.
l You can use all data types in expressions except for Time data types. They are
all treated as numeric types.
l You must configure calculator expressions contiguously (without breaks) in the
arrays.
l A short description can be provided for the expressions using the expression
descriptor parameter (EXPRDESC[1..8]). The results of the expressions, which
use the CONST[1…8] parameters, are affected if you change the values of these
parameters on the Constants tab.
l With R410, non-CEE controllers such as PMD and Safety Manager, and
Experion server points such as TPS and SCADA, can be configured in the
Expressions.
l With R410, when you write the expressions using the TPS point's parameter
references, ensure that the TPS reference parameter is configured using the
parentheses “()”to specify array index. However, when you write the expressions
using the other non-CEE points you can use the brackets “[].”
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters C[1..8] CONFIGCODE[1..8] CONFIGDESC PCODESIZE[1..8] PCONN[1..10] PDESC
[1..8] CONFIGSTS[1..8] CONST[1…8] [1..10] PENABLE[1..10] PP[1..10] PSTS
CONSTACCLOCK CONSTENABLE CP [1..10] PSUB[1..10] PV PVFORMAT
[1..10] CSTS[1..8] DESC EUDESC PVSRC PVSTS PVSTSFL.ALL
EXECCODE[1..8] EXECDESC[1..8] PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
EXECSTS[1..8] EXPR[1..8] EXPRDESC PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
[1…8] NAME NUMSRCCONN[1..8] PVSTSSRC PVVALSTS SRC
ORDERINCM P[1..10]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
ENHAUXCALC Block.
3.1.6 ENHGENLIN (Enhanced General Linearization) block
Description Calculates an output value (PV) as a function of the input value (P1) and ACTLINSEG
parameter value based on configured linear coefficients. It can be any function
represented by up to 12 continuous, linear segments defined with 13 monotonic value
pairs.
Function Typically used to provide a linearized PV (in engineering units) for a sensor actuator, or
process with nonlinear characteristics. The ACTLINSEG parameter is used to select the
linearization segment tables to define the input-output relationship curves. This block
can also be used to characterize functions of a single parameter, such as heat transfer
vs. flow rate, or efficiency as a function of load. It is particularly useful when the
relationship of the input to engineering units is empirically determined.
Input Two input values are required:
l P1 must be fetched from another function block.
l ACTLINSEG parameter value can be user-defined or fetched from another
function block.
Outputs l PV, and PVSTS that displays the status of the PV.
l Boolean flag (PVSTSFL.BAD) to indicate to other function blocks, that this block's
PV status is bad.
Platform The ENHGENLIN block is supported on the following platforms.
Supported l C300 (20 ms CEE and 50 ms CEE)
l C200E
l ACE
l SIM-C200E
l SIM-C300
Parameters ACTLINSEG COMMIT DESC DIFFVALUE PV PVFORMAT PVSTS PVSTSFL.BAD
ENBTUNE EUDESC IN[1..4][0..12] NAME PVSTSFL.MAN PVSTSFL.NORM
NUMLINSEG NUMSEGS[1..4] NUMSEGS PVSTSFL.UNCERTN PVVALSTS
[INDEX] ORDERINCM OUT[1..4][0…12] P1 RESTORE TEMPIN[1..4][0..12] TEMPOUT
P1STS [1..4][0..12] VIEWLINSEG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of
each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information
on the ENHGENLIN Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
The ENHGENLIN block is typically applicable in the C200E and
C300 (20ms CEE and 50ms CEE) controllers, and ACE controllers.
3.1.7 FLOWCOMP (Flow Compensation) block
Description Operates on uncompensated flow measurements of liquids, steam, gases or vapors. It
computes a flow compensation factor based on variations in parameters like
temperature, pressure, specific gravity, and molecular weight. The block derives a
compensated flow value as its output.
Function Offers you five different equations for calculating the flow compensation term
(COMPTERM). There is one equation for liquids, one for steam, and three for gases and
vapors. Each equation may require different inputs. For example, depending on which
gases and vapors equation you choose, one requires temperature and pressure
measurements, another requires temperature, pressure and specific gravity, and a third
requires temperature, pressure and molecular weight.
Inputs l The PV Equation Type (PVEQN) you select determines the number of inputs that
the FLOWCOMP block requires.
l Equation A requires 2 inputs
l Equation B requires 3 inputs
l Equation C requires 4 inputs
l Equation D requires 4 inputs
l Equation E requires 5 inputs
l All inputs must be fetched from other function blocks
Outputs This block produces the following outputs:
l PV and its status, PVSTS
Parameters BADCOMPTERM.FL BADCOMPTERM.PR P P0 PSTS PV PVCHAR PVEQN
BADCOMPTERM.SV CF1 CF2 COMPHILM PVFORMAT PVSTS PVSTSFL.BAD
COMPLOLM COMPTERM CPV DESC PVSTSFL.MAN PVSTSFL.NORM
EUDESC F FSTS G GSTS HIALM.PR PVSTSFL.UNCERTN Q QSTS RG RMW
HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE INALM MAXCYCLE RP RQ RT RX T T0 TSTS X XSTS
MW MWSTS NUMPINPT NAME
ORDERINCM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
FLOWCOMP Block.
3.1.8 GENLIN (General Linearization) block
Description Calculates an output value (PV) as a function of the input value (P1) based on a
separate function that can be represented by 2 to 13 user-defined coordinates. (You
specify the IN and OUT values of each coordinate to make a segment.) The input value
(P1) is then compared with the input range of each segment and the output is set at the
intersection of the input with the appropriate segment.
Function Typically used to provide a linearized PV (in engineering units) for a sensor with
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
nonlinear characteristics. Block can also be used to characterize functions of a single
parameter, such as heat transfer versus flow rate, or efficiency as a function of load. It is
particularly useful when the relationship of the input to engineering units is empirically
determined.
Input One input value (P1) is required:
l P1 must be fetched from another function block.
l Number of process input connections is 1.
Outputs PV and its status, PVSTS, as well as a Boolean flag, PVSTSFL.BAD, to indicate to other
function blocks, that this block's PV status is bad.
Segment The first and last segments are treated as if they are infinitely extended. This means, if
Extension P1 is less than IN[0] or greater than IN (NUMSEGS), PV is computed by assuming that
the slope in the appropriate segment continues from the intersection point.
Parameters DESC EUDESC IN[0..12] NAME PV PVFORMAT PVSTS PVSTSFL.BAD
NUMSEGS ORDERINCM OUT[0..12] P1 PVSTSFL.MAN PVSTSFL.NORM
P1STS PVSTSFL.UNCERTN PVVALSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the GENLIN
Block.
3.1.9 LEADLAG (Lead Lag) block
Description May be configured to apply a lead-time and two lag-time compensation factors to a
process input value.
Function Provides dynamic lead-lag compensation to the P1 input. It supports one lead
compensation and two lag compensation factors. There is a time constant for each
compensation factor. Specifying a zero value for any time constant will suppress the
corresponding compensation.
Input One input value (P1) is required:
l P1 must be fetched from another function block.
Outputs The following output is produced:
l PV and its status, PVSTS and PVSTSFL
Equations This function block only supports one equation - a single input filtered with one lead
compensation and two lag compensations. There is a time constant for each
compensation factor. Specifying a zero value for any time constant will suppress the
corresponding compensation.
Parameters CPV DPV DESC EUDESC INITREQ P1STS PV PVFORMAT PVSTS
LAG1TIME LAG2TIME LEADTIME NAME PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
ORDERINCM P1 PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
PVVALSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LEADLAG
Block.
3.1.10 ROC (Rate of Change) block
The ROC block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE Controllers.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Description It is desirable to prevent a random change in the output sequence. The Rate of Change
block is a computational block used on the input side of Control blocks for limiting the
input variable to the block (typically SP). In Power plants, speed control of HT motors
requires control without exceeding the rate of change of the current. In some
temperature control applications, dynamic profiling is needed based on the deviation of
SP and the actual temperature.
Function l If the input variation is more than the rate trip limit in either direction, the rate of
change of output is limited to the change specified by the rate trip limits. The output
changes at the specified rate limits until the value is equal to the input variable.
l PVROCBYPASSFL is provided in the function block to BYPASS the rate trip limit
l If the rate limits are NaN, then limits are not applied and PV is set to P1.
l This block provides a Bad PV alarm based on the status of the output
l For an invalid input (=NaN), rate limiting is not done and the output is NaN.
l With R410, ROC block allows you to configure individual values for the on-delay
time and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO)
is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
Input l P1 - Process Input 1.
l PVROCPOSLM - Indicates a positive PV rate of change limit
l PVROCNEGLM - Indicates a negative PV Rate of Change limit
Outputs l PVROCPOSFL - This flag turns ON when the rate limiting is in the positive
direction.
l PVROCNEGFL - This flag turns ON when the rate limiting is in the negative
direction.
l PV - Output of ROC.
l BADPVFL - This flag is set when a bad input is received at the block.
Parameters P1STS PV PVFORMAT PVSTS P1 PV PVEUHI PVEULO PVROCNEGFL
PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN PVROCBYPASSFL PVROCPOSLM
PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCERTN PVROCPOSFL PVROCNEGLM
PVVALSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ROC Block.
3.1.11 SIGNALSEL (Signal Selector) block
Description Lets you select one of up to six inputs using configured selection criteria, or allows you
to average two or more of the inputs.
Function The Signal Selector function block accepts as many as six input signals, and may be
configured to do one of the following on these inputs:
l Select the input with the minimum value.
l Select the input with the maximum value.
l Select the median input.
l Calculate the average of the inputs.
l Select an input based on the value of an external control signal; i.e., act as a
multiplexor. With this option, the function block accepts two to six inputs plus a
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Select the middle of three inputs. If one input goes Bad, calculate the average of
the remaining two; and, if two inputs go Bad, force the output to Bad.
l Calculate the average of two inputs. If the difference between the inputs exceeds a
certain value for more than “x” seconds, issue an alarm; and, if it exceeds another
value for more than “y” seconds, force the output to Bad.
l Select from two inputs, based on a Boolean value pushed from another function
block. Also provide bumpless switching between the inputs.
l With R410, SIGNALSEL block allows you to configure individual values for the
deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual
alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to
configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only identical deadband
units for all the alarms.
Inputs This function block accepts between two to six selectable inputs, P[1..6]. Minimum two
inputs (P[1] and P[2]) are required. If the block acts as a multiplexor then additionally a
multiplex-selector input (MUXSEL) is also required. All inputs shall be fetched from
other input blocks The minimum number of inputs is two. If less than two inputs are
connected a warning “At least two inputs need to be connected” shall be given during
load, and activation of the block shall be prevented If the total number of valid inputs.
(NUMINPTS) goes less than the value of the configurable parameter Minimum Valid
Inputs (NMIN), the output of the block shall go bad. The NMIN parameter applies only to
the following selection methods: MIN, MAX, MED, or AVG, and is not applicable if the
selection method is MUX or Force selection is performed.
Input The function block always ignores Bad inputs (NaN). In addition, the user may choose to
Ranges ignore the “n” highest (IGNORHI) or/and “m” lowest (IGNORLO) inputs. These values
and Limits can be from Logic blocks and user programs may also store to it - hence, the number of
ignored inputs may be dynamic.
l If all the inputs are ignored, output shall go Bad.
l If the total number of inputs to be ignored (n+m) is equal to or greater than the total
number of connected inputs, a warning message “IGNORHI+IGNORLO should be
less than the number of connected inputs” will be given during load and activation
of the block will be prevented. During the running state, for the same condition, a
non-critical error with the same error message is displayed and the previous value
of IGNORHI or IGNORLO (whichever is causing the error) is retained
The user may also choose to ignore inputs that are outside user-specified ignore limits.
Ignore Limit Checking Ignore Limit is the maximum allowable range between the lowest
and highest input. Inputs that are outside this range (IGNORLM) for more than a
specified time (IGNORTM) are ignored. The SIGNALSEL block performs ignore limit
checking as follows:
l It ignores Bad inputs (NaN), and the highest and lowest inputs (defined by
IGNORHI and IGNORLO).
l If there are no remaining inputs, ignore limit checking is not done for the block.
l It calculates a “center value” from the inputs that remain:
l If the number of remaining inputs is odd, the “center value” = the median
input.
l If the remaining inputs is even, “center value” = the average of the
middle two inputs.
l It calculates a high and low ignore limit from specified limit (IGNORLM):
l High ignore limit = “center value” + IGNORLM / 2
l Low ignore limit = “center value” - IGNORLM / 2
l It compares each of the remaining inputs with the high and low ignore limits.
l If an input is outside the ignore limits for more than IGNORTM (the ignore time)
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
seconds, the function block updates the appropriate parameters (the ignored input
flags IGNORD, IGNORDFL[1…6] and the current number of valid inputs
CURPINPT). As a result, the input will be ignored in future processing (i.e., Input
Selection).
l The center value, high and low ignore limits shall be computed every cycle of
execution of the block.
l Inputs that have been ignored on exceeding ignore limits, shall become valid
again when their value returns back within the high and low ignore limits.
If there are only two remaining inputs, and the difference between them exceeds the
ignore limit, the block's output (PV) is set to NaN. IGNORHI, IGNORLO and ignore limit
checking shall not be applicable for the MUX selection method.
Outputs This auxiliary PV block produces an output PV and its status, PVSTS The output
parameter SELINP denotes which input, if any has been selected as the output. The
Ignore Input feature produces the following output flags
l The flag IGNORD indicates if any of the inputs is ignored or not.
l The parameter IGNORDFL[1..6] provides individual flags for each input indicating
if it was ignored
Equation The method for selecting inputs is determined by the configuration parameter
Options SELMETHOD, whose values are tabulated below. Detailed operations of the selection
methods are provided in the section Selection methods
Method Processing
MIN Select the input with the minimum value.
Ignored inputs are excluded.
MAX Select the input with the maximum value.
Ignored inputs are excluded.
MED Select the median input. Ignored inputs are
excluded.
AVG Calculate the average of the inputs.
Ignored inputs are excluded.
MUX Select an input based on the Multiplex
value; i.e., act as a multiplexor. Inputs are
not ignored.
Force-Select:
l The operator or a user program may override the selection method and “force
select” a particular input using the FRCPERM, FRCREQ, and FRCSEL
parameters.
l Force-select may override only the following selection methods: MIN, MAX, MED,
or AVG and is not applicable if the selection method is MUX.
l If the force selected input is not connected, then the PV value goes Bad (NaN) and
the respective unconnected input remains selected
l Ignore Inputs, Ignore limit checking, NMIN and deviation alarming are not
applicable during force selection. Also the deviation alarm state should return to
normal.
Bumpless Input Switching The function block may be configured to provide bumpless
switching between inputs. If so configured, the block will ramp to the new input value
when any of the following occur:
l The selected input changes.
l The number of valid inputs changes.
Ramping rate (PVRATE) is specified in rate of change per minute. PV shall ramp at this
rate to the new value. If the ramp rate is zero bumping would occur. Ramping can be
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
disabled by setting ramp rate to NaN.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 IGNORDHI IGNORDLO MEDOPT MUXSEL
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 NAME NMIN NUMPINPT ORDERINCM P
BOOLMUX CURPINPT DESC [1..6] PDESC[1..10] PSTS[1..6] PV
DEVALM.ALL DEVALM.DB DEVALM.FL PVFORMAT PVRATE PVSTS
DEVALM.PR DEVALM.SV DEVALM.TM PVSTSFL.ALL PVSTSFL.BAD
DEVALM.TMO DEVALM.TP DEVLM PVSTSFL.MAN PVSTSFL.NORM
DEVTM EUDESC FRCPERM FRCREQ PVSTSFL.UNCERTN SELDESC SELIN
FRCSEL IGNORD IGNORDFL[1..6] SELMETHOD
IGNORDHI IGNORDLO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SIGNALSEL
Block.
3.1.12 Selection methods
MIN
l The output (PV) gets the minimum value of all the valid (not ignored) inputs.
l The selected input shall be the input that has this minimum value.
l If two or more inputs have the minimum value then the selected input would be the input with the
highest index. For instance, if P[2] and P[5] have the minimum value then the selected input would
be P[5].
MAX
l PV gets the maximum value of all the valid inputs.
l The selected input shall be the input that has this maximum value.
l If two or more inputs have the maximum value then the selected input would be the input with the
highest index. For instance, if P[2] and P[5] have the maximum value then the selected input would
be P[5].
AVG
l PV shall be the average of only the valid inputs.
l The selected input shall be None because PV is a calculated value and not any input by itself.
MED
l All the valid inputs are arranged in ascending order and median value is taken as PV.
l If odd number of valid inputs is present then the middle value will be the PV and the selected input
shall be the respective input.
l If even number of valid inputs is present then the PV shall be any one of the following depending
on the parameter ‘Median Option for Middle Two Inputs (MEDOPT)’:
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l If MEDOPT is MIN, then PV shall be the minimum of the middle two values and the respective input
shall be selected input.
l If MEDOPT is MAX, then PV shall be the maximum of the middle two values and the respective
input shall be selected input.
l If MEDOPT is AVG, then PV shall be the average of the middle two values and selected input shall
be none because average is computed.
While arranging in ascending order, if two inputs have same value then the input that comes first in
order 1 to 6 precedes the other.
MUX
l A Boolean flag BOOLMUX is employed to choose between Integer Mux selection and Boolean Mux
selection. If the flag is set to On, Boolean selection will be performed, otherwise Integer selection
will performed.
l In Integer Mux selection, a control signal MUXSEL (multiplex-selector) is required, which shall be
user configurable or fetched from other function block, or user programs could also store to it.
l If the fetched or configured MUXSEL value goes invalid, such as greater than the number of
process inputs, then the previous valid value of MUXSEL is retained and the respective input
remains selected.
l If the fetched or configured MUXSEL is valid, but the input corresponding to MUXSEL is not
connected, then the PV value goes bad (NaN) and the respective unconnected input remains
selected.
l In Boolean Mux selection, the SELXFL[1..6] flags are scanned from 1 to 6 and the block selects an
input whose corresponding SELXFL flag is first On.
l If the Boolean selected input is not connected, then the PV value goes bad (NaN) and SELIN will
have the index of unconnected input.
l And, if none of the SELXFL flag is on (but only the BOOLMUX is on and SELMETHOD is Mux), then
the PV value goes bad (NaN) and SELIN's value will have None value.
l Bad inputs may also be selected.
l Ignoring of Inputs and deviation alarming are not applicable for MUX. Also, the deviation alarm
state should return to normal.
l PV gets the value of the selected input.
l If the value of the input denoted by the control signal is Bad, then the PV also goes Bad.
3.1.13 TOTALIZER block
Description Periodically adds an input value (P1) to an accumulator value (PV); sets status flags to
indicate when accumulator value is “near”, “nearer”, “nearest” the user specified target
value.
Function Typically used to accumulate flows. For situations where flow transmitter may not be
precisely calibrated near zero-flow value, a zero-flow cutoff feature is provided such that
when P1 is below the cutoff value it clamps to 0 (zero). Block also supports warm restart.
Input One input (P1) is required:
l P1 is the value to be accumulated -- input value may be real, integer or Boolean,
but is stored as a real number.
l P1 must be fetched from another block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Number of process input connections is 1.
Outputs The following outputs are produced:
l Accumulated value (PV) and its status (PVSTS), as well as a Boolean flag,
PVSTSFL.BAD, to indicate to other function blocks, that this block's PV status is
bad.
l Flags, indicating if accumulated value has reached user-specified target value or
one of the accumulator deviation trip points (ACCTVFL and ACCDEV.FL(1-4]).
Equations You can configure PVEQN to specify how the block should handle bad input and warm
restarts. Specific handling combinations for a given PVEQN selection are:
Equation Bad Input Handling Warm Restart
Handling
EqA Use zero if input is bad. Continue after input
turns valid
EqB Use last good value if input is bad Continue after input
turns valid
EqC Stop if the input is bad and set PV to NaN Continue after input
turns valid
EqD Use zero if input is bad. Stop after a warm
restart
EqE Use last good value if input is bad Stop after a warm
restart
EqF Stop if the input is bad and set PV to NaN Stop after a warm
restart
Parameters ACCDEV.FL[1..4] ACCDEV.TP[1..4] PV PVEQN PVFORMAT PVSTS
ACCTV ACCTVFL C1 CMDATTR PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.NORM
COMMAND CUTOFF.LM DESC EUDESC PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
HIALM LASTGOOD NAME OLDAV PVVALSTS RESETFL RESETVAL
ORDERINCM P1 P1STS STARTFL STATE STOPFL TIMEBASE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TOTALIZER
Block.
3.2 Device Control Block
3.2.1 DEVCTL (Device Control) block
Description Provides multi-input, multi-output function for interfacing to discrete devices such as
motors, pumps, solenoid valves and motor-operated valves. The Device Control block
contains built-in structures for handling interlocks and supports display of the interlock
conditions in group, detail and graphic displays.
Function Allows the manipulation of sets of digital outputs and interprets corresponding feedback
of digital inputs represented by the state parameter PV (Current Feedback State).
Operation consists of transmitting commands represented by state parameter OP
(commanded output state), monitoring PV, and producing alarms based on various
configurations, such as if PV has not achieved state commanded in OP. Provides safety
interlocks, individual state interlocks, initialization manual, maintenance statistics, and
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
batch level 1 drive functions.
l DEVCTL block provides a feature to configure change of state (COS) alarm with
Delay option for Digital Inputs (DI). The delay is applicable only to report the alarm.
l The priority, severity and delay time of this alarm can be configured
using its corresponding parameters CHGOFSTALM.PR,
CHGOFSTALM.SV and CHGOFSTALM.TM. To configure these
parameters you can enable/disable the CHGOFSTALMENB parameter.
l When the change of state alarm is configured with delay option, a COS
alarm is reported after the configured delay time. Change Of State alarm
(COS) is reported as Auto-RTN alarm in station. The alarm notification is
RTN type with all the applicable information. There is no separate RTN
for Change of State. There is only one entry in event summary page and
the alarm goes off from the alarm page when it is acknowledged. For
DEVCTL , Off normal alarm behaves differently and is not related to
state change. COS Alarm Enable option enables/disables the Change
of State alarm. The default value is off, hence, change of state is disable
and cannot be configured.
Inputs May have from 0 to 4 inputs (DI [1..4]); each input is a Boolean value that represents the
state of other block output or a field DICHANNEL block.
Outputs May have from 0 to 3 outputs. Each output can be Boolean (DO[1..3]) or pulsed (PO
[1..3]). You can only connect a DO[1..3] or a PO[1..3] to any one output at a time.
l You can connect the Boolean output DO[1..3] to a Boolean parameter in any other
function block or to the DO.SO in the DOCHANNEL block.
l You can only connect the pulsed output PO[1..3] to a DO.ONPULSE or
DO.OFFPULSE in the DOCHANNEL block.
l Note that you can only connect one Boolean (DO[1..3]) or one pulsed (PO[1..3])
output to any one DOCHANNEL block as a DO.SO or DO.ONPULSE or
DO.OFFPULSE, respectively.
Alarms An available set of PV state alarms may be configured to represent Bad PV or
disagreements between the commanded output state (OP) and the feedback state (PV).
A variety of override alarms are also available. Each of these alarms possesses all the
standard attributes of system alarms.
Parameters ASTEPID BADPVALM.FL BADPVALM.PR NAME NORMMODE NORMMODEATTR
BADPVALM.SV BYPASS BYPPERM NULLPVFL NUMDINPUTS NUMDOUTS
CHGOFSTALM.PR CHGOFSTALM.SV NUMSIOVRD NUMSTATES NUMTRANS
CHGOFSTALM.TM CHGOFSTALMENB [0..2] OFFNRMALM.FL OFFNRMALM.PR
CLROPREQFL CMDDISALM.FL OFFNRMALM.SV OI[0..2] OIALM.FL[0..2]
CMDDISALM.PR CMDDISALM.SV OIALM.OPT[0..2] OIALM.PR[0..2]
CMDDISALM.TM[0..2] CMDFALALM.FL OIALM.SV[0..2] OP OPCMD[0..2]
CMDFALALM.PR CMDFALALM.SV OPDOMAP[0..3][1..3] OPFINAL OPREQ
CMDFALALM.TM[0..2] CONTROLREQ OPTYPE ORDER ORDERINCM PI[0..2]
DESC DI[1..4] DIPVMAP[0..15] DO[1..3] PO[1..3] POCONNECTED[1..3]
EUDESC GOP GOPFINAL GOPREQ PULSEWIDTH[1..3] PV PVAUTO PVFL
GOPSCADA GPV GPVAUTO HIALM.PR [0..2] PVNORMAL PVNORMOPT
HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT INALM PVOFFNORMALM.ALL
INBETFL INITCONNECTD[1..3] INITMAN PVOFFNORMPVALM.FL
INITOPOPT INITREQ[0..2] LASTGOPREQ PVOFFNORMALM.PR
LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL PVOFFNORMALM.SV
LASTSTEP LOCALMAN MAINTOPT PVOFFNORMALM.TM PVSOURCE
MAXTIME[0..2] MAXTRANS[0..2] MODE PVSRCOPT PVSTS REDTAG RESETFL
MODEATTR MODEATTRFL.NORM RESTARTOPT SAFEOP SAFEREDTAG
MODEATTRFL.OPER SEALOPT SI SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT
MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK SIALM.PR SIALM.SV STARTOPT
MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK STATETEXT[0..6] STATETIME[0..2]
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
MOMSTATE STOPOPT UNCMDALM.FL
UNCMDALM.PR UNCMDALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DEVCTL
Block.
3.3 Data Acquisition Block
3.3.1 DATAACQ (Data Acquisition) block
Description Processes a specified process input value (P1) with or without filtering into an output
value (PV).
Function Normally configured to fetch process input from an AI device, controller or another
function block; it performs the following major functions:
l Brings input data and updates the input (P1) and its status P1STS. If input provides
value only, P1STS is derived from the value.
l PV characterization option lets you configure Linear or Square Root conversion on
the P1 input, if required.
l Low signal cut off function lets you configure a low cutoff value for P1 with Linear
or Square Root PV characterization.
l Performs filtering (P1FILTTIME) and clamping (P1CLAMPOPT) on P1 through
parameters P1FILTTIME and P1CLAMPOPT, and stores the result in PVAUTO.
l Generates alarm flags when PV exceeds any of a number of user-specified alarm
trip points for more than a designated time interval.
l PV source selection option (PVSOURCE) supports automatic, manual, and
substitute. A PV source selection of manual means an operator can store a value
to the output (PV). A selection of substitute means a user program can store a
value to PV.
Input Requires one process input value (P1) that must be fetched from another block.
l Number of process input connections (NUMPINT) is 1.
l P1STS provides the status of P1.
Input l PVEUHI and PVEULO define the full range of P1 in engineering units.
Ranges
l PVEUHI is 100% of full scale value.
and Limits
l PVEULO is 0% of full scale value.
l PVEXHILM and PVEXLOLM define the high and low limits of P1in engineering
units.
l If P1 clamping is desired (P1CLAMPOPT = Enable), the block clamps
the input within PVEXHILM and PVEXLOLM.
Output Produces an output value (PV) and its status (PVSTS).
Alarm With R410, DATAACQ block allows you to configure individual values for the
Processing deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A
new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-
delay time. Block may be configured to generate an alarm when PV exceeds one of
various trip points (XXXX.TP parameters) for more than a specified time.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Parameters with the following suffixes also apply to alarm processing:
l XXXX.DB, XXXX.DBU (deadband, deadband units)
l XXXX.FL (alarm flag)
l XXXX.PR (priority)
l XXXX.SV (severity)
l XXXX.TP (trip point)
l XXXX.CT (alarm count)
Where XXXX stands for one of the following:
PVHIALM PVLLALM PVHISIGCHG
PVHHALM ROCPOSALM PVLOSIGCHG
PVLOALM ROCNEGALM Bad PV Alarm
Parameters ALMDB ALMDBU ALMTM PVHIALM.DB PVHIALM.DBU PVHIALM.FL
BADPVALM.FL BADPVALM.PR PVHIALM.PR PVHIALM.SV PVHIALM.TM
BADPVALM.SV BADPVALM.TM PVHIALM.TMO PVHIALM.TP PVHISIGCHG.CT
BADPVALM.TMO DESC EUDESC PVHISIGCHG.TP PVLLALM.DB PVLLALM.DBU
HIALM.PR HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE PVLLALM.FL PVLLALM.PR PVLLALM.SV
INALM INSBLOCK[1..10] INSFAILFL PVLLALM.TM PVLLALM.TMO PVLLALM.TP
INSFAIL.PR INSFAIL.SV PVLOALM.DB PVLOALM.DBU PVLOALM.FL
LASTGOODPV LOCUTOFF NAME PVLOALM.PR PVLOALM.SV PVLOALM.TM
ORDERINCM NUMINSERT P1 PVLOALM.TMO PVLOALM.TP PVLOSIGCHG.CT
P1CLAMPOPT P1EU P1FILTINIT PVLOSIGCHG.TP PVP PVSOURCE PVSRCOPT
P1FILTTIME P1STS PV PVAUTO PVSTS PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
PVAUTOSTS PVCHAR PVEUHI PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
PVEULO PVEXHIFL PVEXHILM PVVALSTS ROCNEGALM.FL ROCNEGALM.PR
PVEXLOFL PVEXLOLM PVFORMAT ROCNEGALM.SV ROCNEGALM.TM
PVHHALM.DB PVHHALM.DBU ROCNEGALM.TMO ROCNEGALM.TP
PVHHALM.FL PVHHALM.PR ROCPOSALM.FL ROCPOSALM.PR
PVHHALM.SV PVHHALM.TM ROCPOSALM.SV ROCPOSALM.TM
PVHHALM.TMO PVHHALM.TP ROCPOSALM.TMO ROCPOSALM.TP
PVHIALM.DB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DATAACQ
Block.
3.4 IO Channel Blocks
3.4.1 AICHANNEL
Description Provides standard analog interface to control function blocks.
Function 1. Brings PV data from an associated IOM block.
2. Assigns BAD status to PV parameter when appropriate.
Inputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters BADCAL BADCODE CALBIAS IOMCONN OHMOFFSET ORDERINCM
CJOFFSET DEBUG FETCHMODE OVERRANGE PV PVRAW PVSTS
FREEZETIME IOCTYPE PVVALSTS UNDERRANGE
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated”with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block
Block that interfaces with the physical AI hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.4.2 AOCHANNEL
Description Provides a standard analog output signal for operating final control elements.
Function l Brings OP data from connected blocks and conveys OP data to be stored in an
associated IOM block.
l Reverses OP direction if OPTDIR option is REVERSE.
l Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
l Assigns safe value if STS parameter is BAD or UNCERTAIN.
l Sets INITREQ to TRUE value if AOC or IOM block is inactive or a communications
error occurs.
Inputs Only one control block can interface to this block.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT BADCAL BADCODE INITVAL IOCSTATE IOCTYPE
CALIBALL CALBIAS COMMFAILFL DEBUG IOMCONN OP OPFINAL
FETCHMODE FREEZETIME INITREQ OPSOURCE OPTDIR ORDERINCM
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block
Block that interfaces with physical AO hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.4.3 DICHANNEL
Description Provides a standard digital interface to control blocks.
Function l Brings PV data from an associated IOM block.
l Assigns Bad status to PV parameter when appropriate
Inputs Digital (PV) signals received from the field.
Outputs PV status value that can be used by other data points in system.
Parameters BADCODE BADPV COS DEBUG IOCTYPE IOMCONN NOFIELDPWR
FETCHMODE FREEZETIME HWFAULT ORDERINCM PVFL PVSTS PVVAL
INBADOPT IOCSTATE PVVALSTS WIREOFF
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block
Block that interfaces with physical Digital Input hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.4.4 DOCHANNEL
Description Generates status output [0 or 1), pulsed output (ON or OFF) for specified pulse time
based on origin of input and parameters.
Function l Brings SO or PO from connected blocks and stores value in an associated IOM
block.
l Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
l Stops SO if INTREQ is TRUE
l Sets INITREQ to TRUE value if DOC or IOM block is inactive or a communications
error occurs.
l You can configure PO to be Direct or Reverse by connecting ONPULSE or
OFFPULSE pin.
Inputs Only one control block can interface to this block.
Outputs Digital (Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT BADCODE IOCSTATE IOCTYPE IOMCONN
COMMFAILFL DEBUG DOMSO DOTYPE NOFIELDPWR NOLOAD OFFPULSE
FETCHMODE FREEZETIME INITREQ ONPULSE ORDERINCM SHORT SO
INITVAL LASTSERIAL SOSOURCE VERIFYLOST
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block
Block that interfaces with physical DO hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.4.5 PWMCHANNEL
Description Provides a pulse width modulated output signal for operating final control elements in
combination with a DO Module.
Function l Brings OP data from connected block and stores data in an associated IOM block.
l Reverses OP direction if OPTDIR option is REVERSE.
l Sends out a pulse based on the configured pulse width period (PWMPERIOD)
with its duty cycle determined by the OP data.
l Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
l Assigns safe value if status parameter is BAD or UNCERTAIN.
l Sets INITREQ to TRUE (ON) value if CM containing PWMC block or IOM block is
inactive or a communications error occurs. If communication fails, the pulse
function terminates. So, be sure you select the proper SHED VALUE for the DOM
channel to reflect the desired inactive digital state.
Inputs OP value from another block. Typically, output in 0 to 100% from a PID block, which
indicates the proportion of time period that the output will be turned on.
Outputs Pulsed (real) value
Parameters COMMFAILFL DOMSO FETCHMODE NOFIELDPWR NOLOAD OP ORDERINCM
INITREQ INITREQLATCH INITVAL PWMPERIOD SHORT VERIFYLOST
IOCNUMBER
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Block that interfaces with physical DO hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.4.6 SIFLAGARRCH
Description Provides a read/write interface to a Boolean array of data from a serial device.
Function l Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field
device. Or, reads data from the associated field device and makes it available to
the connected block.
l Supports up to 512 Boolean values(PVFL[1..512] from the device.
l Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time.
l Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and
generates a detailed error code (ERRORCODE).
l Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL) and initialization request flag (INITREQ)
parameters to mirror the status of the ERRFL parameter - data is valid or invalid.
Inputs Boolean value from device or another block
Outputs Boolean value
Parameters AUXDATA[0..7] BADCODE BADPVFL IOCSTATE IOCTYPE IOMCONN NFLAG
DEVADDR ERRCODE ERRFL ORDERINCM PVFL[1..512] PVSTS
FETCHMODE INITREQ IOCNUMBER STARTINDEX WRITEOPT
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding SIM block
Block that interfaces with physical FTA A and FTA B hardware at execution runtime. Use
channels 0-15 for FTA A and channels 16-31 for FTA B. For optimum performance,
assign channels to SIM block for given FTA contiguously. For example, if you have four
SIFLAGARRCH blocks to use with the FTA A, assign them to SIM block channels 0, 1, 2,
and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.4.7 SINUMARRCH
Description Provides a read/write interface to a Numeric array of data from a serial device.
Function l Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field
device. Or, reads data from the associated field device and makes it available to
the connected block.
l Provides Numeric values of the type 64-bit floating point, but data from the device
can be of type 32-/64-bit floating point (Real: 4-byte), 32-bit integer (Integer: 2-
byte), or Boolean (Byte: 1-byte).
l Supports up to 64 Numeric values (PV [1..64] from the device. Since the maximum
size of the interface to the device is 64 bytes, the number of Numerics
(NNUMERIC) per data type is 0 to 16 for Real, 0 to 32 for Integer, or 0 to 64 for
Byte type register in the device.
l Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time.
l Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
generates a detailed error code (ERRORCODE).
l Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL) and initialization request flag (INITREQ)
parameters to mirror the status of the ERRFL parameter - data is valid or invalid.
Inputs Up to 64 bytes of Real, Integer, or Byte type data from the device. (Block always
provides Numeric values of 64-bit floating point type.)
Outputs See above.
Parameters AUXDATA[0..7] BADCODE BADPVFL IOCNUMBER IOCSTATE IOCTYPE
DEVADDR ERRCODE ERRFL IOMCONN NNUMERIC ORDERINCM PV
FETCHMODE INITREQ [1..64] PVSTS[1..64] STARTINDEX
WRITEOPT
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding SIM block
Block that interfaces with physical FTA A and FTA B hardware at execution runtime. Use
channels 0-15 for FTA A and channels 16-31 for FTA B. For optimum performance,
assign channels to SIM block for given FTA contiguously. For example, if you have four
SINUMARRCH blocks to use with the FTA A, assign them to SIM block channels 0, 1, 2,
and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.4.8 SITEXTARRCH
Description Provides a read/write interface to a Text (or String) array of data from a serial device.
Function l Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field
device. Or, reads data from the associated field device and makes it available to
the connected block.
l Supports up to 8 Text values (STR[1..8]) from the device. Since the maximum size
of the interface to the device is 64 bytes, the valid range of values depends on the
combination of number of string values (NSTRING) and length of string values
(STRLEN) as follows.
l If NSTRING is 1 and STRLEN is 64, valid STR[1..8] range is 1.
l If NSTRING is 2 and STRLEN is 32, valid STR[1..8] range is 1 to 2.
l If NSTRING is 4 and STRLEN is 16, valid STR[1..8] range is 1 to 4.
l If NSTRING is 8 and STRLEN is 8, valid STR[1..8] range is 1 to 8.
l Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time.
l Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and
generates a detailed error code (ERRORCODE).
l Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL) and initialization request flag (INITREQ)
parameters to mirror the status of the ERRFL parameter - data is valid or invalid.
Inputs Up to 8 string values depending on whether the length of the string is 8, 16, 32, or 64
characters.
Outputs See above.
Parameters AUXDATA[0..7] BADCODE BADPVFL IOCNUMBER IOCSTATE IOCTYPE
DEVADDR ERRCODE ERRFL IOMCONN NSTRING ORDERINCM
FETCHMODE INITREQ STARTINDEX STR[1..8] STRLEN
WRITEOPT
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding SIM block
Block that interfaces with physical FTA A and FTA B hardware at execution runtime. Use
channels 0-15 for FTA A and channels 16-31 for FTA B. For optimum performance,
assign channels to SIM block for given FTA contiguously. For example, if you have four
SITEXTARRCH blocks to use with the FTA A, assign them to SIM block channels 0, 1, 2,
and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.5 Exchange Blocks (ControlNet Interoperability)
3.5.1 REQFLAGARRAY (Request Flag Array) block
Description Provides storage for up to 512 Boolean output flags. The value can be accessed as
a simple Boolean (Off or On) using the PVFL[n] or PVVALSTS[n] parameters.
Where“n” is the number of the flag.
Function Used to define two separate states (Off/On) to indicate status of a particular input.
Number of flag values (NFLAG) is user configurable. Current state of flags can be
changed/read using flag value (PVFL[n] or PVVALSTS[n]) (Boolean).
Inputs/Outputs Boolean output flags (PVFL[0..511]) Boolean output flags (PVVALSTS[0..511])
Parameters COMMAND DHCHANNEL ERRINFO FILENUM LASTRESPTM
DHDESTLINK DHFL DHNODE NFLAG ORDERINCM PATH PVFL[0..511]
DHSRCLINK DONEFL ERRCODE PVVALSTS[0..511] READYFL SENDFL
ERRFL
Associated REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block and REQTEXTARRAY (Request
Block Text Array) block
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
REQFLAGARRAY Block.
3.5.2 REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block
Description Provides storage for up to 64 integers or floating point values that are accessible
through the corresponding PV configuration parameter (PV[n]). Where“n” is the
number of the numeric.
Function Use outputs (PV[0..63]) as source parameters to provide predefined analog
constants to other function blocks. A bad numeric output parameter typically has the
value NaN (Not-a-Number). Number of Numeric Values (NNUMERIC) is user
configurable.
Inputs/Outputs Up to 64 outputs (PV[0..63]), depending on the number of numeric values
(NNUMERIC) configured
Parameters COMMAND DHCHANNEL LASTRESPTM NNUMERIC
DHDESTLINK DHFL DHNODE ORDERINCM PATH PV[0..63] PVSTS
DHSRCLINK DONEFL ERRCODE [0..63] PVVALSTS[0..63] READYFL
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
ERRFL ERRINFO FILENUM SENDFL TGTDATATYPE
Associated REQFLAGARRAY (Request Flag Array) block and REQTEXTARRAY (Request Text
Block Array) block
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
REQNUMARRAY Block.
3.5.3 REQTEXTARRAY (Request Text Array) block
Description Provides storage for up to 64 ASCII characters that are accessible through the
corresponding string configuration parameter (STR[n]). Where“n” is the number of
the text string.
Function l Provides predefined text (STR[0..7]) strings to other blocks.
l Number of string values (NSTRING) is user configurable.
l The length of the text strings (STRLEN) is user configurable to 64 characters
l Supports a maximum size of 64 two-byte characters.
Inputs/Outputs Up to 8 output strings (STR[0..7]), depending on the number of string (NSTRING)
and length of string (STRLEN) values configured.
Parameters COMMAND DHCHANNEL ERRINFO FILENUM LASTRESPTM
DHDESTLINK DHFL DHNODE NSTRING ORDERINCM PATH READYFL
DHSRCLINK DONEFL ERRCODE SENDFL STR[0..7] STRLEN
ERRFL
Associated REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block and REQFLAGARRAY (Request
Block Flag Array) block.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
REQTEXTARRAY Block.
3.5.4 RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block
Description The Flag Array Block is used to read or write an array of up to 512 BOOLEAN
values.
Function The Response Array function blocks can be used to respond to requests from third-
party devices using the PCCC or CIP protocols. These function blocks will be loaded
to and run in the CPM, and will have the ability to have data values read and written
by third-party devices.
Inputs/Outputs The Response Array Blocks are configured with the address used by the remote
device to reference its data and the data size. The configuration information cannot
be modified at run-time. If changes must be made to the configuration of a Response
Array Block, these changes must be made in the Project Database and the block
must be reloaded to the controller for the changes to take effect. These blocks are
not internally triggered, data reads and writes occur as a result of external
communications requests. They are also not Alarming Blocks and so cannot
generate Alarms by themselves. No fragmentation or re-assembly is done either in
the blocks themselves.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters FILENUM NFLAG ORDERINCM PVFL[0..511] PVVALSTS[0..511]
Associated RSPNUMARRAY (Response Number Array) block and RSPTEXTARRAY
Block (Response Text Array) block.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
RSPFLAGARRAY Block.
3.5.5 RSPNUMARRAY (Response Number Array) block
Description The Numeric Array Block is used to read or write an array of up to 64 integer or
single precision float values.
Function The Response Array function blocks can be used to respond to requests from third-
party devices using the PCCC or CIP protocols. These function blocks will be
loaded to and run in the CPM, and will have the ability to have data values read and
written by third-party devices.
Inputs/Outputs The Response Array Blocks are configured with the address used by the remote
device to reference its data and the data size. The configuration information cannot
be modified at run-time. If changes must be made to the configuration of a
Response Array Block, these changes must be made in the Project Database and
the block must be reloaded to the controller for the changes to take effect. These
blocks are not internally triggered, data reads and writes occur as a result of
external communications requests. They are also not Alarming Blocks and so
cannot generate Alarms by themselves. No fragmentation or re-assembly is done
either in the blocks themselves.
Parameters CIPNAME DATATYPE FILENUM ORDERINCM PV[0..63] PVSTS[0..63]
NNUMERIC
Associated RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block and RSPTEXTARRAY (Response
Block Text Array) block.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
RSPNUMARRAY Block.
3.5.6 RSPTEXTARRAY (Response Text Array) block
Description The Text Array Block is used to read or write an array of up to 64 ASCII characters.
Function The Response Array function blocks can be used to respond to requests from third-
party devices using the PCCC or CIP protocols. These function blocks will be
loaded to and run in the CPM, and will have the ability to have data values read and
written by third-party devices.
Inputs/Outputs The Response Array Blocks are configured with the address used by the remote
device to reference its data and the data size. The configuration information cannot
be modified at run-time. If changes must be made to the configuration of a
Response Array Block, these changes must be made in the Project Database and
the block must be reloaded to the controller for the changes to take effect. These
blocks are not internally triggered, data reads and writes occur as a result of
external communications requests. They are also not Alarming Blocks and so
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
cannot generate Alarms by themselves. No fragmentation or re-assembly is done
either in the blocks themselves.
Parameters FILENUM NSTRING ORDERINCM STR[0..7] STRLEN
Associated RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block and RSPNUMARRAY (Response
Block Number Array) block.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
RSPTEXTARRAY Block.
3.6 HART DEVICE Block
3.6.1 HART DEVICE (Generic HART Device)
Description Identifies the physical HART Device for the CPM to provide links to associated IOM.
Function Defines type of HART field device, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes once
every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one point, as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission to or from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to or from physical device.
Parameters ASSOCIOMLOC ASSOCPROCDEF HARTDEVSTATUS HARTFLAGS
BINITIALIZE BLKASSOCSTATUS DATE HARTREVNO HWREVNO IOMBLOCK
DATEFORMAT DESCRIPTOR IOMCHANNEL MANUFACTURER
DEVICEIDNO DEVICELOC MESSAGE MODE
DEVICETYPE DEVREVNO DEVSPCBIT NOREQUESTPREAMBLES PVRANGELOW
[0..135] DIGFV DIGFVDESC PVRANGEHIGH PVRANGEUNITS
DIGFVUNITS DIGPV DIGPVDESC SLOT0DDESC SLOT0UNITS SLOT0VALUE
DIGPVUNITS DIGSV DIGSVDESC SLOT1DESC SLOT1UNITS SLOT1VALUE
DIGSVUNITS DIGTV DIGTVDESC SLOT2DESC SLOT2UNITS SLOT2VALUE
DIGTVUNITS FINALASSNO SLOT3DESC SLOT3UNITS SLOT3VALUE
HARTCOMMCHNFAIL SWREVNO TAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.7 Pulse Input Channel/Module Blocks
3.7.1 Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff
Description Standard Interface to channels 6-7 of the Pulse Input IOM.
Function The three main functions of channels 6-7 are:
l Pulse Count (PULSECOUNT) - both raw count and Engineering Unit converted
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
values.
l Frequency value (PV) in Engineering Units
l Digital Output (fast cutoff)
Inputs If the Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff is running it fetches AVRAW, AV, PV, TV and
SO from its associated Pulse Input Module. If the associated IOM does not exist in the
CPM, fail-safe values are set.
Outputs After Input Processing, the Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff will send commands to
the IOM function block. If multiple commands are sent to the device, the execution order
in the Pulse Input firmware will be:
1. Reset Counter
2. Write Output Value
3. Write Target Value
Parameters AV AVRAW AVRAWSTS AVSTS IOCTYPE IOMCONN ORDERINCM
BADCODE BADSO C1 C2 C3 DEBUG PULSEMODE PV PVSTS PVVALSTS
EDGEDETECT FETCHMODE RESETFL SAFEOUTPUT SO SOCMDOFF
FREEZETIME FREQPERIOD SOCMDON TIMEBASE TV TVPROC
IOCNUMBER VOLTAGE
Associated Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081, Pulse Input Channel, and Pulse
Block Input Totalizer.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.7.2 Pulse Input Channel
Description Standard interface to channels 0-5 of the Pulse Input IOM function block.
Function The three main functions of channels 0-5 are:
l Pulse count - both raw count and Engineering Unit converted values
l Frequency value in Engineering Units
l Pulse Length measurement in Engineering Units
Inputs If the PIC function block is running, it fetches AVRAW, AV, PV, PL and CHANSTS from
its associated PIM function blocks. If the associated IOM does not exist in the CPM; fail-
safe values are used.
Outputs If RESETFL is set, the PIC function block will pass this command to the associated PIM
function block. RESETFL will then be reset regardless of whether the associated IOM
exists.
Parameters AV AVRAW AVRAWSTS AVSTS FREQPERIOD IOCTYPE IOMCONN
BADCODE C1 C2 C3 DEBUG ORDERINCM PL PLSTS PULSEMODE PV
EDGEDETECT FETCHMODE PVSTS RESETFL TIMEBASE VOLTAGE
FREEZETIME
Associated Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081, Pulse Input Channel with Fast
Block Cutoff, and Pulse Input Totalizer. Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1
channel of corresponding PIM block that interfaces with the physical pulse input
hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.7.3 Pulse Input Totalizer
Description Periodically adds an input value (P1) to an accumulator value (PV). Sets status flags to
indicate when accumulator value is“near”, “nearer”, “nearest” to the user-specified
target value.
Function Typically used to accumulate flows. For situations where flow transmitter may not be
precisely calibrated near zero-flow value, a zero flow cutoff feature is provided such that
when P1 is below the cutoff value it clamps to 0 (zero).
Inputs One input (P1) is required: P1 is the value to be accumulated - input value must be an
integer value. P1 must be fetched from another function block.
Outputs The following outputs are produced: Accumulated value (PV) and its status (PVSTS), as
well as a Boolean flag, PVSTSFL.BAD to indicate to other function blocks that this
block's PV status is bad. Flags, indicating if accumulated value has reached user-
specified target value or one of the accumulator deviation trip points (ACCTVFL and
ACCDEV.FL[1..4])
Equations Parameter PVEQN may be configured to specify how the block should handle bad input
and warm restarts. Specific handling combinations for a given PVEQN selection are
listed in the Control Builder Components Theory document.
Parameters ACCDEV.FL[1..4] ACCDEV.TP[1..4] PV PVEQN PVFORMAT PVSTS
ACCTV ACCTVFL C1 C2 CMDATTR PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
COMMAND CUTOFF.LM LASTGOOD PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
OLDAV ORDERINCM P1 P1STS PVVALSTS RESETFL RESETVAL
STARTFL STATE STOPFL
Associated Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081, Pulse Input Channel, and Pulse
Block Input Channel with Fast Cutoff.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.7.4 Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081
Description Defines the name/location and channel specifics for all Pulse Input Modules in the
Control Processor.
Function Supports the configuration of the TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081 Pulse Input module and acts
as the interface between Pulse Input Channel blocks and controller's IO Manager.
Inputs Every execution cycle the Pulse Input Module block gets the current assembly sent from
the Pulse Input device using IO Manager services.
Outputs Every 50 ms, the Pulse Input Module block sends assembly data to the Pulse Input
device using IO Manager services.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NUMDISCONN NUMSHUTDOWN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO AV[0..7] ORDERINCEE ORDERINCM PERIOD
AVRAW[0..7] BADSO[6..7] C1[0..7] C2 PHASE PL[0..5] PRODTYPE PULSEMODE
[0..7] C3[0..5] CATNUMBER CEESTATE [0..5] PV[0..7] RESETFL[0..7] SAFEOUTPUT
DESC DLCNBSLOT EDGEDETECT[0..7] [6..7] SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
ESTWEIGHT EXECSTATE EUDESC SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
FREQPERIOD[0..7] INALM IOCTYPE SCANPNTDTL SO[6..7] TIMEBASE[0..7] TV
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD [6..7] TVPROC[6..7] TVRAW[6..7]
MAJORREV MINORREV NUMCHANS ULCNBMAC VENDOR VOLTAGE[0..7]
NUMCONN
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Associated Pulse Input Totalizer, Pulse Input Channel, and Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff.
Block
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.7.5 Pulse Input Module Block CC-PPIX01
Description Acts as an interface between the C300 Controller and pulsed output transducers such
as tachometers, flow meters, and magnetic pickups.
Function l Provides highly accurate frequency/period calculations of inputs for certain
frequency ranges.
l Supports pulse multiplexing that enables Prover pulses to be generated by
copying the selected good pulses to the Prover pulse output.
l Supports Dual Pulse Integrity in accordance with ISO6551:1996 Level A which is
required to support interfacing of custody transfer meters with pulse outputs.
Inputs Based on the configured module scan rate, the IOLINK collects all the process input
data using the IOL Interface services.
Outputs Data consumed by this module is sent through the IOL Interface as it is received.
Parameters ACTUALPROVERSIGNAL AVSTS IOMSTSA IOMSTSB IOMTYPE
AVRAWSTS BLCKCOMMENT1 IOPDESCA IOPLOCATION IOREDOPT
BLCKCOMMENT2 BLCKCOMMENT3 MAINTAINONFAULT NUMCHANS
BLCKCOMMENT4 CHNLNAME NUMSIGS PARNERINCOMPATIBLEA
CONFIGPROVERSIGNAL CPUFREEAVGA PARNERINCOMPATIBLEB PLSTS
CPUFREEAVGB CPUFREEMINA PRIMARYSIG REASONSET REDDATAA
CPUFREEMINB CTRLCONFIRM DESC REDDATTAB RESETFL RDNAUTOSYNC
FWINVALIDA FWINVALIDB SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
GROUP.NUMPARAMS HIST.NUMPARAMS SCANRATE SCANPNTDTL
IOLINK IOLINKCOLOR IOMBTREVA SCANASSOCDSP SECONDARYSIG
IOMCOMMAND IOMFWREVA SECSOGSECLVL SERIALNUMA
IOMHWREVA IOMLHFSTA IOMNUM TREND.NUMPARAMS TVRAW
IOMOPERA IOMOPERB IOMPLD2REVA TYPEINVALIDA TYPEINVALIDB
IOMSTATE
Associated PI Channel
Block
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.7.6 PI Channel
Description The PI channel block represents a single pulse input point on a Series C Pulse Input
Module.
Function l Pulse count - both raw count and Engineering Unit converted values.
l Frequency calculation in Engineering Units.
l Pulse Length measurement in Engineering Units.
l Digital output (fast cutoff).
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Inputs l When the PI channel block is configured for pulse input type, it fetches AVRAW,
AV, PV, PVSTS, and PL from its associated Pulse Input Module.
l When the PI channel is configured for fast cutoff, it fetches AVRAW, AV, PV,
PVSTS, TV, and SO from its associated Pulse Input Module.
In both scenarios, if the associated Pulse Input Module does not exist in the C300
Controller, fail-safe values are set.
Outputs l When the PI channel is configured as pulse input type, if RESETFL is set, the PIC
function block will pass this command to the associated PIM function block.
RESETFL will then be reset regardless of whether the associated PIM exists or
not.
l When the PI channel is configured for fast cutoff, after input processing, the PI
channel sends commands to the Pulse Input Module function block. If multiple
commands are sent to the device, the execution order in the Pulse Input firmware
is as follows:
l Reset counter
l Write output value
l Write target value
Parameters ASSOCCHANNEL AV AVRAW BADAVRAW IOPTYPE PL PTEXECST
BADPVFL BADSO CHANNUM CONTAINEDIN C1 PULSEINTYPE PULSEMODE PV
C2 C3 DEVICELOCATION EDGEDETECT PVSTS SO SAFEOUTPUT
ENPULSEWIDTHREJ FREQPERIOD SOCMDOFF SOCMDON TV
INPUTSTREAM IOP TVPROC VOLTAGE
Associated Pulse Input Module Block CC-PPIX01
Block
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.8 Logic Blocks
3.8.1 AND block
Description Provides an up to 8-input AND algorithm, meaning that it performs the Boolean
operation of conjunction. Each input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being
optionally inverted, if required.
Function Turns the Boolean value output (OUT) ON only when all inputs (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) are
ON. Therefore:
l If all inputs (IN[1..8]) are ON, then: OUT = ON.
l If any input (IN[x]) is OFF, then: OUT = OFF. If input is inverted, then:
l Actual_IN[x] = NOT (IN[x])
l Else, Actual_IN[x] = IN[x]
Where x equals any valid input.
Truth Table IN[1] OFF OFF ON ON IN[2] OFF ON OFF ON OUT OFF OFF OFF ON
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Parameters IN[1..8] INPTINVSTS[1..8] ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the AND Block.
3.8.2 CHECKBAD block
Description Provides bad input handling for desired input.
Function Checks if input (IN) value equals NaN.
l If IN = NaN
l Then, OUT = ON
l Else, OUT = OFF
Inputs IN = Real number
Outputs OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
CHECKBAD Block.
3.8.3 CHECKBOOL block
Description Evaluates the input connections and passes these input values through to its
associated outputs based on specific configuration settings.
Function Determines the action to be taken in the event of an invalid input. If the value of INSTS
[1..8] is kBadValSts, the value passed through the block, from IN[1..8] to OUT[1..8], will
be modified based on the configuration of the BADINACT[1..8] parameter. Also, the
Inactive Input Detection Threshold, ( INACTINDETTM[n]) parameter is used, in
conjunction with BADINACT[n] as the amount of time that must expire before the block
determines if it should take the configured Bad Input Action. During this detection time,
the inputs status must be continually INACTIVE in order for the action to be taken. When
the input is INACTIVE for less than this time, no action is taken. If the input goes
INACTIVE again, the time starts counting over. This time is configured in seconds and
has a range of 0-8000 seconds.If BADINACT is configured as OFF then OUT[1..8] is set
equal to OFF If BADINACT is configured as ON then OUT[1..8] is set equal to ON If
BADINACT is configured as HoldLast then OUT[1..8] is set equal to LASTIN[1..8]
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Outputs OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN[1..8] INACTINDETTM[1..8] INSTS[1..8] BADINACT[1..8] BADINDETTM[1..8]
INSRC[1..8] LASTIN[1..8] LASTINSTS[1..8] BADINACTMINTM[1..8] OUT[1..8] OUTSTS
[1..8]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
CHECKBOOL Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.8.4 CHGEXEC (Change Execution) block
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for the list of function blocks qualified to run under
change driven execution.
Description The CHGEXEC block helps in optimizing the performance of control modules (CM) used
exclusively for logic computation. CHGEXEC is used to create CM logic strategies which
execute most of their logic by exception, thereby reducing the average processing
power consumed by the strategy. It runs within the CEE on the C300 controller, C200E
controller, and ACE controller.
Function The CHGEXEC block enables the design of change driven logic strategies within CMs.
Some of the key functionalities of the CHGEXEC block are as follows:
l Supports up to 32 change detected Boolean inputs.
l Supports output of captured inputs to downstream blocks to prevent consumption
of inconsistent data during CM execution.
l Supports a cascade output that allows operation of multiple CHGEXEC instances
to be coordinated.
l Supports a slow, periodic, background execution for convenience in strategy
design.
l Supports engineer-only test options which allow strategy designers to force it to
suspend background execution or to execute continuously in the absence of input
changes.
Inputs DATA: Supports 32 change detected Boolean inputs.
Outputs l Supports output of captured inputs to downstream blocks to prevent consumption
of inconsistent data during CM execution.
l Supports a cascade output that allows operation of multiple CHGEXEC instances
to be coordinated.
Parameters AUTOPERIOD AUTOPHASE DATA[1..32] EXITOPT LASTDATA[1..32]
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 NUMDATA TESTOPT TRIGGER
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4
CHGINDEX
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the CHGEXEC
Block.
3.8.5 CONTACTMON (Contact Monitoring) block
The CONTACTMON block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE Controllers.
Description The Contact Monitoring function block is used for limit switches with NO and NC Contact
with the same activation mechanism. In most cases, the limit switch serves some critical
applications. When both digital inputs are ON or OFF at the same time indicating that the
switch is malfunctioning, an alarm needs to be generated to attract immediate attention
to the problem. This functionality is achieved using the Contact Monitoring function
block.
Function l Enables alarm generation whenever the state of both inputs is same or different
based on the normal state configuration.
l Provides the input switch status as OUT1 and OUT2.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l With R410, CONTACTMON block allows you to configure individual values for the
on-delay time and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
Inputs IN[1..2] - Input parameter corresponding to the NO and NC Contact of the same micro
switch
Outputs l PVFL - gives the negated XOR results of IN[1] and IN[2].
l OUT1 - Tracks IN[1] when both inputs of COC are not ON.
l OUT2 - Tracks IN[2] when both inputs of COC are not ON.
Parameters HIALM.PR HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE IN[1,2] OFFNRMALM.TM OFFNRMALM.TMO PV
INALM NORMAL OFFNRMALM.FL PVFL STATE0 OUT1 OUT2 STATE1
OFFNRMALM.SV OFFNRMALM.PR STATETEXT[0..1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
CONTACTMON Block.
3.8.6 DELAY block
Description Provides the ability to delay the output (OUT) response to the given input (IN) by one
sample time delay.
Function The OUT always follows the input (IN) action after one sample time delay.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Outputs OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DELAY
Block.
3.8.7 EQ (Equal) block
Description Provides a 2-input Compare Equal (with deadband range) function, meaning that it
compares two inputs for equality within a specified deadband range or, for single input,
a designated trip point (TP) parameter.
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when the two inputs (IN[1] and IN[2]) are
considered equal within a specified deadband range or, for single input, a designated
trip point (TP) parameter..
Inputs IN[1..2] = real numbers
l If only 1 input connection is configured, an input port is displayed for parameter TP
and the value of TP is used instead of IN[2].
l If IN[1] and/or IN[2] are NaN (Not a Number), OUT = INBADOPT.
l DEADBAND1, DEADBAND2 and TP have the same data types as the inputs.
l DEADBAND1 and DEADBAND2 must satisfy this constraint: 0 <= DEADBAND1
<= DEADBAND2
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals. Comparison blocks
set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-safe value
when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the
comparison is ordered or unordered.
Parameters DEADBAND1 DEADBAND2 IN[0..2] NUMOFINPUTS ORDERINCM OUT TP
INBADOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the EQ Block.
3.8.8 FTRIG (Falling-edge Trigger) block
Description Falling-edge Trigger Block -- sets the output (OUT) to ON following the ON-to-OFF
transition of the input and stays ON until the next execution cycle, at which time it returns
to OFF.
Function Provides falling edge change detection, thereby turning the output ON if an ON-to-OFF
transition is detected.
Input IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the FTRIG
Block.
3.8.9 GE (Greater than or Equal to) block
Description Provides a 2-input Compare Greater Than or Equal (with deadband) function, meaning
it checks to see if one designated input (IN[1]) is greater than or equal to either a second
input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter.
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when one designated input (IN[1]) is greater than
or equal to a second input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter
(TP) as follows:
l If IN[1] >= IN[2], then: OUT = ON.
l If IN[1] < (IN[2] - DEADBAND), then: OUT = OFF.
l If (IN[2] - DEADBAND) < IN[1] < IN[2], then output is not changed.
Inputs IN[1..2] = Real numbers
l If only one input connection is configured, an input port is displayed for parameter
TP and the value of TP is used instead of IN[2].
l If IN[1] and/or IN[2] are NaN (Not a Number), OUT is set to INBADOPT.
l DEADBAND and TP have the same data type as that of the inputs.
Output OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals. Comparison blocks
set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-safe value
when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the comparison
is ordered or unordered.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters DEADBAND IN[0..2] INBADOPT ORDERINCM OUT TP
NUMOFINPUTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the GE Block.
3.8.10 GT (Greater Than) block
Description Provides a 1- or 2-input Compare Greater Than (with deadband) function, meaning that
it checks to see if one designated input (IN[1]) is greater than either a second input (IN
[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP).
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when one designated input (IN[1]) is greater
than a second input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP) as
follows:
l If IN[1] > IN[2], then: OUT = ON.
l If IN[1] <= (IN[2] - DEADBAND), then: OUT = OFF.
l If (IN[2] - DEADBAND) < IN[1] <= IN[2], then: OUT is not changed.
Input IN[1..2] = Real numbers
l If only one input connection is configured, an input port is displayed for parameter
TP and the value of TP is used instead of IN[2].
l If IN[1] and/or IN[2]are NaN (Not a Number), OUT is set to INBADOPT.
l DEADBAND and TP have the same data type as that of the inputs.
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals. Comparison blocks
set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-safe value
when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the
comparison is ordered or unordered.
Parameters DEADBAND IN[0..2] INBADOPT ORDERINCM OUT TP
NUMOFINPUTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the GT Block.
3.8.11 LE (Less than or Equal to) block
Description Provides a 2-input Compare Less Than or Equal (with deadband) function, meaning it
checks to see if one designated input (IN[1]) is less than or equal to either a second
input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP).
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when one designated input (IN[1]) is less than or
equal to a second input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter
(TP) as follows:
l If IN[1] <= IN[2], then: OUT = ON.
l If IN[1] > (IN[2] + DEADBAND), then: OUT = OFF.
l If IN[2] < IN[1] <= (IN[2] + DEADBAND), then: output is not changed.
Inputs IN[1..2] = Real numbers
l If only one input connection is configured, an input port is displayed for parameter
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
TP and the value of TP is used instead of IN[2].
l If IN[1] and/or IN[2] are NaN (Not a Number), OUT is set to INBADOPT.
l DEADBAND and TP have the same data type as that of the inputs.
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals. Comparison blocks
set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-safe value
when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the
comparison is ordered or unordered.
Parameters DEADBAND IN[0..2] INBADOPT ORDERINCM OUT TP
NUMOFINPUTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LE Block
3.8.12 LIMIT block
Description Provides a 3-input limit function, meaning that it provides an output that is maintained
within a specified range as defined by user-specified minimum and maximum values.
Function Provides an output that is maintained within a specified range as follows:
l MIN <= OUT <= MAX
l If IN = NaN, then, OUT = NaN
Inputs IN = real number
Output OUT = real number maintained within a specified range
Parameters IN MAX MIN ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LIMIT
Block..
3.8.13 LT (Less Than) block
Description Provides a 1- or 2-input Compare Less Than (with deadband) function, meaning that it
checks to see if one designated input (IN[1]) is less than either a second input (IN[2]) or,
for single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP).
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when one designated input (IN[1]) is less than a
second input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP) as
follows:
l If IN[1] < IN[2], then: OUT = ON.
l If IN[1] >= (IN[2] + DEADBAND), then: OUT = OFF.
l If IN[2] <= IN[1] < (IN[2] + DEADBAND), then: OUT is not changed.
Inputs IN[1..2] = Real numbers
l If only one input connection is configured, an input port is displayed for parameter
TP and the value of TP is used instead of IN[2].
l If IN[1] and/or IN[2] are NaN (Not a Number), OUT is set to INBADOPT.
l DEADBAND and TP have the same data type as that of the inputs.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals. Comparison blocks
set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-safe value
when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the comparison
is ordered or unordered.
Parameters DEADBAND IN[0..2] INBADOPT ORDERINCM OUT TP
NUMOFINPUTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LT Block.
3.8.14 MAX block
Description Provides an 8-input MAX function, meaning that it provides an output that is the
maximum value of eight inputs.
Function Used to isolate the highest value of multiple input values and use it as a designated
output value. This block ignores NaN inputs.
Inputs IN[1..8] = Real numbers
Output OUT = Real number
Parameters EUDESC HIALM IN[1..8] INPTINVSTS[1..8] NUMOFINPUTS ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MAX Block.
3.8.15 MAXPULSE block
Description Provides a maximum time limit pulse output (OUT) each time the input (IN) transitions
from OFF to ON. You specify the maximum output pulse width (PULSEWIDTH) in
seconds through configuration.
Function Used to limit the output (OUT) pulse to a maximum width.
l If the input (IN) pulse time is less than or equal to the specified PULSEWIDTH
time, IN is assumed to equal one output (OUT) pulse.
l If the IN pulse time is greater than the specified PULSEWIDTH time, OUT pulse
terminates at end of specified PULSEWIDTH time.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM OUT PULSEWIDTH
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MAXPULSE
Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.8.16 MIN block
Description Provides an 8-input MIN function, meaning that it provides an output that is the minimum
value of eight inputs.
Function Used to isolate the lowest value of multiple input values and use it as a designated
output value. This block ignores NaN inputs.
Inputs IN[..8] = Real numbers
Output OUT = Real number
Parameters IN[1..8] NUMOFINPUTS ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MIN Block.
3.8.17 MINPULSE block
Description Provides a minimum time limit pulse output (OUT) each time the input (IN) transitions
from OFF to ON. You specify the minimum output pulse width (PULSEWIDTH) in
seconds through configuration.
Function Used to define the minimum output (OUT) pulse width.
l If the input (IN) pulse time is less than or equal to the specified PULSEWIDTH time,
output (OUT) pulse width equals the specified PULSEWIDTH time.
l If the IN pulse time is greater than the specified PULSEWIDTH time, OUT pulse
width tracks IN pulse time, so OUT pulse exceeds specified PULSEWIDTH time.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM OUT PULSEWIDTH
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MINPULSE
Block.
3.8.18 MUX (Multiplexer) block
Description Provides an up to 8-input Extensible Multiplexer algorithm, meaning that it selects 1 of
“n” inputs depending on a separate input K.
Function Sets the actual output (OUT) to a particular input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) depending on the
value of a separate input K. Input K is clamped at 0 and 7.
Truth Table K 0 1 n-1 OUT IN1 IN2 INn
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value K = 8-bit unsigned integer.
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN[1..8] K ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MUX Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.8.19 MUXREAL (Real Multiplexer) block
Description Provides an up to 8-input real Multiplexer algorithm, meaning that it selects 1 of“n”
inputs depending on a separate input K.
Function Sets the actual output (OUT) to a particular input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) depending on the
value of a separate input K. Input K is clamped at 0 and 7.
Truth Table K 0 1 n-1 OUT IN1 IN2 INn
Inputs IN[..8] = Real numbers K = 8-bit unsigned integer.
Outputs OUT = real number
Parameters IN[1..8] K ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MUXREAL
Block.
3.8.20 MVOTE (Majority Voting) block
Description Provides an output (MAJ) value that equals the value of the majority of the inputs (IN
[1..8]) and sets another output (DISCREP) to ON if not all inputs agree for a specified
time (DELAY). You specify the time (DELAYTIME) in seconds through configuration.
You must also specify the number of inputs (NUMOFINPUTS) through configuration.
Function Sets the MAJ output equal to the value of the majority of the inputs (IN[1..8]). Sets the
DISCREP output to ON, if not all inputs agree during the specified time (DELAY).
DELAY is a unit integer with time unit in seconds.
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value.
Outputs MAJ, DISCREP =Boolean value
Parameters DELAYTIME DISCREP IN[1..8] MAJ NUMOFINPUTS ORDERINCM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MVOTE
Block.
3.8.21 NAND block
Description Provides an up to 8-input NAND algorithm, meaning that it performs an inverted AND
function. Each input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being optionally inverted,
if required.
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) OFF only when all inputs (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) are ON;
therefore:
l If all inputs are ON, then: OUT = OFF.
l If any input is OFF, then: OUT = ON.
Truth Table IN[1] OFF OFF ON IN[2] OFF ON OFF ON OUT ON ON ON OFF
ON
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Inputs IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8] = digital signals
Output OUT = digital signal controlled by status of the input signals.
Parameters IN[1..8] INPTINVSTS ORDERINCM OUT
[1..8]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NAND
Block.
3.8.22 NE (Not Equal) block
Description Provides a 2-input Compare Not Equal (with deadband range) function, meaning that it
checks to see if one designated input (IN[1]) is not equal to either a second input (IN[2])
or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP).
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when the two inputs (IN[1] and IN[2]) are not
considered equal within a specified deadband range.
l If ABS (IN[1] -IN[2]) <= DEADBAND1, then: OUT = OFF.
l Else, if ABS (IN[1] -IN[2]) > DEADBAND2, then: OUT = ON.
l If IN[1] and/or IN[2] are NaN (Not a Number), OUT is set to INBADOPT.
l DEADBAND1 and DEADBAND2 must satisfy the following constraint: 0<=
DEADBAND1 <= DEADBAND2.
l DEADBAND1, DEADBAND2, and TP = real numbers.
Inputs IN[1] and IN[2] = real numbers
l If there is only one input, then IN[2] = TP.
Output OUT = Boolean value. Comparison blocks set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT
that defines the output fail-safe value when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is
not specified whether the comparison is ordered or unordered.
Parameters DEADBAND1 DEADBAND2 IN[0..2] NUMOFINPUTS ORDERINCM OUT TP
INBADOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NE Block.
3.8.23 nOON (n out of N voting) block
Description n (N)-out-of-N (IN) voting block; outputs are computed as follows:
l VOTED output is set to ON if at least n (N) inputs are ON, otherwise it is set to OFF.
l ORED output is set to ON if any input is ON, otherwise it is set to OFF.
l ALARM output is a pulse output -- every time an input turns ON, a fixed pulse (of
the pulsewidth specified by PULSEWIDTH parameter) is generated, provided the
total number of inputs which are ON is less than n.
Function Provides VOTED, ORED and ALARM outputs in support of logical functions.
Inputs IN[1..20] = Boolean value N = 8-bit unsigned integer (range = 1-5)
l There can be a maximum of 20 inputs (IN = 20)
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Outputs l VOTED, ORED = Boolean state (ON or OFF) as determined by the inputs.
l ALARM = pulse output, width specified by parameter PULSEWIDTH.
PULSEWIDTH is a unit integer with time unit in seconds
Parameters ALARM IN[1..20] N ORDERINCM ORED PULSEWIDTH
VOTED
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the nOON
Block.
3.8.24 NOR block
Description Provides an up to 8-input NOR algorithm, meaning that it performs an inverted OR
function. Each input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being optionally inverted,
if required.
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) OFF if any one input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) is ON; therefore:
l If all inputs are OFF, then: OUT = ON.
l If any one input is ON, then: OUT = OFF.
Truth Table IN[1] OFF OFF ON IN[2] OFF ON OFF ON OUT ON OFF OFF
ON OFF
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean values
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by status of input signals
Parameters INPTINVSTS[1..8] ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NOR Block.
3.8.25 NOT block
Description Provides a NOT algorithm, meaning it performs an inversion function.
Function Reverses the state of a digital input (IN) such that the output (OUT) is the complement of
the single input; therefore:
l OUT = opposite of IN
l If IN = ON, then: OUT = OFF.
l If IN = OFF, then OUT = ON.
Truth Table IN OFF ON OUT ON OFF
Input IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = complement of input signal (Boolean)
Parameters EUDESC HIALM IN ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NOT Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.8.26 OFFDELAY block
Description When the input state changes from ON to OFF, an internal timer starts counting down
the delay specified by DLYTIME. When it times out, the input is monitored again, and if it
is still OFF, the output is set OFF, When the input state transitions too ON, the output is
set to ON immediately and the timer is shut off.
Function Used to delay the input by a specified delay time after an ON/OFF device transitions
from the ON state to the OFF state.
l Delay time in seconds is specified by the DELAYTIME parameter.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
l No delay is provided when the input goes from the OFF state back to the ON state.
Outputs OUT = Boolean value When the input transitions from the OFF state to the ON state, the
output is set to ON immediately.
Parameters DELAYTIME IN ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the OFFDELAY
Block.
3.8.27 ONDELAY block
Description When the input state changes from OFF to ON, an internal timer starts counting down
the delay specified by DLYTIME. When it times out, the input is monitored again, and if it
is still ON, the output is set ON, When the input state transitions to OFF, the output is set
to OFF immediately and the timer is shut off.
Function Used to delay the input by a specified delay time after an ON/OFF device transitions
from the OFF state to the ON state.
l Delay time in seconds is specified by the DELAYTIME parameter.
Input IN = Boolean value
l No delay is provided when the input goes from the ON state back to the OFF state.
Output OUT = Boolean value
l When the input transitions from the ON state to the OFF state, the output is set to
OFF immediately.
Parameters DELAYTIME IN ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ONDELAY
Block.
3.8.28 OR block
Description Provides an up to 8-input OR algorithm, meaning that it performs the inclusive OR
Boolean function. Each input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being optionally
inverted, if required.
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON if any one input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) is ON; therefore:
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l If all inputs are OFF, then: OUT = OFF.
l If any one input is ON, then: OUT = ON.
Truth Table IN[1] OFF ON OFF IN[2] OFF OFF ON ON OUT OFF ON ON ON
ON
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of input signals.
Parameters IN[1..8] INPTINVSTS[1..8] ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the OR Block.
3.8.29 PULSE block
Description Provides a fixed pulse output (OUT) each time the input (IN) transitions from OFF to ON.
You specify the fixed output pulse width (PULSEWIDTH) in seconds through
configuration.
Function Used to define the fixed output (OUT) pulse width.
l If the input (IN) pulse time is less than or equal to the fixed PULSEWIDTH time,
output (OUT) pulse width equals the fixed PULSEWIDTH time.
l If the IN pulse time is greater than the fixed PULSEWIDTH time, OUT pulse width
is restricted to the fixed PULSEWIDTH time. Another output pulse cannot be
generated until the preceding pulse has completed.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM OUT PULSEWIDTH
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PULSE
Block.
3.8.30 QOR (Qualified OR) block
Description Qualified-OR provides an (N + 1)-input generic qualified-OR function, meaning that the
output (OUT) is turned ON if a certain number (k) of total inputs (IN[n]) is ON. Each input
(IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being optionally inverted, if required.
Function Turns the output (OUT) ON if a specified number (K) of total inputs is ON.
Truth Table IN[1] ON IN[2] ON IN[3] OFF IN[4] ON IN[5] OFF K 3 OUT ON
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value K = 1 to 8 (Integer)
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by status of input signals.
Parameters IN[1..8] INPTINVSTS[1..8] K ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the QOR Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.8.31 ROL (Rotate Output Left) block
Description Provides a 16-bit integer output (OUT) that is rotated to the left by the number of bits (N)
specified from the 16-bit integer input (IN). You specify the number of bits through
configuration.
Function Used to shift out bits in the output (OUT) by rotating the bits in the input (IN) left by the
number of bits (N) specified.
l OUT = IN left rotated by N bits, circular.
Inputs IN = 16-bit integer only
Output OUT = 16-bit integer
Parameters IN N ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ROL Block.
3.8.32 ROR (Rotate Output Right) block
Description Provides a 16-bit integer output (OUT) that is rotated to the right by the number of bits
(N) specified from the 16-bit integer input (IN). You specify the number of bits through
configuration.
Function Used to shift out bits in the output (OUT) by rotating the bits in the input (IN) right by the
number of bits (N) specified.
l OUT = IN right rotated by N bits, circular.
Inputs IN = 16-bit integer only
Output OUT = 16-bit integer
Parameters IN N ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ROR Block.
3.8.33 RS (Reset dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block
Description Provides a bistable Reset Dominant flip-flop as defined in the IEC DIS 1131-3 standard.
Function Specifies the output (Q) of the flip-flop as a function of the input S (Set), the input R
(Reset), and the last state of Q.
Truth Table S 0 (OFF) 0 (OFF) 1 R 0 (OFF) 1 (ON) 0 (OFF) 1 (ON) Q No Change 0
(ON) 1 (ON) (OFF) 1 (ON) 0 (OFF)
Inputs S and R = Boolean value
Output Q = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Parameters ORDERINCM Q RS
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RS Block.
3.8.34 RTRIG (Rising edge Trigger) block
Description Rising-edge Trigger sets the output (OUT) to ON following the OFF-to-ON transition of
the input (IN) and stays at ON until the next execution cycle, at which time it returns to
OFF.
Function Provides rising edge change detection, thereby turning the output ON if an OFF-to-ON
transition is detected.
Input IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RTRIG
Block.
3.8.35 SEL (Binary Selection) block
Description Provides a 3-input selector function, meaning it selects 1 of 2 inputs (IN[1] or IN[2])
depending on the separate input G.
Function Sets the actual output (OUT) equal to the value of 1 of 2 inputs (IN[1] or IN[2]),
depending on the value of a separate input (G).
Truth Table IN[1] IN[1] IN[1] IN[2] IN[2] IN[2] G OFF ON OUT IN[1] IN[2]
Inputs IN[1..2] =Boolean value G = Boolean value
Output OUT =Boolean value depending on the values of IN[1] and IN[2].
Parameters G IN[0..2] INPTINVSTS[1..2] ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SEL Block.
3.8.36 SELREAL (Real Selection) block
Description Provides a 3-input selector function, meaning it selects 1 of 2 inputs (IN[1] or IN[2])
depending on the separate input (G).
Function Sets the actual output (OUT) equal to the value of 1 of 2 inputs (IN[1] or IN[2]),
depending on the value of a separate input (G).
Truth Table IN[1] IN[1] IN[1] IN[2] IN[2] IN[2] G OFF ON OUT IN[1] IN[2]
Inputs IN1 and IN2 = real numbers G = Boolean value
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Output OUT = Real number
Parameters G IN[0..2] ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SELREAL
Block.
3.8.37 SHL (Shift Output Left) block
Description Provides a 16-bit integer output (OUT) that is shifted to the left by the number of bits (N)
specified from the 16-bit integer input (IN). You specify the number of bits (N) through
configuration.
Function Used to shift out bits in the output (OUT) by shifting the bits in the input (IN) left by the
number of bits (N) specified.
l OUT = IN left shifted by N bits, zero filled on right.
Inputs IN = 16-bit integer only
Output OUT = 16-bit integer
Parameters IN N ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SHL Block.
3.8.38 SHR (Shift Output Right) block
Description Provides a 16-bit integer output (OUT) that is shifted to the right by the number of bits
(N) specified from the 16-bit integer input (IN). You specify the number of bits through
configuration.
Function Used to shift out bits in the output (OUT) by shifting the bits in the input (IN) right by the
number of bits (N) specified.
l OUT = IN right shifted by N bits, zero filled on left.
Inputs IN = 16-bit integer only
Output OUT = 16-bit integer
Parameters IN N ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SHR Block.
3.8.39 SR (Set dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block
Description Provides a bistable Set Dominant flip-flop as defined in the IEC DIS 1131-3 standard.
Function Specifies the output (Q) of the flip-flop as a function of the input S (set), the input R
(Reset), and the last state of Q.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Truth Table S 0 (OFF) 0 (OFF) 1 R 0 (OFF) 1 (ON) 0 (OFF) 1 (ON) Q No Change 0
(ON) 1 (ON) (OFF) 1 (ON) 1 (ON)
Inputs S and R = Boolean values
Outputs Q = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Parameters ORDERINCM PVERSION QRS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SR Block.
3.8.40 STARTSIGNAL block
Description Supports handling of restarts within Control Modules (CM). Can be used within any CM
to provide better control over how the module initializes in response to events such as
Cold or Warm restart.
Function Supports an enumeration-valued summary parameter named RESTART. The normal
value for the RESTART parameter is NONE. Following a transition, it shows a value
other than NONE until the end of the first block execution. The possible enumeration
values for RESTART are as follows: NONE (0) CMLOAD (1) CMACTIVE (3) CEECOLD
(4) CEEWARM (5) CEESWITCH (6)
Inputs Boolean value
Outputs RESTART = Enumerated value
Parameters ANYRESTARTFL CEECOLDFL CMACTIVEFL CMLOADFL ORDERINCM
CEESWITCHFL CEEWARMFL RESTART
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
STARTSIGNAL Block.
3.8.41 TRIG (Rising or Falling edge Trigger) block
Description Sets the output (OUT) to ON following the OFF-to-ON or ON-to-OFF transition of the
input (IN) and stays at ON until the next execution cycle, at which time it returns to OFF.
Function Provides edge change detection, thereby turning the output ON if an OFF-to-ON or ON-
to-OFF transition is detected. This block assumes that the input is starting at its OFF
stage the first time it is activated.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Outputs OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TRIG Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.8.42 WATCHDOG block
Description Monitors other system functions or remote devices and sets the output (OUT) to ON if the
monitored function or device fails to communicate. Example: Applications like TotalPlant
Batch uses the Watchdog item to determine the communication between TotalPlant
Batch server (TPB) and Experion controllers.
NOTE TotalPlant Batch (TPB) is a legacy batch product that is not available
for new sale. However, Honeywell continues to support the existing
TotalPlant Batch (TPB) customer. New batch customers are recommended to
buy the Experion Batch Manager (EBM).
Watchdog also provides a Watchdog protocol in Experion, which is simple set/reset
protocol. The application such as TPB server sets the Watch dog by writing one to the
watchdog item. The Experion controller accessed through the data server is referred as
TPB Phase Data Interface on Experion. It is expected to reset the watchdog to zero
when a non-zero value is detected. Therefore, when you reset the watch dog values,
TPB server can detect the presence of a healthy controller. However, the controller can
detect the presence of a healthy TPB server by periodic setting of the watchdog. If the
controller determines that the TPB server has not written to the watchdog for a long
period of time, then it assumes that the TPB server is no longer available and responds
by holding all active phases within. If the TPB server detects that the controller does not
reset the watchdog, it assumes that communication to all tags defined in the data server
connection is not reliable. Batches using any of these tags is in response when the
communication problems that occur.
Function Used to monitor other system functions or remote devices.
l Monitored function or device must set IN parameter to ON within a specified time
interval (DELAYTIME), otherwise it is assumed to have failed and output (OUT) is
set to ON. The DELAYTIME is an integer with unit time in seconds.
l If output (OUT) is ON, it is reset to OFF as soon as IN is set to ON.
Input IN = Boolean value (ON/OFF)
Output OUT = Boolean value (ON/OFF)
Parameters DELAYTIME IN ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
WATCHDOG Block.
3.8.43 XOR block
Description Provides an up to 8-input XOR algorithm, meaning it performs the exclusive OR
function. Each input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being optionally inverted,
if required.
Function Turns output (OUT) ON only if an odd number of inputs are ON; otherwise, OUT is OFF.
Truth Table IN[1] OFF ON OFF IN[2] OFF OFF ON ON OUT OFF ON ON
ON OFF
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of input signals.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters IN[1..8] INPTINVSTS[1..8] ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theoryfor more information on the XOR Block.
3.8.44 2OO3 (2 out of 3 voting) block
Description 2-out-of-3 Voting block - outputs (DISCREP and MAJ) are determined as follows:
l DISCREP = NOT (IN[1] = IN[2] = IN[3]) for duration >= DELAY
l MAJ = value held by the majority of the inputs.
Function Sets the output (DISCREP) to ON if NOT all inputs agree for a specified time duration
(DELAY); otherwise, it is set to OFF.
Inputs IN[1..3] = Boolean values
Outputs DISCREP & MAJ = Boolean values
Parameters DELAYTIME DISCREP MAJ ORDERINCM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the 2003 Block.
3.9 Math Blocks
3.9.1 ABS block
Description Provides the Absolute Value function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the absolute value of the user connected input
(IN[1]). Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based
on the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and
more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a value from the input
connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals). Math functions use
existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad input
handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Absolute value of IN1
Parameters IN[1] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ABS Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.9.2 ADD block
Description Provides the N-input add function.
Function Sums the value of the number of inputs (IN[1..8]) configured by the user as the output
(OUT). Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based
on the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and
more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a value from the input
connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals). Math functions use
existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad input
handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..8] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Sum of (IN1 , 1N2 , ..INn
Parameters IN[1..8] NAME NUMOFINPUTS ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ADD Block.
3.9.3 DIV block
Description Provides the divide function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the quotient of input 1 (IN[1]) divided by input 2
(IN[2]). Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based
on the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and
more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a value from the input
connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals). Math functions use
existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad input
handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..2] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Quotient of IN 1 divided by IN2 .
Parameters IN[1..2] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DIV Block.
3.9.4 EXP block
Description Provides the exponent function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the exponent of the user connected input (IN[1]).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the
user's configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more
efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection,
the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals). Math functions use existing
capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad input handling is
desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Output OUT = e to the power of IN 1.
Parameters IN[1] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the EXP Block.
3.9.5 LN block
Description Provides the natural logarithm function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the natural logarithm of the user connected input
(IN[1], log to the base of e). Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less
math function based on the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control
Builder with minimum and more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a
value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero.
If bad input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Natural logarithm of IN 1 (log to the base of e)
Parameters IN[1] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LN Block.
3.9.6 LOG block
Description Provides the logarithm function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the base 10 logarithm of the user connected input
(IN[1]). Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based
on the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and
more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a value from the input
connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals). Math functions use
existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad input
handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Base 10 logarithm of IN 1.
Parameters IN[1] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LOG Block.
3.9.7 MOD block
Description Provides the modulo function.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Function At runtime, the user connected inputs (IN[1], IN[2]) are truncated to integer and the
output (OUT) becomes the Remainder of IN[1] divided by IN[2]. Math blocks execute a
self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's configuration
within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient memory
usage. When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults
to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals). Math functions use existing capabilities to process
infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad input handling is desired, use the Logic
CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..2] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Remainder of IN1 divided by IN2 OUT = NaN for divide by zero, NaN, or infinity
value inputs
Parameters IN[1..2] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MOD Block.
3.9.8 MUL block
Description Provides the N-input multiply function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the Product of the user connected inputs (IN
[1..8]). Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based
on the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and
more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a value from the input
connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals). Math functions use
existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad input
handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..8] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Product of (IN 1 , 1N2 , ..INn
Parameters IN[1..8] NAME NUMOFINPUTS ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MUL Block.
3.9.9 NEG block
Description Provides the negative function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the negative (-) equivalent of the user connected
input (IN[1]). Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function
based on the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with
minimum and more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a value from the
input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals). Math functions
use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad input
handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = - (IN1 )
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters IN[1] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NEG Block.
3.9.10 POW block
Description Provides the raise to power function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the user connected input 1 (IN[1]) raised to the
power the user connected input 2 (IN[2]). Math blocks execute a self describing and
expression-less math function based on the user's configuration within a control
strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient memory usage. When a
block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals). Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For
example, divide by zero. If bad input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD
block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..2] = Input connection value
Output OUT = IN1 raised to the power of IN 2 .
Parameters IN[1..2] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the POW Block.
3.9.11 ROUND block
Description Provides the round up function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the user connected input (IN[1]) rounded up to
the nearest integer value. Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less
math function based on the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control
Builder with minimum and more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a
value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero.
If bad input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = REAL number of (IN 1 rounded up to the nearest integer number)
Parameters IN[1] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ROUND
Block.
3.9.12 SQRT block
Description Provides the square root function.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the square root of the user connected input (IN
[1]). Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on
the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and
more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a value from the input
connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals). Math functions use
existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad input
handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Square root of IN 1
Parameters IN[1] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SQRT
Block.
3.9.13 SUB block
Description Provides the subtract function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the user connected input 1 (IN[1]) minus the user
connected input 2 (IN[2]). Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less
math function based on the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control
Builder with minimum and more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a
value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero.
If bad input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..2] = Input connection value
Output OUT = IN1 minus IN2
Parameters IN[1..2] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SUB Block.
3.9.14 TRUNC block
Description Provides the truncate function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the user connected input (IN[1]) rounded down to
the nearest integer value. Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less
math function based on the user's configuration within a control strategy in Control
Builder with minimum and more efficient memory usage. When a block cannot fetch a
value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero.
If bad input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = REAL number of (IN 1 rounded down to the nearest integer number)
Parameters IN[1] NAME ORDERINCM OUT
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TRUNC
Block.
3.9.15 ROLLAVG block
Description Provides the rolling average function.
Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the quotient of sum of all good samples (IN)
divided by number of good samples. Math blocks execute a self describing and
expression-less math function based on the user's configuration within a control
strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient memory usage. When a
block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for FLOAT64s). Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity.
For example, divide by zero. If bad input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD
block on the desired input.
Input IN = Input connection value (FLOAT64 double-precision floating-point number).
Output OUT = Quotient of sum of all good values in buffer (IN) divided by number of good
values in buffer (FLOAT64 double-precision floating-point number).
Parameters ROLLAVGBAD ROLLAVGOK ROLLMULTIPLE ROLLAVGSZ
ROLLBFBASE ROLLBUF ROLLFRBASE ROLLAVGRST IN ORDERINCM OUT
ROLLFREQ
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RollAvg
Block.
3.10 Power Generation Blocks
3.10.1 GRPCAPRBK (Group Capability and Runback ) block
The GRPCAPRBK block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200
Controllers.
Description A Coordinated Master Control (CMC) scheme includes a Unit Load Demand Scheme
that uses unit capability and runback rate to ensure that the unit load increase or
decrease is executed within the limits that are safe for the operation of a Boiler- Turbine-
Generator (BTG) unit.The unit load demand scheme is a part of CMC scheme that
receives the load demand from load dispatcher and checks the demand signal against
the allowable operating limits for the unit and the minimum load desired. During online
operation, the demand can also be Runback in the event of loss of auxiliary equipment
such as losing one forced draft fan, which limits the load carrying capability of the unit.
All the auxiliary equipment like ID Fan, FD Fan, PA Fan, Air Pre Heaters, BCW Pump,
Turbine, CEP Pump, CW Pump, Mills, and so on are monitored continuously for unit
capability because each group of equipment is compared with the Load SP and the
minimum is selected as the SP to the Unit Capability ramp generator. When one of the
equipment trips, the SP to the Unit capability ramp generator comes down
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
correspondingly. The output of the Ramp Generator is brought down by runback action.
The runback rate depends upon the equipment that has tripped. The Group Capability
and Runback function block provides the Group Capability and Group Runback Rate of
the configured number of equipment. The block accepts configurable number of
equipments' status inputs and desired unit load set point.
Function l Provides the capability for a group of similar equipment depending upon the
equipment status.
l Provides the Group Capability and Group Runback Rate for the configured
number of equipments.
l Accepts configurable number of equipments' input status and desired unit load set
point.
l Provides a configurable parameter NUMBEROFEQP which represents the number
of equipments used for input connection to the block.
l Enables the user to configure equipment OFF state Capability Value (OFFCAP)
and ON state Capability Value (ONCAP) for individual equipment.
l Generates a Safe output flag when the load setpoint input status bad or all
equipement on/off staus are bad.
l Generates alarm for Run back Active when out capability is less than unit load set
point
Inputs l LOADSP - Load Set point. The input LOADSP of this block can be from any
Regulatory Control block like AUTOMAN, SWITCH or RATIOBIAS.
l DI[1..10]- DI of this block can be from any block with digital output.
Outputs l OUTCAP - Output capability of a group of equipment
l RUNBKACTFL - Runback control flag
l ROCLM - Current ROC Limit
l SAFEOPTRIGFL- Safe output triggered
Parameters CAPVALOPT CAPSAFEVAL DISTS[1..10] RBROCLM ROCLM ROCLMOPT
GCBLOCKSINCM HIALM.PR HIALM.SV ROCSAFELM RUNBKACTALM.FL
HIALM.TYPE INALM LOADSPSTS RUNBKACTALM.PR RUNBKACTALM.SV
LOADSP NUMBEROFEQP OFFCAP[1..10] RUNBKACTFL SAFEOPALM.FL
ONCAP[1..10] OUTCAP SAFEOPALM.PR SAFEOPALM.SV
SAFEOPTRIGFL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
GRPCAPRBK Block.
3.10.2 HTMOTOR (HT Motor Drive Control) block
The HTMOTOR block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200
Controllers.
Description The HTMOTOR Control block is derived from the Device Control block in Experion
(DEVCTL) customized to meet the HT Motor Drive control requirements found in power
plants. The HTMOTOR block is designed to accept inputs and interlocks pertaining to a
conventional HTMOTOR drive and its switchgear and is capable of controlling the drive
through outputs governed by predetermined logic.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Function Processes inputs typically from a HT Switch Gear, Local and Unit Control Panel,
equipment protection related feedback, process related interlocks and generates output
based on predetermined logic. Supports control of HT Motor drives from the Unit or
Local Control Panel, in SEQ (through SCM) or AUTO mode or from Operator Station or a
combination of all these options. Generates an alarm based on active states, output
command and equipment or process interlocks tripping. Built-in First Up Logic to
determine the cause of trip and built-in interlocks with vibration, winding and bearing
temperature. Optional feedback and trip time recording. Maintenance statistics similar to
those in the Device Control block. Preserves Device Control functionality.
Inputs l Process Feedback (from HT Swgr): Motor RUN/STOP (MTR/MTS), MOTOR Trip
(MTT), Lockup Relay Reset (LRR), Breaker in Remote (BKR), Breaker in Service
or Test (BKS or BKT).
l Other Inputs : Local/Remote Selection Switch,LOCALRUN/STOP,
AUTORUN/STOP,SEQRUN/STOP, UCPRELease/OPEN/CLOSE, Console Run,
Console Stop, Permissives (PI[0,1]), STOP/RUN Process Interlocks(OI
[0,1]),Bearing Temp Trip,Winding Temp Trip,Vibration Trip.
Outputs Command RUN/STOP (Latched) and PORUN/STOP (Pulsed), Track Run/Stop/Trip
feedback time.
Parameters AUTOSTART AUTOSTOP MTT MTR MTS MTTACTED NORMMODE
AUTOSTOPACTED AUTONOCMD NORMMODEATTR NULLPVFL
ASTEPID BACKCALCIN BADPVALM.SV NUMALLTRANS NUMSIOVRD
BADPVALM.FL BADPVALM.PR NUMTRANS OI[0..1] OIALM[0..2].FL
BRNGTEMTRIP BYPASS BKTBYPASS BKS OIALM[0..2].PR OIALM[0..2].OPT OIALM
BKT BKR BRNGTEMPALM.PR [0..2].SV OIACTED OP OPACTED
BRNGTEMPTRIPACTED OPFINAL OPREQ OPTYPE
BRNGTEMPALM.FL BRNGTEMPALM.OPT OFFNRMALM.OPT OFFNRMALM.FL
BRNGTEMPALM.SV CMDDISALM.TM OFFNRMALM.PR OFFNRMALM.SV PI
CMDDISALM.SV CMDDISALM.PR [0..1] PVAUTO PVFL/ PVSOURCE
CMDDISALM.FL CMDFALALM.PR PVSRCOPT PORUN POSTOP
CMDFALALM.TM CMDFALALM.FL POSTOPCONNECTED
CLROPREQFL CMDRUN CMDSTOP PORUNCONNECTED REDTAG
CONSSTARTRDY DOVALSTS REMOTESWITCH RESETFIRSTUP
FIRSTUPACTED GOPACTED GPVAUTO RESTARTOPT RESETFL
GOPSCADA GPV GOPFINAL GOP RUNPULSEWIDTH RUNTIME
HIALM.SV HIALM.PR HIALM.TYPE SAFEREDTAG SEALOPT SEQSTOP
HOLDOPT INALM INITCONNECTD SEQSTOPACTED SI SIALM.OPT
INITMAN INITOPOPT INITOPAFTLD SEQSTART SIALM.FL SIALM.SV
INITREQ LASTREQFL LASTOPTYPE SIALM.PR SIACTED STARTOPT
LASTOPREQ LASTSTEP LASTGOPREQ STOPOPT STOPTIME
LOCALMAN LOCALSWITCH LOCALSTART STOPPULSEWIDTH TRIPTIME
LOCALSTOPACTED LOCALSTOP LRR TRKNUMTRANS TRKSTATETIME
LRRACTED LRRALM.FL LRRALM.PR TRKSIOVRD UCPREL UCPSTART/
LRRALM.SV LRRALM.OPT MODE UCPSTOP UCPSTOPACTED
MODETRACK MODEATTR UNCMDALM.FL UNCMDALM.PR
MODEATTRCHGFL MODEATTRFL.PROG UNCMDALM.SV VIBRTRIP
MODEATTRFL.OPER VIBTRIPACTED VIBRALM.FL
MODEATTRFL.NORM MODEATTRMASK VIBRALM.PR VIBRALM.SV
MODESEL.PROGRAM MOTORTRIPALM.FL VIBRALM.OPT WDGTEMPTRIP
MOTORTRIPALM.PR MOTORTRIPALM.SV WDGTEMPTRIPACTED
MOTORTRIPALM.OPT WDGTEMPALM.FL WDGTEMPALM.PR
WDGTEMPALM.SV WDGTEMPALM.OPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the HTMOTOR
Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.10.3 LEVELCOMP (Drum Level Computation) block
The LEVELCOMP block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200
Controllers.
Description In power plants, the Drum Level is measured indirectly in terms of differential pressure
(DP), and the level is computed based on the measured DP. DP to Level computation
techniques are employed in Level measurements in Boiler Drums, Deaerators, and HP
Heaters, where the process fluid is at high pressure and temperature. In such cases, the
Level component is measured in terms of DP across the measuring setup. It is also
assumed that the vessel remains in a saturated state of the process fluid. The pressure
inside the container is measured and the density of Steam and Water are derived from
this pressure input using an algorithm. Based on Density and DP, the level is computed
using the equation of continuity. This new block computes Drum level from the
measured DP and other field specific constants.
Function l The Drum Level Computation function block computes the drum level from the
measured DP, Pressure and other field specific constants.
l The block has an algorithm for generating steam and water density from the given
Pressure input as long as the pressure input is good.
l The Level Status (PV) becomes bad when one of the input's status becomes bad
and PV is not be computed.
l Enables the user to select ENGUNIT for DP, Pressure, WETLEGTEMP, and drum
level.
Inputs l DP - Differential Pressure of the Drum
l PRESSURE - Pressure Input
Outputs l PV - Drum Level in Engineering Units
l PVP - Drum level in %
l DENSTEAM - Density of steam in drum
l DENWATER - Density of water in drum
l DENWATERREF - Density of WETLEG water
Parameters BADPVALM.PR BADPVALM.SV INALM PRESSURE PV PVEUHI PVEULO
BADPVALM.FL DP DPSLOPE DPBIAS PRSLOPE PRBIAS PVP PVSTS
DENWATERREF DPENGUNIT PRENGUNIT PVENGUNIT STNDPIPELEN
DENWATER DENSTEAM TMPENGUNIT WETLEGTEMP
NUMBEROFEQP HIALM.PR HIALM.SV
HIALM.TYPE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
LEVELCOMP Block.
3.10.4 LTMOTOR (LT Motor Drive Control) block
The LTMOTOR block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200
Controllers.
Description The LTMOTOR Control FB is derived from the Device Control block in Experion
(DEVCTL) customized to meet the LT Motor Drive control requirements found in power
plants. The LTMOTOR FB is designed to accept inputs and interlocks pertaining to a
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
conventional LTMOTOR drive's MCC and is capable of controlling the drive through
outputs governed by predetermined logic.
Function l Process inputs typical from a MCC, Local and Unit Control Panel, Process related
interlocks and generate output based on predetermined logic.
l Supports control of LT Motor drives from the Unit or Local Control Panel, in SEQ
(through SCM) or AUTO mode or from Operator Station or any combination of all
these options.
l Generates an alarm based on active states, output command and process
interlocks tripping.
l Optional feedback and trip time recording.
l Maintenance Statistics similar to those in the Device Control block.
l Preserves Device Control functionality.
Inputs l Process Feedback (from MCC): Motor RUN/STOP (MTR/MTS) and MOTOR Trip
(MTT).
l Other Input: Local/Remote Selection Switch, LOCALRUN/STOP,
AUTORUN/STOP, SEQRUN/STOP, UCPRELease/OPEN/CLOSE, STOP/RUN
Permissives (PO [0,1]), STOP/RUN Interlocks(OI[0,1]) and Track Run/Stop/Trip
feedback time.
Outputs Command RUN/STOP (Latched) and PORUN/STOP (Pulsed).
Parameters ASTEPID AUTOSTART AUTOSTOP MOTORTRIPALM.SV MTR MTS MTT
BACKCALCIN BADPVALM.FL NORMMODE NORMMODEATTR
BADPVALM.PR BADPVALM.SV BYPASS NULLPVFL NUMALLTRANS
BYPERM CLROPREQFL CMDDISALM.FL NUMSIOVRD NUMTRANS
CMDDISALM.PR CMDDISALM.SV OFFNRMALM.FL OFFNRMALM.OPT
CMDDISALM.TM CMDFALALM.FL OFFNRMALM.PR OFFNRMALM.SV OI
CMDFALALM.PR CMDFALALM.SV [0..1] OIALM[0..2].FL OIALM[0..2].OPT
CMDFALALM.TM CMDRUN CMDSTOP OIALM[0..2].PR OIALM[0..2].SV OP
CONSSTARTRDY DOVALSTS GOP OPFINAL OPREQ OPTYPE PI[0..1]
GOPFINAL GOPREQ GOPSCADA GPV PORUN POSTOP
GPVAUTO HIALM.PR HIALM.SV POSTOPCONNECTED PV PVAUTO
HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT INALM PVFL/ PVSOURCE PVSRCOPT
INITCONNECTD INITMAN INITOPAFTLD REDTAG REMOTESWITCH
INITOPT INITREQ LASTGOPREQ RESTARTOPT RESETFL
LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL RUNPULSEWIDTH RUNTIME
LASTSTEP LOCALMAN LOCALSTART SEQSTART SEQSTOP SI SIALM.FL
LOCALSTOP LOCALSWITCH MODE SIALM.SV SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR
MODEATTR MODEATTRCHGFL STARTOPT STOPOPT
MODEATTRFL.NORM MODEATTRFL.OPER STOPPULSEWIDTH STOPTIME
MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK TRIPTIME TRKNUMTRANS
MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK TRKSIOVRD TRKSTATETIME UCPREL
MOTORTRIPALM.FL MOTORTRIPALM.OPT UCPSTART UCPSTOP
MOTORTRIPALM.PR; UNCMDALM.FL UNCMDALM.PR
UNCMDALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LTMOTOR
Block.
3.10.5 MAINIBV (Main IBV Logic) block
The MAINIBV block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Controllers.
Description Main IBV logic is required for huge valves which hav a small bypass valve connected
across the main valve port. The main valve opens only when the bypass valve opens
fully and a sufficient time is allowed to equalize the pressure across the main valve
ports. The Main IBV block receives a command from the operator, processes the
commands and schedules it to the IBV and Main valve with a predetermined logic built
into it. In the Main IBV logic function block, there is a user configurable DELAY
parameter for providing the time delay before releasing an open command to the Main
valve from the moment the IBV open feedback is sensed by the block. The feedback can
be open limit switch of IBV. The bypass valve in not kept open if the main valve open
command fails. A user configurable timer is provided to close the IBV in such
eventualities.
Function l The Main IBV block receives a command from the OPER or PROG, processes it
and schedules the command to the IBV and Main valve with a predetermined logic
built into it.
l An open sequence failure alarm is triggered in case an OPEN command fails to
open the Main valve.
l A close sequence failure alarm is triggered in case a CLOSE command failed to
close Main valve.
l A BADPV alarm is triggered in case IBV open feedback or Main close feedback is
in BAD state.
l The Main IBV commands the Drive Control blocks for further operation of the Main
and IBV valve.
Inputs l OPENSEQ - Open Sequence command from PROGRAM to the valve system.
l CLOSESEQ - Close Sequence command from PROGRAM to the valve system.
l IBVOPNFDBK - IBV open feed back switch
l MAINCLOSEFDBK - Main valve close feedback switch.
Outputs l OPENIBV\CLOSEIBV - Open\Close Command to IBV drive control.
l OPENMAIN\CLOSEMAIN - OPEN\CLOSE command to Main Valve drive control.
Parameters BADPVALM.FL BADPVALM.PR MAINCLOSEFDBKSTS MAINVLVFDBKTO
BADPVALM.SV CLOSEIBV CLOSEMAIN MODE MODEATTR MODEATTRFL.NORM
CLROPREQFL CLOSESEQ MODEATTRFL.OPER
CLOSESEQALM.FL CLOSESEQALM.PR MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK
CLOSESEQALM.SV DELAY HIALM.PR MODESEL.PROGRAM NORMMODE
HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE IBVOPNFDBK NORMMODEATTR OP OPENIBV
IBVOPNFDBKSTS IBVVLVFDBKTO OPENMAIN OPENSEQ OPENSEQALM.FL
INALM MAINCLOSEFDBK OPENSEQALM.PR OPENSEQALM.SV
SEQSTATUS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MAINIBV
Block.
3.10.6 SOLENOID (Solenoid Valve Drive Control) block
The SOLENOID block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200
Controllers.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Description The Solenoid Valve Control FB is derived from the Device Control block in Experion
(DEVCTL) customized to meet the Solenoid Valve control requirements commonly
found in a power plant. The Solenoid FB is designed to accept inputs and interlocks
pertaining to a conventional solenoid and is capable of controlling the valve through
output governed by predetermined logic.
Function l Processes feedback from the field, Local and Unit Control Panel, process related
interlocks and generates output based on predetermined logic.
l Supports control of Solenoid valve from the Unit or Local Control Panel, in SEQ
(through SCM) or AUTO mode or from Operator Station or a combination of all
these options.
l Generates an alarm based on active states, output command and interlocks
tripping.
l Provides latched OPEN commands to the MCC/solenoid and the Outputs are reset
only on issuance of a CLOSE command.
l Preserves Device Control functionality.
Inputs l Process Feedback: Limit Switch OPEN/CLOSE.
l Other Inputs: Local/Remote Selection Switch,LOCALOPEN/CLOSE,
AUTOOPEN/CLOSE, SEQOPEN/CLOSE, UCPRELease/OPEN/CLOSE,
Close/Open Permissives (PO[0,1]) and Close/Open Interlocks(OI[0,1]).
Outputs CMPOPEN(latched), OP, PV, NUMTRANS[0,1], NUMSIOVRD
Parameters ASTEPID AUTOCLOSE AUTOOPEN MODEATTR MODEATTRCHGFL
BACKCALCIN BADPVALM.FL MODEATTRFL.NORM MODEATTRFL.OPER
BADPVALM.PR BADPVALM.SV MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK
BYPASS BYPERM CLROPREQFL MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK
CMDDISALM.FL CMDDISALM.PR NORMMODE NORMMODEATTR NULLPVFL
CMDDISALM.SV CMDDISALM.TM NUMALLTRANS NUMSIOVRD NUMTRANS
CMDFALALM.FL CMDFALALM.PR OFFNRMALM.FL OFFNRMALM.OPT
CMDFALALM.SV CMDFALALM.TM OFFNRMALM.PR OFFNRMALM.SV OI[0..1]
CMDOPEN CMDSTOP OIALM[0..2].FL OIALM[0..2].OPT OIALM
CONSOPENRDY DOVALSTS GOP [0..2].PR OIALM[0..2].SV OP OPFINAL
GOPFINAL GOPREQ GOPSCADA GPV OPREQ OPTYPE PI[0..1] PV PVAUTO PVFL/
GPVAUTO HIALM.PR HIALM.SV PVSOURCE PVSRCOPT REDTAG
HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT INALM REMOTESWITCH RESTARTOPT RESETFL
INBETFL INITCONNECTD INITMAN SAFEREDTAG SEALOPT SI SIALM.FL
INITOPAFTLD INITOPT INITREQ SIALM.SV SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR STARTOPT
LASTGOPREQ LASTOPREQ STOPOPT TRKNUMTRANS TRKSIOVRD
LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL LASTSTEP UCPCLOSE UCPOPEN UCPREL
LOCALCLOSE LOCALMAN UNCMDALM.FL UNCMDALM.PR
LOCALOPEN LOCALSWITCH LTC LTO UNCMDALM.SV
MODE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SOLENOID
Block.
3.10.7 VALVEDAMPER (Valve/Damper Drive Control) block
The VALVEDAMPER block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200
Controllers.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Description The Valve/Damper Control FB is derived from the Device Control block in Experion
(DEVCTL) and customized to meet the motor operated Valve or Damper control
requirements of Power Plants. The ValveDamper FB is designed to accept inputs and
interlocks pertaining to a conventional valve and is capable of controlling the valve
through outputs governed by predetermined logic.
Function l Processes inputs from MCC, process feedback, Local and Unit Control Panel
(UCP), process related interlocks and generate output based on predetermined
logic.
l Supports control of Valve/Damper from the Unit or Local Control Panel, in SEQ
(through SCM) or AUTO mode or from Operator Station or a combination of all
these options.
l Generates an alarm based on active states, output command and interlocks
tripping.
l Provides optional torque switch based command cut-off for tight shut off of valves
and standard limit switch based command cut-off for normal valves.
l Optional feedback (OPEN and CLOSE feedback) time recording.
l Maintenance Statistics similar to those in the Device Control block.
l It withdraws the command when feedback is achieved to command initiate.
l Preserves Device Control functionality.
Inputs l Process Feedback: Limit Switch OPEN/CLOSE, Torque Switch OPEN/CLOSE,
MOTOR Trip from switch gear and Winding temperature switch.
l Other Inputs: Local/Remote Selection Switch,LOCALOPEN/CLOSE,
AUTOOPEN/CLOSE, AUTONOCMD, SEQOPEN/CLOSE, SEQNOCMD,
UCPREL/OPEN/CLOSE,Close/Open Permissives (PO[0..2]), Close/Open
Interlocks(OI[0..1]),Torque switch enabled (for Tight Shut-Off),Torque Switch for
Protection and Track Open/Close feedback time.
Outputs POOPEN, POCLOSE, CMDOPEN, CMDCLOSE, OP, PV, NUMTRANS[0,1,2],
NUMALLTRANS, NUMSIOVRD, OPENFEEDBKTIME, CLOSEFEEDBKTIME
Parameters ASTEPID AUTOCLOSE AUTONOCMD NUMTRANS OFFNRMALM.FL
AUTOOPEN BACKCALCIN BADPVALM.FL OFFNRMALM.OPT OFFNRMALM.PR
BADPVALM.PR BADPVALM.SV BYPASS OFFNRMALM.SV OI[0..1] OIALM[0..2].FL
BYPERM CLOSEFEEDBKTIME OIALM[0..2].OPT OIALM[0..2].PR OIALM
CLOSEPULSEWIDTH CLROPREQFL [0..2].SV OP OPENFEEDBKTIME
CMDCLOSE CMDDISALM.FL OPENPULSEWIDTH OPFINAL OPREQ
CMDDISALM.PR CMDDISALM.SV OPTYPE PI[0..1] POCLOSE
CMDDISALM.TM CMDFALALM.FL POCLOSECONNECTED POOPEN
CMDFALALM.PR CMDFALALM.SV POOPENCONNECTED PV PVAUTO
CMDFALALM.TM CMDOPEN PVFL/ PVSOURCE PVSRCOPT
CONSOPENRDY DOVALSTS GOP REDTAG REMOTESWITCH
GOPFINAL GOPREQ GOPSCADA GPV RESTARTOPT RESETFL
GPVAUTO HIALM.PR HIALM.SV SAFEREDTAG SEALOPT SEQCLOSE
HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT INALM INBETFL SEQNOCMD SEQOPEN SI SIALM.FL
INITCONNECTD INITMAN INITOPAFTLD SIALM.SV SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR
INITOPOPT INITREQ LASTGOPREQ STARTOPT STOPOPT
LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL TRKCLOSEFEEDBKTIME
LASTSTEP LOCALCLOSE LOCALMAN TRKNUMTRANS
LOCALOPEN LOCALSWITCH LTC LTO TRKOPENFEEDBKTIME TRKSIOVRD
MODE MODEATTR MODEATTRCHGFL TSC TSC TSCALM.FL TSCALM.OPT
MODEATTRFL.NORM MODEATTRFL.OPER TSCALM.PR TSCALM.SV TSENABLED
MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK TSFORPROT TSO TSOALM.FL
MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK TSOALM.OPT TSOALM.PR TSOALM.SV
MOTORTRIPALM.FL MOTORTRIPALM.OPT UCPCLOSE UCPOPEN UCPREL
MOTORTRIPALM.PR MOTORTRIPALM.SV
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
NORMMODE NORMMODEATTR NULLPVFL UNCMDALM.FL UNCMDALM.PR
NUMALLTRANS NUMSIOVRD UNCMDALM.SV WTS WTSALM.FL
WTSALM.OPT WTSALM.PR
WTSALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
VALVEDAMPER Block.
3.11 Regulatory Control Blocks
3.11.1 AUTOMAN (Auto Manual) block
Description Applies a user-specified gain and bias as well as a calculated bias (OPBIAS.FLOAT) to
the output. The user-specified values can be fixed or external. A fixed value is stored
manually or by a program, and an external value is brought from another function block.
Function Provides control initialization and override feedback processing. Typically used either:
l in cascade control strategy where an upstream block may not accept an
initialization request from its secondary,
l between FANOUT block and a final control element to provide“bumpless” output
on return to cascade.
With R410, AUTOMAN block allows you to configure individual values for the
deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A
new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-
delay time. However, you can configure only identical deadband units for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on the input (X1). If the X1 value is not
Monitoring updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
l Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL).
l Sets the input value to Bad (NaN).
l Requests the X1 primary to initialize.
Note that this block does not support mode shedding on timeout and therefore the
TMOUTMODE parameter is not applicable to this block. But the mode shedding of this
block occurs indirectly depending on the BADCTLOPT parameter value as timeout
processing, setting the input value to Bad (NaN).
l When BADCTLOPT = No_Shed, there is no mode shedding on timeout.
l When BADCTLOPT = SHEDHOLD/SHEDHIGH/SHEDLOW/SHEDSAFE, the mode
sheds to manual.
Note that time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value,
and disabled by setting it to zero.
Inputs l X1 = initializable input which must come from another function block; an operator
cannot set it.
l XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of X1:
l XEUHI is the value that represents 100% of full scale.
l XEULO is the value that represents 0% of full scale.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has
Ranges a secondary, it brings the secondary's input range through the BACKCALC and sets its
CV range to that. If it has no secondary, CVEUHI and CVEULO track its own input range
(XEUHI and XEULO).
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define the normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of
CV range; these are user-specified values. OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's
calculated result (CV) exceeds them or another function block or user program
attempts to store an OP value that exceeds them. However, an operator may store
an OP value that is outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a
percent of the CV range. These are user-specified values. Operator is prevented
from storing an OP that exceeds these limits.
Parameters ALMDB ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNETIN NUMSEC OP OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX
ARWNET[1..8] ARWOP ARWOPIN OPBIAS.FLOAT OPBIAS.RATE OPEU
ASTEPID BADCTLALM.FL OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL
BADCTLALM.PR BADCTLALM.SV OPEXLOLM OPHIALM.DB OPHIALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.TM BADCTLALM.TMO OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR OPHIALM.SV
BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO OPHIALM.TP
BADOCOPTENB COMPUTEARW OPHIFL OPHILM OPLOALM.DB
CTLINIT CTLSTATE CV CVEUHI OPLOALM.DBU OPLOALM.FL OPLOALM.PR
CVEULO CVTYPE DESC ESWENB OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM
ESWFL.AUTO ESWFL.BCAS OPLOALM.TMO OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL
ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM OPLOLM OPMINCHG OPREQ OPROCLM
EUDESC FBORSTS OPROCNEGFL OPROCPOSFL OPTYPE
FORCEMODEATTR GAINHILM ORDERINCM OUTIND OUTTYPE PRIM.
GAINLOLM HIALM.PR HIALM.SV [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT HOLDRATE [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN INITREQ PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] INSBLOCK[1..10] [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR [1..8].PROPOVRD REDTAG RESTARTOPT
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL K SAFEOP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
LASTMODEREQ LASTOPREQ SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.HISELECT
MODE MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SECDATAIN.INITSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
MODEATTRFL.OPER SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
MODEATTRFL.PROG SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODEATTRMASK MODECHANGE SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEFL.AUTO MODEFL.BCAS SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT[1..8]
MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR SIALM.SV
MODEFL.NORM MODEMASK SIFL SIOPT STARTOPT STARTRATE
MODEPERM MODEREQ STARTVAL STOPOPT STOPRATE STOPVAL
MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.CAS TMOUTFL TMOUTTIME
MODESEL.MAN MODESEL.PROGRAM UNCMDCHGALM.FL UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
MODETRACK NAME NORMMODE UNCMDCHGALM.PR UNCMDCHGALM.SV
NORMMODEATTR NUMINSERT X1 X1P X1STS XEUHI XEULO
NUMPRI
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the AUTOMAN
Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.11.2 ENHREGCALC (Enhanced Regulatory Control Calculator)
block
Description l Lets you write up to eight expressions for creating custom algorithms for
Calculated Variable (CV) calculations.
l Provides an interface to windup, initialization and override feedback processing,
so you can add user-defined control blocks to your control strategies.
l The ENHREGCALC block provides the following enhancements over the
REGCALC block.
l Expands existing arrayed input parameters XSTS, XCONN and X.
l These arrayed parameters are added to correspond to each of the ten
inputs. Input Description Enable/Disable Switch XSUB Substitute
Parameter
l An initializable Set Point (SP) input parameter with limit checking and
SP ramping is added. Also, the X[1] input is converted to a general
purpose input
l Mode can be placed in Automatic so operator or program can supply
SP.
l This block uses memory based on the number of expressions
configured, pcode size of each expression and the number of
references in the expression.
Function l Each expression can contain any valid combination of inputs, operators and
functions; and may perform arithmetic or logic operations.
l You can write expressions for calculating CV under normal, initialization and
override feedback conditions. Or, you can write expressions which produce
initialization and override feedback values for this block and its primaries.
l You can assign the result of an expression or an input to any assignable output
that produces the same outputs as every other regulatory control block. You can
assign the same input to multiple outputs.
l With R410, ENHREGCALC block allows you to configure individual values for
the deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual
alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to
configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only identical
deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade mode, this block performs timeout monitoring on SP. If the SP input value
Monitoring is not updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout
processing.
l Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL)
l Holds SP at its last good value.
l Requests the SP primary to initialize.
l Sheds to a user-specified timeout mode (MODE = TMOUTMODE).
The ENHREGCALC block sets its cascade request flag (CASREQFL), if SP times out
and sheds to AUTOmatic mode. Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting
TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by setting it to zero.
Control Block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC. In
Initialization addition, the secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block.
However, you can disable the SECINITOPT so the block ignores initialization requests
from the secondary. If the secondary is requesting initialization, block:
l Initializes its output:
l CV = CVINIT (assignable output)
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Builds an initialization request for the designated primaries, using INITREQ and
INITVAL (both assignable outputs).
Override If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector (OVRDSEL)
Feedback block, it receives override feedback data. The data consists of an override status,
Processing override feedback value and an override offset flag. The status indicates if this block is
in the selected or unselected strategy. The offset flag only applies to PID type function
blocks. However, you can disable the SECINITOPT so the block ignores override
requests from the secondary. When override status changes from selected to
unselected, this block:
l Initializes its output:
l CV = CVORFB (assignable output)
l Computes a feedback value for SP input:
l feedback value for SP = ORFBVAL (assignable output)
l feedback status for SP = ORFBSTS (assignable output)
If ORFBVAL and ORFBSTS are not assigned and this block has a secondary, the
ORFBVAL and ORFBSTS received from the secondary are used to compute
ORFBVAL for the primary.
Inputs The following inputs are optional and they only accept real data types.
l SP - An initializable input. If Mode is CAScade, SP is pulled from another
function block. If Mode is AUTO, it may be stored by the operator or a user
program.
l X[1] through X[10] general purpose inputs.
l XWHIFL - An external windup high flag.
l XWLOFL - An external windup low flag.
Input SPEUHI and SPEULO define the full range of SP input in engineering units. This block
Ranges applies no range checking, since it assumes that SP is within SPEUHI and SPEULO. If
this function is required, you must write an expression for it.
l SPEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l SPEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units. If this block
Ranges has a secondary, it uses the secondary's input range through BACKCALC to set its CV
range. If it does not have a secondary, you must define the range through CVEUHI
and CVEULO.
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of
the CV range (user-specified values).
l OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds
them or another block or user program attempts to store OP value
exceeding them.
l Operator may store OP value outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a
percent of the CV range (user-specified values).
l Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these
limits.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Assignable You can assign expression results and/or inputs to the following outputs.
Outputs l CV - This block's CV under normal operating conditions.
l CVINIT - This block's CV during initialization.
l CVORFB - This block's CV during override (in unselected path).
l INITREQ - Initialization request flag, to be provided to the primary.
l INITVAL - Initialization value, to be provided to the primary.
l ORFBVAL - Override feedback value, to be provided to the primary.
l ORFBSTS - Override feedback status, to be provided to the primary.
Operators AUXCALC (Auxiliary Calculation) block lists the expression operators and functions
and supported by this block for reference.
Functions
Parameter You must specify a parameter by its full tag name. For example,
Identification “CM25.PumpASelect.PVFL”, or “CM57.PID100.MODE”. In effect, tag names allow
expressions to have an unlimited number of inputs and work with any data type.
However, do not use more than six parameter references in an expression. The
expression syntax has been expanded. Delimiters (') can be used in an expression
containing an external reference component. The format for the delimiter usage is as
follows:
l TagName.'text'
Expression l Must include full tag.parameter name for X inputs in the expression and enclose
Rules identification number in brackets instead of parenthesizes. For example,
CM151.REGCALC BLOCK.X[1] * CM151.REGCALC BLOCK.X[2] is valid.
l Expressions cannot contain an assignment operation (a colon and equal sign
with the current syntax) For example, “CM1.PID1.MODE:=X[1]” is invalid. Each
expression produces a single value (arithmetic or logical which is automatically
stored in a “C” parameter. For example, if you write four expressions, the result of
the first expression is stored in C[1], the result of the second is stored in C[2], etc.
You can use these results, by name, in succeeding expressions. In this example,
you could use C[1] as an input to expressions 2, 3, and 4.
l You can mix and nest all operators and functions (including conditional
assignments) in any order as long as value types match or can be converted.
l You can use blanks between operators and parameter names, but they are not
required.
l You can use all data types in expressions, including enumerations. They are all
treated as numeric types.
l You must configure calculator expressions contiguously (without breaks) in the
arrays.
l A short description can be provided for the expressions using the expression
descriptor parameter (EXPRDESC[1..8]). The results of the expressions, which
use the CONST[1…8] parameters, are affected if you change the values of these
parameters on the Constants tab.
l With R410, non-CEE controllers such as PMD and Safety Manager, and
Experion server points such as TPS and SCADA, can be configured in the
Expressions.
l With R410, when you write the expressions using the TPS point's parameter
references, ensure that the TPS reference parameter is configured using the
parentheses “()”to specify array index. However, when you write the expressions
using the other non-CEE points you can use the brackets “[].”
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters ALMDB ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNETIN NUMSEC OP OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX
ARWNET[1..8] ARWOP ARWOPIN OPBIAS.FLOAT OPBIAS.RATE OPEU
ASTEPID BADCTLALM.FL OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL
BADCTLALM.PR BADCTLALM.SV OPEXLOLM OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.TM BADCTLALM.TMO OPHIALM.DBU OPHIALM.FL
BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPHIALM.PR OPHIALM.SV
BADOCOPTENB C[1..8] CASREQFL OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO
COMPUTEARW CONFIGCODE OPHIALM.TP OPHIFL OPHILM
CONFIGDESC CONFIGSTS CONST[1…8] OPLOALM.DB OPLOALM.DBU
CONSTACCLOCK CONSTENABLE CSTS OPLOALM.FL OPLOALM.PR
[1..8] CTLINIT CTLSTATE CV CVEUHI OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM
CVEULO CVINIT CVINITSRC CVORFB OPLOALM.TMO OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL
CVORFBSRC CVSRC CVTYPE DESC OPLOLM OPMINCHG OPREQ
ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO ESWFL.BCAS OPROCLM OPROCNEGFL
ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM OPROCPOSFL OPTOL OPTYPE
EUDESC EXECCODE[1..8] EXECDESC ORDERINCM ORFBSTSSRC
[1..8] EXECSTS[1..8] EXPR[1..8] ORFBVALSRC OUTIND PUSHSP
EXPRDESC[1…8] FBORSTS REDTAG RESTARTOPT SAFEOP
FORCEMODEATTR GAINHILM SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
GAINLOLM HIALM.PR HIALM.SV SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT HOLDRATE SECDATAIN.HISELECT
HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN INITREQ[1..8] SECDATAIN.INITSTS
INITREQSRC INITVAL[1..8] INITVALSRC SECDATAIN.INITVAL
INSBLOCK[1..10] INSFAILALM.FL SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
INSFAILALM.PR INSFAILALM.SV SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
INSFAILFL K LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
LASTSPREQ LASTSPTVREQ LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT
MODE MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR [1..8] SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR
MODEATTRFL.NORM SIALM.SV SIFL SIOPT SP SPEUHI
MODEATTRFL.OPER SPEULO SPFORMAT SPHIFL SPHILM
MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK SPLOFL SPLOLM SPP SPRATEREQ
MODECHANGE MODEFL.AUTO SPREQ SPTOL SPTV SPTVNORMRATE
MODEFL.BCAS MODEFL.CAS SPTVOPT SPTVP SPTVRATE SPTVREQ
MODEFL.MAN MODEFL.NORM SPTVSTATE SPTVTIME STARTOPT
MODEMASK MODEPERM MODEREQ STARTRATE STARTVAL STOPOPT
MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.AUTO STOPRATE STOPVAL TMOUTFL
MODESEL.CAS MODESEL.MAN TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME
MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK UNCMDCHGALM.FL
NAME NORMMODE NORMMODEATTR UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
NUMINSERT NUMPRI UNCMDCHGALM.PR
UNCMDCHGALM.SV X[1..10] XB[1..10]
XDESC[1..10] XENABLE[1..10] XK[1..10]
XKB[1..10] XSTS[1..10] XSUB[1..10]
XWHIFL XWLOFL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
ENHREGCALC Block.
3.11.3 FANOUT block
Description Uses one input and provides up to eight initializable outputs. It may also have up to
eight secondaries, since there is one secondary per initializable output. You may
specify a separate gain, bias, and rate for each output. Each specified value can be
fixed or external. A fixed value is stored manually or by a program, and an external
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
value is brought from another function block. This block calculates a separate floating
bias for each output following an initialization or mode change. This provides a
“bumpless” transition for each output.
Function Provides a “bumpless” output for each of up to 8 outputs following initialization or mode
changes. With R410, FANOUT block allows you to configure individual values for the
on-delay time and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
Timeout In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on X1. If the X1 value is not updated
Monitoring within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
l Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL).
l Sets the input value to Bad (NaN).
l Requests the X1 primary to initialize (through BACKCALCOUT).
This block does not support mode shedding on timeout. Time-out monitoring is enabled
by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by setting it to zero.
Input l X1 = initializable input which must come from another function block; an operator
cannot set it.
l XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of X1:
l XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs May have up to 8 initializable outputs as follows:
l OP[1..8] = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU[1..8] = Calculated output in engineering units.
Note that the default OP[1], [2] connection pins are exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX[1..8]/OPEUX[1..8]) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI[1..8] and CVEULO[1..8] define the full range of CV[1..8] in engineering units --
Ranges block has separate output range for each output based on the input range of each
secondary.
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define the normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of
the CV range; these are user-specified values -- the same limits apply to all
outputs. An operator may store an OP value that is outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a
percent of the CV range; these are user-specified values -- the same limits apply to
all outputs and operator is prevented from storing an OP that exceeds these limits.
Windup l If all secondaries are in high windup, block propagates a high windup status to its
Processing primary (ARWNET[1..8] = Hi)
l If all secondaries are in low windup, block propagates a low windup status to its
primary (ARWNET[1..8] = Lo)
l If at least one secondary has a normal windup status or is in high windup and
another is in low, block propagates a normal windup status to its primary.
If the gain is reversed for one of the outputs, then high windup on that output is the
same as low windup on the others.
Parameters ARWMULTOP[1..8] ARWNET[1..8] MODETRACK NAME NORMMODE
ARWNETIN ARWOP ARWOPIN NORMMODEATTR NUMINSERT NUMPRI
ASTEPID BADCTLALM.FL NUMSEC OP[1..8] OPBIAS[1..8] OPBIAS
BADCTLALM.PR BADCTLALM.SV [1..8].FIX OPBIAS[1..8].FLOAT OPBIAS
BADCTLALM.TM BADCTLALM.TMO [1..8].RATE OPEU[1..8] OPEXHIFL[1..8]
BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL[1..8] OPEXLOLM
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
BADOCOPTENB CASREQFL OPHIFL[1..8] OPHILM OPLOFL[1..8] OPLOLM
COMPUTEARW CTLINIT CTLSTATE CV OPMINCHG OPREQ OPROCLM
[1..8] CVEUHI[1..8] CVEULO[1..8] OPROCNEGFL[1..8] OPROCPOSFL[1..8]
CVTYPE DESC ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO OPTYPE ORDERINCM OUTIND OUTTYPE
ESWFL.BCAS ESWFL.CAS PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM EUDESC [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
FBORSTS FORCEMODEATTR PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
GAINHILM GAINLOLM HIALM.SV [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT HOLDRATE [1..8].PROPOVRD REDTAG RESTARTOPT
HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN INITREQ SAFEOP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] INSBLOCK[1..10] SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL K[1..8] SECDATAIN.INITSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
LASTMODEREQ LASTOPREQ SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
MODE MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEATTRFL.OPER SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT[1..8]
MODEATTRFL.PROG SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR SIALM.SV
MODEATTRMASK MODECHANGE SIFL SIOPT SPHILM STARTOPT
MODEFL.AUTO MODEFL.BCAS STARTRATE STARTVAL STOPOPT
MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN STOPRATE STOPVAL TMOUTFL
MODEFL.NORM MODEMASK TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME
MODEPERM MODEREQ UNCMDCHGALM.FL UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.CAS UNCMDCHGALM.PR UNCMDCHGALM.SV
MODESEL.MAN MODESEL.PROGRAM X1 X1P X1STS XEUHI XEULO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the FANOUT
Block.
3.11.4 OVRDSEL(Override Selector) block
Description Provides override feedback data to every block in an upstream cascade control strategy.
Also provides bypass processing, control initialization, and override feedback
propagation.
Function Accepts up to four inputs (primaries) and selects the one with the highest or lowest
value. With R410, OVRDSEL block allows you to configure individual values for the
deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A
new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-
delay time. However, you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on all inputs X[1] through X[4] that are
Monitoring not bypassed. If an input value is not updated within a predefined time, this block
invokes the following timeout processing.
l Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL).
l Sets the input value to Bad (NaN).
l Requests the input's primary to initialize.
This block does not support mode shedding on timeout. Time-out monitoring is enabled
by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by setting it to zero.
Inputs Accepts up to 4 inputs -- X[1] through X[4].
l At least 2 inputs (X1 and X2) are required, others are optional.
l You can configure a 15-character description for each input.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l The inputs must come from other function blocks; an operator cannot store to them.
Input l XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of inputs.
Ranges
l XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has
Ranges a secondary, it brings the secondary'ls input range through the BACKCALC and sets its
CV range to that. If it has no secondary, CVEUHI and CVEULO track its own input range
(XEUHI and XEULO).
l OPHILM and OPLOLM (user-specified values) define normal high and low limits
for OP as a percent of the CV range.
l OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds
them or another block or user program attempts to store an OP value
exceeding them.
l Operator may store an OP value outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM (user-specified values) define the extended high and
low limits for OP as a percent of the CV range.
l Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these
limits.
Parameters ALMDB ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX OPBIAS.FLOAT
[1..8] ARWOP ASTEPID OPBIAS.RATE OPEU OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM
BADCTLALM.FL BADCTLALM.PR OPEXLOFL OPEXLOLM OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.SV BADCTLALM.TM OPHIALM.DBU OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR
BADCTLALM.TMO BADCTLFL OPHIALM.SV OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO
BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPHIALM.TP OPHIFL OPHILM OPLOALM.DB
BADOCOPTENB BADINPTOPT[1..4] OPLOALM.DBU OPLOALM.FL OPLOALM.PR
CONTROLREQ COMPUTEARW OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM OPLOALM.TMO
CTLEQN CTLINIT CTLSTATE CV OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL OPLOLM OPMINCHG
CVEUHI CVEULO CVTYPE DESC OPREQ OPROCLM OPROCNEGFL
ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO ESWFL.BCAS OPROCPOSFL OPTYPE ORBYPASSFL[1..4]
ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM ORBYPPERM ORDERINCM OROFFSET
EUDESC FBORSTS OROPT OUTIND OUTTYPE PRIM.
FORCEMODEATTR HIALM.PR [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
HOLDRATE HOLDVAL INALM PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
INITMAN INITREQ[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
INSBLOCK[1..10] INSFAILALM.FL [1..8].PROPOVRD REDTAG RESTARTOPT
INSFAILALM.PR INSFAILALM.SV SAFEOP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
INSFAILFL LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE SECDATAIN.HISELECT SECDATAIN.INITSTS
LASTREQFL LASTSTEP MODE SECDATAIN.INITVAL
MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
MODEATTRFL.OPER SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODEATTRFL.PROG SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEATTRMASK MODECHANGE SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT[1..8]
MODEFL.AUTO MODEFL.BCAS SELXDESC SELXFL[1..4] SELXINP SIALM.FL
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR SIALM.SV SIFL SIOPT
MODEFL.NORM MODEMASK STARTOPT STARTRATE STARTVAL
MODEPERM MODEREQ STOPOPT STOPRATE STOPVAL TMOUTFL
MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.CAS TMOUTTIME UNCMDCHGALM.FL
MODESEL.MAN UNCMDCHGALM.OPT UNCMDCHGALM.PR
MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK UNCMDCHGALM.SV X[1..4] XEUHI XEULO
NAME NORMMODE
NORMMODEATTR NUMINSERT
NUMPRI NUMSEC OP
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the OVRDSEL
Block.
3.11.5 PID block
Description Operates as a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller and supports the Ideal
form of calculating the PID terms.
Function Accepts 2 analog inputs -- process variable (PV) and set point (SP); produces output
calculated to reduce the difference between PV and SP. Provides anti-windup
protection, control initialization and override feedback processing. With R410, PID block
allows you to configure individual values for the deadband, deadband unit, on-delay
time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is
introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However, you can
configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on SP. If a good SP value is not received
Monitoring within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
l Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL).
l Holds the SP value at its last good value.
l Changes the mode to a user-specified TMOUTMODE.
l Requests the input's primary to initialize.
If SP times out and the block sheds to Auto mode, block sets the Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL). Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero
value, and disabled by setting it to zero.
Inputs Required number of inputs is determined by this block's mode:
l If Mode = Cascade, 2 inputs are required - PV and SP. Both must be pulled from
other function blocks.
l If Mode = Auto or Man, only PV is required. PV must be pulled from another
function block; the user cannot store to it.
l SP contains set point value in engineering units; SPP contains value in percent.
l If Mode = Auto, operator or user program may store to either SP or SPP.
l SP is an initializable input; PV is non-initializable.
Input l PVEUHI and PVEULO define full range of PV in engineering units. They also
Ranges define the engineering unit range of SP, since PV and SP are assumed to have the
and Limits same range.
l PVEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l PVEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
l SPHILM and SPLOLM define set point operating limits in engineering units.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Prevents operator from storing SP value outside limits; if primary or user
program attempts to store value outside limits, block clamps it to
appropriate limit and sets primary's windup status.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has a
Ranges secondary, it brings the secondary's input range through the BACKCALC and sets its
and Limits CV range to that. If it has no secondary, you must specify CVEUHI and CVEULO range.
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of CV
range (user-specified values).
l OP clamps to limits if calculated CV exceeds them, or another block or
user program attempts to store OP value exceeding them; operator may
store OP value outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define extended high and low limits for OP as percent
of CV range (user-entered values).
l Prevents operator from storing OP value that exceeds these limits.
Equation l Equation A - Proportional, Integral, and Derivative on error.
Options
l Equation B -- Proportional and Integral on error and Derivative on changes in PV.
l Equation C -- Integral on error and Proportional and Derivative on changes in PV.
l Equation D -- Integral only.
l Equation E -- Proportional only; this equation supports the following two options
that affect CV:
l Output bias processing which adds fixed and floating bias to unbiased
CV.
l Reverse-control action causes the sign of the unbiased CV to be
reversed.
Gain If equation A, B, or C is selected, any of the following gain options may be chosen:
Options l Linear Gain -- provides proportional control action that is equal to a constant (K)
times the error.
l Gap Gain -- used to reduce sensitivity of control system when PV is in user-
specified band (gap) around set point.
l Nonlinear Gain -- control action is proportional to square of error, rather than error
itself.
l External Gain -- gain (K) is modified by input value that can come from the process,
another block or user program.
Direct or l Direct action -- increase in error increases output (OP).
Reverse
l Reverse action -- increase in error decreases output (OP).
Control
Parameters ADVDEVALM.DB ADVDEVALM.DBU OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX OPBIAS.FLOAT
ADVDEVALM.FL ADVDEVALM.PR OPBIAS.RATE OPEU OPEXHIFL
ADVDEVALM.SV ADVDEVALM.TM OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL OPEXLOLM
ADVDEVALM.TMO ADVDEVALM.TP OPHIALM.DB OPHIALM.DBU
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
ADVDEVOPT ADVSP ADVSPP ALMDB OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR OPHIALM.SV
ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET[1..8] ARWOP OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO
ASTEPID BADCTLALM.FL BADCTLALM.PR OPHIALM.TP OPHIFL OPHILM
BADCTLALM.SV BADCTLALM.TM OPLOALM.DB OPLOALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.TMO BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT OPLOALM.FL OPLOALM.PR
BADOCOPT BADOCOPTENB CASREQFL OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM
COMPUTEARW CTLACTN CTLEQN OPLOALM.TMO OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL
CTLINIT CTLSTATE CV CVEUHI CVEULO OPLOLM OPMINCHG OPREQ
CVTYPE DELCV DESC DEV DEVHIALM.DB OPROCLM OPROCNEGFL
DEVHIALM.DBU DEVHIALM.FL OPROCPOSFL OPTYPE ORDERINCM
DEVHIALM.PR DEVHIALM.SV OUTIND OUTTYPE PRIM.
DEVHIALM.TM DEVHIALM.TMO [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
DEVHIALM.TP DEVLOALM.DB [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.DBU DEVLOALM.FL [1..8].ORFBSTS PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.PR DEVLOALM.SV [1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.TM DEVLOALM.TMO [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.TP EQNEUNITSOPT ESWENB [1..8].PROPOVRD PUSHSP PV PVEUHI
ESWFL.AUTO ESWFL.BCAS ESWFL.CAS PVEULO PVFORMAT PVMANOPT PVP
ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM EUDESC PVSTS PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
FBORSTS FORCEMODEATTR GAINHILM PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCER
GAINLOLM GAINOPT GAPHILM GAPLOLM PVTRAKOPT PVTRAKOPTAI REDTAG
HIALM.PR HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE RESTARTOPT SAFEOP
HOLDOPT HOLDRATE HOLDVAL INALM SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
INITMAN INITREQ[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
INSBLOCK[1..10] INSFAILALM.FL SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INSFAILALM.PR INSFAILALM.SV SECDATAIN.INITSTS
INSFAILFL K] KLIN KMODIFEXT SECDATAIN.INITVAL
KMODIFGAP KMODIFNL LASTGOODPV SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
LASTMODEREQ LASTOPREQ SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
LASTOPTYPE LASTRATEREQ LASTREQFL SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
LASTSPREQ LASTSPTVREQ LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
LEGACYGAP MODE MODEAPPL[1..4] SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT
MODEATTR MODEATTRFL.NORM [1..8] SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR
MODEATTRFL.OPER MODEATTRFL.PROG SIALM.SV SIFL SIOPT SP SPEUHI
MODEATTRMASK MODECHANGE SPEULO SPFORMAT SPHIFL SPHILM
MODEFL.AUTO MODEFL.BCAS SPLOFL SPLOLM SPP SPRATEREQ
MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN SPREQ SPTV SPTVDEVFL
MODEFL.NORM MODEMASK MODEPERM SPTVDEVMAX SPTVNORMRATE
MODEREQ MODESEL.ALL SPTVOPT SPTVP SPTVRATE SPTVREQ
MODESEL.AUTO MODESEL.CAS SPTVSTATE SPTVTIME STARTOPT
MODESEL.MAN MODESEL.PROGRAM STARTRATE STARTVAL STOPOPT
MODETRACK NAME NLFORM NLGAIN STOPRATE STOPVAL T1 T1HILM
NORMMODE NORMMODEATTR T1LOLM T2 T2HILM T2LOLM TMOUTFL
NUMINSERT NUMPRI NUMSEC OP TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
UNCMDCHGALM.PR
UNCMDCHGALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PID Block.
3.11.6 PIDER block
Description Operates as a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller that accepts a reset
feedback signal, a tracking value, and a tracking control switch. It supports the same
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Ideal form of calculating the PID terms as the PID block. It also prevents windup when
the secondary does not propagate windup status or control initialization data back to the
primary of a remote (foreign) controller.
Function It accepts five analog inputs - a process variable (PV), a set point (SP), a reset feedback
value (RFB), a tracking value (TRFB), and a tracking control switch (S1). The difference
between PV and SP is the error and this block calculates a control output (OP) that
should drive the error to zero. With R410, PIDER block allows you to configure
individual values for the deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for
the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual
alarms to configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only identical
deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on SP. If a good SP value is not received
Monitoring within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
l Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL).
l Holds the SP value at its last good value.
l Changes the mode to a user-specified TMOUTMODE.
l Requests the input's primary to initialize.
If SP times out and the block sheds to Auto mode, block sets the Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL). Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero
value, and disabled by setting it to zero.
Inputs Required number of inputs is determined by this block's mode:
l If Mode is CAScade, five inputs are required - PV, SP, RFB, TRFB and S1.
l If Mode is AUTOmatic or MANual, PV, RFB, TRFB and S1 are required.
l SP contains set point value in engineering units; SPP contains value in percent.
l If Mode = Auto, operator or user program may store to either SP or SPP.
l SP is the only initializable input; other inputs are non-initializable.
l RFB and TRFB must be pulled from another block, you cannot store to them. The
RFB input is optional. If the PIDER block is used for external tracking features only,
the RFB input is not required.
l S1 can be triggered by another function block or set by a user-written program.
Input l PVEUHI and PVEULO define full range of PV in engineering units. They also
Ranges define the engineering unit range of SP, since PV and SP are assumed to have the
and Limits same range.
l PVEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l PVEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
l SPHILM and SPLOLM define set point operating limits in engineering units.
l Prevents operator from storing SP value outside limits; if primary or user
program attempts to store value outside limits, block clamps it to
appropriate limit and sets primary's windup status.
l The RFB and TRFB values typically come from a remote controller. The PIDER
block applies no range check for these parameters.
l The S1 input is a Boolean flag and the values are only On and Off.
Outputs The block does not support output initialization, and therefore cannot have a secondary.
Initialization only occurs when the tracking control switch (S1) is On. Block has following
outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO must be specified by the user. The specified values must match
Ranges the engineering units (EU) range of the RFB and TRFB signals, which are the range of
and Limits the remote (foreign) controller or secondary.
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of CV
range (user-specified values).
l OP clamps to limits if calculated CV exceeds them, or another block or
user program attempts to store OP value exceeding them; operator may
store OP value outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define extended high and low limits for OP as percent
of CV range (user-entered values).
l Prevents operator from storing OP value that exceeds these limits.
l MAXRFBDEV is the maximum deviation allowed between CV and RFB, in percent.
It is used to provide windup protection for OP.
l If the scaled, integrated deviation of CV from RFB exceeds
MAXRFBDEV in the positive direction, the PIDER block sets the output
windup status (ARWOP) to High, which will prevent CV from going
higher. If the deviation exceeds MAXRFBDEV in the negative direction,
it sets ARWOP to Low, which will prevent CV from going lower. This
occurs only if the tracking control switch (S1) is Off.
Equation l Equation A - Proportional, Integral, and Derivative on error.
Options
l Equation B -- Proportional and Integral on error and Derivative on changes in PV.
l Equation C -- Integral on error and Proportional and Derivative on changes in PV.
l Equation D -- Integral only.
l In addtion to the PID equations above, the PIDER block supports equation
variations depending on the status of the tracking switch (S1).
l Output bias processing which adds fixed and floating bias to unbiased
CV.
l Reverse-control action causes the sign of the unbiased CV to be
reversed.
Gain If equation A, B, or C is selected, any of the following gain options may be chosen:
Options l Linear Gain -- provides proportional control action that is equal to a constant (K)
times the error.
l Gap Gain -- used to reduce sensitivity of control system when PV is in user-
specified band (gap) around set point.
l Nonlinear Gain -- control action is proportional to square of error, rather than error
itself.
l External Gain -- gain (K) is modified by input value that can come from the process,
another block or user program.
Direct or l Direct action -- increase in error increases output (OP).
Reverse
Control l Reverse action -- increase in error decreases output (OP).
Parameters ADVDEVALM.DB ADVDEVALM.DBU NLGAIN NORMMODE
ADVDEVALM.FL ADVDEVALM.PR NORMMODEATTR NUMINSERT
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
ADVDEVALM.SV ADVDEVALM.TM NUMPRI NUMSEC OP OPBIAS
ADVDEVALM.TMO ADVDEVALM.TP OPBIAS.FIX OPBIAS.FLOAT
ADVDEVOPT ADVSP ADVSPP ALMDB OPBIAS.RATE OPEU OPEXHIFL
ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET[1..8] ARWNETIN OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL OPEXLOLM
[1..8] ARWOP ARWOPIN ASTEPID OPHIALM.DB OPHIALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.FL BADCTLALM.PR OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR
BADCTLALM.SV BADCTLALM.TM OPHIALM.SV OPHIALM.TM
BADCTLALM.TMO BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT OPHIALM.TMO OPHIALM.TP OPHIFL
CASREQFL COMPUTEARW CTLACTN OPHILM OPLOALM.DB OPLOALM.DBU
CTLEQN CTLINIT CTLSTATE CV CVEUHI OPLOALM.FL OPLOALM.PR
CVEULO CVTYPE DELCV DESC DEV OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM
DEVHIALM.DB DEVHIALM.DBU OPLOALM.TMO OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL
DEVHIALM.FL DEVHIALM.PR DEVHIALM.SV OPLOLM OPMINCHG OPREQ
DEVHIALM.TM DEVHIALM.TMO OPROCLM OPROCNEGFL
DEVHIALM.TP DEVLOALM.DB OPROCPOSFL OPTOL OPTYPE
DEVLOALM.DBU DEVLOALM.FL ORDERINCM OUTIND OUTTYPE
DEVLOALM.PR DEVLOALM.SV PUSHSP PV PVEUHI PVEULO
DEVLOALM.TM DEVLOALM.TMO PVFORMAT PVMANOPT PVP PVSTS
DEVLOALM.TP ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
ESWFL.BCAS ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCER
ESWPERM EUDESC FBORSTS PVTRAKOPT PVTRAKOPTAI REDTAG
FORCEMODEATTR GAINHILM GAINLOLM RESTARTOPT RFB S1 SAFEOP
GAINOPT GAPHILM GAPLOLM HIALM.PR SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
HOLDRATE HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INITREQ[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] INSBLOCK[1..10] SECDATAIN.INITSTS
INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.INITVAL
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL K K1 KLIN SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
KMODIFEXT KMODIFGAP KMODIFNL SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
LASTGOODPV LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE LASTRATEREQ SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
LASTREQFL LASTSPREQ LASTSPTVREQ SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT
LASTSTEP LEGACYGAP MAXRFBDEV [1..8] SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR
MODE MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SIALM.SV SIFL SIOPT SP SPEUHI
MODEATTRFL.NORM MODEATTRFL.OPER SPEULO SPFORMAT SPHIFL SPHILM
MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK SPLOFL SPLOLM SPP SPRATEREQ
MODECHANGE MODEFL.AUTO SPREQ SPTOL SPTV SPTVDEVFL
MODEFL.BCAS MODEFL.CAS SPTVDEVMAX SPTVNORMRATE
MODEFL.MAN MODEFL.NORM MODEMASK SPTVOPT SPTVP SPTVRATE
MODEPERM MODEREQ MODESEL.ALL SPTVREQ SPTVSTATE SPTVTIME
MODESEL.AUTO MODESEL.CAS STARTOPT STARTRATE STARTVAL
MODESEL.MAN MODESEL.PROGRAM STOPOPT STOPRATE STOPVAL T1
MODETRACK NAME NLFORM T1HILM T1LOLM T2 T2HILM T2LOLM
TMOUTFL TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME
TRFB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PIDER
Block.ck.
3.11.7 PID-PL block
Description A regulatory control block combining the functionality of PID controller with a robust,
model-based, predictive controller and optimizer, Profit Loop PKS. In many cases, Profit
Loop PKS provides superior control and should be used in place of the standard PID
algorithms. See the Control Builder Components Theory, Regulatory Control section,
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
PID-PL (Profit Loop PKS) Block for a discussion of benefits.
Function Belongs to a class of controllers known as “model predictive control.” These controllers
rely on a dynamic model to predict future movement in the process variable. If the
predicted PV does not meet the control objectives (maintain at current setpoint), control
action is taken to realign the PV with its objectives. In contrast, a PID controller uses
past and current error trajectories to restore the PV to its SP within one control move,
regardless of the long-term consequences of the move. With R410, PID-PL block allows
you to configure individual values for the deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and
off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced
for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only
identical deadband unit for all the alarms. See the Control Builder Components Theory,
Regulatory Control section, PID-PL (Profit Loop PKS) Block for a discussion of benefits.
Timeout The PID-PL block monitors for communication timeouts between primary and secondary
Monitoring controllers of a cascade pair. This block uses the same methodology as the PID block.
See Timeout Monitoring for PID block for implementation details.
Inputs The PID-PL block requires two inputs: PV and SP. See Required Inputs for PID block for
details on these inputs. For range control, the PID-PL block requires two additional
inputs: SPHI and SPLO. These parameters cannot be initialized. They can be pulled
from another block, set through operator entry, or stored by a user program.
Input For PID or Profit Loop PKS setpoint control, the PID range limits apply. See Input ranges
Ranges and limits for PID block for details. For range control,
and Limits l PVEUHI and PVEULO define the engineering unit range for MODELPV, SP, SPHI,
and SPLO.
l SPHILM and SPLOLM define the operating limits in engineering units for SPHI,
and SPLO. If a value is entered outside these limits but within the engineering unit
range, this block clamps the value at its appropriate limit. Otherwise, an out of
bounds error is generated.
l SPHI and SPLO define the operating limits in engineering units for SP. The
operator is prevented from storing a setpoint value that is outside these limits. If the
primary or a user program attempts to store a value outside of the limits, this block
clamps it to the appropriate limit and sets the primary's windup status.
Outputs The PID-PL block supports a single initializable output. Like PID, this calculated output
can be either in percent, OP, or in engineering units, OPEU. See Initializable outputs for
PID block for more details.
Output The output range of a PID-PL block is identical to the PID block. See Output ranges and
Ranges limits for PID block for details.
and Limits
Equation The PID-PL block supports the standard five PID equations (EqA through EqE) as well
Options as the Profit Loop equation, PROFITLOOP. For details on the PROFITLOOP equation
type, see the Control Builder Components Theory, Regulatory Control section, PID-PL
(Profit Loop PKS) Block for a discussion of benefits. For details on the PID equations,
see PID equations.
Gain The gain options only apply for applicable PID equations A, B, or C. The PROFITLOOP
Options equation does not support the gain options. See Gain options for use with PID
equations.
Direct or A PID-PL block may be configured for direct-control action or reverse-control action,
Reverse effectively changing the sign of the controller gain. See Direct or reverse control for PID
Control block for implementation details. With Profit Loop PKS, the sign of the controller gain is
determined by the sign of the process model gain. To prevent mismatch between the
model gain and control action, changes to CTLACTN are not allowed. Furthermore,
when the model gain changes (including initial loading of the function block), CTLACTN
is set to match the new gain direction.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l A positive process model gain leads to reverse control action.
l A negative process model gain leads to direct control action.
Parameters All PID parameters apply to the PID-PL block. They are listed here. Parameters unique
to the PID-PL block are presented in bold.
ADVDEVALM.DB ADVDEVALM.DBU OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL
ADVDEVALM.FL ADVDEVALM.PR OPEXLOLM OPHIACTIVE OPHIALM.DB
ADVDEVALM.SV ADVDEVALM.TM OPHIALM.DBU OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR
ADVDEVALM.TMO ADVDEVALM.TP OPHIALM.SV OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO
ADVDEVOPT ADVSP ADVSPP ALMDB OPHIALM.TP OPHIFL OPHILM OPHILMOPT
ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET[1..8] OPHIOPTOFFSET OPLOACTIVE
ARWOP ARWRATIO ASTEPID OPLOALM.DB OPLOALM.DBU OPLOALM.FL
BADCTLALM.FL BADCTLALM.PR OPLOALM.PR OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM
BADCTLALM.SV BADCTLFL OPLOALM.TMO OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL
BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPLOLM OPLOLMOPT OPLOOPTOFFSET
BADOCOPTENB BADPVALM.FL OPMINCHG OPREQ OPROCLM
BADPVALM.PR BADPVALM.SV OPROCNEGFL OPROCPOSFL OPTMODE
BADCTLALM.TM BADCTLALM.TMO OPTSPEED OPTYPE ORDERINCM OUTIND
BADPVALM.TP CALIBRATION OUTTYPE PREDPVHIALM.FL
CASREQFL CLOSEDLOOPRESP PREDPVHIALM.PR PREDPVHIALM.SV
COMPUTEARW CTLACTN CTLEQN PREDPVHIALM.TP PREDPVLOALM.FL
CTLINIT CTLSTATE CTRLMODE CV PREDPVLOALM.PR PREDPVLOALM.SV
CVEUHI CVEULO CVTYPE D[1..5] PREDPVHIALM.TM PREDPVHIALM.TMO
DELCV DESC DEV DEVHIALM.DB PREDPVLOALM.TP PRFRATIO PRIM.
DEVHIALM.DBU DEVHIALM.FL [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
DEVHIALM.PR DEVHIALM.SV [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
DEVHIALM.TM DEVHIALM.TMO PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
DEVHIALM.TP DEVLOALM.DB [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.DBU DEVLOALM.FL [1..8].PROPOVRD PROCDEADTIME
DEVLOALM.PR DEVLOALM.SV PROCDEADTIMEACT PROCDEADTIMEBIAS
DEVLOALM.TM DEVLOALM.TMO PROCGAINACT PROCGAINEU
DEVLOALM.TP ESWENB PROCGAINMULT PROCGAINPCT
ESWFL.AUTO ESWFL.BCAS PROCGAINUNITS PUSHSP PV
ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM PVASYNCOPT PVEUHI PVEULO
EUDESC FBORSTS PVFORMAT PVMANOPT PVP PVSTS
FORCEMODEATTR GAINHILM PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
GAINLOLM GAINOPT GAPHILM PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCER
GAPLOLM HIALM.PR HIALM.SV PVTRAKOPT PVTRAKOPTAI REDTAG
HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT HOLDRATE RESET RESETMODEL RESTARTOPT
HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN INITREQ SAFEOP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] INSBLOCK[1..10] SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL K] KLIN SECDATAIN.INITSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
KMODIFEXT KMODIFGAP KMODIFNL SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
LASTGOODPV LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
LASTRATEREQ LASTREQFL SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
LASTSPREQ LASTSPTVREQ SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT[1..8]
LASTSTEP LEGACYGAP MODE SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR SIALM.SV
MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SIFL SIOPT SP SPEUHI SPEULO
MODEATTRFL.NORM SPFORMAT SPHI SPHIACTIVE SPHIFL
MODEATTRFL.OPER SPHILM SPHILMOPT SPHIOPTOFFSET
MODEATTRFL.PROG SPHIRAMPRATE SPLO SPLOACTIVE
MODEATTRMASK MODECHANGE SPLOFL SPLOLM SPLOLMOPT
MODEFL.AUTO MODEFL.BCAS SPLOOPTOFFSET SPLORAMPRATE SPP
MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN SPRATEREQ SPREQ SPTV SPTVDEVFL
MODEFL.NORM MODEMASK SPTVDEVMAX SPTVNORMRATE SPTVOPT
MODELPV MODEPERM MODEREQ SPTVP SPTVRATE SPTVREQ SPTVSTATE
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.AUTO SPTVTIME STARTOPT STARTRATE
MODESEL.CAS MODESEL.MAN STARTVAL STEADYSTATEOP
MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK N STEADYSTATEOPEU STEADYSTATEPV
[1..5] NEWSAMPLE NLFORM NLGAIN STOPOPT STOPRATE STOPVAL T1 T1HILM
NORMMODE NORMMODEATTR T1LOLM T2 T2HILM T2LOLM TMOUTFL
NUMCOEFDEN NUMCOEFNUM TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME
NUMINSERT NUMPRI NUMSEC OP UNCMDCHGALM.FL UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX OPBIAS.FLOAT UNCMDCHGALM.PR UNCMDCHGALM.SV
OPBIAS.RATE OPENLOOPRESP UPDATEMODEL VALVETRAVELRDCT
OPEU OPEUMOVE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PID-PL
Block.
3.11.8 PIDFF (PID Feedforward) block
Description The PIDFF block is like the PID block but it accepts a feedforward signal as an
additional input. You can configure the PIDFF block so the feedforward signal is added
to or multiplied by the normal PID algorithm's incremental output to meet your particular
control requirements.
Function l The multiplicative feedforward action is typically used to compensate for variations
in process gain that are caused by changes in the throughput. It is usually used
with a lead/lag relay to provide dynamic feedforward control for a given
application. For example, if the feed rate is doubled in a heating application, twice
the amount of fuel might be required, which is equivalent to doubling the process
gain.
l Includes the feedforward signal (FF) in the calculation of the PID's incremental
output before the full value output is accumulated.
l With R410, PIDFF block allows you to configure individual values for the
deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual
alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to
configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only identical deadband
unit for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on SP. If a good SP value is not received
Monitoring within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
l Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL).
l Holds the SP value at its last good value.
l Changes the mode to a user-specified TMOUTMODE.
l Requests the input's primary to initialize.
If SP times out and the block sheds to Auto mode, block sets its Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL). Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero
value, and disabled by setting it to zero.
Inputs l Requires both PV and FF inputs to provide its feedforward function. The PV and FF
inputs must be pulled from other blocks; you cannot store to them. The feedforward
signal may come from a field device (via an IA channel block) or an Auxiliary
function block. Field inputs are typically subjected to deadtime or lead-lag
compensation before being connected to the FF input of this block, which may be
provided by the Deadtime or Lead-Lag Auxiliary function blocks.
l The SP input is not required, since it does not have to be pulled from another
function block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l If Mode is CAScade and the SP is pulled from another function block, it
receives its value from an upstream primary and it is an initializable
input.
l If Mode is CAScade and the SP is not connected to another function
block, the value of the SP is frozen at the last acquired value.
l If Mode is AUTOmatic, the SP value may be stored by the operator or a
user program.
l SP is an initializable input; PV and FF are non-initializable.
Input l PVEUHI and PVEULO define full range of PV in engineering units. They also
Ranges define the engineering unit range of SP, since PV and SP are assumed to have the
and Limits same range.
l PVEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l PVEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
l SPHILM and SPLOLM define set point operating limits in engineering units.
l Prevents operator from storing SP value outside limits; if primary or user
program attempts to store value outside limits, block clamps it to
appropriate limit and sets primary's windup status.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has a
Ranges secondary, it brings the secondary's input range through the BACKCALC and sets its
and Limits CV range to that. If it has no secondary, you must specify CVEUHI and CVEULO range.
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of CV
range (user-specified values).
l OP clamps to limits if calculated CV exceeds them, or another block or
user program attempts to store OP value exceeding them; operator may
store OP value outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define extended high and low limits for OP as percent
of CV range (user-entered values).
l Prevents operator from storing OP value that exceeds these limits.
Equation l Equation A - Proportional, Integral, and Derivative on error.
Options
l Equation B -- Proportional and Integral on error and Derivative on changes in PV.
l Equation C -- Integral on error and Proportional and Derivative on changes in PV.
l Equation D -- Integral only.
l Equation E -- Proportional only; this equation supports the following two options
that affect CV:
l Output bias processing which adds fixed and floating bias to unbiased
CV.
l Reverse-control action causes the sign of the unbiased CV to be
reversed.
Gain If equation A, B, or C is selected, any of the following gain options may be chosen:
Options l Linear Gain -- provides proportional control action that is equal to a constant (K)
times the error.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Gap Gain -- used to reduce sensitivity of control system when PV is in user-
specified band (gap) around set point.
l Nonlinear Gain -- control action is proportional to square of error, rather than error
itself.
l External Gain -- gain (K) is modified by input value that can come from the process,
another block or user program.
Direct or l Direct action -- increase in error increases output (OP).
Reverse
Control l Reverse action -- increase in error decreases output (OP).
Parameters ADVDEVALM.DB ADVDEVALM.DBU NLFORM NLGAIN NORMMODE
ADVDEVALM.FL ADVDEVALM.PR NORMMODEATTR NUMINSERT NUMPRI
ADVDEVALM.SV ADVDEVALM.TM NUMSEC OP OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX
ADVDEVALM.TMO ADVDEVALM.TP OPBIAS.FLOAT OPBIAS.RATE OPEU
ADVDEVOPT ADVSP ADVSPP ALMDB OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL
ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET[1..8] ARWOP OPEXLOLM OPHIALM.DB OPHIALM.DBU
ASTEPID BADCTLALM.FL OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR OPHIALM.SV
BADCTLALM.PR BADCTLALM.SV OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO OPHIALM.TP
BADCTLALM.TM BADCTLALM.TMO OPHIFL OPHILM OPLOALM.DB
BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPLOALM.DBU OPLOALM.FL
BADOCOPTENB BFF CASREQFL OPLOALM.PR OPLOALM.SV
COMPUTEARW CTLACTN CTLEQN OPLOALM.TM OPLOALM.TMO
CTLINIT CTLSTATE CV CVEUHI CVEULO OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL OPLOLM
CVTYPE DELCV DESC DEV OPMINCHG OPREQ OPROCLM
DEVHIALM.DB DEVHIALM.DBU OPROCNEGFL OPROCPOSFL OPTYPE
DEVHIALM.FL DEVHIALM.PR ORDERINCM OUTIND OUTTYPE PRIM.
DEVHIALM.SV DEVHIALM.TM [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
DEVHIALM.TMO DEVHIALM.TP [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.DB DEVLOALM.DBU [1..8].ORFBSTS PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.FL DEVLOALM.PR [1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.SV DEVLOALM.TM [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.TMO DEVLOALM.TP [1..8].PROPOVRD PUSHSP PV PVEUHI
ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO ESWFL.BCAS PVEULO PVFORMAT PVMANOPT PVP
ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM PVSTS PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
EUDESC FBORSTS FORCEMODEATTR PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCER
FF FFOPT FFSTS GAINHILM GAINLOLM PVTRAKOPT PVTRAKOPTAI REDTAG
GAINOPT GAPHILM GAPLOLM HIALM.PR RESTARTOPT SAFEOP
HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT SECDATAIN.ARWSTS SECDATAIN.EUHI
HOLDRATE HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN SECDATAIN.EULO
INITREQ[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] INSBLOCK SECDATAIN.HISELECT
[1..10] INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.INITSTS
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL K KFF KLIN SECDATAIN.INITVAL
KMODIFEXT KMODIFGAP KMODIFNL SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
LASTGOODPV LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
LASTRATEREQ LASTREQFL SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
LASTSPREQ LASTSPTVREQ LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT
LEGACYGAP MODE MODEAPPL[1..4] [1..8] SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR
MODEATTR MODEATTRFL.NORM SIALM.SV SIFL SIOPT SP SPEUHI
MODEATTRFL.OPER SPEULO SPFORMAT SPHIFL SPHILM
MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK SPLOFL SPLOLM SPP SPRATEREQ
MODECHANGE MODEFL.AUTO SPREQ SPTV SPTVDEVFL SPTVDEVMAX
MODEFL.BCAS MODEFL.CAS SPTVNORMRATE SPTVOPT SPTVP
MODEFL.MAN MODEFL.NORM SPTVRATE SPTVREQ SPTVSTATE
MODEMASK MODEPERM MODEREQ SPTVTIME STARTOPT STARTRATE
MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.AUTO STARTVAL STOPOPT STOPRATE
MODESEL.CAS MODESEL.MAN STOPVAL T1 T1HILM T1LOLM T2 T2HILM
MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK T2LOLM TMOUTFL TMOUTMODE
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
NAME TMOUTTIME UNCMDCHGALM.FL
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
UNCMDCHGALM.PR
UNCMDCHGALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PIDFF (PID
Feedforward) Block.
3.11.9 POSPROP (Position Proportional) block
Description Used to pulse two digital output devices (one for raise pulses and another for lower
pulses) to drive a process variable (PV) toward its set point (SP). The only valid output
destinations are to Digital Output Channel blocks or the Pulse Count and Pulse Length
blocks.
Function l Typically used to step a valve open or closed, raise or lower a rotary device, or
move the plates of a pulp mill refiner together or apart.
l Compares the error signal (PV - SP) with an error deadband for the raise and
lower directions at an interval based on the configurable cycle time parameter
(CYCLETIME). You can also configure the raise and lower deadband values that
are denoted as the parameters ERRORDBR and ERRORDBL, respectively.
l Generates a raise pulse, when the PV is less than the SP minus the raise error
deadband (ERRORDBR); or a lower pulse, when the PV is greater than the SP
plus the lower error deadband (ERRORDBL) to reduce the error.
l The pulse duration determines the magnitude of a pulse - the longer the duration,
the bigger the pulse. The POSPROP block will not issue a raise or lower pulse
that is longer than the configured cycle time (CYCLETIME) or the respective
maximum pulse time parameter MAXPULSER or MAXPULSEL, whichever is
smaller. The block uses the following values in its pulse duration calculation.
l Error signal (PV - SP)
l Raise or lower gain setting (KR or KL)
l Raise or lower pulse stroke rate (RAISERATE or LOWERRATE)
l Additional raise or lower pulse time (RAISEDEADTM or
LOWERDEADTM) based on stiction compensation (STICTIONR or
STICTIONL), when a motor starts up; or backlash compensation
(BACKLASHR or BACKLASHL), when a motor changes direction.
l Minimum raise or lower pulse time (MINPULSER or MINPULSEL)
l With R410, POSPROP block allows you to configure individual values for the
deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual
alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to
configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only identical deadband
unit for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on SP. If a good SP value is not
Monitoring received within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
l Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL)
l Holds the SP value at its last good value.
l Changes the mode to a user-specified TMOUTMODE.
l Requests the input's primary to initialize.
If SP times out and the block sheds to Auto mode, block sets its Cascade Request flag
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
(CASREQFL). Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero
value, and disabled by setting it to zero.
Inputs The required number of inputs is determined by the mode of the POSPROP block.
l If Mode is CAScade, two inputs are required - PV and SP.
l If Mode is AUTOmatic or MANual, only PV is required.
l SP is an initializable input; PV is non-initializable.
l PV must be pulled from another block; you cannot store to it - typically it
is connected to the output of an auxiliary or data acquisition
(DATAACQ) block.
l If Mode is CAScade, SP is pulled from another block; if Mode is
AUTOmatic, it may be stored by the operator.
l The POSPROP block may have one primary or none, depending on
whether SP is configured or not; there is one primary per initializable
input.
The optional raise and lower flag inputs (RAISELMFL and LOWERLMFL) may be set
externally to inhibit raise and lower pulses, respectively. These optional inputs can be
pulled from other function blocks.
Input l PVEUHI and PVEULO define full range of PV in engineering units. They also
Ranges and define the engineering unit range of SP, since PV and SP are assumed to have
Limits the same range.
l PVEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l PVEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
l SPHILM and SPLOLM define set point operating limits in engineering units.
Prevents operator from storing SP value outside limits; if primary or user program
attempts to store value outside limits, block clamps it to appropriate limit and sets
primary's windup status.
Outputs The POSPROP block has the following initializable outputs:
l RAISETIME = Raise pulse duration.
l LOWERTIME = Lower pulse duration.
l PULSETIME = Pulse duration.
Output The POSPROP block uses the maximum and minimum pulse parameters to define
Ranges and pulse duration ranges and limits.
Limits l MAXPULSER and MAXPULSEL define the maximum pulse time in the Raise and
Lower directions, respectively. The POSPROP block will not issue a Raise/Lower
pulse with a duration that exceeds these values. If the output and CYCLETIME
are greater than MAXPULSER/MAXPULSEL, the output is clamped to
MAXPULSER/MAXPULSEL.
l MINPULSER and MINPULSEL define the minimum pulse time in the Raise and
Lower directions, respectively. The POSPROP block will not issue a Raise/Lower
pulse with a duration that is less than these values. If the output is less than
MINPULSER/MINPULSEL, the output retains its old value. (Note that the
POSPROP block does not use these common regulatory control block range and
limit parameters: CVEUHI, CVEULO, OPHILM, OPLOLM, OPEXHILM, and
OPEXLOLM.)
Equation The POSPROP block generates Raise and Lower pulses at a rate specified by the
Options configurable cycle time (CYCLETIME) parameter. It calculates the pulse duration at the
beginning of each cycle depending on whether:
l The PVP is greater than (SPP - ERRORDBR) and the Raise limit flag
(RAISELMFL) is OFF, then issue a Raise pulse.
l The PVP is less than (SPP + ERRORDBL) and the Lower limit flag
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
(LOWERLMFL) is OFF, then issue a Lower pulse.
The PULSETIME output is set to either the RAISETIME or -LOWERTIME, when either
RAISETIME or LOWERTIME is non-zero.
Control The POSPROP block accepts initialization information from its three initializable
Initialization outputs: RAISETIME, LOWERTIME, and PULSETIME. If any output requests
initialization, the POSPROP block sets its INITMAN parameter to ON. When no output
requests initialization, the POSPROP block sets its INITMAN parameter to OFF. When
cycling resumes after initialization, the Raise and Lower outputs are both set to OFF (or
their normal states) and the cycle time is restarted.
Override The POSPROP block does not propagate override feedback data. It ignores any
Feedback override feedback requests.
Processing
Parameters ADVDEVALM.DB ADVDEVALM.DBU MINPULSER MODE MODEAPPL[1..4]
ADVDEVALM.FL ADVDEVALM.PR MODEATTR MODEATTRFL.NORM
ADVDEVALM.SV ADVDEVALM.TM MODEATTRFL.OPER MODEATTRFL.PROG
ADVDEVALM.TMO ADVDEVALM.TP MODEATTRMASK MODECHANGE
ADVDEVOPT ADVSP ADVSPP MODEFL.AUTO MODEFL.BCAS
ALMDB ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN
[1..8] ARWOP ASTEPID BACKLASHL MODEFL.NORM MODEMASK MODEPERM
BACKLASHR BADCTLALM.FL MODEREQ MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.AUTO
BADCTLALM.PR BADCTLALM.SV MODESEL.CAS MODESEL.MAN
BADCTLALM.TM BADCTLALM.TMO MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK NAME
BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT CASREQFL NORMMODE NORMMODEATTR
COMPUTEARW CTLINIT CVTYPE NUMINSERT NUMPRI NUMSEC OPREQ
CYCLETIME DESC DEV OPTYPE ORDERINCM OUTTYPE PRIM.
DEVHIALM.DB DEVHIALM.DBU [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
DEVHIALM.FL DEVHIALM.PR [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
DEVHIALM.SV DEVHIALM.TM PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
DEVHIALM.TMO DEVHIALM.TP [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.DB DEVLOALM.DBU [1..8].PROPOVRD PULSECMD
DEVLOALM.FL DEVLOALM.PR PULSECMDTEXT[0..2] PULSETIME PV
DEVLOALM.SV DEVLOALM.TM PVEUHI PVEULO PVFORMAT PVMANOPT
DEVLOALM.TMO DEVLOALM.TP PVP PVSTS PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
ERRORDBL ERRORDBR ESWENB PVSTSFL.NORM PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
ESWFL.AUTO ESWFL.BCAS RAISEDEADTM RAISEDESC RAISELMFL
ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM RAISERATE RAISETIME REDTAG
EUDESC EXTRAPULSE RESTARTOPT SAFEOPCMD
EXTRAPULSETM FBORSTS SECDATAIN.ARWSTS SECDATAIN.EUHI
FORCEMODEATTR HIALM.PR SECDATAIN.EULO SECDATAIN.HISELECT
HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT SECDATAIN.INITSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
HOLDRATE HOLDVAL INALM SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
INITMAN INITREQ[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
INSBLOCK[1..10] INSFAILALM.FL SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
INSFAILALM.PR INSFAILALM.SV SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
INSFAILFL KL KR LASTGOODPV SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT[1..8]
LASTMODEREQ LASTOPREQ SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR SIALM.SV
LASTOPTYPE LASTRATEREQ SIFL SIOPT SP SPEUHI SPEULO SPFORMAT
LASTREQFL LASTSPREQ SPHIFL SPHILM SPLOFL SPLOLM SPP
LASTSPTVREQ LASTSTEP SPRATEREQ SPREQ SPTV SPTVDEVFL
LOWERDEADTM LOWERDESC SPTVDEVMAX SPTVNORMRATE SPTVOPT
LOWERLMFL LOWERRATE SPTVP SPTVRATE SPTVREQ SPTVSTATE
LOWERTIME MANPULSECMD SPTVTIME STARTOPT STARTRATE
MANPULSETIME MAXPULSEL STARTVAL STICTIONL STICTIONR
MAXPULSER MINPULSEL STOPOPT STOPRATE STOPVAL TMOUTFL
TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the POSPROP
(Position Proportional) Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.11.10 PULSECOUNT block
Description The PULSECOUNT block generates pulses according to its pulse count control
algorithm. The pulsed outputs are usually fed to Digital Output Channel blocks. Dual
Pulse Train: A control algorithm turns on either a “raise” channel or a “lower” channel
after every execution of this algorithm. The output is modulated with a 50% duty-cycle
pulse train. The on-duration (or pulse length) is configured for the channel and is
indicted with a tuning parameter. The calculated on-duration will be in 10 msec
increments. Single Pulse Train: A single output channel is used to indicate the direction
(raise or lower) of the actuator. A second output channel is used to deliver a 50% duty
cycle pulse train. The on-duration (or pulse length) is configured for the channel and is
indicted with a tuning parameter. The calculated on-duration will be in 10 msec
increments.
Function l Typically used in conjunction with a POSPROP block to step a valve open or
closed, raise or lower a rotary device, or move the plates of a pulp mill refiner
together or apart.
l The POSPROP block feeds the PULSETIME input parameter to the PULSECOUNT
block. This parameter is an internal structure that contains the pulse width
specification (in seconds). It also contains a Serial Number that changes every
time there is a new pulse width value. The PULSECOUNT block checks for a
change in the Serial Number before reacting to the pulse width specification.
Inputs l Requires a pulse time (PULSETIME) input from another block. A POSPROP block
usually supplies this.
l The POPERIOD input is user configurable in seconds.
l The PDELAYDIRCHG input is user configurable in seconds.
l The optional LOCALMAN input should come from another block in a logic strategy
where an ON condition means that the CEE is not controlling the output of the
device.
Outputs The PULSECOUNT block has the following initializable outputs:
l PORAISE = Pulse output for Raise pulses. These pulses are generated if the pulse
width specified by the PULSETIME input is positive.
l POLOWER = Pulse output for Lower pulses. These pulses are generated if the
pulse width specified by the PULSETIME input is negative.
l PO = Pulse output for both Raise and Lower pulses. These pulses are generated
as a logical OR between the PORAISE and POLOWER pulses.
l PODIR = Direction for PO. This output is OFF for a Lower pulse and is ON for a
Raise pulse.
Parameters COMPUTEARW CVTYPE INITMAN PODIR POLOWER POPERIOD PORAISE
INITREQ INSBLOCK[1..10] PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL LOCALMAN [1..8].ORFBSTS PRIMDATA.
MODECHANGE NAME NUMINSERT [1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
ORDERINCM OUTTYPE [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
PDELAYDIRCHG PO [1..8].PROPOVRD PULSETIME
SECDATAIN.HISELECT
SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
PULSECOUNT Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.11.11 PULSELENGTH block
Description Generates pulse trains according to its pulse length control algorithm. The pulsed
outputs are usually fed to Digital Output Channel blocks. Dual Pulse Length: A control
algorithm turns on either a “raise” channel or a “lower” channel after every execution of
this algorithm. The selected output stays on for a time period that is calculated by the
control algorithm. The calculated on-duration will be in 10 msec increments. Single
Pulse Length: A single output channel is used to indicate the direction (raise or lower) of
the actuator. A second output channel is used to indicate the calculated on-duration (or
length) of the pulse. The calculated on-duration will be in 10 msec increments.
Function l Typically used in conjunction with a POSPROP block to step a valve open or
closed, raise or lower a rotary device, or move the plates of a pulp mill refiner
together or apart.
l The POSPROP block feeds the PULSETIME input parameter to the
PULSELENGTH block. This parameter is an internal structure that contains the
pulse width specification (in seconds). It also contains a Serial Number that
changes every time there is a new pulse width value. The PULSELENGTH block
checks for a change in the Serial Number before reacting to the pulse width
specification.
Inputs l Requires a pulse time (PULSETIME) input from another block. A POSPROP block
usually supplies this.
l The PDELAYDIRCHG input is user configurable in seconds.
l The optional LOCALMAN input should come from another block in a logic strategy
where an ON condition means that the CEE is not controlling the output of the
device.
Outputs The PULSELENGTH block has the following initializable outputs:
l PORAISE = Pulse output for Raise pulses. These pulses are generated if the pulse
width specified by the PULSETIME input is positive.
l POLOWER = Pulse output for Lower pulses. These pulses are generated if the
pulse width specified by the PULSETIME input is negative.
l PO = Pulse output for both Raise and Lower pulses. These pulses are generated
as a logical OR between the PORAISE and POLOWER pulses.
l PODIR = Direction for PO. This output is OFF for a Lower pulse and is ON for a
Raise pulse.
Parameters COMPUTEARW CTLSTATE CVTYPE PO PODIR POLOWER PORAISE PRIM.
INITMAN INITREQ INSBLOCK[1..10] [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL LOCALMAN [1..8].ORFBSTS PRIMDATA.
MODECHANGE NAME NUMINSERT [1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
ORDERINCM OUTTYPE [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
PDELAYDIRCHG [1..8].PROPOVRD PULSETIME
SECDATAIN.HISELECT
SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
PULSELENGTH Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.11.12 RAMPSOAK block
Description Provides an output that tracks a user configured set point versus time profile. The block
supports up to 99 separate profiles with up to 50 user configured ramp and soak
segment pairs per profile, for a total of 60 segments (where each segment is one ramp
or one soak) Each ramp/soak pair is defined by a soak value (i.e., the target value for
the ramp segment), a ramp rate and a soak time. This lets you implement a set point
program control function by driving the set point of another regulatory control function
block.
Function This function is also known as a “set point programmer” because the output follows a
sequence of user-programmed functions, and is typically used as the set point of a PID.
Typically used for automatic temperature cycling in furnaces and ovens. It can also be
used for automatic startup of units and for simple batch-sequence control where the
batch sequence is part of a process that is otherwise a continuous process. This block
monitors an input value (typically the PV of the PID), and guarantees that its output will
not deviate from the input by more than some user-specified limits. This function block
may be configured to execute a profile once and stop; repeat continuously the same
profile; or execute the next profile in order after completion of the current profile. With
R410, RAMSOAK block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new
parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay
time. However, you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Inputs Only requires a PV input for the guaranteed ramp option.
Input PVEUHI and PVEULO define full range of PV in engineering units. The default range is
Ranges and 0 to 100.
Limits l PVEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l PVEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter
(OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has a
Ranges and secondary, it brings the secondary's input range through the BACKCALC and sets its
Limits CV range to that. If it has no secondary, you must specify CVEUHI and CVEULO range.
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of
CV range (user-specified values).
l OP clamps to limits if calculated CV exceeds them, or another block or
user program attempts to store OP value exceeding them; operator may
store OP value outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define extended high and low limits for OP as
percent of CV range (user-entered values).
Prevents operator from storing OP value that exceeds these limits. that the RAMPSOAK
block does not apply a floating bias to the output.
Guaranteed If you configure a maximum ramp deviation (MAXRAMPDEV[n]) value for a given
Ramp Rate profile, the RAMPSOAK block makes sure that the calculated output (CV) value does
not deviate from the input (PV) by more than the configured deviation value
Guaranteed If you configure the maximum high soak deviation (MAXHISOAKDEV[n]) and/or the
Soak Time maximum low soak deviation (MAXLOSOAKDEV[n]) value, the RAMPSOAK block
makes sure the calculated output (CV) value is at the proper value before it starts the
soak timer.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Event You can configure up to 16 event flags (EVENTFL[n,e]) to provide Boolean outputs for a
Timers specified time during a given ramp or soak segment in a given profile. This means you
can have up to 16 events per profile or a total of 160 events in 10 profiles.
Parameters ACTRAMPRATE[1..NUMPROFILES] NAME NETELAPSEDTM NORMMODE
[1..NUMRAMPSOAK] ACTSOAKTIME NORMMODEATTR NUMEVENTS
[1..NUMPROFILES][1..NUMRAMPSOAK] [1..NUMPROFILES] NUMINSERT NUMPRI
ACTSOAKVAL[1..NUMPROFILES] NUMPROFILES NUMRAMPSOAK
[1..NUMRAMPSOAK] ACTSTARTOP [1..NUMPROFILES] NUMSEC OP OPBIAS
[1..NUMPROFILES] ACTSTARTSEG OPBIAS.FIX OPBIAS.FLOAT OPBIAS.RATE
[1..NUMPROFILES] ALMDB ALMDBU OPEU OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL
ALMTM ARWNET[1..8] ARWOP ASTEPID OPEXLOLM OPHIALM.DB OPHIALM.DBU
BADOCOPT BADOCOPTENB OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR OPHIALM.SV
CASREQFL COMPUTEARW CTLINIT OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO OPHIALM.TP
CTLSTATE CURPROFILEID CURSEGID OPHIFL OPHILM OPLOALM.DB
CURSEGTYP CV CVEUHI CVEULO OPLOALM.DBU OPLOALM.FL
CVTYPE CYCLEOPT[1..NUMPROFILES] OPLOALM.PR OPLOALM.SV
DESC DEVHIALM.DB DEVHIALM.DBU OPLOALM.TM OPLOALM.TMO
DEVHIALM.FL DEVHIALM.PR OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL OPLOLM
DEVHIALM.SV DEVHIALM.TM OPMINCHG OPREQ OPROCLM
DEVHIALM.TMO DEVHIALM.TP OPROCNEGFL OPROCPOSFL OPTYPE
DEVLOALM.DB DEVLOALM.DBU ORDERINCM OUTIND OUTTYPE PRIM.
DEVLOALM.FL DEVLOALM.PR [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.SV DEVLOALM.TM [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.
DEVLOALM.TMO DEVLOALM.TP [1..8].ORFBSTS PRIMDATA.
ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO ESWFL.BCAS [1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
EUDESC EVENTBGNTIME [1..8].PROPOVRD PROFILEDESC
[1..NUMPROFILES][1..NUMEVENTS] [1..NUMPROFILES ] PROFRESET PV
EVENTENDTIME[1..NUMPROFILES] PVEUHI PVEULO PVSTS RAMPRATE
[1..NUMEVENTS] EVENTFL [1..NUMPROFILES][1..NUMRAMPSOAK]
[1..NUMEVENTS] EVENTSEGID REDTAG REMSOAKTIME RESETTIMR
[1..NUMPROFILES][1..NUMEVENTS] RESTARTOPT SAFEOP
FBORSTS HIALM.PR HIALM.SV SECDATAIN.ARWSTS SECDATAIN.EUHI
HIALM.TYPE HOLDCMD HOLDOPT SECDATAIN.EULO
HOLDRATE HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INITREQ[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] INSBLOCK SECDATAIN.INITSTS
[1..10] INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.INITVAL
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
LASTMODEREQ LASTOPREQ SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MAXHISOAKDEV[1..NUMPROFILES] SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MAXLOSOAKDEV[1..NUMPROFILES] SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT
MAXRAMPDEV[1..NUMPROFILES] [1..8] SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR
MAXSOAKVAL[1..NUMPROFILES] SIALM.SV SIFL SIOPT SOAKTIME
MINSOAKVAL[1..NUMPROFILES] MODE [1..NUMPROFILES][1..NUMRAMPSOAK]
MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SOAKVAL[1..NUMPROFILES]
MODEATTRFL.NORM [1..NUMRAMPSOAK] STARTOP
MODEATTRFL.OPER [1..NUMPROFILES] STARTOPT
MODEATTRFL.PROG MODECHANGE STARTRATE STARTSEG
MODEFL.AUTO MODEFL.BCAS [1..NUMPROFILES] STARTVAL STOPOPT
MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN STOPRATE STOPVAL TMOUTFL
MODEFL.NORM MODEPERM MODEREQ TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME TOTALTIME
MODETRACK [1..50] TOTELAPSEDTM
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
UNCMDCHGALM.PR
UNCMDCHGALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
RAMPSOAK Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.11.13 RATIOBIAS block
Description Accepts a ratio value input (RT) and an input value (X1) to provide a calculated output
based on the ratio of the input variables plus a fixed and/or a floating bias. The input
value must come from another function block. In the Cascade mode, the ratio input
value must come from another function block; but, in the Automatic (Auto) Mode, an
operator or user program can set the ratio value.
Function Lets you implement a form of ratio control by using this block between two PID blocks.
In this case, the output from one PID block is used as the X1 input to the RATIOBIAS
block and the output from the RATIOBIAS block is used as the SP input to the second
PID block. With R410, RATIOBIAS block allows you to configure individual values for
the deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual
alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to
configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only identical deadband unit
for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade mode, this block performs timeout monitoring on both inputs (X1 and RT). If
Monitoring either input value is not updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the
following timeout processing.
l If RT times out, block
l Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL).
l Holds RT at its last good value.
l Sheds to the configured timeout mode (TMOUTMODE).
l Requests the RT primary to initialize.
l If X1 times out, block
l Sets the X1 value to NaN. This causes CV to go to NaN, which results
in the initialization of the RT and X1 primaries.
If RT times out and the block sheds to Auto mode, block sets the Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL). When CASREQFL is set, it means the block is waiting to return to the
cascade mode, and will do so as soon as it gets a good X1 value. This is true only, if
the original mode was Cascade and the TMOUTMODE is Auto . If you change the
mode, this clears the CASREQFL and disables the return to cascade operation. Time-
out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Control Block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC. In addition,
Initialization the secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block. However,
you can disable the SECINITOPT so the block ignores initialization requests from the
secondary. If the secondary is requesting initialization, block:
l Initializes its output:
l CV = initialization value from the secondary,
l Calculates an initialization value for the X1 and RT primaries.
l INITVAL[1] = CV - OPBIAS.FIX / RT
l INITVAL[2] = CV - OPBIAS.FIX / INITVAL[1]
l Requests both primaries to initialize:
l INITREQ[1] = ON
l INITREQ[2] = ON
Override If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector (OVRDSEL)
Feedback block, it receives override feedback data. The data consists of an override status,
Processing override feedback value and an override offset flag. The status indicates if this block is
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
in the selected or unselected strategy. The offset flag only applies to PID type function
blocks. However, you can disable the SECINITOPT so the block ignores override
requests from the secondary. When override status changes from selected to
unselected, this block:
l Computes a feedback value for X1 and RT primaries:
l feedback value for X1 = ORFBVAL - OPBIAS.FIX -OPBIAS.FLOAT / RT
l feedback value for RT = ORFBVAL - OPBIAS.FIX - OPBIAS.FLOAT / X1
override feedback value
Inputs Required number of inputs is determined by this block's mode:
l If Mode = Cascade, 2 inputs are required - X1 and RT. Both must come from other
function blocks.
l If Mode = Auto or Man, only X1 is required. X1 must come from another function
block; an operator cannot set it.
l Both X1 and RT are initializable inputs. So, this block may have one or two
primaries, depending upon whether RT input is used or not.
l If mode = Auto, an operator or user program can set the RT value.
Input l XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of X1 inputs in engineering units. This
Ranges block applies no range checking, since it assumes that X1 is within XEUHI and
XEULO.
l XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
l RTHILM and RTLOLM define the ratio limits for RT inputs in engineering units. An
operator is prevented from setting an RT value that is outside these limits. If the
RT value from a function block or user program is outside these limits, this block
clamps the value to the appropriate limit and sets RT primary windup status.
l RTHILM represents high ratio limit value.
l RTLOLM represents low ratio limit value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has
Ranges a secondary, it uses the secondary's input range through BACKCALC to set its CV
range. If it does not have a secondary, its CV range tracks its own input range (XEUHI
and XEULO).
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of
the CV range (user-specified values).
l OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds
them or another block or user program attempts to store OP value
exceeding them.
l Operator may store OP value outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a
percent of the CV range (user-specified values).
l Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these
limits.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters ALMDB ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET OP OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX OPBIAS.FLOAT
[1..8] ARWOP ASTEPID OPBIAS.RATE OPEU OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM
BADCTLALM.FL BADCTLALM.PR OPEXLOFL OPEXLOLM OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.SV BADCTLALM.TM OPHIALM.DBU OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR
BADCTLALM.TMO BADCTLFL OPHIALM.SV OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO
BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPHIALM.TP OPHIFL OPHILM OPLOALM.DB
BADOCOPTENB BSHILM BSLOLM OPLOALM.DBU OPLOALM.FL
CASREQFL COMPUTEARW CTLINIT OPLOALM.PR OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM
CTLSTATE CV CVEUHI CVEULO OPLOALM.TMO OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL
CVTYPE DESC ESWENB OPLOLM OPMINCHG OPREQ OPROCLM
ESWFL.AUTO ESWFL.BCAS OPROCNEGFL OPROCPOSFL OPTYPE
ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM ORDERINCM OUTIND OUTTYPE PRIM.
EUDESC FBORSTS [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
FORCEMODEATTR HIALM.PR [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
HOLDRATE HOLDVAL INALM [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
INITMAN INITREQ[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] [1..8].PROPOVRD RBOPTION REDTAG
INSBLOCK[1..10] INSFAILALM.FL RESTARTOPT RT RTHIFL RTHILM RTLOFL
INSFAILALM.PR INSFAILALM.SV RTLOLM SAFEOP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
INSFAILFL LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE SECDATAIN.HISELECT
LASTREQFL LASTSTEP MODE SECDATAIN.INITSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
MODEATTRFL.OPER SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODEATTRFL.PROG SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEATTRMASK MODECHANGE SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT[1..8]
MODEFL.AUTO MODEFL.BCAS SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR SIALM.SV
MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN SIFL SIOPT STARTOPT STARTRATE
MODEFL.NORM MODEMASK STARTVAL STOPOPT STOPRATE STOPVAL
MODEPERM MODEREQ TMOUTFL TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME
MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.AUTO UNCMDCHGALM.FL UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
MODESEL.CAS MODESEL.MAN UNCMDCHGALM.PR UNCMDCHGALM.SV
MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK X1 XEUHI XEULO
NAME NORMMODE
NORMMODEATTR NUMINSERT
NUMPRI NUMSEC
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RATIOBIAS
Block.
3.11.14 RATIOCTL block
Description Accepts the actual value of the controlled flow (X1), the actual value of the uncontrolled
flow (X2) and the target ratio between the flows (SP), and calculates the target value of
the controlled flow (OP) and the actual ratio between the flows (PV) as outputs.
Function Provides four user-selectable methods for calculating the ratio between the flows (PV).
The target value for the controlled flow (OP) is calculated according to the selected
method for calculating PV. RATIOCTL block allows you to configure individual values
for the deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual
alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to
configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only identical deadband unit
for all the alarms.
Timeout If mode is CAScade, the block performs time-out monitoring of the initializable input,
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Monitoring l Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL)
l Holds SP at its last good value
l Changes the mode to a user-specified “timeout mode” (MODE = TMOUTMODE)
l Requests the SP primary to initialize (via BACKCALCOUT)
If SP times-out and the block sheds to Auto mode, it sets the Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL). When CASREQFL is set, it means the block is waiting to return to the
Cascade mode, and will do so as soon as it fetches a good SP value. Time-out
monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Control The RATIOCTL block brings initialization requests from its secondary through
Initialization BACKCALC. In addition, the secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests
to this block. (Note that SECINITOPT may be used to ignore initialization requests from
the secondary.) If the secondary is requesting initialization, the RATIOCTL block:
l initializes its output:
l CV = initialization value from the secondary
Builds an initialization request for its primary based on CTLEQN selected.
Override If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector block, it will
Feedback receive override feedback data when any of the following occur.
Processing l the block's windup state changes
l the block is requested to do a oneshot initialization
l the block's override status changes
The data consists of an override status, override feedback value and an override offset
flag. The status indicates if this block is in the selected or unselected strategy (as
determined by the Selector block). The offset flag only applies to PID-type function
blocks. When the override status changes from selected to unselected, this block does
the following:
l Does not initialize its CV
l Computes a feedback value for the SP primary depending on the CTLEQN
selected.
Inputs l A RATIOCTL block requires these three inputs:
l X1 - the actual value of the controlled flow.
l X2 - the actual value of the uncontrolled flow
l SP - the target ratio between the controlled and uncontrolled flows.
l The SP is an initializable input. This means the block can have one primary
depending upon whether the SP input is configured or not. There is one primary
for each initializable input.
l The X1and X2 inputs must come from other function blocks. You cannot store to
them.
l If Mode is Cascade, SP is pulled from another function block. If Mode is Automatic,
it may be stored by the operator or a user program.
Input l You must specify X1 and X2 engineering unit range, XEUHI and XEULO.
Ranges
l XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of the X inputs in engineering
units. XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value. XEULO
represents the 0% of full scale value.
l This block assumes X inputs are within XEUHI and XEULO - it applies no range
check
l You must specify SPHILM and SPLOLM to define the set point limits, expressed
as a ratio. The operator is prevented from storing a set point value that is outside
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
these limits. If the primary or a user program attempts to store a value outside the
limits, this block will clamp it to the appropriate limit and set the input windup
status.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has
Ranges a secondary, it fetches the secondary's input range through BACKCALC and sets its CV
range to that. If it has no secondary, CVEUHI and CVEULO must be specified by the
user.
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of
the CV range (user-specified values).
l OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds
them or another block or user program attempts to store OP value
exceeding them.
l Operator may store OP value outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a
percent of the CV range (user-specified values).
l Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these
limits.
Parameters ADVDEVALM.DB ADVDEVALM.DBU OP OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX
ADVDEVALM.FL ADVDEVALM.PR OPBIAS.FLOAT OPBIAS.RATE OPEU
ADVDEVALM.SV ADVDEVALM.TM OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL
ADVDEVALM.TMO ADVDEVALM.TP OPEXLOLM OPHIALM.DB
ADVDEVOPT ADVSP ADVSPP ALMDB OPHIALM.DBU OPHIALM.FL
ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET[1..8] ARWNETIN OPHIALM.PR OPHIALM.SV
[1..8] ARWOP ARWOPIN ASTEPID OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO
BADCTLALM.FL BADCTLALM.PR OPHIALM.TP OPHIFL OPHILM
BADCTLALM.SV BADCTLALM.TM OPLOALM.DB OPLOALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.TMO BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT OPLOALM.FL OPLOALM.PR
BADOCOPT BADOCOPTENB CASREQFL OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM
COMPUTEARW CTLEQN CTLINIT CTLSTATE OPLOALM.TMO OPLOALM.TP
CV CVEUHI CVEULO CVTYPE DELCV DESC OPLOFL OPLOLM OPMINCHG
DEV DEVHIALM.DB DEVHIALM.DBU OPREQ OPROCLM OPROCNEGFL
DEVHIALM.FL DEVHIALM.PR DEVHIALM.SV OPROCPOSFL OPTOL OPTYPE
DEVHIALM.TM DEVHIALM.TMO ORDERINCM OUTIND PUSHSP PV
DEVHIALM.TP DEVLOALM.DB PVSTS REDTAG RESTARTOPT
DEVLOALM.DBU DEVLOALM.FL SAFEOP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
DEVLOALM.PR DEVLOALM.SV SECDATAIN.EUHI
DEVLOALM.TM DEVLOALM.TMO SECDATAIN.EULO
DEVLOALM.TP ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO SECDATAIN.HISELECT
ESWFL.BCAS ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN SECDATAIN.INITSTS
ESWPERM EUDESC FBORSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
FORCEMODEATTR GAINHILM GAINLOLM SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
HIALM.PR HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
HOLDRATE HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
INITREQ[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] INSBLOCK[1..10] SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL K1 K2 SECINITOPT[1..8] SIALM.FL
LASTMODEREQ LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR SIALM.SV SIFL
LASTRATEREQ LASTREQFL LASTSPREQ SIOPT SP SPEUHI SPEULO
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
LASTSPTVREQ LASTSTEP MODE SPFORMAT SPHIFL SPHILM SPLOFL
MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SPLOLM SPP SPRATEREQ SPREQ
MODEATTRFL.NORM MODEATTRFL.OPER SPTV SPTVDEVFL SPTVDEVMAX
MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK SPTVNORMRATE SPTVOPT SPTVP
MODECHANGE MODEFL.AUTO SPTVRATE SPTVREQ SPTVSTATE
MODEFL.BCAS MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN SPTVTIME STARTOPT STARTRATE
MODEFL.NORM MODEMASK MODEPERM STARTVAL STOPOPT STOPRATE
MODEREQ MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.AUTO STOPVAL TMOUTFL TMOUTMODE
MODESEL.CAS MODESEL.MAN TMOUTTIME UNCMDCHGALM.FL
MODESEL.PROGRAM MODETRACK NAME UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
NORMMODE NORMMODEATTR UNCMDCHGALM.PR
NUMINSERT NUMPRI NUMSEC UNCMDCHGALM.SV X1 X1BIAS
X1KB X1STS X2 X2BIAS X2KB
X2STS XEUHI XEULO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RATIOCTL
Block.
3.11.15 REEOUT (Remote EEOUT) block
Description Supports regulatory cascades between regulatory control function blocks included
in an ACE supervisory controller control strategy and regulatory control points
included in an ACE supervisory controller strategy contained in another Experion
cluster.
Function The REEOUT block supports inter-cluster ACE to ACE regulatory cascades by
connecting to the Inter Cluster Gateway block in the secondary cluster using an
OPC Gateway in the primary cluster.
Inputs/Outputs l SPPIN: SP value in percent, derived from a regulatory control point in the FB's
cluster
l SPPOUT: SP output to a regulatory control point in the secondary cluster,
passed to the Inter Cluster Gateway in the secondary cluster using an OPC
Gateway in the primary cluster.
Regulatory points in the secondary cluster must be configured to allow their SP to
be pushed from the Inter Cluster Gateway resident in that cluster.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT BCOUT.ARWSTS SECDATAIN SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
BCOUT.EUHI BCOUT.EULO SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
BCOUT.HISELECT BCOUT.INITREQ SECDATAIN.HISELECT
BCOUT.INITSTS BCOUT.INITVAL SECDATAIN.INITREQ
BCOUT.LOCALMAN BCOUT.ONESHOT SECDATAIN.INITSTS
BCOUT.ORFBSTS BCOUT.ORFBVAL SECDATAIN.INITVAL
BCOUT.OROFFSET SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
BCOUT.PROPOVRD BLCKCOMMENT1 SECDATAIN.ONESHOT
BLCKCOMMENT2 BLCKCOMMENT3 SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
BLCKCOMMENT4 NAME ORDERINCM SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SPOUT
SPOUTSTS SPPIN USERSYMNAME
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theoryfor more information on the REEOUT
Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.11.16 REGCALC (Regulatory Control Calculator) block
Description l Lets you write up to eight expressions for creating custom algorithms for
Calculated Variable (CV) calculations.
l Provides an interface to windup, initialization and override feedback processing,
so you can add user-defined control blocks to your control strategies.
Function l Each expression can contain any valid combination of inputs, operators and
functions; and may perform arithmetic or logic operations.
l You can write expressions for calculating CV under normal, initialization and
override feedback conditions. Or, you can write expressions which produce
initialization and override feedback values for this block and its primaries.
l You can assign the result of an expression or an input to any assignable output
that produces the same outputs as every other regulatory control block. You can
assign the same input to multiple outputs.
l With R410, REGCALC block allows you to configure individual values for the
deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual
alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to
configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only identical
deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade mode, this block performs timeout monitoring on X[1]. If the X[1] input value
Monitoring is not updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout
processing.
l Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL)
l Sets the input value to Bad (NaN).
l Requests the X1 primary to initialize.
This block does not support mode shedding on timeout. Time-out monitoring is
enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by setting it to zero.
Control Block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC. In addition,
Initialization the secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block. However,
you can disable the SECINITOPT so the block ignores initialization requests from the
secondary. If the secondary is requesting initialization, block:
l Initializes its output:
l CV = CVINIT (assignable output)
l Builds an initialization request for the designated primaries, using INITREQ and
INITVAL (both assignable outputs).
Override If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector (OVRDSEL)
Feedback block, it receives override feedback data. The data consists of an override status,
Processing override feedback value and an override offset flag. The status indicates if this block is
in the selected or unselected strategy. The offset flag only applies to PID type function
blocks. However, you can disable the SECINITOPT so the block ignores override
requests from the secondary. When override status changes from selected to
unselected, this block:
l Initializes its output:
l CV = CVORFB (assignable output)
l Computes a feedback value for X1 input:
l feedback value for X1 = ORFBVAL (assignable output)
l feedback status for X1 = ORFBSTS (assignable output)
If ORFBVAL and ORFBSTS are not assigned and this block has a secondary, the
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
ORFBVAL and ORFBSTS received from the secondary are used to compute
ORFBVAL for the primary.
Inputs The REGCALC block can function without any inputs. The following inputs are
optional and they only accept real data types.
l X[1] - An initializable input that must come from another block, an operator can
not set it.
l X[2] through X[6] general purpose inputs.
l XWHIFL - An external windup high flag.
l XWLOFL - An external windup low flag.
Input XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of X[1] input in engineering units. This block
Ranges applies no range checking, since it assumes that X1 is within XEUHI and XEULO. If
this function is required, you must write an expression for it.
l XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter
(OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has
Ranges a secondary, it uses the secondary's input range through BACKCALC to set its CV
range. If it does not have a secondary, you must define the range through CVEUHI
and CVEULO.
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of
the CV range (user-specified values).
l OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds
them or another block or user program attempts to store OP value
exceeding them.
l Operator may store OP value outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a
percent of the CV range (user-specified values).
l Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these
limits.
Assignable You can assign expression results and/or inputs to the following outputs.
Outputs l CV - This block's CV under normal operating conditions.
l CVINIT - This block's CV during initialization.
l CVORFB - This block's CV during override (in unselected path).
l INITREQ - Initialization request flag, to be provided to the primary.
l INITVAL - Initialization value, to be provided to the primary.
l ORFBVAL - Override feedback value, to be provided to the primary.
l ORFBSTS - Override feedback status, to be provided to the primary.
Operators Table 3 lists the expression operators and functions supported by this block for
and reference.
Functions
Parameter You must specify a parameter by its full tag name. For example,
Identification “CM25.PumpASelect.PVFL”, or “CM57.PID100.MODE”. In effect, tag names allow
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l TagName.‘text’
Expression l Must include full tag.parameter name for X inputs in the expression and enclose
Rules identification number in brackets instead of parenthesizes. For example,
CM151.REGCALC BLOCK.X[1] * CM151.REGCALC BLOCK.X[2] is valid.
l Expressions cannot contain an assignment operation (a colon and equal sign
with the current syntax) For example, “CM1.PID1.MODE:=X[1]“ is invalid. Each
expression produces a single value (arithmetic or logical which is automatically
stored in a “C” parameter. For example, if you write four expressions, the result of
the first expression is stored in C[1], the result of the second is stored in C[2], etc.
You can use these results, by name, in succeeding expressions. In this example,
you could use C[1] as an input to expressions 2, 3, and 4.
l You can mix and nest all operators and functions (including conditional
assignments) in any order as long as value types match or can be converted.
l You can use blanks between operators and parameter names, but they are not
required.
l You can use all data types in expressions, including enumerations. They are all
treated as numeric types.
l You must configure calculator expressions contiguously (without breaks) in the
arrays.
l A short description can be provided for the expressions using the expression
descriptor parameter (EXPRDESC[1..8]). The results of the expressions, which
use the CONST[1…8] parameters, are affected if you change the values of these
parameters on the Constants tab.
l With R410, non-CEE controllers such as PMD and Safety Manager, and
Experion server points such as TPS and SCADA, can be configured in the
Expressions.
l With R410, when you write the expressions using the TPS point's parameter
references, ensure that the TPS reference parameter is configured using the
parentheses “()”to specify array index. However, when you write the expressions
using the other non-CEE points you can use the brackets “[].”
Parameters ALMDB ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET MODETRACK NAME NORMMODE
[1..8] ARWOP ASTEPID NORMMODEATTR NUMINSERT NUMPRI
BADCTLALM.FL BADCTLALM.PR NUMSEC OP OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX
BADCTLALM.SV BADCTLALM.TM OPBIAS.FLOAT OPBIAS.RATE OPEU
BADCTLALM.TMO BADCTLFL OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL
BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPEXLOLM OPHIALM.DB OPHIALM.DBU
BADOCOPTENB C[1..8] CASREQFL OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR OPHIALM.SV
COMPUTEARW CONFIGCODE OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO OPHIALM.TP
CONFIGDESC CONFIGSTS CONST OPHIFL OPHILM OPLOALM.DB
[1…8] CONSTACCLOCK OPLOALM.DBU OPLOALM.FL
CONSTENABLE CSTS[1..8] CTLINIT OPLOALM.PR OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM
CTLSTATE CV CVEUHI CVEULO OPLOALM.TMO OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL
CVINIT CVINITSRC CVORFB OPLOLM OPMINCHG OPREQ OPROCLM
CVORFBSRC CVSRC CVTYPE DESC OPROCNEGFL OPROCPOSFL OPTYPE
ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO ESWFL.BCAS ORDERINCM ORFBSTSSRC
ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM ORFBVALSRC OUTIND OUTTYPE PRIM.
EUDESC EXECCODE[1..8] EXECDESC [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
[1..8] EXECSTS[1..8] EXPR[1..8] [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.
EXPRDESC[1…8] FBORSTS [1..8].ORFBSTS PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
FORCEMODEATTR GAINHILM PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
GAINLOLM HIALM.PR HIALM.SV [1..8].PROPOVRD REDTAG RESTARTOPT
HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT HOLDRATE SAFEOP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN INITREQ SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
[1..8] INITREQSRC INITVAL[1..8] SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INITVALSRC INSBLOCK[1..10] SECDATAIN.INITSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL K SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
LASTMODEREQ LASTOPREQ SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODE MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT
MODEATTRFL.NORM [1..8] SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR
MODEATTRFL.OPER SIALM.SV SIFL SIOPT STARTOPT
MODEATTRFL.PROG STARTRATE STARTVAL STOPOPT
MODEATTRMASK MODECHANGE STOPRATE STOPVAL TMOUTFL
MODEFL.AUTO MODEFL.BCAS TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME
MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN UNCMDCHGALM.FL
MODEFL.NORM MODEMASK UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
MODEPERM MODEREQ UNCMDCHGALM.PR UNCMDCHGALM.SV
MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.CAS X[1..6] XB[1..6] XEUHI XEULO XK[1..6] XKB
MODESEL.MAN MODESEL.PROGRAM [1..6] XSTS[1..6] XWHIFL XWLOFL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the REGCALC
Block.
3.11.17 REGSUMMER (Regulatory Control Summer)
Description Lets you calculate an output value which is the sum of up to four input values.
Function The RegSummer algorithm calculates an output value which is the sum of up to four
inputs. Each of the inputs may be individually scaled. In addition, the output may be
scaled by an overall gain, and an overall bias may be added to the result. With R410,
REGSUMMER block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new
parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay
time. However, you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout If MODE = Cascade, RegSummer performs timeout monitoring on the initializable input
Monitoring X(1). If X(1) is not updated within a predefined time, the block invokes timeout
processing. For RegSummer in case of X1 timeout, X2 to X4 still fetch the values from
the upstream blocks. The timeout time (in seconds) is specified by TMOUTTIME. Time-
out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Timeout If MODE is Cascade and X(1) times out, this block does the following:
Processing l Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL)
l Sets the input value to Bad (NaN)
l Requests the X(1) primary to initialize
This block does not support mode shedding on timeout.
Inputs The RegSummer block accepts up to four inputs -- X(1) through X(4). X(1) is an
initializable input; all others are non-initializable. This X[1] input can be connected to
non-initializable inputs also. In this case there is no primary for this block. The inputs
must be pulled from other function blocks; the user cannot store to them. This block has
one primary. (There is one primary per initializable input.) X[1] input connection is
mandatory. If X[1] is not connected and the block is loaded an error will be raised during
load time saying “At least input one needs to be connected“ NUMXINPT represents the
number of input connections that have been made to this block
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Input The user must specify an X-input engineering unit range, XEUHI and XEULO. XEUHI
Ranges and XEULO define the full range of the inputs. XEUHI is the value that represents 100%
and Limits of full scale, and XEULO is the value that represents 0%. XEUHI and XEULO apply to all
of the X-inputs. This block assumes all of the X-inputs are within XEUHI and XEULO; it
applies no range-checks.
Outputs The RegSummer block has the following initializable outputs: OP - Calculated output, in
percent. OPEU - Calculated output, in engineering units. The user may create a
connection to OP or OPEU, but not both. Therefore, this block may have only one
secondary. If the user does not create a connection to OP or OPEU, then the block does
not have a secondary. Alternately, if the user connects OP or OPEU to a non-
initializable input, then this block does not have a secondary
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV, in engineering units. If this block has
Ranges a secondary, it fetches the secondary's input range via BACKCALC and sets its CV
range to that. If it has no secondary, CVEUHI and CVEULO track the X-input range
(XEUHI and XEULO). Note: This block fetches the secondary's input range regardless of
SECINITOPT (i.e., regardless of whether the secondary's initialization and override data
will be used) OPHILM and OPLOLM define the normal high and low limits for OP, as a
percent of the CV range. These are user-specified values.OP will be clamped to these
limits if the algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds them, or another function block or
user program attempts to store an OP value that exceeds them. However, the operator
may store an OP value that is outside these limits. OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define
the extended high and low limits for OP, as a percent of the CV range. These are user-
specified values. The operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds
these limits. OPTOL allow the user to configure a tolerance limit for the manually
entered OP. If the difference betweenthe new OP value and the current OP value is
greater than OPTOL then confirmation is required from the user to store the new value.
Equation CV is calculated as follows: For 2 to 4 inputs: CV = K * [XK(1) * X(1) + XK(2) * X(2) + XK
Options (3) * X(3) + XK(4) * X(4)] + OPBIAS For one input: CV = K * X1 + B where: CV = Current
full value of the output of this algorithm in engineering units K = Overall gain for CV XK
(1..4) = Individual gain for each input OPBIAS = total output bias (i.e., OPBIAS.FIX +
OPBIAS.FLOAT) X(1..4) = Current full values of each X-input in use.
Parameters ALMDB ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET[1..8] OPHIALM.DB OPHIALM.DBU OPHIALM.FL
ARWNETIN[1..8] ARWOP ARWOPIN OPHIALM.PR OPHIALM.SV OPHIALM.TM
ASTEPID BADCTLALM.FL OPHIALM.TMO OPHIALM.TP OPHIFL
BADCTLALM.PR BADCTLALM.SV OPHILM OPLOALM.DB OPLOALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.TM BADCTLALM.TMO OPLOALM.FL OPLOALM.PR
BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM
BADOCOPTENB BLCKCOMMENT1 OPLOALM.TMO OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL
BLCKCOMMENT2 BLCKCOMMENT3 OPLOLM OPMINCHG OPREQ OPROCLM
BLCKCOMMENT4 COMPUTEARW OPROCNEGFL OPROCPOSFL OPTOL
CTLINIT CTLSTATE CV CVEUHI CVEULO OPTYPE ORDERINCM OUTIND OUTTYPE
CVTYPE DESC ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO PRIMDATA.[1..8].ARWSTS PRIMDATA.
ESWFL.BCAS ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN [1..8]. EUHI PRIMDATA.[1..8]. EULO
ESWPERM EUDESC FBORSTS PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.
FORCEMODEATTR GAINHILM [1..8].INITSTS PRIMDATA.[1..8].INITVAL
GAINLOLM HIALM.PR HIALM.SV PRIMDATA.[1..8].LOCALMAN PRIMDATA.
HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT HOLDRATE [1..8].ORFBSTS PRIMDATA.
HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN INITREQ[1..8] [1..8].ORFBVAL PRIMDATA.
INITVAL[1..8] INSBLOCK[1..10] [1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
INSERTSTS[1..10] INSFAILFL INSTYPE [1..8].PROPOVRD REDTAG RESTARTOPT
[1..10] K LASTMODEREQ LASTOPREQ SAFEOP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
MODE MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SECDATAIN.HISELECT
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.INITSTS
MODEATTRFL.OPER SECDATAIN.INITVAL
MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
MODECHANGE MODEFL.AUTO SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
MODEFL.BCAS MODEFL.CAS SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODEFL.MAN MODEFL.NORM SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEMASK MODEPERM MODEREQ SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT
MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.CAS [1..8] SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR
MODESEL.MAN MODESEL.PROGRAM SIALM.SV SIFL SIOPT STARTOPT
MODETRACK NAME NORMMODE STARTRATE STARTVAL STOPOPT
NORMMODEATTR NUMINSERT NUMPRI STOPRATE STOPVAL TMOUTFL
NUMSEC OP OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME
OPBIAS.FLOAT OPBIAS.RATE OPEU UNCMDCHGALM.FL
OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
OPEXLOLM UNCMDCHGALM.PR
UNCMDCHGALM.SV X[1..4] XDESC[1..4]
XEUHI XEULO XK[1..4] XSTS[1..6]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
REGSUMMER Block..
3.11.18 REMCAS block
Description Receives two inputs (X1 and X2), - X1 comes from a remote cascade source and X2
comes from a backup cascade - performs timeout monitoring on both inputs, and
normally operates in Cascade mode.
Function Provides automatic switching between a remote and backup cascade - typically used
with PID block that normally gets its set point from a remote source, but sheds to a local
source if there is a communications failure. With R410, REMCAS block allows you to
configure individual values for the deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-
delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for
individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only
identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade or backup cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on both inputs (X1
Monitoring and X2). If either input value is not updated within a predefined time, this block invokes
the following timeout processing. (Note that this block does not support the timeout
shed mode parameter TMOUTMODE.)
l If X1 times out, but X2 is good, block
l Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL).
l Sets MODE to backup cascade.
l Sets the currently selected input (SELXINP) to X2.
l Requests the X1 primary to initialize.
l If X2 times out, but X1 is good, block
l Requests the X2 primary to initialize. Since mode is cascade and X1 is
already the currently selected input.
l If both inputs timeout, block
l Sets CV to NaN, which forces a “Bad Control” condition. The user
specifies what actions to take on Bad Control through the
BADCTLOPT.
l Sets the currently selected input (SELXINP) to None.
l Requests both primaries to initialize.
If X1 times out and the block sheds to Backup Cascade mode, block sets the Cascade
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Request flag (CASREQFL). When CASREQFL is set, it means the block is waiting to
return to the cascade mode, and will do so as soon as it brings a good X1 value. Time-
out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Control Block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC. In addition,
Initialization the secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block. However,
SECINITOPT[1..8] may be used to ignore initialization requests from this secondary. If
the secondary is requesting initialization, block:
l Initializes its output:
l CV = initialization value from the secondary
l Builds an initialization request for X1 primary as:
l INITREQ[1] = ON
l INITVAL[[1] = CV - OPBIAS.FIX
l Builds an initialization request for X2 primary as:
l INITREQ[2] = ON
l INITVAL[2] = CV - OPBIAS.FIX
Override If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector block, it
Feedback receives override feedback data. The data consists of an override status, override
Processing feedback value and an override offset flag. The status indicates if this block is in the
selected or unselected strategy. The offset flag only applies to PID type function blocks.
However, SECINITOPT[1..8] may be used to ignore override requests from the
secondary. When override status changes from selected to unselected, this block:
l Computes a feedback value for the selected primary.
l The selected primary feedback value = BACKCALCOUT.ORFBVAL -
OPBIAS.FIX - OPBIAS.FLOAT.
l The non-selected primary is propagated with“non-connected” status.
The Selected input of the REMCAS block gets the propagated ORFBSTS status of
either ‘Selected or Not-Selected’ from the Override Selector secondary while the
unselected primary of the REMCAS block always gets non-connected status for
Override Feedback status by the REMCAS block, regardless of whether TRACKING is
On or Off.
Inputs l X1 = initializable input from a remote source.
l X2 = initializable input from backup cascade.
l You can configure a description of up to 15 characters for each input.
Input l XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of inputs.
Ranges l XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units.
Ranges l OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of
the CV range (user-specified values).
l OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds
them or another block or user program attempts to store OP value
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
exceeding them.
l Operator may store OP value outside these limits.
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a
percent of the CV range (user-specified values).
l Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these
limits.
Parameters ALMDB ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX OPBIAS.FLOAT
[1..8] ARWOP ASTEPID OPBIAS.RATE OPEU OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM
BADCTLALM.FL BADCTLALM.PR OPEXLOFL OPEXLOLM OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.SV BADCTLALM.TM OPHIALM.DBU OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR
BADCTLALM.TMO BADCTLFL OPHIALM.SV OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO
BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPHIALM.TP OPHIFL OPHILM OPLOALM.DB
BADOCOPTENB CASREQFL OPLOALM.DBU OPLOALM.FL OPLOALM.PR
COMPUTEARW CTLINIT CTLSTATE OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM OPLOALM.TMO
CV CVEUHI CVEULO CVTYPE OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL OPLOLM OPMINCHG
DESC ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO OPREQ OPROCLM OPROCNEGFL
ESWFL.BCAS ESWFL.CAS OPROCPOSFL OPTYPE ORDERINCM OUTIND
ESWFL.MAN ESWPERM EUDESC OUTTYPE PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
FBORSTS HIALM.PR HIALM.SV PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.
HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT [1..8].ORFBSTS PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
HOLDRATE HOLDVAL INALM PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
INITMAN INITREQ[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] [1..8].PROPOVRD REDTAG RESTARTOPT
INSBLOCK[1..10] INSFAILALM.FL SAFEOP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
INSFAILALM.PR INSFAILALM.SV SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
INSFAILFL LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.HISELECT SECDATAIN.INITSTS
LASTOPREQ LASTOPTYPE SECDATAIN.INITVAL SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
LASTREQFL LASTSTEP MODE SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT[1..8]
MODEATTRFL.OPER SELXDESC SELXINP SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT
MODEATTRFL.PROG SIALM.PR SIALM.SV SIFL SIOPT STARTOPT
MODECHANGE MODEFL.AUTO STARTRATE STARTVAL STOPOPT STOPRATE
MODEFL.BCAS MODEFL.CAS STOPVAL TMOUTFL TMOUTTIME TRACKING
MODEFL.MAN MODEFL.NORM UNCMDCHGALM.FL UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
MODEPERM MODEREQ UNCMDCHGALM.PR UNCMDCHGALM.SV X1
MODETRACK NAME NORMMODE X2 XDESC[1..2] XEUHI XEULO
NORMMODEATTR NUMINSERT
NUMPRI NUMSEC OP
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the REMCAS
Block.
3.11.19 SWITCH block
Description Accepts up to 8 initializable inputs (that is, primaries) and operates as a single-pole, 8-
position rotary switch.
l An Operator, user program or another block may change switch position.
Function Typically used to assign different primary to a secondary; allows user to select one from
as many as 8 inputs and outputs the selected value. With R410, SWITCH block allows
you to configure individual values for the deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and
off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced
for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However, you can configure only
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on all inputs X[1] through X[8]. If an
Monitoring input value is not updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the following
timeout processing.
l Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL).
l Sets the input value to Bad (NaN).
l Requests the input's primary to initialize.
This block does not support mode shedding on timeout. Time-out monitoring is
enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by setting it to zero.
Control Block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC. In addition,
Initialization the secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block. However,
SECINITOPT[1..8] may be used to ignore initialization requests from this secondary. If
the secondary is requesting initialization, block:
l Initializes its output:
l CV = initialization value from the secondary
l Builds an initialization request for selected primary as:
l INITREQ(s) = ON
l INITVAL(s) = CV - OPBIAS.FIX
l If TRACKING is ON, block also builds an initialization request for the non-selected
primaries as:
l INITREQ(n) = ON
l INITVAL(n) = CV - OPBIAS.FIX
Override If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector block, it
Feedback receives override feedback data. The data consists of an override status, override
Processing feedback value and an override offset flag. The status indicates if this block is in the
selected or unselected strategy. The offset flag only applies to PID type function blocks.
However, SECINITOPT[1..8] may be used to ignore override requests from the
secondary. When override status changes from selected to unselected, this block:
l Computes a feedback value for the selected primary.
l The selected primary feedback value = BACKCALCOUT.ORFBVAL -
OPBIAS.FIX - OPBIAS.FLOAT
l The non-selected primaries are propagated with “not selected” status.
The Selected input of the SWITCH block gets the propagated ORFBSTS status of
either ‘Selected or Not-Selected’ from the Override Selector secondary while the
unselected primary of the SWITCH always gets non-connected status for Override
Feedback status by the Switch block, regardless of whether TRACKING is On or Off. If
this block and a primary are on the same node, this block propagates the override data
to the primary. If a primary is on a different node, this block stores the data in the
BACKCALC packet for that primary, which the primary brings on its next execution.
Inputs Accepts up to 8 initializable inputs -- X[1] through X[8].
l Inputs must be pulled from other blocks (cannot be stored).
l You can configure a description of up to 15 characters for each input.
l This block may have two to eight primaries, depending on the number of inputs
that are configured. (There is one primary per initializable input.)
Input User must specify an X-input engineering unit range XEUHIandXEULO which defines
Ranges and the full range of inputs (for all X-inputs).
Limits l XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
l XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Block provides its input range (XEUHI/XEULO) to the primaries through BACKCALC.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
The primaries use this for their output range (CVEUHI/CVEULO).
Outputs Block has the following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units.
l User may specify a fixed bias to be added to the output.
l Block calculates floating bias to provide bumpless transition after input
switching, initialization or mode change.
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the
implicit/hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status
parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Output l CVEUHI and CVEULO define full range of CV in engineering units. If block has no
Ranges secondary, CVEUHI and CVEULO track the “X” input range (XEUHI and XEULO).
l OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of
CV range (user-specified values).
l OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define extended high and low limits for OP as a
percent of CV range (user-specified).
l Prevents operator from storing an OP that exceeds these limits.
Parameters ALMDB ALMDBU ALMTM ARWNET[1..8] OPEU OPEXHIFL OPEXHILM OPEXLOFL
ARWOP ASTEPID BADCTLALM.FL OPEXLOLM OPHIALM.DB OPHIALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.PR BADCTLALM.SV OPHIALM.FL OPHIALM.PR OPHIALM.SV
BADCTLALM.TM BADCTLALM.TMO OPHIALM.TM OPHIALM.TMO OPHIALM.TP
BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT BADOCOPT OPHIFL OPHILM OPLOALM.DB
BADOCOPTENB BADINPTOPT[1..8] OPLOALM.DBU OPLOALM.FL
COMPUTEARW CTLEQN CTLINIT OPLOALM.PR OPLOALM.SV OPLOALM.TM
CTLSTATE CV CVEUHI CVEULO OPLOALM.TMO OPLOALM.TP OPLOFL
CVTYPE DESC ESWENB ESWFL.AUTO OPLOLM OPMINCHG OPREQ OPROCLM
ESWFL.BCAS ESWFL.CAS ESWFL.MAN OPROCNEGFL OPROCPOSFL OUTIND
ESWPERM EUDESC FBORSTS OPTYPE ORDERINCM OUTTYPE PRIM.
FORCEMODEATTR HIALM.PR [1..8].INITIALIZABLE PRIMDATA.
HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE HOLDOPT [1..8].HISELECT PRIMDATA.
HOLDRATE HOLDVAL INALM INITMAN [1..8].ORFBSTS PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
INITREQ[1..8] INITVAL[1..8] INSBLOCK PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET PRIMDATA.
[1..10] INSFAILALM.FL INSFAILALM.PR [1..8].PROPOVRD REDTAG RESTARTOPT
INSFAILALM.SV INSFAILFL SAFEOP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
LASTMODEREQ LASTOPREQ SECDATAIN.EUHI SECDATAIN.EULO
LASTOPTYPE LASTREQFL LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.HISELECT
MODE MODEAPPL[1..4] MODEATTR SECDATAIN.INITSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
MODEATTRFL.OPER SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
MODEATTRFL.PROG MODEATTRMASK SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODECHANGE MODEFL.AUTO SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEFL.BCAS MODEFL.CAS SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD SECINITOPT
MODEFL.MAN MODEFL.NORM [1..8] SELXDESC SELXFL[1..8] SELXINP
MODEMASK MODEPERM MODEREQ SIALM.FL SIALM.OPT SIALM.PR SIALM.SV
MODESEL.ALL MODESEL.CAS SIFL SIOPT STARTOPT STARTRATE
MODESEL.MAN MODESEL.PROGRAM STARTVAL STOPOPT STOPRATE
MODETRACK NAME NORMMODE STOPVAL TMOUTFL TMOUTTIME
NORMMODEATTR NUMINSERT TRACKING UNCMDCHGALM.FL
NUMPRI NUMSEC OP OPBIAS UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
OPBIAS.FIX OPBIAS.FLOAT UNCMDCHGALM.PR UNCMDCHGALM.SV
OPBIAS.RATE X[1..8] XDESC[1..8] XEUHI XEULO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SWITCH
Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.12 Sequential Control Module Blocks
3.12.1 HANDLER Block
Description SCM HANDLER blocks are execution modules that group STEP and TRANSITION
blocks.
l Multiple Handler blocks may be contained within an SCM block, each modeled as
a set of STEP and TRANSITION blocks, based on the following categories:
l Edit Handler
l Main Handler
l Check Handler
l Interrupt Handler
l Restart Handler
l Hold Handler
l Stop Handler
l Abort Handler
l Choices of which HANDLER block of each category to invoke are manifested
through a HANDLER block selection list on the SCM block.
l A HANDLER block is invoked when
l its invoke conditions, modeled in its Invoke TRANSITION block, are met
l when the SCM block is commanded to invoke the Handler (for example,
the STOP command causes the STOP Handler to execute).
Function Used to describe, group, and categorize sequential control behavior.
Parameters lt;CONFIGCODE CONFIGDESC CONFIGSTS INVOKT.HANDLE NAME NUM
DESC EXECCODE EXECDESC EXECSTS ORDERINCM PROCESSED STATE
HANDLER TYPE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Sequential Control Module User Guide for more information on the
HANDLER Block.
3.12.2 STEP Block
Description An SCM block which defines specific output actions.
l A specified output action usually generates a request to a control device to do
something (for example, open a valve, start a pump, set furnace temperature).
l The source value of each output can be an expression (thereby enabling
calculations in each output).
Function Organizes the output expressions of an SCM HANDLER block at a specific stage of the
HANDLER's execution thread.
Outputs l Up to 16 outputs may be defined per SCM STEP block.
l The STEP block whose outputs are active is called the Active Step.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Expressions You enter desired output expressions into the Step output configuration form. You
compose an output expression to include a target store destination for a source value
and a source expression that generates the value to be stored. (For example,
cm1.pid1.sp := cm2.pid2.op + 50.0.) Source expressions can evaluate to a Boolean
value using a combination of arithmetic and logical operators, to an arithmetic value
using arithmetic operators, or may simply specify any scalar value (Floating Point,
Boolean, Enumeration) for comparison in a logical expression or as a value to be
stored to the target store destination. Parameters of other blocks can be referenced as
long as the block is already defined in the system database. Note that :
l String data types are supported.
l Enumerations and Boolean are supported, but values must be entered as
integers. For example:
l cm1.flag1.pvfl := 1 (PVFL is turned ON)
l With R410, non-CEE controllers such as PMD and Safety Manager, and Experion
server points such as TPS and SCADA, can be configured in the Expressions.
l With R410, when you write the expressions using the TPS point's parameter
references, ensure that the TPS reference parameter is configured using the
parentheses “()”to specify array index. However, when you write the expressions
using the other non-CEE points you can use the brackets “[].”
Operators Table 3 lists the expression operators and functions supported by this block for
and reference.
Functions
Parameters ACTIVEFL ACTVTNTIME NUMOUTPUTS OP[1..16].CONFIGCODE OP
CONFIGCODE CONFIGDESC [1..16].CONFIGDESC OP[1..16].CONFIGSTS
CONFIGSTS DESC EUDESC OP[1..16].DELAYTIME OP
EXECCODE EXECDESC EXECSTS [1..16].DELAYTIMEREM OP[1..16].DESC OP
HANDLER IC.BYPPERM IC.BYPREQ [1..16].EXECCODE OP[1..16].EXECDESC OP
IC.CONFIGCODE IC.CONFIGDESC [1..16].EXECSTS OP[1..16].SRCEXPR OP
IC.CONFIGSTS IC.DESC [1..16].STATE OP[1..16].TYPE ORDERINCM
IC.EXECCODE IC.EXECDESC PROCESSED SC.BYPPERM SC.BYPREQ
IC.EXECSTS IC.EXPR IC.FL SC.CONFIGCODE SC.CONFIGDESC
IC.INVOKFL IC.OPT ID MAXTIME SC.CONFIGSTS SC.DESC SC.EXECCODE
MAXTIMEFL MINTIME NAME SC.EXECDESC SC.EXECSTS SC.EXPR SC.FL
NEXTCOMP[1..15] NEXTHANDLE SC.INVOKFL SC.OPT STATE TIME
[1..15] NEXTNUMBER NUM UPDRESOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Sequential Control Module User Guide for more information on the STEP
Block.
3.12.3 SYNC Block
Description The SYNC block lets you configure SCMs to have steps and transitions executing in
parallel. The sync block will synchronize the start and finish of a parallel section.
Function Waits until all preceding steps and transitions have completed before moving on the
next threads. You can use SYNC blocks to be sure, that at a certain point in time, all
previous threads are synchronized before proceeding to the next set of steps and
transitions. You can also use them to start the next set of parallel steps and
transitions.
Inputs/Outputs Sync blocks can have any combination of up to fifteen inputs and fifteen outputs
(either step or transition blocks).
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters CONFIGCODE CONFIGDESC NEXTCOMP[1..15] NEXTHANDLE[1..15]
CONFIGSTS DESC EPREV EUDESC NEXTNUMBER NUMORDERINCM
EXECCODE EXECDESC EXECSTS PROCESSED STATE
HANDLER
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Sequential Control Module User Guide for more information on the
STEP Block.
NOTE
SYNC block cannot have the same type of block such as STEP, TRANSITION and Recipe Step
preceding it and succeeding it immediately.
3.12.4 TRANSITION Block
Description A Sequential control block supports to define specific input conditions for a handler.
l Input conditions and conjoining TRANSITION blocks define a distinct process
state that must be achieved in order for the output actions specified by the next
STEP block to be performed.
l The input conditions grouped into a TRANSITION block are the condition
expressions that direct sequential execution flow.
Nesting of Transitions may be required when a single Transition cannot accommodate
all inputs in required in a logical expression. Transition is considered Free Standing
when the input pin, DESC, and the Output pin, NEXTCOMP, are not connected to any
other sequential control component block. For more information on Nesting Transition,
see Sequential Control User's Guide.
Function Defines the distinct process state that must be achieved in order to allow the SCM
HANDLER to advance to the control step (that is, the STEP block) so that it can perform
the output actions specified.
Input l A maximum of 16 standard input conditions are supported per TRANSITION
Conditions block.
l The Invoke TRANSITION block in the MAIN HANDLER of the SCM block provides
the Start Conditions for the SCM.
l Logic gates may be AND, OR, NAND, NOR, NOT, XOR, CONNECT, NONE, OFF,
or ON.
l XOR must have two inputs.
l CONNECT and NOT have only one input -- the output is the same as
the input and the output is the logical negation of the input,
respectively.
l NONE, ON, and OFF have no inputs.
Expressions You enter desired condition expressions into the transition condition configuration form.
Condition expressions can evaluate to a Boolean value using a combination of
arithmetic and logical operators (for example, cm1.pid1.sp + cm2.pid2.op >= 50.0).
Parameters of other blocks can be referenced as long as the block is already defined in
the system database. Note that:
l String data types are not supported.
l Enumerations and Boolean are supported, but values must be entered as
integers. For example:
l cm2.pid1.mode = 2 (Mode is compared to Cascade)
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Operators Table 3 lists the expression operators and functions supported by this block for
and reference.
Functions
Parameters C[1..16].BYPPERM C[1..16].BYPREQ C CONFIGSTS DESC EUDESC
[1..16].CONFIGCODE C[1..16].CONFIGDESC EXECCODE EXECDESC EXECSTS G
C[1..16].CONFIGSTS C[1..16].DESC C [1..4].ALGID G[1..4].FIRSTCOND G
[1..16].EXECCODE C[1..16].EXECDESC C [1..4].NUMINPTS G[1..4].SO
[1..16].EXECSTS C[1..16].EXPR C[1..16].FL C HANDLER NEXTCOMP
[1..16].GATEASGN C[1..16].INVOKFL C1 NEXTHANDLE NAME NUM
CONFIGCODE CONFIGDESC NUMCONDS ORDERINCM
PROCESSED SO STATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Sequential Control Module User Guide for more information on the
TRANSITION Block.
3.13 System Blocks
3.13.1 CONTROL MODULE block (Continuous Control)
Description One of two system container blocks supported by CEE. It holds continuous and discrete
function blocks.
Function Configurable building block for defining control strategies. Lets you encapsulate
strategies according to function. It provides these basic services for configured blocks:
l Serves as the unit of load for continuous and discrete control strategies.
l Transfers data between passive parameters that have no associated active
connector.
l Executes component function blocks in an established order, which is
configurable or arbitrarily determined by the CM.
l Provides independent tag names component blocks their parameters.
l Serves the execution master for continuous and discrete control strategies.
vInputs Input parameters for component blocks that connect to other CMs and SCMs.
Outputs Output parameters for component blocks that connect to other CMs and SCMs.
Parameters ALIASOPT ALMENBSTATE BPS ORDERINLINK PHASE PRIMARYSIG
BPSDELAY BPSDELAYREM QUALSTATE REASONSET
CBBLOCKPROP CEESTATE PREVLOADSTAT SCALEPERIOD
CONTCUTOUT CTRLCONFIRM DESC SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
ESTWEIGHT EUDESC EXECSTATE SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
FFPERIOD PERIOD PERIODSEC INALM SCMASTEP SCMID SCMNAME
INSERTINDEX IOSCHEDOPT SCMOPT SCMSTATE SCRIPTOR
JOURNALONLY KEYWORD LOADSTATE SECONDARYSIG SECSIGSECLVL
LOGICINITOPT NAME NUMSIGS STALECOUNT UNITTEXT VERSION
ORDERINCEE
Starting in Experion R311.1, the LOGICINITOPT parameter is added to the Control
Module's Main configuration form to govern how outputs of the Logic blocks FTRIG,
MAXPULSE, MINPULSE, MVOTE, nooN, OFFDELAY, ONDELAY, PULSE, RTRIG,
TRIG, and 2oo3 react when they go through state transitions of activate, cold start, warm
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
start, or RAM Retention Restart (RRR). Refer to the given Logic block description in the
Control Builder Components Theory for more information related to a given Logic block.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the Control
Module Block.
3.13.2 SEQUENTIAL CONTROL MODULE block (Sequential Control)
Description A system container block that consists of sequences of STEP and TRANSITION blocks
grouped by specific HANDLER blocks.
l The SCM block may only contain its own components (that is, HANDLER, STEP
and TRANSITION blocks); it cannot contain other basic blocks such as PID or logic
blocks.
Function Used to organize normal- and exception-based sequential control logic.
Parameters ABORTALM.FL ABORTALM.PR INVFRMHNDTYP[1..8] INVFROMSTEP
ABORTALM.SV ABORTLOCK [1..8][1..15] INVFROMSTEPN[1..8][1..15]
ACTIVEHANDLR[1..8] INVREASON[1..8] INVTHREAD[1..8]
ACTIVELOC.HANDLER INVTIME[1..8] KEYWORD LOADSTATE
ACTIVELOC.HANDLERN MODE MODEATTR NAME NORMMODE
ACTIVELOC.HNDTYPE ACTIVELOC.STEP NORMMODEATTR NUMALIASES
[1..15] ACTIVELOC.STEPN[1..15] NUMHISTPARMS NUMINSTANCES
ACTIVELOC.TIME[1..15] ALIASBLKTYP[ ] NUMRECPARMS NUMTHREADS
ALIASOPT ALIASPRMTYP[ ] NUMTRANS ORDERINCEE
ALMENBSTATE AUXCMD AUXOPT ORDERINCM PAUSEFL PERIOD PHASE
AUXREQ AUXREQDATA[1..5] AUXSTS PREVLOADSTAT RECDESC[1..50]
AUXUNIT CEESTATE CMDEXEC RECMATCODE[1..50] RECSCALE[1..50]
COMMAND CONFIGCODE CONFIGDESC RECTARGET[1..50] RECTARGETMAX
CONFIGSTS CONTROLLOCK DESC [1..50] RECTARGETMIN[1..50] RESADDR
ENBHANDLER[1..8] ESTWEIGHT EUDESC [1..15] RESADDRFUTRN[1..15]
EVALTRANS[1..15][1..10] EVALTRANSN RESADDRFUTUR[1..15] RESADDRN
[1..15][1..10] EXCMODEOPT EXECCODE [1..15] RSTPROCESSED
EXECDESC EXECSTATE EXECSTS SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
FAILALM.FL FAILALM.PR FAILALM.SV SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
HIALM HIALM.PR HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE SELHANDLER[1..8] SELHANDLERN[1..8]
HISTDESC HISTTYPE[1..50] HISTVALUE SSTEPLOCK STATE STEPALM.FL
[1..50] HOLDALM.FL HOLDALM.PR STEPALM.PR STEPALM.SV
HOLDALM.SV INALM INSERTINDEX STOPALM.FL STOPALM.PR
INSTSELECT INVCOND[1..8] STOPALM.SV TARGETSTEP[1..15] TIME
INVFRMHNDLER[1..8] INVFRMHNDLRN [1..8] UNITTEXT VERSION
[1..8]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Sequental Control Module User Guide for more information on the
Sequential Control Module Block.
3.13.3 Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block
Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
l Server and Client Overview Planning Guide
l Sequential Control User’s Guide
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.13.4 Unit Control Module (UCM) Block
Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
l Server and Client Overview Planning Guide
l Sequential Control User’s Guide
3.13.5 Master Recipe (MR) Block
Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
l Server and Client Overview Planning Guide
l Sequential Control User’s Guide
3.13.6 Proxy Master Recipe (MR) Block
Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
l Server and Client Overview Planning Guide
l Sequential Control User’s Guide
3.13.7 Proxy FTEB Block
Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
l Server and Client Overview Planning Guide
l Sequential Control User’s Guide
3.13.8 Proxy Node
Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
l Server and Client Overview Planning Guide
l Sequential Control User’s Guide
3.13.9 Proxy Sequential Control Module (SCM) Block
Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
l Server and Client Overview Planning Guide
l Sequential Control User’s Guide
3.13.10 Proxy Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block
Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Server and Client Overview Planning Guide
l Sequential Control User’s Guide
3.14 Thermodynamic Utility Function Block
3.14.1 STEAMPROP (Steam Property) block
Description In steam generators and utilities, thermodynamic efficiency is calculated to
optimize/maximize the efficiency of the plant operation. To calculate the thermodynamic
efficiency, you need the thermodynamic properties of steam/water such as entropy,
enthalpy, specific volume, and density for a given pressure, temperature and the state of
matter. The STEAMPROP function block accepts temperature/pressure as inputs from
measurement and provides entropy/enthalpy, and so on, as outputs. These values can
be used for efficiency calculation and optimal operation. reduction in efficiency can
additionally indicate the health degradation of the thermodynamic system or plant
equipment. This block supports the following units of measuring system.
l SI in kJ/kg degree K
l Metric in kcal/kg degree C
l English in Btu/lb degree F
You can use any one of them while configuring the inputs as applicable. The detailed
display of this block includes graphical representation of steam tables. For more
information about the graphical representation of the STEAMPROP block, refer to the
STEAMPROP block detail displays topic in the Control Building User's Guide.
Function Steam Property function block computes the thermodynamic quantities of water and
steam. The thermodynamic quantities of water and steam can be one of the following:
l Enthalpy (H)
l Entropy (S)
l Pressure (P)
l Temperature (T)
l Specific volume (V)
l Steam quality/dryness fraction (X)
This function block uses the equations quoted in Industrial Formulation 1997 (IF-97)
released by the International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam
(IAPWS). For more information about Industrial Formulation 1997 (IF-97), refer to the
http://www.iapws.org/. It uses different equations to compute the required output. For
example, in case of water, if the pressure and the temperature are the inputs to the block
then the following outputs can be computed.
l Enthalpy (H)
l Entropy (S)
l Specific volume (V)
Inputs Pressure (P) Temperature (T) Entropy (S) Steam quality/dryness fraction (X) For detailed
information about the supported input types, refer to the Control Builder Components
Theory.
Outputs Specific volume (V) Enthalpy (H) Entropy (S) Temperature (T) For detailed information
about the supported output types, refer to the Control Builder Components Theory.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 PRESSURE PRESSUREENGUNIT
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 PRESSUREIO SPECIFICVOLUME
DESC EUDESC ENGUNITSYSTEM SPECIFICVOLUMEENGUNIT
ENTHALPY ENTHALPYENGUNIT SPECIFICVOLUMEIO STEAM_WATER
ENTHALPYIO ENTROPY STEAMTYPE STEAMQUALITY
ENTROPYENGUNIT ENTROPYIO STEAMQUALITYIO TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATUREIO
TEMPERATUREENGUNIT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
STEAMPROP Block.
3.15 Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Block
3.15.1 UCNOUT block
Description Supports Setpoint Control (SPC), Direct Digital Control (DDC), Remote Setpoint
Control (RSP) and Direct Digital Control with Remote Setpoint (DDCRSP) remote
cascade types between the regulatory control function blocks included in an ACE
supervisory controller control strategy and the regulatory control points included in a
Process Manager controller.
NOTE The UCNOUT block requires an OPC gateway or a TPN Server to
communicate with the Process Manager controller.
Function l Provides configurable connections and compatible data mapping between
controllers.
l Translates secondary data (SECDATA) from Process Manager regulatory
control points to ACE controller compatible back calculation (BACKCALC)
data.
l Participates in Remote Cascade Request protocol for Process Manager
regulatory control point MODE changes.
l Forwards inputs from primary regulatory control blocks in ACE supervisory
controller to Process Manager regulatory control point.
Inputs/Outputs The remote cascade type (REMCASTYPE) selection determines which UCNOUT
block inputs/outputs to use through the Configure Block form in Control Builder.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT BCOUT.ARWSTS SECDATAIN SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
BCOUT.EUHI BCOUT.EULO SECDATAIN.CASREQ
BCOUT.INITREQ BCOUT.INITVAL SECDATAIN.CASSHED
BCOUT.ONESHOT BCOUT.ORFBSTS SECDATAIN.EULO
BCOUT.ORFBVAL BCOUT.OROFFSET SECDATAIN.EUSPAN100
CASSTS MODEOUT NAME OPIN OPOUT SECDATAIN.INITREQ
ORDERINCM REMCASTYPE RSPPIN SECDATAIN.INITVAL
SECDATAIN.SECTYPE SPOUT
SPPIN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
UCNOUT Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.15.2 EUCNOUT block
Description Supports Setpoint Control (SPC), Direct Digital Control (DDC), Remote Setpoint
Control (RSP) and Direct Digital Control with Remote Setpoint (DDCRSP) remote
cascade types between the regulatory control function blocks included in an
ACE/C300 supervisory controller control strategy and the regulatory control points
included in the Enhanced High-Performance Process Manager (EHPM) Controller.
NOTE The EUCNOUT block does not require an OPC gateway or a TPN
server to communicate with the EHPM.
Function l Provides configurable connections and compatible data mapping between
controllers.
l Translates secondary data (SECDATA) from the EHPM regulatory control
points to ACE/C300 controller compatible back calculation (BACKCALC) data.
l Participates in Remote Cascade Request protocol for the EHPM regulatory
control point MODE changes.
l Forwards inputs from primary regulatory control blocks in ACE/C300
supervisory controller to the EHPM regulatory control point.
Inputs/Outputs The remote cascade type (REMCASTYPE) selection determines which EUCNOUT
block inputs/outputs to be used through the Configure Block form in Control Builder.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT BCOUT.ARWSTS ORDERINCM REMCASTYPE RSPPIN
BCOUT.EUHI BCOUT.EULO SECDATAIN SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
BCOUT.INITREQ BCOUT.INITVAL SECDATAIN.CASREQ
BCOUT.ONESHOT SECDATAIN.CASSHED SECDATAIN.EULO
BCOUT.ORFBSTS BCOUT.ORFBVAL SECDATAIN.EUSPAN100
BCOUT.OROFFSET CASSTS SECDATAIN.INITREQ SECDATAIN.INITVAL
MODEOUT NAME OPIN OPOUT SECDATAIN.SECTYPE SPOUT SPPIN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the
EUCNOUT block.
3.16 Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Blocks
3.16.1 HIWAYOUT block
Description Supports Setpoint Control (SPC) and Direct Digital Control (DDC), remote cascade
types between the regulatory control function blocks included in an ACE supervisory
controller control strategy and the Data Hiway regulatory control points. It
participates in Remote Cascade Request protocol for Data Hiway point mode
changes.
Function l Provides configurable connections and compatible data mapping between
controllers.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Translates secondary data (SECDATA) from Data Hiway regulatory control
points to ACE controller compatible back calculation (BACKCALC) data.
l Participates in Remote Cascade Request protocol for Data Hiway regulatory
control point MODE changes.
l Forwards inputs it receives from the primary of a regulatory control function
block in the ACE controller to a Data Hiway regulatory control point.
Inputs/Outputs The remote cascade type (REMCASTYPE) selection determines which HIWAYOUT
block inputs/outputs to use through the Block Properties form in Control Builder.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT BCOUT.ARWSTS SECDATAIN SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
BCOUT.EUHI BCOUT.EULO SECDATAIN.CASREQ
BCOUT.INITREQ BCOUT.INITVAL SECDATAIN.CASSHED
BCOUT.ONESHOT BCOUT.ORFBSTS SECDATAIN.EULO
BCOUT.ORFBVAL BCOUT.OROFFSET SECDATAIN.EUSPAN100
CASSTS MODEOUT NAME OPIN OPOUT SECDATAIN.INITREQ
ORDERINCM REMCASTYPE SECDATAIN.INITVAL
SECDATAIN.SECTYPE SIMMODE
SPOUT SPPIN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
HIWAYOUT Block.
3.17 Hiway Responder Block (HRB)
Hiway Responder Blocks are special purpose communication blocks that support transfer of Hiway
messages between the C300 Controller and the LCN EHB.
HRB blocks are automatically instantiated in Control Modules when Hiway slot emulations are created
by the HSE Creator Tool. They are then imported into Experion engineering repository database using
Control Builder along with their parent Control Module.
The HRB blocks are classified into two major categories.
l Algorithm Hiway Responder Block: Acts as an interface between the CEE native blocks and the
EHB. HRB receives data from the EHB and transfers it to the CEE native blocks for processing. They
also read the processed data from the CEE and update the HG point.
o Regulatory Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_REG)
o Analog Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_AI)
o Digital Input Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_REG)
o Processor Interface Unit (PIU) Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_HLPIU)
o Processor Interface Unit (PIU) Algorithm Hiway Responder Blocks (HRBALG_PIUAI,
HRBALG_HLPIUAO, HRBALG_HLPIUAC, HRBALG_HLPIUDI, HRBALG_HLPIUDO,
HRBALG_HLPIUDC, HRBALG_HLPIUCO)
l Basic Controller Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_CB) and Extended Controller Box Hiway
Responder Block (HRBBOX_EC): Box HRB represents the HG box in Experion.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
ATTENTION
l HRBs are available in the Control Builder library, in the folder HIWAYRB.
l Most HRB parameters are automatically configured. They are initially defined by the HSE
Creator Tool and should not be modified thereafter unless it is necessary to change the
configuration of the emulation. If that is done, the change should be injected into the HG
point and points must be re-translated using the HSE Creator Tool. Leaving HRB
parameters in a consistent state is the responsibility of the user as this guideline is not
enforced by the system.
l Users should not modify parameters of native CEE blocks within the emulation from the
Experion view.
3.17.1 Basic Controller Hiway Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_
CB)
The Basic Controller (CB) Hiway Box HRB is intended to execute by itself within a Control Module. The
CM so formed acts as the Hiway Box Slot Emulation (HBSE) of the CB. This HRB performs the following
two functions.
l Make available for LCN access those Hiway parameters which characterize the CB box as a whole
such as the CB Status Word, CB the Alarm Word and the CB Sample Time Counter.
l Serve as a conduit for data communication between the EHB and the algorithm HRBs assigned to
the box emulation.
The following parameters are available in the HRBBOX_CB block.
l BOXNUM
l BOXTYPE
l CARDTYPE[1]
l EHBADDED
l EHBADDEDIP
l EHBTHIS
l EHBTHISIP
l EHBRMIP1
l EHBRMIP2
l HWYNUMTHIS
l HYNUMADDED
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
3.17.2 Extended Controller Hiway Box Hiway Responder Block
(HRBBOX_EC)
The Extended Controller (EC) Hiway Box HRB is intended to execute by itself within a Control Module.
The CM so formed acts as the Hiway Box Slot Emulation (HBSE) of the EC. This HRB performs the
following two functions.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Make available for LCN access those Hiway parameters which characterize the EC box.
l Serve as a conduit for data communication between the EHB and the algorithm HRBs assigned to
the box emulation.
The following parameters are available in the HRBBOX_EC block.
l BOXNUM
l BOXTYPE
l EHBADDED
l EHBADDEDIP
l EHBTHIS
l EHBTHISIP
l EHBRMIP1
l EHBRMIP2
l HWYNUMTHIS
l HYNUMADDED
l TOGDESC
l TOGINTERVALS
l TOGINTSEL
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
3.17.3 Analog Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_AI)
The Analog Input (AI) HRB is an algorithm HRB block which presents data of the CB AI emulation. It
transfers data between the native DATAACQ block and the Hiway Slot Memory (HSM).
The following parameters are available in the HRBALG_AI block.
l ALGOREGSTATE
l ALGOPROCSTATE
l BOXNUM
l BOXTYPE
l BOXCON
l DATAACQBLOCKID1
l HSWDESC
l HSWVALUE
l PATHBRKSTS
l SLOTNUM
l SLOTTYPE
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
3.17.4 Digital Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_DI)
The Digital Input (DI) HRB is an algorithm HRB block, which presents data of the EC DI emulation. The
EC DI HRB algorithm block acts as an interface between the native Experion blocks and EHB. The
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
native function blocks include, DI, DEVCTL, Logic OR, TRIG block, and the FLAG block.
The following parameters are available in the HRBALG_DI block.
l ALGOREGSTATE
l ALGOPROCSTATE
l BOXCON
l BOXNUM
l BOXTYPE
l DEVCTL
l NUMINPTS
l INPTDIR
l PATHBRKSTS
l SLOTNUM
l SLOTTYPE
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
3.17.5 Regulatory Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_REG)
The Regulatory Hiway Responder Block communicates with its associated Box HRB to connect the HG
point on the LCN with native blocks in a Control Module assigned to a CEEC300. It is specifically
designed to present data of regulatory CEE blocks to the HG regulatory point.
The following parameters are available in the Regulatory block:
l ALGOREGSTATE
l ALGOPROCSTATE
l ALGOTYPE
l AUTOMAN
l AUTOMAN2
l BOOLEANA, BOOLEANB, BOOLEANC
l BOXNUM
l BOXTYPE
l BOXCON
l DATAACQ1
l DATAACQ2
l DATAACQ3
l DEADTIME
l ENHREGCALC
l HSWDESC
l HSWVALUE
l INT32A, INT32B, INT32C
l LEADLAG
l MODEEM
l MODEPOLICING
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l MPVEM
l NUMERIC1, NUMERIC2
l OPEM
l OPTOAOCONN
l OVRDSEL2
l PTHBRKSTS
l PID
l PVEM
l RAMPSOAK
l RATIOEM
l REALA, REALB, REALC
l REGCALC
l REMCAS
l SLOTNUM
l SLOTTYPE
l STARTOPSEL
l SPEM
For more information about the parameters on the Native Block Reference tab, refer to Control Builder
Parameter Reference .
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
3.17.6 Processor Interface Unit Analog Input Algorithm Hiway
Responder Block (HRBALG_PIUAIA)
The PIU-AI algorithm block presents data of the PIU-AI emulation. This block is common for all the PIUs
(HLPIU/LLPIU/LEPIU). The respective box is selected from the Box Type parameter.
The following parameters are available in the HRBALG_PIUAIA block.
l ALFMT
l ALGOREGSTATE
l BOXNUM
l BOXTYPE
l PATHBRKSTS
l PIUSMOTH
l PVEM
l PVSOURCE
l SLOTNUM
l SUBSLOTNUM
l SLOTTYPE
l SCANFREQ
l SPEM
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.17.7 High Level Processor Interface Unit Analog Output Algorithm
Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_HLPIUAO)
The High Level Processor Interface Unit Analog Output (HLPIU-AO) HRB is an algorithm HRB block
which presents data of the HLPIU AO emulation. It transfers data between the native Automan / Numeric
block and the Hiway Slot Memory (HSM).
The following parameters are available in the HRBALG_HLPIUAO block.
l ALGOREGSTATE
l ALGOPROCSTATE
l BOXNUM
l BOXTYPE
l BOXCON
l DATAACQBLOCKID1
l HSWDESC
l HSWVALUE
l PATHBRKSTS
l SLOTNUM
l SLOTTYPE
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
3.17.8 High Level Processor Interface Unit Digital Input Algorithm
Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_HLPIUDI)
The High Level Processor Interface Unit Digital Input (HLPIU-DI) HRB is an algorithm HRB block which
presents data of the HLPIU DI emulation. It transfers data between the native Experion blocks and the
Hiway Slot Memory (HSM).
The HLPIU DI emulation contains the DIGACQ blocks.
The HLPIU Dual DI emulation contains the DEVCTL, DIGACQ, and OR blocks.
The following parameters are available in the HRBALG_HLPIUDI block.
l ALGOREGSTATE
l BOXNUM
l BOXTYPE
l BOXCON
l INPTDIR
l INPUTTYPE
l NUMINPUTS
l PATHBRKSTS
l SLOTNUM
l SUBSLOTNUM
l SLOTTYPE
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.17.9 High Level Processor Interface Unit Digital Output Algorithm
Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_HLPIUDO)
The High Level Processor Interface Unit Digital Output (HLPIU-DO) HRB is an algorithm HRB block
which presents data of the HLPIU DO emulation. It transfers data between the native Experion blocks
and the Hiway Slot Memory (HSM).
The HLPIU DO Latch algorithm emulation contains the FLAGARRAY and NOT blocks.
The HLPIU DO Pulse algorithm emulation contains the DEVCTL blocks.
The following parameters are available in the HRBALG_HLPIUDO block.
l ALGOREGSTATE
l BOXNUM
l BOXTYPE
l BOXCON
l NUMOUTPUTS
l OUTDIR
l OUTPUTTYPE
l PATHBRKSTS
l SLOTNUM
l SUBSLOTNUM
l SLOTTYPE
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
3.17.10 High Level Processor Interface Unit Counter Algorithm Hiway
Responder Block (HRBALG_HLPIUCO)
The High Level Processor Interface Unit Counter (HLPIU-CO) HRB is an algorithm HRB block which
presents data of the HLPIU Counter emulation. It transfers data between the native Experion blocks and
the Hiway Slot Memory (HSM).
The HLPIU CO 16-bit counter algorithm emulation contains the TOTALIZER, FLAGARRAY, OR, FLAG,
and LE blocks.
The HLPIU CO 32-bit counter algorithm emulation contains the GE, OR, PUSH, FLAG, and
STARTSIGNAL blocks.
NOTE
The 16–bit or the 32–bit counter selection is based on the COUNTERTYPE parameter. This
parameter can be configured as 16–bit or 32–bit, as required.
The following parameters are available in the HRBALG_HLPIUCO block.
l ALGOREGSTATE
l AV
l AVCONV
l BOXNUM
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l BOXTYPE
l COUNTERTYPE
l PATHBRKSTS
l SLOTNUM
l SLOTTYPE
l SP
l SUBSLOTNUM
NOTE
The AV, AVCONV, and SP parameters are not available for HLPIU CO 32-bit counter.
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
3.18 Utility Blocks
3.18.1 ALMWINDOW (Alarm Window - Alarm Annunciator) block
The ALMWINDOW block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE controllers.
Description The Alarm Window (ALMWINDOW) function block accepts boolean inputs (1 to 16) and
performs the configured sequence. It provides one Alarm output (ALMOUT) and group
status output (FLSHSTAT). (The FLASHSTAT is further connected by the user to the
Annunciator Panel function block during configuration) The alarm annunciator is
implemented as two blocks, one encapsulating the function of individual alarm group,
and one to control the lamp test, acknowledge, and reset functions.
Function l The Alarm Window function block accepts boolean inputs (1 to 16) and performs
the configured sequence. It provides one alarm output (ALMOUT) and group status
output (FLSHSTAT).
l It accepts multiple inputs (max 16) and provides system alarm in case of abnormal
input.
l ALMWINDOW block allows you to configure individual values for the on-delay time
and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is
introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
Inputs l ALMIN [1..16] - Boolean inputs whose transitions need to be monitored. The block
supports 16 inputs. By default, only four inputs are exposed.
l The NUMIN input parameter decides the number of alarm inputs that can be
connected to the block.
Outputs l FLSHSTAT - It takes the states, FASTFLASH, SLOWFLASH, LAMPSTEADY, and
LAMPOFF.
l ALMOUT - OR of all inputs the Alarm WIndow.
Parameters ALMIN[1..16] ALMOUT ALMSEQ INALM NAME NUMIN OFFNRMALM.FL
FLSHSTAT HIALM.PR HIALM.SV OFFNRMALM.PR OFFNRMALM.SV
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
HIALM.TYPE OFFNRMALM.TM OFFNRMALM.TMO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
ALMWINDOW Block.
3.18.2 ANNPANEL (Annunciator Panel - Alarm Annunciator) block
The ANNPANEL block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE controllers.
Description This Annunciator Panel function block accepts FLSHSTAT from the Alarm Window
function block and provides Lamp output for the annunciation windows with
synchronized lamp flash sequence and hooter annunciation. This block also accepts
the TEST input which forces the entire Lamp out to glow steady. This block establishes
a hidden connection with the Alarm window function block to pass the RESET and ACK
parameter values.
Function l Accepts multiple window block output (max 32) and provides lamp and hooter
outputs.
l The FLSHSTAT can take several states including FASTFLASH, SLOWFLASH,
LAMPSTEADY, and LAMPOFF.
l Enables an input to be wired as the operator acknowledge button.
l Enables an input to be wired as the operator RESET button.
l Enables an input to be wired as the operator lamp test button.
l Description is fetched from the preceding Alarm window block.
Be sure the Control Module containing the ANNPANEL block is configured for an
Execution Period of 100 milliseconds or faster. The flashing rate of the annunciator
panel only works as expected when the block is placed in a 100 millisecond or faster
CM.
Inputs l FLSHSTAT[1..32] - It can take several states including FASTFLASH, SLOWFLASH,
LAMPSTEADY, and LAMPOFF
l LAMP TEST
l RESET
l ACK
Outputs l LAMPOUT[1..32] - It can take several states including FASTFLASH, SLOWFLASH,
LAMPSTEADY, and LAMPOFF.
l OUTHORN1 - It turns ON if any of FLSHSTAT is in flastflashing mode
l OUTHORN2 - It turns ON if any of FLASSTAT is in slowflashing mode.
Parameters ACK ALMWINTXT[1..32] FLSHSTAT[1..32] NUMANNWIN OUTHORN1 OUTHORN2
FSTFLSHSPD LAMPOUT[1..32] RESET SLWFLSHSPD
LAMPTEST
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ANNPANEL
Block.
3.18.3 DIGACQ (Digital Acquisition) block
The DIGACQ block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE controllers.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Description The Digital Acquisition function block uses a combination of a DICHANNEL and SEL/
where PVSOURCE is defined by the operator. The Digital Acquisition block recieves
input from the DI Channel block. This block is independent of Channel type that feeds
the block.
Function l Enables the user to specify the source of the process variable - AUTO, SUB or
MAN.
l AUTO: Value is taken from the Switch
l SUB: Value is taken from the PROGRAM or other CM
l MAN: input is Operator specified
l Enables manual force OPEN or CLOSE of the field digital input by operators
during maintenance of field switches.
l Supports alarm generation, when the current process variable state is different
from the configured NORMAL state.
l With R410, DIGACQ block allows you to configure individual values for the on-
delay time and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
l DIGACQ block provides a feature to configure change of state (COS) alarm with
Delay option for Digital Inputs (DI). The delay is applicable only to report the alarm.
l To configure CHGOFSTALM.PR, CHGOFSTALM.SV, and
CHGOFSTALM.TM parameters you need to select the Change of State
option from ALMSELOPT enumeration.
l The priority, severity and delay time of this alarm can be configured
using its corresponding parameters CHGOFSTALM.PR,
CHGOFSTALM.SV and CHGOFSTALM.TM.
l When the change of state alarm is configured with delay option, a COS
alarm is reported after the configured delay time. Change Of State alarm
(COS) is reported as Auto-RTN alarm in station. The alarm notification is
RTN type with all the applicable information. There is no separate RTN
for Change of State. There is only one entry in event summary page and
the alarm goes off from the alarm page when it is acknowledged. For
DIGACQ block all three, Off normal Alert, Off normal alarm and Change
of state alarm are all mutually exclusive.
Inputs l IN - Input parameter
l PVFL (In case PVSOURCE is SUB)
Outputs l PV - Currently selected input based on the PVSOURCE selection
l PVFL - Actual State Flag
l INVPVFL - Inverted State
l Depending on the value of PVSRCOPT and PVSOURCE, the output is set to one
of the following input values:
PVSRCOPT PVSOURCE PV
Only Auto AUTO Value of PVAUTOFL
ALL AUTO Value of PVAUTOFL
ALL MAN Value of PVFL
ALL SUB Value of PVFL
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l The PVFL and PV parameters are always matched. When the PVSOURCE is
changed to MAN, the value of PVFL/PV is retained at the last value. This value can
be changed as needed.
l INVPVFL is a read-only value which is inverse of the PVFL value.
Parameters ALMSELOPT BADPVALM.FL BADPVALM.PR OFFNRMALM.SV
BADPVALM.SV BADPVALM.TM BADPVALM.TMO OFFNRMALM.TM
CHGOFSTALM.PR CHGOFSTALM.SV OFFNRMALM.TMO PV
CHGOFSTALM.TM DABLOCKSINCM HIALM.PR PVAUTOFL PVFL PVSOURCE
HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE IN INALM INVPVFL NAME PVSRCOPT PVSTS
NORMAL OFFNRMALM.FL OFFNRMALM.PR PVSTSFL.BAD PVSTSFL.MAN
PVSTSFL.NORM
PVSTSFL.UNCERTN STATE0
STATE1 STATETEXT[0..1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DIGACQ
Block.
3.18.4 EXECTIMER
The EXECTIMER Block can only be used with C300, C300 20MS, C200E, ACE, SIMC300, SIMC200E,
and SIMACE. It is not supported for use on C200 controller.
Description EXECTIMER is a CEE utility block used to measure execution timing of other CEE
blocks.
Function EXECTIMER is used by creating two instances. One instance marks the beginning of a
time interval, that is, the “BEGTIME” instance. The other instance marks the end of a time
interval, that is, the “ENDTIME” instance. The output parameter BEGTIME.TIMEOUT is
then connected to the input parameter ENDTIME.TIMEIN. With this configuration, any
module, block, group of modules or group of blocks which execute between the two
EXECTIMER instances is included in the time measurement.
Inputs The input parameter is ENDTIME.TIMEIN. There is no input for the BEGTIME instance
that marks the beginning of a time interval.
Outputs The output parameter is BEGTIME.TIMEOUT. There is no output for the ENDTIME
instance that marks the end of a time interval.
Parameter DTANORM DTAOFFSET DTASCALE DTIMESTDPRC ENABLE MAXMINRATIO
DTIME DTIMEAVG DTIMEAVGCOMP REJFACTOR RESET TAU TIMEIN
DTIMEMAX DTIMEMIN DTIMESTD TIMEOUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference, for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory, for more information on the
EXECTIMER Block.
3.18.5 FIRSTOUT (First Out Detection) block
The FIRSTOUT block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE controllers.
Description A First Out logic enables you to identify the digital input signal that was first to transition
from its normal state, amongst a set of digital inputs connected to an equipment or a
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
device. Usually, this block is associated with critical equipment. An equipment's or a
drive's protection interlocks and stop commands are connected as input to the First up
block. When an input signal transitions from its configured NORMAL state, the output
flag of the First Out logic is raised. In addition, the input responsible for the First Out flag
is recorded. All the logic processing is performed during runtime processing of the
block. The recording is locked until a reset is applied to the block after all inputs are
back to Normal state.
Function l The block provides the First Out function. A First Out logic enables you to identify
which digital input signal was first to transition from NORMAL state, amongst a set
of digital inputs connected to the block.
l The set of digital inputs connected to the block is scanned in ascending order and
once a transition (from NORMAL state) is detected, the First Out is flagged and
further scanning is stopped for rest of the cycles until a RESET.
In a scenario where more than one input transitions in a single cycle, say 2 and 8, from
the NORMAL state, the FIRSTOUTACTED flag is set. This leads to INPUTACTED [2]
and INPUTACTED [8] to turn ON. The FIRSTOUTINPUT takes the value of “Multiple”.
l The block provides an output which is an OR of all NORMAL state inputs and it
goes high if any input goes to ABNORMAL state. It resets when all inputs come
back to NORMAL state.
l Enables you to reset the First Out flag using a raising edge pulse input only when
all inputs come back to NORMAL state.
l Provides an alarm once a First Out is detected. If a single input transitions from
NORMAL state, the input that caused the alarm is identified and its description
(INDESC[*]) is used for alarm. In case of multiple input transitions in a single cycle,
the alarm description is as defined in the MULTIINPTDESC (Multiple Input
description field).
Inputs l IN [1..24] - Boolean inputs whose transitions need to be monitored. The block
supports 24 inputs. By default, only eight inputs are exposed.
l You can view the configured normal state of input at the faceplate of the function
block without opening the configuration page. The hollow diamond symbol
indicates that the input pin on the faceplate is configured with the normal input
state as “True.” In the Monitoring view, the hollow symbol is indicated in the color
configured under the Pins and Wires tab of the System preferences.
l RESET - This parameter is used to reset the First Out recordings.
l TRAN+SMON (Transition monitoring) - This parameteris enabled by a user with
Engineer access. If FIRSTOUT has already acted, TRANSMON cannot be
enabled. However, if TRANSMON is enabled before FIRSTOUT acted, it will
continue to monitor upto 64,534 cycles and capture the list of inputs that became
ABNORMAL in each cycle.
Outputs l FIRSTOUTACTED - This flag is set when there is an input transition from its
configured normal state.
l INPUTACTED[1..24] - Indicates whether the corresponding input has transitioned
from NORMAL state.
l FIRSTOUTINPUT - This is an enumeration that indicates which input triggered
First Out.
l OREDOUT - It is an OR of all NORMAL state inputs and it goes high if any input
goes to ABNORMAL state. It resets when all inputs come back to NORMAL state.
Parameters FIRSTOUTACTED FIRSTOUTALM.FL FIRSTOUTACTED FIRSTOUTALM.FL
FIRSTOUTALM.PR FIRSTOUTALM.SV FIRSTOUTALM.PR FIRSTOUTALM.SV
FIRSTOUTINPUT HIALM.PR HIALM.SV FIRSTOUTINPUT HIALM.PR HIALM.SV
HIALM.TYPE IN[*] INDESC[*] HIALM.TYPE IN[*] INDESC[*]
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the FIRSTOUT
Block.
3.18.6 FLAG block
Description Provides storage for a single two-state value which can be accessed as a simple
Boolean (OFF or ON) value using the PVFL parameter, or as one of two user-
configured state values (for example, Running and Stopped) via the PV parameter.
Function l Used to define two separate states (for example, Running/Stopped, Off/On) to
indicate status of a particular input.
l There are 2 user-configurable state descriptors, STATETEXT[0] and
STATETEXT[1] that are used to describe STATE0 and STATE1 respectively.
l Current state of flag can be changed/read using PVFL (Boolean) or using PV
(either STATETEXT[0] or STATETEXT[1]).
l Block also supports:
l configurable access lock which determines who can write a value to
the block (such as operator, engineer, or other function block).
l an off-normal alarm whereby one of the flag's states is configured as
the normal state; whenever the flag changes state, the off-normal
alarm is generated.
l an off-normal alert whereby one of the flag's states is configured as
the normal state; whenever the flag modifies state, the off-normal
alert is generated.
l With R410, FLAG block allows you to configure individual values for the on-
delay time and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay
time.
Note: The ALTENBOPT parameter can be used to enable the block to generate an
off-normal alarm or an off-normal alert whenever the flag's state differs from the
configured normal state.
l When ALTENBOPT is set to ON, the FLAG block can be configured to generate
an alert on an off-normal condition. The off-normal and Change of State
configuration are disabled.
l When ALTENBOPT is set to OFF, the FLAG block can be configured to
generate an alarm on an off-normal condition. When ALTENBOPT is set to
OFF, the FLAG block can be configured to generate an alarm on an off-normal
condition or Change of State, based on configuration of Alarm selection option
parameter.
l FLAG block provides a feature to configure change of state (COS) alarm with
Delay option for Digital Inputs (DI). The delay is applicable only to report the
alarm.
l To configure CHGOFSTALM.PR, CHGOFSTALM.SV,
CHGOFSTALM.TM parameters you need to select the Change of
State option from ALMSELOPT enumeration.
l The priority, severity and delay time of this alarm can be configured
using its corresponding parameters CHGOFSTALM.PR,
CHGOFSTALM.SV and CHGOFSTALM.TM.
l When the change of state alarm is configured with delay option, a
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
COS alarm is reported after the configured delay time. Change Of
State alarm (COS) is reported as Auto-RTN alarm in station. The
alarm notification is RTN type with all the applicable information.
There is no separate RTN for Change of State. There is only one
entry in event summary page and the alarm goes off from the alarm
page when it is acknowledged. For FLAG block all three, Off normal
Alert, Off normal alarm and Change of state alarm are all mutually
exclusive.
Inputs/Outputs PVFL is the only exposed block connection, but you can expose other block
parameters through the Configure Block form in Control Builder.
Parameters ACCLOCK ALMSELOPT ALTENBOPT OFFNRMALM.PR OFFNRMALM.SV
CHGOFSTALM.PR CHGOFSTALM.SV OFFNRMALM.TM OFFNRMALM.TMO
CHGOFSTALM.TM DESC EUDESC ORDERINCM PV PVFL STATE0 STATE1
HIALM.PR HIALM.SV HIALM.TYPE STATETEXT[0..1]
INALM INALT NAME NORMAL
OFFNRMALM.FL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the FLAG
Block.
3.18.7 FLAGARRAY block
Description Provides storage for up to 1000 2-state values. The value can be accessed as a
simple Boolean (Off or On) using the PVFL[n] parameter. Where “n” is the number of
the flag.
Function l Used to define two separate states (Off/On) to indicate status of a particular
input.
l Number of flag values (NFLAG) is user configurable.
Current state of flags can be changed/read using flag value (PVFL[n]) (Boolean).
Inputs/Outputs Boolean output flags (PVFL[1..1000])
Parameters ACCLOCK NAME NFLAG PVFL[1..1000]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
FLAGARRAY Block.
3.18.8 MESSAGE block
Description Provides up to 16 user configurable messages (MESSAGE[n]) that can be triggered
by a client of the block. Where “n” is the number of the message. A client can be the
output from a Step block in a Sequential Control Module (SCM).
Function l Each message type can be configured (MSGTYPE[0..15]) to be either:
l Information,
l Confirmable,
l Single Signature*, or
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
license to use Single Signature and Double Signature message types.
l When a client triggers a given send flag (SENDFL [n]) input, the corresponding
message (MESSAGE[n]) is sent to the Message and the Event Summary
displays in the Station application.
l For information) only type (INFO) messages, the client trigger sets the
corresponding SENDFL[n] to True. Since the SENDFL[n] is a pulse trigger, it is
automatically set to False during the next execution cycle. This means the
MESSAGE block is ready to send the same message again in the next cycle.
l For confirmation type (CONFIRM) messages, the client trigger pulses the
corresponding SENDFL[n] to send the MESSAGE[n] to the Server. The client of
the MESSAGE block checks for the confirmed parameter (CONFIRMED[n]) to be
set to True. The CONFIRMED[n] parameter indicates whether the MESSAGE
block has received a confirmation.
l For single signature type (SINGLESIGNATURE) messages, the client trigger
pulses the corresponding SENDFL[n] to send the MESSAGE[n] to the Server.
Once a user acknowledges the message twice to confirm it through the
Message Summary Display in Station, a Single Signature user interface
appears for the user to record an electronic signature. The MEANINGPRI[n]
parameter provides an indication for the meaning of the primary signature. Once
the message is acknowledged and signature is obtained, the Message
Summary Display sends a confirmation to the MESSAGE block that turns on the
CONFIRMED[n] parameter to show that the message has been confirmed.
l For double signature type (DOUBLESIGNATURE) messages, the client trigger
pulses the corresponding SENDFL[n] to send the MESSAGE[n] to the Server.
Once a user acknowledges the message twice to confirm it through the
Message Summary Display in Station, a Single Signature and Double Signature
user interface appear for the user to record the required electronic signatures.
The MEANINGPRI[n] and MEANINGSEC[n] parameters provide indications for
the meaning of the primary and secondary signatures, respectively. Once the
message is acknowledged and signatures are obtained, the Message Summary
Display sends a confirmation to the MESSAGE block that turns on the
CONFIRMED[n] parameter to show that the message has been confirmed. In
addition, the MINLVLSECSIG[n] parameter lets users define the minimum
security level required for a secondary signature.
l If the Message block is connected to a block whose output is a Boolean and the
Boolean becomes True, the Message block will generate the message every
time the Message block executes until the Boolean output turns False. If the
desired behavior is to generate a one-time message, then the message block
should be driven by a Pulse Output.
Inputs/Outputs Up to 16 inputs (SENDFLAG[0..15]) and 16 outputs (CONFIRMED[0..15]), depending
on the message types configured.
Parameters CONFIRM[0..15] CONFIRMED[0..15] MEANINGSEC[0..15] MESSAGE[0..15]
DESC EUDESC MEANINGPRI[0..15] MINLVLSECSIG[0..15] MSGTYPE[0..15]
NAME ORDERINCM SENDFL[0..15]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
MESSAGE Block.
3.18.9 NUMERIC block
Description Provides storage for a floating point value that is accessible via the PV configuration
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
parameter.
Function l Used to store up to 8 bytes of a floating point value within defined upper and
lower limits for use in a control strategy.
l Configurable high and low limits are also provided.
l Also supports a configurable access lock which determines who can write a
value to the block (such as operator, engineer, or another function block.).
Inputs/Outputs PV is only exposed block connection, but you can expose other block parameters
through the Configure Block form in Control Builder.
Parameters ACCLOCK ORDERINCM PV PVFORMAT PVHILM PVLOLM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
NUMERIC Block.
3.18.10 NUMERICARRAY block
Description Provides storage for up to 200 floating point values that are accessible through the
corresponding PV configuration parameter (PV[n]). Where“n” is the number of the
numeric.
Function Use outputs (PV[1..200]) as source parameters to provide predefined analog
constants to other function blocks. A bad numeric output parameter typically has the
value NaN (Not-a-Number). Number of Numeric Values (NNUMERIC) is user
configurable.
Inputs/Outputs Up to 200 outputs (PV[1..200]), depending on the number of numeric values
(NNUMERIC) configured
Parameters ACCLOCK NAME NNUMERIC PV[1..200] PVFORMAT
Reference R Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each
parameter. Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on
the NUMERICARRAY Block.
3.18.11 PUSH block
Description The PUSH function block provides store/push capability of different data types to the
output destination. The block fetches input value and stores in this cycle to a
destination parameter. The output is stored only if the output store enable flag
(STOREENB) is true. When STOREENB is true, and store on change
(STORONCHGENB) is true, the output is stored upon change of CM or CEE state, or
when the input changes.
Function The PUSH function block supports all the data types supported by the TypeConvert
function block. Once the first store is successful, the block has features to store only
on change for outputs of BOOLEAN and FLOAT64 data type. This feature is
provided to prevent the unnecessary traffic on the network if the stores are peer-to-
peer. The function block performs the type conversion and clamping before it
pushes the value to the destination. The destinations are configured either by using
parameter connector edit box using point picker in the control builder or by using
wire connections.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Inputs/Outputs If the PUSH block is able to fetch the value, then it is pushed to the destination.
There are two statuses provided; EXECSTS and STORESTS. These will give the
user indication of the status of fetching input and status of output store. If
STORONCHGENB is set to ON, the input values are stored to the destination ONLY
when the input is changed. In the case of floating point number, the value is
considered changed only if the absolute value of the difference between the new
value and the last value is larger than the configured INPUTCHGDB.
BOOLVALUEOFF, BOOLVALUEON and ENUMTOBOOLMAP[0..63] behave the
same as in type convert block.
Parameters BOOLVALUEOFF BOOLVALUEON OUT.BOOLEAN OUT.ENUM
ENUMBOOLMAP[0..63] EXECSTS OUT.FLOAT32 OUT.FLOAT64 OUT.INT8
IN.BOOLEAN IN.ENUM IN.FLOAT32 OUT.INT16 OUT.INT32 OUT.SDENUM
IN.FLOAT64 IN.INT8 IN.INT16 IN.INT32 OUT.UINT16 OUT.UINT32 PVFL
IN.SDENUM IN.UINT16 IN.UINT32 SDENUMTEXT STATE0 STATE1
INPUTCHGDB NAME LASTSTORESTS STATETEXT[0..1] STOREENB
LASTSTORESTSN ORDERINCM STORESTS STORONCHGENB
THRESHOLD TRUNCATEOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PUSH
Block.
3.18.12 TEXTARRAY block
Description Provides storage for up to 120 text strings that are accessible through the
corresponding string configuration parameter (STR[n]). Where “n” is the number of
the text string.
Function l Provides predefined text (STR[1..120]) strings to other blocks.
l Number of string values (NSTRING) is user configurable.
l The length of the text strings (STRLEN) is user configurable as 8, 16, 32, or 64
characters
l Supports a maximum size of 960 two-byte characters. The maximum data
combinations that you can configure through NSTRING and STRLEN values
are as follows.
l If NSTRING is 15 and STRLEN is 64, then the STR[n] range is 1 to
15.
l If NSTRING is 30 and STRLEN is 32, then the STR[n] range is 1 to
30.
l If NSTRING is 60 and STRLEN is 16, then the STR[n] range is 1 to
60.
l If NSTRING is 120 and STRLEN is 8, then the STR[n] range is 1 to
120.
Inputs/Outputs Up to 120 output strings (STR[1..120]), depending on the number of string
(NSTRING) and length of string (STRLEN) values configured.
Parameters ACCLOCK NAME NSTRING ORDERINCM STR[1..120] STRLEN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
TEXTARRAY Block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
3.18.13 TEXTCOMMENT (Text Comment) block
Description The Text Comment function block can be used to insert comments into charts. The
Text Comment block does not contain any logic and does not participate in control
execution. The Text Comment block can be used with the container modules such
as CM, SCM, RCM, and UCM . The Text Comment block can be imported/exported
like other function blocks. There is no restriction on the number of Text Comment
blocks that can be inserted into a chart. The Text Comment block can be loaded
while active without inactivating the strategy or setting the CEE to IDLE.
Function The Text Comment block can be used only to insert comments into a chart.
Inputs/Outputs The Text Comment block does not contain any logic and also does not have any pin
connections.
Parameters ORDERINCM TEXTCOMMENT TEXTCOLOR TEXTSIZE
BKGCOLOR FONTSTYLE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
TEXTCOMMENT block.
3.18.14 TIMER block
Description Provides capability to time process events or create known delays.
Function Used to keep track of elapsed time during a process and provides indication when
elapsed time reaches predefined limit.
Inputs/Outputs l SO is only exposed block connection, but you can expose other block
parameters through the Configure Block form in Control Builder.
l Commands are sent to timer in one of two ways:
l By operator using COMMAND parameter.
l Through connections to parameters STARTFL, STOPFL, RESETFL,
and RESTARTFL.
Parameters COMMAND NAME ORDERINCM PV SO SP STARTFL STATE STOPFL
RESETFL RESTARTFL RV TIMEBASE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TIMER
Block.
3.18.15 TYPECONVERT block
Description Provides the ability to convert one data type to another for connecting parameters of
different data types.
Function l Supports data type conversions for all combinations among the following major
data types.
l Boolean
l Integer (unsigned/signed 8/16/32-bit integers)
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Real (32-bit and 64-bit IEEE floating point numbers)
l Enumeration
l If data type conversion is not necessary, then none will be done.
l Used to connect one input parameter to one or many output parameters with
different data types. The TYPCONVERT block reads the input value and only
provides the converted output when the block connected to its output runs.
Inputs/Outputs Up to nine inputs and nine outputs. The pins for the four most common inputs
(IN.BOOLEAN, IN.INT32, IN.FLOAT64, IN.ENUM) and outputs (OUT.BOOLEAN,
OUT.INT32, OUT.FLOAT64, OUT.ENUM) are exposed by default.
Parameters BOOLVALUEOFF BOOLVALUEON ORDERINCM OUT.BOOLEAN OUT.ENUM
ENUMBOOLMAP[0..63] EXECSTS OUT.FLOAT32 OUT.FLOAT64 OUT.INT8
IN.BOOLEAN IN.ENUM IN.FLOAT32 OUT.INT16 OUT.INT32 OUT.SDENUM
IN.FLOAT64 IN.INT8 IN.INT16 IN.INT32 OUT.UINT8 OUT.UINT16 OUT.UINT32
IN.SDENUM IN.UINT8 IN.UINT16 SDENUMTEXT THRESHOLD
IN.UINT32 TRUNCATEOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
TYPECONVERT Block.
3.19 EtherNet/IP channel blocks
3.19.1 EtherNet/IP IO channel blocks
AICHANNEL
Description Provides standard analog interface to control function blocks.
Function l Brings PV data from an associated IOM block.
l Assigns BAD status to PV parameter when appropriate.
Inputs Input data received from the field.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Parameters BADPVFL CHANNUM CONTAINEDIN PVSTS SIMMODE SIMVALUE
FETCHMODE IOP ORDERINCM PV
PVRAW
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block
Block that interfaces with the physical AI hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
AOCHANNEL
Description Provides a standard analog output signal for operating final control elements.
Function l Brings OP data from connected blocks and conveys OP data to be stored in an
associated IOM block.
l Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
l Sets INITREQ to TRUE value if AOC or IOM block is inactive or a communications
error occurs.
l Reverses OP direction if OPTDIR option is REVERSE.
Inputs Only one control block can interface to this block.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Parameters BACKCALOUT BLKASSIGNSUPPORTED INITREQLATCH INITVAL
BLOCKLOGO BLKSTIDX BLKTYPE CHANNUM IOCTYPE IOP OP OPFINAL
COMMFAILFL CONTAINEDIN INITREQ OPSOURCE OPTDIR SIMVALUE
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block
Block that interfaces with the physical AO hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
DICHANNEL
Description Provides a standard digital interface to control blocks.
Function l Brings PV data from an associated IOM block.
l Assigns BAD status to PV parameter when appropriate.
Inputs Digital (PV) signals received from the field.
Outputs PV and PV status value that can be used by other data points in system.
Parameters BADPVFL CHANNUM CONTAINEDIN SIMMODE SIMVALUE
FETCHMODE INBADOPT IOP
ORDERINCM PVFL
Associated Prior to loading, the block must be associated with 1 channel of the corresponding IOM
Block block that interfaces with physical Digital Input hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
DOCHANNEL
Description Generates status output [0 or 1), based on origin of input and parameters.
Function Brings SO from connected blocks and stores value in an associated IOM block. Sets
INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data. Stops SO if INTREQ is
TRUE Sets INITREQ to TRUE value if DOC or IOM block is inactive or a
communications error occurs.
Inputs Only one control block can interface to this block.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Outputs Digital (Boolean) value
Parameters INITVAL INITREQ BACKCALOUT SO CONTAINEDIN BLKSTIDX IOCTYPE
SOSOURCE INITREQLATCH BLKTYPE CHANNUM IOP BLKASSIGNSUPPORTED
BLOCKLOGO
Associated Prior to loading, the block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM
Block block that interfaces with the physical DO hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.19.2 EtherNet/IP drive and relay channel blocks
PowerFlex Drive input channel
Description Provides standard analog interface and Drive-specific parameters to control function
blocks.
Function l Brings PV data from an associated Drive block.
l Brings Drive specific data from an associated Drive block.
l Assigns BAD status to PV and also sets BADDATA parameter (used for Drive-
specific parameters) when appropriate.
Inputs Input data received from the field.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units for PV. Other Drive-specific parameters.
Parameters ACCELERATING ACTDIRECT ACTIVE FLTBUSV IOP JOGGING JOGOWNER
ALARM ATHOME ATLIMIT ATSPEED LASTFLTCODE LASTSTARTSRC
ATZEROSPEED BADDATA BADPVFL LASTSTOPSRC MANUAL
BUSFREQREG CHANNUM MOTOROVRLD OPCURRENT
CLRFLTOWNER CMDDIRECT ORDERINCM POSMODE PV PVFL
CONTAINEDIN CURLIMIT DBACTIVE PVRAW PVSTS REGEN RUNNING
DCBRAKE DECELERATING EDITLOCK RUNREADY SIMMODE SIMVALUE
ELAPSEDKWH ELAPSEDMWH SPDREFSRC SPEEDMODE SPREFID
ELSRUNTIME ENABLED FAULTAMPS STARTOWNER STOPOWNER
FAULTED FAULTFREQ FETCHMODE STOPPING STRTINH TRQMODE
Associated Prior to loading, the block must be associated with 1 channel of the corresponding IOM
Block block that interfaces with the physical Drive hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
PowerFlex Drive output channel
Description Provides a standard analog output signal and Drive-specific commands for operating
final control elements.
Function l Brings OP data and Drive specific commands from connected blocks and conveys
the data to be stored in an associated Drive block.
l Sets INITVAL parameter to an appropriate value, based on echo data.
l Assigns safe OP value if status is BAD or UNCERTAIN.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l Sets INITREQ to TRUE value if AOC or IOM block is inactive or a communications
error occurs and also sets BADDATA parameter (used for Drive-specific
commands) when appropriate.
Inputs Inputs from blocks connected to the channel.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units for PV. Other Drive-specific parameters.
Parameters ACCELTIME ACCELTIME1 ACCELTIME2 JOGADTIME JOGSPD1 JOGSPD2
BADDATA CHANNUM CLEARFAULT MANUALCMD MAXFWDSPD
CMDDIRECTION COASTSTOP MAXREVSPD NORMALSTOP OP
COMMFAILFL CONTAINEDIN OPCURRENT OPFINAL ORDERINCM
CURRLIMSTOP DECELTIME OVERSPDLIMIT REFSELECTOR RUN
DECELTIME1 DECELTIME2 EDITLOCK SIMMODE SPDREFASTPT SPDREFBSTPT
FETCHMODE INITREQ INITREQLATCH SPDREFSCALE START STOPMODEA
INITVAL IOP JOG1 JOG2 STOPMODEB ZEROSPDLIMIT
Associated Prior to loading, the block must be associated with 1 channel of the corresponding IOM
Block block that interfaces with the physical Drive hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
E3 and E3 plus IN channels
Description Provides standard digital interface and Relay specific parameters to control function
blocks.
Function l Brings digital input data from an associated Relay block.
l Brings Relay-specific data from an associated Relay block.
l Sets BADDATA parameter (used for Device specific parameters) when
appropriate.
Inputs Input data received from the field.
Outputs Digital Inputs value. Other Relay-specific parameters.
Parameters Parameters for E3 Parameters for E3 plus
l E3 Device Status l E3 Device Status
l E3 Data Status l E3 Data Status
l E3_0_L1_CURR l E3_0_L1_CURR
l E3_0_L2_CURR l E3_0_L2_CURR
l E3_0_L3_CURR l E3_0_L3_CURR
l DeviceNet Scanner Status l DeviceNet Scanner Status
l E3 Advance Data Status l E3 Advance Data Status
l CHANNUM l CHANNUM
l CONTAINEDIN l CONTAINEDIN
l EDITLOCK l EDITLOCK
l IOP l IOP
l ORDERINCM l ORDERINCM
l SIMMODE l SIMMODE
l EDITLOCK l EDITLOCK
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l FETCHMODE l FETCHMODE
l SIMVALUE l BADDATA
l SIMVALUE
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block
Block that interfaces with the physical relay hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
E3 and E3 plus OUT channels
Description Provides a standard digital output signal and Relay specific commands for operating
final control elements.
Function l Brings Digital Output data and relay-specific commands from connected blocks
and conveys the data to be stored in an associated Relay block.
l Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
l Sets BADDATA parameter (used for Device specific commands) when
appropriate.
Inputs Inputs from blocks connected to the channel.
Outputs Digital Output value. Other Drive specific commands.
Parameters Parameters for E3 CHANNUM Parameters for E3 plus CHANNUM
CONTAINEDIN EDITLOCK SIMMODE CONTAINEDIN EDITLOCK SIMMODE
FETCHMODE IOP ORDERINCM FETCHMODE IOP ORDERINCM
BADDATA SIMVALUE BADDATA SIMVALUE
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding relay block
Block that interfaces with the physical relay hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.20 IOREFERENCES Blocks
3.20.1 AIREF block
Description Allows you to
l associate a configured analog input channel or a pulse input channel in a
Control Module, or
l reference a parameter value of any block.
Function The PV parameter represents a value of its reference (REF). The AIREF block makes
the PV available for connections to other blocks. The origin of PV is listed in the
following table based on the REFTYPE parameter configuration.
If REFTYPE is configured as ... Then, the PV origin is...
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
PMIO or SERIES_C_IO PV value of the channel.
PARAMETER values that are accessible in the Control
Builder. The values can be
l Point.Parameters, or
l Point.Block.Parameter
Parameters CHANTYPE NAME REF REFTYPE
Configuration Reference type (REFTYPE) configuration rules are follows:
Rules l If the REFTYPE is set to SERIES_C_IO, then the Reference block references a
Series C I/O channel.
l If the REFTYPE is set to PMIO, then the Reference block references a PM I/O
channel.
l If the REFTYPE is set to PARAMETER, then the Reference block references a
parameter and works as a parameter connector.
l If the REFTYPE is NONE, then the Reference block is identical to any other
basic block and does not have any special configuration consideration.
Reference (REF) must be selected based on the REFTYPE configuration. For more
information about the REFTYPE parameter, see Control Builder Components Theory.
Associated Prior to loading the CM containing the AIREF block, REF value must be associated
Block with one channel block of corresponding IOM block that interfaces with the physical
AI hardware module at runtime when the REFTYPE is set to Series C I/O or PM I/O.
Prior to loading the CM containing the AIREF block, REF value must be associated
with valid parameter value when the REFTYPE is set to “PARAMETER.”
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.20.2 AOREF block
Description Allows you to
l associate a configured analog output channel in a Control Module, or
l reference a parameter value of any block.
Function The OP parameter represents a value of its reference (REF). The AOREF block
makes the OP available for connections to other blocks. The AOREF block cannot
accept the OP values from different controllers. The origin of OP is listed in the
following table based on the REFTYPE parameter configuration.
If REFTYPE is configured as ... Then, the OP origin is...
PMIO or SERIES_C_IO OP value of the channel.
PARAMETER values that are accessible in the Control
Builder. The values can be
l Point.Parameters, or
l Point.Block.Parameter
ATTENTION The OP values
are accepted only from the
PUSH blocks or PUSH
connections.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
Parameters CHANTYPE NAME REF REFTYPE
Configuration Reference type (REFTYPE) configuration rules are follows:
Rules l If the REFTYPE is set to SERIES_C_IO, then the Reference block references a
Series C I/O channel.
l If the REFTYPE is set to PMIO, then the Reference block references a PM I/O
channel.
l If the REFTYPE is set to PARAMETER, then the Reference block references a
parameter instead of a Series C I/O or PM I/O channel.
ATTENTION When you set the REFTYPE as PARAMETER, you can
use only PUSH parameters for the OP parameter of AOREF blocks.
l If the REFTYPE is NONE, then the Reference block is identical to any other
basic block and does not have any special configuration consideration.
Reference (REF) must be selected based on the REFTYPE configuration. For more
information about the REFTYPE parameter, see Control Builder Components Theory.
Associated Prior to loading the CM containing the AOREF block, REF value must be associated
Block with one channel block of corresponding IOM block that interfaces with the physical
AO hardware module at runtime when the REFTYPE is set to Series C I/O or PM I/O.
Prior to loading the CM containing the AOREF block, REF value must be associated
with valid parameter value when the REFTYPE is set to “PARAMETER.”
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.20.3 DIREF block
Description Allows you to
l associate a configured digital input channel in a Control Module, or
l reference a parameter value of any block.
Function The PV parameter represents a value of its reference (REF). The AIREF block makes
the PV available for connections to other blocks. The origin of PV is listed in the
following table based on the REFTYPE parameter configuration.
If REFTYPE is configured as ... Then, the PV origin is...
PMIO or SERIES_C_IO PV value of the channel.
PARAMETER values that are accessible in the Control
Builder. The values can be
l Point.Parameters, or
l Point.Block.Parameter
Parameters CHANTYPE NAME REF REFTYPE
Configuration Reference type (REFTYPE) configuration rules are follows:
Rules l If the REFTYPE is set to SERIES_C_IO, then the Reference block references a
Series C I/O channel.
l If the REFTYPE is set to PMIO, then the Reference block references a PM I/O
channel.
l If the REFTYPE is set to PARAMETER, then the Reference block references a
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
parameter instead of a Series C I/O or PM I/O channel.
l If the REFTYPE is NONE, then the Reference block is identical to any other
basic block and does not have any special configuration consideration.
Reference (REF) must be selected based on the REFTYPE configuration. For more
information about the REFTYPE parameter, see Control Builder Components Theory.
Associated Prior to loading the CM containing the DIREF block, REF value must be associated
Block with one channel block of corresponding IOM block that interfaces with the physical
DI hardware module at runtime when the REFTYPE is set to Series C I/O or PM I/O.
Prior to loading the CM containing the DIREF block, REF value must be associated
with valid parameter value when the REFTYPE is set to “PARAMETER.”
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
3.20.4 DOREF block
Description Allows you to
l associate a configured digital output channel in a Control Module, or
l reference a parameter value of any block.
Function The SO parameter represents a value of its reference (REF). The DOREF block
makes the SO available for connections to other blocks. The DOREF block cannot
accept the SO values from different controllers. The origin of SO is listed in the
following table based on the REFTYPE parameter configuration.
If REFTYPE is configured as ... Then, the SO origin is...
PMIO or SERIES_C_IO SO value of the channel.
PARAMETER values that are accessible in the Control
Builder. The values can be
l Point.Parameters, or
l Point.Block.Parameter
ATTENTION The SO values
are accepted only from the
PUSH blocks or PUSH
connections.
Parameters CHANTYPE NAME REF REFTYPE
Configuration Reference type (REFTYPE) configuration rules are follows:
Rules l If the REFTYPE is set to SERIES_C_IO, then the Reference block references a
Series C I/O channel.
l If the REFTYPE is set to PMIO, then the Reference block references a PM I/O
channel.
l If the REFTYPE is set to PARAMETER, then the Reference block references a
parameter instead of a Series C I/O or PM I/O channel.
ATTENTION When you set the REFTYPE as PARAMETER, you can
use only PUSH parameters for the SO parameter of DOREF blocks.
Chapter 3 - Reference Data for Functional Block Types
l If the REFTYPE is NONE, then the Reference block is identical to any other
basic block and does not have any special configuration consideration.
Reference (REF) must be selected based on the REFTYPE configuration. For more
information about the REFTYPE parameter, see Control Builder Components Theory.
Associated Prior to loading the CM containing the DOREF block, REF value must be associated
Block with one channel block of corresponding IOM block that interfaces with the physical
DO hardware module at runtime when the REFTYPE is set to Series C I/O or PM I/O.
Prior to loading the CM containing the DOREF block, REF value must be associated
with valid parameter value when the REFTYPE is set to “PARAMETER.”
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
CHAPTER
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL
EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES
4.1 Control Processor Module Block 413
4.1.1 CPM Block (C200 Controller) 413
4.1.2 C200E Controller 414
4.1.3 C300 Block 415
4.1.4 UOC BLOCK 416
4.1.5 Application Control Environment (ACE) Block 420
4.2 Control Execution Environment Block 420
4.2.1 CEEC200 Block 420
4.2.2 CEEC200E Block 421
4.2.3 CEEC300 Block 422
4.2.4 C300 - 20mS CEE 424
4.2.5 CEEACE Block 426
4.3 Input/Output Link Interface Module Block 426
4.3.1 IOLIM block 426
4.4 Input/Output Link Block 426
4.4.1 IOLINK block 427
4.4.2 IOLINK Block (C300 Controller) 427
4.4.3 IOLINK Block (C300 - 20mS CEE) 428
4.5 OLE for Process Control Server Block 429
4.5.1 OPC block 429
4.6 Inter Cluster Gateway Block 429
4.6.1 Inter Cluster Gateway (ICG) Block 430
4.7 Redundancy Module Block 430
4.7.1 RM block 430
4.8 Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge Module Block 431
4.8.1 FTEB block 431
4.9 Input Type I/O Module Blocks 432
4.9.1 TC-HAI081/TK-HAI081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Input) 432
4.9.2 TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 – 1756-IF6I (6 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Isolated - Analog Input) 433
4.9.3 TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 – 1756-IF16 (16 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non-Isolated - Analog
Input) 433
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.9.4 TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 – 1756-IA16 (16 Channel - 120Vac Non-Isolated - Digital Input) 434
4.9.5 TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 – 1756-IB32/B (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated - Digital Input) 434
4.9.6 TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 – 1756-IB16I (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated - Digital Input) 435
4.9.7 TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 – 1756-IA16I (16 Channel - 120Vac Isolated - Digital Input) 435
4.9.8 TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 – 1756-IM16I (16 Channel - 220Vac Isolated - Digital Input) 436
4.9.9 TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 – 1756-IA8D (8 Channel - 120Vac Diagnostic Input) 436
4.9.10 TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 – 1756-IB16D (16 Channel - 24Vdc Diagnostic Input) 437
4.9.11 TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 – 1756-IT6I (6 Channel - Thermocouple Input) 437
4.9.12 TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 – 1756-IT6I2 (6 Channel - Thermocouple Input) 438
4.9.13 TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 – 1756-IR6I (6 Channel - RTD Input) 438
4.10 Output Type I/O Module Blocks 438
4.10.1 TC-HAO081/TK-HAO081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Output) 439
4.10.2 TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 – 1756-OF6CI (6 Channel - 4 to 20mA - Analog Output) 439
4.10.3 TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 – 1756-OF6VI (6 Channel - 10V - Analog Output) 440
4.10.4 TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081(1756-OF8) (8 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non-Isolated - Analog
Output) 440
4.10.5 TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 – 1756-OB16I (16 Channel - 120 Vac Non-Isolated - Digital
Output) 441
4.10.6 TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 – 1756-OB32 (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated Digital Output) 441
4.10.7 TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 – 1756-OB16I (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated Digital Output) 442
4.10.8 TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 – 1756-OA16I (16 Channel - 120 Vac Isolated - Digital Output) 442
4.10.9 TC-ODX081/TK-ODX081 – 1756-OA8D (8 Channel - 120Vac- Diagnostic Output) 443
4.10.10 TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 – 1756-OB16D (16 Channel - 24Vdc- Diagnostic Output) 443
4.10.11 TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 – 1756-OX8I (8 Channel - 8 n.c., 8 n.o. 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac
Isolated - Relay Output) 444
4.10.12 TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 – 1756-OW16I (16 Channel, 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac Isolated -
Contact Output) 445
4.11 Serial Interface Module (SIM) I/O Module Block 445
4.11.1 TC-MUX021/TK-MUX021 (Up to 32 Array Channel Function Blocks) 445
4.12 Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO) Blocks 446
4.12.1 AICHANNEL (PMIO) block 446
4.12.2 HAICHANNEL (PMIO) block 446
4.12.3 AOCHANNEL (PMIO) block 447
4.12.4 HAOCHANNEL (PMIO) block 447
4.12.5 DICHANNEL (PMIO) block 448
4.12.6 DOCHANNEL (PMIO) block 448
4.12.7 HLAI block 449
4.12.8 HLAIHART block 449
4.12.9 LLMUX block 450
4.12.10 STI_MV block 450
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.12.11 AO16 block 451
4.12.12 AO16HART block 451
4.12.13 DI24V block 452
4.12.14 DISOE block 452
4.12.15 DI block 453
4.12.16 DO32 block 453
4.13 Series C Input/Output (I/O) Blocks 453
4.13.1 AICHANNEL (Series C) 453
4.13.2 AOCHANNEL Series C 454
4.13.3 DICHANNEL Series C 455
4.13.4 DOCHANNEL Series C 455
4.13.5 AI-HART 456
4.13.6 AI-LLMUX 456
4.13.7 AI-LLAI 456
4.13.8 AO-HART 457
4.13.9 DI-HV 457
4.13.10 DI-24 458
4.13.11 DO-24B 458
4.14 Series CIEC 61850 Interface Module (850M) blocks 458
4.14.1 IEC61850M/IEC61850MSEC block 458
4.14.2 IEC61850LINK block 458
4.14.3 IED 458
4.14.4 Logical device block 458
4.14.5 Logical node block 459
4.15 Speed Protection Module (SPM) 459
4.15.1 Speed Protection Module (SPM) Block 459
4.15.2 SP_AI 459
4.15.3 SP_AO 459
4.15.4 SP_DI 460
4.15.5 SP_DO 461
4.15.6 SP_SPDVOTE 461
4.15.7 SP_SPEED 462
4.16 Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module 463
4.16.1 Servo Positioner Valve Module (SVPM) Block 463
4.16.2 SVP_AI 463
4.16.3 SVP_AO 464
4.16.4 SVP_DI 465
4.16.5 SVP_REGCTL 465
4.17 Universal Input/Output (UIO) Module 466
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.17.1 UIO module 466
4.17.2 UIO module Phase 2 (UIO-2) 468
4.18 Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI) Blocks 470
4.18.1 PCDI_MASTER (Peer Control Data Interface Master device) Block 470
4.18.2 PCDIFLAGARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Flag Array Channel) Block 471
4.18.3 PCDINUMARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Numeric Array Channel) Block 472
4.18.4 PCDITEXTARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Text Array Channel) Block 473
4.19 PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Blocks 474
4.19.1 PROFIBUS Module Gateway (PGM) Block 474
4.19.2 PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Secondary Block 474
4.19.3 Protocol Block (PBLINK) 474
4.19.4 Device Support Block (DSB) 474
4.19.5 PROFIBUS HART Input/Output Module (PBHIOM) Function Block 475
4.19.6 PROFIBUS Input/Output Module (PIOM) Block 475
4.19.7 PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library 475
4.19.8 PBAICHANNEL 475
4.19.9 PBAOCHANNEL 475
4.19.10 PBDICHANNEL 475
4.19.11 PBDOCHANNEL 476
4.20 Foundation FieldBus Interface Module (FIM) Blocks 476
4.20.1 FIM Block 476
4.20.2 FIMS Block 476
4.20.3 FIM4 Block 476
4.20.4 FIM4SEC Block 476
4.20.5 FIM8 Block 476
4.20.6 FIM Block 476
4.20.7 FFLINK 477
4.21 Enhanced High-Performance Process Manager (EHPM) Block 477
4.21.1 EHPM block 477
4.22 ELCN Engineering tools 480
4.22.1 EHPM Platform Block 480
4.22.2 EHPM Configuration Form Reference 486
4.22.3 EHPM Point template Configuration Form Reference 512
4.22.4 xPM Platform Block 539
4.22.5 ELCN AM Platform Block 541
4.22.6 ELCN AM Configuration Form Reference 552
4.22.7 AM Point template Configuration Form Reference 580
4.22.8 CEEELCN Node Configuration Form Reference 623
4.23 EtherNet/IP blocks 624
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.23.1 Input and output type EtherNet/IP I/O module blocks 624
4.23.2 EtherNet/IP drive and relay module blocks 633
4.24 ControlLogix and UDT blocks 635
4.24.1 User Defined Tag block 635
4.24.2 ControlLogix gateway block 636
4.25 Experion LCN (ELCN) Blocks 637
4.25.1 ELCN Bridge (ELCN_BRG) block 637
4.25.2 ELCN Bridge Configuration Form Reference 641
4.25.3 ELCN Node (ELCNNODE) block 685
4.25.4 ELCN Appliance Node Configuration Form Reference 689
4.26 TCMI platform block 742
This section provides detailed reference data for each physical equipment block type that is part of the
hardware relation category for the Control Builder. The reference data is organized by the major block
type and then alphabetically within the IOM function block by the given module's model number and
input or output type.
The reference data for each block covers these topics as applicable:
l Description
l function
l inputs and input ranges
l outputs and output ranges
l parameters
4.1 Control Processor Module Block
4.1.1 CPM Block (C200 Controller)
Description Identifies the primary and secondary Control Processor Modules (CPM) and associated
CEE to implement the control strategy built in the Control Builder application. This
block's parameters characterize the redundant CPM as a whole. This block always runs
at an execution period of 2 seconds. It is redundancy compliant.
Function Supports C200 Controller Redundant Chassis Pair hardware configurations. Publishes
parameters describing the status and configuration of the CPM. Processes the
computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting. Serves as a faceplate for
any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the entire CPM. Secondary waits to
take control if the“Primary” fails. The address of the Secondary chassis equals the
address of the Primary chassis plus one.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs See above.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE BATTERYNOTOK NUMFREEDESC NUMREGDESC
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 NUMUSEDBLKS NUMUSEDDESC
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 PCMCOMMAND PCMSTATE
CCLCNT CCLINFO CCLLOADSTAT RAMSCRUBERRS RAMSWEEPERR
CCLNAME CEECOMMAND CEESTATE RDNCAPABILITY RDNCHASSISID
CPMCOMMAND[0..numChans-1] RDNCMPT RDNDELAYAVG
CPMSTATE CPUFREEAVG CPUFREEMIN RDNDELAYMAX RDNLOS
CURTIME DAY DAYLIGHTTIME DESC RDNSYNCSTATE RDNXFERAVG
DIRECTSYNC DRIVERNAME RDNXFERMAX SCANASSOCDSP
ENBMEMALMFL EUDESC FREEMEM SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
FREEMEMINK GROUP.NUMPARAMS SCANPNTDTL SECMODNAME
HIST.NUMPARAMS HOUR IMAGEVER SECNAMESTRING SECOND
INALM INDRCTSYNC INDSYNCCMD SECTMPNAME SLOTNUMBER
LASTOPMNAME MAXFREEBLKSZ STATSRESET TASKSTACKHILM
MAXFREEINK MINUTE MODISREDUN TASKSTACKSIZE TASKSTACKUSED
MONTH MULREDUNSTAT NAME TIMEZONE TOTALMEM TOTALMEMINK
NETWORKTYPE NTOTMEMDESC TREND.NUMPARAMS ULCNBMAC
NUMEXTBLKS NUMFREEBLKS USEDMEM USEDMEMINK USESIM
WEEKDAY WEEKDAYFMT YEAR
YEARFMT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.1.2 C200E Controller
Description Identifies the primary and secondary C200E controllers and associated CEE to
implement the control strategy built in the Control Builder application. This block's
parameters characterize the redundant C200E as a whole. This block always runs at an
execution period of 2 seconds. It is redundancy compliant.
Function Supports C200E Controller Redundant Chassis Pair hardware configurations.
Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the C200E. Processes
the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting. Serves as a
faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the entire C200E.
Secondary waits to take control if the “Primary” fails. The address of the Secondary
chassis equals the address of the Primary chassis plus one. Supports Controller
Redundancy with switchover time < 500 mSec. Supports Exchange Block connections
to Rockwell PLC devices also using the CIP protocol and PCCC protocol. Supports
Experion Batch Manager (EBM) functionality for the Sequential Control Module (SCM),
Recipe Control Module (RCM), Unit Control Module (UCM) and Recipe Step. Supports
Whole Array Transfer. Supports 200 maximum instantiated CDB types. SIM-C200E
does not have a separate module function block. It can be created in a similar way as
the C200E and enabling the simulation environment in the Simulation tab.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communication
Outputs Refer to the description.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE BATTERYNOTOK NUMFREEDESC NUMREGDESC
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 NUMUSEDBLKS NUMUSEDDESC
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 PCMCOMMAND PCMSTATE PROCESS_ID
BOOTIMAGEVER CCLINFO RAMSCRUBERRS RAMSWEEPERR
CCLNAME CEECOMMAND RDNCAPABILITY RDNCHASSISID
CEESTATE CNISLOTNUM RDNCMPT RDNCTLABILITY RDNDELAYAVG
CNETCONNECT CPMCOMMAND RDNDELAYMAX RDNINHIBITSYNC
[0..numChans-1] CPMSTATE RDNHISTTIME RDNHISTSTATE
CURTIME DAY DESC DIRECTSYNC RDNHISTREASON RDNISTIMEMAX
DRIVERNAME ENBMEMALMFL RDNSOTIMEMAX RDNLOS RDNROLESTATE
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
EUDESC FREEMEM FREEMEMINK RDNOPMFRZTIME RDNSYNCSTATE
FWREVISION GROUP.NUMPARAMS RDNSYNCPROG RDNXFERAVG
HIST.NUMPARAMS HOSTIPPRI RDNXFERMAX SCANASSOCDSP
HOSTNAMEPRI HOUR HWREVMAJ SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
HWREVMIN IMAGEVER INALM SCANPNTDTL SECMODNAME
INDRCTSYNC INDSYNCCMD SECNAMESTRING SECOND SERIALNUM
LASTOPMNAME MAXFREEBLKSZ SECTMPNAME SIMTARGET SIM_
MAXFREEINK MINUTE C200MACID SIMCOMMAND SYNCTIMEBEG
MODISREDUN MODTYPE MONTH SYNCTIMEEND SLOTNUMBER
MULREDUNSTAT NAME TASKSTACKHILM TASKSTACKSIZE
NETWORKTYPE NTOTMEMDESC TASKSTACKUSED TOTALMEM
NUMEXTBLKS NUMFREEBLKS TOTALMEMINK TREND.NUMPARAMS
ULCNBMAC USEDMEM USEDMEMINK
USESIM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.1.3 C300 Block
Description Identifies the primary and secondary C300 Controllers and associated CEE to
implement the control strategy built in the Control Builder application. This block's
parameters characterize the redundant C300 as a whole. This block always runs at an
execution period of 2 seconds. It is redundancy compliant.
Function Supports C300 Controller Redundant Partner hardware configurations. Publishes
parameters describing the status and configuration of the C300. Processes the
computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting. Serves as a faceplate for
any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the entire C300. Secondary waits to
take control if the “Primary” fails. The address of the Secondary controller equals the
address of the Primary plus one. With R410, you can configure native peer-to-peer
communication between the CEE points and non-CEE points such as PMD, Safety
Manager points and Experion server points (SCADA, TPS, OPC Advanced, DSA). The
peer-to-peer communication between CEE and the Experion server points are licensed
using "Experion server Peer Responder" feature.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs See above.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ALTSYNCCMD MAXNODEID MINUTE MODIFIEDBY
AUXDESC BACKUPRAMSCRUBERRS MODISREDUN MONTH NAME
BACKUPRAMSWEEPERR NONFTEMARTADDRCOUNT
BADIPCSUM BADUDPCSUM NONFTEMARTAVGDEPTH
BATTERYNOTOK BECMPRICMD NONFTEMARTCOLLCOUNT
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 NONFTEMARTMAXDEPTH NUMACEINCON
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 NUMACEOUTCON NUMCPMINCON
BOOTIMAGEVER CONTCUTOUT NUMCPMOUTCON NUMFIMINCON
C300COMMAND C300MODTYPE NUMFIMOUTCON NUMFTENODES
C300STATE CMAXTEMP CMINTEMP NUMIOLMINCON NUMIOLMOUTCN
CPUFREEAVG CPUFREEMIN NUMSIGS NUMSIOLMINCN
CPUFREERESET CREATEDBY NUMSIOLMOUCN NUMC3INCON
CTEMP CTRLCONFIRM NUMC3OUTCON NUMEFIMINCON
CURDEVICEIDX CURTIME NUMEFIMOUTCON PRIMARYSIG
DATECREATED DAY DAYLIGHTTIME QUALSTATE RAMSCRUBERRS
DEBUGFLOAT DEBUGINT DESC RAMSWEEPERR RDNAUTOSYNC
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
DEVFLAG DEVICEIDX DIRECTSYNC RDNCAPABILTY RDNCMPT
DSBLSYNCCMD ENBLSTBYCMD RDNDELAYAVG RDNDELAYMAX
ENBLSYNCCMD ESIG RDNHISTREASON RDNHISTSTATE
FTEMARTADDRCOUNT RDNLOS RDNROLESTATE
FTEMARTAVGDEPTH RDNSYNCPROG RDNSYNCSTATE
FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT RDNXFERAVG RDNXFERMAX
FTEMARTMAXDEPTH FWREVISION REASONSET SCANAREA SCANASSOCDSP
GOBACKREL GROUP GROUP SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
GROUP.NUMPARAMS GROUP.PARAM SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL SCRIPTOR
GROUP.POSITION HIST HIST.EXTD SECMODNAME SECNAME SECNAMESTRG
HIST.FAST HIST.GATEPARAM SECOND SECONDARYSIG SECTMPNAME
HIST.GATESTRING HIST.GATEVALUE SERIALNUM SIMDEVICEIDX SIMENABLE
HIST.NUMPARAMS HIST.PARAM SIMIPADDRESS STATSRESET
HIST.STD HOUR HWREVMJ SWITCHCMD SYNCTIMEBEG
HWREVMN ICMPINDESTUNREACHS SYNCTIMEEND TASKSTACKHILM
ICMPINECHOREPS ICMPINECHOS TASKSTACKSIZE TASKSTACKUSED
ICMPINERRORS ICMPINMSGS TCPACTIVEOPENS TCPATTEMPTFAILS
ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS TCPCURRESTAB TCPESTABRESETS
ICMPOUTECHOREPS TCPINERRS TCPINSEGS TCPOUTRESETS
ICMPOUTECHOS ICMPOUTERRORS TCPOUTSEGS TCPPASSIVEOPENS
ICMPOUTMSGS ICONSTATE TCPRETRANSSEGS TIMELASTSKEW
IMAGEVER INALM INDRCTSYNC TIMELASTSYNC TIMESOURCE
INDSYNCCMD INITCOMPLETE TIMESYNCSTAT TIMEZONE
INTERLANFAILED IPADDRESS TMBTCPAVGXMITMSGPS
IPFRAGCREATES IPFRAGFAILS TMBTCPMAXXMITMSGPS
IPFRAGOKS IPINADDRERRORS TMBTCPAVGRCVMSGPS
IPINDELIVERS IPINDISCARDS TMBTCPMAXRCVMSGPS TNUMPMDINCON
IPINHDRERRORS IPINRECEIVES TNUMPMDOUTCON TNUMQCSINCON
IPINUNKNOWNPORTS TNUMQCSOUTCON TNUMSCADAINCON
IPOUTDISCARDS IPOUTNOROUTES TNUMSMINCON TREND TREND.NUMBER
IPOUTREQUESTS IPREASSEMFAILS TREND.NUMPARAMS TREND.PARAM
IPREASSEMOKS IPREASSEMREQS TREND.POSITION UDPINDGRAMS
IPROUTINGDISCARDS UDPINERRORS UDPLISTENERS
JOURNALONLY LANAFAILED UDPNOPORTS UDPOUTDGRAMS
LANBFAILED LASTOPMNAME VERSION VERSIONDATE VERSIONNUM
MACADDRA MACADDRB MACADDRR WDTMAXREFRESH WDTMINREFRESH
MAXFTENODES WEEKDAY WEEKDAYFMT YEAR YEARFMT
XOVERFAILED
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.1.4 UOC BLOCK
Description The UOC Platform Block or “UOC Block” presents parameters
which describe key characteristics of the UOC CPM platform and
allows a subset of those parameters to be configured. The UOC
Block is configured within Experion Control Builder along with all
other elements of UOC configuration.
Function The Unit Operations Controller (UOC) is a high value, low cost,
rack-based process controller that can be applied to any process
control application in any industry. Its form factor, cost profile and
licensing model make it especially well-suited to industries that
prefer to limit the scope of a single controller to a single process
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
unit, and to industries that require powerful batch enablers.
The UOC is paired with a virtualized controller called the virtual
Unit Operations Controller (vUOC). The vUOC provides a set of
functions parallel to those of the UOC except that they are.
Inputs
Outputs See above.
Parameters NTPSTAT IPADDRESS
NTPADDRESS DLINKENABLE
NTPOFFSET DLINKIPADDRSTR
NTPOFFSETMAX DLINKIPADDRMASKSTR
NTPLASTSTRATUM DHCPENABLE
TIMESYNCSTAT DHCPSTARTADDR
TIMELASTSTAT DHCPENDADDR
TIMELASTSKEW CPMCOMMAND
PTPENABLE CPMSTATE
PTPSTAT RDNROLESTATE
PTPMASTERIP RDNSYNCSTATE
PTPOFFSET CEERUN
PTPOFFSETMAX PRIMARY
CPUFREEAVG SYNCMAINT
CPU0FREEAVG ALMENBSTATE
CPU1FREEAVG TEMPHIGHLM
CPUFREEMIN CPUFRELLOWLM
CPU1FREEMIN MEMFREELOWLM
UPTIME NVSFREELOWLM
TMUMNTFRQUAVG DLINKVLANID
TMUMNTFRQUMAX MODISREDUN
TRNUMINMSGAVGPS SECMODNAM
TRNUMINMSGMAXPS DLINKRDNPROTO
TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS NOTLOADED
TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS UNDEFINED
TEMPAVG ASSOCASSET
TEMPMAX DEVICEDX
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
TEMPMIN LANAMACADDR
MEMFREEAVG LANBMACADDR
MEMFREEMIN DLINK1MACADDR
NVSFREEAVG RDNMACADDR
NVSFREEMIN LANTXRATE
IMAGEVER_D LANRXRATE
BOOTIMAGEVER LANATXRATE
MODTYPE LANBTXRATE
SERIALNUM LANARXRATE
PLVERSION LANBRXRATE
HWTYPE LANABLOCKEDRATE
HWREVMAJ LANBBLOCKRATE
HWREVMIN NUMFTENODES
LANTXRATEMAX MAXFTENODES
LANRXRATEMAX MAXNONEID
DLINKTXRATE BADIPCSUM
DLINKRXRATE BADUDPCSUM
DLINK1LANIDERR LANRXERR
DLINK2LANIDERR LANTXERR
DLINK1FRAMECRCERR FTEMARTADDRCOUNT
DLINK2FRAMECRCERR FTEMARTMAXDEPTH
DLINKRXERR FTEMARTAVGDEPTH
DLINKTXERR FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT
DLRFAULTCNT BLCKCOMMENT1
DLINKTXRATEMAX BLCKCOMMENT2
DLINKRXRATEMAX BLCKCOMMENT3
DLINK1TXRATEMAX BLCKCOMMENT4
DLINK2TXRATEMAX CREATEDBY
DLINK1RXRATEMAX MODIFIEDBY
DLINK2RXRATEMAX VERSIONDATE
DLRRINGMODE ASSOCASSET
DLRRINGSTATE DEVICEIDX
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
DLRCURRENTROLE TREND.NUMPARAMS
DLRNODECOUNT GROUP.NUMPARAMS
DLRACTIVESUP CTRLCONFIRM
DLRACTIVESUPPRI NUMSIGS
DLINK1LASTACTIVE REASONSET
DLINK2LASTIACTIVE SECSIGSECLVL
DLINKDLRROLE PRIMARISIG
DLRPRECEDENCE SECONDARYSIG
DLRINTERVAL DESC
DLRTIMEOUT CURTIME
UDPINDGRAMS TIMESOURCE
UDPNOPORTS HARTIPENABLE
UDPINERRORS
UDPINCSUMERRORS
UDPOUTDGRAMS
TCPACTIVEOPENS
TCPPASSIVEOPENS
TCPATTEMPTSFAILS
TCPESTABRESETS
TCPCURRESTAB
TCPINSEGS
TCPOUTSEGS
TCPRETRANSSEGS
TCPINERRS
TCPINCSUMMERS
TCPOUTRESETS
IPINRECEIVES
IPINHDRERRORS
IPINADDRERRORS
IPINUNKNOWNPORTS
IPINDISCARDS
IPOUTNOROUTES
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IPREASSEMREQS
IPREASSEMOKS
IPREASSMFAILS
ICMPINMSGS
ICMPINERRORS
ICMPINCSUMERRORS
ICMPINDESTUNREACHS
ICMPINECHOS
ICMPINECHOREPS
ICMPOUTMSGS
ICMPOUTERRORS
ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS
ICMPOUTECHOS
ICMPOUTECHOREPS
SCANCTRLLVL
SCANPNTDTL
SCANGRPDTL
SCANNASOCDSP
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of
each parameter.
4.1.5 Application Control Environment (ACE) Block
Refer to the Application Control Environment (ACE) User’s Guide for more information about this block.
4.2 Control Execution Environment Block
4.2.1 CEEC200 Block
Description Provides control functionality for associated Control Processor Module block. This
block's parameters characterize the CEE within the CPM. In the future, multiple CEEs
may be assigned to a single CPM. This block always runs at an execution period of 2
seconds. There are two versions of the CEE available, the standard version CEE-50ms,
and the fast version CEE-5ms.
Function Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the CEE. Processes
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting. Runs on the CPM
hardware platform. In the future, CEE will run on other platforms as well. Serves as a
faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the CEE rather than
the CPM as a whole. Supports configurable subscription rate for peer-to-peer
communications. Supports peer-to-peer communications among CEEs assigned to
CPMs located in the same management domain. Supports configurable subscription
rate and store response time for specific peer environment. Sequential Control Module
function blocks are supported. Special care should be taken in configuring the SCMs in
5 msec CEE.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs See above.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE BASEPERIOD IPEERCONNERRCODE
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 IPEERCONNERRINFO IPEERCONNSTS
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 IPEERNAME IPEERPATH LSCYCLEOVRN
BLKTYPCOUNT BLKTYPDESC [0…40] MAXBLKTYPES NUMACEOUTCON
BLKTYPHELPTXT BLKTYPLIB NUMBLKTYPES NUMCCLRQU
BLKTYPSIZE CDISPAVGPPS NUMCPMINCON NUMCPMOUTCON
CDISPAVGPPSCONN NUMEXCRQUAVG NUMEXCRQUMAX
CDISPAVGSPSCONN CDISPMAXPPS NUMEXCRSPAVG NUMEXCRSPMAX
CDISPMAXPPSCONN NUMFIMINCON NUMFIMOUTCON
CDISPMAXSPSCONN CEECOMMAND NUMIOLMINCON NUMIOLMOUTCN
CEESTATE CPEERAVGPPS NUMNTFRQUAVG NUMNTFRQUMAX
CPEERAVGPPSCONN NUMPARRSPAVG NUMPARRSPMAX
CPEERAVGSPSCONN CPEERMAXPPS NUMPEERENV NUMSCEINCON
CPEERMAXPPSCONN NUMSCEOUTCON NUMSIOLMINCN
CPEERMAXSPSCONN CPUCYCLEAVG NUMSIOLMOUCN PEERENV
[0..39] CPUCYCLEMAX[0..39] PEERGETAVG[1..30] PEERSTRAVG[1..30]
CPUFREEAVG CPUFREEMIN PEERSTRRESP PEERSUBSCPER
CRCYCLEOVRN[0..40] DESC EUDESC RDISPDEGIMRCONN[1…RDISPCONNMAX]
EXTGETRQUAVG EXTGETRQUMAX RPEERNAME[1…RPEERCONNMAX]
EXTSTRRQUAVG EXTSTRRQUMAX SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
GROUP.NUMPARAMS SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
HIST.NUMPARAMS INALM NAME STATSRESET STRRESP SUBSCPERIOD
NUMACCRQUAVG NUMACCRQUMAX TREND.NUMPARAMS
NUMACEINCON
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.2.2 CEEC200E Block
Description Provides control functionality for associated C200E block. This block's parameters
characterize the CEE within the C200E controller. The base execution cycle for
CEEC200E block 50 mSec. The execution periods for function blocks loaded to the CEE
controller may be set to any of the same values supported by these execution cycles.
Function Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the CEE. Processes the
computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting. Runs on the C200E
hardware platform. Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds
to that of the CEE rather than the C200E as a whole. Supports configurable subscription
rate for peer-to-peer communication. Supports peer-to-peer communication among
CEEs assigned to controllers located in the same management domain. Supports peer
connections to other controllers (C200, C200E, C300, and ACE Nodes) through FTEB.
Supports configurable subscription rate and store response time for specific peer
environment. Sequential Control Module function blocks are supported. With R410,
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
C200E-CEE supports native peer-to-peer communication with non-CEE controllers
such as Safety Manager and PMD points, and Experion server points such as SCADA
and TPS points.The peer-to-peer communication between CEE and the Experion server
points are licensed using "Experion server Peer Responder" feature.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs Refer to the description.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE IPEERCONNERRCODE IPEERCONNERRINFO
BASEPERIOD IPEERCONNSTS IPEERNAME IPEERPATH
BLCKCOMMENT1 LSCYCLEOVRN[0…40] MAXBLKTYPES
BLCKCOMMENT2 NUMACEOUTCON NUMBEVENTSAV
BLCKCOMMENT3 NUMBEVENTSMAX NUMBLKTYPES NUMCCLRQU
BLCKCOMMENT4 NUMCPMINCON NUMCPMOUTCON
BLKTYPCOUNT NUMEXCRQUAVG NUMEXCRQUMAX
BLKTYPDESC NUMEXCRSPAVG NUMEXCRSPMAX NUMFIMINCON
BLKTYPHELPTXT NUMFIMOUTCON NUMIOLMINCON
BLKTYPLIB BLKTYPSIZE NUMIOLMOUTCN NUMNTFRQUAVG
CCLCNT CCLLOADSTAT NUMNTFRQUMAX NUMPARRSPAVG
CDISPAVGPPS NUMPARRSPMAX NUMPEERENV NUMPMDINCON
CDISPAVGPPSCONN NUMPMDOUTCON NUMQCSINCON
CDISPAVGSPSCONN NUMQCSOUTCON NUMSCADAINCON
CDISPMAXPPS NUMSCEINCON NUMSCEOUTCON NUMSIOLMINCN
CDISPMAXPPSCONN NUMSIOLMOUCN NUMSMINCON PEERENV
CDISPMAXSPSCONN PEERGETAVG[1..30] PEERSTRAVG[1..30]
CEECOMMAND CEESTATE PEERSTRRESP PEERSUBSCPER
CPEERAVGPPS RDISPDEGIMRCONN[1…RDISPCONNMAX]
CPEERAVGPPSCONN RPEERNAME[1…RPEERCONNMAX]
CPEERAVGSPSCONN SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
CPEERMAXPPS SCANPNTDTL STATSRESET STRRESP
CPEERMAXPPSCONN SUBSCPERIOD TREND.NUMPARAMS TIMEZONE
CPEERMAXSPSCONN TNUMACEINCON TNUMC3INCON TNUMCPMINCON
CPUCYCLEAVG[0..39] TNUMSCFIMINCON TNUMSCEINCON
CPUCYCLEMAX[0..39] TNUMLIOMINCON TNUMACEOUTCON
CPUFREEAVG CPUFREEMIN TNUMC3OUTCON TNUMCPMOUTCON
CRCYCLEOVRN[0..40] TNUMSCFIMOUTCON TNUMSCEOUTCON
DESC DAYLIGHTTIME TNUMLIOMOUTCON TNUMNTFRQUAVG
EUDESC EXTGETRQUAVG TNUMNTFRQUMAX TINUMINMSGAVGPS
EXTGETRQUMAX TINUMINMSGMAXPS TINUMOUTMSGAVGPS
EXTSTRRQUAVG TINUMOUTMSGMAXPS TRNUMINMSGAVGPS
EXTSTRRQUMAX TRNUMINMSGMAXPS TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS
GROUP.NUMPARAMS TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS YEARFMT WEEKDAYFMT
HIST.NUMPARAMS INALM
NAME NUMACCRQUAVG
NUMACCRQUMAX
NUMACEINCON
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.2.3 CEEC300 Block
Description Provides control functionality for associated C300 block. This block's parameters
characterize the CEE within the C300 controller. In the future, multiple CEEs may be
assigned to a single C300. Execution periods for this block may be 50 mSec, 100 mSec,
200 mSec, 500 mSec, 1 sec, or 2 sec. The execution cycle for CEEC300 block is 50ms.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Function Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the CEE. Processes
the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting. Runs on the C300
hardware platform. In the future, CEE will run on other platforms as well. Serves as a
faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the CEE rather than
the C300 as a whole. Supports configurable subscription rate for peer-to-peer
communications. Supports peer-to-peer communications among CEEs assigned to
controllers located in the same management domain. Supports configurable
subscription rate and store response time for specific peer environment. Sequential
Control Module function blocks are supported. With R410, C300-CEE supports native
peer-to-peer communication with non-CEE controllers such as Safety Manager and
PMD points, and Experion server points such as SCADA and TPS points.The peer-to-
peer communication between CEE and the Experion server points are licensed using
"Experion server Peer Responder" feature.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs See above.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE AUXDESC NUMBLKTYPES NUMCCLRQU NUMCYCLE
BASEPERIOD BLCKCOMMENT1 NUMEXCRQUAVG NUMEXCRQUMAX
BLCKCOMMENT2 BLCKCOMMENT3 NUMEXCRSPAVG NUMEXCRSPMAX
BLCKCOMMENT4 BLKTYPCOUNT NUMEXTBLKS NUMFREEBLKS
BLKTYPDESC BLKTYPHELPTXT NUMFREEDESC NUMMBTCPXMITMSGAVG
BLKTYPLIB BLKTYPSIZE NUMMBTCPXMITMSGMAX
CDISPAVGLPS CDISPAVGLPSCONN NUMMBTCPXMITBYTEAVG
CDISPAVGPPS CDISPAVGPPSCONN NUMMBTCPXMITBYTEMAX
CDISPAVGSPSCONN CDISPMAXLPS NUMMBTCPRCVMSGAVG
CDISPMAXLPSCONN CDISPMAXPPS NUMMBTCPRCVMSGMAX
CDISPMAXPPSCONN NUMMBTCPRCVBYTEAVG
CDISPMAXSPSCONN NUMMBTCPRCVBYTEMAX
CEECOMMAND CEESTATE MBTCPINVALIDRCVMSGCOUNT
CONTCUTOUT CPEERAVGLPS MBTCPFREEBUFCOUNT NUMNTFRQUAVG
CPEERAVGLPSCONN NUMNTFRQUMAX NUMPARRSPAVG
CPEERAVGPPS NUMPARRSPMAX NUMPEERENV
CPEERAVGPPSCONN NUMREGDESC NUMSIGS NUMUSEDBLKS
CPEERAVGSPSCONN NUMUSEDDESC PEERENV PEERGETAVG
CPEERMAXLPS PEERSTRAVG PEERSTRRESP
CPEERMAXLPSCONN PEERSUBSCPER PRIMARYSIG
CPEERMAXPPS QUALSTATE RACYCIMRAVAIL
CPEERMAXPPSCONN RACYCIMRMAX RACYCIMRUSED
CPEERMAXSPSCONN RACYCLGREQAVAIL RACYCLGREQMAX
CPUCYCLEAVG[0..39] RACYCLRQUSED RACYCSMREQAVAIL
CPUCYCLEMAX CRCYCLEOVRN RACYCSMREQMAX RACYCSRQUSED
CREATEDBY CTRLCONFIRM RCYCIMRAVAIL RCYCIMRMAX
DATECREATED DESC RCYCIMRUSED RCYCLGREQAVAIL
ENBMEMALMFL ESIG RCYCLGREQMAX RCYCLRQUSED
EXTGETRQUAVG EXTGETRQUMAX RCYCSMREQAVAIL RCYCSMREQMAX
EXTSTRRQUAVG EXTSTRRQUMAX RCYCSRQUSED RDEGRADALM
FRC FREEMEM FREEMEMINK RDISPAVGLPS RDISPAVGLPSCONN
GROUP GROUP.NUMBER RDISPAVGPPS RDISPAVGPPSCONN
GROUP.NUMPARAMS RDISPCONN RDISPCONNMAX
GROUP.PARAM GROUP.POSITION RDISPDEGIMRCONN RDISPMAXLPS
HIST HIST.EXTD HIST.FAST RDISPMAXLPSCONN RDISPMAXPPS
HIST.GATEPARAM RDISPMAXPPSCONN REASONSET
HIST.GATESTRING HIST.GATEVALUE RPEERAVGLPS RPEERAVGLPSCONN
HIST.NUMPARAMS HIST.PARAM RPEERAVGPPS RPEERAVGPPSCONN
HIST.STD IACYCIMRAVAIL RPEERCONN RPEERCONNMAX
IACYCIMRMAX IACYCIMRUSED RPEERDEGIMRCONN RPEERMAXLPS
IACYCIMRUSEDCONN RPEERMAXLPSCONN RPEERMAXPPS
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IACYCLGREQAVAIL RPEERMAXPPSCONN RPEERNAME
IACYCLGREQMAX RPEERSUBPER RTOTACYCIMR
IACYCLGREQUSED RTOTACYCLGREQ RTOTACYCSMREQ
IACYCLGREQUSEDCONN RTOTCYCIMR RTOTCYCLGREQ
IACYCSMREQAVAIL RTOTCYCSMREQ SCANAREA
IACYCSMREQMAX SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
IACYCSMREQUSED SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
IACYCSMREQUSEDCONN SCANPNTDTL SCRIPTOR SECONDARYSIG
ICYCIMRAVAIL ICYCIMRMAX SECSIGSECLVL SIMCOMMAND SIMSTATE
ICYCIMRUSED ICYCIMRUSEDCONN SCANAREA SCANASSOCDSP
ICYCLGREQAVAIL ICYCLGREQMAX SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
ICYCLGREQUSED SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL STATSRESET
ICYCLGREQUSEDCONN TASKSTACKHILM TASKSTACKSIZE
ICYCSMREQAVAIL ICYCSMREQMAX TASKSTACKUSED TNUMQCSINCON
ICYCSMREQUSED TNUMQCSOUTCON TNUMSCADAINCON
ICYCSMREQUSEDCONN INALM TNUMSMINCON TREND.PARAM
IPEERAVGLPS IPEERAVGPPS TREND.POSITION TOTALMEM
IPEERCONN IPEERCONNMAX TOTALMEMINK USEDMEM USEDMEMINK
IPEERMAXLPS IPEERMAXPPS VERSION VERSIONDATE VERSIONNUM
IPEERNAME JOURNALONLY
LSCYCLEOVRN[0…40]
MAXBLKTYPES MAXFREEBLKSZ
MAXFREEINK MODIFIEDBY
NEXTPHASE NOTIFINHIBIT
NTOTMEMDESC NUMACCRQUAVG
NUMACCRQUMAX NUMASSIGNFBS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.2.4 C300 - 20mS CEE
ATTENTION
l A separate license is required to use the C300 - 20mS CEE controller. For details on the
license, refer to Control Hardware Planning Guide.
l C300 - 20mS CEE controller does not support native peer-to-peer communication with
non-CEE controllers such as Safety Manager and PMD points, and Experion server
points such as SCADA and TPS points.
Description Provides control functionality for associated C300 block. This block's parameters
characterize the CEE within the C300 - 20mS CEE controller. The base execution
period for C300 - 20mS CEE block is 20ms. Control Module assigned to this block can
be configured with the execution period of 20mSec, 40 mSec, 80 mSec, 200 mSec, 400
mSec or 800 mSec.
Function Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the CEE. Processes
the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting. Runs on the C300
hardware platform. In the future, CEE will run on other platforms as well. Serves as a
faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the CEE rather than
the C300 as a whole. Supports configurable subscription rate for peer-to-peer
communications. Supports peer-to-peer communications among CEEs assigned to
controllers located in the same management domain. Supports configurable
subscription rate and store response time for specific peer environment. Supports
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Speed Protection Module (SPM) and Servo Valve Positioner Module (SVPM).
Inputs
Outputs
Parameters ALMENBSTATE AUXDESC NUMEXCRSPAVG NUMEXCRSPMAX
BASEPERIOD BLCKCOMMENT1 NUMEXTBLKS NUMFREEBLKS
BLCKCOMMENT2 BLCKCOMMENT3 NUMFREEDESC
BLCKCOMMENT4 BLKTYPCOUNT NUMMBTCPXMITMSGAVG
BLKTYPDESC BLKTYPHELPTXT NUMMBTCPXMITMSGMAX
BLKTYPLIB BLKTYPSIZE CDISPAVGLPS NUMMBTCPXMITBYTEAVG
CDISPAVGLPSCONN CDISPAVGPPS NUMMBTCPXMITBYTEMAX
CDISPAVGPPSCONN NUMMBTCPRCVMSGAVG
CDISPAVGSPSCONN CDISPMAXLPS NUMMBTCPRCVMSGMAX
CDISPMAXLPSCONN CDISPMAXPPS NUMMBTCPRCVBYTEAVG
CDISPMAXPPSCONN NUMMBTCPRCVBYTEMAX
CDISPMAXSPSCONN CEECOMMAND MBTCPINVALIDRCVMSGCOUNT
CEESTATE CONTCUTOUT MBTCPFREEBUFCOUNT
CPEERAVGLPS CPEERAVGLPSCONN NUMNTFRQUAVG NUMNTFRQUMAX
CPEERAVGPPS CPEERAVGPPSCONN NUMPARRSPAVG NUMPARRSPMAX
CPEERAVGSPSCONN CPEERMAXLPS NUMPEERENV NUMREGDESC NUMSIGS
CPEERMAXLPSCONN CPEERMAXPPS NUMUSEDBLKS NUMUSEDDESC
CPEERMAXPPSCONN PEERENV PEERGETAVG PEERSTRAVG
CPEERMAXSPSCONN CPUCYCLEAVG PEERSTRRESP PEERSUBSCPER
[0..39] CPUCYCLEMAX CRCYCLEOVRN PRIMARYSIG QUALSTATE
CREATEDBY CTRLCONFIRM RACYCIMRAVAIL RACYCIMRMAX
DATECREATED DESC ENBMEMALMFL RACYCIMRUSED RACYCLGREQAVAIL
ESIG EXTGETRQUAVG RACYCLGREQMAX RACYCLRQUSED
EXTGETRQUMAX EXTSTRRQUAVG RACYCSMREQAVAIL RACYCSMREQMAX
EXTSTRRQUMAX FRC FREEMEM RACYCSRQUSED RCYCIMRAVAIL
FREEMEMINK GROUP RCYCIMRMAX RCYCIMRUSED
GROUP.NUMBER RCYCLGREQAVAIL RCYCLGREQMAX
GROUP.NUMPARAMS GROUP.PARAM RCYCLRQUSED RCYCSMREQAVAIL
GROUP.POSITION HIST HIST.EXTD RCYCSMREQMAX RCYCSRQUSED
HIST.FAST HIST.GATEPARAM RDEGRADALM RDISPAVGLPS
HIST.GATESTRING HIST.GATEVALUE RDISPAVGLPSCONN RDISPAVGPPS
HIST.NUMPARAMS HIST.PARAM RDISPAVGPPSCONN RDISPCONN
HIST.STD IACYCIMRAVAIL RDISPCONNMAX RDISPDEGIMRCONN
IACYCIMRMAX IACYCIMRUSED RDISPMAXLPS RDISPMAXLPSCONN
IACYCIMRUSEDCONN RDISPMAXPPS RDISPMAXPPSCONN
IACYCLGREQAVAIL IACYCLGREQMAX REASONSET RPEERAVGLPS
IACYCLGREQUSED RPEERAVGLPSCONN RPEERAVGPPS
IACYCLGREQUSEDCONN RPEERAVGPPSCONN RPEERCONN
IACYCSMREQAVAIL IACYCSMREQMAX RPEERCONNMAX RPEERDEGIMRCONN
IACYCSMREQUSED RPEERMAXLPS RPEERMAXLPSCONN
IACYCSMREQUSEDCONN RPEERMAXPPS RPEERMAXPPSCONN
ICYCIMRAVAIL ICYCIMRMAX RPEERNAME RPEERSUBPER
ICYCIMRUSED ICYCIMRUSEDCONN RTOTACYCIMR RTOTACYCLGREQ
ICYCLGREQAVAIL ICYCLGREQMAX RTOTACYCSMREQ RTOTCYCIMR
ICYCLGREQUSED RTOTCYCLGREQ RTOTCYCSMREQ
ICYCLGREQUSEDCONN SCANAREA SCANASSOCDSP
ICYCSMREQAVAIL ICYCSMREQMAX SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
ICYCSMREQUSED SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL SCRIPTOR
ICYCSMREQUSEDCONN INALM SECONDARYSIG SECSIGSECLVL
IPEERAVGLPS IPEERAVGPPS SIMCOMMAND SIMSTATE SCANAREA
IPEERCONN IPEERCONNMAX SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
IPEERMAXLPS IPEERMAXPPS SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
IPEERNAME JOURNALONLY SCANPNTDTL STATSRESET
LSCYCLEOVRN[0…40] MAXBLKTYPES TASKSTACKHILM TASKSTACKSIZE
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
MAXFREEBLKSZ MAXFREEINK TASKSTACKUSED TREND.PARAM
MODIFIEDBY NEXTPHASE TREND.POSITION TOTALMEM
NOTIFINHIBIT NTOTMEMDESC TOTALMEMINK USEDMEM USEDMEMINK
NUMACCRQUAVG NUMACCRQUMAX VERSION VERSIONDATE VERSIONNUM
NUMASSIGNFBS NUMBLKTYPES
NUMCCLRQU NUMCYCLE
NUMEXCRQUAVG NUMEXCRQUMAX
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.2.5 CEEACE Block
Refer to the Application Control Environment (ACE) User’s Guide for more information about this block.
4.3 Input/Output Link Interface Module Block
4.3.1 IOLIM block
Description Identifies the primary and secondary I/O Link Interface Modules (IOLIM) and associated
I/O Link that serve as the communication bridge between the control system and the
Process Manager (PM) Input/Output Processors (IOPs).
Function Supports C200 Controller Redundant Chassis Pair hardware configurations. Supports
both the publish/subscribe and the client/server communication methods to access
process data and maintenance information from the IOP devices Publishes parameters
describing the status and configuration of the IOPs. Reports run-time diagnostics and
statistical information for the IOLIMs. Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose
scope corresponds to that of the entire PM I/O. Secondary waits to take control if the
“Primary” fails.
Inputs Communications bridge between Integrated Control Processor (ICP)/ControlNet and I/O
Link
Outputs See above.
Parameters BUFXMAX[0..5] BUFXTOTAL[0..5] NVSUSED PEERRATEAVG
BUFXUSED[0..5] COMPNVSCMD PEERRATEMAX PURGEDBCMD
CPUFREEAVG CPUFREEMIN CURTIME RDNCAPABILITY RDNCHASSISID
DISPRATEAVG DISPRATEMAX RDNCMPT RDNDELAYAVG
DRIVERNAME ENCMDS IOLIMSTATE RDNDELAYMAX RDNLOS
MAXIMR MODISREDUN NAME RDNSYNCSTATE RDNXFERAVG
NETWORKTYPE NOTRATEAVG RDNXFERMAX SCANASSOCDSP
NOTRATEMAX NUMCCLRQU SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
NUMCPMINCON NUMCPMOUTCON SCANPNTDTL SHUTDOWNCMD
NUMIMR SLOTNUMBER STATRESET ULCNBMAC
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.4 Input/Output Link Block
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.4.1 IOLINK block
Description Provides interface functionality for associated I/O Link Interface Module (IOLIM) block.
Function Provides supervisory scanning, diagnostic, and performance throughput information for
monitoring I/O Link network status.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ACTPRIM[1..40] CFIFORATEA PHYSIOPSTS1 PHYSMODTYPE1
CFIFORATEM COMMAND PRICHNERRA PRICHNERRB
CRCYCLEOVRN[0..40] DBVALID DESC PRICHNSILA PRICHNSILB
DUPIOLADDR FMWREV[1..8] HDWREV PRICOMMERR PRIIFCARD
[1..8] IOLCHNFAILA IOLCHNFAILB PRIIFCHNERRA PRIIFCHNERRB
IOLCHNSTSA IOLCHNSTSB PRIIFCHNSILA PRIIFCHNSILB
IOLDAUGHSF IOLFREE IOLMAXERR PRIIFCOMMERR PRIIFFILE
IOMCMD[1..40] IOMSTS[1..40] IOMTYPE PRIIFRCVCHN PRIIFSTS PRIRCVCHN
[1..40] IOPORCUR[1..40] IOPORPREV SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
[1..40] IOSSTALLTIME IOSTKNDROP SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
LASTIOLCMD LINKNUM LSCYCLEOVRN SCANRATE [1…40] SECCHNERRA
[0..40] NAME NOTACTSUPV NUMCACHE SECCHNERRB SECCOMMERR
[1..40] OVERRUNSCUR SECIFCHNERRA SECIFCHNERRB
OVERRUNSPREV PARTMISMATCH SECIFCHNSILA SECIFCHNSILB
PARTNOTVIS PDFIFORATEA SECIFCOMMERR SECIFRCVCHN
PDFIFORATEM PERSWAPENB SECRCVCHN STATE STATRESET
PERSWAPTHRES PHYCHNERRA1 SYNCHSTS TOTCHNERRA
PHYCHNERRB1 PHYCHNSILA1 TOTCHNERRB TOTCHNSILA
PHYCHNSILB1 PHYLHFSTA TOTCHNSILB WITHBIAS[1..40]
PHYRCVCHN1 PHYSDSA1 WITHBIASENM[1..40] WRFIFORATEA
WRFIFORATEM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.4.2 IOLINK Block (C300 Controller)
Description Provides interface functionality for associated I/O Link Interface.
Function Provides supervisory scanning, diagnostic, and performance throughput information for
monitoring I/O Link network status.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ACTPRIM AUXDESC AVGWRTIME PHYCHNSILB1 PHYCOMMERR1
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 PHYRCVCHN1 PHYSDSA1
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 PHYSIOPSTS1 PHYSMODTYPE1
CFIFORATEA CFIFORATEM COMMAND PRIBLOCKNAME PRICHNERRA
CREATEDBY CTRLCONFIRM PRICHNERRB PRICHNSILA
DATECREATED DBVALID DESC PRICHNSILB PRICOMMERR PRIIFCARD
DUPIOLADDR ESIG FMWREV1 PRIIFCHNERRA PRIIFCHNERRB
FREESMSOVRRUN GROUP PRIIFCHNSILA PRIIFCHNSILB
GROUP.NUMBER GROUP.NUMPARAMS PRIIFCOMMERR PRIIFFILE
GROUP.PARAM GROUP.POSITION PRIIFRCVCHN PRIIFSTS PRIMARYSIG
HDWREV1 HIPRIRATE HIST HIST.EXTD PRIRCVCHN QUALSTATE REASONSET
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
HIST.FAST HIST.GATEPARAM SCANAREA SCANASSOCDSP
HIST.GATESTRING HIST.GATEVALUE SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
HIST.NUMPARAMS HIST.PARAM SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
HIST.STD IOLCHNFAILA IOLCHNFAILB SCANRATE SCRIPTOR
IOLCHNHISTA IOLCHNHISTB SECBLOCKNAME SECCHNERRA
IOLCHNSTSA IOLCHNSTSB IOLDAUGHSF SECCHNERRB SECCHNSILA
IOLFREE IOLMAXERR IOLOVRRUN SECCHNSILB SECCOMMERR
IOLSOFTFAIL IOMCOMMAND IOMSTS SECIFCHNERRA SECIFCHNERRB
IOMTYPE IOPBLOCKNAME IOPORCUR SECIFCHNSILA SECIFCHNSILB
IOPORPREV IOSSTALLTIME SECIFCOMMERR SECIFRCVCHN
IOSTKNDROP LASTIOLCMD LINKNUM SECONDARYSIG SECRCVCHN
LOPRIRATE MAXNUMPRIIOP SECSIGSECLVL STATE STATRESET
MEDPRIRATE MODIFIEDBY STTEXT STTEXTA STTEXTB
MONREADPARAM MONSTATES SUPVFIFORATEA SUPVFIFORATEM
NOTACTSUPV NUMCACHE NUMPRIIOP SWTCHACT SYNCHSTS TOTCHNERRA
NUMSIGS OVERRUNSCUR TOTCHNERRB TOTCHNSILA
OVERRUNSPREV OVRRUNCURHR TOTCHNSILB TREEBITMAP TREND
OVRRUNPREVHR OVRSIGNA TREND.NUMBER TREND.NUMPARAMS
PARTMISMATCH PARTNOTVIS TREND.PARAM TREND.POSITION
PDFIFORATEA PDFIFORATEM VERSION VERSIONDATE VERSIONNUM
PERSWAPENB PERSWAPTHRES WITHBIAS WITHBIASENM
PHYCHNERRA1 PHYCHNERRB1 WRFIFORATEA WRFIFORATEM
PHYCHNSILA1
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.4.3 IOLINK Block (C300 - 20mS CEE)
Description Provides interface functionality for associated I/O Link Interface.
Function Provides supervisory scanning, diagnostic, and performance throughput information for
monitoring I/O Link network status. Reports a “Pre-Fetch Overrun” diagnostic alarm if
rate of increase of pre-fetch overruns exceeds 1 in 200 seconds. This indicates that the
end-to-end response time is larger than expected. Once this alarm is reported, it will
RTN after a period of 200 seconds provided no new overrun occurs during this interval.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ACTPRIM AUXDESC AVGWRTIME PFOVERRUNSCUR
BASEPERIOD BLCKCOMMENT1 PFOVERRUNSPREV PHYCHNSILB1
BLCKCOMMENT2 BLCKCOMMENT3 PHYCOMMERR1 PHYRCVCHN1
BLCKCOMMENT4 CFIFORATEA PHYSDSA1 PHYSIOPSTS1
CFIFORATEM COMMAND CREATEDBY PHYSMODTYPE1 PRIBLOCKNAME
CTRLCONFIRM DATECREATED DBVALID PRICHNERRA PRICHNERRB
DESC DUPIOLADDR ESIG FMWREV1 PRICHNSILA PRICHNSILB
FREESMSOVRRUN GROUP PRICOMMERR PRIIFCARD
GROUP.NUMBER GROUP.NUMPARAMS PRIIFCHNERRA PRIIFCHNERRB
GROUP.PARAM GROUP.POSITION PRIIFCHNSILA PRIIFCHNSILB
HDWREV1 HIPRIRATE HIST HIST.EXTD PRIIFCOMMERR PRIIFFILE
HIST.FAST HIST.GATEPARAM PRIIFRCVCHN PRIIFSTS PRIMARYSIG
HIST.GATESTRING HIST.GATEVALUE PRIRCVCHN QUALSTATE REASONSET
HIST.NUMPARAMS HIST.PARAM SCANAREA SCANASSOCDSP
HIST.STD IOLCHNFAILA IOLCHNFAILB SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
IOLCHNHISTA IOLCHNHISTB SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IOLCHNSTSA IOLCHNSTSB SCANRATE SCRIPTOR
IOLDAUGHSF IOLFREE IOLINKTYPE SECBLOCKNAME SECCHNERRA
IOLMAXERR IOLOVRRUN IOLSOFTFAIL SECCHNERRB SECCHNSILA
IOMCOMMAND IOMSTS IOMTYPE SECCHNSILB SECCOMMERR
IOPBLOCKNAME IOPORCUR SECIFCHNERRA SECIFCHNERRB
IOPORPREV IOSSTALLTIME SECIFCHNSILA SECIFCHNSILB
IOSTKNDROP LASTIOLCMD LINKNUM SECIFCOMMERR SECIFRCVCHN
LOPRIRATE MAXNUMPRIIOP SECONDARYSIG SECRCVCHN
MEDPRIRATE MODIFIEDBY SECSIGSECLVL STATE STATRESET
MONREADPARAM MONSTATES STTEXT STTEXTA STTEXTB
NOTACTSUPV NUMCACHE NUMPRIIOP SUPVFIFORATEA SUPVFIFORATEM
NUMSIGS OVERRUNSCUR SWTCHACT SYNCHSTS TOTCHNERRA
OVERRUNSPREV OVRRUNCURHR TOTCHNERRB TOTCHNSILA
OVRRUNPREVHR OVRSIGNA TOTCHNSILB TREEBITMAP TREND
PARTMISMATCH PARTNOTVIS TREND.NUMBER TREND.NUMPARAMS
PDFIFORATEA PDFIFORATEM TREND.PARAM TREND.POSITION
PERSWAPENB PERSWAPTHRES VERSION VERSIONDATE VERSIONNUM
PHYCHNERRA1 PHYCHNERRB1 WITHBIAS WITHBIASENM
PHYCHNSILA1 WRFIFORATEA WRFIFORATEM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.5 OLE for Process Control Server Block
4.5.1 OPC block
Description Provides the representation of an OPC server to the control system. It does not have an
associated Control Execution Environment block or any blocks assigned to it.
Function Serves as an independent block to provide a communications path to an OPC server.
Does not have a corresponding run-time object in the system and no run-time status is
obtained directly from the OPC server.
Inputs OPC compatible data exchange
Outputs See above.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 HOSTNAMEPRI NAME PROGID
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 DESC [0..40] SCANASSOCDSP
EXTREF EXTREFSTRUCT SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
GROUP.NUMPARAMS HIST.NUMPARAMS SCANPNTDTL
HOSTIPPRI TREND.NUMPARAMS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.6 Inter Cluster Gateway Block
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.6.1 Inter Cluster Gateway (ICG) Block
Description Provides a path for the transfer of data between ACE nodes in two separate Experion
clusters.
Function This block acts as the means of communicating between Experion clusters. It makes
CDA data from one Experion cluster available to the other Experion cluster. It can act as
the client to the corresponding block in the other Experion cluster.
Inputs Regulatory control data from OPC Gateways or Inter Cluster Gateways residing in ACE
nodes in another Experion cluster
Outputs Set point data pushed to regulatory control points resident in its Experion cluster
Parameters ALMENBSTATE BLCKCOMMENT1 GWPID GWSTATSRESET
BLCKCOMMENT2 BLCKCOMMENT3 GWUTCCONVERT HIST.NUMPARAMS
BLCKCOMMENT4 CDISPAVGPPS HOSTIPPRI HOSTNAMEPRI IMAGEVER
CDISPAVGPPSCONN INALM IPEERCONNERRCODE
CDISPAVGSPSCONN CDISPMAXPPS IPEERCONNERRINFO IPEERCONNSTS
CDISPMAXPPSCONN IPEERNAME IPEERPATH
CDISPMAXSPSCONN CPEERAVGPPS JOURNALONLY MODIFIEDBY NAME
CPEERAVGPPSCONN NUMACCRQUAVG NUMACEINCON
CPEERAVGSPSCONN CPEERMAXPPS NUMACTIVEPOINTS NUMCLIENTCONN
CPEERMAXPPSCONN NUMCPMINCON NUMFAILEDGETITEM
CPEERMAXSPSCONN CREATEDBY NUMFIMINCON NUMIOLMINCON
CTRLCONFIRM DATECREATED DESC NUMNTFRQUAVG NUMPARRSPAVG
EEGSTATE GWCOMMAND GWHCIFLAG NUMPARRSPMAX NUMPOINTSREADS
GWHOSTIPPRI GWHOSTNAMEPRI NUMPOINTSWRITES NUMSCEINCON
GWOPCCONNSTATUS NUMSIGS NUMSIOLMINCN PRIMARYSIG
GWOPCCONNSTR GWOPCDCPS RDISPDEGIMRCONN REASONSET
GWOPCGETERR GWOPCGSTATE RPEERNAME SCANCTRLLVL
GWOPCPARAMCNT GWOPCPMONERR SECONDARYSIG SECSIGSECLVL
GWOPCPMONNAME TOTALNUMGETITEM
GWOPCPMONQUAL GWOPCPMONSTR TOTALNUMPOINTSREADS
GWOPCSRVSTATE GWOPCSTOREERR TREND.NUMPARAMS VERSIONDATE
GWOPCSTOREPS GWOPCVERSION
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.7 Redundancy Module Block
4.7.1 RM block
Description Identifies the Primary and Secondary Redundancy Modules connected by a dedicated
redundancy cable in a Redundant Chassis Pair (RCP). It associates the Primary RM
with its “partner” Secondary RM block. This block always runs at an execution period of
2 seconds. It is redundancy compliant.
Function Provides parameters describing the status and configuration of the RM. Handles
notification reporting. Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope
corresponds to that of the RM as a whole.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications Redundancy communications
through the redundancy cable.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Outputs See above.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE AREVISION MULREDUNSTAT NETWORKTYPE
AUTOSYNCCMD AUTOSYNCOPT NUMSLOTS PREVISION PRODCODE
AUTOSYNCSTAT AVERSION PRODTYPE PRODTYPEA PROGCMD
BECMPRICMD BREVISION BVERSION PROGCMDRECOG QUALPROGA
CHANINUSE[0..31] CJDISABLE READINESS READINESSA
CLKADJUST CLKTIME CLKZONE RECOVMSGIDX REDUNSTATE
CONFIGURED DISPPOS DISQSECCMD REDUNSTATEA REFRESHMS
DRIVERNAME ENTERSBYCMD ERRFL SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
ERRORCODE ERRORMSGIDX EUDESC SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
GENSTATE GENSTATEA HIALM SCANPNTDTL SECMODNAME
INTISWCMD IPADDRESS KEYWORD SECNAMESTRING SECTMPNAME
LASTSYNCABRT LASTSYNCARES SERIALNUM SLOTNUMBER STDTIME
MAJRECFAULT MAJURECFAULT SWAPCTRLCMD SWAPPOSCMD
MINRECFAULT MINURECFAULT SWAPSBYCMD SYNCSECCMD
MODCOMPATA MODTYPEA ULCNBMAC VENDORID WCTCLKTIME
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.8 Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge Module Block
4.8.1 FTEB block
Description Provides representation of the Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE) Bridge module to support
supervisory level communications over Honeywell's Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE)
network.
Function Provides parameters describing the status and configuration of the FTE Bridge module.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the Fault
Tolerant Ethernet Bridge module as a whole. Supports non-redundant and redundant
C200 Controller and Fieldbus Interface Module chassis configurations. Supports direct
communication between Series A chassis I/O and C300 Supports C300 communication
with ControlNet devices when mounted in a Series A chassis having a CNI Secondary
waits to take control if the “Primary” fails. The device index of the Secondary FTE Bridge
equals the address of the Primary FTE Bridge plus one.
Inputs TCP/IP communications and Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs See Above
Parameters BADIPCSUM BADUDPCSUM MAXFTENODES MAXNODEID
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 MODIFIEDBY MODISREDUN NAME
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 NONFTEMARTADDRCOUNT
CONNCLOSEFAIL CONNERR NONFTEMARTAVGDEPTH
CONNOPENFAIL CONNOPENREJECT NONFTEMARTCOLLCOUNT
CONNSENDERR CONSTAT NONFTEMARTMAXDEPTH
CPUFREEAVG CPUFREEMIN NUMFTENODES NUMIOM NUMSIGS
CREATEDBY CTRLCONFIRM ORIAPPCONNID[1..48] ORICONNSTATE
DATECREATED DESC DEVICEIDX [1..48] ORIPATH[1..48] ORITCLASS[1..48]
FTEBBLOCK FTEMARTADDRCOUNT ORMUXED[1..48] PRIMARYSIG
FTEMARTAVGDEPTH RDNCHASSISID RDNCMPT RDNLOS
FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT RDNSYNCSTATE REASONSET
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
FTEMARTMAXDEPTH RECVCLOSEREQ RECVCLOSERSP
GROUP.NUMPARAMS HIST.NUMPARAMS RECVNAKS RECVOPENREQ
ICMPINDESTUNREACHS RECVOPENRSP SCANASSOCDSP
ICMPINECHOREPS ICMPINECHOS SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
ICMPINERRORS ICMPINMSGS SCANPNTDTL SECNAMESTRG
ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS SECONDARYSIG SECSIGSECLVL
ICMPOUTECHOREPS ICMPOUTECHOS SENDCLOSEREQ SENDCLOSERESP
ICMPOUTERRORS ICMPOUTMSGS SENDOPENREQ SENDOPENRSP
ICPSTATRESET IMAGEVER SLOTNUMBER STATRESET
INTERLANFAILED IOMASAPH IOMGRCLI TCPACTIVEOPENS TCPATTEMPTFAILS
IOMNAME IPADDRESS IPFRAGCREATES TCPCONNTABLE TCPCURRESTAB
IPFRAGFAILS IPFRAGOKS TCPESTABRESETS TCPINERRS
IPINADDRERRORS IPINDELIVERS TCPINSEGS TCPOUTRESETS
IPINDISCARDS IPINHDRERRORS TCPOUTSEGS TCPPASSIVEOPENS
IPINRECEIVES IPINUNKNOWNPORTS TCPRETRANSSEGS TGTAPPCONNID
IPOUTDISCARDS IPOUTNOROUTES [1..24 TGTCONNSTATE[1..24
IPOUTREQUESTS IPREASSEMFAILS TGTTCLASS[1..24]
IPREASSEMOKS IPREASSEMREQS TREND.NUMPARAMS UDPINDGRAMS
IPROUTINGDISCARDS LANAFAILED UDPINERRORS UDPLISTENERS
LANARXRATE LANARXRATEMAX UDPNOPORTS UDPOUTGRAMS
LANATXRATE LANATXRATEMAX UNCONNSENDERR VERSIONDATE
LANBFAILED LANBRXRATE XOVERFAILED
LANBRXRATEMAX LANBTXRATE
LANBTXRATEMAX
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.9 Input Type I/O Module Blocks
Model numbers beginning with the prefix “TK” are for a coated version of the I/O module.
4.9.1 TC-HAI081/TK-HAI081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA -
Analog Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters BADCAL[0..numChans-1] CALBIAS HIGHSIGNAL[0..numChans-1]
[0..numChans-1] COMMFAULT INPUTRANGE[0..numChans-1]
COMMTHRESHOLD DIGFILTER IOMLOCATION LOWENG[0..numChans-1]
[0..numChans-1] HANDLETIMEOUT HART LOWSIGNAL[0..numChans-
[0..numChans-1] HIGHENG[0..numChans- 1]NOTCHFILTER[0..numChans-1] PV
1] [0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.9.2 TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 – 1756-IF6I (6 Channel - 10V / 4 to
20mA Isolated - Analog Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS MINORREV NOTCHFILTER[0..numChans-
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO BADCAL 1] NUMCHANS NUMCONN
[0..numChans-1] CALBIAS[0..numChans- NUMDISCONN NUMSHUTDOWN
1] CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT OHMOFFSET[0..numChans-1]
CJDISABLE CJOFFSET CJOFFSET ORDERINCEE ORDERINCM
[0..numChans-1] DESC DIGFILTER OVERRANGE[0..numChans-1] PERIOD
[0..numChans-1] DLCNBSLOT PHASE PRODTYPE PVRAW
ESTWEIGHT EUDESC EXECSTATE [0..numChans-1] RTPPRESENT
HIALM HIGHENG[0..numChans-1] SAMPLERATE SCANASSOCDSP
HIGHSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] IFTRANS SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
INALM INPUTRANGE[0..numChans-1] SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD LOWENG SENSORTYPE[0..numChans-1] SIPTYPE
[0..numChans-1] LOWSIGNAL [0..numChans-1] TEMPMODE ULCNBMAC
[0..numChans-1] MAJORREV UNDERRANGE[0..numChans-1]
UPDATOPT VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.9.3 TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 – 1756-IF16 (16 Channel - 10V / 4 to
20mA Non-Isolated - Analog Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of
IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT EUDESC PRODTYPE SCANASSOCDSP
EXECSTATE HIALM INALM IOMSLOT SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
IOMTYPE KEYWORD MAJORREV SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
MINORREV NUMCHANS ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.9.4 TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 – 1756-IA16 (16 Channel - 120Vac Non-
Isolated - Digital Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of
IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS MAJORREV MINORREV NOFIELDPWR
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO [0..numChans-1] NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT COS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
[0..numChans-1] DESC DLCNBSLOT ELOF NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
[0..numChans-1] ESTWEIGHT EUDESC ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
EWIREOFF[0..numChans-1] EXECSTATE PRODTYPE PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
FILTERHDR[0..numChans-1] FILTEROFF SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
[0..numChans / 8] FILTERON[0..numChans / SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
8] HIALM HWFAULT[0..numChans-1] INALM SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD UPDATOPT VENDOR WIREOFF
[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.9.5 TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 – 1756-IB32/B (32 Channel - 24Vdc
Non-Isolated - Digital Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 32 channels (points), as part of
IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device. Data is“triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value.)
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS MAJORREV MINORREV NOFIELDPWR
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO [0..numChans-1] NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT COS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
[0..numChans-1] DESC DLCNBSLOT ELOF NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
[0..numChans-1] ESTWEIGHT EUDESC ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
EWIREOFF[0..numChans-1] EXECSTATE PRODTYPE PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
FILTERHDR[0..numChans-1] FILTEROFF SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
[0..numChans / 8] FILTERON[0..numChans / SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
8] HIALM HWFAULT[0..numChans-1] INALM SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD UPDATOPT VENDOR WIREOFF
[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.9.6 TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 – 1756-IB16I (16 Channel - 24Vdc
Isolated - Digital Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of
IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device. Data is“triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value.)
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS MAJORREV MINORREV NOFIELDPWR
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO [0..numChans-1] NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT COS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
[0..numChans-1] DESC DLCNBSLOT ELOF NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
[0..numChans-1] ESTWEIGHT EUDESC ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
EWIREOFF[0..numChans-1] EXECSTATE PRODTYPE PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
FILTERHDR[0..numChans-1] FILTEROFF SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
[0..numChans / 8] FILTERON[0..numChans / SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
8] HIALM HWFAULT[0..numChans-1] INALM SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD UPDATOPT VENDOR WIREOFF
[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.9.7 TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 – 1756-IA16I (16 Channel - 120Vac
Isolated - Digital Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of
IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS MAJORREV MINORREV NOFIELDPWR
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO [0..numChans-1] NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT COS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
[0..numChans-1] DESC DLCNBSLOT ELOF NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
[0..numChans-1] ESTWEIGHT EUDESC ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
EWIREOFF[0..numChans-1] EXECSTATE PRODTYPE PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
FILTERHDR[0..numChans-1] FILTEROFF SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
[0..numChans / 8] FILTERON[0..numChans / SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
8] HIALM HWFAULT[0..numChans-1] INALM SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD UPDATOPT VENDOR WIREOFF
[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.9.8 TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 – 1756-IM16I (16 Channel - 220Vac
Isolated - Digital Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of
IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS MAJORREV MINORREV NOFIELDPWR
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO [0..numChans-1] NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT COS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
[0..numChans-1] DESC DLCNBSLOT ELOF NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
[0..numChans-1] ESTWEIGHT EUDESC ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
EWIREOFF[0..numChans-1] EXECSTATE PRODTYPE PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
FILTERHDR[0..numChans-1] FILTEROFF SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
[0..numChans / 8] FILTERON[0..numChans / SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
8] HIALM HWFAULT[0..numChans-1] INALM SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD UPDATOPT VENDOR WIREOFF
[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.9.9 TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 – 1756-IA8D (8 Channel - 120Vac
Diagnostic Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC and provides
selected diagnostic information for associated channels.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Supports the following diagnostics, which are user configurable for each channel:
l Open Wire Detection: Senses when current input for a given channel falls below a
certain value. When an input uses dry contacts, you must include a bleed resistor
in the input. You may not need a bleed resistor for solid state contacts.
l Loss of Field Power: Senses when field power of a group of channels is lost.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes once
every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE PRODTYPE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
EUDESC EXECSTATE HIALM INALM SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT
MAJORREV MINORREV VENDOR;
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter
Reference for definitions of each
parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.9.10 TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 – 1756-IB16D (16 Channel - 24Vdc
Diagnostic Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC and provides
selected diagnostic information for associated channels.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Supports the following diagnostic, which is user configurable for each channel:
l Open Wire Detection: Senses when current input for a given channel falls below a
certain value. When an input uses dry contacts, you must include a bleed resistor
in the input. You may not need a bleed resistor for solid state contacts.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes once
every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE PRODTYPE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
EUDESC EXECSTATE HIALM INALM SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT
MAJORREV MINORREV VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.9.11 TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 – 1756-IT6I (6 Channel - Thermocouple
Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE PRODTYPE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
EUDESC EXECSTATE HIALM INALM SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT
MAJORREV MINORREV VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.9.12 TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 – 1756-IT6I2 (6 Channel - Thermocouple
Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC. This module
is a replacement for the previous TC-IXL061 module.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NOTCHFILTER NUMCHANS NUMCONN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO CALBIAS NUMDISCONN NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANNUM ORDERINCEE ORDERINCM PERIOD
CHANTEXT CHANTYPE DESC PHASE PRODTYPE PUBRATE
DIGFILTER DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT SAMPLERATE SCANASSOCDSP
EUDESC EXECSTATE HIALM INALM SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE INPUTRANGE SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
KEYWORD MAJORREV MINORREV SENSORTYPE SIPTYPE TEMPMODE
ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.9.13 TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 – 1756-IR6I (6 Channel - RTD Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE PRODTYPE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
EUDESC EXECSTATE HIALM INALM SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT
MAJORREV MINORREV VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.10 Output Type I/O Module Blocks
Model numbers beginning with the prefix“TK” are for a coated version of the I/O module.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.10.1 TC-HAO081/TK-HAO081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA -
Analog Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters BADCAL[0..numChans-1] CALBIAS LOWENG[0..numChans-1] LOWSIGNAL
[0..numChans-1] COMMFAULT [0..numChans-1] OP[0..numChans-1] PV
COMMTHRESHOLD FAULTVALUE [0..numChans-1] SHEDMODE
[0..numChans-1] HART[0..numChans-1] [0..numChans-1] SIPTYPE[0..numChans-1]
HIGHENG[0..numChans-1] HIGHSIGNAL SLOT0[0..numChans-1] SLOT1
[0..numChans-1] IDLEMODE [0..numChans-1] SLOT2[0..numChans-1]
[0..numChans-1] IOMLOCATION SLOT3[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.10.2 TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 – 1756-OF6CI (6 Channel - 4 to 20mA
- Analog Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS MAJORREV MINORREV NUMCHANS
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO BADCAL NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
[0..numChans-1] CALBIAS[0..numChans-1] NUMSHUTDOWN OPFINAL
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT DESC [0..numChans-1] ORDERINCEE
DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT EUDESC ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
EXECSTATE FAULTVALUE[0..numChans-1] PRODTYPE SAMPLERATE
HIALM HIGHENG[0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
HIGHSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] INALM SCANEUHI SCANEULO
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD LOWENG SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
[0..numChans-1] LOWSIGNAL[0..numChans- SIPTYPE[0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC
1] UPDATOPT VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.10.3 TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 – 1756-OF6VI (6 Channel - 10V -
Analog Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS LOWSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] MAJORREV
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO BADCAL MINORREV NUMCHANS NUMCONN
[0..numChans-1] CALBIAS[0..numChans-1] NUMDISCONN NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT OPFINAL[0..numChans-1] ORDERINCEE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
EUDESC EXECSTATE FAULTVALUE PRODTYPE SAMPLERATE
[0..numChans-1] HIALM HIGHENG SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
[0..numChans-1] HIGHSIGNAL SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
[0..numChans-1] INALM IOMSLOT SCANPNTDTL SIPTYPE[0..numChans-1]
IOMTYPE KEYWORD LOWENG ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT VENDOR
[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.10.4 TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081(1756-OF8) (8 Channel - 10V / 4 to
20mA Non-Isolated - Analog Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS MAJORREV MINORREV NUMCHANS
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO BADCAL NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
[0..numChans-1] CALBIAS[0..numChans-1] NUMSHUTDOWN OPFINAL
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT [0..numChans-1] ORDERINCEE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT EUDESC ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
EXECSTATE FAULTVALUE[0..numChans-1] PRODTYPE SAMPLERATE
HIALM HIGHENG[0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
HIGHSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] INALM SCANEUHI SCANEULO
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD LOWENG SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
[0..numChans-1] LOWSIGNAL[0..numChans- SIPTYPE[0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC
1] UPDATOPT VENDOR WIREOFF[0..7]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.10.5 TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 – 1756-OB16I (16 Channel - 120 Vac
Non-Isolated - Digital Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of
IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NOLOAD[0..numChans-1] NUMCHANS
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ENOLOAD ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE PRODTYPE
[0..numChans-1] ESTWEIGHT ETRANS PVSTS PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
EUDESC EVERIFY[0..numChans-1] PWMPERIOD[0..numChans-1] SAFESTATE
EXECSTATE EZCROSS[0..numChans- [0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
1] FAILSTATE[0..numChans-1] HIALM SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
INALM IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL SHORT
MAJORREV MINORREV NOFIELDPWR [0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT
[0..numChans-1] VENDOR VERIFYLOST[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.10.6 TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 – 1756-OB32 (32 Channel - 24Vdc
Non-Isolated Digital Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 32 channels (points), as part of
IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC. Data is “triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ENOLOAD PRODTYPE PVSTS PVVAL
[0..numChans-1] ESTWEIGHT ETRANS [0..numChans-1] PWMPERIOD
EUDESC EVERIFY[0..numChans-1] [0..numChans-1] SAFESTATE
EXECSTATE EZCROSS[0..numChans-1] [0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
FAILSTATE[0..numChans-1] HIALM INALM SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL SHORT
MAJORREV MINORREV NOFIELDPWR [0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC
[0..numChans-1] NOLOAD[0..numChans-1] UPDATOPT VENDOR VERIFYLOST
[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.10.7 TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 – 1756-OB16I (16 Channel - 24Vdc
Isolated Digital Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of
IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC. Data is“triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ENOLOAD PRODTYPE PVSTS PVVAL
[0..numChans-1] ESTWEIGHT ETRANS [0..numChans-1] PWMPERIOD
EUDESC EVERIFY[0..numChans-1] [0..numChans-1] SAFESTATE
EXECSTATE EZCROSS[0..numChans-1] [0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
FAILSTATE[0..numChans-1] HIALM INALM SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL SHORT
MAJORREV MINORREV NOFIELDPWR [0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC
[0..numChans-1] NOLOAD[0..numChans-1] UPDATOPT VENDOR VERIFYLOST
[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.10.8 TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 – 1756-OA16I (16 Channel - 120 Vac
Isolated - Digital Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of
IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NOLOAD[0..numChans-1] NUMCHANS
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ENOLOAD ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE PRODTYPE
[0..numChans-1] ESTWEIGHT ETRANS PVSTS PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
EUDESC EVERIFY[0..numChans-1] PWMPERIOD[0..numChans-1] SAFESTATE
EXECSTATE EZCROSS[0..numChans- [0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
1] FAILSTATE[0..numChans-1] HIALM SCANCTRLLVL SCANEUHI SCANEULO
INALM IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL SHORT
MAJORREV MINORREV NOFIELDPWR [0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT
[0..numChans-1] VENDOR VERIFYLOST[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.10.9 TC-ODX081/TK-ODX081 – 1756-OA8D (8 Channel - 120Vac-
Diagnostic Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC and provides
selected diagnostic information for associated channels.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Supports the following diagnostics, which are user configurable for each channel
with the exception of the Short Circuit Protection/Overload diagnostic which is always
enabled:
l Short Circuit Protection/Overload: Senses when current draw for a given channel
is above the limit and protects the device from damage.
l Loss of Field Power: Senses lack of power for a channel, if zero-crossing on the
ac-line power is not detected which causes the output state to change.
l No Load/Hardware Point Fault: Senses when the output current draw falls below
the threshold or a hardware output failure occurs. It only works when the output is
in the OFF state.
l Output Verification: Verifies if the actual output state matches the commanded
output state for field side verification. It only works when the output is in the ON
state.
l Pulse Test: Periodically checks the output to verify that it still has the ability to
change states without causing the load to transition. (This function only operates in
systems with software version R120 or greater.)
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes once
every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC. Data is“triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE PRODTYPE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
EUDESC EXECSTATE HIALM INALM SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT
MAJORREV MINORREV VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.10.10 TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 – 1756-OB16D (16 Channel - 24Vdc-
Diagnostic Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC and provides
selected diagnostic information for associated channels.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Supports the following diagnostics, which are user configurable for each channel
with the exception of the Short Circuit Protection/Overload diagnostic, which is always
enabled.
l Short Circuit Protection/Overload: Senses when current draw for a given channel
is above the limit and protects the device from damage.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l No Load/Hardware Point Fault: Senses when the output current draw falls below
the threshold or a hardware output failure occurs. It only works when the output is
in the OFF state.
l Output Verification: Verifies if the actual output state matches the commanded
output state for field side verification. It only works when the output is in the ON
state.
l Pulse Test: Periodically checks the output to verify that it still has the ability to
change states without causing the load to transition. (This function only operates in
systems with software version R120 or greater.)
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes once
every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC. Data is“triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS NUMCONN NUMDISCONN
ASAERRCODE ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN ORDERINCEE
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANTEXT ORDERINCM PERIOD PHASE PRODTYPE
DESC DLCNBSLOT ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
EUDESC EXECSTATE HIALM INALM SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT IOMTYPE KEYWORD SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT
MAJORREV MINORREV VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.10.11 TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 – 1756-OX8I (8 Channel - 8 n.c., 8
n.o. 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac Isolated - Relay Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 NAME SAFESTATE[0..numChans-1]
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 DESC SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
DLCNBSLOT EXECSTATE FAILSTATE SCANEUHI SCANEULO
[0..numChans-1] IOMSLOT IOMTYPE SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
IOCONNSTATUS MAJORREV MINORREV ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.10.12 TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 – 1756-OW16I (16 Channel, 5-
150Vdc, 10-265Vac Isolated - Contact Output)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for
data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM. Executes
once every cycle. Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM
configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 NAME SAFESTATE[0..numChans-1]
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 DESC SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
DLCNBSLOT EXECSTATE FAILSTATE SCANEUHI SCANEULO
[0..numChans-1] IOMSLOT IOMTYPE SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
IOCONNSTATUS MAJORREV MINORREV ULCNBMAC UPDATOPT VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.11 Serial Interface Module (SIM) I/O Module Block
4.11.1 TC-MUX021/TK-MUX021 (Up to 32 Array Channel Function
Blocks)
Description Identifies the physical Serial Interface Module (SIM) for the CPM to provide links to
associated Array Channel blocks and provides selected diagnostic events for
associated channels.
Function Provides configuration and communication software to enable devices to communicate
via an ASCII serial protocol to perform bi-directional data exchange directly with the
Experion PKS Control Processor. Stores are not guaranteed during a switch over. That
is, the store attempt may occur in the primary, but not reach the IO Module before the
switch over occurs. The secondary will not attempt to re-send the information.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured FTAs.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE ASACONNSTS[0..7] KEYWORD MAJORREV MINORREV
ASAERRCODE[0..7] ASAERRINFO[0..7] NUMCHANS NUMCONN[0..7]
CATNUMBER CEESTATE CHANINUSE NUMDISCONN[0..7] NUMSHUTDOWN
[0..31] CHANSTS[0..31] DESC DLCNBSLOT [0..7] ORDERINCEE ORDERINCM
ERRCODE[0..31] ERRFL[0..31] PERIOD PHASE PRODTYPE
ESTWEIGHT EUDESC EXECSTATE SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
FTAAOVRNFL FTAASTS FTABOVRNFL SCANEUHI SCANEULO SCANGRPDTL
FTABSTS INALM IOMSLOT IOMTYPE SCANPNTDTL ULCNBMAC VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.12 Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO) Blocks
4.12.1 AICHANNEL (PMIO) block
Description The AI channel block represents a single analog input point on one of the following I/O
Processors: HLAI, HLAI-100, LLAI, LLMUX, RHMUX, and STI. The analog input point
converts an analog signal received from a field sensor to engineering units for use by
control function blocks in the Experion PKS system.
l Analog-to Digital Conversion
l PV Characterization
l Range Checking and PV Filtering
l PV Source Selection
l Alarm Detection
Parameters CHANNUM CJTACT COMMAND PVEXEULO PVEXHIFL PVEXLOFL PVRAW
DAMPING DECONF DESC INPTDIR PVRAWHI PVRAWLO PVSTS PVTEMP
IOP IOPTYPE LASTPV LOCUTOFF SECVAR SENSRTYP SERIALNO SLWSRCID
LRL LRV NAME PIUOTDCF PNTFORM STATE STI_EU STIDBDISCRE
PTEXECST PV PVCALC PVCHAR STIPVNUMBER STISCRATCHPAD
PVCLAMP PVEUHI PVEULO STISTATUS STISWVER STITAG TCRNGOPT
PVEXEUHI TF URL URV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.2 HAICHANNEL (PMIO) block
Description The HAI channel block represents a single analog input point on the HLAIHART I/O
Processor. The analog input point converts an analog signal received from a field
sensor to engineering units for use by control function blocks in the Experion PKS
system.
l Analog-to Digital Conversion
l PV Characterization
l Range Checking and PV Filtering
l PV Source Selection
l Alarm Detection
Additionally, the HAI channel supports HART digital data received from HART capable
devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOP. Dynamic and
device variable data and device status is collected from the device for use by the control
system.
Parameters ACCEPTDEV ACCEPTRNG CHANNUM HCMD16 HCMD48BT[1..200]
CJTACT COMMAND CONTAINEDIN DEVICE HCMD48NOTIFY[1..200]
DECONF DESC HCFGDEV HCMD00 HCMD48STRNGS[1..200] HCMDFAIL
HCMD12 HCMD13 HCMD14 HDESC HDEVID HCMDRESP HCOMERFL HCOMFAIL
HDEVIDFL HDEVIDCD HDEVMFG HCOMHYS HCOMSTS HCOMTHRS
HDEVMISM HDEVMSG HDEVREV HDEVST HDAY HSWREV HTAG HTDEU
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
HDEVTYP HDVMFGCD HDVREVCD HTDLRL HTDMINSPAN HTDSN
HDVTYPCD HDVTYPCDNAME HDYNDESC HTDURL HUCMDREV
[1..4] HDYNDVC[1..4] HDYNEU[1..4] HWRTPRCTCODE HYEAR INPTDIR
HDYNNAME[1..4] HDYNVAL[1..4] HENABLE IOP IOPTYPE LASTPV LOCUTOFF
HEU HFASSYNO HFLAGS HHWREV LRL LRV NAME PIUOTDCF
HISHART5 HMONTH HNCOMERR PNTFORM PTEXECST PV PVCALC
HNMSMINPRE HREVMISM HPHYSIG PVCHAR PVCLAMP PVEUHI
HPVALMCODE HPVCHAR HPVDAMP PVEULO PVEXEUHI PVEXEULO
HPVLRV HPVMISM HPVTLDST HPVURV PVEXHIFL PVEXLOFL PVRAW
HPVXFRCODE HSCANCFG HSCANOVR PVRAWHI PVRAWLO PVSTS
HSLOTDSC[1..4] HSLOTDVC[1..4] HSLOTEU PVTEMP RESETHCOMERR SECVAR
[1..4] HSLOTNAME[1..4] HSLOTVAL [1..4] SENSRTYP SLWSRCID STATE
HSMSTRFL TCRNGOPT TF URL URV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.3 AOCHANNEL (PMIO) block
Description The AO channel block converts the output value (OP) to a 4-20 mA output signal for
operating final control elements such as valves and actuators in the field. The OP
parameter value can be controlled from a Experion PKS regulatory point, the operator,
or an SCM. To convert the OP value to a 4-20 mA signal, the AO channel performs:
l Direct/Reverse Output Function
l Nonlinear Output Characterization
The AO channel block can be associated with either an AO8 or AO16 IOP.
Parameters CHANNUM COMMFAILFL DESC FAILOPT OPIN2 OPIN3 OPIN4 OPIN5 OPOUT0
INITREQ INITVAL IOP IOPTYPE NAME OPOUT1 OPOUT2 OPOUT3 OPOUT4
OP OPCHAR OPFINAL OPIN0 OPIN1 OPOUT5 OPTDIR PNTFORM PTEXECST
STDBYMAN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.4 HAOCHANNEL (PMIO) block
Description The HAO channel block represents a single analog output point on the AO16HART I/O
Processor. The AO channel block converts the output value (OP) to a 4-20 mA output
signal for operating final control elements such as valves and actuators in the field. The
OP parameter value can be controlled from a Experion PKS regulatory point, the
operator, or an SCM. To convert the OP value to a 4-20 mA signal, the AO channel
performs:
l Direct/Reverse Output Function
l Nonlinear Output Characterization
Additionally, the HAO channel supports HART digital data received from HART capable
devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOP. Dynamic and
device variable data and device status is collected from the device for use by the control
system.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Parameters ACCEPTDEV CHANNUM COMMFAILFL HDAY HDESC HDEVID HDEVIDFL
CONTAINEDIN DESC DEVICE FAILOPT HDEVIDCD HDEVMFG HDEVMISM
HCFGDEV HCMD00 HCMD12 HCMD13 HDEVMSG HDEVREV HDEVST
HCMD14 HCMD16 HCMD48BT[1..200] HDEVTYP HDVMFGCD
HCMD48NOTIFY[1..200] HCMD48STRNGS HDVREVCD HDVTYPCD
[1..200] HCMDFAIL HCMDRESP HCOMERFL HDVTYPCDNAME HDYNDESC[1..4]
HCOMFAIL HCOMHYS HCOMSTS HCOMTHRS HDYNDVC[1..4] HDYNEU[1..4]
HHWREV HISHART5 HMONTH HNCOMERR HDYNNAME[1..4] HDYNVAL[1..4]
HNMSMINPRE HREVMISM HPHYSIG HENABLE HEU HFASSYNO
HPVALMCODE HPVDAMP HPVLRV HPVTLDST HFLAGS ICONSTATE INITREQ
HPVURV HPVXFRCODE HSCANCFG INITVAL IOP IOPTYPE NAME OP
HSCANOVR HSLOTDSC[1..4] HSLOTDVC[1..4] OPCHAR OPFINAL OPIN0 OPIN1
HSLOTEU[1..4] HSLOTNAME[1..4] HSLOTVAL OPIN2 OPIN3 OPIN4 OPIN5
[1..4] HSMSTRFL HSWREV HTAG HTDEU OPOUT0 OPOUT1 OPOUT2
HTDLRL HTDMINSPAN HTDSN HTDURL OPOUT3 OPOUT4 OPOUT5 OPTDIR
HUCMDREV HWRTPRCTCODE HYEAR PNTFORM PTEXECST
RESETHCOMERR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.5 DICHANNEL (PMIO) block
Description The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on a DI, DI24V, or DISOE
I/O Processors. A digital input point converts a digital PVRAW signal received from the
field to a PV that can be used by other data points in the control strategy. Control
strategies can test for a bad Digital Input PV. Parameter BADPVFL is set ON when:
l The PV source has been switched to Substituted, and the point is inactive or the
module status is Idle.
l The PV source is AUTO and the PV is not being updated, because, either the point
is inactive, the module is idle, there is a slot soft failure, or the FTA is missing.
The digital input point is a single-input point that can be configured as a status input or
a latched input, as described in the following sections.
Parameters ALMOPT BADPVFL CHANNUM IOPTYPE NAME OFFNRMFL PNTFORM
DEBOUNCE DESC DITYPE DLYTIME PTEXECST PV PVCHGDLY PVNORMAL
EVTOPT HIGHAL INPTDIR IOP PVRAW PVSOURCE PVSRCOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.6 DOCHANNEL (PMIO) block
Description The DO channel block represents a single discrete input point on a
DO32 I/O Processor. The digital output point provides a digital output to
the field based on the origin of the input and the configured
parameters. The digital output point does not have any modes.
Parameters CHANNUM OFFPULSE ONPULSE OP
COMMFAILFL DESC OPTDIR PERIOD PNTFORM
DOTYPE FAILOPT INITREQ PTEXECST SO SOINITVAL
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
INITVAL IOP IOPTYPE SOREADFAIL STDBYMAN
NAME
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of
each parameter. Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for
more information on the PMIO Blocks.
4.12.7 HLAI block
Description The analog input point converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor to
engineering units for use by other data points in the control strategy, as shown in the
following figure. To accomplish this function, the analog input point performs the
following functions.
l Analog-to Digital Conversion
l PV Characterization
l Range Checking and PV Filtering
l PV Source Selection
l Alarm Detection
Parameters CALIBSTS DBVALID DBVALIDCMD NAME NONREDFTABA NONREDFTABB
DESC FTAPRESA FTAPRESB NOTREDCNFGA NOTREDCNFGB
FTAREVERSEDA FTAREVERSEDB NOTSAMEFTAA NOTSAMEFTAB
FWINVALIDA FWINVALIDB NUMCHANS PTEXECST PV PVSTS
IOMCARDA IOMCARDB IOMFILEA REDDATAA REDDATAB
IOMFILEB IOMFWREVA IOMFWREVB RESETERRORSCMD SCANASSOCDSP
IOMHWREVA IOMHWREVB SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
IOMLHFSTA IOMLHFSTB IOMNUM SCANPNTDTL SCANRATE
IOMOPERA IOMOPERB IOMSTATE SELECTCABLEACMD SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMSTSA IOMSTSB IOMTYPE SWAPPRIMARYCMD TYPEINVALIDA
IOREDOPT TYPEINVALIDB WARMSTRTA WARMSTRTB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.8 HLAIHART block
Description High Level Analog Input IOP, HART Capable, 16 Channel. Each input channel is
capable of scanning (100 ms sampling) a standard analog input (0 to 100%) and
supporting digital data transfer using HART communications protocol. The analog input
point converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor to engineering units for
use by other data points in the control strategy. To accomplish this function, the
HLAIHART point performs the following functions.
l Analog-to Digital Conversion
l PV Characterization
l Range Checking and PV Filtering
l PV Source Selection
l Alarm Detection
Additionally, the IOP can issue HART protocol commands and receive data from HART
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
capable devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOP. Dynamic
and device variable data and device status is collected from the device for use by the
control system. IOP allows for servicing of any pass-through commands issued from
host/master devices.
Parameters CALIBSTSDBVALID DBVALIDCMD IOMLHFSTB IOMNUM IOMOPERA
DESC DEVICELOCATION FTACONNA IOMOPERB IOMSTATE IOMSTSA IOMSTSB
FTACONNB FTAPRESA FTAPRESB IOMTYPE IOREDOPTNAME
FTAREVERSEDA FTAREVERSEDB NONREDFTABA NONREDFTABB
FWINVALIDA FWINVALIDB ICONSTATE NOTREDCNFGA NOTREDCNFGB
HCUAVAIL IOMPLREVA IOMPLREVB NOTSAMEFTAA NOTSAMEFTAB
IOPLOCATION IOMCARDA IOMCARDB NUMCHANS REDDATAA REDDATAB
IOMDESCA IOMDESCB IOMFILEA RESETERRORSCMD SCANRATE
IOMFILEB IOMFWREVA IOMFWREVB SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMHWREVA IOMHWREVB SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMLHFSTA SWAPPRIMARYCMD TYPEINVALIDA
TYPEINVALIDB WARMSTRTA
WARMSTRTB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.9 LLMUX block
Description Low Level Multiplexer IOP, generally used for Data Acquisition points.
Parameters CALIBFTA1STS CALIBFTA2STS NAME NONREDFTABA NOTREDCNFGA
DBVALID DBVALIDCMD DESC NOTSAMEFTAA NUMCHANS PTEXECST PV
FREQ6050 FTAPRESA PVSTS RESETERRORSCMD
FTAREVERSEDA FWINVALIDA SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
IOMCARDA IOMFILEA IOMFWREVA SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL SCANRATE
IOMHWREVA IOMLHFSTA IOMNUM SELECTCABLEACMD SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMSTATE IOMSTSA IOMTYPE TYPEINVALIDA WARMSTRTA
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.10 STI_MV block
Description The STIMV IOP supports all the Smart Transmitters listed above and multi-PV Smart
Transmitter types such as the following:
l SCM3000 Smart Flow Transmitter (Coriolis method)
l Drexelbrook SLT Level Transmitter
l SMV 3000 Multivariable Pressure Transmitter
l SGC 3000 Gas Chromatograph
An STIMV IOP allows up to four multi-PV transmitters or a mix of multi-PV and single PV
transmitter inputs that total no more than 16. A multi-PV transmitter is configured as if it
were in“n” contiguous slots where“n” equals the number of PVs expected. The STITAG
parameter value for each contiguous slot must be identical
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Parameters DBVALID DBVALIDCMD DESC IOREDOPT NAME NONREDFTABA
FREQ6050 FTAPRESA FTAPRESB NONREDFTABB NOTREDCNFGA
FTAREVERSEDA FTAREVERSEDB NOTREDCNFGB NOTSAMEFTAA
FWINVALIDA FWINVALIDB NOTSAMEFTAB NUMCHANS PTEXECST PV
IOMCARDA IOMCARDB IOMFILEA PVSTS REDDATAA REDDATAB
IOMFILEB IOMFWREVA IOMFWREVB RESETERRORSCMD SCANASSOCDSP
IOMHWREVA IOMHWREVB SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL
IOMLHFSTA IOMLHFSTB IOMNUM SCANRATE SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMOPERA IOMOPERB IOMSTATE SELECTCABLEBCMD SWAPPRIMARYCMD
IOMSTSA IOMSTSB IOMTYPE TYPEINVALIDA TYPEINVALIDB WARMSTRTA
WARMSTRTB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.11 AO16 block
Description Analog Output IOP, 16 channel.
Parameters CALIBSTS DBVALID DBVALIDCMD NAME NONREDFTABA NONREDFTABB
DESC FAILOPT FTAPRESA NOTREDCNFGA NOTREDCNFGB
FTAPRESB FTAREVERSEDA NOTSAMEFTAA NOTSAMEFTAB
FTAREVERSEDB FWINVALIDA NUMCHANS OP OPFINAL PTEXECST
FWINVALIDB INITVAL IOMCARDA REDDATAA REDDATAB
IOMCARDB IOMFILEA IOMFILEB RESETERRORSCMD SCANASSOCDSP
IOMFWREVA IOMFWREVB SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
IOMHWREVA IOMHWREVB SCANPNTDTL SCANRATE
IOMLHFSTA IOMLHFSTB IOMNUM SELECTCABLEACMD SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMOPERA IOMOPERB IOMSTATE STDBYSTSA STDBYSTSB
IOMSTSA IOMSTSB IOMTYPE SWAPPRIMARYCMD TYPEINVALIDA
IOREDOPT TYPEINVALIDB WARMSTRTA WARMSTRTB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.12 AO16HART block
Description Analog Output HART IOP, 16 channel. Each channel is capable of supplying a standard
analog output (4 to 20mA) and supporting digital data transfer using HART
communications protocol. To accomplish this function, the AO16HART point performs
the following functions.
l Analog-to Digital Conversion
l PV Characterization
l Range Checking and PV Filtering
l PV Source Selection
l Alarm Detection
Additionally, the IOP can issue HART protocol commands and receive data from HART
capable devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOP. Dynamic
and device variable data and device status is collected from the device for use by the
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
control system. IOP allows for servicing of any pass-through commands issued from
host/master devices.
Parameters CALIBSTS DBVALID DBVALIDCMD IOMOPERA IOMOPERB IOMPLREVA
DESC DEVICELOCATION EUDESC IOMPLREVB IOMSTATE IOMSTSA IOMSTSB
FAILOPT FTACONNA FTACONNB IOMTYPE IOREDOPT IOPLOCATION NAME
FTAPRESA FTAPRESB NONREDFTABA NONREDFTABB
FTAREVERSEDA FTAREVERSEDB NOTREDCNFGA NOTREDCNFGB
FWINVALIDA FWINVALIDB HAUTODET NOTSAMEFTAA NOTSAMEFTAB
[1..16] HCUAVAIL ICONSTATE NUMCHANS REDDATAA REDDATAB
IOMCARDA IOMCARDB IOMDESCA RESETERRORSCMD SCANRATE
IOMDESCB IOMFILEA IOMFILEB SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMFWREVA IOMFWREVB SELECTCABLEBCMD STDBYSTS
IOMHWREVA IOMHWREVB SWAPPRIMARYCMD TYPEINVALIDA
IOMLHFSTA IOMLHFSTB IOMNUM TYPEINVALIDB WARMSTRTA WARMSTRTB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.13 DI24V block
Description Digital Input IOP, 24 Vdc.
Parameters BADPVFL DBVALID DBVALIDCMD NAME NONREDFTABA NONREDFTABB
DESC FTAPRESA FTAPRESB NOTREDCNFGA NOTREDCNFGB
FTAREVERSEDA FTAREVERSEDB NOTSAMEFTAA NOTSAMEFTAB
FWINVALIDA FWINVALIDB NUMCHANS PTEXECST PV PVSTS
IOMCARDA IOMCARDB IOMFILEA REDDATAA REDDATAB
IOMFILEB IOMFWREVA IOMFWREVB RESETERRORSCMD SCANASSOCDSP
IOMHWREVA IOMHWREVB SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
IOMLHFSTA IOMLHFSTB IOMNUM SCANPNTDTL SCANRATE
IOMOPERA IOMOPERB IOMSTATE SELECTCABLEACMD SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMSTSA IOMSTSB IOMTYPE SWAPPRIMARYCMD TYPEINVALIDA
IOREDOPT TYPEINVALIDB WARMSTRTA WARMSTRTB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.14 DISOE block
Description Digital Input Sequence of Events
Parameters BADPVFL CHNLNAME NAME NONREDFTABA NONREDFTABB
[1..NUMCHAN] DBVALID NOTREDCNFGA NOTREDCNFGB NOTSAMEFTAA
DBVALIDCMD DESC NOTSAMEFTAB NUMCHANS PTEXECST PV PVSTS
FTAPRESA FTAPRESB REDDATAA REDDATAB RESETERRORSCMD
FTAREVERSEDA SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL SCANGRPDTL
FTAREVERSEDB SCANPNTDTL SCANRATE SELECTCABLEACMD
FWINVALIDA FWINVALIDB SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMCARDA IOMCARDB STMCHLASTOVERRUNTIMEA (Partner A)
IOMFILEA IOMFILEB STMCHLASTOVERRUNTIMEB (Partner B)
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IOMFWREVA IOMFWREVB STMCHMAXOVRRUNTIMEA (Partner A)
IOMHWREVA IOMHWREVB STMCHMAXOVRRUNTIMEA (Partner B)
IOMLHFSTA IOMLHFSTB STMCHOVRRUNSA (Partner A) STMCHOVRRUNSB
IOMNUM IOMOPERA (Partner B) SWAPPRIMARYCMD TYPEINVALIDA
IOMOPERB IOMSTATE TYPEINVALIDB WARMSTRTA WARMSTRTB
IOMSTSA IOMSTSB IOMTYPE
IOREDOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.15 DI block
Description
Parameters DBVALID DBVALIDCMD
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.12.16 DO32 block
Description Digital Output, 32 channel.
Parameters DBVALID DBVALIDCMD DESC NAME NONREDFTABA NONREDFTABB
FAILOPT FTAPRESA FTAPRESB NOTREDCNFGA NOTREDCNFGB
FTAREVERSEDA FTAREVERSEDB NOTSAMEFTAA NOTSAMEFTAB
FWINVALIDA FWINVALIDB NUMCHANS OP PTEXECST REDDATAA
IOMCARDA IOMCARDB IOMFILEA REDDATAB RESETERRORSCMD
IOMFILEB IOMFWREVA IOMFWREVB SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
IOMHWREVA IOMHWREVB SCANGRPDTL SCANPNTDTL SCANRATE
IOMLHFSTA IOMLHFSTB IOMNUM SELECTCABLEACMD SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMOPERA IOMOPERB IOMSTATE SO SOINITVAL SWAPPRIMARYCMD
IOMSTSA IOMSTSB IOMTYPE TYPEINVALIDA TYPEINVALIDB
IOREDOPT WARMSTRTA WARMSTRTB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO
Blocks.
4.13 Series C Input/Output (I/O) Blocks
4.13.1 AICHANNEL (Series C)
Description The AI channel block represents a single analog input point on one of the following
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Series C Processors: AI-HART; AI-LLMUX,AI-LLAI.
Function The analog input channel converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor to
engineering units for use by other function blocks in the C300, and by the rest of
Experion PKS.
Inputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding AI-
Block HART or AI-LLMUXorAI-LLAI block that interfaces with the physical AI hardware module
at execution runtime.
Parameters ACCEPTDEV ACCEPTRNG HEXTDEVST
ALMENBSTATE ASSOCASSET BADPVFL HLOCKBYPRIMARYMASTER
CHANNUM CJTACT PJCOMMAND HLOCKPERMANENT HLOCKSTATUS
CONTAINEDIN DAMPING DECONF HMAINTREQ HMAXDEVVARS
DEVICELOCATION DVRNGEXT HNCFGCHG HNSMMINPRE
EURNGEXT HARTVERSION HCFGDEV HPVCHNFLAGS HPVMISM HSCANCFG
HCMD00 HCMD12 HCMD13 HCMD14 HSCANOVR HSLOTCC[1..4] (HART
HCMD16 HCMD48BT[1..200] Revision 6.0) HSLOTST [1..4] HSLOTVAL
HCMD48NOTIFY[1..200] HDEVID [1..4] HTAG HVARALERT INPTDIR IOP
HDEVMFG HDEVREV HDEVST IOPTYPE JOURNALONLY LRL LRV
HDEVSTSTATUS HDEVTYPE PNTFORM PNTTYPE PTEXECST PV
HDEVTYPENAME HDYNCC[1..4] PVCHAR PVRAWHI PVRAWLO PVSTS
HDYNEU[1..4] HDYNST[1..4] HENABLE REDTAG SENSRTYP URL URV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Series C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
4.13.2 AOCHANNEL Series C
Description The AO channel block represents a single analog input point on the Series C AO-HART
Processor.
Function The AO channel block converts the output value (OP) to a 4-20 mA output signal for
operating final control elements such as valves and actuators in the field. The OP
parameter value can be controlled from Experion PKS regulatory point, the operator, or
an SCM.
Inputs OP value from
l a single Regulatory Control block
l an operator input
l a program
l an SCM block
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding AO-
Block HART block that interfaces with the physical AO hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters ACCEPTDEV CHANNUM COMMFAILFL HLOCKBYPRIMARYMASTER
CONTAINEDIN DEVICELOCATION HLOCKPERMANENT HLOCKSTATUS
FAULTOPT FAULTVALUE HMAINTREQ HMAXDEVVARS
HALARMENABLE HARTVERSION HNCFGCHG HNSMMINPRE
HCFGDEV HCMD00 HCMD12 HCMD13 HPVCHNFLAGS HSCANCFG
HCMD14 HCMD16 HCMD48BT[1..200] HSCANOVR HSLOTCC[1..4] (HART
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
HCMD48NOTIFY[1..200] HDEVREV Revision 6.0) HSLOTST[1..4] (HART
HDEVST HDEVST HDEVSTSTATUS Revision 6.0) HSLOTVAL [1..4] HTAG
HDEVTYPE HDEVTYPENAME HDYNCC HVARALERT IOP IOPTYPE INITREQ
[1..4] HDYNEU[1..4] HDYNST[1..4] INITVAL OP OPCHAR PNTFORM
HENABLE HEXTDEVST PNTTYPE PTEXECST REDTAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Series C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
4.13.3 DICHANNEL Series C
Description The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on a Series CDI-HV, or DI-
24 Processor.
Function The DI channel block converts a PVRAW signal received from the field to a PV that can
be used by other data points in the Experion PKS system.
Inputs Digital (PV) signals received from the field.
Outputs PV status value that can be used by other data points in system.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding DI-HV or
Blocks DI-24 block that interfaces with the physical DI hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters ALMOPT BADPVFL CHANNUM IOP IOPTYPE PNTFORM PNTTYPE
CONTAINEDIN DEBOUNCE PTEXECST PV PVCHGDLY
DEVICELOCATION DITYPE DLYTIME PVSOURCE PVSRCOPT REDTAG
ENABLESCDETECT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Series C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
4.13.4 DOCHANNEL Series C
Description The DO channel block represents a single discrete input point on a Series CDO-24B I/O
Processor.
Function The DO channel block provides a digital output to the field based on the origin of the
input and the configures parameters
Inputs SO, PO, ONPULSE, or OFFPULSE value from
l a single Regulatory Control block
l an operator input
l a program
l an SCM block
Outputs Digital (Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding DO-24B
Blocks block that interfaces with the physical DO hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters CHANNUM COMMFAILFL CONTAINEDIN INITREQ IOP IOPTYPE OP PNTFORM
DEVICELOCATION DOSTYPE DOTYPE PNTTYPE PTEXECST REDTAG SO
FAULTOPT FAULTVALUE SOREADFAIL
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Series C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
4.13.5 AI-HART
Description High Level Analog Input with HART, 16 Channel. This block is used for the following
Series C IOMs: CU-PAIH01 CC-PAIH01 Each input channel is capable of scanning
(100 ms sampling) a standard analog input (0 to 100%) and supporting digital data
transfer using HART communications protocol. The analog input point converts an
analog PV signal received from a field sensor to engineering units for use by other data
points in the control strategy. To accomplish this function, the AI-HART point performs
the following functions.
l Analog-to Digital Conversion
l PV Characterization
l Range Checking and PV Filtering
l PV Source Selection
l Alarm Detection
Additionally, the IOM can issue HART protocol commands and receive data from HART
capable devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOM.
Dynamic and device variable data and device status is collected from the device for use
by the control system. IOM allows for servicing of any pass-through commands issued
from host/master devices.
Parameters CALIBALL CALIBSTS CPUFREEAVGA IOMBTREVA IOMBTREVA IOMPLREVA
CPUFREEAVGB CPUFREEMINA IOMPLREVB REDTAG
CPUFREEMINB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to theSeries C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
4.13.6 AI-LLMUX
Description Low Level Mux Input, 64 Channel This block is used for the following Series C IOMs:
CU-PAIM01 CC-PAIM01
Parameters CALIBALL CALIBSTS CPUFREEAVGA HCUAVAIL IOMBTREVA IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGB CPUFREEMINA PVSTS REDTAG
CPUFREEMINB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Series C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
4.13.7 AI-LLAI
Description Low Level Analog Input, 16 Channel, is designed to operate with the low voltage
devices such as Thermocouples and RTDs. This block is used for the Series C IOMs
CC-PAIM51.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Function AI-LLAI channel accepts a new RTD input type CU:50 ohm (CU50rtd) in addition to all
the inputs that are supported by the AI-LLMUX. In addition, the operating temperature
range of each channel is extended from (0 to +60 deg C) to (-40 to +70 deg C).
Parameters ACCEPTRNG BADPVFL BLCKCOMMENT1 PV PVAUTO PVAUTOST PVCALC
BLCKCOMMENT2 BLCKCOMMENT3 PVCHAR PVCLAMP PVEUHI
BLCKCOMMENT4 CHANNUM CONTAINEDIN PVEULO PVEXECST PVEXEUHI
CPUFREEAVGA CPUFREEAVGB PVEXHIFL PVEXEULO PVEXLOFL
CPUFREEMINA CPUFREEMINB DESC PVRAW PVRAWHI PVRAWLO
DEVICELOCATION HCUAVAIL HPVMISM PVSRCOPT PVSOURCE PVSTS
INPTDIR IOMBTREVA IOMBTREVA IOPTYPE PVTEMP SENSRTYP TF
LASTPV LOCUTOFF LRV LRL OWDENBL TCRNGOPT URL URV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Series C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
4.13.8 AO-HART
Description Analog Output with HART IOM, 16 channel. This block is used for the following Series C
IOMs: CU-PAOH01 CC-PAOH01 Each channel is capable of supplying a standard
analog output (4 to 20mA) and supporting digital data transfer using HART
communications protocol. To accomplish this function, the AO-HART point performs the
following functions.
l Analog-to Digital Conversion
l PV Characterization
l Range Checking and PV Filtering
l PV Source Selection
l Alarm Detection
The IOM can issue HART protocol commands and receive data from HART capable
devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOM. Dynamic and
device variable data and device status is collected from the device for use by the control
system. IOM allows for servicing of any pass-through commands issued from
host/master devices.
Parameters CALIBALL CALIBSTS CPUFREEAVGA HCUAVAIL IOMBTREVA IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGB CPUFREEMINA IOMPLREVA IOMPLREVB REDTAG
CPUFREEMINB HAUTODET[1..16]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Series C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
4.13.9 DI-HV
Description High Voltage Digital Input (IOM supports both 120 and 240 volts AC), 32 Channel This
block is used for the following Series C IOMs:
l CU-PDIH01
l CC-PDIH01
Parameters BADPVFL CPUFREEAVGA CPUFREEMINB IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGB CPUFREEMINA IOMBTREVA REDTAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Series C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.13.10 DI-24
Description Low Voltage Digital Input (24 volts DC); 32 Channels This block is used for the
following Series C IOMs:
l CU-PDIL01
l CC-PDIL01
Parameters BADPVFL CPUFREEAVGA CPUFREEMINB IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGB CPUFREEMINA IOMBTREVA REDTAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Series C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
4.13.11 DO-24B
Description Bussed Low Voltage Digital Output (24 volts DC); 32 Channels This block is used for
the following Series C IOMs: CU-PDOB01 CC-PDOB01
Parameters CPUFREEAVGA CPUFREEAVGB
CPUFREEMINA CPUFREEMINB IOMBTREVA
IOMBTREVA REDTAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Series C I/O User’s Guide for more information on the Series C IO Blocks.
4.14 Series CIEC 61850 Interface Module (850M) blocks
4.14.1 IEC61850M/IEC61850MSEC block
Refer to the Series CIEC 61850 Interface Module User’s Guide for information of this block.
4.14.2 IEC61850LINK block
Refer to the Series C Ethernet Interface Module Hardware and Platform User’s Guide for information of
this block.
4.14.3 IED
Refer to the Series CIEC 61850 Interface Module User’s Guide for information of this block.
4.14.4 Logical device block
Refer to the Series CIEC 61850 Interface Module User’s Guide for information of this block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.14.5 Logical node block
Refer to the Series CIEC 61850 Interface Module User’s Guide for information of this block.
4.15 Speed Protection Module (SPM)
4.15.1 Speed Protection Module (SPM) Block
Refer to the following documents for Turbine Control-related documentation for this block.
l Turbine Control User’s Guide
l Honeywell Turbine Control Solution Parameter Reference
4.15.2 SP_AI
Description The AI channel block represents a single analog input point on the Speed Protection
(SP) Module.
Function The analog input channel converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor to
engineering units for use by other function blocks in the C300 - 20msCEE Controller,
and by the rest of Experion PKS. To accomplish this function, the AI channel performs
the following operation on the analog PV signal.
l Analog-to digital conversion
l PV characterization
l Range Checking and PV filtering
l PV source selection
Inputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SP
Block module that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BADPVFL BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 PVAUTO PVAUTOSTS PVCALC
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 PVCHAR PVCLAMP PVEUHI
CHANNUM CONTAINEDIN DESC PVEULO PVEXHIFL PVEXLOFL
DEVICELOCATION INPTDIR IOP IOPTYPE PVEXEUHI PVEXEULO PVRAW
LASTPV LOCUTOFF NAME OWDENBL PVSOURCE PVSRCOPT PVSTS
PNTTYPE PTEXECST PV SENSRTYP TF
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.15.3 SP_AO
Description The AO channel block represents a single analog output point on the Speed Protection
(SP) Module.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Function The AO channel block converts the output value (OP) to a 4-20 mA output signal for
operating control elements such as valves and actuators in the field. To convert the OP
value to a 4-20 mA signal, the AO channel performs the following functions.
l Direct/Reverse Output Function
l Linear or non-linear Output Characterization
In addition, the SP_ AO channel supports input connections from SP_SPEED, SP_AI,
and SP_SPDVOTE channels within the same SPM IOM. This can be configured by
connecting the OP parameter to one of the following parameters.
l VOTPVx of voting logic channel, where x can be 1 or 2
l PV of any SP_SPEED channel
l PV of any SP_AI channel
The default values for MODE and MODEATTR parameters of SP_AO channel are CAS
and PROGRAM, respectively.
Inputs OP value from the
l a single Regulatory Control block
l an operator input
l SP_AI channel
l SP_SPDVOTE channel
l SP_SPEED channel
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SP
Block module that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 NMODATTR NMODE OP OPCHAR
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 CHANNUM OPFINAL OPIN0 OPIN1 OPIN2
COMMFAILFL CONTAINEDIN DESC OPIN3 OPIN4 OPIN5 OPOUT0
DEVICELOCATION FAULTOPT FAULTVALUE OPOUT1 OPOUT2 OPOUT3
INITREQ INITREQLATCH INITVAL IOP IOPTYPE OPOUT4 OPOUT5 OPTDIR
MODE MODEATTR MODEPERM NAME PNTTYPE PTEXECST REDTAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.15.4 SP_DI
Description The DI channel block represents a single digital input point on the Speed Protection
(SP) Module.
Function This digital input channel converts a digital PVRAW signal received from the field to a
PV that can be used by other data points in the Experion PKS.
Inputs Digital (PV) signals received from the field.
Outputs PV value that can be used by other data points in system.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding SP module
Block that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BADPVFL BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 IOP IOPTYPE OWDENBL
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 CHANNUM PNTTYPE PTEXECST PV
CONTAINEDIN DESC DEVICELOCATION DITYPE PV.FLWRST PVAUTO PVRAW
NAME INPTDIR PVSOURCE PVSRCOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.15.5 SP_DO
Description The SP_DO channel block represents a single discrete output point on the Speed
Protection (SP) Module.
Function The SP_DO channel provides a digital output to the field based on the origin of the input
and the configured parameters. This channel supports upto 8 interlock inputs that can
be used to trip the output. The interlock input source can be one of following flags.
l PV and PV.FLWRST of any DI Channel block of the same SP IOM only.
l XXXX. FL, where XXXX can be any one of VOTPVxHIALM, VOTROCxPOSHIALM,
VOTPVxHHALM or VOTROCxPOSHHALM where x=1,2 of the SP_SPDVOTE
channel of the same SPM IOM.
l XXXX. FLWRST, where XXXX can be any one of VOTPVxHHALM or
VOTROCxPOSHHALM where x=1,2 of the SP_SPDVOTE channel of the same SP
IOM.
l YYYY. FL, where YYYY can be any one of PVHIALM, ROCPOSHIALM, PVHHALM
or ROCPOSHHALM of the SP_SPEED channel of the same SP IOM.
l YYYY. FLWRST, where YYYY can be any one of PVHHALM or ROCPOSHHALM
of the SP_SPEED channel of the same SP IOM.
Inputs SO, or ONPULSE value from
l a single Device Control block
l an operator input
l a program
Outputs Digital (Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding SP module
Block that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 I7 I7INPTDIR I7STS I8 I8INPTDIR I8STS
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 INLCKINPTSRC [1..8] INITREQ
CHANNUM COMMFAILFL INITREQLATCH IOP IOPTYPE
CONTAINEDIN DESC LASTTRIPREASON LASTTRIPTIME MODE
DEVICELOCATION DOTYPE FAULTOPT MODEATTR MODEPERM NMODATTR
FALUTVALUE I1 I1INPTDIR I1STS I2 NMODE ONPULSE OP OPINITVAL OPTDIR
I2INPTDIR I2STS I3 I3INPTDIR I3STS I4 PERIOD PNTTYPE PTEXECST READY
I4INPTDIR I4STS I5 I5INPTDIR I5STS I6 REDTAG SO SOINITVAL SOREADFAIL
I6INPTDIR I6STS STDBYMAN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.15.6 SP_SPDVOTE
Description The SP_SPDVOTE channel accepts four inputs from the Speed Channel.
Function The SP_SPDVOTE channel computes the Voted PVs and Voted ROCs, and supports
alarm flags for over speed and over acceleration. The Voted PV and Voted ROC can be
connected as an input to C300 function blocks or to the OP parameter of local SP_AO
channel. Alarm flags are available as output pins for use as interlock input parameters
of the SP_DO channel.
Inputs Accepts four inputs (PVs) from the SP_SPEED channels of the parent IOM.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Outputs Voted PV and Voted ROC values.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SP
Block module that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 VOTPV1 VOTPV2 VOTPV1HHALM.FL
BLCKCOMMENT2 VOTPV2HHALM.FL VOTPV1HHALM.FLWRST
BLCKCOMMENT3 VOTPV2HHALM.FLWRST VOTPV1HHALM.TP
BLCKCOMMENT4 CHANNUM VOTPV2HHALM.TP VOTPV1HIALM.FL
CONTAINEDIN DESC VOTPV2HIALM.FL VOTPV1HIALM.TP
DEVICELOCATION VOTPV2HIALM.TP VOTPV1OVRTSTENB
GRP1IGNORD GRP2IGNORD VOTPV2OVRTSTENB VOTPV1STS VOTPV2STS
GRP1IGNORDFL VOTPVMAX VOTPVONTRIP VOTROC1 VOTROC2
GRP2IGNORDFL GRP1NMIN VOTROC1POSHHALM.FL
GRP2NMIN GRP1VOTCHENB VOTROC2POSHHALM.FL
[1..4] GRP2VOTCHENB [1..4] VOTROC1POSHHALM.FLWRST
NAME IOP IOPTYPE VOTROC2POSHHALM.FLWRST
LASTTRIPREASON VOTROC1POSHHALM.TP
LASTTRIPTIME LASTVOTPV1 VOTROC2POSHHALM.TP
LASTVOTPV2 LASTVOTROC1 VOTROC1POSHIALM.FL VOTROC2POSHIALM.FL
LASTVOTROC2 MEDOPT1 VOTROC1POSHIALM.TP
MEDOPT2 PNTTYPE PTEXECST VOTROC2POSHIALM.TP
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 VOTALG1 VOTROCPOSHHONTRIP VOTROC1STS
VOTALG2 VOTROC2STS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.15.7 SP_SPEED
Description The SP_SPEED channel accepts a pulse input on the Speed Protection (SP) Module.
Function The SP_SPEED channel converts pulse signals received from a field sensor to a PV
value in RPM. The PV value is used by the SPM and other function blocks in C300 -
20msCEE Controller. Additionally, the channel also computes ROC of speed. In
addition, with R410, SP_SPEED channel supports flow measurement. To accomplish
this, you need to configure the MEASUREMENTTYPE parameter as “Flow_
Measurement.” The SP_SPEED channel measures the flow in Engineering Unit (EU).
SP_Speed channel performs the following functions:
l PV computation and Diagnostics
l PV source selection
When the SP_SPEED channel is configured for Flow_Measurement, the following
options are not supported in the SP_SPEED channel.
l Connection with SP_AO channel
l Connection with voting logic channel (SP_SPDVOTE)
l GEARRATIO parameter
l NMSPEED parameter
l Rate Of Change (ROC) parameters
l LASTROCPOSHHDRNMSPD
l ROCPOSHHALM.FL
l ROCPOSHHALM.FLWRST
l ROCPOSHHALM.TP
l ROCPOSHIALM.FL
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l ROCPOSHIALM.TP
l ROCPV
Inputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SP
Block module that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 PNTTYPE PV PVAUTO PVAUTOSTS
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 PVCALC PTEXECST PVHHALM.FL
BADPVFL CHANNUM CONTAINEDIN PVHHALM.FLWRST PVHHALM.TP
DEFMPULFL DESC DEVICELOCATION PVHIALM.FL PVHIALM.TP PVRAW
EDGEDETECT GEARRATIO IOP IOPTYPE PVSOURCE PVSRCOPT PVSTS
LASTPV LASTROCPOSHHDRNMSPD ROCPOSHHALM.FL
KFACTOR ORDEROFKFACTOR ROCPOSHHALM.FLWRST
MEASUREMENTTYPE MISGPULFL NAME ROCPOSHHALM.TP ROCPOSHIALM.FL
NMSPEED ROCPOSHIALM.TP ROCPV SENSRTYP
TOOTHCNT ZEROSPDFL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.16 Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module
4.16.1 Servo Positioner Valve Module (SVPM) Block
Refer to the following documents for Turbine Control-related documentation for this block.
l Turbine Control User’s Guide
l Honeywell Turbine Control Solution Parameter Reference
4.16.2 SVP_AI
Description The SVP_AI accepts a single analog input or LVDT/RVDT/ Resolver inputs on the Servo
Valve Positioner (SVP) Module.
Function The analog input channel converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor or
LVDT/RVDT to engineering units for use by other function blocks in the C300 -
20msCEE Controller, and by the rest of Experion PKS. With R410, SVP_AI channel
supports angular measurement using the Resolver. To accomplish this, you need to
configure the SENSRTYP parameter as “Resolver.” To accomplish this function, the AI
channel performs the following operation on the analog PV signal.
l Analog-to-digital conversion
l PV characterization
l Range Checking and PV filtering
l PV source selection
When the SENSRTYP parameter is configured as “Resolver,” the SVP_AI channel does
not support the following parameters.
l LVDTCOREFALLOUT
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l OWDENBL
l TF
l LOCUTOFF
l INPTDIR
l PVCHAR
l PVCLAMP
l PVEUHI
l PVEULO
l PVEXHIFL
l PVEXLOFL
l PVEXEUHI
l PVEXEULO
Inputs Floating point values in engineering units.
Outputs Floating point values in engineering units.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SVP
Block module that interfaces with the physical SVP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters ACTUALANGLE ANGLEOFFSET OWDENBL PNTTYPE PTEXECST PV
APPLYOFFSET BADPVFL BLCKCOMMENT1 PVAUTO PVAUTOSTS PVCALC
BLCKCOMMENT2 BLCKCOMMENT3 PVCHAR PVCLAMP PVEUHI PVEULO
BLCKCOMMENT4 CALIBVAL CHANNUM PVEXHIFL PVEXLOFL PVEXEUHI
CONTAINEDIN DESC DEVICELOCATION PVEXEULO PVRAW PVSOURCE
EXCITNAMPFL EXCITNFBAFL EXCITNFBBFL PVSRCOPT PVSTS SENSRTYP TF
EXCITNFREQDRIFTFL EXCITNVLTG UNSTABLEINPUTFL
FBINPUTSFL INPTDIR IOP IOPTYPE LASTPV VALVECALIBSTS VALVECALIBENB
LOCUTOFF LVDTCOREFALLOUTFL NAME VDTMODE XMTRWIRESLCT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.16.3 SVP_AO
Description Two AO channels are present in the Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module. The AO
channel supports unipolar and bipolar current output in addition to standard 4-20 mA
analog output.
Function The AO channel converts the output value (OP) to an output signal for operating final
control elements such as valves and actuators in the field. To convert the OP value to a
configured signal value, the AO channel performs:
l Direct/Reverse Output Function
l Linear or nonlinear Output Characterization
Inputs Accepts values from AUXILIARY function blocks executing in C300 - 20msCEE
Controller or OP value from a local SVP_REGCTL block.
Outputs Output signals are connected to servo valves or external servo valve positioner.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SVP
Block module that interfaces with the physical SVP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 OPBIASCUR OPCHAR OPFINAL
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 OPTDIR OPHICURRENT OPIN0
CHANNUM COMMFAILFL CONTAINEDIN OPIN1 OPIN2 OPIN3 OPIN4 OPIN5
DESC DEVICELOCATION DITHERAMPL OPLOCURRENT OPOUT0 OPOUT1
DITHERFREQ FAULTOPT FAULTVALUE OPOUT2 OPOUT3 OPOUT4 OPOUT5
INITREQ INITREQLATCH INITVAL OPTYPE PNTTYPE PRCSAFEOP1
INTRLOCKFAILOPT1 INTRLOCKFAILOPT2 PRCSAFEOP2 PRCSINTRLOCK1
IOP IOPTYPE MODE MODEATTR PRCSINTRLOCK2 PTEXECST
MODEPERM NAME NMODE NMODEATTR REDTAG STROKENB SECDIAGCURR
OP OPACTION
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.16.4 SVP_DI
Description The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on the Servo Valve
Positioner (SVP) Module.
Function The DI channel block converts a PVRAW signal received from the field to a PV that can
be used by other data points in the Experion system.
Inputs Digital (PV) signals received from the field.
Outputs PV status value that can be used by other data points in system.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SVP
Block module that interfaces with the physical SVP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 IOPTYPE OWDENBL
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 BADPVFL PNTTYPE PTEXECST PV
CHANNUM CONTAINEDIN DESC DEVICELOCATION PVAUTO PVRAW PVSOURCE
DITYPE INPTDIR IOP PVSRCOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.16.5 SVP_REGCTL
Description The SVP_REGCTL channel operates as Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) controller
and supports the ideal form of calculating the PID terms.
Function Accepts 2 analog inputs by default - process variable (PV1) and set point (SP);
produces output calculated to reduce the difference between PV1 and SP. Provides
anti-windup protection, and control initialization. Note: SVP_REGCTL supports an
optional analog input PV2, which can be used as an alternate to PV1 based on the
PV1STS. The SVP_Regctl block functionality is similar to C300 PID with reduced
features. SVP_Regctl block performs the following functions.
1. Input Processing PV Processing: PV processing fetches the input value, status
and range from the configured AI channels and updates appropriate PV
parameters. SP Processing: SP processing is performed to execute SP limit
checking.
2. Mode Processing Mode processing identifies the source of stores which may be
accepted by SVP_REGCTL on SP and OP parameters.
3. Initial Control Processing This function verifies if a SVP_REGCTL cascade
strategy has been broken, when the SVP_REGCTL blocks are in a cascade
strategy. If the cascade strategy is broken, this function initializes the blocks, and
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
builds an initialization request for its primary.
4. Algorithm Calculation SVP_REGCTL blocks only support Equation A
(incremental algorithm) and E (full value algorithm).
5. Output Processing This function derives the control output (OP) from the
algorithm's calculated variable (CV).
6. Feedback Propagation This function drives the ARWSTS parameter to provide
the information to the upstream block in the cascade mode to stop the integral
calculation.
Inputs Accepts PV as input from any of the local SVP_AI channels.
Outputs OP value can be connected only to the SVP_AO channels, with OPACTION configured
as incremental. Note: Use of control equation A or E is independent of OPACTION
parameter of SVP_AO. Block has following initializable outputs:
l OP = Calculated output in percent.
l OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter
(OPX/OPEUX) connection when required.
Associated Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SVP
Block module that interfaces with the physical SVP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters ARWNET ARWOP BLCKCOMMENT1 OPEXLOLM OPEXHIFL OPEXLOFL
BLCKCOMMENT2 BLCKCOMMENT3 OPHIFL OPHILM OPLOFL OPLOLM
BLCKCOMMENT4 BADCTLFL BADCTLOPT OPMINCHG OPTOL OUTIND PNTTYPE
BADPVFL CHANNUM CONTAINDEIN PREFPVSRC PRIMDATA.ARWSTS
CTLACTN CTLEQN CTLSTATE CV CVEUHI PRIMDATA.INITSTS
CVEULO DESC DEVICELOCATION PRIMDATA.INITVAL PTEXECST PV PV1
EQNEUNITSOPT EUDESC GAINHILM PV1STS PV2 PV2STS PVEUHI
GAINLOLM GAINOPT INITMAN INITREQ PVEULO PVSTS PVSTSFL.BAD
INITVAL IOP IOPTYPE K LASTGOODPV PVSTSFL.NORM PVTRAKOPT
MODE MODEATTR MODEATTRFL.NORM PVTRAKOPTAI REDTAG SECDATA
MODEATTRFL.OPER MODEATTRFL.PROG SECDATA.ARWSTS SECDATA.INITSTS
MODEFL.CAS MODEFL.MAN SECDATA.INITVAL SP SPHIFL SPHILM
MODEFL.NORM MODEPERM NMODE SPLOFL SPLOLM SPTOL T1 T1HILM
NMODATTR OP OPBIAS OPBIAS.FIX T1LOLM T2 T2HILM T2LOLM TMOUTFL
OPBIAS.RATE OPEU OPEXHILM TMOUTMODE TMOUTTIME
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.17 Universal Input/Output (UIO) Module
4.17.1 UIO module
Description UIO module supports 32 input/output channels. These channel types can be configured
as one of the following:
l analog input channels
l analog output channels
l digital input channels
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l digital output channels
Function The UIO channel supports multiple functionalities. It can function as an analog input,
analog output, digital input or a digital output channel. The function of the UIO channel
is identical to the existing analog or digital input/output channels depending on the
configured channel type. With R430, UIO module supports the following functions.
l DO channel ganging: For 2, 3, or 4 channels within any 4 channels. However,
channels 32 and 1 cannot be ganged.
l Pulse counting using DI channel: Up to 4 channels on channels – Ch15 to Ch18 –
only. Input pulse frequency of 10 KHz supported.
l Supports two HART modems: one modem dedicated to channels 1-16 and a
second modem dedicated to channels 17-32.
Inputs The input to the UIO channel varies depending on the channel configuration. The
following table defines the inputs for each channel type.
Channel Type Input
Analog input channel Floating point value in engineering
units
Analog output channel OP value from
l a single Regulatory Control block
l an operator input
l a program
l an SCM block
Digital input channel Digital (PV) signals received from the
field
Digital output channel SO, PO, ONPULSE, or OFFPULSE
value from
l a single Regulatory Control block
l an operator input
l a program
l an SCM block
Outputs The output of the UIO channel varies depending on the channel configuration. The
following table defines the outputs for each channel type.
Channel Type Output
Analog input channel Floating point value in engineering
units.
Analog output channel Floating point value in engineering
units.
Digital input channel PV status value that can be used by
other data points in system.
Digital output channel Digital (Boolean) value or pulsed (real)
value.
Associated Prior to loading UIO block, the block must be “associated” with one channel of
Block corresponding UIO block that interfaces with the physical UIO hardware module at
execution runtime.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Parameters AICHNLNAME AIPTEXECST AOCHNLNAME IOMSTATE IOMSTSA IOMSTSB
AOPTEXECST ASSOCASSET BADPVFL IOMTYPE IOPDESCA IOPDESCB
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 IOPLOCATION IOREDOPT LRL LRV
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 NAME MODIFIEDBY NUMCHANS
CHNLNAME CPUFREEAVGA NUMSIGS OP OPFINAL OPTINITVAL
CPUFREEAVGB CPUFREEEMINA PARTNERINCOMPATIBLEA
CPUFREEMINB CREATEDBY PARTNERINCOMPATIBLEB
CTRLCONFIRM DATECREATED DBVALID PNTTYPE PRIMARYSIG PV
DEBOUNCE DESC DICHNLNAME PVCHGDLY PVFL PVSTS
DIPTEXECST DOCHNLNAME DOOP RDNAUTOSYNC REASONSET
DOPTEXECST ENABLESCDETECT REDDATAA REDDATAB
FWINVALIDA FWINVALIDB SCANCTRLLVL SCANRATE
GROUP.NUMPARAMS HCUAVAIL SCANASSOCDSP SCANGRPDTL
HCUAVAIL2 HDEVID HDEVMFG HDEVREV SCANPNTDTL SECONDARYSIG
HDEVTYPE7 HDEVTYPENAME HENABLE SECSIGSECLVL SERIALNUMA
HIST.NUMPARAMS HSCANCFG HSCANOVR SERIALNUMB SO SOINITVAL
HTAG INITVAL IOLINK IOLINKCOLOR SOREADFAIL STATRESETA
IOMBTREVA IOMBTREVB IOMCOMMAND TEMPCURA TEMPCURB TEMPHILM
IOMFWREVA IOMFWREVB IOMHWREVA TEMPLOLM TEMPMAXA TEMPMAXB
IOMHWREVB IOMLHFSTA IOMLHFSTB TEMPMINA TEMPMINB
IOMNUM IOMOPERA IOMOPERB TREND.NUMPARAMS
IOMPLD1REVA IOMPLD1REVB TYPEINVALIDA TYPEINVALIDB URL
IOMPLD2REVA IOMPLD2REVB URV VERSIONDATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the UIO
Blocks.
4.17.2 UIO module Phase 2 (UIO-2)
Description UIO module phase 2 supports 32 input/output channels. These channel types can be
configured as one of the following:
l analog input channels
l analog output channels
l digital input channels
l digital output channels
In addition, it monitors its own temperature.
Function The UIO channel supports multiple functionalities. It can function as an analog input,
analog output, digital input, or a digital output channel. The function of the UIO channel
is identical to the existing analog or digital input/output channels depending on the
configured channel type. With R432, the UIO–2 module supports the following functions
for the UIO module.
l Supports DO ganging within the following eight channel number groups: 1 - 4, 5 -
8, 9 - 12, 13 - 16, 17 - 20, 21 - 24, 25 - 28, and 29 – 32. However, ganging across
these groups is NOT possible.
l Pulse counting using DI channel: Up to 4 of any of the available 32 channels. Input
pulse frequency can be less than or equal to15 KHz.
l Supports one HART modem per channel.
Inputs The input to the UIO channel varies depending on the channel configuration. The
following table defines the inputs for each channel type.
Channel Type Input
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Analog input channel Floating point value in engineering
units
Analog output channel OP value from
l a single Regulatory Control
block
l an operator input
l a program
l an SCM block
Digital input channel Digital (PV) signals received from the
field
Digital output channel SO, PO, ONPULSE, or OFFPULSE
value from
l a single Regulatory Control
block
l an operator input
l a program
l an SCM block
Outputs The output of the UIO channel varies depending on the channel configuration. The
following table defines the outputs for each channel type.
Channel Type Output
Analog input channel Floating point value in engineering
units.
Analog output channel Floating point value in engineering
units.
Digital input channel PV status value that can be used by
other data points in system.
Digital output channel Digital (Boolean) value or pulsed
(real) value.
Associated Prior to loading UIO block, the block must be “associated” with one channel of
Block corresponding UIO block that interfaces with the physical UIO hardware module at
execution runtime.
Parameters AICHNLNAME AIPTEXECST AOCHNLNAME IOMSTATE IOMSTSA IOMSTSB
AOPTEXECST ASICVERA [1..8] ASICVERB IOMTYPE IOPDESCA IOPDESCB
[1..8] ASSOCASSET BADPVFL IOPLOCATION IOREDOPT LRL LRV
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 NAME MODIFIEDBY NUMCHANS
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 NUMSIGS OP OPFINAL OPTINITVAL
CHNLNAME CPUFREEAVGA CPUFREEAVGB PARTNERINCOMPATIBLEA
CPUFREEEMINA CPUFREEMINB PARTNERINCOMPATIBLEB
CREATEDBY CTRLCONFIRM PNTTYPE PRIMARYSIG PV
DATECREATED DBVALID DEBOUNCE DESC PVCHGDLY PVFL PVSTS
DICHNLNAME DIPTEXECST DOCHNLNAME RDNAUTOSYNC REASONSET
DOOP DOPTEXECST ENABLESCDETECT REDDATAA REDDATAB
FWINVALIDA FWINVALIDB SCANCTRLLVL SCANRATE
GROUP.NUMPARAMS HCUAVAIL SCANASSOCDSP SCANGRPDTL
HCUAVAIL2 HDEVID HDEVMFG HDEVREV SCANPNTDTL SECONDARYSIG
HDEVTYPE7 HDEVTYPENAME HENABLE SECSIGSECLVL SERIALNUMA
HIST.NUMPARAMS HSCANCFG HSCANOVR SERIALNUMB SO SOINITVAL
HTAG INITVAL IOLINK IOLINKCOLOR SOREADFAIL STATRESETA
IOMBTREVA IOMBTREVB IOMCOMMAND TEMPCURA TEMPCURB TEMPHILM
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IOMFWREVA IOMFWREVB IOMHWREVA TEMPLOLM TEMPMAXA TEMPMAXB
IOMHWREVB IOMLHFSTA IOMLHFSTB TEMPMINA TEMPMINB
IOMNUM IOMOPERA IOMOPERB TREND.NUMPARAMS
IOMPLD1REVA IOMPLD1REVB TYPEINVALIDA TYPEINVALIDB URL
IOMPLD2REVA IOMPLD2REVB URV VERSIONDATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the UIO
Blocks.
4.18 Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI) Blocks
4.18.1 PCDI_MASTER (Peer Control Data Interface Master device)
Block
Description Identifies the physical Safety Manager or Modbus TCP end device or gateway for the
C300 to provide links to associated Array Request Channel blocks and provides
selected diagnostic events for associated channels.
Function Provides configuration and communication software to enable devices to communicate
over Honeywell's Fault Tolerant Ethernet media to perform bi-directional data exchange
directly with the Experion C300 Controller. The request for the data in Honeywell's
Safety Manager or Modbus end device, whether it is a native Modbus TCP device or a
Modbus RTU device connected to the serial bus of a gateway, is generated by a PCDI
Array Request Channel function block. These blocks will be instantiated in a Control
Module (CM).
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured peer device
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE AVGRCVBYTESPERSEC NUMDISCONN[0..1] NUMSIGS NUMUIDS
AVGRCVMSGPERSEC ORPHANRESPCNT PREFERREDCONN
AVGSMITBYTESPERSEC PRIMARY PRIMARYSIG PRIMCONNSTS
AVGSMITBYTESPERSEC PRIMERRCNT PRIMERRCODE
AVGXMITMSGPERSEC PRIMERRFL PRIMERRINFO PRIMIP
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 PRIMIPMON PRIMLASTCONNTIME
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 PRIMLASTDISCONNTIME
CHANFBNAME[0..63] CHANLASTMBERR PRIMLASTERRTIME PRIMLOOPDATA
[0..63] CHANLASTMBERRTIME[0..63] PRIMNUMCONN PRIMNUMCONNATMPT
CHANMBERRCNT[0..63] PRIMNUMDISCONN
CHANMBERRFL CHANREQRSPRCVD PRIMNUMDISCONNTIME PRIMTCP
[0..63] CHANREQSENT[0..63] PRIMTCPMON QUEUEDREQCNT[0-15]
CHANRSTSTATS CHANSTS[0..63] REASONSET REDSWITCHPERIOD
CONINUSE CONINUSEMON CONNSTS REQRSPRCVD REQRTRY REQRTRYCNT
[0..1] CONTOUSE CREATEDBY [0-15] RSTERRCNT RSTSTATS
CTRLCONFIRM CYCLETIME[0..63] SCANASSOCDSP SCANCTRLLVL
DATECREATED DEFTIMOUT DESC SCANPNTDTL SECCONNSTS
DEVSTS DEVSUPCMDS[0..15][0..39] SECERRCNT SECERRCODE SECERRFL
DEVTYPE DIAGREQRSPRCVD[0-15] SECERRINFO SECIP SECIPMON
DIAGREQSENT[0..15] ENABLEDEVICE SECLASTCONNTIME
[0..15] ENITITYNAME ERRCNT[0..1] SECLASTDISCCONNTIME
ERRCODE[0..1] ERRFL[0..1] ERRINFO SECLASTERRTIME SECLOOPDATA
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
[0..1] GROUP.NUMPARAMS SECNUMCONN SECNUMCONNATMPT
HIST.NUMPARAMS INALM IOMSTATE SECNUMDISCONN SECONDARYSIG
LASTCONNTIME[0..1] SECSIGSECLVL SECTCP SECTCPMON
LASTDISCONNTIME[0..1] LASTERRTIME STATUS STUBIOM TIMOUT[0..15]
[0..1] LASTMBERR[0..15] TIMOUTCNT[0-15] TOTALREQSENT
LASTMBERRTIME[0..15] LOOPADDR TREND.NUMPARAMS UIDDEVTYPE
LOOPDATA LOOPDATACHG [0..15] UIDDEVTYPEMON[0..15]
LOOPMODE LOOPRATE LOOPTYPE UIDLOOPADDR[0..15] UIDLOOPDATA
MASTERID MASTERSTATE [0..15] UIDLOOPDATACHG
MAXPENDREQ MAXRCVBYTESPERSEC UIDLOOPMODE[0..15] UIDLOOPRATE
MAXRCVMSGPERSEC MAXUIDREQ [0..15] UIDLOOPTYPE[0..15]
MAXXMITBYTESPERSEC UIDORPHANRESPCNT[0-15]
MAXXMITMSGPERSEC MBERRCNT UIDREQRSPRCVD[0-15] UIDREQSENT
[0..15] MBERRFL[0..15] MODIFIEDBY [0..15] UNITID[0..15] UNITIDMON[0..15]
MSGDELAY NAME NUMCHANS USEKEEPALIVE VENDOR[0..15]
NUMCONN[0..1] NUMCONNATMPT[0..1] VERSIONDATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Peer Control Data Interface Reference for information about configuring
and using the PCDI_MASTER block.
4.18.2 PCDIFLAGARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Flag Array
Channel) Block
Description Provides a read/write interface to a Boolean array of data from Honeywell's Safety
Manager, Modbus TCP native device or a serial device through a Modbus TCP
Gateway/Bridge.
Function l Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field
device. Or, reads data from the associated field device and makes it available to
the connected block.
l Supports up to 2000 Boolean values (PVFL[1..2000] from the device.
l The start index along with the read or writes defines the function code for the
request. The bit types represent read and write forms depending on the address
range as follows: Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one
element at a time or whole array access.
l 000001-065535: read or write from 1 to 2000 bit flags.
l 100001-165535: read only from 1 to 2000 bit flags.
l Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and
generates a detailed error code (ERRCODE).
l Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL).
Inputs Boolean value from device or another block
Outputs Boolean value
Parameters ACCLOCK AUTOTRIGGER BADPVFL NAME NFLAG ORDERINCM PVFL
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 PVSTS RDYFL REQSTATE SENDFL
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 SIMMODE SIMVALUE[1..1968]
CHANNAME CHANSTS DEVADDR DONEFL STARTINDEX SUBVAL SUBVALTYPE
ERRCODE ERRFL IOCNUMBER IOCSTATE USERSYMNAME WRITEOPT
LASTERRTIME MASTERID
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding PCDI_
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Block MASTER block that interfaces with physical peer device at execution runtime. For
optimum performance, assign channels to PCDI_MASTER block for given device
contiguously. For example, if you have four PCDIFLAGARRCH blocks to use with the
device, assign them to PCDI_MASTER block channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4,
and 6.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Peer Control Data Interface Reference for information about configuring
and using the PCDI_MASTER block.
4.18.3 PCDINUMARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Numeric Array
Channel) Block
Description Provides a read/write interface to a Numeric array of data from Modbus TCP native
device or a serial device through a Modbus TCP Gateway /Bridge.
Function l Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field
device. Or, reads data from the associated field device and makes it available to
the connected block.
l The start index along with the read or writes defines the function code for the
request. The floating point data types represent all word and byte swapped forms
depending on the address range as follows:
l 200001-265535: read or write from 1 to 60 contiguous Word Swapped
IEEE floating point numbers.
l 300001-365535: read from 1 to 120contiguous Signed Integer
numbers. This is read only addresses. Read/Write Option setting is
ignored.
l 400001-465535: read from 1 to 120 or write a single Signed Integer
numbers.
l 700001-765535: read or write from 1 to 60 contiguous IEEE floating
point numbers.
l 800002-865535: read or write from 1 to 60 contiguous IEEE floating
point numbers Addr-1.
l 900001-965535: read from 1 to 120 or write a single Unsigned Integer
numbers.
l Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time or
whole array access.
l Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and
generates a detailed error code (ERRCODE).
l Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL).
Inputs Up to 248 bytes of Real, Integer, or Byte type data from the device.
Outputs See above.
Parameters ACCLOCK AUTOTRIGGER BADPVFL NNUMERIC ORDERINCM PV
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 PVEUHI PVEULO PVRAW PVRAWHI
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 PVRAWLO PVSTS RDYFL
CHANNAME CHANSTS CONVTOLONG REQSTATE SENDFL SIMMODE
DEVADDR DONEFL ERRCODE ERRFL SIMVALUE[1..120] STARTINDEX
EUDESC IOCNUMBER IOCSTATE SUBVAL SUBVALTYPE
LASTERRTIME MASTERID NAME USERSYMNAME WRITEOPT
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding PCDI_
Block MASTER block that interfaces with physical peer device at execution runtime. For
optimum performance, assign channels to PCDI_MASTER block for given device
contiguously. For example, if you have four PCDINUMARRCH blocks to use with the
device, assign them to PCDI_MASTER block channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4,
and 6.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Peer Control Data Interface Reference for information about configuring
and using the PCDINUMARRCH block.
4.18.4 PCDITEXTARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Text Array
Channel) Block
Description Provides a read/write interface to a Text (or String) array of data from Modbus TCP
native device or a serial device through a Modbus TCP Gateway /Bridge.
Function l Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field
device. Or, reads data from the associated field device and makes it available to
the connected block.
l Supports up to 16 Text values (STR[1..16]) from the device. Since the maximum
size of the interface to the device is 128 bytes, the valid range of values depends
on the combination of number of string values (NSTRING) and length of string
values (STRLEN) as follows.
l If NSTRING is 1 and STRLEN is 128, valid STR[1..16] range is 1.
l If NSTRING is 2 and STRLEN is 64, valid STR[1..16] range is 1 to 2.
l If NSTRING is 4 and STRLEN is 32, valid STR[1..16] range is 1 to 4.
l If NSTRING is 8 and STRLEN is 16, valid STR[1..16] range is 1 to 8.
l If NSTRING is 16 and STRLEN is 8, valid STR[1..16] range is 1 to 16.
l The start index along with the read or writes defines the function code for the
request. The ASCII encoded bytes represent read and write forms depending on
the address range as follows:
l 500001-565535: read or write from 16 of 8, 8 of 16, 4 of 32, 2 of 164, or
1 of 128 ASCII encoded bytes.
l 600000: Loopback test
l 600001-665535: write vendor information.
l 699999: read vendor information
l Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time or
whole array access.
l Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and
generates a detailed error code (ERRCODE).
l Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL).
Inputs Up to 8 string values depending on whether the length of the string is 8, 16, 32, 64, or
128 characters.
Outputs See above.
Parameters ACCLOCK AUTOTRIGGER BADPVFL MASTERID NSTRING ORDERINCM
BLCKCOMMENT1 BLCKCOMMENT2 RDYFL REQSTATE SENDFL SIMMODE
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
BLCKCOMMENT3 BLCKCOMMENT4 SIMVALUE[1..16] STARTINDEX STR
CHANNAME CHANSTS CONVTOASCII STRLEN SUBVAL SUBVALTYPE
DEVADDR DONEFL ERRCODE ERRFL USERSYMNAME WRITEOPT
IOCNUMBER IOCSTATE LASTERRTIME
Associated Prior to loading, block must be “associated"” with 1 channel of corresponding PCDI_
Block MASTER block that interfaces with physical peer device at execution runtime. For
optimum performance, assign channels to PCDI_MASTER block for given device
contiguously. For example, if you have four PCDITEXTARRCH blocks to use with the
device, assign them to PCDI_MASTER block channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4,
and 6.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Peer Control Data Interface Reference for information about configuring
and using the. PCDITEXTARRCH block.
4.19 PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Blocks
4.19.1 PROFIBUS Module Gateway (PGM) Block
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
4.19.2 PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Secondary Block
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
4.19.3 Protocol Block (PBLINK)
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
4.19.4 Device Support Block (DSB)
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
4.19.5 PROFIBUS HART Input/Output Module (PBHIOM) Function
Block
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
PROFIBUS HART I/O channel
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
4.19.6 PROFIBUS Input/Output Module (PIOM) Block
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
4.19.7 PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library
The PROFIBUS Interface Library includes the interface blocks associated with linking PROFIBUS
devices with the Experion system through the interface modules. Refer to the PROFIBUS Interface
Implementation Guide for complete details about the PROFIBUS Interface components.
4.19.8 PBAICHANNEL
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
4.19.9 PBAOCHANNEL
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
4.19.10 PBDICHANNEL
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
4.19.11 PBDOCHANNEL
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
l PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference
4.20 Foundation FieldBus Interface Module (FIM) Blocks
4.20.1 FIM Block
For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
l Series C FIM User’s Guide
4.20.2 FIMS Block
For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
l Series C FIM User’s Guide
4.20.3 FIM4 Block
For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
l Series C FIM User’s Guide
4.20.4 FIM4SEC Block
For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
l Series C FIM User’s Guide
4.20.5 FIM8 Block
For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
l Series C FIM User’s Guide
4.20.6 FIM Block
For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l Series C FIM User’s Guide
4.20.7 FFLINK
For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
l Series C FIM User’s Guide
4.21 Enhanced High-Performance Process Manager (EHPM)
Block
4.21.1 EHPM block
Descriptio The EHPM block represents the EHPM hardware and is used for
n defining the EHPM Controller in Control Builder. EUCN points
and strategies are executed in the EHPM Controller environment.
The EHPM block has standard tabs like Main tab, Statistics tab,
peer-to-peer communication and so on. These tabs represent the
parameters which are mostly for viewing the current status of
EHPM and statistics values. A new tab has been introduced, the
EUCN tab, which shows the EHPM and ENIM specific
information and their relationship. Parameters and information
in this tab can be modified or added as per the requirements. The
EHPM block is designed to be stand-alone and it belongs to the
independent block category.
Function l The EHPM block defines the EHPM controller in the Control
Builder and represents this controller in the Experion server.
l In the Control Builder Project tree view, identification data
and certain configuration parameters can be configured. The
EHPM state and statistical parameters are view or read only.
l On the Main tab, the FTE Device Index shows the unique
identification of the module. The value of redundant module
parameter indicates whether the EHPM is redundant or non-
redundant and how it should be loaded.
l Once the EHPM block is loaded to the Monitoring view, the
EHPM state reflects the state of the EHPM Controller.
l The EHPM block functionality is similar to that of a C300
controller block. However, a CEE is not associated with the
EHPM block and hence the EHPM block can perform only
basic execution of its parameters. Also, the EHPM controller
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
state cannot be changed from the Control Builder; it can be
changed only from TPN.
l The EHPM block can directly process parameter read and
write requests initiated by CDA peer devices (C300 and ACE),
only after it is loaded to the Monitoring view.
l The EHPM Data Access parameter allows you to optionally
download the EHPM points to the Experion server so that
standard history can be collected through CDA. All the EHPM
points under an EHPM Controller are configured as per the
value of EHPM Data Access parameter (Peer to Peer Only or
Peer to Peer and ExpServer) defined on the EHPM block in
Control Builder.
l EHPM points and control functions are configured using
TPN configuration tools. The EHPM block must be
configured in Control Builder and loaded to the monitoring
side to enable:
l CDA peer access between the ACE/C300 Controller
and the EHPM Controller
l CDA data access to the EHPM points from the
Experion server
l Beginning with Experion R431, you can enable automatic
import of EHPM points from ENIM into ERDB using the
auto-import service. This is accomplished by configuring the
owning ENIM which contains the EHPM points and then
selecting the Enable automatic point import checkbox on the
EUCN tab.
l Beginning with Experion R500, SIM-EHPM block is
introduced. It defines simulator EHPM Controller in the
Control Builder, and represents this controller in the
Experion server. The simulator EHPM Controller runs in the
Simulation Control Environment (SCE) node. It provides CDA
interface to the HPM Controller that is executing in UniSim.
l In the Control Builder Project tree view, a
configuration option “Load to Simulation
Environment” is available for creating SIMEHPM
block. SIM-EHPM state and statistical parameters
are view/read-only.
l On the Main tab, an option to create simulation
EHPM and IP of simulation node are available. The
“Module is rendundant” option is disabled for a
SIMEHPM (SIMEHPM cannot be redundant).
l Once the SIMEHPM block is loaded to the
Monitoring view, the SIMEHPM state reflects the
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
state of the EHPM Controller that is executing in
UniSim. There is no CEE associated with this
platform block and hence the SIMEHPM block
services data access to EHPM points that are
executing only in UniSim.
l Information for UniSim node (E-APP server) can be
entered in EUCN tab by providing the IP address of
the E-APP Node. The connection status shows the
current connection status between SCE node and E-
APP server.
l Parameter read and writes requests initiated from
CDA peer devices (C300 and ACE) and Experion
server is directed to UniSim only if the SIMEHPM
block has been loaded to the Monitoring view.
NOTE Loading of the EHPM block to the Monitoring
view is limited by the EHPM Connections license. For
more information on EHPM license, contact your
Honeywell representative.Loading of the SIMEHPM
block to the Monitoring view is not controlled by the
EHPM Connections license.
Inputs CDA communication
Outputs Refer to the description.
Parameter AUTHSERVERIPADDR HPM_FWREV HPM_HWREV HPM_
s AUTHSTATE IOL_HWREV HPMNODENO
AUTOMATICPOINTIMPORT IMPORTSTATUS #
IMRAVGRESPTIMEP2PREAD
AVGRDRRESPONSETIME IMRAVGRESPTIMEP2PWRITE
US CONNECTIONERROR IMRAVGRESPTIMEDISPREAD
CONNECTIONEVTTIME IMRAVGSTDDISPREAD
CDISPAVGCHPPS IMRMAXRESPTIMEP2PREAD
CDISPMAXCHPPS IMRMAXRESPTIMEP2PWRITE
CHIGHREADAVGPPS IMRMAXRESPTIMEDISPREAD
CHIGHREADMAXPPS IMRMAXSTDDISPREAD
CLOWREADAVGPPS LOGICALENIM
CLOWREADMAXPPS LOGICALENIMIPADDRESS
CWRITEAVGPPS LOGICALUCNNW
CWRITEMAXPPS LOGIENIMDATEPTIMPORT
DATEPTIMPORT # LOGIENIMIMPORTSTATUS
DISPSUBCACHEFRFCTR NOPERDB # OWNINGENIM
DISPLAYSUBSCRMAXPPS PROCESS_ID
DISPOVRLOAD EAGN RCVNONRDRFRAMECOUNT
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
EAPPCONNTONSTATUS RCVRDRREQUESTCOUNT
EAPPNODEIP RCVRDRRESPONSECOUNT
EAPPNODENAME RDRRETRYCOUNT SIMSTATE
ENBLLOGICALENIM SIMTARGET SIMULATEDIO
EHPMDATAACCESS TOTALREQRESPCOUNT
EHPMSTATE EHPM_ UCNADDRESS UCNNW
ERRCODE EHPM_ UNEXPECTEDRDRRESPONSECOU
SELFTEST NT
ENIMIPADDRESS
HOSTIPPRI
HOSTNAMEPRI
HPMSOFTFAIL HPM_
CNTRLPERSREV HPM_
CNTRLPERSVER HPM_
COMMPERSREV HPM_
COMMPERSVER
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of
each parameter.
4.22 ELCN Engineering tools
4.22.1 EHPM Platform Block
Descriptio The EHPM block represents the EHPM hardware and is used for
n defining the EHPM Controller in Control Builder. EUCN points
and strategies are executed in the EHPM Controller environment.
The EHPM block has standard tabs like Main tab, EUCN tab,
Statistics tab, peer-to-peer communication and so on. These tabs
represent the parameters which are mostly for viewing the
current status of EHPM and statistics values. Parameters and
information in this tab can be modified or added as per the
requirements.
The EHPM block is designed to be stand-alone and it belongs to
the independent block category.
Function l The EHPM block defines the EHPM controller in the Control
Builder and represents this controller in the Experion server.
l In the Control Builder Project tree view, identification data
and certain configuration parameters can be configured. The
EHPM state and statistical parameters are view or read only.
l On the Main tab, the FTE Device Index shows the unique
identification of the module. The value of redundant module
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
parameter indicates whether the EHPM is redundant or non-
redundant and how it should be loaded.
l Once the EHPM block is loaded to the Monitoring view, the
EHPM state reflects the state of the EHPM Controller.
l The EHPM block functionality is similar to that of a C300
controller block. Also, the EHPM controller state cannot be
changed from the Control Builder; it can be changed only
from System Management dashboard.
l The EHPM block can directly process parameter read and
write requests initiated by CDA peer devices (C300 and ACE),
only after it is loaded to the Monitoring view.
l The EHPM Data Access parameter allows you to optionally
download the EHPM points to the Experion server so that
standard history can be collected through CDA. All the EHPM
points under an EHPM Controller are configured as per the
value of EHPM Data Access parameter (Peer to Peer Only or
Peer to Peer and ExpServer) defined on the EHPM block in
Control Builder.
l EHPM points and control functions are configured using
TPN configuration tools. The EHPM block must be
configured in Control Builder and loaded to the monitoring
side to enable:
l CDA peer access between the ACE/C300 Controller
and the EHPM Controller
l CDA data access to the EHPM points from the
Experion server
l Beginning with Experion R431, you can enable automatic
import of EHPM points from ENIM into ERDB using the
auto-import service. This is accomplished by configuring the
owning ENIM which contains the EHPM points and then
selecting the Enable automatic point import checkbox on the
EUCN tab.
l Beginning with Experion R500, SIM-EHPM block is
introduced. It defines simulator EHPM Controller in the
Control Builder, and represents this controller in the
Experion server. The simulator EHPM Controller runs in the
Simulation Control Environment (SCE) node. It provides CDA
interface to the HPM Controller that is executing in UniSim.
l In the Control Builder Project tree view, a
configuration option “Load to Simulation
Environment” is available for creating SIMEHPM
block. SIM-EHPM state and statistical parameters
are view/read-only.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l On the Main tab, an option to create simulation
EHPM and IP of simulation node are available. The
“Module is rendundant” option is disabled for a
SIMEHPM (SIMEHPM cannot be redundant).
l Once the SIMEHPM block is loaded to the
Monitoring view, the SIMEHPM state reflects the
state of the EHPM Controller that is executing in
UniSim. There is no CEE associated with this
platform block and hence the SIMEHPM block
services data access to EHPM points that are
executing only in UniSim.
l Information for UniSim node (E-APP server) can be
entered in EUCN tab by providing the IP address of
the E-APP Node. The connection status shows the
current connection status between SCE node and E-
APP server.
l Parameter read and writes requests initiated from
CDA peer devices (C300 and ACE) and Experion
server is directed to UniSim only if the SIMEHPM
block has been loaded to the Monitoring view.
NOTE
Loading of the EHPM block to the Monitoring view is
limited by the EHPM Connections license. For more
information on EHPM license, contact your Honeywell
representative.
Loading of the SIMEHPM block to the Monitoring view
is not controlled by the EHPM Connections license.
Inputs CDA communication
Outputs Refer to the description.
Parameter ALMENBSTATE LOGICALENIMIPADDRESS
s
ASSOCASSET LOGICALUCNNW
AUTHSERVERIPADDR LOGIENIMDATEPTIMPORT
AUTHSTATE LOGIENIMIMPORTSTATUS
AUTOMATICPOINTIMPORT MACADDRA
AVGRDRRESPONSETIMEU MACADDRB
S
MACADDRR
BACKUPRAMSCRUBERRS
MAXFTENODES
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
BACKUPRAMSWEEPERR MAXNODEID
BADIPCSUM MAXPTPFASTSKEW
BADUDPCSUM MAXPTPSLOWSKEW
BOOTIMAGEVER MAXSNTPSKEW
CONNECTIONERROR MINHWREVSF
CONNECTIONEVTTIME MODISREDUN
CDISPAVGCHPPS MODTYPE
CDISPMAXCHPPS NCTLSLOT
CHIGHREADAVGPPS NPVSLOT
CHIGHREADMAXPPS NLOGSLOT
CLOWREADAVGPPS NDCSLOT
CLOWREADMAXPPS NDEVSLOT
CPUFREEAVG NPMSLOT
CPUFREEMIN NNUMERIC
CTRLCONFIRM $NNUMALM
CURTIME NSTRING
CWRITEAVGPPS NTIME
CWRITEMAXPPS NARRSLOT
DATEPTIMPORT # NFASTCTL
DEBUGFLAGSET NFASTPV
DEVICEIDX NFASTLOG
DISPOVRLOAD NFASTDC
DISPSUBCACHEFRFCTR NFASTDEV
DISPLAYSUBSCRMAXPPS $NSFPMS
DISPOVRLOAD NONFTEMARTADDRCOUNT
EAGN NONFTEMARTMAXDEPTH
EAPPCONNTONSTATUS NONFTEMARTAVGDEPTH
EAPPNODEIP NONFTEMARTCOLLCOUNT
EAPPNODENAME NOPERDB #
ENBLLOGICALENIM NUMFTENODES
EHPMDATAACCESS NUMSIGS #
EHPMSTATE NUMSNTPSKEWEX
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
EHPM_ERRCODE OWNINGENIM
EHPM_SELFTEST PARTNERNOTVISFTE
ENIMIPADDRESS PLVERSION
FACTDATAERR PRIMARYSIG#
FTEMARTADDRCOUNT PROCESS_ID
FTEMARTMAXDEPTH PTPENABLE
FTEMARTAVGDEPTH PTPMASTERIP
FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT PTPSKEWTHLD
HOSTIPPRI PTPSTAT
HOSTNAMEPRI RAMSCRUBERRS
HPMSOFTFAIL RAMSWEEPERR
HPM_CNTRLPERSREV RCVNONRDRFRAMECOUNT
HPM_CNTRLPERSVER RCVRDRREQUESTCOUNT
HPM_COMMPERSREV RCVRDRRESPONSECOUNT
HPM_COMMPERSVER RDNROLESTATE
HPM_FWREV RDNSYNCTATE
HPM_HWREV RDRRETRYCOUNT
HPM_IOL_HWREV REASONSET #
HPMNODENO ROMAPPIMGCHKSMFAIL
HWREVMAJ ROMBOOTIMGCHKSMFAIL
HWREVMIN SECMODNAME
IMAGEVER SECONDARYSIG#
IMPORTSTATUS # SECSIGSECLVL #
IMRAVGRESPTIMEP2PREA SERIALNUM
D
SIMSTATE
IMRAVGRESPTIMEP2PWRI
SIMTARGET
TE
SIMULATEDIO
IMRAVGRESPTIMEDISPRE
AD SNTPADDRESS
IMRAVGSTDDISPREAD SNTPSKEWTHLD
IMRMAXRESPTIMEP2PREA SNTPSTAT
D
SOFTFAIL
IMRMAXRESPTIMEP2PWRI
TASKHLTHMON
TE
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IMRMAXRESPTIMEDISPRE TCPACTIVEOPENS
AD
TCPPASSIVEOPENS
IMRMAXSTDDISPREAD
TCPATTEMPTFAILS
INTERLANFAILED
TCPESTABRESETS
IPADDRESS
TCPCURRESTAB
IPINRECEIVES
TCPINSEGS
IPINHDRERRORS
TCPOUTSEGS
IPINADDRERRORS
TCPRETRANSSEGS
IPINUNKNOWNPORTS
TCPINERRS
IPINDISCARDS
TCPOUTRESETS
IPINDELIVERS
TCPCONNTABLE
IPOUTREQUESTS
TIMELASTSKEW
IPOUTDISCARDS
TIMELASTSYNC
IPOUTNOROUTES
TIMESOURCE
IPREASSEMREQS
TIMESYNCSTAT
IPREASSEMOKS
TOTALREQRESPCOUNT
IPREASSEMFAILS
TNUMACEOUTCON
IPFRAGOKS
TNUMC3OUTCON
IPFRAGFAILS
TNUMNTFRQUAVG
IPFRAGCREATES
TNUMNTFRQUMAX
IPROUTINGDISCARDS
TNUMUOCOUTCON
ICMPINMSGS
TRNUMINMSGAVGPS
ICMPINERRORS
TRNUMINMSGMAXPS
ICMPINDESTUNREACHS
TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS
ICMPINECHOS
TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS
ICMPINECHOREPS
UCNADDRESS
ICMPOUTMSGS
UCNNW
ICMPOUTERRORS
UDPINDGRAMS
ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS
UDPNOPORTS
ICMPOUTECHOS
UDPINERRORS
ICMPOUTECHOREPS
UDPOUTGRAMS
LANAFAILED
UDPLISTENERS
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
LANAPAUSECOUNTS UNEXPECTEDRDRRESPONSECO
UNT
LANATXRATE
UPTIME
LANBPAUSECOUNTS
WDTHWFAIL
LANARXRATE
WDTSWFAIL
LANARXRATEMAX
XOVERFAILED
LANATXRATEMAX
LANBFAILED
LANBRXRATE
LANBTXRATE
LANBRXRATEMAX
LANBTXRATEMAX
LOGICALENIM
Reference Refer to the PM Parameter Family Reference Dictionary for
definitions of each parameter.
4.22.2 EHPM Configuration Form Reference
This section provides a summary of all user-visible parameters for an EHPM Controller. The parameters
are grouped according to the tabs where they reside on the configuration form. For more details about
these parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
EHPM Controller block
EHPM Controller block Main tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the EHPM Controller. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up a EHPM Controller. In addition, it
displays the important states of the EHPM Controller and supports the key commands associated with
operation of the EHPM Controller. Redundancy configuration can be entered only in the Project Tree.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the Main tab of
the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least
one character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known
within the context of the enterprise model.
EHPM-Experion IMAGEVER No Indicates the EHPM-Experion application image
Application version.
Image Version
Associated ASSOCASSET Yes Allows user to select an asset from those
Asset configured in the Enterprise Model Database to
set the Scope of Responsibility (SOR) for the
point.
Network Address Configuration
Device Index DEVICEIDX No Identifies the unique FTE Device Index number
configured on switches in the module.
Ethernet IP IPADDRESS No IP address assigned to the module based upon
Address base IP address and module device index.
Advanced Configuration
Alarming ALMENBSTATE Yes Used for setting the alarm reporting function
Enabled used when an alarm condition is detected by the
function block.
Enabled SIMULATEDIO No Indicates that the EHPM Controller executes
Simulated IO simulated IO personality.
State Information
EHPM State EHPMSTATE No Indicates the current state of the controller.
Redundancy RDNROLESTATE No Indicates the EHPM Controller's current
Role redundancy role.
Synchronization RDNSYNCTATE No Indicates the EHPM Controller's current
State synchronization state.
Soft Failures SOFTFAIL No Indicates the Soft Fail state for an EHPM
Present (See Controller. It indicates any PowerQuicc side soft
Soft Failures fails (which is also visible in Soft Failures tab of
Tab for details) the EHPM block) in addition to any soft fail from
TPS side. Note that the Soft Failures tab does not
show any TPS side soft failure, but the soft fail
indicator is on (red color), on the Main tab
indicating that this is a soft fail from TPS side.
HPM Soft HPMSOFTFAIL No Indicates the HPM Soft Fail state for an EHPM
Failures Controller.
Present (See
TPS Native
Window for
details)
Redundancy Configuration
Module is MODISREDUN Project only Indicates that the EHPM Controller is part of
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
redundant redundant pair.
Secondary SECMODNAME Project only System assigned name based on tag name with
Module Name sec suffix for secondary block.
Simulation Node Configuration
Load to SIMTARGET Project only Determines if the controller should be a physical
simulation EHPM or a simulated EHPM loaded to a SCE
Environment node.
NOTE All SIM-EHPM blocks that
share the same Owning ENIM UCN
Network Number must reside in the
same SCE node.
Host IP Address HOSTIPPRI Project only Indicates the IP address of the SCE Node, that is
hosting the SIM-EHPM.
Host Name HOSTNAMEPRI Project only Indicates the network name of the SCE Node,
that is hosting the SIM-EHPM.
Simulation Node Operation
Simulation SIMSTATE No Indicates the current state of the EHPM
State Controller in UniSim.
WIN32 Process PROCESS_ID No Indicates the process ID of the SIMEHPM.EXE
Identifier that is executing in the SCE node.
EHPM Controller block EUCN tab
The EUCN tab represents the EUCN network and the EHPM specific parameters like EUCN Node
Number, HPM Node Number, current UCN Network Number, Device Index of Owning ENIM, ENIM IP
Address and so on. To support EHPM simulation, parameters related to UniSim server configuration
and connection status are added on the EUCN tab. A new Remote ENIM group is added using which
you can import EHPM points from Remote ENIM. The parameters on the EUCN tab are rearranged as
follows:
l EUCN Identification: includes parameters HPM node no, Authentication no, and Authentication
state for EHPM identification.
l EHPM Point Import Utility-Summary: includes option for automatic import of EHPM points from
Owning ENIM and Remote ENIM.
l Owning ENIM: includes parameters for Owning ENIM configuration.
l Remote ENIM: includes parameters for Remote ENIM configuration.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the EUCN tab
of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Owning ENIM
Device Index OWNINGENIM Yes Indicates the FTE device index value that
of Owning represents the device index of the ENIM
ENIM that owns the current EHPM. The
Owning ENIM contains point database of
the current EHPM.
ENIM IP ENIMIPADDRESS No Indicates the FTE IP address of owner
Address ENIM for the current EHPM. This ENIM IP
address is calculated based on the
owning ENIM device index entered.
Primary and secondary ENIMs are
connected using provided IP address
and provided IP address +1 respectively.
EUCN Identification
HPM Node HPMNODENO Yes This value must be entered between the
Number range of 3 to 64. In this range the odd
numbers are configurable and even
numbers are not configurable
(redundant nodes are automatically
assigned with an even number). For an
EUCN network, there must be a unique
number for EHPM node number and the
same EHPM node number can be used
across different EUCN networks.
EUCN EAGN No EUCN authentication group number
Authentication defines the EUCN group on that physical
Number wire and only those nodes which belong
to this group and communicating with
each other.
UCN Network UCNNW Yes UCN network number is used by the
Number point import application, when parsing
the checkpoint (identified by the UCN
network number), for points from the
controller.
Current UCN UCNADDRESS No Indicates the current UCN address. If the
Address EHPM is booting or in ALIVE state, then
HPM node number+64 is the value,
otherwise it is the same as HPM node
number.
Authentication AUTHSERVERIPADDR No Indicates the IP address of the ENIM
Server which is authenticating the EHPM
Controller.
Authentication AUTHSTATE No Indicates the actual state of the EHPM
State Controller while authentication is in
progress.
EHPM Point Import Utility –Summary
Enable AUTOMATICPOINTIMPORT Yes To optionally enable/disable the
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
automatic automatic import of EHPM points using
point import the auto-import service. If this option is
disabled/unchecked, then the EHPM
points cannot be imported automatically
and you have to import them using the
EHPM Point Import Utility.
Date Of Last DATEPTIMPORT # No Indicates the time when import of EHPM
Import # points into ERDB and Experion Server
has completed. If the previous import
was completed through AutoImport
Service, then this timestamp closely
follows the time when ENIM was
checkpointed or restarted.
No. Of Points NOPERDB # No Indicates the number of EHPM points
After Import # imported to the EHPM Controller in
ERDB.
Import Status IMPORTSTATUS No Indicates the status of current import
# (automatic or manual) of the EHPM
points. It shows the status string for the
current stage of the EHPM point import.
EHPM Details
EHPM_ EHPM_SELFTEST No Indicates the self test message while the
Selftest EHPM Controller is booting.
EHPM Error EHPM_ERRCODE No Indicates an error code if there is any
Code error during normal operation of the
EHPM.
EHPM Experion Data Access
EHPM Data EHPMDATAACCESS Yes This parameter is used to optionally
Access download the EHPM points to the
Experion server so that Experion
applications and HMIWeb displays can
collect data through CDA. If you select
Peer to peer Only option, it enables
peer-to-peer data access between the
Experion controllers and the EHPM
points through CDA. If you select Peer to
peer and ExpServer, it enables read
access to the EHPM points through CDA
from Experion applications and HMIWeb
displays in addition to enabling peer
data access.
NOTE The EHPM block must
be loaded to the monitoring
side in Control Builder to
reflect the change in
parameter value.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
NOTE If you select Peer to
peer and ExpServer option, it
flags the EHPM points as
combo points in the Experion
server. The EHPM Combo
Point configuration directs the
ESV-T or ES-T to resolve
names of requested EHPM
point parameters through the
SR first, and then, if not found
in the SR, through the TPN
Server. Once a parameter
name is resolved through the
SR, all read requests issued
by Experion applications and
HMIWeb displays to this
parameter are redirected over
CDA.
Disp DISPSUBCACHEFRFCTR Yes Indicates the cache fresh factor, that is,
Subscription percentage of total read from display that
Cache FrshFt is cached and remaining to the EHPM
that is not cached. If value/option is
selected as 50, and there are 100 reads
from display, then 50% of requests is
served by cache.
Display DISPLAYSUBSCRMAXPPS Yes Defines the parameters per second limit
Subscription after which the EHPM begins to throttle
Max PPS subscribed CDA display clients load on
HPM Comm processors. When the total
sum of parameters per second from
subscribed CDA display clients exceeds
the configured
DISPLAYSUBSCRMAXPPS value, the
EHPM slows down internal polling rates
by a factor of two. For example, a CDA
display client subscribed at a 2 second
rate effectively executes at 4 second
subscription rate.
Remote ENIM
Enable Import ENBLLOGICALENIM Yes Allows import of EHPM points from the
Remote ENIM to Experion ERDB for the
specific EHPM. When Enable import
from Remote ENIM option is set as ON,
then all the remaining related
parameters for Remote ENIM and import
will be enabled.
ATTENTION This option is
not applicable for SIMEHPM.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
UCN Network LOGICALUCNNW Yes Indicates the UCN network number of
Number the Remote ENIM.
Device Index LOGICALENIM Yes Indicates the device index of Remote
of Remote ENIM.
ENIM
Remote ENIM LOGICALENIMIPADDRESS No Indicates the IP Address of the Remote
IP Address ENIM.
Date Of Last LOGIENIMDATEPTIMPORT No Indicates the date of last import of points
Import # from the Remote ENIM to the configured
EHPM.
Import Status LOGIENIMIMPORTSTATUS No Indicates the import status for the EHPM
# point import from remote login to the
EHPM. Once the EHPM point import is
complete, it shows import status as
“Completed”.
UniSim Configuration
E-APP Node EAPPNODEIP Yes Indicates the IP address of the E-APP
IP Address Node in the UniSim system with which
the Simulation Control Environment
(SCE) node communicates. One E-APP
node represents one UCN network
number type. Also represents the path to
connect to an E-APP node. An
unsuccessful connection between SCE
node/SimEhpm.exe and E-APP node
results in an error.
E-APP Node EAPPNODENAME No Indicates the node name of the E-APP
Name Node in the UniSim system with which
the SCE node communicates.
E-APP EAPPCONNTONSTATUS No Indicates the result of connection
Connection establishment between Experion SCE
Status node and UniSim E-APP node.
Connection CONNECTIONERROR No Provides connection error information
Error that occurs between Experion SCE node
and UniSim E-APP node.
Time of Last CONNECTIONEVTTIME No Indicates the time of the most recent
Connection connection event established between
Evt # Experion SCE node and UniSim E-APP
node.
EHPM Controller block System Time tab
The System Time tab displays information about the EHPM’s time source and synchronization with that
time source. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the System Time
tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
System Time
Current System CURTIME No Displays the current system time, as
Time communicated to the ACE supervisory
controller, Control Processor Module in the
C200 Controller, C300 Controller and
Simulation Control Environment controller
from the Server. The format is MM/DD/YY
HH:MM:SS.
Current System TIMESOURCE No Displays the current time source in use for
Time Source module time synchronization.
SNTP Status
SNTP Server SNTPADDRESS No Displays the IP address of SNTP server.
Address
SNTP Status SNTPSTAT No Displays the SNTP status.
SNTP Skew SNTPSKEWTHLD No Sets the maximum skew tolerated between
Limit the module clock and SNTP time under
which gradual correction of the module clock
is allowed.
SNTP Skew NUMSNTPSKEWEX No Displays the number of times SNTP skew
Limit Exceeded threshold is exceeded.
Max SNTP MAXSNTPSKEW No Indicates the maximum skew recorded till
Skew present while synchronizing time from SNTP
server.
System Time Synchronization Status
Time TIMESYNCSTAT No Displays the time synchronization status.
Synchronization
Status
Time of Last TIMELASTSYNC No Displays the time controller last synced with
Time Sync time source.
Skew at Last TIMELASTSKEW No The new difference between controller time
Time Sync and new time.
Precision Time Protocol
Enable PTPENABLE Yes When enabled (ON), the PTP client should
Precision Time attempt to synchronize its local clock with a
Protocol PTP GrandMaster. For EHPM, this value is
always set as ON and it is not editable.
PTP Status PTPSTAT No Displays the current status of the PTP time
synchronization.
PTP Master IP PTPMASTERIP No Displays the IP address of the PTP
Address GrandMaster clock.
Max PTP MAXPTPSLOWSKEW No Dispalys the maximum skew (in
Positive Skew milliseconds) of the local clock for which the
local clock was slower than the master clock.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Max PTP MAXPTPFASTSKEW No Displays the maximum skew (in
Negative Skew milliseconds) of the local clock for which the
local clock was faster than the master clock.
PTP Skew Limit NUMPTPSKEWEX No Displays the number of times the PTP skew
Exceeded threshold has been exceeded.
PTP Skew Limit PTPSKEWTHLD No Displays (in milliseconds) the maximum
skew between the local clock and the PTP
GrandMaster clock, under which gradual
correction of the local clock will be allowed.
EHPM Controller block Statistics tab
The Statistics tab displays various statistical parameters used for maintaining and monitoring EHPM
data flow, network statistics and so on. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can
monitor on the Statistics tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
EUCN CPU Statistics
CPU Free CPUFREEAVG No Displays the rolling average
of free CPU not currently
used for processing by the
CPM.
Minimum CPUFREEMIN No Displays the historic
CPU Free minimum of the unused CPU
available.
Time Since UPTIME No Displays the elapsed time
Powerup since module powerup or
restart.
Notification and Network Message Statistics
Notifications TNUMNTFRQUAVG No Displays the rolling average
Rate of notification request
throughput for the EHPM.
Maximum TNUMNTFRQUMAX No Displays the maximum of
Notifications notification request
Rate throughput since last store of
STATSRESET.
Responder TRNUMINMSGAVGPS No
Input Rate
Max TRNUMINMSGMAXPS No
Responder
Input Rate
Responder TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS No
Output Rate
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Max TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS No
Responder
Output Rate
UCN Network Message Statistics
Receive RCVRDRREQUESTCOUNT No Displays the number of RDR
RDR rate request counts. Receive RDR
per second (raw counts with
rate conversion which
represent EHPM
data/message transfer
counts).
Send RDR RCVRDRRESPONSECOUNT No Displays the number of
rate responses in RDR per
second. Send RDR/second
(raw counts with rate
conversion which represent
EHPM data/message transfer
counts).
Receive RCVNONRDRFRAMECOUNT No Displays the count of non-
Non-RDR RDR frames (per second)
rate that include responses but
not RWR requests.
Total TOTALREQRESPCOUNT No Total send/receive UCN
send/receive message counter.
RDR Cycle AVGRDRRESPONSETIMEUS No Displays the total amount of
Time time (in seconds) it takes for a
request to receive the
corresponding response.
Unexpected UNEXPECTEDRDRRESPONSECOUNT No Displays the count of
RDR responses received for
Response requests that aren’t made.
Count
RDR Retries RDRRETRYCOUNT No Displays the count of
requests sent that do not
receive a response and is
retrieved.
EHPM Controller block CDA Peer Connections tab
The Peer Connections tab contains data indicating the number of peer connections for responder types
between the ACE/C300 Controller and the EHPM Controller. Starting Experion R430, peer-to-peer
communication is supported between ACE/C300 Controller and the EHPM Controller, where the
ACE/C300 Controller acts as the initiator and the EHPM Controller acts as the responder. The following
table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the CDA Peer Connections tab of the
configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Peer Responding Connections
Responding to TNUMACEOUTCON No Displays the number of originator Application
ACEs Control Environments.
Responding to TNUMC3OUTCON No Displays the number of originator C300, and
C300s EHPM output connections.
EHPM Controller block Hardware Information tab
The Hardware Information tab is used to display firmware information, hardware factory information,
and the MAC address related data for the EHPM module. The following table summarizes the
parameter data you can monitor on the Hardware Information tab of the configuration form for the
selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Firmware Version
Boot Image Version BOOTIMAGEVER No Displays the release version of
Experion module boot firmware
currently in the controller.
Application Image Version IMAGEVER_D No Displays the current personality
image version loaded in the EHPM
module.
Hardware Factory Information
Module Type MODTYPE No Displays the hardware type and
details like model number and
number of IOLINKS.
Redundancy Module Serial SERIALNUM No Displays the redundancy module
Number serial number.
Programmable Logic PLVERSION No Displays the Programmable Logic
Revision Revision.
Hardware Major Revision HWREVMAJ No Displays the hardware major
revision.
Hardware Minor Revision HWREVMIN No Displays the hardware minor
revision.
EHPM Firmware Revision HPM_FWREV No Displays the EHPM firmware revision
number number.
EHPM Hardware Revision HPM_HWREV No Displays the EHPM hardware
number revision number.
Communication Processor HPM_ No Displays the communication
Version of EHPM COMMPERSVER processor version of the EHPM
Personality personality.
Communication Processor HPM_ No Displays the communication
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Revision of EHPM COMMPERSREV processor revision of the EHPM
Personality personality.
Control Processor Revision HPM_ No Displays the contoller processor
of EHPM Personality CNTRLPERSREV revision of the EHPM personality.
Control Processor Version HPM_ No Displays the contoller processor
of EHPM Personality CNTRLPERSVER version of the EHPM personality.
EHPM IO Link Hardware HPM_IOL_ No Displays the hardware revision
Revision HWREV number of IO link connected to the
EHPM.
Network Interface Address Information
MAC Address A MACADDRA No Displays the media access control
address of port A (yellow tree port).
MAC Address B MACADDRB No Displays the media access control
address of port A (green tree port).
MAC Address Redundancy MACADDRR No Displays the media access control
address of port used for redundancy
link.
EHPM Controller block FTE tab
The FTE tab is used to display statistics related to FTE communications and performance. It features
parameters associated with the MAC Address Resolution Table (MART), which deals with online media
access control (MAC) address mapping. Two separate MARTs are maintained, one for FTE nodes and
the other for non-FTE nodes. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on
the FTE tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
FTE
Address FTEMARTADDRCOUNT No Displays the number of IP addresses
Count contained in the FTE MART.
Max Depth FTEMARTMAXDEPTH No Displays the maximum depth that the
FTE MART has reached or the highest
number of entries in the table.
Average FTEMARTAVGDEPTH No Displays the average depth of the FTE
Depth MART or the average number of entries
in the table.
Address FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT No Displays the number of collisions that
Collisions have occurred while hashing the FTE
MART.
Current FTE Traffic
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
LAN_A LANATXRATE No Displays communication transmission
TxRate rate in kilobits per second (kbps) for port
(kBit/sec) A (yellow tree port) on the FTE interface.
LAN_B LANBTXRATE No DIsplays communication transmission
TxRate rate in kbps for port B (green tree port)
(kBit/sec) on the FTE interface.
LAN_A LANARXRATE No Displays communication receive rate in
RxRate kbps for port A (yellow tree port) on the
(kBit/sec) FTE interface.
LAN_B LANBRXRATE No Displays communication receive rate in
RxRate kbps for port B (green tree port) on the
(kBit/sec) FTE interface.
FTE Statistics
Number of NUMFTENODES No Displays the current number of FTE
FTE Nodes nodes within the FTE community.
Max Number MAXFTENODES No Displays the maximum number of FTE
of FTE nodes that have been detected within
Nodes the FTE community.
Max Device MAXNODEID No Displays the the highest device index
Index supported within the FTE community.
IP Checksum BADIPCSUM No Displays the number of FTE IP
Errors messages which were received but
determined as having bad IP
checksums.
UDP BADUDPCSUM No Displays the number of FTE UDP
Checksum messages which were received but
Errors determined as having bad UDP
checksums.
Flow Control Statistics
LAN_A LANAPAUSECOUNTS No
Pause
Counts
LAN_B LANBPAUSECOUNTS No
Pause
Counts
Non-FTE MART Statistics
Address NONFTEMARTADDRCOUNT No Displays the number of IP addresses
Count contained in the non-FTE MART.
Max Depth NONFTEMARTMAXDEPTH No Displays the maximum depth that the
non-FTE MART has reached or the
highest number of entries in the table.
Average NONFTEMARTAVGDEPTH No Displays the average depth of the non-
Depth FTE MART or the average number of
entries in the table.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Address NONFTEMARTCOLLCOUNT No Displays the number of collisions that
Collisions have occurred while hashing the non-
FTE MART.
Peak FTE Traffic
LAN_A LANATXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
TxRate Max transmission rate in kbps for port A
(kBit/sec) (yellow tree port) on the FTE interface.
LAN_B LANBTXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
TxRate Max transmission rate in kbps for port B
(kBit/sec) (green tree port) on the FTE interface.
LAN_A LANARXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
RxRate Max receive rate in kbps for port A (yellow
(kBit/sec) tree port) on the FTE interface.
LAN_B LANBRXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
RxRate Max receive rate in kbps for port B (green
(kBit/sec) tree port) on the FTE interface.
LAN failure indicator
LAN_A LANAFAILED No Provides status indicator for port A
(Yellow) (yellow tree port) on the FTE interface.
Failed
LAN_B LANBFAILED No Provides status indicator for port B
(Green) (green tree port) on the FTE interface.
Failed
InterLAN INTERLANFAILED No Provides status indicator for Inter-LAN
Comm Failed communications.
Crossover XOVERFAILED No Provides status indicator for crossover
Cable Failed cable.
EHPM Controller block UDP/TCP tab
The UDP/TCP tab is used to display statistics related to open UDP and TCP connections associated
with the respective EHPM block. It features parameters used for maintenance and performance
monitoring purposes. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
UDP/TCP tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
UDP Statistics
Datagrams UDPINDGRAMS No Displays the total number of UDP datagrams
Delivered delivered to UDP users.
Datagrams UDPNOPORTS No Displays the total number of received UDP
for Unknown datagrams for which there was no application at
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Ports the destination port.
Datagrams UDPINERRORS No Displays the number of received UDP
Dropped for datagrams that could not be delivered for
Errors reasons other than the lack of an application at
the destination port.
Datagrams UDPOUTGRAMS No Displays the total number of UDP datagrams
Sent to sent from this entity.
Applications
Local UDP UDPLISTENERS No Provides a table containing path information for
Listeners all open ports on the FTE interface.
TCP Statistics
Active Opens TCPACTIVEOPENS No Displays the number of times TCP connections
have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT
state from the CLOSED state.
Passive TCPPASSIVEOPENS No Displays the number of times TCP connections
Opens have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD
state from the LISTEN state.
Failed TCPATTEMPTFAILS No Displays the number of times TCP connections
Connection have made a direct transition to the CLOSED
Attempts state from either the SYNSENT state or the
SYN-RCVD state, plus the number of times TCP
connections have made a direct transition to the
LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state.
Connections TCPESTABRESETS No Displays the number of times TCP connections
Resets have made a direct transition to the CLOSED
state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the
CLOSE-WAIT state.
Current TCPCURRESTAB No Displays the number of TCP connections for
Connections which the current state is either ESTABLISHED
or CLOSE-WAIT.
Segments TCPINSEGS No Displays the total number of segments
Received received, including those received in error. This
count includes segments received on currently
established connections.
Segments TCPOUTSEGS No Displays the total number of segments sent,
Sent including those on current connections but
excluding those containing only retransmitted
octets.
Segments TCPRETRANSSEGS No Displays the total number of segments
Retransmitted retransmitted, that is, the number of TCP
segments transmitted containing one or more
previously transmitted octets.
Segments TCPINERRS No Displays the total number of segments received
Discarded in error. For example, bad TCP checksums.
For Errors
Reset TCPOUTRESETS No Displays the number of TCP segments sent
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Segments containing the RST flag.
Sent
Current TCP TCPCONNTABLE No Provides a table containing path information for
Connections all currently connected clients of the FTE
interface.
EHPM Controller block IP/ICMP tab
The IP/ICMP tab is used to display statistics related to IP and ICMP protocol messages associated with
(that is, originating in or received by) the respective EHPM block. It features parameters used for
maintenance and status operations on the network. The following table summarizes the parameter data
you can monitor on the IP/ICMP tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
IP Statistics
Datagrams IPINRECEIVES No Displays the total number of input
received from datagrams received from connected
Below nodes, including those received in
error.
Datagrams IPINHDRERRORS No Displays the number of input datagrams
Format Error discarded due to errors in their IP
Drops headers, including bad checksums,
version number mismatch, other format
errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors
discovered in processing their IP
options, and so on.
Datagrams IPINADDRERRORS No Displays the number of input datagrams
Misdelivery discarded because the IP address in
Drops their IP header's destination field was
not a valid address to be received at
this entity. This count includes invalid
addresses, such as 0.0.0.0, and
addresses of unsupported classes,
such as Class E. For entities which are
not IP Gateways and therefore do not
forward datagrams, this counter
includes datagrams discarded because
the destination address was not a local
address.
Unknown IPINUNKNOWNPORTS No Displays the number of locally-
Protocol addressed datagrams received
Datagrams successfully but discarded because of
an unknown or unsupported protocol.
Datagrams IPINDISCARDS No Displays the number of input IP
Discarded for datagrams for which no problems were
Resrcs encountered to prevent their continued
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
processing, but which were discarded
for another reason. For example,
discarded for lack of buffer space. Note
that this counter does not include any
datagrams discarded while awaiting re-
assembly.
Datagrams IPINDELIVERS No Displays the total number of input
Delivered datagrams successfully delivered to IP
Above user-protocols, including ICMP.
Datagrams IPOUTREQUESTS No Displays the total number of IP
Sent Out datagrams which local IP user-
protocols, including ICMP, supplied to
IP in requests for transmission.
Out IPOUTDISCARDS No Displays the number of output IP
Datagrams datagrams for which no problem was
Discarded encountered to prevent their
transmission to their destination, but
which were discarded for another
reason. For example, discarded for lack
of buffer space.
Datagrams IPOUTNOROUTES No Displays the number of IP datagrams
Drops for No discarded because no route could be
Routes found to transmit them to their
destination.
Fragments IPREASSEMREQS No Displays the number of IP fragments
Needing received which needed to be
Reassembly reassembled at this entity.
Fragments IPREASSEMOKS No Displayss the number of IP datagrams
Reassembled successfully reassembled.
Fragments IPREASSEMFAILS No Displays the number of failures
Reassembly detected by the IP reassembly algorithm
Fails for reasons such as, timed out, errors,
and so on.
Datagrams IPFRAGOKS No Displays the number of IP datagrams
Fragmented that have been successfully fragmented
at this entity.
Datagrams IPFRAGFAILS No Displays the number of IP datagrams
Fragmentation that have been discarded because they
Fails needed to be fragmented at this entity
but could not be. For example, they
could not be fragmented because their
Don't Fragment flag was set.
Fragments IPFRAGCREATES No Displays the number of IP datagram
Created fragments that have been generated as
a result of fragmentation at this entity.
Routing IPROUTINGDISCARDS No Identifies The number of routing entries
Entries which were chosen to be discarded
Discarded even though they are valid.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
ICMP Statistics
Messages ICMPINMSGS No Displays the total number of ICMP
Received messages which the entity received.
Messages ICMPINERRORS No Displays the number of ICMP messages
with Format which the entity received but
Errors determined as having ICMP-specific
errors, such as bad ICMP checksums,
bad length, and so on.
Dest. ICMPINDESTUNREACHS No Displays the number of ICMP
Unreachable destination unreachable messages
Msgs Recvd received.
Echo ICMPINECHOS No Displays the number of ICMP echo
Messages (request) messages received.
Recvd
Echo Reply ICMPINECHOREPS No Displays the number of ICMP echo
Messages reply messages received.
Recvd
Messages ICMPOUTMSGS No Displays the total number of ICMP
Sent messages which this entity attempted to
send.
Out Error ICMPOUTERRORS No Displays the number of ICMP messages
Messages which this entity did not send due to
problems discovered within ICMP such
as a lack of buffers.
Dest. ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS No Displays the number of ICMP
Unreachable destination unreachable messages
Messages sent.
Sent
Echo ICMPOUTECHOS No Displays the number of ICMP echo
Messages (request) messages sent.
Sent
Echo Reply ICMPOUTECHOREPS No Displays the number of ICMP echo
Messages reply messages sent.
Sent
EHPM Controller block Soft Failures tab
The Soft Failures tab is used to display various soft failure conditions for the EHPM Controller hardware.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Soft Failures tab of the
configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Soft Failure Conditions
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Device Index BCDSWSTS No Displays the softfail condition
Switches whenever the Device Index switch
Changed value is changed.
Factory Data FACTDATAERR No Displays the factory data checksum.
Error
ROM Application ROMAPPIMGCHKSMFAIL No Displays softfail condition.
Image
Checksum
Failure
WDT Hardware WDTHWFAIL No Displays the WatchDog Timer
Failure Hardware Failure.
WDT Refresh WDTSWFAIL No Displays the WatchDog Timer
Warning Software Failure.
ROM Boot Image ROMBOOTIMGCHKSMFAIL No Displays softfail condition.
Checksum
Failure
Debug Flag DEBUGFLAGSET No Displays Soft Fail condition, which
Enabled indicates that the image loaded to the
module was built with one or more
debug flags asserted.
Critical Task TASKHLTHMON No A key task within the controller is
Watchdog executing less frequently than
Warning normal.
Partner Not PARTNERNOTVISFTE No Indicates redundant module partner
Visible On FTE is not visible on FTE.
Uncorrectable RAMSWEEPERR No Displays status of detected RAM
Internal RAM errors.
Sweep Error
Corrected RAMSCRUBERRS No Displays status of detected RAM
Internal RAM errors.
Sweep Error
Uncorrectable BACKUPRAMSWEEPERR No Displays status of detected errors in
User RAM backup RAM.
Sweep Error
Corrected User BACKUPRAMSCRUBERRS No Displays errors detected within
RAM Sweep backup RAM that are corrected
Error through a scrub operation.
Minimum HW MINHWREVSF No
Revision
EHPM Controller block CDA Statistics tab
The CDA Statistics tab displays various statistical parameters used for maintaining and monitoring the
data for display and peer to peer communication with the EHPM Controller. Cache hit rate with average
and maximum values from display are added to indicate how many requests are served by cache. The
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the CDA Statistics tab of the
configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Display DISPOVRLOAD No Displays the load on the subscribed
overload display path (throttling active to fit
indicator allowed PPS limit).
EHPM Data Statistics
Avg Resp IMRAVGRESPTIMEP2PREAD No Displays the average response time from
Time in the HPM Comm Processor during peer-
P2P to-peer read operation. This is the
Read average time taken to service peer cyclic
read.
Avg Resp IMRAVGRESPTIMEDISPREAD No Displays the average response time from
Time in the HPM Comm Processor during display
Display read operation. This is the average time
Read taken to service display cyclic read (for
example, HMIWeb display and standard
history read).
Avg Resp IMRAVGRESPTIMEP2PWRITE No Displays the average response time from
Time in the HPM Comm Processor during peer-
P2P Write to-peer write operation. This is the
average time taken to service peer
acyclic write.
Avg Resp IMRAVGSTDDISPREAD No Displays the average response time from
Time in the HPM Comm Processor during display
Std read operation. This is the average time
History taken to service display acyclic read (for
Read example, standard history read).
Max Resp IMRMAXRESPTIMEP2PREAD No Displays the maximum response time
Time in from the HPM Comm Processor during
P2P peer-to-peer read operation. This is the
Read maximum time taken to service peer
cyclic read.
Max Resp IMRMAXRESPTIMEP2PWRITE No Displays the maximum response time
Time in from the HPM Comm Processor during
P2P Write peer-to-peer write operation. This is the
maximum time taken to service peer
acyclic write.
Max Resp IMRMAXRESPTIMEDISPREAD No Displays the maximum response time
Time in from the HPM Comm Processor during
Display display read operation. This is the
Read maximum time taken to service display
cyclic read (for example, HMIWeb display
and standard history read).
Max Resp IMRMAXSTDDISPREAD No Displays the maximum response time
Time in from the HPM Comm Processor during
Std display read operation. This is the
History maximum time taken to service display
Read acyclic read (for example, standard
history read).
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Peer Avg CWRITEAVGPPS No Displays the average parameters per
PPS for second load during peer-to-peer write
Write operation.
Load
Max Peer CWRITEMAXPPS No Displays the maximum parameters per
PPS for second load during peer-to-peer write
Write operation.
Load
Display CHIGHREADAVGPPS No Displays the average parameters per
Avg PPS second load during display read
for High operation. This is a high-priority read
Read load (for example, standard history read,
display startup load and so on).
Max CHIGHREADMAXPPS No Displays the maximum parameters per
Display second load during display read
High operation. This is a high-priority read
Priority load (for example, standard history read,
Read display startup load and so on).
Display CLOWREADAVGPPS No Displays the average parameters per
Avg Low second load during subscribed display
Priority read operation. This is a low-priority read
Read load (for example, HMIWeb display).
Max CLOWREADMAXPPS No Displays the maximum parameters per
Display second load during subscribed display
Low read operation. This is a low-priority read
Priority load (for example, HMIWeb display).
Read
Display CDISPAVGCHPPS No Displays the average parameters per
Avg second load during peer-to-peer write
Cache Hit operation.
Rate
Max CDISPMAXCHPPS No Displays the maximum parameters per
Display second load during peer-to-peer write
Cache Hit operation.
Rate
EHPM Controller block Point Mix tab
Beginning with R511.3, the Point Mix tab is used to display parameters that give the maximum number
of points that can be created in EHPM block.
The configuration of the following parameters should match with UCN node-specific configurations.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Control Configuration
No. of NCTLSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Regulatory Control Slots
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Regulatory that has a configurable range of 0 to 250.
Control Before reducing the number of Regulatory
Slots
Control Slots, delete all configured points
within the slot range being eliminated.
No. of NPVSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Regulatory PV Slots that has a
Regulatory configurable range of 0 to 400. Before reducing the
PV Slots number of Regulatory PV Slots, delete all configured points
within the slot range being eliminated.
No. of NLOGSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Logic Slots that has a configurable
Logic Slots range of 0 to 400. Before reducing the number of Logic
Slots, delete all configured points within the slot range
being eliminated.
No. of NDCSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Digital Composite Slots that has a
Digital configurable range of 0 to 999. Before reducing the
Composite number of Digital Composite Slots, delete all configured
Slots points within the slot range being eliminated.
No. of NDEVSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Device Control Points that has a
Device configurable range of 0 to 400. Before reducing the
Control number of Regulatory Control Slots, delete all configured
Points points within the slot range being eliminated. Before
reducing the number of Device Control Slots, delete all
configured points within the slot range being eliminated.
No. of NPMSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Process Module Slots that has a
Process configurable range of 0 to 250. Before reducing the
Module number of Process Module Slots, delete all configured
Slots points within the slot range being eliminated.
No. of NNUMERIC Yes Displays the No. of Numerics that has a configurable range
Numerics of 0 to 16384. Entry must be a multiple of 16. If a multiple of
16 is not entered, the NNUMERIC is clamped to the next
higher multiple of 16. Before reducing the number of Box
Numerics, delete all configured points within the slot range
being eliminated.
No. of $NNUMALM Yes Displays the No. of HPM BOX Numerics Slots that need to
Alarmable be processed for PV Trip Point Alarming. It has a
Numerics configurable range of 0 to least of (NNUMERIC or 2047).
Entry must be a multiple of 4. If a multiple of 4is not
entered, the $NNUMALM is clamped to the next higher
multiple of 4. Before reducing the number of Alarmable Box
Numerics, rebuild all tagged box Numerics within the slot
range being eliminated to COMPONNT Point Form.
No. of NSTRING Yes Displays the No. of Strings in HPM Box Data that has a
Strings in configurable range of 0 to 16384. Entry must be a multiple
HPM Box of 16. If a multiple of 16 is not entered, the NSTRING is
Data clamped to the next higher multiple of 16.
No. of NTIME Yes Displays the No. of Times in HPM Box Data 1 that has a
Times in configurable range of 0 to 16384. Entry must be a multiple
HPM Box of 32. If a multiple of 32 is not entered, the NTIME is
Data 1 clamped to the next higher multiple of 32.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
No. of NARRSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Array Slots that has a configurable
Array Slots range of 0 to 500. Before reducing the number of Array
Slots, delete all configured points within the slot range
being eliminated.
Fast Control Configuration
No. of Fast NFASTCTL Yes Displays the No. of Fast Regulatory Control Slots that has a
Regulatory configurable range of 0 to 200 but cannot exceed
Control NCTLSLOT.
Slots
No. of Fast NFASTPV Yes Displays the No. of Fast Regulatory PV slots that has a
Regulatory configurable range of 0 to 500 but cannot exceed
PV slots NPVSLOT.
No. of Fast NFASTLOG Yes Displays the No. of Fast Logic Slots that has a configurable
Logic Slots range of 0 to 100 but cannot exceed NLOGSLOT.
No. of Fast NFASTDC Yes Displays the No. of Fast digital Composite Slots that has a
digital configurable range of 0 to 999 but cannot exceed
Composite NDCSLOT.
Slots
No. of Fast NFASTDEV Yes Displays the No. of Fast Device Control Points that has a
Device configurable range of 0 to 100 but cannot exceed
Control NDEVSLOT.
Points
No. of $NSFPMS Yes Displays the No. of HPM Process Module slots that need to
Semi Fast be processed twice a second. The number of Semi Fast
Process Process Module Slots has a configurable range of 0 to 100,
Module but cannot exceed NPMSLOT.
EHPM Controller block Server History tab
The Server History tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Access Levels
Control SCANCTRLLVL Yes Indicates Server control level to be
Level associated with this function.
History Configuration
Number of HIST.NUMPARAMS Yes Defines number of history parameters
History to be included in History Configuration
Parameters table.
Parameter HIST.PARAM Yes Valid parameter name for a parameter
associated with the given point that is to
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
be collected and stored as historical
data at predetermined intervals.
Description No Provides a brief description of the
entered parameter.
FAST HIST.FAST Yes Select the Fast type of history
collection.
STD HIST.STD Yes Select the Standard type of history
collection.
EXTD HIST.EXTD Yes Select the Extended type of history
collection.
Gating HIST.GATEPARAM Yes Optional gating parameter to define
Parameter conditions under which data for this
parameter should be collected.
Gate State HIST.GATEVALUE Yes Defines the gate state for the
configured gating parameter.
Create New N/A Launches the Server scripting
or Edit configuration utility.
Existing
Server
Scripts
(Button)
Parameter History Options
History type HIST.FAST HIST.STD No For the selected parameter, lists the
HIST.EXTD HIST.EXC available history types.
l Fast
l Standard
l Extended
l Exception
Collection HIST.FASTCOLLRATE Yes For the selected parameter, defines the
Rate HIST.STDCOLLRATE collection rate for each history type.
HIST.EXCCOLLRATE
Offset HIST.EXCOFFSET Yes (Optional) Applicable only to Standard
HIST.STDOFFSET history and Exception history. For the
selected parameter, defines the offset
value, which enables the data
collection to be staggered.
PHD HIST.FASTPHDCOLLRATE Yes For the selected parameter, defines the
Collection HIST.STDPHDCOLLRATE PHD Collection strategy.
HIST.EXTDPHDCOLLRATE l Default
HIST.EXCPHDCOLLRATE
l Override
l Disable
EHPM Controller block Server Displays tab
The Server Displays tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. The
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Point SCANPNTDTL Yes By default, a Display template is already entered
Detail into Point Detail Display box (for example,
Display sysDtlFTEB.htm). This template can be used for
creating your own display or it can be used as is,
provided your function block name matches
name built into detail display that is supplied as
a template.
Group SCANGRPDTL Yes By default, a Display template is already entered
Detail into the Group Detail Display box (for example,
Display sysGrpFTEB.htm). This template can be used for
creating your own display or it can be used as is,
provided that your function block name matches
name built into detail display that is supplied as
a template
Associated SCANASSOCDSP Yes Name of the Server display to be associated
Display with this function block.
Trends
Number of TREND.NUMPARAMS Yes Defines the number of trend parameters to be
Trends included in the Trends Configuration table.
Trend # TREND.NUMBER Yes Defines Trend number to be associated with this
trend parameter
Trend TREND.POSITION Yes Defines color of pen that is used to trace
Position assigned parameter on Station Trend display.
Trend TREND.PARAM Yes Valid parameter name for a parameter
Parameter associated with given point that is configured for
trend collection.
Description No Provides a brief description of the entered
parameter.
Groups
Number of GROUP.NUMPARAMS Yes Defines the number of group parameters to be
Groups included in Groups Configuration table.
Group # GROUP.NUMBER Yes Defines Group number to be associated with this
group parameter.
Pos # GROUP.POSITION Yes Defines number of position configured
parameter will occupy in the Station Group
display.
Group GROUP.PARAM Yes Valid parameter name for a parameter
Parameter associated with the given point that is configured
in the system.
Description No Provides a brief description of the entered
parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
EHPM Controller block Control Confirmation tab
The Control Confirmation tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. If
you have an optional Electronic Signature license, you can configure electronic signature information
for the tagged block through this tab on the block's configuration form in Control Builder. Please see the
online help and the Server and Client Configuration Guide for information about the data on this tab.
The Electronic Signature function aligns with the identical Electronic Signatures function that is initiated
through Quick Builder and Station for Server points. When this block is loaded to a controller, its control
confirmation configuration (electronic signatures) is also loaded to the Server. This means you can view
the control confirmation configuration for this tagged object in Station and also make changes to it. If you
make changes through Station, you must initiate an Upload function through the Controller menu in
Control Builder for the object in the Monitoring view to synchronize changes in the ERDB.
EHPM Controller block QVCS tab
The QVCS tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. If you have an
optional Qualification and Version Control System (QVCS) license, this tab shows current QVCS
information for the selected EHPM block.
EHPM Controller block Identification tab
The Identification tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Name Name Yes Unique block name consisting of up to 16 characters
to identify the block. At least one character in the
name must be a letter (A-Z).
Description DESC Yes Descriptive text that appears on detail and group
displays to uniquely describe this particular function
block
Block BLCKCOMMENT1 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment of up to 40 characters.
1
Block BLCKCOMMENT2 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment of up to 40 characters.
2
Block BLCKCOMMENT3 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment of up to 40 characters.
3
Block BLCKCOMMENT4 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment of up to 40 characters.
4
Library N/A No Identifies Control Builder Library that is the source for
template.
System No Identifies System Template that is the source for this
Template block.
Base No Identifies Base Template that is used for this block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Template
Created By CREATEDBY No Identifies user who created block, if operator security
is implemented. Otherwise, may just show Default
login.
Date DATECREATED No Indicates date and time template was created. If this
Created block is in Version Control System, shows date and
time initial version of template was created.
Last MODIFIEDBY No Identifies user who made last modifications to block,
Modified if operator security is implemented. Otherwise, may
By just show default login. If this block is in Version
Control System, modifications apply to last version of
block.
Date Last VERSIONDATE No Indicates date and time last modification was made
Modified to block's configuration. If this block is in Version
Control System, modification date and time applies
to last version of block.
4.22.3 EHPM Point template Configuration Form Reference
This section provides a summary of all user-visible parameters for an EHPM Controller Point Template.
The parameters are grouped according to the tabs where they reside on the configuration form. For
more details about these parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference .
DIGCTL Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Input Connections Input Connections Tab
Gate Config Gate Config Tab
Output Connections Output Connections Tab
State Config State Config Tab
Input/Output Config Input/Output Config Tab
SV Config SV Config Tab
Maintenance Maintenance Tab
Mode config Mode config Tab
Alarm Alarm Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Tab name Reference
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
DIGCTL Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the EHPM Point Template. The Main
Tab contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an EHPM Point Template. In
addition, it displays the important states of the EHPM Point Template and supports the key commands
associated with operation of the EHPM Point Template. Redundancy configuration can be entered only
in the Project Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or
configure on the Main tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM Point Template.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least one
character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known within
the context of the enterprise model.
DESC
Point Details
Engr Units EUDESC No The engineering-units descriptor (for example, °C, PSIA,
Descriptor gal/hr, kPa, ltr-min) for this data point, that appears on
displays, logs, and reports.
UCN Node NODETYP No UCN Node Type
Type
Point Form PNTFORM No Point Form
Point $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines the
Custom name of the custom schematic that is to be displayed
Detail instead of the standard detail display for this point.
Point ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is associated
Associated with this point.
Display
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Point KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears on
Keyword displays and in printed logs and reports.
Primary PRIMMOD Yes The tag name of the point that is the primary module for
Module this point.
Point Id
Point PTDESC No Textual description of the point for use in standard
Descriptor Group and Detail displays.
Unit UNIT Unit Identifier
Identifier
Point details
Network NTWKNUM No Network Number
Number
Node NODENUM No Node Number
Number
Slot Number SLOTNUM No Slot Number
Primary PRIMMOD No Primary Module Point Identifier
Module
Point
Identifier
User ID USERID No User ID Reservation
Reservation
Switch States
Number of NOSTATES No Number of Digital States
Digital
States
Number of NODINPTS No Number of Digital Inputs
Digital
Inputs
Number of NODOPTS No Number of Digital Outputs
Digital
Outputs
Misc
Process PV No PV is the output of the range-violation checks
Variable
PVAUTO PVAUTO No Current PV State.
State
Digital State OP No Digital State Output
Output
DIGCTL Point Template Block Input Connections Tab
The Input Connections tab of the DIGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Input
Connections tab of the DIGCTL Point Template for the selected AM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Number of Logic Inputs NOLINPTS No Number of Logic Inputs
Logic Bad Input Handling Option LIBADOPT No Logic Bad Input Handling Option
LOGIC
Input Descriptor LIDESC No Input Descriptor
Logic Input Connection Source LISRC No Logic Input Connection Source
Primary Input Gate Algorithm ID PIALGID No Primary Input Gate Algorithm ID
Primary Input Constants Numeric PINN No Primary Input Constants Numeric
Primary Input Source PISRC No Primary Input Source
Primary Input Gate Deadband PIDEADBD No Primary Input Gate Deadband
Secondary Input Gate Algorithm SIALGID No Secondary Input Gate Algorithm
ID ID
Secondary Input Gate SIDLYTIM No Secondary Input Gate
Delay/Pulse Width Delay/Pulse Width
Destination for Secondary Input SIDSTN No Destination for Secondary Input
Gates Gates
DIGCTL Point Template Block Gate Config Tab
The Gate Config tab of the DIGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Gate
Config of the DIGCTL Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Primary Gate Config
Number of Primary Gates NOPGATE No Number of Primary Gates
Primary Gate Algorithm ID PGALGID No Primary Gate Algorithm ID
Primary Gate Pulse Width PGPLSWTH No Primary Gate Pulse Width
Primary Gate Destination PGDSTN No Primary Gate Destination
Secondary Gate Config
Number of Secondary Gates NDSGATE No Number of Secondary Gates
Secondary Gate Algorithm ID SGALGID No Secondary Gate Algorithm ID
Pulse Width for Secondary SGPLSWTH No Pulse Width for Secondary
Gate Gate
Secondary Gate Destination SGDSTN No Secondary Gate Destination
DIGCTL Point Template Block Output Connections Tab
The Output Connections tab of the DIGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Output
Connections of the DIGCTL Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Configurable Notes
Name
Number of Logic Outputs NOLOPTS No Number of Logic Outputs
Logic Output Connection LOSRC No Logic Output Connection
Source Source
Logic Output Destination LODSTN No Logic Output Destination
Logic Output Enable LOENBL No Logic Output Enable
Numerics - Initial Values
Numerics 1-8 NN No Numerics 1-8
Flags - Initial Values
Logic Slot Flags FL No Logic Slot Flags
DIGCTL Point Template Block State Config Tab
The State Config tab of the DIGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the State
Config of the DIGCTL Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
PV Text Option PVTXTOPT No PV Text Option
Moving PV Text Descriptor MOVPVTXT No Moving PV Text Descriptor
Bad PV Text Descriptor BADPVTXT No Bad PV Text Descriptor
State Text Descriptor STATETXT No State Text Descriptor
Box Color for Digital Displays BOXCLR No Box Color for Digital Displays
Momentary Output States MOMSTATE No Momentary Output States
Logic Source LOGICSRC No Logic Source
DIGCTL Point Template Block Input/Output Config Tab
The Input/Output Config tab of the DIGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
Input/Output Config of the DIGCTL Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Input Connections
Connection Source DISRC No Connection Source
Input State Configuration
Input 1 Equal to a PV State D1_0 No Digital Input 1 Equal to A PV State
of 0 of 0.
Input 1 Equal to a PV State D1_1 No Digital Input 1 Equal to A PV State
of 1 of 1.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
D2_D1 Zero_Zero PV State D2D1_00 No D2_D1 Zero_Zero PV State
D2D1 Zero_One PV State D2D1_01 No D2D1 Zero_One PV State
D2D1 One_Zero PV State D2D1_10 No D2D1 One_Zero PV State
D2D1 One_One PV State D2D1_11 No D2D1 One_One PV State
PV Source Option PVSRCOPT No PV Source Option
PV Source PVSOURCE No PV Source
Output State Configuration
State 1, Outputs 1 ST1_OP1 No State 1, Outputs 1, 2, and 3
State 1, Outputs 2 ST1_OP2 No State 1, Outputs 1, 2, and 3
State 1, Outputs 3 ST1_OP3 No State 1, Outputs 1, 2, and 3
State 0, Outputs 1 ST0_OP1 No State 0, Outputs 1 through 3.
State 0, Outputs 2 ST0_OP2 No State 0, Outputs 1 through 3.
State 0, Outputs 3 ST0_OP3 No State 0, Outputs 1 through 3.
State 2, Outputs 1 ST2_OP1 No State 2–Outputs 1, 2, and 3.
State 2, Outputs 2 ST2_OP2 No State 2–Outputs 1, 2, and 3.
State 2, Outputs 3 ST2_OP3 No State 2–Outputs 1, 2, and 3.
Output Connections
Connection Destination DODSTN No Connection Destination
Pulse Width for Point PULSEWTH No Pulse Width for Point Outputs
Outputs
Seal - in Circuit Option SEALOPT No Seal - in Circuit Option
Local Manual Polarity LMREV No Local Manual Polarity
Local Manual Source LMSRC No Local Manual Source
DIGCTL Point Template Block SV Config Tab
The SV Config tab of the DIGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the SV Config of the
DIGCTL Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
SV Input Connection SVSRC No Secondary Variable Input Connection
SV Descriptor SVDESC No Secondary Variable Descriptor
SV Engineering Unit SVEUDESC No Secondary Variable Engineering Unit
Descriptor Descriptor
SV Range High SVEUHI No Secondary Variable Range High
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
SV Range Low SVEULO No Secondary Variable Range Low
SV Target Value SVTV No Secondary Variable Target Value
Re-Alarm Interval $REALARM No Re-Alarm Interval
SV High Alarm Priority SVHIPR No Secondary Variable High Alarm Priority
SV High Alarm Trip Point SVHITP No Secondary Variable High Alarm Trip
Point
SV High - High Alarm SVHHPR No Secondary Variable High - High Alarm
Priority Priority
SV High - High Alarm Trip SVHHTP No Secondary Variable High - High Alarm
Point Trip Point
SV Alarm Mask Times in MASKTIM No Secondary Variable Alarm Mask Times
secs in secs
SV Alarm Deadband SVALDB No Secondary Variable Alarm Deadband
SV Alarm Deadband in SVALDBEU No Secondary Variable Alarm Deadband
EU in EU
Bad SV Alarm Priority BADSVPR No Bad Secondary Variable Alarm Priority
DIGCTL Point Template Block Maintenance Tab
The Maintenance tab of the DIGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
Maintenance of the DIGCTL Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Reset Maintenance Statistics RESETFL No Reset Maintenance Statistics
Flag Flag
Maintenance Reset Statistics MAINTDAT No Maintenance Reset Statistics
Time Time
Red Tag State REDTAG No Red Tag State
Maintenance Statistics
Maintenance Option MAINTOPT No Maintenance Option
Max Time allowed in State 1 MAXTIM1H No Max Time allowed in State 1
Max Transitions to State 1 MAXTRAN1 No Max Transitions to State 1
Max Time allowed in State 0 MAXTIM0H No Max Time allowed in State 0
Max Transitions to State 0 MAXTRAN0 No Max Transitions to State 0
Max Time allowed in State 2 MAXTIM2H No Max Time allowed in State 2
Max Transitions to State 2 MAXTRAN2 No Max Transitions to State 2
DIGCTL Point Template Block Mode Config Tab
The Mode Config tab of the DIGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Mode
Config of the DIGCTL Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Mode Config
Normal Mode Attribute NMODATTR No Normal Mode Attribute
Mode Permissive MODEPERM No Mode Permissive
Override Option OROPT No Override Option
Interlock bypass BYPASS No Interlock bypass
Initialization Option $INITOPT No Initialization Option
MODSEL
Mode Selection List MODES No Mode Selection List
Mode Selection List $MODESEL No Mode Selection List
DIGCTL Point Template Block Alarm Tab
The Alarm tab of the DIGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Alarm of the
DIGCTL Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
PV Normal State PVNORMAL No Contains a character string that represents the
normal state of this Flag data point
Alarm Enable ALENBST No Point alarm-enable status that affects the detecting
State and reporting of alarms
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No The Auxiliary Unit of an alarmable process point. If
an Auxiliary Unit ID is specified.
Offnormal Alarm OFFNRMPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Off Normal alarm.
Priority
Off Normal $OFSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of Off
Selective Cutout Normal alarm of a point even though the point is
cutout.
Bad PV Alarm BADPVPR No Bad PV Alarm Priority
Priority
CMDDIS Alarm
State Change STCHGOPT No State Change Option
Option
State 0 Pause PAUSETIM No State 0 Pause Time
Time
Feedback Time FBTIME No Feedback Time
Command Fail CMDFALTM No Command Fail Timeout
Timeout
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Command CMDDISPR No Command Disagree Alarm Priority
Disagree Alarm
Priority
Override Alarm
Override Alarm OVRDALOP No Override Alarm Option
Option
Override Alarm OVRDALPR No Override Alarm Priority
Priority
Safety Override Alarm
SI0 Safety SI0ALOPT No SI0 Safety Override Alarm
Override Alarm
Override SI0 SI0ALPR No Override SI0 Alarm Priority
Alarm Priority
Event Opt
Event Reporting EVTOPT No Event Reporting Option
Option
EIP Point EIPPCODE No EIP Point Identifier
Identifier
REGCTL Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Mode Mode Tab
Input Input Tab
Algorithm Algorithm Tab
Output Output Tab
Alarms Alarms Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Tab name Reference
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
REGCTL Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the EHPM Point Template. The Main
Tab contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an EHPM Point Template. In
addition, it displays the important states of the EHPM Point Template and supports the key commands
associated with operation of the EHPM Point Template. Redundancy configuration can be entered only
in the Project Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or
configure on the Main tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM Point Template.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Tag Name Project System assigned or a configured unique
Name Only name. Consisting of up to 16 characters and
at least one character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Item Project A non-unique name by which an entity is
Name Name Only known within the context of the enterprise
model.
Description DESC
Point Details
Engr Units EUDESC No The engineering-units descriptor (for example, °C, PSIA,
Descriptor gal/hr, kPa, ltr-min) for this data point, that appears on
displays, logs, and reports.
UCN Node NODETYP No UCN Node Type
Type
Point Form PNTFORM No Point Form
Point $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines the
Custom name of the custom schematic that is to be displayed
Detail instead of the standard detail display for this point.
Point ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is associated
Associated with this point.
Display
Point KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears on
Keyword displays and in printed logs and reports.
Point PTDESC No Textual description of the point for use in standard Group
Descriptor and Detail displays.
Unit UNIT
Identifier
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Network NTWKNUM No Network Number
Number
Point Details
Node NODENUM No Node Number
Number
Slot SLOTNUM No Slot Number
Number
Primary PRIMMOD No Primary Module Point Identifier
Module
Point
Identifier
User ID USERID No User ID Reservation
Reservation
Overview OVERVAL No Overview Value in Percent
Value in
Percent
Red Tag REDTAG No Red Tag State
State
Alarm ALENBST No Alarm Enable Status.
Enable
Status.
Contact CONTCUT No Contact cutout flag
cutout
Shutdown SHUTDOWN No Shutdown Command Flag
Command
Flag
REGCTL Point Template Block Mode Tab
The Mode tab of the REGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Mode of the
REGCTL Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Mode Config
Mode MODE No Mode
Mode Attribute MODATTR No Mode Attribute
Normal Mode NMODE No Normal Mode
Normal Mode Attribute NMODATTR No Normal Mode Attribute
Mode Permissive MODEPERM No Mode Permissive
External Mode Switching Option EXTSWOPT No External Mode Switching Option
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
External Mode Switching ESWENBST No External Mode Switching
Enable State Enable State
Mode Shed Config
Bad Output Connection Mode $BADOCMD No Bad Output Connection Mode
BADCTLOP BADCTLOP No BADCTLOP
Remote Cascade Option RCASOPT No Remote Cascade Option
Remote Cascade Shed Time SHEDTIME No Remote Cascade Shed Time
Shedmode SHEDMODE No Shedmode
MODSEL
Mode Selection List MODES No Mode Selection List
Mode Selection List $MODESEL No Mode Selection List
REGCTL Point Template Block Input Tab
The Input tab of the REGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Input tab of the
REGCTL Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Reg Common 1
Control Equation Type CTLEQN No Control Equation Type
Gain Constant K No Gain Constant
Overall Bias B No Overall Bias
Rate at which Bias Ramps RATE1 No Rate at which Bias Ramps
down down
X Input EU Range High XEUHI No X Input EU Range High
X Input EU Range Low XEULO No X Input EU Range Low
Number of Logic Inputs NOCINPTS No Number of Logic Inputs
Control Input Connection CISRC No Control Input Connection
Source Source
Control Input Connection CIDSTN No Control Input Connection
Destination Destination
REGCTL Point Template Block Algorithm Tab
The Algorithm tab of the REGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
Algorithm tab of the REGCTL Point Template for the selected AM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Configurable Notes
Name
Control Inputs
X1 input Value to be X1 No
Biased
Bias Adjustment Input X2 No Bias Adjustment Input
Control Misc
Initialization Manual Flag INITMAN No Initialization Manual Flag
Windup Status of the input ARWNET No Windup Status of the input
Windup Status of the ARWOP No Windup Status of the Output
Output
Control Initialization Req CTRLINIT No Control Initialization Req Flag
Flag
Point Override Status PTORST No Point Override Status
RARWSTS RARWSTS No Remote Anti - Reset Windup
Status
REGCTL Point Template Block Output Tab
The Output tab of the REGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Output tab of the
REGCTL Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Output Connections
No of Control OP Connections NOCOPTS No No of Control OP Connections
Control Output Conn Destination CODSTN No Control Output Conn Destination
OP limits
Output (OP) Low Limit (in OPLOLM No Output (OP) Low Limit (in
percentage) percentage)
Output High Limit in Percent OPHILM No Output High Limit in Percent
OP High Limit in MAN mode $MOPHILM No OP High Limit in MAN mode
OP Low Limit in MAN mode $MOPLOLM No OP Low Limit in MAN mode
Output Minimum Change in OPMCHLM No Output Minimum Change in
Percent Percent
Output (OP) Rate of Change Limit OPROCLM No Output (OP) Rate of Change Limit
(in Percent per minute) (in Percent per minute)
OP configurations
Output Tolerance $OPTOL No Output Tolerance
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Calculated Value High Limit CVEUHI No Calculated Value High Limit
Calculated Value Low Limit CVEULO No Calculated Value Low Limit
Safe Operation - Safety Shutdown SAFEOP No Safe Operation - Safety Shutdown
Reverse Output Indicator OUTIND No Reverse Output Indicator
OP Misc
Calculated Variable CV No Calculated Variable
Output 1 - Output 4 Values OP No Output 1 - Output 4 Values
REGCTL Point Template Block Alarms Tab
The Block Alarm tab of the REGCTL Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Block
Alarm of the REGCTL Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No The Auxiliary Unit of an alarmable process
point. If an Auxiliary Unit ID is specified.
Re Alarm Level $REALALARM No Re Alarm Level
Delay Time DLYTIME No Delay Time
Delay for BADPV and $DLBADAL No Delay for BADPV and BADCTL
BADCTL
Bad Control Alarm BADCTLPR No Bad Control Alarm Priority
Priority
OP Alarms
Bad Output BADOCOPT No Bad Output Connection Alarm Option
Connection Alarm
Option
Bad Output BADOCPR No Bad Output Connection Alarm Priority
Connection Alarm
Priority
Output Alarm OPALDB No Output Alarm Deadband
Deadband
Output High Alarm OPHITP No Output High Alarm Trip Point
Trip Point
Output High Alarm OPHIPR No Output High Alarm Priority
Priority
Output Low Alarm Trip OPLOTP No Output Low Alarm Trip Point
Point
Output Low Alarm OPLOPR No Output Low Alarm Priority
Priority
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
REGPV Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Input Input Tab
Alarm Alarm Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
REGPV Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the EHPM Point Template. The Main
Tab contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an EHPM Point Template. In
addition, it displays the important states of the EHPM Point Template and supports the key commands
associated with operation of the EHPM Point Template. Redundancy configuration can be entered only
in the Project Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or
configure on the Main tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM Point Template.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Tag Name Project System assigned or a configured unique
Name Only name. Consisting of up to 16 characters and
at least one character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Item Project A non-unique name by which an entity is
Name Name Only known within the context of the enterprise
model.
Description DESC
Point Details
Engr Units EUDESC No The engineering-units descriptor (for example, °C, PSIA,
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Descriptor gal/hr, kPa, ltr-min) for this data point, that appears on
displays, logs, and reports.
UCN Node NODETYP No UCN Node Type
Type
Point Form PNTFORM No
Point $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines the
Custom name of the custom schematic that is to be displayed
Detail instead of the standard detail display for this point.
Point ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is associated
Associated with this point.
Display
Point KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears on
Keyword displays and in printed logs and reports.
Point PTDESC No Textual description of the point for use in standard Group
Descriptor and Detail displays.
Process PV No PV is the output of the range-violation checks
Variable
Network NTWKNUM No Network Number
Number
Point Details
Node NODENUM No Node Number
Number
Slot SLOTNUM No Slot Number
Number
Primary PRIMMOD No Primary Module Point Identifier
Module
Point
Identifier
User ID USERID No User ID Reservation
Reservation
Overview OVERVAL No Overview Value in Percent
Value in
Percent
Alarm ALENBST No Alarm Enable Status.
Enable
Status.
Contact cut CONTCUT No Contact cutout flag
out
REGPV Point Template Block Input Tab
The Input tab of the REGPV Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Input tab of the
REGPV Point Template for the selected AM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Number of Inputs N No Number of Inputs
Primary Input Source PISRC No Primary Input Source
PV Input Connection PIDSTN No PV Input Connection
Destination Destination
PV Config
Process Variable (PV) Low PVEULO No Process Variable (PV) Low
Range Range
Process Variable (PV) High PVEUHI No Process Variable (PV) High
Range Range
PV Decimal Point Format. PVFORMAT No PV Decimal Point Format.
PV Source Option PVSRCOPT No PV Source Option
PV Source PVSOURCE No PV Source
PV Extended Eng Unit Range PVEHEUHI No PV Extended Eng Unit Range
High High
PV Extended Eng Unit Range PVEHEULO No PV Extended Eng Unit Range
Low Low
PV Clamping Option PVCLAMP No PV Clamping Option
PV Target Value PVTV No PV Target Value
PV Coefficients
PV Filter Lag Time in Minutes TF No PV Filter Lag Time in Minutes
Calculator Constant 1 C1 No Calculator Constant 1
Calculator Constant 2 C2 No Calculator Constant 2
Calculator Constant 3 C3 No Calculator Constant 3
Calculator Constant 4 C4 No Calculator Constant 4
Calculator Expression CALEXP No Calculator Expression
PV Inputs
P1 Status P1STS No P1 Status
P2 Status P2STS No P2 Status
P3 Status P3STS No P3 Status
P4 Status P4STS No P4 Status
P5 Status P5STS No P5 Status
P6 Status P6STS No P6 Status
PV Misc
Process Variable PV No Process Variable
Status of PV Input Value PVSTS No Status of PV Input Value
Last PV Value LASTPV No Last PV Value
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
PV Auto Value PVAUTO No PV Auto Value
Calculated PV PVCALC No Calculated PV
PV Auto Value Status PVAUTOST No PV Auto Value Status
PV Target value in percent PVTVP No PV Target value in percent
PV Initialization Request Flag PVINIT No PV Initialization Request Flag
REGPV Point Template Block Alarm Tab
The Alarm tab of the REGPV Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Block Alarm of the
REGPV Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No The Auxiliary Unit of an alarmable process
point. If an Auxiliary Unit ID is specified.
Re Alarm Level $REALALARM No Re Alarm Level
PV ALarm PVALDB No PV ALarm Deadband
Deadband
EU Value of PV PVALDBEU No EU Value of PV ALarm Deadband
ALarm Deadband
Alarm Delay Option $ALDLOPT No Alarm Delay Option
Delay Time DLYTIME No Delay Time
Delay for BADPV $DLBADAL No Delay for BADPV and BADCTL
and BADCTL
PV Alarms
PV High ALarm Trip PVHITP No PV High ALarm Trip Point
Point
PV High Alarm PVHIPR No PV High Alarm Priority
Priority
PV High Selective $HISELCT No PV High Selective Cutout
Cutout
PV Low Alarm Trip PVLOTP No PV Low Alarm Trip Point
Point
PV Low Alarm PVLOPR No PV Low Alarm Priority
Priority
PV Low Selective $LOSELCT No PV Low Selective Cutout
Cutout
PV High High Alarm PVHHTP No PV High High Alarm Trip Point
Trip Point
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
PV High High Alarm PVHHPR No PV High High Alarm Priority
Priority
PV High High $HHSELCT No PV High High Slective cutout
Slective cutout
PV Low Low Trip PVLLTP No PV Low Low Trip Point
Point
PV Low Low Alarm PVLLPR No PV Low Low Alarm Priority
Priority
PV Low Low $LLSELCT No PV Low Low Selective Cutout
Selective Cutout
Bad PV Alarm BADPVPR No Bad PV Alarm Priority
Priority
PV Pos ROC Trip PVROCPTP No PV Positive ROC Trip Point
Point
PV Pos ROC Alarm PVROCPPR No PV Positive ROC Alarm Priority
Priority
PV Pos ROC $RPSELCT No PV Positive ROC Selective Cutout
Selective Cutout
PV Neg ROC Trip PVROCNTP No PV Negative ROC Trip Point
Point
PV Neg ROC Alarm PVROCNPR No PV Negative ROC Alarm Priority
Priority
PV Neg ROC $RNSELCT No PV Negative ROC Selective Cutout
Selective Cutout
PV Signif Change PVSGCHTP No PV Signif Change Alarm Trip Point
Alarm Trip Point
UTILITY Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Input Input Tab
Output Output Tab
Logic Configuration Logic Configuration Tab
Alarm Alarm Tab
Logic Descriptors Logic Descriptors Tab
Timer Configuration Timer Configuration Tab
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Tab name Reference
CL Sequence CL Sequence Tab
Mod Numerics Mod Numerics Tab
Mod Flags Mod Flags Tab
Mod Strings Times Mod Strings Times Tab
Config Params Times Config Params Times Tab
Input/Alarms Input/Alarms Tab
SI Config SI Config Tab
Array Config Array Config Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
UTILITY Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the EHPM Point Template. The Main
Tab contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an EHPM Point Template. In
addition, it displays the important states of the EHPM Point Template and supports the key commands
associated with operation of the EHPM Point Template. Redundancy configuration can be entered only
in the Project Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or
configure on the Main tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM Point Template.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least one
character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known within
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
the context of the enterprise model.
Description DESC No Description
Point Details
UCN Node NODETYP No UCN Node Type
Type
Point $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines the
Custom name of the custom schematic that is to be displayed
Detail instead of the standard detail display for this point.
Point ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is associated
Associated with this point.
Display
Point KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears on
Keyword displays and in printed logs and reports.
Point Form PNTFORM No
Point PTDESC No Textual description of the point for use in standard
Descriptor Group and Detail displays.
Eng Units EUDESC No Eng Units Descriptor
Descriptor
Unit UNIT No Unit Identifier
Identifier
Network NTWKNUM No Network Number
Number
Node NODENUM No Node Number
Number
Slot Number SLOTNUM No Slot Number
Primary PRIMMOD No Primary Module Point Identifier
Module
Point
Identifier
Alarm ALENBST No Alarm Enable Status
Enable
Status
UTILITY Point Template Block Input Tab
The Input tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Input tab of the
UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Flag Config
State Descriptor Text STATETXT No State Descriptor Text
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
State Box Color BOXCLR No State Box Color
Current PV State PV Yes Current PV State
FLAG PVFL PVFL No FLAG PVFL
UTILITY Point Template Block Input LOGIC Tab
The Input Logic tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Input
Logic tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Logic Input Connections
Logic Input Connection Source LISRC No
Logic Flags
Numerics 1 NN No
LOGICAL INPUT FAILURE HANDLING OPTION
Logic Bad Input Handling Option LIBADOPT Yes
Numerics Initial Values
Logic FL FL No
UTILITY Point Template Block Output Tab
The Input Output tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Output
tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Configurable Notes
Name
Logic Output Connections
Logic Output Connection LOSRC No Logic Output Connection
Source Source
Logic Output Connection Dest LODSTN No Logic Output Connection Dest
Logic Output Enable LOENBL Yes Logic Output Enable
UTILITY Point Template Block Logic Configuration Tab
The Logic Configuration tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Logic
Configuration tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Logic Block Configuration
LOGALGID LOGALGID No
UTILITY Point Template Block Alarm Tab
The Alarm tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Alarm of the
UTILITY Point Template for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No The Auxiliary Unit of an alarmable process point. If an
Auxiliary Unit ID is specified.
Offnormal OFFNRMPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Off Normal alarm.
Alarm Priority
Off Normal $OFSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of Off
Selective Normal alarm of a point even though the point is
Cutout cutout.
Event Initiated EIPPCODE No Event - Initiated Processing Point Identifier
Pro Pt Identifier
Re-Alarm $REALARM No Re-Alarm Interval
Interval
UTILITY Point Template Block Logic Descriptors Tab
The Logic Descriptors tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Logic
Descriptors tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Number of Generic NODESC No Number of Generic
Descriptors Descriptors
Logic Descriptors
Generic Descriptors GENDESC No Generic Descriptors
Parameter Descriptor Assign PRMDESC No Parameter Descriptor Assign
UTILITY Point Template Block Timer Configuration Tab
The Timer Configuration tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Timer
Configuration tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Timer Command COMMAND No Timer Command
Timer Configuration
Time Base TIMEBASE Yes Time Base
Preset Time SP No Preset Time
Timer Monitoring
Process Variable PV No Process Variable
Remaining Time RV No Remaining Time
Timer State STATE No Timer State
UTILITY Point Template Block CL Sequence Tab
The CL Sequence tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the CL
Sequence tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
CL Editor
Launch Visual CLEDITOR No Launch Visual Studio to edit CL
Studio to edit CL
Loaded Sequence
Sequence SEQNAME No Defines the name of the CL sequence that
currently resides in the process module.
Operating State PROCMOD No Operating State
Execution State SEQEXEC No Execution State
Mode SEQMODE No Sequence Execution Mode.
Phase PHASE No Indicates the current phase of the sequence
executing in the process module.
Available Sequence
Sequence SEQNAMES No Sequence
CL Source File CLNAMES No CL Source File
UTILITY Point Template Block Mod Numerics Tab
The Mod Numerics tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Mod
Numerics tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Module Numerics
Array Point Numeric NN No Array Point Numeric
Variables Variables
UTILITY Point Template Block Mod Flags Tab
The Mod Flags tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Mod
Flags tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Module Flags
Array Point Flag Variables FL No Array Point Flag Variables
UTILITY Point Template Block Mod Strings Times Tab
The Mod Strings tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Mod
Strings tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Module Strings 8
Array Point String 8 STR8 No
Module Strings 16
Array Point String 16 STR16 No
Module Strings 32
Array Point String 32 STR32 No
Module Strings 64
Array Point String 64 STR64 No
Module Times
Array Point Time Variables TIME No
UTILITY Point Template Block Config Params Times Tab
The Config Params tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Config
Params tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Config Params
Advanced Control Point ID ACP No Defines Advanced Control Point ID
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Sequence Priority SEQPR No Defines Sequence Priority
Control Lock CNTLLOCK No Defines Control Lock
Setpoint Lock SPLOCK No Defines Setpoint Lock
Number of Backward CLBACK No Defines Number of Backward
Branches Branches
Sequence Compile Time CMPLTIME No Defines Sequence Compile Time
Restart Option RSTROPT No Defines Restart Option
Scan Period PERIOD No Defines Scan Period
Sequence Slot Size SEQSLTSZ No Defines Sequence Slot Size
Sequence Program Size SEQOBJSZ No Defines Sequence Program Size
UTILITY Point Template Block Input/Alarms Tab
The Input/Alarms tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
Input/Alarms tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Input Connections
Process Variable PV No Process Variable
PV Alarms
PV Decimal Point PVFORMAT No PV Decimal Point Format
Format
PV Normal State PVNORMAL No Contains a character string that represents the
normal state of this Flag data point
Alarm Enable ALENBST No Point alarm-enable status that affects the detecting
State and reporting of alarms
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No The Auxiliary Unit of an alarmable process point. If
an Auxiliary Unit ID is specified.
Re-Alarm Interval $REALARM No Re-Alarm Interval
PV Alarm PVALDBEU No PV Alarm deadband
deadband
PV High Alarm PVHIPR No PV High Alarm Priority
Priority
PV High Alarm PVHITP No PV High Alarm Target Point
Target Point
PV High Selective $HISELCT No PV High Selective Cutout
Cutout
PV Low Alarm PVLOPR No PV Low Alarm Priority
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Priority
PV Low Alarm PVLOTP No PV Low Alarm Target Point
Target Point
PV Low Selective $LOSELCT No PV Low Selective Cutout
Cutout
UTILITY Point Template Block SI Config Tab
The SI Config tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the SI Config tab of the
UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Serial Interface Configuration
SI IOP Module Number IOPNUM No SI IOP Module Number
IOP FTA Number FTANUM No IOP FTA Number
Serial Link Device Address DEVADDR No Serial Link Device Address
SI Data FTA Scan Priority SCANPRI No SI Data FTA Scan Priority
FTA-DRV PGM AUX DATA
FTA Driver Auxiliary Data 1 AUXDATA1 No FTA Driver Auxiliary Data 1
FTA Driver Auxiliary Data 2 AUXDATA2 No FTA Driver Auxiliary Data 2
FTA Driver Auxiliary Data 3 AUXDATA3 No FTA Driver Auxiliary Data 3
FTA Driver Auxiliary Data 4 AUXDATA4 No FTA Driver Auxiliary Data 4
FTA-DRV PGM ALLEN-BRADLEY DATA
Auxiliary A-B Data 1 AB_DATA1 No Auxiliary A-B Data 1
Auxiliary A-B Data 2 AB_DATA2 No Auxiliary A-B Data 2
Auxiliary A-B Data 3 AB_DATA3 No Auxiliary A-B Data 3
Auxiliary A-B Data 4 AB_DATA4 No Auxiliary A-B Data 4
UTILITY Point Template Block Array Config Tab
The Array Config tab of the UTILITY Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Array
Config tab of the UTILITY Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Name Name Yes Name
Description DESC Yes Description
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Block Comment 1 BLCKCOMMENT1 Yes Block Comment 1
Block Comment 2 BLCKCOMMENT2 Yes Block Comment 2
Block Comment 3 BLCKCOMMENT3 Yes Block Comment 3
Block Comment 4 BLCKCOMMENT4 Yes Block Comment 4
Library
System Template System Template No System Template
Base Template Base Template No Base Template
Created By CREATEDBY Yes Created By
Date Created DATECREATED Yes Date Created
Modified By MODIFIEDBY Yes Modified By
Version Date VERSIONDATE Yes Version Date
4.22.4 xPM Platform Block
Description The xPM block represents PM, APM, and HPM and is used for
defining the xPM Controller in Control Builder. xPM points and
strategies are executed in the EHPM Controller environment.
The xPM block has standard tabs like Main tab, Point Mix, and so
on. These tabs represent the parameters which are mostly for
viewing the current status of xPM and statistics values.
Parameters and information in this tab can be modified or
added as per the requirements.
The xPM block is designed to be stand-alone and it belongs to
the independent block category.
Function l The xPM block defines the xPM controller in the Control
Builder and represents this controller in the Experion server.
l In the Control Builder Project tree view, identification data
and certain configuration parameters can be configured.
The xPM state and statistical parameters are view or read
only.
l Once the xPM block is loaded to the Monitoring view, the
xPM state reflects the state of the xPM Controller.
l The xPM block functionality is similar to that of a C300
controller block. Also, the xPM controller state cannot be
changed from the Control Builder; it can be changed only
from System Management dashboard.
l The xPM block can directly process parameter read and
write requests initiated by CDA peer devices (C300 and ACE),
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
only after it is loaded to the Monitoring view.
l The xPM Data Access parameter allows you to optionally
download the xPM points to the Experion server so that
standard history can be collected through CDA. All the xPM
points under an xPM Controller are configured as per the
value of xPM Data Access parameter (Peer to Peer Only or
Peer to Peer and ExpServer) defined on the xPM block in
Control Builder.
l xPM points and control functions are configured using TPN
configuration tools. The xPM block must be configured in
Control Builder and loaded to the monitoring side to enable:
l CDA peer access between the ACE/C300 Controller
and the xPM Controller
l CDA data access to the xPM points from the
Experion server
NOTE
Loading of the xPM block to the Monitoring view is
limited by the EHPM Connections license. For more
information on EHPM license, contact your Honeywell
representative.
Inputs CDA communication
Outputs Refer to the description.
Parameters Tag Name NODETYP
Item Name NOPERDB
ALMENBSTATE NPMSLOT
ASSOCASSET NPVSLOT
CTRLCONFIRM NSTRING
DATEPTIMPORT $NSFPMS
DEVICEIDX NTIME
EHPMSTATE NTWKNUM
HOSTIPPRI NUMSIGS #
HOSTNAMEPRI PKGOPT
HPMSOFTFAIL PRIMARYSIG#
IMAGEVER PROCESS_ID
IMPORTSTATUS RDNROLESTATE
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IPADDRESS RDNSYNCTATE
Item Name REASONSET #
MODISREDUN SCANASSOCDSP
NARRSLOT SCANCTRLLVL
NCTLSLOT SCANGRPDTL
NDCSLOT SCANPER
NDEVSLOT SCANPNTDTL
NFASTDC SCANRATE
NFASTDEV SECMODNAME
NFASTCTL SECONDARYSIG#
NFASTLOG SECSIGSECLVL #
NFASTPV SEQPROC
NLOGSLOT SIMSTATE
$NNUMALM SIMTARGET
NNUMERIC SIMULATEDIO
NODENUM SOFTFAIL
NODESTS Tag Name
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions
of each parameter.
4.22.5 ELCN AM Platform Block
Description The ELCN AM block represents the ELCN AM hardware and is
used for defining the AM Controller in Control Builder. The
ELCN AM block is designed to be stand-alone and it belongs to
the independent block category.
The ELCN AM block has multiple tabs which represent the
parameters that are mostly for viewing the current status and
statistics values of the ELCN AM operation.
Function l In the Control Builder Project tree view, configuration
parameters can be configured. The state and statistical
parameters are view or read only.
l The Main tab shows the unique addressing information. The
LCN node numbers for the redundant ELCN AM are hard
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
coded and cannot be changed.
l The ELCN AM must be redundant. The value of the “Module
is Redundant” parameter should be selected.
l When loading the block, load the primary and the secondary.
Parameters $AUXUNIT MEMCDPN(I)
$BCLEAFL MEMCKPT
$BCFLAFL MEMCL(I)
$BKGABRT MEMCVBLM
$BKGSTS(N) MEMCVBMX
$BKGTIME MEMCVBNX
$BKGPRTY(N) MEMCVBTH
$CDETAIL MEMFREE
$CLCMPST(N) MEMIOLM
$CLDBBLK[1..5] MEMPTS(I)
$CLDBDPT[1..5] MidOf3
$CLDBEHR MIPCVBLM
$CLDBFIL MIPCVBMX
$CLDBPAR[1..5] MIPIOTOT
$CLDBPRT MODATTR
$CLDBSTS MODE
$CLDBUNT[1..5] MODEAPPL(N)
$CLDMAXC MODEPERM
CLDBFNM MSAVGC
$CLDBFST MSAVGP
$CLDBMEM MSAVGS
CLDBMTB MSMAXC
$CLDBOND MSMAXP
CLDMINC MSMINC
$CLDMINP MSMINP
DHSELCT MulDiv
DLBADAL MulDiv
DLSELCT MXRMPDEV
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
HHSELCT MXSOKDEV
HISELCT NAME
$IPPASN NLFM
LLSELCT NLGAIN
LOSELCT NMIN
$MODESEL NMODATTR
$MPROD1, NMODE
OFSELCT NOCINPTS
$OPTOL NOCOPTS
$REALARM NOGINPTS
$RNSELCT NOGOPTS
$ROLLATP NOPINPTS
$ROLLATP NOPINPTS
$ROLLAVG NOPKG
$ROLLBAD NORMCYCL
$ROLLBBS NORSSEQ
$ROLLBUF NUMPTS(I)
$ROLLFBS NUMSWTCH
$ROLLFRQ NXTSOAKV
$ROLLMLT OFFNDIAK
$ROLLOK OFFNDIRQ
$ROLLPRA OFFNRMAL
$ROLLPV OFFNRMPR
$ROLLRST OP
$RPSELCT OPEU
$SPTOL OPHIFL
ACCUM OPHILM
ADAVGC OPLOFL
ADAVGP OPLOLM
ADAVGS OPMCHLM
ADMAXC OPROCFL
ADMAXP OPROCLM
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
ADMINC ORBIAS
ADMINP ORFBSEC
ADVDEVFL OROPT
ADVDEVPR OrSel
ADVDEVTP OUT0
ADVDEVTR OVERRUNS
ADVSP OVERVAL
ADVSPP OVRFASTC
ALENBST OVRFASTP
ALPRIOR OVRSLOWC
AMDATA(45) OVRSLOWP
AMDATA(46) P0
AMDATA(47) P1
AMDATA(48) P1
AMDATA(49) P1STS
AMDATA(52) P2
AMMEMTOT PATHIND
AMOVRABT PERIOD
AMOVRTHR PFAVGC
AMSCHDMP(N) PFAVGP
ARWDI PFAVGS
ARWNET PFMAXC
ARWOP PFMAXP
ASPPROC PFMINC
ASSOCDSP PFMINP
AV PFMNCYCC
AVCONV PFMNCYCP
AVCOUNTS PFMXCYCC
AVDEV1FL PFMXCYCP
AVDEV1TP PFPSOVER
AVDEV2FL PFPSOVRC
AVDEV2TP PFPSOVRP
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
AVFORMAT PIACCSTS(N)
AVP PIACTSTS(N)
AVTV Pid
AVTVFL PidErfb
AVTVLOCK PidFF
BO PIDFORM
B1 PIDSTN(N)
BADCTLFL PISRC
BADCTLPR PISRC(N)
BADPVFL PKGNAME(N)
BADPVPR Point
BADPVTR PPPRSTPR
BCLEALPR PPS
BCLFALPR PPSCYCLE
BEFAFT PPSREQ
BEFAFTID PPSTYPE
BFF PRAVGC
BIAS PRAVGP
BKGCLBC PRAVGS
BKGCLBP PRCSTATE
BKGCLBS PRESETPR
BKGCLC PRIMMOD
BKGCLNR(I) PRMAXC
BKGCLP PRMAXP
BKGCLS PRMINC
BKGDANC PRMINP
BKGDANP PRMNCYCC
BKGDANS PRMNCYCP
BKGDAREQ PRMXCYCC
BKGELTIM(I) PRMXCYCP
BKGFMC PROUNT(I)
BKGFMP PRPRSTPR
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
BKGFMS PSAVGC
BKGPNTRN(I) PSAVGP
BKGQFUL PSAVGS
BKGQTIME PSMAXC
BKGQUEUE PSMAXP
BKGRUN PSMINC
BKGSTACK PSMINP
BKGTASKS PSMNCYCC
BLKNAME(N) PSMNCYCP
BLKTIME(N) PSMXCYCC
BRANCHES(N) PSMXCYCP
BSHILM PSTS
BSLOLM PTDESC
BYPASS PTDISCL
C1 PTEXECST
C1 PTINAL
CALCEXP PTORST
CCACCSTS PV
CCACTSTS PVALDB
CCINPT PVALDBEU
CCSRC PVALGID
CDSAVGC PVAUTO
CDSAVGP PVAUTOST
CDSAVGS PVAVGC
CIACCSTS PVCALC
CIACTSTS(N) PVCLAMP
CIDSTN(N) PVCONV
CISRC(N) PVEQN
CL PVEUHI
CLACTIVE(N) PVEULO
CLAVGC PVEXEUHI
CLAVGP PVEXEULO
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
CLAVGS PVEXHIFL
CLBACKF PVEXLOFL
CLBACKIP PVFLTOPT
CLBACKS PVFORMAT
CLBLKERR(N) PVHHFL
CLDAVGS PVHHPR
CLEALMFL PVHHTP
CLEALMPR PVHHTR
CLERRLOC(N) PVHIFL
CLERRSUM PVHIPR
CLFALMFL PVHITP
CLFALMPR PVHITR
CLMAXC PVINIT
CLMAXP PVLLFL
CLMINC PVLLPR
CLMINP PVLLTP
CLREVISN(N) PVLLTR
CLSLOTS PVLOFL
CLUSECNT(N) PVLOPR
CLVERSIN(N) PVLOTP
CNFERRFL PVLOTR
CNFERRPR PVNORMAL
CNTLLOCK PVP
COACCSTS(N) PVROCNFL
COACTSTS(N) PVROCNPR
CODSTN(N) PVROCNTP
COMMAND PVROCNTR
COMPHILM PVROCPFL
COMPLOLM PVROCPPR
COMPTERM PVROCPTP
CONTCUT PVROCPTR
CPFMERR PVSGCHFL
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
CPTIMEC(I) PVSGCHPR
CPTIMEFL PVSGCHTP
CPTIMEHM PVSOURCE
CTLACTN PVSRCOPT
CTLALGID PVSTATES
CTLEQN PVSTS
CTRLINIT PVTRACK
CURSEGID PVTV
CUTOFFLM Q
CV QSTS
CVBAVGS RampSoak
CVEUHI RAMPTIME
CVEULO RANGEHI
CVTYPE RANGELO
D1 RATE
DataAcq RATE1–RATE6
DEV RATIO
DEVHIFL RatioCtl
DEVHIPR RBOPT
DEVHITP REDBFMIN
DEVHITR REDBFZ
DEVLOFL REDCONFG
DEVLOPR REDINOP
DEVLOTP REDTAG
DEVLOTR REMSOAKT
DISPTYPE RESETCMD
DLYTIME RESETVAL
EIPAVGC RESRVMEM
EIPAVGP RESTART
EIPAVGS RESYNCS(n)
EIPMAXC RFB
EIPMAXP RFBSTS
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
EIPMINC RG
EIPMINP ROLLOVER
ENT_TYPE RP
ESWAUTO RQ
ESWCAS RSPBGP
ESWENBST RT
ESWMAN RTHILM
EUDESC RTLOLM
EXTSWOPT RX
FF S1
FFOPT S1ACCLVL
FFSTS S1BGNTIM
FlowComp S1CURSTS
FORCE S1ENDTIM
FPTMAVGC S1NSTATE
FPTMAVCP S1REQSTS
FPTMS S1SEGID
FPTMSP S1STATES(0)
FRCPERM S2
FSELIN S2ACCLVL
FSTS S2CURSTS
GAINOPT S2ENDTIM
GAPHI S2NSTATE
GAPLO S2REQSTS
GenLin S2SEGID
GETAVGC S2STATES(0)
GETAVGP S3
GETAVGS S4
GIACCSTS(N) SALMDSC1
GIACTSTS(N) SALMFL1
GIDSTN(N) SALMTR1
GISRC(N) SECARW(N)
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
GOACCSTS(N) SEGTOT
GOACTSTS(N) SEGTYPE
GODSTN(N) SELINP
GOSRC(N) SELXINP
GSTS SNAPTIME
HEAPFREE SOAKT1
HEAPMAXP SOAKV1
HIGHAL SP
HIGHALPR SPEUHI
HiLoAvg SPEULO
HOLDCMD SPEXEUHI
IDLAVGC SPEXEULO
IDLAVGP SPFORMAT
IDLAVGS SPHIFL
IDLAVGSP SPHILM
IN0 SPLOCK
IncrSum SPLOFL
INITMAN SPLOLM
INITREQ(N) SPOPT
INITTYPE SPP
INITVAL SPSTS
INSORDER(N) SPTV
INSPOINT(N) SPTVP
IPCVBOVC STATE
IPCVBOVP STATE1
IPDAOVER STATE2
IPDAOVRC STRAVGC
IPDAOVRP STRAVGP
IPOVRRNC STRAVGS
IPOVRRNP Summer
IPOVRRUN SumProd
IPOVRTHR Switch
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IPPFAVGC SUPPIO
IPPFAVGP SWALM1PR
IPPFAVGS T0
IPPFMAXC T1
IPPFMAXP T2
IPPRAVGC T3
IPPRAVGP TD
IPPRAVGS TESTSTAT(N)
IPPRCYCC TF
IPPRCYCP TIMEBASE
IPPRMAXC TIMEDOWN(I)
IPPRMAXP TIMELEFT
IPPSAVGC TIMOUTAL
IPPSAVGP TIMOUTFL
IPPSAVGS TIMOUTPR
IPPSMAXC TLD
IPPSMAXP TLG1
K1 TLG2
KEXT TMEMCDPN
KEYWORD TMEMCL
KFF TMEMPTS
KGAP Totalizr
KLIN TRACKING
KNL TRFB
LASTAV TRFBSTS
LASTPV TS
LBOXCLR TSTS
LeadLag TVPROC
MCVBAVGC UBOXCLR
MCVBAVGP UNIT
MCVBMAXC UNMEMTOT(I)
MCVBMAXP VDTLdLag
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
MCVBMINC X1
MCVBMINP X1STS
MCVBMNCC X2
MCVBMNCP XEUHI
MCVBMXCC XEULO
MCVBMXCP XSTS
Reference Refer to the Application Module Parameter
Reference Dictionary Guide for a definition
of each parameter.
Refer to the Experion LCN Overview and
Implementation Guide for details on
configuring the ELCN platform blocks.
4.22.6 ELCN AM Configuration Form Reference
This section provides a summary of all user-visible parameters for an AM Controller. The parameters
are grouped according to the tabs where they reside on the configuration form. For more details about
these parameters, refer to the AM Family Parameter Reference Dictionary.
ELCN AM Controller block
AM Controller block Main tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the AM Controller. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an AM Controller. In addition, it
displays the important states of the AM Controller and supports the key commands associated with
operation of the AM Controller. Redundancy configuration can be entered only in the Project Tree. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the Main tab of the
configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured
unique name. Consisting of up to 16
characters and at least one character
must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an
entity is known within the context of
the enterprise model.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Application IMAGEVER No Indicates the AM application image
Image Version version.
Associated ASSOCASSET Yes Allows user to select an asset from
Asset those configured in the Enterprise
Model Database to set the Scope of
Responsibility (SOR) for the point.
Enable OPM to ENABLEOPMTOLCN Yes The Control Builder does not allow
LCN deconfiguration or deletion of a
Platform Block when the device is
running. This parameter enables the
deconfiguration of the Classic EHB
platform block from Control Builder.
This parameter is enabled for OPM
from Classic EHB to ELCN-EHB. It is
applicable to Classic EHB only.
FTE Address Configuration
Device Index DEVICEIDX No Identifies the unique FTE Device
Index number configured on switches
in the module.
Ethernet IP IPADDRESS No IP address assigned to the module
Address based upon base IP address and
module device index.
Advanced Configuration
Alarming ALMENBSTATE Yes Used for setting the alarm reporting
Enabled function used when an alarm
condition is detected by the function
block.
Temperature TEMPHIGHLM No
High Alarm
(degC)
CPU Free Low CPUFREEFLOWLM No
ALarm (%)
Main RAM Free MEMFREEFLOWLM No
Low Alarm (%)
NVS Free Low NVSFREEFLOWLM No
Alarm (%)
Command/State
Module ELCNNODECOMMAND No ELCN_NODE device Module
Command Command Shutdown command puts
ELCN_NODE into a not running state
(offnet) and makes it capable of
firmware load (which will reboot the
node). A manual reboot of the ELCN_
NODE is required when firmware load
is not performed.Reset command
reboots the node and does not
require reloading of firmware.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Node State EHPMSTATE No Indicates the current state of the
controller.
Redundancy RDNROLESTATE No Indicates the EHPM Controller's
Role current redundancy role.
Synchronization RDNSYNCTATE No Indicates the EHPM Controller's
State current synchronization state.
Keyswitch UEAKEY No
Position
Soft Failures SOFTFAIL No Indicates the Soft Fail state for an
Present (See EHPM Controller.It indicates any
Soft Failures PowerQuicc side soft fails (which is
Tab for details) also visible in Soft Failures tab of the
EHPM block) in addition to any soft
fail from TPS side.Note that the Soft
Failures tab does not show any TPS
side soft failure, but the soft fail
indicator is on (red color), on the Main
tab indicating that this is a soft fail
from TPS side.
Redundancy Configuration
Module is MODISREDUN Project only Indicates that the EHPM Controller is
redundant part of redundant pair.
Secondary Tag SECMODNAME Project only System assigned name based on tag
Name name with sec suffix for secondary
block.
Node Configuration
Virtual ISVIRTUALPLATFORM No The type of node this ELCN node is
Environment running on: 0: UEA, 1: Virtual
ELCN Node ELCNNODETYPE Yes The type of node this ELCN node is:
Type 0: ENIM, 1:AM, 2: ELPCG, 3: EHB, 4:
NG
ENIM UCN ENIMUCNNUM No EUCN Network Number
Node Number
Live UCN Node UCNLIVESTR No The actual UCN address
String Val
Enable CEE ENABLECEE Yes
ELCN Configuration
ELCN Multicast ELCNMULTIIPADDRSTR No Default: 234.129.239.100 The ELCN
Address Multicast IP Address must match on
the ELCN Bridge and all ELCN Nodes
including ELCN Appliance Nodes
(such as NIM and AM) and Windows-
based TPS Nodes (ES-T, ESVT, ACE-
T, and EAPP) in order for them to
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
communicate.CAUTION: Honeywell
strongly recommends that you use the
default ELCN Multicast IP Address
and not change it unless you are
familiar with the use of the IP Multicast
Protocol. If you decide to change this
value from the default, then you will
need to change the value on the
ELCN Bridge and every ELCN Node
as well. After the ELCN Bridges and
ELCN Nodes are running, any
changes to the ELCN Multicast IP
Address should not be done on-
process. Consult Honeywell or your
personnel familiar with the use of the
IP Multicast Protocol and Honeywell
Fault Tolerant Ethernet to determine
the repercussions of changing the
ELCN Multicast IP Address.
LCN Node ELCNNODENUM No LCN node number of the primary
Number-This ELCN Node, if this is the platform
block that corresponds to the primary.
The secondary platform block
automatically configures this LCN
node number in its “LCN Node
Number – Partner” parameter.
LCN Node ELCNNODENUMPARTNER No LCN node number of the backup
Number-Partner ELCN Node, if this is the platform
block that corresponds to the primary.
This node number does not have to
be odd or consecutive. For example, a
valid LCN node number for the
primary can be 24 and a valid LCN
node number for the secondary can
be 30. The secondary platform block
automatically configures this LCN
node number in its “LCN Node
Number – This” parameter.
Hiway Emulation Configuration
Define Physical DFNPHWYEM No Determines whether the physical
Hiway Hiway to which the EHB belongs is
configured on this EHB’s form or on
the local partner EHB’s form. When
this parameter is set to OFF, the
following parameters cannot be
configured in the form.
l HWYNUM
l HWYNUMPRT
l PHWYPRTLC
l PHWYPRTRMIP1
l PHWYPRTRMIP2
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Instead, they are auto-populated
while loading the EHB platform block.
It is applicable to ELCN EHB also.
Logical Hiway HWYNUM No This parameter specifies the number
Num by which the Hiway box (TDC2000
Hiway) was known on the LCN when
the Hiway’s HG was migrated to EHB.
This is an LCN-local number which is
not globally unique. In addition, this
parameter is used to indicate EHBs,
CEEs, and Box HRBs which are
associated with the same Hiway
emulation under the same Experion
Server cluster. It is applicable to
ELCN EHB also.
Logical Hiway HWYNUMPRT No This parameter specifies the logical
Num Partner Hiway number of the EHB, if any,
which is connected to the same LCN
under the same Experion Server
cluster and which had been
connected to the same physical
Hiway through a partner HG. This is
an LCNlocal number which is not
globally unique. When DFNPHWYEM
is set to OFF, HWYNUMPRT remains
unconfigured in the form. Instead,
when the EHB platform block is
loaded it is populated automatically
based on the partner EHB indicated
by the HWYNUM parameter. It is
applicable to ELCN EHB also.
Local Partner PHWYPRTLC No This parameter specifies the tag name
of the EHB, if any, which is connected
to the same LCN under the same
Server cluster and which had been
connected to the same physical
Hiway through a partner HG. There
can be no more than one other EHB
which replaces an HG on the same
LCN and the same physical Hiway. It
is applicable to ELCN EHB also.
Local Partner PHWYPRTLCIP No This parameter specifies the IP
Address address of the EHB indicated by the
PHWYPRTLC parameter. The value
of PHWYPRTLCIP parameter is
automatically populated so that it is
always consistent with PHWYPRTLC.
It is applicable to ELCN EHB also.
Local Partner is PHWYPRTLCIPISRED No Indicates that the local partner is
Redundant redundant.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
AM Controller block System Time tab
The System Time tab displays information about the AM’s time source and synchronization with that
time source. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the System Time
tab of the configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
System Time
Current System CURTIME No Displays the current system time, as
Time communicated to the ACE supervisory
controller, Control Processor Module in the
C200 Controller, C300 Controller and
Simulation Control Environment controller
from the Server. The format is MM/DD/YY
HH:MM:SS.
Current System TIMESOURCE No Displays the current time source in use for
Time Source module time synchronization.
NTP Status
NTP Server NTPADDRESS No Displays the IP address of NTP server.
Address
NTP Status NTPSTAT No Displays the NTP status.
NTP Offset NTPOFFSET No Clock offset between NTP server and device,
(msec) in milliseconds.
NTP Maximum NTPOFFSETMAX No High water mark of clock offset between NTP
Offset (msec) server and device, in milliseconds.
NTP Last NTPLASTSTRATUM No
Stratum Value
System Time Synchronization Status
Time TIMESYNCSTAT No Displays the time synchronization status.
Synchronization
Status
Time of Last TIMELASTSYNC No Displays the time controller last synced with
Time Sync time source.
Skew at Last TIMELASTSKEW No The new difference between controller time
Time Sync and new time.
(msec)
Precision Time Protocol
Enable PTPENABLE Yes When enabled (ON), the PTP client should
Precision Time attempt to synchronize its local clock with a
Protocol PTP GrandMaster. For EHPM, this value is
always set as ON and it is not editable.
PTP Status PTPSTAT No Displays the current status of the PTP time
synchronization.
PTP Master IP PTPMASTERIP No Displays the IP address of the PTP
Address GrandMaster clock.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
PTP Offset PTPOFFSET No Clock offset between PTP server and device,
(msec) in milliseconds.
PTP Maximum PTPOFFSETMAX No High water mark of clock offset between PTP
Offset (msec) server and device, in milliseconds.
AM Controller block Redundancy tab
The Redundancy tab displays redundancy-related information and allows redundancy commands to be
issued when the block is opened on the Monitoring tree in Control Builder. The Redundancy tab is
exposed only when the block is configured as redundant. The “Module is redundant” check box
(MODISREDUN parameter) must be checked on the Main tab of the block.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the
Redundancy tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Redundancy Status
Auto RDNAUTOSYNC No Indicates whether auto
Synchronization synchronization is
State ENABLED or DISABLED
in the ELCN Bridge.
Auto synchronization is
enabled upon receipt of
the Enable
Synchronization
command
(ENBLSYNCCMD). When
enabled, a Primary
automatically attempts
to synchronize the
Secondary, upon receipt
of any Auto-
Synchronization trigger
(in addition to the
Enable Synchronization
command). Auto
synchronization is
disabled either upon
receipt of the Disable
Synchronization
command
(DSBLSYNCCMD) or
detection of a persistent
synchronization fault
condition (For example,
end-to-end checksum
failure, synchronization
hardware failure, and so
on). When disabled, the
user must explicitly
issue the Enable
Synchronization
command to reset any
persistent fault
condition and re-
attempt initial-sync.
Redundancy RDNCMPT No Redundancy Partner
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Compatibility Compatibility - Indicates
whether redundant
partner modules are
compatible (from a
controller redundancy
perspective) and if not
compatible, provides a
reason why.
Inhibit Sync RDNINHIBITSYNC No Redundancy Inhibit
Reason Synchronization -
Indicates the current
reason why initial sync is
inhibited.
Initial Sync RDNSYNCPROG No Initial Sync Progress -
Process (%) Indicates the initial
synchronization
progress in terms of
percent complete.
Last SYNCTIMEBEG No Last Synchronization
Synchronization Time. System-time that
Time module completed
initial synchronization.
Last Loss of SYNCTIMEEND No Last Sync Lost Time.
Sync Time System-time that
module last lost
synchronization.
Redundancy RDNCTLABILITY No Describes the module's
Controllability ability to control relative
to its redundant partner.
Device Index RDNDEVICEIDX No Serves as a unique
identifier that does not
follow the redundancy
role. This parameter
shows the Device Index
specified using buttons
on the hardware's front
entry panel.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Redundancy Statistics
Total Tx Rate (k RDNTXRATE No
Bit/sec)
Total Rx Rate (k RDNRXRATE No
Bit/sec)
Total Tx Rate RDNTXRATEMAX No
Max (k Bit/sec)
Total Rx Rate RDNRXRATEMAX No
Max (k Bit/sec
Max Initial Sync RDNISTIMEMAX No Max Initial Sync Time -
Time (sec) Indicates the maximum
initial synchronization
time in seconds. This is
a high-water mark for
all the previous
successfully completed
initial-sync attempts.
Max Switchover RDNSOTIMEMAX No Maximum Switchover
Time (msec) Time - Indicates the
high-water mark with
regard to redundancy
switchover time, in milli-
seconds.
Redundancy History
Time RDNHISTTIME No Indicates wall clock time
of redundancy history
state change.
Event RDNHISTSTATE No Indicates the last 16
milestones within
redundancy related
activities. Refer to the
corresponding
RDNHISTREASON entry
for additional
information (when
applicable).
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Reason RDNHISTREASON No Redundancy History
Reason - Provide
rational for the
occurrence of a
redundancy history
state. Includes rational
for the following:
l IR : Initial
Redundancy Role
Determination
l IS : Commencing
Initial Sync
l CMPT : Partner
Compatibility
l ROLE : Redundancy
Role Change
l SYNC : Loss-of-Sync
and Commencing
Initial Sync
Redundancy RDNLINKFAILED No Indicates the status of
Link Failed the redundancy private
path between redundant
partners.
AM Controller block Statistics tab
The Statistics tab displays various statistical parameters used for maintaining and monitoring AM data
flow, network statistics and so on. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor
on the Statistics tab of the configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
CPU Statistics
CPU Free (%) CPUFREEAVG No Displays the rolling average of free CPU
not currently used for processing by the
CPM.
Minimum CPU CPUFREEMIN No Displays the historic minimum of the
Free (%) unused CPU available.
Time Since UPTIME No Displays the elapsed time since module
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Powerup powerup or restart.
Memory Statistics
Main RAM Free MEMFREEAVG No Main Ram Free (%)
(%)
Main RAM Free MEMFREEMIN No Main RAM Free Minimum (%)
Minimum (%)
Notification and Network Message Statistics
Notifications TNUMNTFRQUAVG No Displays the rolling average of
Rate notification request throughput for the
EHPM.
Maximum TNUMNTFRQUMAX No Displays the maximum of notification
Notifications request throughput since last store of
Rate STATSRESET.
Responder Input TRNUMINMSGAVGPS No Low water mark for NVS free running
Rate average, in percent.
Max Responder TRNUMINMSGMAXPS No Max Responder Input Rate
Input Rate
Responder TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS No Responder Output Rate
Output Rate
Max Responder TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS No Max Responder Output Rate
Output Rate
Responding to TNUMC3OUTCON No Number of SM Input Connections - This
C300s parameter defines the number of SMs
for peer targets.
NVS Statistics
NVS Free (%) NVSFREEAVG No NVS free running average, in percent.
NVS Free NVSFREEMIN No NVS Free Minimum (%)
Minimum (%)
Initiating to TNUMUOCINCON No Initiating to UOCs
UOCs
Hardware Temperature
Enclosure TEMPAVG No Enclosure Temperature (degC)
Temperature
(degC)
Maximum TEMPMAX No Maximum Temperature (degC)
Temperature
(degC)
Minimum TEMPMIN No Minimum Temperature (degC)
Temperature
(degC)
Responding to TNUMUOCOUTCON No Responding to UOCs
UOCs
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Module Bus Statistics
Current Hr CURHRRPTFIFOENTRY No Current Hr Report FIFO Entries
Report FIFO
Entries
Current Hr Error CURHRERRFIFOENTRY No Current Hr Error FIFO Entries
FIFO Entries
Current Hr CURHRRCVFIFOENTRY No Current Hr Receive FIFO Entries
Receive FIFO
Entries
Last Hr Report LSTHRRPTFIFOENTRY No Last Hr Report FIFO Entries
FIFO Entries
Last Hr Error LSTHRERRFIFOENTRY No Last Hr Error FIFO Entries
FIFO Entries
Last Hr Receive LSTHRRCVFIFOENTRY No Last Hr Receive FIFO Entries
FIFO Entries
Reset All STATSRESET Yes Reset All Statistics
Statistics
AM Controller block Hardware Information tab
The Hardware Information tab is used to display firmware information, hardware factory information,
and the MAC address related data for the AM module. The following table summarizes the parameter
data you can monitor on the Hardware Information tab of the configuration form for the selected AM
block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Firmware Version
Boot Image BOOTIMAGEVER No Displays the release version of Experion
Version module boot firmware currently in the
controller.
Application Image IMAGEVER_D No Displays the current personality image version
Version loaded in the EHPM module.
Hardware Factory Information
Module Type MODTYPE No Displays the hardware type and details like
model number and number of IOLINKS.
Serial Number SERIALNUM No Displays the redundancy module serial
number.
Programmable PLVERSION No Displays the Programmable Logic Revision.
Logic Revision
Hardware Version HWREVMAJ No Displays the hardware major revision.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Hardware HWREVMIN No Displays the hardware minor revision.
Revision
Network Interface Address Information
FTE A (Yellow) LANAMACADDR No Displays the media access control address of
MAC Address port A (yellow tree port).
FTE B (Green) LANBMACADDR No Displays the media access control address of
MAC Address port A (green tree port).
Redundancy RDNMACADDRR No Displays the media access control address of
MAC Address port used for redundancy link.
AM Controller block FTE tab
The FTE tab is used to display statistics related to FTE communications and performance. It features
parameters associated with the MAC Address Resolution Table (MART), which deals with online media
access control (MAC) address mapping. Two separate MARTs are maintained, one for FTE nodes and
the other for non-FTE nodes. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on
the FTE tab of the configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
FTE MART Statistics
Address FTEMARTADDRCOUNT No Displays the number of IP addresses
Count contained in the FTE MART.
Current FTE Traffic
Total Tx Rate LANTXRATE No Displays communication transmission
(kBit/sec) rate in kilobits per second (kbps) for port
A (yellow tree port) on the FTE interface.
Total Rx Rate LANRXRATE No Displays communication receive rate in
(kBit/sec) kbps for port A (yellow tree port) on the
FTE interface.
FTE A Tx LANATXRATE No Displays communication transmission
Rate rate in packets per second for port A
(pkts/sec) (yellow tree port) on the FTE interface.
FTE B Tx LANBTXRATE No Displays communication transmission
Rate rate in packets per second for port B
(pkts/sec) (green tree port) on the FTE interface.
FTE A Rx LANARXRATE No Displays communication receive rate in
Rate packets per second for port A (yellow tree
(pkts/sec) port) on the FTE interface.
FTE B Rx LANBRXRATE No Displays communication receive rate in
Rate kbps for port B (green tree port) on the
(pkts/sec) FTE interface.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
FTE A Block LANABLOCKEDRATE No Packets per second blocked (by CF9
Rate firewall) on FTE A cable.
(pkts/sec)
FTE B Block LANBBLOCKEDRATE No Packets per second blocked (by CF9
Rate firewall) on FTE B cable.
(pkts/sec)
FTE Statistics
Number of NUMFTENODES No Displays the current number of FTE
FTE Nodes nodes within the FTE community.
Max Number MAXFTENODES No Displays the maximum number of FTE
of FTE Nodes nodes that have been detected within the
FTE community.
Max Device MAXNODEID No Displays the the highest device index
Index supported within the FTE community.
FTE Receive LANRXERR Receive errors on FTE A cable.
Errors
FTE Transmit LANTXERR Receive errors on FTE B cable.
Errors
Peak FTE Traffic
Total Tx Rate LANTXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
Max (kBit/sec) transmission rate in on the FTE interface.
Total Rx Rate LANRXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
Max (kBit/sec) receive rate in kbps on the FTE interface.
FTE A Tx LANATXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
Rate Max transmission rate in packets per second
(pkts/sec) for port A (yellow tree port) on the FTE
interface.
FTE B Tx LANBTXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
Rate Max transmission rate in packets per second
(pkts/sec) for port B (green tree port) on the FTE
interface.
FTE A Rx LANARXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
Rate Max receive rate in packets per second for port
(pkts/sec) A (yellow tree port) on the FTE interface.
FTE B Rx LANBRXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
Rate Max receive rate in packets per second for port
(pkts/sec) B (green tree port) on the FTE interface.
FTE A Block LANABLOCKEDRATEMAX No Displays communication receive rate in
Rate Max packets per second for port A (yellow tree
(pkts/sec) port) on the FTE interface.
FTE B Block LANBBLOCKEDRATEMAX No Displays communication receive rate in
Rate Max packets per second for port B (green tree
(pkts/sec) port) on the FTE interface.
LAN failure indicator
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
FTE A LANASILENT No
(Yellow)
Silent
FTE B LANBSILENT No
(Green) Silent
FTE A LANAFAILED No Provides status indicator for port A (yellow
(Yellow) tree port) on the FTE interface.
Failed
FTE B LANBFAILED No Provides status indicator for port B (green
(Green) tree port) on the FTE interface.
Failed
InterLAN INTERLANFAILED No Provides status indicator for Inter-LAN
Comm Failed communications.
Crossover XOVERFAILED No Provides status indicator for crossover
Cable Failed cable.
AM Controller block ELCN Node Status tab
The ELCN Node Status tab displays the status of emulated board slots. The following table summarizes
the parameter data you can monitor on the ELCN Node Status tab of the configuration form for the
selected block.
Plain Parameter Name User Notes
Text Configurable
Slot#
Board SLOT#TYPE where # is No The type of board that is installed in Slot #. Slots 0, 2-
Type 0, 2, 3, or 4 4 are the boards that are being emulated by the
device.
Board SLOT#BOARDSTATUS No Slot # board has failed
Failed where # is 0, 2, 3, or 4
Board SLOT#SELFTEST No Slot # board has passed self test
Self where # is 0, 2, 3, or 4
Test
Status
Status SLOT#STATUS where No Slot # registers. This data reflects the slot register
# is 0, 2, 3, or 4 contents for each of the emulated slots. During
operations, the register contents change at a very
high rate, but the data is updated only at the
designated refresh rate. Slot Register data is of a
diagnostic nature and is normally of use only to
Honeywell Field Service personnel.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
AM Controller block UDP/TCP tab
The UDP/TCP tab is used to display statistics related to open UDP and TCP connections associated
with the respective AM block. It features parameters used for maintenance and performance monitoring
purposes. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the UDP/TCP tab of
the configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
UDP Statistics
Datagrams UDPINDGRAMS No Displays the total number of UDP datagrams
Delivered delivered to UDP users.
Datagrams UDPNOPORTS No Displays the total number of received UDP
for Unknown datagrams for which there was no application
Ports at the destination port.
Datagrams UDPINERRORS No Displays the number of received UDP
Dropped for datagrams that could not be delivered for
Errors reasons other than the lack of an application
at the destination port.
Datagrams UDPINCSUMERRORS No
with
Checksum
Error
Datagrams UDPOUTGRAMS No Displays the total number of UDP datagrams
Sent to sent from this entity.
Applications
Local UDP UDPLISTENERS No Provides a table containing path information
Listeners for all open ports on the FTE interface.
TCP Statistics
Active Opens TCPACTIVEOPENS No Displays the number of times TCP
connections have made a direct transition to
the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state.
Passive TCPPASSIVEOPENS No Displays the number of times TCP
Opens connections have made a direct transition to
the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.
Failed TCPATTEMPTFAILS No Displays the number of times TCP
Connection connections have made a direct transition to
Attempts the CLOSED state from either the SYNSENT
state or the SYN-RCVD state, plus the
number of times TCP connections have made
a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the
SYN-RCVD state.
Connections TCPESTABRESETS No Displays the number of times TCP
Resets connections have made a direct transition to
the CLOSED state from either the
ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-WAIT
state.
Current TCPCURRESTAB No Displays the number of TCP connections for
Connections which the current state is either
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
ESTABLISHED or CLOSE-WAIT.
Segments TCPINSEGS No Displays the total number of segments
Received received, including those received in error.
This count includes segments received on
currently established connections.
Segments TCPOUTSEGS No Displays the total number of segments sent,
Sent including those on current connections but
excluding those containing only retransmitted
octets.
Segments TCPRETRANSSEGS No Displays the total number of segments
Retransmitted retransmitted, that is, the number of TCP
segments transmitted containing one or more
previously transmitted octets.
Segments TCPINERRS No Displays the total number of segments
Discarded received in error. For example, bad TCP
For Errors checksums.
Segments TCPINCSUMERRS No
with
Checksum
Errors
Reset TCPOUTRESETS No Displays the number of TCP segments sent
Segments containing the RST flag.
Sent
Current TCP TCPCONNTABLE No Provides a table containing path information
Connections for all currently connected clients of the FTE
interface.
AM Controller block IP/ICMP tab
The IP/ICMP tab is used to display statistics related to IP and ICMP protocol messages associated with
(that is, originating in or received by) the respective AM block. It features parameters used for
maintenance and status operations on the network. The following table summarizes the parameter data
you can monitor on the IP/ICMP tab of the configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
IP Statistics
Datagrams IPINRECEIVES No Displays the total number of input
received from datagrams received from connected
Below nodes, including those received in error.
Datagrams IPINHDRERRORS No Displays the number of input datagrams
Format Error discarded due to errors in their IP
Drops headers, including bad checksums,
version number mismatch, other format
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors
discovered in processing their IP
options, and so on.
Datagrams IPINADDRERRORS No Displays the number of input datagrams
Misdelivery discarded because the IP address in
Drops their IP header's destination field was
not a valid address to be received at this
entity. This count includes invalid
addresses, such as 0.0.0.0, and
addresses of unsupported classes, such
as Class E. For entities which are not IP
Gateways and therefore do not forward
datagrams, this counter includes
datagrams discarded because the
destination address was not a local
address.
Unknown IPINUNKNOWNPORTS No Displays the number of locally-
Protocol addressed datagrams received
Datagrams successfully but discarded because of
an unknown or unsupported protocol.
Datagrams IPINDISCARDS No Displays the number of input IP
Discarded for datagrams for which no problems were
Resrcs encountered to prevent their continued
processing, but which were discarded
for another reason. For example,
discarded for lack of buffer space. Note
that this counter does not include any
datagrams discarded while awaiting re-
assembly.
Datagrams IPINDELIVERS No Displays the total number of input
Delivered datagrams successfully delivered to IP
Above user-protocols, including ICMP.
Datagrams IPOUTREQUESTS No Displays the total number of IP
Sent Out datagrams which local IP user-protocols,
including ICMP, supplied to IP in
requests for transmission.
Out IPOUTDISCARDS No Displays the number of output IP
Datagrams datagrams for which no problem was
Discarded encountered to prevent their
transmission to their destination, but
which were discarded for another
reason. For example, discarded for lack
of buffer space.
Datagrams IPOUTNOROUTES No Displays the number of IP datagrams
Drops for No discarded because no route could be
Routes found to transmit them to their
destination.
Fragments IPREASSEMREQS No Displays the number of IP fragments
Needing received which needed to be
Reassembly reassembled at this entity.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Fragments IPREASSEMOKS No Displayss the number of IP datagrams
Reassembled successfully reassembled.
Fragments IPREASSEMFAILS No Displays the number of failures detected
Reassembly by the IP reassembly algorithm for
Fails reasons such as, timed out, errors, and
so on.
ICMP Statistics
Messages ICMPINMSGS No Displays the total number of ICMP
Received messages which the entity received.
Messages ICMPINERRORS No Displays the number of ICMP messages
with Format which the entity received but determined
Errors as having ICMP-specific errors, such as
bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and
so on.
Messages ICMPINCSUMERRORS No
with
Checksum
Errors
Dest. ICMPINDESTUNREACHS No Displays the number of ICMP
Unreachable destination unreachable messages
Msgs Recvd received.
Echo ICMPINECHOS No Displays the number of ICMP echo
Messages (request) messages received.
Recvd
Echo Reply ICMPINECHOREPS No Displays the number of ICMP echo reply
Messages messages received.
Recvd
Messages ICMPOUTMSGS No Displays the total number of ICMP
Sent messages which this entity attempted to
send.
Out Error ICMPOUTERRORS No Displays the number of ICMP messages
Messages which this entity did not send due to
problems discovered within ICMP such
as a lack of buffers.
Dest. ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS No Displays the number of ICMP
Unreachable destination unreachable messages sent.
Messages
Sent
Echo ICMPOUTECHOS No Displays the number of ICMP echo
Messages (request) messages sent.
Sent
Echo Reply ICMPOUTECHOREPS No Displays the number of ICMP echo reply
Messages messages sent.
Sent
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
AM Controller block Soft Failures tab
The Soft Failures tab is used to display various soft failure conditions for the AM Controller hardware.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Soft Failures tab of the
configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Soft Failure Conditions
Factory Data FACTDATAERR No Displays the factory data
Error checksum.
WDT Hardware WDTHWFAIL No Displays the WatchDog Timer
Failure Hardware Failure.
Critical Task TASKHLTHMON No A key task within the controller is
Watchdog executing less frequently than
Warning normal.
Partner Not PARTNERNOTVISFTE No Indicates redundant module
Visible On FTE partner is not visible on FTE.
Network
Uncorrectable RAMSWEEPERR No Displays status of detected RAM
Internal RAM errors.
Sweep Error
Corrected RAMSCRUBERRS No Displays status of detected RAM
Internal RAM errors.
Sweep Error
Uncorrectable BACKUPRAMSWEEPERR No Displays status of detected errors
User RAM in backup RAM.
Sweep Error
Minimum MINHWREVSF No
Recommended
HW Revision
Thermometer THERMERR No True if the device hardware
Failure thermometer has failed.
Enclosure TEMPCRIT No True if the enclosure temperature
Temperature exceeds the critical limit.
Critical
FPGA FPGAFAIL No True if the device detects a failure
Hardware with the FPGA functionality.
Failure
FTE Network FTENETWORKERR No True if device detected an FTE
Error (see FTE network error; for example, FTE
Tab) cable failure.
LCD Display LCDDISPLAYSF No
Panel Errors
Power Supply PWRSUPPLYSF No
Alarm
Fan Fault FANFAULTSF No
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Condition
Key Switch in UEAKEYCONFSF No
'C' position
Diagnostic DBTRACEENABLESF No
Traces Enabled
Deployment DEPLOYMENTINCOMPLETESF No
incomplete
ETH1 ETH1SOFTFAIL No Indicates whether ETH1 interface
communication is receiving traffic (or not). It shows
error True if the redundant partner is
not visible on the FTE network.
AM Controller block Traces tab
The Traces tab is used to configure the ELCN AM Controller block. This tab also displays important
state information and supports generation of commands to the ELCN AM Controller through the
parameters. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this
tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Plain Parameter Name User Notes
Text Configurable
Main
DBTRACEFLAG1 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value indicating 32 flags each
of which can govern diagnostic tracing of a specific area of
interest. DBTRACEFLAGS1 governs tracing for platform
application
DBTRACEFLAG2 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value indicating 32 flags each
of which can govern diagnostic tracing of a specific area of
interest. DBTRACEFLAGS2 governs tracing for uea
display application
DBTRACEFLAG3 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value indicating 32 flags each
of which can govern diagnostic tracing of a specific area of
interest. DBTRACEFLAGS3 governs tracing for lcnp4emu
application
DBTRACEFLAG4 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value indicating 32 flags each
of which can govern diagnostic tracing of a specific area of
interest. DBTRACEFLAGS4 governs tracing for
ELCNNODE type dependent application as follows: ENIM-
epni2emu, NG- engiAemu, EHB- ehbemu, ENB- enbemu
DBTRACEFLAG5 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value indicating 32 flags each
of which can govern diagnostic tracing of a specific area of
interest. DBTRACEFLAGS5 governs tracing for
ELCNNODE types as follows: NG- engiBemu, else-
ftesysapp application
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Parameter Name User Notes
Text Configurable
DBTRACEENABLE Yes This parameter indicates whether GTAC-directed
diagnostic tracing is enabled. If the value is true, it will
trigger a SoftFail on the node, so that operators/engineers
are aware that diagnostic tracing is enabled.
AM Controller block AM Unit Configuration tab
The AM Unit Configuration tab displays information about the AM’s unit configuration . The following
table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the AM Unit Configuration tab of the
configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
No of Units NOUNITS No No of Units
Enable AUTOMATICPOINTIMPORT No Automatic point import is used to
Automatic optionally enable/disable the automatic
Point Import import of EHPM points using the auto-
import service.
Unit
AM Units AMUNITCONF No AM Units Configuration
Configuration
Import IMPORTUNIT No Import Selected Unit
Selected Unit
Import Configuration
No Of Points NOPERDB No Number of points in ERDB after import
After Import
Date of Last DATEPTIMPORT No Date of last point imported into ERDB for
Import the Controller.
Import Status IMPORTSTATUS No Import status shows the status of current
import (automatic or manual) of the
points.
AM Controller block EAMR tab
The EAMR tab is used to configure the ELCN AM block. This tab also displays important state
information and supports generation of commands to the ELCN AM Node through the parameters. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
EAMR Redundancy Statistics
Messages EAMRMSGSPERSEC Yes Averaged over 5
Per Second seconds. These
can be sent in
either direction,
primary or
secondary.
Data EAMRDATAPKTSPERSEC Yes Data packets are
Packets Per only issued from
Second the primary AM to
the secondary AM
Signal EAMRSIGPKTSPERSEC Yes Signal packets
Packets Per can be sent in
Second either direction,
primary or
secondary.
EAMR RDN- EAMRPERCENTOPTAVG Yes Averaged over 5
link seconds.
optimization Optimization
% value is the
reduction in
traffic as % of
overall traffic. For
example, if traffic
would normally
be 1000 data
packets, but the
optimization
reduced this
traffic to 900 data
packets, then this
value would be 10
(%).
EAMR RDN EAMRRDNXFERMBPERSEC Yes Averaged over 5
link seconds. This can
MBits/Sec be measured in
either direction,
primary or
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
secondary. This
value can be used
to characterize
the load that
EAMR RDN link
may be expected
to place on a
virtual production
communication
link which, as
opposed to the
dedicated UEA
RDN wire, may be
shared with other
virtual
communications
across the same
virtual data
transport.
AM Controller block Server History tab
The Server History tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Access Levels
Control SCANCTRLLVL Yes Indicates Server control level to be
Level associated with this function.
History Configuration
Number of HIST.NUMPARAMS Yes Defines number of history parameters
History to be included in History Configuration
Parameters table.
Parameter HIST.PARAM Yes Valid parameter name for a parameter
associated with the given point that is to
be collected and stored as historical
data at predetermined intervals.
Description No Provides a brief description of the
entered parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
FAST HIST.FAST Yes Select the Fast type of history
collection.
STD HIST.STD Yes Select the Standard type of history
collection.
EXTD HIST.EXTD Yes Select the Extended type of history
collection.
Gating HIST.GATEPARAM Yes Optional gating parameter to define
Parameter conditions under which data for this
parameter should be collected.
Gate State HIST.GATEVALUE Yes Defines the gate state for the
configured gating parameter.
Create New N/A Launches the Server scripting
or Edit configuration utility.
Existing
Server
Scripts
(Button)
Parameter History Options
History type HIST.FAST HIST.STD No For the selected parameter, lists the
HIST.EXTD HIST.EXC available history types.
l Fast
l Standard
l Extended
l Exception
Collection HIST.FASTCOLLRATE Yes For the selected parameter, defines the
Rate HIST.STDCOLLRATE collection rate for each history type.
HIST.EXCCOLLRATE
Offset HIST.EXCOFFSET Yes (Optional) Applicable only to Standard
HIST.STDOFFSET history and Exception history. For the
selected parameter, defines the offset
value, which enables the data
collection to be staggered.
PHD HIST.FASTPHDCOLLRATE Yes For the selected parameter, defines the
Collection HIST.STDPHDCOLLRATE PHD Collection strategy.
HIST.EXTDPHDCOLLRATE l Default
HIST.EXCPHDCOLLRATE
l Override
l Disable
AM Controller block Server Displays tab
The Server Displays tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Point SCANPNTDTL Yes By default, a Display template is already entered
Detail into Point Detail Display box (for example,
Display sysDtlFTEB.htm). This template can be used for
creating your own display or it can be used as is,
provided your function block name matches
name built into detail display that is supplied as
a template.
Group SCANGRPDTL Yes By default, a Display template is already entered
Detail into the Group Detail Display box (for example,
Display sysGrpFTEB.htm). This template can be used for
creating your own display or it can be used as is,
provided that your function block name matches
name built into detail display that is supplied as
a template
Associated SCANASSOCDSP Yes Name of the Server display to be associated
Display with this function block.
Trends
Number of TREND.NUMPARAMS Yes Defines the number of trend parameters to be
Trends included in the Trends Configuration table.
Trend # TREND.NUMBER Yes Defines Trend number to be associated with this
trend parameter
Trend TREND.POSITION Yes Defines color of pen that is used to trace
Position assigned parameter on Station Trend display.
Trend TREND.PARAM Yes Valid parameter name for a parameter
Parameter associated with given point that is configured for
trend collection.
Description No Provides a brief description of the entered
parameter.
Groups
Number of GROUP.NUMPARAMS Yes Defines the number of group parameters to be
Groups included in Groups Configuration table.
Group # GROUP.NUMBER Yes Defines Group number to be associated with this
group parameter.
Pos # GROUP.POSITION Yes Defines number of position configured
parameter will occupy in the Station Group
display.
Group GROUP.PARAM Yes Valid parameter name for a parameter
Parameter associated with the given point that is configured
in the system.
Description No Provides a brief description of the entered
parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
AM Controller block Control Confirmation tab
The Control Confirmation tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. If
you have an optional Electronic Signature license, you can configure electronic signature information
for the tagged block through this tab on the block's configuration form in Control Builder. Please see the
online help and the Server and Client Configuration Guide for information about the data on this tab.
The Electronic Signature function aligns with the identical Electronic Signatures function that is initiated
through Quick Builder and Station for Server points. When this block is loaded to a controller, its control
confirmation configuration (electronic signatures) is also loaded to the Server. This means you can view
the control confirmation configuration for this tagged object in Station and also make changes to it. If you
make changes through Station, you must initiate an Upload function through the Controller menu in
Control Builder for the object in the Monitoring view to synchronize changes in the ERDB.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Control CTRLCONFIRM Yes
Confirmation
Electronic Signature NUMSIGS # Yes
Type #
Reason Set REASONSET # Yes
Number #
Secondary Signer SECSIGSECLVL # Yes
Security Level #
Primary Signature PRIMARYSIG# Yes
Meaning #
Secondary SECONDARYSIG# Yes Defines color of pen that is used to trace
Signature Meaning assigned parameter on Station Trend
# display.
AM Controller block QVCS tab
The QVCS tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. If you have an
optional Qualification and Version Control System (QVCS) license, this tab shows current QVCS
information for the selected AM block.
AM Controller block Identification tab
The Identification tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Name Name Yes Unique block name consisting of up to 16 characters
to identify the block. At least one character in the
name must be a letter (A-Z).
Description DESC Yes Descriptive text that appears on detail and group
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
displays to uniquely describe this particular function
block
Block BLCKCOMMENT1 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment of up to 40 characters.
1
Block BLCKCOMMENT2 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment of up to 40 characters.
2
Block BLCKCOMMENT3 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment of up to 40 characters.
3
Block BLCKCOMMENT4 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment of up to 40 characters.
4
Library N/A No Identifies Control Builder Library that is the source for
template.
System No Identifies System Template that is the source for this
Template block.
Base No Identifies Base Template that is used for this block.
Template
Created By CREATEDBY No Identifies user who created block, if operator security
is implemented. Otherwise, may just show Default
login.
Date DATECREATED No Indicates date and time template was created. If this
Created block is in Version Control System, shows date and
time initial version of template was created.
Last MODIFIEDBY No Identifies user who made last modifications to block,
Modified if operator security is implemented. Otherwise, may
By just show default login. If this block is in Version
Control System, modifications apply to last version of
block.
Date Last VERSIONDATE No Indicates date and time last modification was made
Modified to block's configuration. If this block is in Version
Control System, modification date and time applies
to last version of block.
4.22.7 AM Point template Configuration Form Reference
This section provides a summary of all user-visible parameters for an AM Point Templates. The
parameters are grouped according to the tabs where they reside on the configuration form. For more
details about these parameters, refer to the AM Family Parameter Reference Dictionary.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
AM FLAG Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Config Details Config Details Tab
Alarm Configuration Alarm Configuration Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
AM FLAG Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the AM Point Template. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an AM Point Template. In addition,
it displays the important states of the AM Point Template and supports the key commands associated
with operation of the AM Point Template. Redundancy configuration can be entered only in the Project
Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the Main
tab of the configuration form for the selected AM Point Template.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least one
character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known within the
context of the enterprise model.
CONTCUT
Point Details
Engr Units EUDESC No The engineering-units descriptor (for example, °C, PSIA,
Descriptor gal/hr, kPa, ltr-min) for this data point, that appears on
displays, logs, and reports.
Point $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines the
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Custom name of the custom schematic that is to be displayed
Detail instead of the standard detail display for this point.
Point ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is associated
Associated with this point.
Display
Point KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears on
Keyword displays and in printed logs and reports.
Primary PRIMMOD Yes The tag name of the point that is the primary module for
Module this point.
Point Id
Point PTDESC No Textual description of the point for use in standard Group
Descriptor and Detail displays.
Process PV
Variable
AM FLAG Point Template Config Details Tab
The Config Details tab of the FLAG Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Config
Details tab of the FLAG Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
System Time
State PVSTATES No One-by-two array of state descriptor string
Descriptor Text parameter/description.
Upper Box UBOXCLR Yes Color of the upper box on Group and Detail
Color displays for a Flag point
Lower Box LBOXCLR Yes Color of the lower box on Group and Detail displays
Color for a Flag point
Off Normal OFFNRMAL Yes Off-normal alarm configuration
Alarming
AM FLAG Point Template Alarm Tab
The Alarm tab of the FLAG Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters under
it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Alarm tab of the FLAG
Point Template for the selected AM block.
NOTE
The parameters in Alarm Configuration tab for FLAG Point Template can only be configured
when the value of the parameter OFFNRMAL (Config Details tab) is ON.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
System Time
Alarm ALENBST No Point alarm-enable status that affects the detecting and
Enable State reporting of alarms
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No The Auxiliary Unit of an alarmable process point. If an
Auxiliary Unit ID is specified.
Multiple $MPROD1 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#1 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD2 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#2 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD3 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#3 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD4 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#4 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Re Alarming $REALARM No
Interval
Alarm Priorities
Alarm priority OFFNRMPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Off Normal alarm.
Off Normal $OFSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of Off
Selective Normal alarm of a point even though the point is cutout.
Cutout
Overvalue OVERVAL No Defines the amount of deviation in % that causes the PV
index to reach the Overview Limit on the Detail display
AM Custom AM Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Alarms Alarm Tab
AM/CL AM/CL Tab
Package Config Package Config Tab
Display Schedule Display Schedule Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Tab name Reference
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
AM Custom AM Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the AM Point Template. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an AM Point Template. In addition,
it displays the important states of the AM Point Template and supports the key commands associated
with operation of the AM Point Template. Redundancy configuration can be entered only in the Project
Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the Main
tab of the configuration form for the selected AM Point Template.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least one
character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known within
the context of the enterprise model.
Point Details
PV PV No
Engr Units EUDESC No The engineering-units descriptor (for example, °C, PSIA,
Descriptor gal/hr, kPa, ltr-min) for this data point, that appears on
displays, logs, and reports.
Point $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines the
Custom name of the custom schematic that is to be displayed
Detail instead of the standard detail display for this point.
Point ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is associated
Associated with this point.
Display
Point KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears on
Keyword displays and in printed logs and reports.
Primary PRIMMOD Yes The tag name of the point that is the primary module for
Module this point.
Point Id
No. of CLSLOTS No Number of CL slots allocated for this point.
Associated
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
CLs
Point Execution
Point PTEXECST No Point Execution State. Defines the execution state of the
Execution associated point as Inactive or Active.
Status
Restart RESTART No
type
Process PPSTYPE Process Point Special Type
Point
Special
Type
AM Custom AM Point Template Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab of the Custom AM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Alarms
tab of the Custom AM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
System Time
Alarm ALENBST No Point alarm-enable status that affects the detecting and
Enable State reporting of alarms
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No The Auxiliary Unit of an alarmable process point. If an
Auxiliary Unit ID is specified.
Multiple $MPROD1 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#1 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD2 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#2 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD3 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#3 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD4 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#4 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Re ALarming $REALARM No
Interval
Alarm Priorities
BckGrnd CL BCLEALPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Background Error
Err AIM alarm
Priority
BckGrnd CL BCLFALPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Background Fail
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Fatal AIM alarm
Priority
CL Err Alm CLEALMPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Foreground Error
priority alarm
CL Fatal Err CLFALMPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Foreground Fail
Alm priority alarm
Config Err CNFERRPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Configuration Error alarm
Alm Priority
AM Custom AM Point Template Block AM/CL Tab
The AM/CL tab of the Custom AM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the AM/CL
tab of the Custom AM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Parameter User Notes
Text Name Configurable
Linked AM/CL Blocks
Block BLKNAME No Linked CL block Name
Name
Activity $CLCMPST No Composite CL block activity status displayed on the CL page
of the Detail Display for this point.
Insertion INSPOINT No CL block insertion point
Point
Insertion INSORDER No CL block insertion order
Order
Block CLBLKERR No CL block error status
Error
AM Custom AM Point Template Block Package Config Tab
The Package Config tab of the Custom AM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
Package Config tab of the Custom AM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
No of Custom Data PKGNAME No Package name - the name of a CL source file that
Packages is to be bound to this point after it is compiled
Package Configuration
Custom Data NOPKG Yes Number of CDS packages to be attached to this
Packages Src File point
Names
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
AM Custom AM Point Template Block Display Schedule Tab
The Display Schedule tab of the Custom AM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Display
Schedule tab of the Custom AM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Point assigned to $IPPASN Yes defines that a point is assigned to the IPP.
IPP
Point Execution PERIOD Yes Point Execution Period
Period
Before/After/Cycle BEFAFT No BEFAFT is the before/after scheduling option that
Option defines the processing time for this data point
Tagname of BEFAFTID No Name of point in the same unit before or after which
Before/After this point is to be configured
Absolute Cycle NORMCYCL No Absolute Cycle Number
Number
AM Numeric Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
AM NUMERICAM Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the AM Controller. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an AM Controller. In addition, it
displays the important states of the AM Controller and supports the key commands associated with
operation of the AM Controller. Redundancy configuration can be entered only in the Project Tree. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the Main tab of the
configuration form for the selected AM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least one
character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known within the
context of the enterprise model.
CONTCUT Yes
Point Configuration
Engr Units EUDESC No The engineering-units descriptor (for example, °C, PSIA,
Descriptor gal/hr, kPa, ltr-min) for this data point, that appears on
displays, logs, and reports.
Point $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines the
Custom name of the custom schematic that is to be displayed
Detail instead of the standard detail display for this point.
Point ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is associated
Associated with this point.
Display
Point KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears on
Keyword displays and in printed logs and reports.
Primary PRIMMOD Yes The tag name of the point that is the primary module for
Module this point.
Point Id
Point PTDESC No Textual description of the point for use in standard Group
Descriptor and Detail displays.
Process PV No
Variable
PV High RANGEHI No PV High Range
Range
PV Low RANGELO No
Range
PV PVFORMAT No PV format controls the number of decimal places
Decimal displayed for the PV on the Operator Station.
Place
Format
AM Switch Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Alarm Alarm Tab
AM/CL AM/CL Tab
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Tab name Reference
Package Config Package Config Tab
Display Schedule Display Schedule Tab
Switch Config Switch Config Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
SWITCHAM Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the AM Point Template. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an AM Point Template. In addition,
it displays the important states of the AM Point Template and supports the key commands associated
with operation of the AM Point Template. Redundancy configuration can be entered only in the Project
Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the Main
tab of the configuration form for the selected AM Point Template.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least one
character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known within
the context of the enterprise model.
Description DESC No
Point Configuration
Engr Units EUDESC No The engineering-units descriptor (for example, °C, PSIA,
Descriptor gal/hr, kPa, ltr-min) for this data point, that appears on
displays, logs, and reports.
Point $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines the
Custom name of the custom schematic that is to be displayed
Detail instead of the standard detail display for this point.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Point ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is associated
Associated with this point.
Display
Point KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears on
Keyword displays and in printed logs and reports.
Primary PRIMMOD Yes The tag name of the point that is the primary module for
Module this point.
Point Id
Point PTDESC No Textual description of the point for use in standard Group
Descriptor and Detail displays.
No. of CLSLOTS No Number of CL slots allocated for this point.
Associated
CLs
Point Exec Status
Point PTEXECST No Point Execution State. Defines the execution state of the
Execution associated point as Inactive or Active.
Status
Restart RESTART No Restart type
type
SWITCHAM Point Template Alarm Tab
The Alarm tab of the SWITCHAM Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Alarm tab of the
SWITCHAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
System Time
Alm 1 Description SALMDSC1 No Switch alarm 1 to 3 descriptions
-
Alm 2 Description SALMDSC2 No Switch alarm 1 to 3 descriptions
Alm 3 Description SALMDSC3 No Switch alarm 1 to 3 descriptions
Alarm Enable ALENBST No Point alarm-enable status that affects the detecting
State and reporting of alarms
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No The Auxiliary Unit of an alarmable process point.
Multiple $MPROD1 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings
PRIMMOD#1 that, when filled-in, replace the Primmod description
field of the alarm event record when the point is in
alarm.
Multiple $MPROD2 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings
PRIMMOD#2 that, when filled-in, replace the Primmod description
field of the alarm event record when the point is in
alarm.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Multiple $MPROD3 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings
PRIMMOD#3 that, when filled-in, replace the Primmod description
field of the alarm event record when the point is in
alarm.
Multiple $MPROD4 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings
PRIMMOD#4 that, when filled-in, replace the Primmod description
field of the alarm event record when the point is in
alarm.
Re alarming $REALARM No
Interval
Alarm Priority
BckGrnd CL Err BCLEALPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Background
AIM Priority Error alarm
BckGrnd CL Fatal BCLFALPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Background Fail
AIM Priority alarm
CL Err Alm priority CLEALMPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Foreground
Error alarm
CL Fatal Err Alm CLFALMPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Foreground Fail
priority alarm
Configuration CNFERRPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Configuration Error
Error Alm Priority alarm
Switch Alm 1 Alm SWALM1PR No Alarm priority parameters for Switch Alarms 1, 2,
Priority - Switch - and 3
Alm 3 Alm Priority SWALM3PR
SWITCHAM Point Template AM/CL Tab
The AM/CL tab of the SWITCHAM Point Template displays information about the . The following table
summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the AM/CL tab of the SWITCHAM Point Template
for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Linked AM/CL Blocks
Block BLKNAME No Linked CL block Name
Name
Activity $CLCMPST No Composite CL block activity status displayed on the CL
page of the Detail Display for this point.
Insertion INSPOINT No CL block insertion point
Point
Insertion INSORDER No CL block insertion order
Order
Block CLBLKERR No CL block error status
Error
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
SWITCHAM Point Template Package Config Tab
The Package Config tab of the SWITCHAM Point Template displays information about the . The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Package Config tab of the
SWITCHAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
No of Custom Data PKGNAME No Package name - the name of a CL source file that
Packages is to be bound to this point after it is compiled
Package Configuration
Custom Data NOPKG Yes Number of CDS packages to be attached to this
Packages Src File point
Names
SWITCHAM Point Template Switch Config Tab
The Switch Config tab of the SWITCHAM Point Template displays information about the . The following
table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Switch Config tab of the SWITCHAM Point
Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Switch Configuration
No of Switches NUMSWITCH No No of Switches
Switch 1 Configuration
No of States for S1NSTATE No Number of valid states for Switch 1
Switch 1
Switch 1 State S1STATES No
Names
Switch 1 Access S1ACCLVL No Access level choice for who can store to the
level S1REQSTS parameter.
Switch 1 Initial S1CURSTS No Initial state of Switch 1 (DEB), or current state of
level Switch 1
Switch 1 S1REQSTS No Requested state for Switch 1
Requested level
Switch 2 Configuration
No of States for S2NSTATE No Number of valid states for Switch 2
Switch 2
Switch 2 State S2STATES No
Names
Switch 2 Access S2ACCLVL No Access level choice for who can store to the
level S2REQSTS parameter.
Switch 2 Initial S2CURSTS No Initial state of Switch 2 (DEB), or current state of
level Switch 2
Switch 2 S2REQSTS No Requested state for Switch 2
Requested level
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
SWITCHAM Point Template Display Schedule Tab
The Display Schedule tab of the SWITCHAM Point Template displays information about the . The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Display Schedule tab of the
SWITCHAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Point assigned to $IPPASN Yes defines that a point is assigned to the IPP.
IPP
Point Execution PERIOD Yes Point Execution Period
Period
Before/After/Cycle BEFAFT No BEFAFT is the before/after scheduling option that
Option defines the processing time for this data point
Tagname of BEFAFTID No Name of point in the same unit before or after which
Before/After this point is to be configured
Absolute Cycle NORMCYCL No Absolute Cycle Number
Number
AM Timer Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Alarm Alarm Tab
Display Schedule Display Schedule Tab
Timer Operation Timer Operation Tab
Display
General IO General IO Tab
Timer Details Timer Details Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
TIMERAM Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the AM Point Template. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an AM Point Template. In addition,
it displays the important states of the AM Point Template and supports the key commands associated
with operation of the AM Point Template. Redundancy configuration can be entered only in the Project
Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the Main
tab of the configuration form for the selected AM Point Template.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least one
character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known within
the context of the enterprise model.
Description DESC No
Point Details
Engr Units EUDESC No The engineering-units descriptor (for example, °C, PSIA,
Descriptor gal/hr, kPa, ltr-min) for this data point, that appears on
displays, logs, and reports.
Point $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines the
Custom name of the custom schematic that is to be displayed
Detail instead of the standard detail display for this point.
Point ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is associated
Associated with this point.
Display
Point KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears on
Keyword displays and in printed logs and reports.
Primary PRIMMOD Yes The tag name of the point that is the primary module for
Module this point.
Point Id
Point PTDESC No Textual description of the point for use in standard Group
Descriptor and Detail displays.
Point PTDISCL No Selects full disclosure of all applicable parameters in the
Disclosure Parameter Entry Display (PED); or only a subset of those
parametersleaving those not disclosed at their default
values
Unit Id UNIT No This parameter defines the unit to which this data point is
assigned.
Point PTEXECST No Point Execution State. Defines the execution state of the
Execution associated point as Inactive or Active.
Status
Restart RESTART No
type
TIMERAM Point Template Alarm Tab
The Alarm tab of the TIMERAM Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Alarm tab of the
TIMERAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
NOTE
The parameters in Alarm tab for TIMERAM Point Template can only be configured when the
value of the parameter TIMOUTAL (Timer Operation tab) is ON.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
System Time
PV Normal PVNORMAL No Process Variable (PV) Normal Option.
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No The Auxiliary Unit of an alarmable process point.
Multiple $MPROD1 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#1 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD2 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#2 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD3 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#3 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD4 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#4 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Alarm Enable ALENBST No Point alarm-enable status that affects the detecting and
State reporting of alarms
Re alarming $REALARM No
Interval
Alarm Priority
Configuration CNFERRPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Configuration Error
Error Alm alarm
Priority
Alarm priority TIMOUTPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Timeout alarm
parameter for
time
Contact CCINPT No Contact-cutout input option
Cutout Input
option
ContCut Src CCSRC No Contact-cutout connection source
Point Param
ContCut Src CCACTSTS No Contact cutout-activity status, which indicates the initial
Connection Active or Inactive alarm cutout connection status
Status
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
TIMERAM Point Template Display Schedule Tab
The Display Schedule tab of the TIMERAM Point Template displays information about the . The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Display Schedule tab of the
TIMERAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Point assigned to $IPPASN Yes Defines that a point is assigned to the IPP.
IPP
Point Execution PERIOD Yes Point Execution Period
Period
Before/After/Cycle BEFAFT No BEFAFT is the before/after scheduling option that
Option defines the processing time for this data point
Tagname of BEFAFTID No Name of point in the same unit before or after
Before/After which this point is to be configured
Absolute Cycle NORMCYCL No Absolute Cycle Number
Number
Overvalue Index OVERVAL No Overvalue Index
TIMERAM Point Template Timer Operation Tab
The Timer Operation tab of the TIMERAM Point Template displays information about the . The following
table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Operating Display tab of the TIMERAM
Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Operating Display
Timer Period TIMEBASE No Timer Period
Set Time SP No Setpoint Value
Permit Operator Control CNTLLOCK No Operator control change lock
Permit operator to Set SPLOCK No Setpoint lock for Timer data
Time points.
Timeout Alarm TIMOUTAL No Timeout Alarm
TIMERAM Point Template General io Tab
The General IO tab of the TIMERAM Point Template displays information about the . The following table
summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the General IO tab of the TIMERAM Point Template
for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
I/O Configuration
Number of General Inputs NOGINPTS No Number of general-input connections
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
to this point
Number of General outputs NOGOPTS No Number of general-output
connections to this point
Input Configuration
General Input Src Point Id. GISRC No General Input Src Point Id. Param
Param
General Input Destination GIDSTN No General Input Destination Param
Param
General Input Connection GIACTSTS No General Input Connection Status
Status Param Param
General Input Access Status GIACCSTS No General Input Access Status Param
Param
Output Configuration
General Output Src Point Id. GOSRC No General Output Src Point Id. Param
Param
General Output Destination GODSTN No General Output Destination Param
Param
General Output Connection GOACTSTS No General Output Connection Status
Status Param Param
General Output Access Status GOACCSTS No General Output Access Status Param
Param
TIMERAM Point Template Timer details Tab
The Timer Details tab of the TIMERAM Point Template displays information about the . The following
table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Timer Details tab of the TIMERAM Point
Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Accumulation
Reset Accumulation Control RESETCMD No Reset Accumulation Control
Start/Stop Timer Control STRTSTOP No Start/Stop Timer Control
Remaining Time TIMELEFT No Remaining Time
Time Out Alarm Flag TIMOUTFL No Time Out Alarm Flag
Process Variable Value PV No Process Variable Value
State of Totalizer STATE No State of Totalizer
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
AM Counter Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Alarms Alarms Tab
Display Schedule Display Schedule Tab
PV Configuration PV Configuration Tab
Alarm Priorities Alarm Priorities Tab
Accumulation Accumulation Tab
General IO General IO Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
AM COUNTAM Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the AM Point Template. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an AM Point Template. In addition,
it displays the important states of the AM Point Template and supports the key commands associated
with operation of the AM Point Template. Redundancy configuration can be entered only in the Project
Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the Main
tab of the configuration form for the selected AM Point Template.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least one
character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known within
the context of the enterprise model.
Description DESC No
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Point Configuration
Engr Units EUDESC No The engineering-units descriptor (for example, °C, PSIA,
Descriptor gal/hr, kPa, ltr-min) for this data point, that appears on
displays, logs, and reports.
Unit Id UNIT No This parameter defines the unit to which this data point is
assigned.
Point $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines the
Custom name of the custom schematic that is to be displayed
Detail instead of the standard detail display for this point.
Point ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is associated
Associated with this point.
Display
Point KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears on
Keyword displays and in printed logs and reports.
Primary PRIMMOD Yes The tag name of the point that is the primary module for
Module this point.
Point Id
Point PTDESC No Textual description of the point for use in standard Group
Descriptor and Detail displays.
ACCUM No Selects the accumulation option for AM Counter points
Point Execution
Point PTDISCL No Selects full disclosure of all applicable parameters in the
Disclosure Parameter Entry Display (PED); or only a subset of those
parametersleaving those not disclosed at their default
values
Point PTEXECST No Point Execution State. Defines the execution state of the
Execution associated point as Inactive or Active.
Status
Restart RESTART No
type
Process PV No
Variable
Last Good LASTPV No Last good PV value before becoming bad or changing
PV the PV
Calculated PVCALC No The value calculated by the PV algorithm.
PV
PVAUTO PVAUTO No State of Actual Inputs
AM COUNTAM Point Template Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab of the COUNTAM Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Alarms tab of the
COUNTAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Alarm Configuration 1
PV High PVHITP No PV high alarm trip point value
Alarm Trip
Point
PV Low PVLOTP No PV low alarm trip point value
Alarm Trip
Point
PV High PVHHTP No PV high-high alarm trip point value
High Alarm
Trip Point
PV LoLo PVLLTP No PV low-low alarm trip point value
Alarm Trip
Point
Significant PVSGCHTP No PV Significant Change Alarm Trip Point
PV Change
Alarm TF
PV Positive PVROCPTP No PV Positive Rate - of - Change Trip Point.
ROC TP
PV Neg ROC PVROCNTP No PV Negative Rate - of - Change Trip Point.
TP
Deviation DEVHITP No Deviation High Alarm TP
High Alarm
TP
Deviation DEVLOTP No Deviation Low Alarm TP
Low Alarm
TP
PV Alarm PVALDB No PV Alarm Deadband
Deadband
PV Alarm PVALDBEU No PV Alarm Deadband in EU
Deadband in
EU
Alarm Configuration 2
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No
Multiple $MPROD1 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#1 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD2 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#2 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD3 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#3 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD4 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#4 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Alarm ALENBST No Point alarm-enable status that affects the detecting and
Enable State reporting of alarms
Re alarming $REALARM No
Interval
AM COUNTAM Point Template Display Schedule Tab
The Display Schedule tab of the COUNTAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Display
Schedule tab of the COUNTAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Point assigned to $IPPASN Yes defines that a point is assigned to the IPP.
IPP
Point Execution PERIOD Yes Point Execution Period
Period
Before/After/Cycle BEFAFT No BEFAFT is the before/after scheduling option that
Option defines the processing time for this data point
Tagname of BEFAFTID No Name of point in the same unit before or after which
Before/After this point is to be configured
Absolute Cycle NORMCYCL No Absolute Cycle Number
Number
Overvalue Index OVERVAL No Overvalue Index
AM COUNTAM Point Template PV Configuration Tab
The PV Configuration tab of the COUNTAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the PV
Configuration tab of the COUNTAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
PV Configuration
Counter Input Src PointId CISRC No Counter Input Source PointId
Parameter Parameter
Counter Input Connection CIACTSTS No Counter Input Connection Status
Status
Counter Input Access Status CIACCSTS
PV Format PVFORMAT No PV Format
PV Extended High Range PVEXEUHI No PV Extended High Range
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
PV Extended Low Range PVEXEULO No PV Extended Low Range
PV High Range PVCONV No PV High Range
PV Low Range PVTV No PV Low Range
PV Clamping Option PVCLAMP No PV Clamping Option
PV Source Option PVSRCOPT No PV Source Option
PV Source PVSOURCE No PV Source
AM COUNTAM Point Template Alarm Priorities Tab
The Alarm Priorities tab of the COUNTAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Alarm
Priorities tab of the COUNTAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Alarm Priority
Bad Control BADCTLPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Bad Control Alarm
Alarm Priority Priority
Bad PV Alarm BADPVPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Bad PV Alarm Priority
Priority
Configuration CNFERRPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Configuration Error
Error Alm Priority Alarm Priority
Deviation High DEVHIPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Deviation High alarm
Alarm Priority
Deviation Low DEVLOPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Deviation Low alarm
Alarm Priority
Pre-Pre-Preset PPPRSTPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Pre-Pre-Preset alarm
Alarm Priority
Preset ALarm PRESETPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Preset ALarm Priority
Priority
Pre-Preset Alarm PRPRSTPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Pre-Preset Alarm
Priority Priority
PV High High PVHHPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV High High ALarm
ALarm Priority Priority
PV High Alarm PVHIPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV High Alarm
Priority Priority
PV Low Low PVLLPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV Low Low Alarm
Alarm Priority Priority
PV Low Alarm PVLOPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV Low Alarm
Priority Priority
PV Neg ROC PVROCNPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV Neg ROC ALarm
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
ALarm Priority Priority
PV Positive ROC PVROCPPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV Positive ROC
Alarm Priority Alarm Priority
Significant PV PVSGCHPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Significant PV
Change alarm Change alarm Priority
Priority
Selective Contcut
Dev High $DHSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of
Selective Cutout Deviation High alarm of a point even though the
point is cutout.
Dev Low $DLSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of
Selective Cutout Deviation Low alarm of a point even though the point
is cutout.
PV HH Selective $HHSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Cutout High High alarm of a point even though the point is
cutout.
PV High $HISELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Selective Cutout High alarm of a point even though the point is cutout.
PV LL Selective $LLSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Cutout Low Low alarm of a point even though the point is
cutout.
PV Low $LOSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Selective Cutout Low alarm of a point even though the point is cutout.
Source User
PV Neg Rate of $RNSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Change Negative Rate of Change alarm of a point even
Selection though the point is cutout.
PV Positive ROC $RPSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Selective Cutout Positive Rate of Change alarm of a point even
though the point is cutout.
Contact Cutout CCINPT No Contact-cutout input option
Input Option
ContCut Source CCSRC No Contact-cutout connection source
Point Param
ContCut Source CCACTSTS No Contact cutout-activity status
Connection
Status
AM COUNTAM Point Template Accumulation Tab
The Accumulation tab of the COUNTAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
Accumulation tab of the COUNTAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Accumulation
EU Conversion AVCONV No Factor to convert AVCOUNTS to engineering
Factor units
Decimal Place AVFORMAT No Accumulated Value display decimal point
Format location
Accumulated Target AVTV No Accumulation target-value for PV Totalizr
Value algorithm in Regulatory points
Operator Change CNTLLOCK No Operator Change Control
Control
Operator Target AVTVLOCK No Operator Target Value Change
Value Change
First Deviation Trip AVDEV1TP No First Deviation Trip Point
Point
Second Deviation AVDEV2TP No Second Deviation Trip Point
Trip Point
Last Good LASTAV No Last Good Accumulated Value
Accumulated Value
Accumulation Value AV No Accumulation Value
State of Totalizer STATE No State of Totalizer
Start/Stop STRTSTOP
Accumulation Control
Reset Accumulation RESETCMD No Reset Accumulation Control
Control
AM COUNTAM Point Template General IO Tab
The General IO tab of the COUNTAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under itgroups and parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter
data you can monitor on the General IO tab of the COUNTAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
I/O Configuration
Number of General Inputs NOGINPTS No Number of general-input connections
to this point
Number of General outputs NOGOPTS No Number of general-output
connections to this point
Input Configuration
General Input Src Point Id. GISRC No General Input Src Point Id. Param
Param
General Input Destination GIDSTN No General Input Destination Param
Param
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
General Input Connection GIACTSTS No General Input Connection Status
Status Param Param
General Input Access Status GIACCSTS No General Input Access Status Param
Param
Output Configuration
General Output Src Point Id. GOSRC No General Output Src Point Id. Param
Param
General Output Destination GODSTN No General Output Destination Param
Param
General Output Connection GOACTSTS No General Output Connection Status
Status Param Param
General Output Access Status GOACCSTS No General Output Access Status Param
Param
AM Regulatory Point Template Block
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
PV Common PV Common Tab
PV Algo Common PV Algo Common Tab
PV Algo Specific PV Algo Specific Tab
Ctrl Common Ctrl Common Tab
Ctrl Algo Common Ctrl Algo Common Tab
Ctrl Algo Specific Ctrl Algo Specific Tab
Input Connection Input Connection Config Tab
Config
Alarms Alarms Tab
Alarm Priorities Alarm Priorities Tab
Output Connection Output Connection Config Tab
Config
Switch Config Switch Config Tab
General IO General IO Tab
AM/CL AM/CL Tab
Package Config Package Config Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Tab name Reference
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Block Pins See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Configuration See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
Parameters User's Guide.
Monitoring Parameters See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
Block Preferences See section "Using the Parameters Configuration form" in Control Building
User's Guide.
REGAM Point Template Block Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the AM Point Template. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an AM Point Template. In addition,
it displays the important states of the AM Point Template and supports the key commands associated
with operation of the AM Point Template. Redundancy configuration can be entered only in the Project
Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the Main
tab of the configuration form for the selected AM Point Template.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least one
character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known
within the context of the enterprise model.
Description DESC No Description
Point Details
Process Variable PV No Process Variable
Engr Units EUDESC No The engineering-units descriptor (for example, °C,
Descriptor PSIA, gal/hr, kPa, ltr-min) for this data point, that
appears on displays, logs, and reports.
Point Custom $CDEDETAIL No Custom Detail Display Name — $CDETAIL defines
Detail the name of the custom schematic that is to be
displayed instead of the standard detail display for
this point.
Point Associated ASSOCDSP No Specifies a user-configured schematic that is
Display associated with this point.
Point Keyword KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears
on displays and in printed logs and reports.
Primary Module PRIMMOD Yes The tag name of the point that is the primary
Point Id module for this point.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Point Descriptor PTDESC No Textual description of the point for use in standard
Group and Detail displays.
Point Exec Status
Point Disclosure PTDISCL No Selects full disclosure of all applicable parameters
in the Parameter Entry Display (PED); or only a
subset of those parametersleaving those not
disclosed at their default values
Unit Id UNIT No This parameter defines the unit to which this data
point is assigned.
Point Execution PTEXECST No Point Execution State. Defines the execution state
Status of the associated point as Inactive or Active.
Red Tagging REDTAG No
Contact CONTCUT No Contact cutout flag—indicates the status of alarm
Cutout Flag cutout from the secondary cutout point
Current Operating COMMAND No Selects the current operating state of the Totalizr
State PV algorithm.
Algo Selection
PV Algorithm PVALGID No PV algorithm identifier selects the PV algorithm for
Identifier this data point.
Control Algorithm CTALGID No
Identifier
No. of Associated CLSLOTS No Number of CL slots allocated for this point.
CLs
US Display Options
Overvalue Index OVERVAL No Overvalue index. Defines the amount of deviation
in % that causes the PV to reach the Overview Limit
on the Detail display.
Suppress display SUPPIO No Permits or suppresses display of the PV input and
PV Input/OP output (OP) for this point on its Overview and Group
displays.
Display Schedule
Point Assigned to $IPPASN Yes defines that a point is assigned to the IPP.
IPP
Point Execution PERIOD No The interval on which this point is scheduled for
Period processing.
Before/After/Cycle BEFAFT No BEFAFT is the before/after scheduling option that
Option defines the processing time for this data point.
Tagname of BEFAFTID No Name of point in the same unit before or after
Before/After which this point is to be configured.
Absolute Cycle NORMCYCL No Point cycle on which the point normally is
Number processed.
Rolling Avg Buffer $ROLLBUF No Rolling Average Buffer parameter defines the size
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
of the rolling average buffer.
PV Coefficients
Rolling Average $ROLLAVG No Rolling Average parameter is the size of the rolling
average PV sample buffer.
Rolling Average $ROLLBAD No
Bad
Rolling Avrg $ROLLMLT No Rolling Average Multiple parameter specifies the
Multiple number of times the AM regulatory point is
Parameter processed before a PV is saved in the rolling
average sample buffer
Rolling Average $ROLLOK No Rolling Average OK parameter shows the number
OK of good PV values in the rolling average buffer.
Rolling Avrg $ROLLPV No Rolling Average Process Variable parameter is the
Process Variable sum of good samples divided by the number of
good samples collected.
REGAM Point Template Block PV Common Tab
The PV Common tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the PV
Common tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
PV Common Config
PV Format PVFORMAT No PV format controls the number of decimal places
displayed for the PV on the Operator Station
PV PVEUHI No PV engineering unit high range
Extended
High Range
PV PVEULO No PV engineering unit low range
Extended
Low Range
PV PVCLAMP No This parameter defines whether the PV value is clamped
Clamping when it is outside the configured range established by
Option PVEULO and PVEUHI.
PV Source PVSRCOPT No Identifies the PV source selection options available to this
Option function block.
PV Source PVSOURCE No Identifies the source of the PV input.
PV Filter PVFLTOPT No PV filter option
Option
Filter Time TF No Specifies the filtering time lag to be used after the Process
in min Variable (PV) range has been checked.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Set Point- PVTV No defines the target (setpoint) value in engineering units for
PV Target analog input data points and for the input portion of
Value analog composite data points.
Process PV No Process Variable Value
Variable
Value
PV Monitor
Last Good LASTPV No Last good PV value before becoming bad or changing the
PV PV
PV Value in PVP No This parameter provides the PV as a percentage of range.
%
Calculated PVCALC No Displays the value of the PV after the PV algorithm has
PV calculated it.
PVAUTO PVAUTO No State of Actual Inputs
REGAM Point Template Block PV Algo Common Tab
The PV Algo Common tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the PV
Algo Common tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
PV Algo Common
PV Equation PVEQN No Defines the equation (EqA, EqB, ...) to be used with a
given function block.
Overall C No Overall scale factor in PV algorithms
Scaling
Constant
Overall Bias D No Overall bias
Constant
Number of N No Number of inputs
Inputs
Cutoff Limit CUTOFFLM No Cutoff limit for the Totalizer and VDT with LeadLag
(VdtLdLag) algorithms
Selected SELINP No The selected input for a HiLoAvg or a Midof3 PV
Input algorithm
Scaling Constants
Scaling C1-C8 No Scale factors for PV algorithms
Constants
Bias Constants
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Bias D1-D7 No D1 through D7 are the bias constants for inputs P1
Constants through P7 as used in the PV Multiply Divide algorithm
Input Parameters
Input P2-P8 No Input number
Parameters
REGAM Point Template Block PV Algo Specific Tab
The PV Algo Specific tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the PV
Algo Specific tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
PV Calc
Calc Expression CALCEXP No Allows the user to set up an equation that can be up
to 68 characters in length, which is to be solved by
the CALCULTR algorithm.
HiLo
Min Number of NMIN No Minimum number of good inputs for HiLoAvg PV
Bad Inputs algorithm
Force Permit FRCPERM No Forced Select Permissive
Input to be FSELIN No For the High Selector, Low Selector, Average PV
Forced algorithm (HiLoAvg), defines the input to be selected
by FORCE
Force Selection FORCE No Force Selection
LeadLag
LAG 1 Time TLG1 No LAG 1 Time Constant
Constant
LAG 2 Time TLG2 No LAG 2 Time Constant
Constant
Fixed Dead TD No Fixed Dead Time in Min
Time in Min
Lead Time TLD Lead Time Constantin MIN
Constantin MIN
Totalizer
Input Time Base TIMEBASE No Time Base
Reset Value RESETVAL No Accumulator Reset Value - Value that the Totalizer
function block uses to reset the accumulator.
Accumulated AVTV No Accumulation target-value for PV Totalizr algorithm
Target Value in Regulatory points
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
First Deviation AVDEV1TP No First deviation-alarm trip point for the accumulation
Trip Point value
Second AVDEV2TP No For AM Counter points second deviation-alarm trip
Deviation Trip point for the accumulation value
Point
Accumulation AVTVFL No Accumulation target-value alarm flag
target value
alarm flag
First Deviation AVDEV1FL No Applies to PV Totalizr algorithm for Regulatory points
Alarm Flag
Second AVDEV2FL No Applies to PV Totalizr algorithm for Regulatory points
Deviation Alarm
Flag
Flow comp
Compensation COMPTERM No This term is calculated differently for each of five flow
Term compensation equations, A through E.
Compensation COMPHILM No Defines the upper limit of the Compensation Term
High Limit (COMPTERM).
Compensation COMPLOLM No Defines the low limit of the Compensation Term
Low Limit (COMPTERM).
Genlin
Total Number SEGTOT No Total number of segments configured for the GenLin
Segments PV algorithm
Input IN0-IN12 No Input coordinate-value parameters for the General
Coordinates Linearization PV algorithm
REGAM Point Template Block Ctrl Common Tab
The Ctrl Common tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Ctrl
Common tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Reg Common 1
Normal Mode NMODE No Normal mode for this data point
Normal Mode Attr NMODATTR No Normal mode attribute for this data point
Mode Permissive MODEPERM No Mode Permissive - Indicates if the operator can
change the mode of a function block.
ext. Mode Switch EXTSWOPT No External Mode Switching Option
Opt
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Reg Common 2
Current Mode MODE No Current Mode
Calculated Value CV No Calculated Value
OP in EU OPEU No Output Value (in Engineering Units)
Output OP No Output Value (in Percent)
External Mode ESWENBST No External Mode Switching status
Switching status
Man mode ESWMAN No Man mode external switching flag
external switching
flag
Cas mode ESWCAS No Cas mode external switching flag
external switching
flag
Auto mode ESWAUTO No Auto mode external switching flag
external switching
flag
MODSEL
Mode Selection MODES No Mode Selection List
List
Mode Selection $MODESEL No Mode Selection
Set Point
SP Format SPFORMAT No Setpoint decimal place format
SP High Range SPEUHI No Setpoint Engineering Unit high range
corresponding to 100%
SP Low Range SPEULO No Set Point (SP) Low Range (in Engineering Units) -
This value corresponds to 0% of full-scale value.
SP High Limit SPHILM No SP High Limit
SP Low Limit SPLOLM No SP Low Limit
SP Tolerance $SPTOL No SP Tolerance
Set Point SP No Set Point
SP Option SPOPT No SP Option
Adv Dev Alarm ADVDEVTP No Adv Dev Alarm Trip Point
Trip Point
Setpoint target SPTV No Setpoint target value
value
SP Target value TVPROC No SP Target value Processor State
Processor State
Remaining Ramp RAMPTIME No Remaining Ramp Time
Time
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Ratio/Bias
Ratio/Bias Option RBOPT No Ratio/Bias Option
Ratio High Limit RTHILM No Ratio High Limit
Ratio Low Limit RTLOLM No Ratio Low Limit
Bias High Limit BSHILM No Bias High Limit
Bias Low Limit BSLOLM No Bias Low Limit
Ratio RATIO No Ratio value for Pid, PidFf, and PidErFb control
algorithms
Bias BIAS No Bias constant in the control setpoint processing
REGAM Point Template Block Ctrl Algo Common Tab
The Ctrl Algo Common tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Ctrl
Algo Common tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
PV Common Config
PV Format PVFORMAT No PV format controls the number of decimal places
displayed for the PV on the Operator Station
PV PVEUHI No PV engineering unit high range
Extended
High Range
PV PVEULO No PV engineering unit low range
Extended
Low Range
PV PVCLAMP No This parameter defines whether the PV value is clamped
Clamping when it is outside the configured range established by
Option PVEULO and PVEUHI.
PV Source PVSRCOPT No Identifies the PV source selection options available to this
Option function block.
PV Source PVSOURCE No Identifies the source of the PV input.
PV Filter PVFLTOPT No PV filter option
Option
Filter Time TF No Specifies the filtering time lag to be used after the Process
in min Variable (PV) range has been checked.
Set Point- PVTV No defines the target (setpoint) value in engineering units for
PV Target analog input data points and for the input portion of analog
Value composite data points.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Process PV No Process Variable Value
Variable
Value
PV Monitor
Last Good LASTPV No Last good PV value before becoming bad or changing the
PV PV
PV Value in PVP No This parameter provides the PV as a percentage of range.
%
Calculated PVCALC No Displays the value of the PV after the PV algorithm has
PV calculated it.
PVAUTO PVAUTO No State of Actual Inputs
REGAM Point Template Block Ctrl Algo Specific Tab
The Ctrl Algo Specific tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Ctrl
Algo Specific tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
MULDIV
X1 Input X1 No X-input Values for function blocks with Multiple Inputs
Parameter
X2 Input X2 No X-input Values for function blocks with Multiple Inputs
Parameter
X3 Input X3 No X-input Values for function blocks with Multiple Inputs
Parameter
X4 Input X4 X-input Values for function blocks with Multiple Inputs
Parameter
CL
Type of CV CVTYPE No Type of value in CV
Anti Reset ARWDI No Anti-reset-windup direction indicator.
Windup
Direction
INCRSUMR
Overrange ORBIAS No For IncrSum algorithm overrange (bias) value applied
Bias Value to feedback value in ORFBSEC from Override-Selector
secondary
ORSEL
Override OROPT No Override Option
Option
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Selected or BYPASS No Selected or Bypass Hi/Lo
Bypass Hi/Lo
RAMPSOAK
Hold Current HOLDCMD No Hold Current Ramp
Ramp
Cur seg for CURSEGID No Current segment for the Ramp and Soak (RampSoak)
Ramp and algorithm
Soak
Max Ramp MXRMPDEV No Maximum ramp-rate deviation for RampSoak algorithm
deviation
Max Soak MXSOKDEV No Maximum soak-value deviation for RampSoak
Deviation algorithm
Ramp Rate 2 RATE2 No Ramp Rate 2
Ramp Rate 3 RATE3 No Ramp Rate 3
Ramp Rate 4 RATE4 No Ramp Rate 4
Ramp Rate 5 RATE5 No Ramp Rate 5
Ramp Rate 6 RATE6 No Ramp Rate 6
Mark 1 Seg S1SEGID No Mark time 1 segment identity for RampSoak PV
Identity algorithm
Mark 1 Seg S1BGNTIM No Beginning time, in minutes, for mark-time flag 1 of
Beg Time RampSoak PV algorithm
Mark 1 Seg S1ENDTIM No Ending time, in minutes, for mark-time flag 1 of
End Time RampSoak PV algorithm
Mark 1 Seg S2SEGID No Mark time 2 segment identity for RampSoak PV
Identity algorithm
Mark 1 Seg S2BGNTIM No Beginning time, in minutes, for mark-time flag 2 of
Beg Time RampSoak PV algorithm
Mark 1 Seg S2ENDTIM No Ending time, in minutes, for mark-time flag 2s of
End Time RampSoak PV algorithm
SOAK Values
Soak Time 1 SOAKT1 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
(in min) segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Soak Time 2 SOAKT2 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
(in min) segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Soak Time 3 SOAKT3 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
(in min) segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Soak Time 4 SOAKT4 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
(in min) segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Soak Time 5 SOAKT5 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
(in min) segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Soak Time 6 SOAKT6 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
(in min) segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Next Soak NXTSOAKV No Next soak value
Value
Soak Value 1 SOAKV1 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Soak Value 2 SOAKV2 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Soak Value 3 SOAKV3 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Soak Value 4 SOAKV4 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Soak Value 5 SOAKV5 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Soak Value 6 SOAKV6 No For the RampSoak PV algorithmsoak value for
segment SOAK(n)in engineering units
Remaining REMSOAKT No Remaining soak time in minutes for the RampSoak
Soak Time control algorithm
REGAM Point Template Block Input Connection Config Tab
The Input Connection tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Input
Connection tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
No of PV Input Connections NOPINPTS No Number of PV input
connections
No of Control Input NOCINPTS No Number of control input
Connections connections
PV Input Connections
PV Input Source PointId. PISRC No PV Input Source PointId.
Parameter Parameter
PV Input Destination PIDSTN No PV Input Destination Parameter
Parameter
PV Input Connection Status PIACCSTS PV Input Connection Status
PV Input Access Status PIACTSTS No PV Input Access Status
CTRL Input Connections
Ctrl Input Source PointId. CISRC No Ctrl Input Source PointId.
Parameter Parameter
Ctrl Input Destination CIDSTN No Ctrl Input Destination
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Parameter Parameter
Ctrl Input Connection Status CIACCSTS No Ctrl Input Connection Status
Ctrl Input Access Status CIACTSTS Ctrl Input Access Status
REGAM Point Template Block Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Alarms tab of the
REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Alarm Configuration 1
PV Alarm PVALDB No PV Alarm Deadband
Deadband
PV Alarm PVALDBEU No PV Alarm Deadband in EU
Deadband in
EU
PV High PVHITP No PV high alarm trip point value
Alarm Trip
Point
PV Low PVLOTP No PV low alarm trip point value
Alarm Trip
Point
PV High High PVHHTP No PV high-high alarm trip point value
Alarm Trip
Point
PV LoLo PVLLTP No PV low-low alarm trip point value
Alarm Trip
Point
Significant PV PVSGCHTP No PV Significant Change Alarm Trip Point
Change
Alarm TF
PV Positive PVROCPTP No PV Positive Rate - of - Change Trip Point.
ROC TP
PV Neg ROC PVROCNTP No PV Negative Rate - of - Change Trip Point.
TP
Deviation DEVHITP No Deviation High Alarm TP
High Alarm
TP
Deviation DEVLOTP No Deviation Low Alarm TP
Low Alarm TP
Delay Time DLYTIME No DLYTIME specifies the period of time during which the
alarm reporting (in the case of on delay) and return to
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
normal reporting (in the case of off delay) is suppressed.
Advisory ADVSP No Advisory-deviation-alarm setpoint.
Deviation
Alarm SP
Advisory ASPPROC No Advisory-deviation-alarm setpoint.
deviation
alarm state
PV Alarm PVALDB No PV Alarm Deadband
Deadband
PV Alarm PVALDBEU No PV Alarm Deadband in EU
Deadband in
EU
Alarm Configuration 2
Auxiliary Unit $AUXUNIT No
Alarm Delay $ALDLOPT No Alarm Delay Option
Option
Delay for $DLBADAL No $DLBADAL is an alarm delay parameter for BADPV and
BADPV and BADCTL alarms.
BADCTL
Multiple $MPROD1 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#1 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD2 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#2 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD3 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#3 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Multiple $MPROD4 No Multiple Primmods are optional user-defined strings that,
PRIMMOD#4 when filled-in, replace the Primmod description field of
the alarm event record when the point is in alarm.
Alarm Enable ALENBST No Point alarm-enable status that affects the detecting and
State reporting of alarms
Re alarming $REALARM No
Interval
ContCut CCACTSTS No Contact cutout-activity status
Source
Connection
Status
REGAM Point Template Block Alarm Priorities Tab
The Alarm Priorities tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Alarm
Priorities tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Alarm Priority
Bad Control BADCTLPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Bad Control Alarm
Alarm Priority Priority
Advisory ADVDEVPR No Advisory Deviation Alarm Priority
Deviation Alarm
Priority
Bad PV Alarm BADPVPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Bad PV Alarm Priority
Priority
Configuration CNFERRPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Configuration Error
Error Alm Priority Alarm Priority
Deviation High DEVHIPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Deviation High alarm
Alarm Priority
Deviation Low DEVLOPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Deviation Low alarm
Alarm Priority
Pre-Pre-Preset PPPRSTPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Pre-Pre-Preset alarm
Alarm Priority
Preset ALarm PRESETPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Preset ALarm Priority
Priority
Pre-Preset Alarm PRPRSTPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Pre-Preset Alarm
Priority Priority
PV High High PVHHPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV High High ALarm
ALarm Priority Priority
PV High Alarm PVHIPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV High Alarm
Priority Priority
PV Low Low PVLLPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV Low Low Alarm
Alarm Priority Priority
PV Low Alarm PVLOPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV Low Alarm
Priority Priority
PV Neg ROC PVROCNPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV Neg ROC ALarm
ALarm Priority Priority
PV Positive ROC PVROCPPR No Alarm priority parameter for the PV Positive ROC
Alarm Priority Alarm Priority
Significant PV PVSGCHPR No Alarm priority parameter for the Significant PV
Change alarm Change alarm Priority
Priority
BckGrnd CL Err BCLEALPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Background Error
AIM Priority alarm
BckGrnd CL BCLFALPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Background Fail
Fatal AIM Priority alarm
CL Err Alm CLEALMPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Foreground Error
priority alarm
CL Fatal Err Alm CLFALMPR No Alarm priority parameter for the CL Foreground Fail
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
priority alarm
Selective Contcut
Dev High $DHSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of
Selective Cutout Deviation High alarm of a point even though the
point is cutout.
Dev Low $DLSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of
Selective Cutout Deviation Low alarm of a point even though the point
is cutout.
PV HH Selective $HHSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Cutout High High alarm of a point even though the point is
cutout.
PV High $HISELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Selective Cutout High alarm of a point even though the point is cutout.
PV LL Selective $LLSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Cutout Low Low alarm of a point even though the point is
cutout.
PV Low $LOSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Selective Cutout Low alarm of a point even though the point is cutout.
Source User
PV Neg Rate of $RNSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Change Negative Rate of Change alarm of a point even
Selection though the point is cutout.
PV Positive ROC $RPSELCT No This parameter allows or cuts out annunciation of PV
Selective Cutout Positive Rate of Change alarm of a point even
though the point is cutout.
Contact Cutout CCINPT No Contact-cutout input option
Input Option
ContCut Source CCSRC No Contact-cutout connection source
Point Param
ContCut Source CCACTSTS No Contact cutout-activity status
Connection
Status
REGAM Point Template Block Output Connection Config Tab
The Output Connection Config tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups
and parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
Output Connection Config tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Control Output NOCOPTS No Control Output Connections
Connections
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
CTRL Output Connections
Control Output Destination CODSTN No CODSTN(N) are the regulatory control
PointId. Param algorithm output destinations
Control Output Connection COACTSTS No
Status
Control Output Access COACCSTS No COACTSTS(N) is the initial status for this
Status output connection
CTRL Output Config
CV Output High range CVEUHI No Calculated Variable (CV) High Range
CV Output Low range CVEULO No Calculated Variable (CV) Low Range
Output high limit in % OPHILM No Output (OP) High Limit (in percentage)
Output low limit in % OPLOLM No Output (OP) Low Limit
OP Min CHange Limit in % OPMCHLM No Output minimum change limit in percent.
OP rate of Change Limit OPROCLM No Output rate-of-change limit in percent
OP Tolerance $OPTOL No Output Tolerance Parameter Definition.
REGAM Point Template Block Switch Config Tab
The Switch Config tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Switch
Config tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Switch Configuration
No of Switches NUMSWITCH No No of Switches
Switch 1 Configuration
No of States for S1NSTATE No Number of valid states for Switch 1
Switch 1
Switch 1 State S1STATES No Switch 1 State Names
Names
Switch 1 Access S1ACCLVL No Access level choice for who can store to the
level S1REQSTS parameter.
Switch 1 Initial S1CURSTS No Initial state of Switch 1 (DEB), or current state of
level Switch 1
Switch 1 S1REQSTS No Requested state for Switch 1
Requested level
Switch 2 Configuration
No of States for S2NSTATE No Number of valid states for Switch 2
Switch 2
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Switch 2 State S2STATES No Switch 2 State Names
Names
Switch 2 Access S2ACCLVL No Access level choice for who can store to the
level S2REQSTS parameter.
Switch 2 Initial S2CURSTS No Initial state of Switch 2 (DEB), or current state of
level Switch 2
Switch 2 S2REQSTS No Requested state for Switch 2
Requested level
REGAM Point Template Block General IO Tab
The General IO tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
General IO tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
I/O Configuration
Number of General Inputs NOGINPTS No Number of general-input connections
to this point
Number of General outputs NOGOPTS No Number of general-output
connections to this point
Input Configuration
General Input Src Point Id. GISRC No General Input Src Point Id. Param
Param
General Input Destination GIDSTN No General Input Destination Param
Param
General Input Connection GIACTSTS No General Input Connection Status
Status Param Param
General Input Access Status GIACCSTS No General Input Access Status Param
Param
Output Configuration
General Output Src Point Id. GOSRC No General Output Src Point Id. Param
Param
General Output Destination GODSTN No General Output Destination Param
Param
General Output Connection GOACTSTS No General Output Connection Status
Status Param Param
General Output Access Status GOACCSTS No General Output Access Status Param
Param
REGAM Point Template Block AM/CL Tab
The AM/CL tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and parameters
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the AM/CL tab of the
REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Linked AM/CL Blocks
Block BLKNAME No Linked CL block Name
Name
Activity $CLCMPST No Composite CL block activity status displayed on the CL
page of the Detail Display for this point.
Insertion INSPOINT No CL block insertion point
Point
Insertion INSORDER No CL block insertion order
Order
Block CLBLKERR No CL block error status
Error
REGAM Point Template Block Package Config Tab
The Package Config tab of the REGAM Point Template displays information about the groups and
parameters under it. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
Package Config tab of the REGAM Point Template for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
No of Custom Data PKGNAME No Package name - the name of a CL source file that
Packages is to be bound to this point after it is compiled
Package Configuration
Custom Data NOPKG Yes Number of CDS packages to be attached to this
Packages Src File point
Names
4.22.8 CEEELCN Node Configuration Form Reference
Tab name Reference
Main Main Tab
Server History Server History Tab
Server Displays Server Displays Tab
Control Confirmation Control Confirmation Tab
QVCS QVCS Tab
Identification Identification Tab
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
CEEELCN Node Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the CEEELCN Controller. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up an CEEELCN Controller. In
addition, it displays the important states of the CEEELCN Controller and supports the key commands
associated with operation of the CEEELCN Controller. Redundancy configuration can be entered only
in the Project Tree. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or
configure on the Main tab of the configuration form for the selected AM block.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured unique name.
Consisting of up to 16 characters and at least
one character must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an entity is known
within the context of the enterprise model.
I/O Schedule IOSCHEDOPT No I/O Schedule Option
Option
Keyword KEYWORD No Describes the keyword for this point that appears
Description on displays and in printed logs and reports
Execution Period PERIOD No Execution Period
Execution Phase PHASE No Execution Phase
Execution Order ORDERINCEE No Order of execution of a container block relative to
in CEE other container blocks within the same cycle of
the CEE.
Execution Order ORDERINCM No Execution order of a component block relative to
in CM other component blocks within a Control Module
(CM) function block.
Estimated ESTWEIGHT No Holds estimate of block execution time that CEE
Weight uses for cycle load distribution.
Alarming CONTCUTOUT No Alarming Contact CutOut
Contact CutOut
Alarming JOURNALONLY No Alarming JOURNAL ONLY
JOURNAL ONLY
4.23 EtherNet/IP blocks
This topic provides reference information about EtherNet/IP I/O devices, PowerFlex drives, E3, and E3
plus relays.
4.23.1 Input and output type EtherNet/IP I/O module blocks
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
1738–AENT (ArmorPoint adapter)
Description Identifies the physical adapter that Armor Point I/O modules communicate through.
Function Defines the number of IOMs in this chassis behind the adapter, communication path for
all IOMs attached to this adapter, and execution state of the adapter. Provides link to
IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM/C300. Executes at the rate of
CEE Base Execution Period.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters l ALMACTIVE l IOCCONNEXTSTS
l ALMDESC l IOCONNSTATUS
l ALMENBSTATE l IPADDRESS
l ALMPRI l OPENWIRE
l ALMSEV l OTRPI
l ALMSTR l OWDENBL
l DESC l PVFL
l EIOMTYPE l SHORTCIRCUIT
l EXECSTATE l SLOT
l FILTEROFF l TORPI
l FILTERON
Associate 1738-IB4DM12, 1738-IB8M12, 1738-IE2CM12, 1738-IE4CM12, 1738-IR2M12, 1738-
Blocks IT2IM12, 1738-OA2M12AC3, 1738-OB2EPM12, 1738-OB8EM12, 1738-OE2CM12,
1738-OE4CM12
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-IB4DM12 ( ArmorPoint 24V DC 4-channel Digital Input Module with
Diagnostics)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent back by the IO module
hardware is read and displayed.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters l ALMACTIVE l FILTEROFF
l ALMDESC l FILTERON
l ALMENBSTATE l IOCONNSTATUS
l ALMPRI l IPADDRESS
l ALMSEV l OPENWIRE
l ALMSTR l OTRPI
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l AUTOBAUDDISABLE l OWDENBL
l BADPVFL l PVFL
l DESC l SHORTCIRCUIT
l DRIVERNAME l SLOT
l EIOMTYPE l TORPI
l EXECSTATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-IB8M12 ( ArmorPoint 24V DC 8-channel Digital Input Module)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters l ALMENBSTATE l IOCCONNEXTSTS
l DESC l IOCONNSTATUS
l DRIVERNAME l IPADDRESS
l EIOMTYPE l OTRPI
l EXECSTATE l PVFL
l FILTEROFF l SLOT
l FILTERON l TORPI
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-IE2CM12 (Armor Point 2-Channel 24V DC Analog Input Module)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent back by the IO module
hardware is read and displayed. The Input raw value obtained from IO module
hardware is scaled between the PVRAW ranges and sent to the IOC.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters l ALMACTIVE l NOTCHFILTER
l ALMDESC l OTRPI
l ALMENBSTATE l OVERRANGE
l ALMPRI l PV
l ALMSEV l PVRAW
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l ALMSTR l PVRAWHI
l DESC l PVRAWLO
l DIGFILTER l PVSTS
l DRIVERNAME l Range
l EIOMTYPE l SLOT
l EXECSTATE l TORPI
l IOCCONNEXTSTS l UNDERRANGE
l IOCONNSTATUS l UPDATERATE
l IPADDRESS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-IE4CM12 (ArmorPoint 4-Channel 24V DC Analog Input Module)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent back by the IO hardware
module is read and displayed. The Input raw value obtained from IO module hardware
is scaled between the PVRAW ranges and sent to the IOC.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters l ALMACTIVE l NOTCHFILTER
l ALMDESC l OTRPI
l ALMENBSTATE l OVERRANGE
l ALMPRI l PV
l ALMSEV l PVRAW
l ALMSTR l PVRAWHI
l DESC l PVRAWLO
l DIGFILTER l PVSTS
l DRIVERNAME l Range
l EIOMTYPE l SLOT
l EXECSTATE l TORPI
l IOCCONNEXTSTS l UNDERRANGE
l IOCONNSTATUS l UPDATERATE
l IPADDRESS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-IR2M12 (Armor Point, 2-Channel RTD Analog Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM/C300 to provide links to the associated IOC.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, execution state and communications path
for data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM/C300.
Executes at the rate of CEE Base Execution Period.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters l ALMENBSTATE l OTRPI
l DESC l OVERRANGE[0 - 1]
l DIGFILTER[0 - 1] l PVRAW[0 - 1]
l DRIVERNAME l PV[0 - 1]
l EIOMTYPE l PVSTS[0 - 1]
l EXECSTATE l PVLOSIGNAL[0 - 1]
l IOCCONNEXTSTS l PVHISIGNAL[0 - 1]
l IOCONNSTATUS l SENSORTYPE[0 - 1]
l IPADDRESS l SLOT
l NOTCHFILTER l TEMPUNITS[0 - 1]
l TORPI
l UNDERRANGE[0 - 1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-IT2IM12 (Armor Point, 2-Channel Thermocouple Analog Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM/C300 to provide links to the associated IOC.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, execution state and communications path
for data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM/C300.
Executes at the rate of CEE Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent
back by the IO module hardware is read and displayed.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters l ALMENBSTATE l OTRPI
l DESC l OVERRANGE[0 - 1]
l CJNOTCHFLT l PVRAW[0 - 1]
l CJMODE l PV[0 - 1]
l CJENABLE[0 - 1] l PVSTS[0 - 1]
l CJOFFSET[0 - 1] l PVLOSIGNAL[0 - 1]
l CJTEMP l PVHISIGNAL[0 - 1]
l CJUNDERRANGE l SLOT
l CJOVERRANGE l SENSORTYPE[0 - 1]
l DIGFILTER[0 - 1] l TEMPUNITS[0 - 1]
l DRIVERNAME l TORPI
l EIOMTYPE l UNDERRANGE[0 - 1]
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l EXECSTATE
l IOCCONNEXTSTS
l IOCONNSTATUS
l IPADDRESS
l NOTCHFILTER[0 - 1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-OA2M12AC3 (Armor Point - 2 channel - 120/230V ac Output Module
w/ 2 AC 3 pin)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The output obtained from the channel is sent to the IOM.
Performs fault handling based on the configuration made.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters DESC EIOMTYPE IPADDRESS SLOT DRIVERNAME FAULTVALUE
TORPI OTRPI EXECSTATE ALMENBSTATE FAULTMODE FAULTSTATE OPFL
IOCONNSTATUS IOCONNEXTSTS OPINITVAL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-OB2EPM12 (Armor Point - 2 channel - 24V dc Digital Output Module)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent back by the IO module is
read and displayed. The final output obtained from the channel is sent to the IOM.
Performs fault handling based on the configuration made.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters DESC EIOMTYPE IPADDRESS SLOT DRIVERNAME FAULTVALUE
TORPI OTRPI EXECSTATE FAULTMODE FAULTSTATE ENBNOLOAD
ALMENBSTATE IOCONNSTATUS RESETMODE ENBLATALM OPFL
IOCONNEXTSTS OPINITVAL CHNSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-OB8EM12 (Armor Point - 8 channel, 24V dc Digital Output Module)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent back by the IO module is
read and displayed. The final output obtained from the channel is sent to the IOM.
Performs fault handling based on the configuration made.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters DESC EIOMTYPE IPADDRESS SLOT DRIVERNAME FAULTVALUE
TORPI OTRPI EXECSTATE FAULTMODE FAULTSTATE ENBNOLOAD
ALMENBSTATE IOCONNSTATUS RESETMODE ENBLATALM OPFL
IOCONNEXTSTS OPINITVAL CHNSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-OE2CM12 (Armor Point 2-Channel 24V dc Analog Output Module)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent back by the IO module is
read and displayed. The output obtained from channel is scaled between the OPFINAL
ranges and sent to the IOM. Performs Fault handling, based on the configuration made.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters DESC EIOMTYPE IPADDRESS SLOT DRIVERNAME Range OPFINALLORANGE
TORPI OTRPI EXECSTATE OPFINALHIRANGE FAULTVALUE
ALMENBSTATE IOCONNSTATUS FAULTACT OP INITVAL OPFINAL
IOCONNEXTSTS CHNFLTSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1738-OE4CM12 (Armor Point 4-Channel 24V dc Analog Output Module)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent back by the IO module is
read and displayed. The output obtained from channel is scaled between the OPFINAL
ranges and sent to the IOM. Performs Fault handling, based on the configuration made.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters DESC EIOMTYPE IPADDRESS SLOT DRIVERNAME Range OPFINALLORANGE
TORPI OTRPI EXECSTATE OPFINALHIRANGE FAULTVALUE
ALMENBSTATE IOCONNSTATUS FAULTACT OP INITVAL OPFINAL
IOCONNEXTSTS CHNFLTSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
1732E-IB16M12DR (ArmorBlock 24V DC 16-channel Digital Input Dual-Port
EtherNet Module with Diagnostics)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent back by the IO module
hardware is read and displayed.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters l ALMACTIVE l IOCCONNEXTSTS
l ALMDESC l IOCONNSTATUS
l ALMENBSTATE l IPADDRESS
l ALMPRI l OPENWIRE
l ALMSEV l OTRPI
l ALMSTR l OWDENBL
l DESC l PVFL
l EIOMTYPE l SHORTCIRCUIT
l EXECSTATE l SLOT
l FILTEROFF l TORPI
l FILTERON
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1732E-IF4M12R (ArmorBlock 4-Channel 24V DC Analog Input Dual-Port
EtherNet/IP Module)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent back by the IO module
hardware is read and displayed. The Input raw value obtained from IO module
hardware is scaled between the PVRAW ranges and sent to the IOC.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters l ALMACTIVE l IPADDRESS
l ALMDESC l OTRPI
l ALMENBSTATE l OVERRANGE
l ALMPRI l PV
l ALMSEV l PVRAW
l ALMSTR l PVRAWHI
l DESC l PVRAWLO
l DIGFILTER l PVSTS
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l EIOMTYPE l Range
l EXECSTATE l SLOT
l IOCCONNEXTSTS l TORPI
l IOCONNSTATUS l UNDERRANGE
l UPDATERATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1732E-IR4IM12R (Armor Block, 4 - Channel RTD Analog Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM/C300 to provide links to the associated IOC.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, execution state and communications path
for data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM/C300.
Executes at the rate of CEE Base Execution Period.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters l ALMENBSTATE l OTRPI
l DESC l OVERRANGE[0 - 3]
l DIGFILTER[0 - 3] l PVRAW[0 - 3]
l EIOMTYPE l PV[0 - 3]
l EXECSTATE l PVSTS[0 - 3]
l IOCCONNEXTSTS l PVLOSIGNAL[0 - 3]
l IOCONNSTATUS l PVHISIGNAL[0 - 3]
l IPADDRESS l SENSORTYPE[0 - 3]
l NOTCHFILTER l TEMPUNITS[0 - 3]
l TORPI
l UNDERRANGE[0 - 3]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1732E-IT4IM12R (Armor Block, 4 – Channel Thermocouple Analog Input)
Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM/C300 to provide links to the associated IOC.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, execution state and communications path
for data. Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM//C300.
Executes at the rate of CEE Base Execution Period.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters OTRPI OVERRANGE[0 - 3] PVSTS[0 - 3] l OTRPI
SENSORTYPE[0 - 3] TEMPUNITS[0 - 3]
TORPI l OVERRANGE[0 - 3]
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l ALMENBSTATE l PVLOSIGNAL[0 - 3]
l CJENABLE[0 - 3] l PVHISIGNAL[0 - 3]
l CJOFFSET[0 - 3] l PVSCALEFACTOR[0 - 3]
l CJMODE l PVRAW[0 - 3]
l CJSTATUS[0 – 3] l PV[0 - 3]
l CJTEMP[0 - 3] l SENSORTYPE[0 - 3]
l DESC l TEMPUNITS[0 - 3]
l DIGFILTER[0 - 3] l TORPI
l EIOMTYPE l UNDERRANGE[0 - 1]
l EXECSTATE
l IOCCONNEXTSTS
l IOCONNSTATUS
l IPADDRESS
l NOTCHFILTER[0 - 3]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
1732E-OF4M12R (Armor Block- 4 channel – 24V DC Analog Output Module)
Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state. Executes at the rate
of Base Execution Period. The channel status information sent back by the IO module is
read and displayed. The final output obtained from the channel is sent to the IOM.
Performs fault handling
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters l DESC l IOCONNEXTSTS
l EIOMTYPE l Range
l IPADDRESS l OPFINALLORANGE
l SLOT l FAULTVALUE
l TORPI l FAULTACT
l OTRPI l OP
l EXECSTATE l INITVAL
l ALMENBSTATE l OPFINAL
l IOCONNSTATUS l CHNFLTSTS
l
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.23.2 EtherNet/IP drive and relay module blocks
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
PF755 (PowerFlex 755 AC Drive)
Description Represents the physical drive for C300.
Function Defines the type of drive module and the execution state Executes at the rate of the
base execution period. The Input status information and reference sent back by the
module hardware is read and displayed. The output obtained from the output channel is
scaled between the EULO/EUHI ranges and sent to the drive. Additionally, commands
obtained from the output channel or the drive module is sent to the drive.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel. Real-time data transmission
from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the configured IOC. Real-time data transmission to the
physical device.
Parameters l ALMACTIVE l IOCCONNEXTSTS
l ALMDESC l IOCONNSTATUS
l ALMENBSTATE l IPADDRESS
l ALMPRI l OPENWIRE
l ALMSEV l OTRPI
l ALMSTR l OWDENBL
l DESC l PVFL
l EIOMTYPE l SHORTCIRCUIT
l EXECSTATE l SLOT
l FILTEROFF l TORPI
l FILTERON
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
193DNEN_E3 (E3 Overload Relay)
Description Represents the physical E3 Relay connected by using the 193-DNENCATR adaptor for
C300.
Function Defines the type of E3 Relay module and execution state. Executes at the rate of Base
Execution Period. The Input status information sent back by the E3 Relay hardware
through the 193-DNENCATR adaptor is read and displayed. The output / commands
obtained from the Output channel or the 193DNEN_E3 Module is sent to E3 Relay
Hardware through the 193-DNENCATR adaptor. Supports 2 digital input as status and
1 digital output as command.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated Channel. Real-time data transmission
from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC. Real-time data transmission to the
physical device.
Parameters l ALMENBSTATE l IOCONNSTATUS
l DESC l IPADDRESS
l DL_RPI l OTRPI
l EUDESC l OWDENBL
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l EIOMTYPE l OPENWIRE
l EXECSTATE l TORPI
l IOCCONNEXTSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
193DNEN_E3P (E3 Plus Overload Relay)
Description Represents the physical E3 Relay connected by using the 193-DNENCATR adaptor for
C300.
Function Defines the type of E3 Plus Relay module and execution state. Executes at the rate of
Base Execution Period. The Input status information sent back by the E3 Plus Relay
hardware through the 193-DNENCATR adaptor is read and displayed. The output /
commands obtained from the Output channel or the 193DNEN_E3 plus module is sent
to E3 Plus Relay Hardware through the 193-DNENCATR adaptor. Supports 4 digital
input as status and 2 digital output as command.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated Channel. Real-time data transmission
from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC. Real-time data transmission to the
physical device.
Parameters l ALMENBSTATE l IOCONNSTATUS
l DESC l IPADDRESS
l DL_RPI l OTRPI
l EUDESC l OWDENBL
l EIOMTYPE l OPENWIRE
l EXECSTATE l TORPI
l IOCCONNEXTSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.24 ControlLogix and UDT blocks
4.24.1 User Defined Tag block
Description Provides a data interface to read from/write to a UDT defined in the Control Logix PLC.
This block will be loaded and run in a control module and will have the ability to read
from or write to a UDT defined in the Control Logix PLC.
Function l Reads data from the UDT defined in the PLC that this block is mapped to and
makes it available to the connected block or reads data from the connected block
(or a user entered value) and writes data to the mapped UDT in the PLC.
l Supports the following data types:
l INT32
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l FLOAT32
l INT16
l INT8
l BOOL
l STRING (Only Read, writes of string are not supported.)
l Supports any combination (arrayed or non-arrayed) of the above mentioned data
types, provided they are mapped exactly to an existing UDT in the PLC.
l Provides information on status of the block execution through the
TAGEXECSTATUS parameter.
l This is not an alarming block and thus will not generate alarms by itself.
Inputs This Block needs to be configured with the information of the gateway block that it will
be associated with, through which it will obtain the information of the address of the PLC
to establish communication with. Information about the User defined tag in the PLC that
this block represents should also be provided. Communication will be based on the Tag
Name. Therefore, it is required to configure the Tag name to match the tag name
provided in the PLC. The Configuration information cannot be modified at run-time. If
changes must be made to the configuration of a UDT Block, these changes must be
made in the Project Database and the block must be reloaded to the controller for the
changes to take effect.
Outputs Read/write of data
Parameters l BLOCKTYPEID l TORPI
l CLX_GATEWAY l INBADOPT
l CLX_TAG l TAGEXECSTATUS
l DESC l TAGRDGENSTATUS
l EUDESC l TAGRDEXTSTATUS
l READSTATUS l
Associated CONTROLLOGIXMODULE block
Blocks
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.24.2 ControlLogix gateway block
Description The Gateway block is a representation of the Control Logix PLC, with which
communication from C300 must be established.
Function This block does not get loaded to the controller. However the address information is
passed on to the associated UDT blocks during load.
Inputs This Block needs to be configured with the address information of the PLC, the
IPADDRESS of the ENET module and Slot number of the PLC in the chassis, which
would form a unique path to the PLC that is intended to be communicated with.
Outputs —
Parameters l IPADDRESS
l SLOT
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
l MATRIKON_OPC_HOST
l MATRIKON_OPC_PROGID
l MATRIKON_OPC_ABPLUGIN
l MATRIKON_OPC_PLC
Associated UDT block
Blocks
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
4.25 Experion LCN (ELCN) Blocks
Related topics:
4.25.1 ELCN Bridge (ELCN_BRG) block
Description The ELCN Bridge Control Builder block represents the ELCN
Bridge hardware and is used for defining the ELCN Bridge in
Control Builder. The ELCN Bridge functions as a translator
between the legacy LCN and the Experion FTE network during the
migration of legacy LCN nodes to the Experion LCN.
The ELCN Bridge block is designed to be stand-alone and it
belongs to the independent block category.
The ELCN Bridge block has multiple tabs which represent the
parameters that are mostly for viewing the current status and
statistics values of the ELCN Bridge operation.
Function l In the Control Builder Project tree view, configuration parameters can be
configured. The state and statistical parameters are view or read only.
l The Main tab shows the unique addressing information. The LCN node
numbers for the redundant ELCN Bridge are hardcoded and cannot be
changed.
l The ELCN Bridge must be redundant. The value of the “Module is Redundant”
parameter should be selected.
l When loading the block, load the primary and the secondary.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE LCNRX2DECODEERR
ASSOCASSET LCNRX2FCSERR
BADIPCSUM LCNRX2FRAMEERR
BADUDPCSUM LCNRX2IOCPCHERR
BECMPRICMD LCNRX2LCNIOVERERR
BOOTIMAGEVER LCNRX2OVERSZERR
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
BRDGBCASTARR LCNRX2RATE
BRDGLCLTYARR LCNRX2RATEMAX
BRDGLOGARR LCNTOELCNRATE
BRDGPHYARR LCNTOELCNRATEMAX
BRDGRXPKTSARR LCNTXRATE
BRDNINCONGRUENTVIEWS LCNTXRATEMAX
CPUFREEAVG MAXFTENODES
CPUFREECRITLM MAXNODEID
CPUFREELOWLM MEDIADEADA
CPUFREEMIN MEDIADEADB
DEVICEIDX MEMFREEAVG
DSBLSYNCCMD MEMFREECRITLM
ELCNBCOMMAND MEMFREELOWLM
ELCNBNUM MEMFREEMIN
ELCNBSTATE MINHWREVSF
ELCNCOMMINV MODISREDUN
ELCNLNGTHINV
MODTYPE
ELCNMULTIPADDRSTR
MSGBUFPCT
ELCNPACKETINV
ELCNRXRATE MSGBUFPEAKPCT
ELCNRXRATEMAX
NODELCNELCN
ELCNSEQINV
NUMFTENODES
ELCNSRCINV
ELCNSTATSRST NVSFREEAVG
ENBLESYNCCMD NVSFREECRITLM
ELCNTOLCNRATE NVSFREELOWLM
ELCNTOLCNRATEMAX NVSFREEMIN
ELCNTXRATE
ELCNTXRATEMAX PLVERSION
ENBLESYNCCMD PWRSUPPLYSF
EPKSMIGRATIONMODE
RAMSWEEPERR
FACTDATAERR
RAMSCRUBBERRS
FANFAULTSF
RCVCNTA
FPGAFAIL
RCVCNTB
FTEMARKAVGDEPTH
RCVERRA
FTEMARTADDRCOUNT
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT RCVERRB
FTEMARTMAXDEPTH RDNAUTOSYNC
FTENETWORKERR RDNCMPT
FTEPARTNERNOTVISIBLE RDNCTLABILITY
HWREVMAJ RDNDEVICEIDX
HWREVMIN RDNHISTREASON
ICONSTATE RDNHISTSTATE
ICMPINCSUMERRORS RDNHISTTIME
ICMPINDESTUNREACHS RDNINHIBITSYNC
ICMPINECHOREPS RDNISTIMEMAX
ICMPINECHOS RDNLINKFAILED
ICMPINERRORS RDNMACADDR
ICMPINMSGS RDNROLESTATE
ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS RDNRXRATE
ICMPOUTECHOREPS RDNRXRATEMAX
ICMPOUTECHOS RDNSOTIMEMAX
ICMPOUTERRORS RDNSYNCPROG
ICMPOUTMSGS RDNSYNCSTATE
IMAGEVER RDNTXRATE
IMAGEVER_D RDNTXRATEMAX
INALM SCANGRPDTL
INTERLANFAILED SCANPNTDTL
IPADDRESS SECMODNAME
IPINRECEIVES SECNAMESTRG
IPINHDRERRORS SECTMPNAME
IPINADDRERRORS SERIALNUM
IPINUNKNOWNPORTS SOFTFAIL
IPINDISCARDS STATSRESET
IPINDELIVERS SYNCTIMEBEG
IPOUTREQUESTS SYNCTIMEEND
IPOUTDISCARDS SWITCHCMD
IPOUTNOROUTES TAG NAME
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IPREASSEMREQS TASKHLTHMON
IPREASSEMOKS TCPACTIVEOPENS
IPREASSMFAILS TCPATTEMPTFAILS
LANABLOCKEDRATE TCPCONNTABLE
LANABLOCKEDRATEMAX TCPCURESTAB
LANAFAILED TCPESTABRESETS
LANAMACADDR TCPINCSUMERRS
LANARXRATE TCPINERRS
LANARXRATEMAX TCPINSEGS
LANATXRATE TCPOUTRESETS
LANATXRATEMAX TCPOUTSEGS
LANBBLOCKEDRATE TCPPASSIVEOPENS
LANBBLOCKEDRATEMAX TCPRETRANSSEGS
LANBFAILED TEMPAVG
LANBMACADDR TEMPCRIT
LANBRXRATE TEMPHIGHLM
LANBRXRATEMAX TEMPMAX
LANBTXRATE TEMPMIN
LANBTXRATEMAX THERMERR
LANRXERR TKNCNTA
LANRXRATE TKNCNTB
LANRXRATEMAX TNUMC3OUTCON
LANTXERR TNUMSMSCINCON
LANTXRATE TNUMNTFRQUMAX
LANTXRATEMAX TRNUMINMSGAVGPS
LCDDISPLAYSF TRNUMINMSGMAXPS
LCNALONEA TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS
LCNALONEB TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS
LCNDMAUDERERR TPNCLKSRCMASTER
LCNMSGBUFPCT TPNTIMESTR
LCNMSGBUFPEAKPCT UDPINDGRAMS
LCNRX1DECODEERR UDPINCSUMERRORS
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
LCNRX1FCSERR UDPINERRORS
LCNRX1FRAMEERR UDPLISTENERS
LCNRX1LCNIOVERERR UDPNOPORTS
LCNRX1IOCPCHERR UDPOUTDGRAMS
LCNRX1OVERSZERR UEAKEY
LCNRX1RATE UEAKEYCONFSF
LCNRX1RATEMAX UPTIME
WDTHWFAIL
XOVERFAILED
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for
a definition of each parameter.
Refer to the Experion LCN Overview and
Implementation Guide for details on configuring the
ELCN platform blocks.
4.25.2 ELCN Bridge Configuration Form Reference
This section provides a summary of all user-visible parameters for the ELCN Bridge (ELCN_BRG)
Control Builder block. The parameters are grouped according to the tabs where they reside on the
configuration form.
For more details about these parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference.
Related Topics:
NOTE
The following tabs are common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. For
the parameter descriptions of these common parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter
Reference document.
l Server History tab
l Server Displays
l Control Confirmation tab
l QVCS tab
l Identification tab
ELCN_BRG Block - Main
The Main tab is used to configure the ELCN Bridge block. This tab also displays important state
information and supports generation of commands to the ELCN Bridge through the parameters. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
Tag Name <not an actual Yes The block is
parameter> automatically
assigned a unique
default tag name
when it is created.
Default: ELCN_BRG
<random number>
Honeywell
recommends that
you enter a unique
identification that is
meaningful to you
and that follows
your network
naming
conventions.
Item Name # <not an actual Yes Based on
parameter> a
relations
hip
establish
ed in
Enterpris
e Builder.
Leave
blank if a
relations
hip is not
yet
establish
ed.
Associated Asset # ASSOCASSET # Yes Based on
a
relations
hip
establish
ed in
Enterpris
e Builder.
Leave
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
blank if a
relations
hip is not
yet
establish
ed.
Application Image IMAGEVER Displays
Version the
current
version
of
Applicati
on
personali
ty image
firmware
in the
UEA.
Example:
EXP501.
1-28.0
FTE Address Configuration
Device Index DEVICEIDX Yes Enter the unique
FTE Device Index
number for the
ELCN Bridge.
It should always be
an odd number for
the intended
primary.
Control Builder
automatically
assigns the next
even number to the
secondary.
The Device Index
numbers in Control
Builder must match
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
the numbers that
were entered at the
physical primary
and secondary UEA
boxes.
If they do not
match, then when
you attempt to load
the primary and
secondary Control
Builder blocks, the
load fails.
If they do match,
then upon a
successful load, the
Device Index
becomes Read Only,
and no changes to
the Device Index will
be allowed from
Control Builder.
Ethernet IP Address IPADDRESS FTE IP address
calculated from the
FTE Device Index.
This is not
changeable here.
After the block is
loaded, this
parameter shows
the IP address that
was derived from
the ELCN Bridge’s
FTE Device Index
and the Experion
Base IP address by
the ESVT’s
“Experion PKS
BOOTP Server”
Windows service.
ELCN Bridge
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
LCN Node Number ELCNBNUM The LCN/ELCN
address of ELCN
Bridge. Its address
range (97 for
primary and 98 for
secondary) ensures
that it does not
interfere with any
existing LCN node
numbers. By default,
Control Builder
assigns LCN
address 97 to the
ELCN Bridge that
has an odd Device
Index, and assigns
LCN Address 98 to
its redundant
partner.
ELCN Multicast ELCNMULTIIPADD Default:
Address RSTR 234.129.239.100
The ELCN Multicast
IP Address must
match on the ELCN
Bridge and all ELCN
Nodes including
ELCN Appliance
Nodes (such as NIM
and AM) and
Windows-based TPS
Nodes (ES-T, ESVT,
ACE-T, and EAPP) in
order for them to
communicate.
CAUTION:
Honeywell strongly
recommends that
you use the default
ELCN Multicast IP
Address and not
change it unless you
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
are familiar with the
use of the IP
Multicast Protocol.
If you decide to
change this value
from the default,
then you will need
to change the value
on the ELCN Bridge
and every ELCN
node as well.
After the ELCN
Bridges and ELCN
Nodes are running,
any changes to the
ELCN Multicast IP
Address should not
be done on-process.
Consult Honeywell
or your personnel
familiar with the use
of the IP Multicast
Protocol and
Honeywell Fault
Tolerant Ethernet to
determine the
repercussions of
changing the ELCN
Multicast IP
Address.
Command / State
Module ELCNBCOMMAND Yes The Shutdown
Command command resets the
ELCN Bridge’s
hardware causing it
to return to the
“Ready” state. This
“Ready” state makes
the ELCN Bridge
capable of a
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
firmware load. A
manual Reset of the
ELCN Bridge is
required if you do
not perform a
firmware load.
CAUTION: Please be
careful when using
the “Shutdown”
command, because
unless you load the
firmware, the only
other way to return
the ELCN Bridge to
an operational state
is to Reset the
hardware from the
front panel display
at the physical box
(or power cycle the
box).
Node State NODESTATESTR State of the ELCN
Bridge: OK,
BACKUP, or
NOTLOADED.
Redundancy RDNROLESTATE Indicates whether
Role the module is
operating as a
Primary, Secondary,
or logically Non-
Redundant.
Synchronizat RDNSYNCSTATE Redundant
ion State Synchronization
State. Shows the
current
synchronization
state.
TPN Clock TPNCLKSRCMASTE YES (TRUE) means
Source R the primary ELCN
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
Master Proxy Bridge is the TPN
Clock Master Proxy.
NO (FALSE) means
that the primary
ELCN Bridge is not
the TPN Clock
Master Proxy, or has
stopped being TPN
Clock Master Proxy.
This parameter is
valid only for the
primary ELCN
Bridge. The
secondary ELCN
Bridge always has a
value of NO (FALSE)
if requested.
The primary ELCN
Bridge sets master if
it knows it is the
primary, and will
only send time sync
frames if it is
primary.
After a switch over
of the ELCN Bridge,
upon receiving the
first “time sync
frame” the new
primary becomes
the TPN Clock
Master Proxy.
TPN Time TPNTIMESTR TPN Time value sent
from an ELCN ESVT
when this node has
the CLK_MOD value
of MASTER.
If the
TPNCLKSRCMASTE
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
R parameter is YES
(TRUE), then this
TPNTIMESTR
parameter is valid
and will be shown
on the primary
ELCN Bridge Detail
display and the
Control Builder
block on the
Monitoring side.
Keyswitch UEAKEY Reads the position
Position of the key switch on
the UEA front panel.
(0) undef (project-
side value) (1) R1
(center position) (2)
R2 (left position)
(3) C (right
position)
Soft Failures SOFTFAIL True if diagnostics
Present (See detects one or more
Soft Failures soft failure.
Tab for
details)
Redundancy Configuration
Module is MODISREDUN Yes Select the checkbox
redundant if this ELCN Bridge
hardware module is
redundant.
Honeywell requires
that the ELCN
Bridge be
redundant when
used in a critical
process control
environment. The
Device Index, IP
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
Address, and LCN
Node Number are
all incremented by
one (1) for the
secondary
ELCN Bridge.
Secondary SECMODNAME The secondary
Tag Name ELCN Bridge is
automatically
assigned a unique
default tag name
when it is created -
the Tag Name of the
primary followed by
the abbreviation
SEC. The Secondary
Tag Name is Read
Only.
Default: <tag name
of primary>SEC
Experion Migration Configuration
Experion EPKSMIGRATIONM Yes CAUTION: This
Migration ODE parameter is used
Mode only during an
Enabled Experion On-
Process Migration
when migrating
from an Experion
Release prior to
R510 to an Experion
Release of R510 (or
greater). This
parameter is
necessary for the
initial installation of
the ELCN Bridge
and only during an
Experion On-
Process Migration.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
As long as the
checkbox remains
checked, you can
delete the ELCN
Bridge Control
Builder blocks from
the “ELCN Bridge
Commissioning
Server” without
affecting the
running state
functionality of the
ELCN Bridge(s).
Only writeable at
ELCN Bridge
Control Builder
block build time.
Read Only after
loading to
Monitoring side.
Visible only on the
primary ELCN
Bridge Control
Builder block. Not
visible on the
Experion Detail
Display of either the
primary or
secondary ELCN
Bridge.
REFERENCE: For
instructions on how
to use this
parameter under
these
circumstances, see
the ELCN Overview
and Implementation
Guide, section
“Commissioning the
ELCN Bridges
During Experion
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configura Notes
ble
On-Process
Migration”.
NOTE: The Control
Builder block for the
secondary ELCN
Bridge does not
show this
parameter. It is
automatically
synchronized and
configured from the
value in the primary
block.
Advanced Configuration
Alarming ALMENBSTATE Yes Used to enable or
Enabled disable all block
alarms, including
soft failures.
Temperature TEMPHIGHLM Yes
High Alarm
(degC)
CPU Free CPUFREELOWLM Yes
Low Alarm
(%)
Main Ram MEMFREELOWLM Yes
Free Low
Alarm (%)
NVS Free NVSFREELOWLM Yes
Low Alarm
(%)
ELCN_BRG Block - Redundancy Tab
The Redundancy tab displays redundancy-related information and allows redundancy commands to be
issued when the block is opened on the Monitoring tree in Control Builder. The Redundancy tab is
exposed only when the block is configured as redundant. The “Module is redundant” check box
(MODISREDUN parameter) must be checked on the Main tab of the block.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the
Redundancy tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Redundancy Status
Auto RDNAUTOSYNC Indicates whether auto
Synchronization synchronization is
State ENABLED or
DISABLED in the ELCN
Bridge. Auto
synchronization is
enabled upon receipt of
the Enable
Synchronization
command
(ENBLSYNCCMD).
When enabled, a
Primary automatically
attempts to
synchronize the
Secondary, upon
receipt of any Auto-
Synchronization trigger
(in addition to the
Enable Synchronization
command). Auto
synchronization is
disabled either upon
receipt of the Disable
Synchronization
command
(DSBLSYNCCMD) or
detection of a
persistent
synchronization fault
condition (For example,
end-to-end checksum
failure, synchronization
hardware failure, and
so on). When disabled,
the user must explicitly
issue the Enable
Synchronization
command to reset any
persistent fault
condition and re-
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
attempt initial-sync.
Redundancy RDNCMPT Redundancy Partner
Compatibility Compatibility -
Indicates whether
redundant partner
modules are
compatible (from a
controller redundancy
perspective) and if not
compatible, provides a
reason why.
Inhibit Sync RDNINHIBITSYNC Redundancy Inhibit
Reason Synchronization -
Indicates the current
reason why initial sync
is inhibited.
Initial Sync RDNSYNCPROG Initial Sync Progress -
Process (%) Indicates the initial
synchronization
progress in terms of
percent complete.
Last SYNCTIMEBEG Last Synchronization
Synchronization Time. System-time that
Time module completed
initial synchronization.
Last Loss of SYNCTIMEEND Last Sync Lost Time.
Sync Time System-time that
module last lost
synchronization.
Redundancy RDNCTLABILITY Describes the module's
Controllability ability to control
relative to its redundant
partner.
Device Index RDNDEVICEIDX Serves as a unique
identifier that does not
follow the redundancy
role. This parameter
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
shows the Device Index
specified using buttons
on the hardware's front
entry panel.
Redundancy Statistics
Total Tx Rate (k RDNTXRATE
Bit/sec)
Total Rx Rate (k RDNRXRATE
Bit/sec)
Total Tx Rate RDNTXRATEMAX
Max (k Bit/sec)
Total Rx Rate RDNRXRATEMAX
Max (k Bit/sec
Max Initial Sync RDNISTIMEMAX Max Initial Sync Time -
Time (sec) Indicates the maximum
initial synchronization
time in seconds. This is
a high-water mark for
all the previous
successfully completed
initial-sync
attempts.
Max Switchover RDNSOTIMEMAX Maximum Switchover
Time (msec) Time - Indicates the
high-water mark with
regard to redundancy
switchover time, in
milli-seconds.
[Disable DSBLSYNCCMD Used to disable
Synchronization] synchronization
(and/or disable auto-
synchronization). This
parameter has edge
trigger semantics and
always returns OFF
when read.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
[Become BECMPRICMD Used to command an
Primary] unsynchronized
secondary to transition
into the primary role in
the absence of a
partner. This parameter
has edge trigger
semantics and always
returns OFF when read.
[Enable ENBLSYNCCMD Used to command
Synchronization] initial synchronization
(and enable auto-
synchronization). This
parameter has edge
trigger semantics and
always returns OFF
when read.
[Initiate SWITCHCMD Used to command
Switchover] switchover to a
synchronized pair of
redundancy modules.
This parameter has
edge trigger semantics
and always returns OFF
when read.
Redundancy History
Time RDNHISTTIME Indicates wall clock
time of redundancy
history state change.
Event RDNHISTSTATE Indicates the last 16
milestones within
redundancy related
activities. Refer to the
corresponding
RDNHISTREASON entry
for additional
information (when
applicable).
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Reason RDNHISTREASON Redundancy History
Reason - Provide
rational for the
occurrence of a
redundancy history
state. Includes rational
for the following:
IR : Initial Redundancy
Role Determination
IS : Commencing Initial
Sync
CMPT : Partner
Compatibility
ROLE : Redundancy
Role Change
SYNC : Loss-of-Sync
and Commencing
Initial Sync
Redundancy RDNLINKFAILED Indicates the status of
Link Failed the redundancy private
path between
redundant partners.
ELCN_BRG Block - System Time tab
The System Time tab displays information about the block’s time source and synchronization with that
time source. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the System Time
tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
System Time
Current System CURTIME No Displays the current
Time system time, as
communicated from
the Server. The format
is MM/DD/YY
HH:MM:SS.
Current System TIMESOURCE No Displays the current
Time Source time source in use for
time synchronization.
NTP Status (Network Time Protocol)
NTP Status NTPSTAT No Displays the NTP status.
NTP Server NTPADDRESS No Displays the IP address
Address of NTP server.
NTP Offset NTPOFFSET Clock offset between
(msec) NTP server and device,
in milliseconds.
NTP Maximum NTPOFFSETMAX High water mark of
Offset (msec) clock offset between
NTP server and device,
in milliseconds.
NTP Last NTPLASTSTRATUM
Stratum Value
System Time Synchronization Status
Time TIMESYNCSTAT No Time Sync Status:
Synchronization
---, ERROR, SKEWED,
Status
or SYNCED
Time of Last TIMELASTSYNC No Displays the time last
Time Sync module synced with
time source.
Skew at Last TIMELASTSKEW No The new difference
Time Sync between controller
(msec) time and new time.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Precision Time Protocol
Enable PTPENABLE Yes When enabled (ON), the
Precision Time PTP client should
Protocol attempt to synchronize
its local clock with a
PTP GrandMaster. For
EHPM, this value is
always set as ON and it
is not editable.
PTP Status PTPSTAT No Displays the current
status of the PTP time
synchronization.
PTP Master IP PTPMASTERIP No Displays the IP address
Address of the PTP
GrandMaster clock.
PTP Offset PTPOFFSET Clock offset between
(msec) PTP server and device,
in milliseconds.
PTP Maximum PTPOFFSETMAX High water mark of
Offset (msec) clock offset between
PTP server and device,
in milliseconds.
ELCN_BRG Block - Statistics Tab
The Statistics tab displays various statistical parameters used for maintaining and monitoring data flow,
network statistics, and so on. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on
the Statistics tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
CPU Statistics
CPU Free CPUFREEAVG No Displays the rolling
(%) average of free CPU
not currently used for
processing by the
CPM.
Minimum CPUFREEMIN No Displays the historic
CPU Free minimum of the
(%) unused CPU
available.
Time Since UPTIME No Displays the elapsed
Power up time since module
power up or restart.
NVS Statistics
NVS Free NVSFREEAVG No NVS free running
(%) average, in percent.
NVS Free NVSFREEMIN No
Minimum
(%)
Initiating to TNUMSMSCINCON
SM SCs
Notification and Network Message Statistics
Notifications TNUMNTFRQUAVG No Displays the rolling
Rate average of
notification request
throughput.
Maximum TNUMNTFRQUMAX No Displays the
Notifications maximum of
Rate notification request
throughput since last
store of STATSRESET.
Responder TRNUMINMSGAVGPS No Low water mark for
Input Rate NVS free running
average, in percent.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Max TRNUMINMSGMAXPS No
Responder
Input Rate
Responder TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS No
Output Rate
Max TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS No
Responder
Output Rate
Responding TNUMC3OUTCON No Number of SM Input
to C300s Connections - This
parameter defines
the number of SMs
for peer targets.
[Reset All STATSRESET Used to reset all
Statistics] statistics.
Memory Statistics
Main Ram MEMFREEAVG No Main Ram Free (%)
Free (%)
Main RAM MEMFREEMIN No Main RAM Free
Free Minimum (%)
Minimum
(%)
Hardware Temperature
Enclosure TEMPAVG No
Temperature
(degC)
Maximum TEMPMAX No
Temperature
(degC)
Minimum TEMPMIN No
Temperature
(degC)
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
ELCN_BRG Block – Hardware Information Tab
The Hardware Information tab displays firmware information, hardware factory information, and the
MAC address related data for the ELCN Bridge. The following table summarizes the parameter data
you can monitor on the Hardware Information tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Firmware Version
Application IMAGEVER_D No Displays the current
Image Version version of Application
personality image
firmware in the UEA.
Example: EXP501.1-28.0
Boot Image BOOTIMAGEVER No Displays the current
Version version of Boot personality
image firmware in the
UEA.
Example: EXP501.1-28.0
Hardware Factory Information
Module Type MODTYPE No Displays the hardware type
of Universal Embedded
Appliance (UEA):<model
number> Univ Emb
Appliance
Serial Number SERIALNUM No Displays the UEA serial
number.
Programmable PLVERSION No Factory programmed
Logic Revision logic device version differs
from the boot/application
image version, (which is
updated with firmware
load) in that the hardware
has to be returned to the
factory for this version to
be updated.
Hardware HWREVMAJ No Displays the hardware
Version major version.
Hardware HWREVMIN No Displays the hardware
Revision minor revision.
Network Interface Address Information
FTE (Yellow) LANAMACADDR No Displays the media access
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
MAC Address control address of port A
(yellow port).
FTE (Green) LANBMACADDR No Displays the media access
MAC Address control address of port A
(green port).
Redundancy RDNMACADDR No Displays the media access
MAC Address control address of port
used for redundancy link.
ELCN_BRG Block - ELCN Bridge Statistics Tab
The ELCN Bridge Statistics tab display statistics related to operation of the ELCN Bridge. The following
table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the ELCN Bridge Statistics tab of the
configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Current Traffic
LCN to ELCN LCNTOELCNRATE Message transfer
Rate [msgs/sec] from LCN to ELCN
ELCN to LCN ELCNTOLCNRATE Message transfer
Rate [msgs/sec] from ELCN to LCN
LCN Tx Rate LCNTXRATE Data packets
[pkts/sec] transmitted to
ELCN
LCN Rx1 Rate LCNRX1RATE Data packets
[pkts/sec] received from LCN
on channel 1
LCN Rx2 Rate LCNRX2RATE Data packets
[pkts/sec] received from LCN
on channel 2
ELCN Tx Rate ELCNTXRATE Data packets
[pkts/sec] transmitted to
ELCN
ELCN Rx Rate ELCNRXRATE Data packets
[pkts/sec] received from
ELCN
Current Buffer Pool Usage
LCN Tx [%] LCNMSGBUFPCT Allocated buffers
for transmission to
LCN
Message [%] MSGBUFPCT Allocated buffers
used for re-
assembling
packets into
messages between
LCN and ELCN
LCN Cable-A (counts)
Total A Packets RCVCNTA Total A Packets
Received Received
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Total A Receive RCVERRA Total A Receive
Errors Errors
Total A Tokens TKNCNTA Total A Tokens for
for Transmit Transmit
Total Cable A MEDIADEADA Total Cable A
Media Dead Media Dead
Total Cable A LCNALONEA Total Cable A Alone
Alone in Ring in Ring
Errors RX1 (counts)
LCN Rx1 Frame LCNRX1FCSERR FCS Error - Locally
Check Seq computed FCS did
not compare with
the FCS received.
LCN Rx1 LCNRX1FRAMEERR Framing Error -
Framing The total number
of bits received
between the start
of frame delimiter
and end of frame
delimiter was not
exactly divisible by
16.
LCN Rx1 LCNRX1OVERSZERR Oversize Frame
Oversize Error - The frame
was longer than
the allowed length.
LCN Rx1 LCNI LCNRX1LCNIOVERERR LCN Rx1 LCNI
Overrun Overrun Error
count
LCN Rx1 LCNRX1DECODEERR Manchester
Manchester Decoder Error -
Decoder The LCNI hardware
detected an error
in the Manchester
decoder operation.
This can be due to
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Parameter Name Configurable Notes
a hardware failure
or poor quality of
received signal.
LCN Rx1 IOCB LCNRX1IOCPCHERR Receiver Overrun
Chain Full Error – Overload
issue. Indicates
slow receive from
LCN and possible
loss of packets.
Errors (counts)
LCN Tx DMA LCNDMAUDERERR DMA under-run
Underrun while the LCNI is
transmitting. The
LCNI stops
transmission such
that the frame sent
will have a framing
error.
ELCN Invalid ELCNPACKETINV ELCN packet
Packet indicator missing
in the received
ELCN packet
header.
ELCN Invalid ELCNLNGTHINV Received ELCN
Length packet data length
does not match.
ELCN Invalid ELCNSRCINV ELCN Invalid
Source Source count.
Source node > 127
in the received
ELCN packet
ELCN Out of ELCNSEQINV ELCN Out of
Sequence Sequence count.
Sequence number
in the received
ELCN packet not
expected
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Parameter Name Configurable Notes
ELCN ELCNCOMMINV ELCN
Communication Communication
Error Error count.
Transmit or
Receive socket
error. Detail in the
event log.
Reset LCN ELCNSTATSRST Used to initiate
Statistics reset of LCN
statistics. Store to
this parameter
causes initialization
of all statistics
parameters
maintained within
the ELCN Bridge
Statistics tab.
Peak Traffic
LCN to ELCN LCNTOELCNRATEMAX Message transfer
Rate Max from LCN to ELCN
[msgs/sec]
ELCN to LCN ELCNTOLCNRATEMAX Message transfer
Rate Max from ELCN to LCN
[msgs/sec]
LCN Tx Rate LCNTXRATEMAX Data packets
Max [pkts/sec] transmitted to
ELCN
LCN Rx1 Rate LCNRX1RATEMAX Data packets
Max [pkts/sec] received from LCN
on channel 1
LCN Rx2 Rate LCNRX2RATEMAX Data packets
Max [pkts/sec] received from LCN
on channel 2
ELCN Tx Rate ELCNTXRATEMAX Data packets
Max [pkts/sec] transmitted to
ELCN
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Parameter Name Configurable Notes
ELCN Rx Rate ELCNRXRATEMAX Data packets
Max [pkts/sec] received from
ELCN
Peak Buffer Pool Usage
LCN Tx Peak LCNMSGBUFPEAKPCT Highest amount of
[%] buffers allocated
for transmission to
LCN
Message Peak MSGBUFPEAKPCT Highest amount of
[%] buffers allocated
for re-assembling
packets into
messages between
LCN and ELCN
LCN Cable-B (counts))
Total B Packets RCVCNTB Total B Packets
Received Received
Total B Receive RCVERRB Total B Receive
Errors Errors
Total B Tokens TKNCNTB Total A Tokens for
for Transmit Transmit
Total Cable B MEDIADEADB Total Cable B
Media Dead Media Dead
Total Cable B LCNALONEB Total Cable B Alone
Alone in Ring in Ring
Errors RX2 (counts)
LCN Rx2 Frame LCNRX2FCSERR LCN Rx2 Frame
Check Seq Check Sequence
error count
LCN Rx2 LCNRX2FRAMEERR Framing Error. The
Framing total number of
bits received
between the start
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Parameter Name Configurable Notes
of frame delimiter
and end of frame
delimiter was not
exactly divisible by
16.
LCN Rx2 LCNRX2OVERSZERR Oversize Frame
Oversize Error - The frame
was longer than
the allowed length.
LCN Rx2 LCNI LCNRX2LCNIOVERERR LCN Rx2 LCNI
Overrun Overrun error
count
LCN Rx2 LCNRX2DECODEERR LCN Rx2
Manchester Manchester
Decoder Decoder error
count
LCN Rx2 IOCB LCNRX2IOCPCHERR Receiver Overrun
Chain Full Error – Overload
issue. Indicates
slow receive from
LCN and possible
loss of packets.
[Reset LCN ELCNSTATSRST Used to initiate
Statistics] reset of LCN
statistics.
ELCN_BRG Block - FTE Tab
The FTE tab displays statistics related to FTE communications and performance. It features parameters
associated with the MAC Address Resolution Table (MART), which deals with online media access
control (MAC) address mapping. Two separate MARTs are maintained, one for FTE nodes and the
other for non-FTE nodes. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
FTE tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Current FTE Traffic
Total Tx LANTXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(kBit/sec) transmission rate in
kilobits per second
(kbps) for port A
(yellow tree port) on
the FTE interface.
Total Rx LANRXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(kBit/sec) receive rate in kbps
for port A (yellow tree
port) on the FTE
interface.
Current FTE Traffic
FTE A Tx LANATXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(pkts/sec) transmission rate in
packets per second
for port A (yellow tree
port) on the FTE
interface.
FTE B Tx LANBTXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(pkts/sec) transmission rate in
packets per second
for port B (green tree
port) on the FTE
interface.
FTE A Rx LANARXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(pkts/sec) receive rate in packets
per second for port A
(yellow tree port) on
the FTE interface.
FTE B Rx LANBRXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
(pkts/sec) receive rate in kbps
for port B (green tree
port) on the FTE
interface.
FTE A LANABLOCKEDRATE No Packets per second
Block Rate blocked (by CF9
(pkts/sec) firewall) on FTE A
cable.
FTE B LANBBLOCKEDRATE No Packets per second
Block Rate blocked (by CF9
(pkts/sec) firewall) on FTE B
cable.
FTE Statistics
Number of NUMFTENODES No Displays the current
FTE Nodes number of FTE nodes
within the FTE
community.
Max MAXFTENODES No Displays the maximum
Number of number of FTE nodes
FTE Nodes that have been
detected within the
FTE community.
Max MAXNODEID No Displays the highest
Device device index
Index supported within the
FTE community.
IP BADIPCSUM No Displays the number
Checksum of FTE IP messages
Errors which were received
but determined as
having bad IP
checksums.
UDP BADUDPCSUM No Displays the number
Checksum of FTE UDP messages
Errors which were received
but determined as
having bad UDP
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
checksums.
FTE LANRXERR No Receive errors on FTE
Receive A cable.
Errors
FTE LANTXERR No Receive errors on FTE
Transmit B cable.
Errors
FTE MART Statistics
Address FTEMARTADDRCOUNT No Displays the number
Count of IP addresses
contained in the FTE
MART.
Max Depth FTEMARTMAXDEPTH No Displays the maximum
depth that the FTE
MART has reached or
the highest number of
entries in the table.
Average FTEMARKAVGDEPTH No Displays the average
Depth depth of the FTE
MART or the average
number of entries in
the table.
Address FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT No Displays the number
Collisions of collisions that have
occurred while
hashing the FTE
MART.
Peak FTE Traffic
Total Tx LANTXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(kBit/sec) transmission rate in
on the FTE interface.
Total Rx LANRXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(kBit/sec) receive rate in kbps on
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
the FTE interface.
Peak FTE Traffic
FTE A Tx LANATXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(pkts/sec) transmission rate in
packets per second
for port A (yellow tree
port) on the FTE
interface.
FTE B Tx LANBTXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(pkts/sec) transmission rate in
packets per second
for port B (green tree
port) on the FTE
interface.
FTE A Rx LANARXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(pkts/sec) receive rate in packets
per second for port A
(yellow tree port) on
the FTE interface.
FTE B Rx LANBRXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(pkts/sec) receive rate in packets
per second for port B
(green tree port) on
the FTE interface.
FTE A LANABLOCKEDRATEMAX No Displays
Block Rate communication
Max receive rate in packets
(pkts/sec) per second for port A
(yellow tree port) on
the FTE interface.
FTE B LANBBLOCKEDRATEMAX No Displays
Block Rate communication
Max receive rate in packets
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
(pkts/sec) per second for port B
(green tree port) on
the FTE interface.
FTE failure indicators
FTE A LANAFAILED No Provides status
(Yellow) indicator for port A
Failed (yellow tree port) on
the FTE interface.
FTE B LANBFAILED No Provides status
(Green) indicator for port B
Failed (green tree port) on
the FTE interface.
InterLAN INTERLANFAILED No Provides status
Comm indicator for Inter-
Failed LAN communications.
Crossover XOVERFAILED No Provides status
Cable indicator for crossover
Failed cable.
ELCN_BRG Block - ELCN Bridge View Tab
The ELCN Bridge View tab displays the LCN/ELCN Network Topology View - a view of the ELCN node
addresses. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the ELCN Bridge
View tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Locality [none, BRDGLCLTYARR Locality identifier array
lcn, elcn, both for LCN/ELCN nodes:
none (0) - indexed
node does not exist on
the LCN or ELCN
LCN (1) - indexed node
exists on the LCN
ELCN (2) - indexed node
exists on the ELCN
BOTH (3) - indexed node
exists on the LCN and
ELCN
Total Rx BRDGRXPKTSARR Total Rx packets [pkts]
packets [pkts] count
Phys packets BRDGPHYARR Phys packets [pkts] count
[pkts]
Logical BRDGLOGARR Logical packets [pkts]
packets [pkts] count
Broadcast BRDGBCASTARR Broadcast packets [pkts]
packets [pkts] count
ELCN_BRG Block – UDP/TCP Tab
The UDP/TCP tab displays statistics related to open UDP and TCP connections associated with the
respective ELCN Bridge block. It features parameters used for maintenance and performance
monitoring purposes. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
UDP/TCP tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
UDP Statistics
Datagrams UDPINDGRAMS No Displays the total
Delivered number of UDP
datagrams delivered to
UDP users.
Datagrams UDPNOPORTS No Displays the total
for Unknown number of received
Ports UDP datagrams for
which there was no
application at the
destination port.
Datagrams UDPINERRORS No Displays the number of
Dropped for received UDP
Errors datagrams that could
not be delivered for
reasons other than the
lack of an application
at the destination port.
Datagrams UDPINCSUMERRORS No
with
Checksum
Error
Datagrams UDPOUTGRAMS No Displays the total
Sent to number of UDP
Applications datagrams sent from
this entity.
TCP Statistics
Active Opens TCPACTIVEOPENS No Displays the number of
times TCP connections
have made a direct
transition to the SYN-
SENT state from the
CLOSED state.
Passive TCPPASSIVEOPENS No Displays the number of
Opens times TCP connections
have made a direct
transition to the SYN-
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
RCVD state from the
LISTEN state.
Failed TCPATTEMPTFAILS No Displays the number of
Connection times TCP connections
Attempts have made a direct
transition to the
CLOSED state from
either the SYNSENT
state or the SYN-
RCVD state, plus the
number of times TCP
connections have
made a direct
transition to the
LISTEN state from the
SYN-RCVD state.
Connections TCPESTABRESETS No Displays the number of
Resets times TCP connections
have made a direct
transition to the
CLOSED state from
either the
ESTABLISHED state or
the CLOSE-WAIT state.
Current TCPCURRESTAB No Displays the number of
Connections TCP connections for
which the current state
is either
ESTABLISHED or
CLOSE- WAIT.
Segments TCPINSEGS No Displays the total
Received number of segments
received, including
those received in error.
This count includes
segments received on
currently established
connections.
Segments TCPOUTSEGS No Displays the total
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Sent number of segments
sent, including those
on current
connections but
excluding those
containing only
retransmitted octets.
Segments TCPRETRANSSEGS No Displays the total
Retransmitted number of segments
retransmitted, that is,
the number of TCP
segments transmitted
containing one or
more previously
transmitted octets.
Segments TCPINERRS No Displays the total
Discarded For number of segments
Errors received in error. For
example, bad TCP
checksums.
Segments TCPINCSUMERRS No Displays the total
with number of segments
Checksum received in error. For
Errors example, bad TCP
checksums.
Reset TCPOUTRESETS No Displays the number of
Segments TCP segments sent
Sent containing the RST
flag.
ELCN_BRG Block – IP/ICMP Tab
The IP/ICMP tab displays statistics related to IP and ICMP protocol messages associated with (that is,
originating in or received by) the respective ELCN Bridge block. It features parameters used for
maintenance and status operations on the network. The following table summarizes the parameter data
you can monitor on the IP/ ICMP tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain
Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Text
IP Statistics
Datagrams IPINRECEIVES Displays the total number of input
received from datagrams received from
No
connected nodes, including those
Below received in error.
Datagrams IPINHDRERRORS Displays the number of input
datagrams discarded due to
Format Error
errors in their IP headers,
Drops including bad checksums, version
No
number mismatch, other format
errors, time-to-live exceeded,
errors discovered in processing
their IP options, and so on.
Datagrams IPINADDRERRORS Displays the number of input
datagrams discarded because
Misdelivery
the IP address in their IP header's
Drops destination field was not a valid
address to be received at this
entity.
This count includes invalid
No addresses, such as 0.0.0.0, and
addresses of unsupported
classes, such as Class E. For
entities which are not IP
Gateways and therefore do not
forward datagrams, this counter
includes datagrams discarded
because the destination address
was not a local address.
Unknown IPINUNKNOWNPORTS Displays the number of locally-
addressed datagrams received
Protocol
No successfully but discarded
Datagrams because of an unknown or
unsupported protocol.
Datagrams IPINDISCARDS Displays the number of input IP
datagrams for which no problems
Discarded for
were encountered to prevent their
Resrcs continued processing, but which
were discarded for another
No
reason. For example, discarded
for lack of buffer space. Note that
this counter does not include any
datagrams discarded while
awaiting re- assembly.
Datagrams IPINDELIVERS Displays the total number of input
Delivered datagrams successfully delivered
No
to IP user-protocols, including
Above ICMP.
Datagrams IPOUTREQUESTS Displays the total number of IP
No datagrams which local IP user-
Sent Out
protocols, including ICMP,
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain
Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Text
supplied to IP in requests for
transmission.
Out Datagrams IPOUTDISCARDS Displays the number of output IP
datagrams for which no problem
Discarded
was encountered to prevent their
No transmission to their destination,
but which were discarded for
another reason. For example,
discarded for lack of buffer space.
Datagrams IPOUTNOROUTES Displays the number of IP
Drops for No datagrams discarded because no
No
route could be found to transmit
Routes them to their destination.
Fragments IPREASSEMREQS
Displays the number of IP
Needing No fragments received which needed
Reassembly to be reassembled at this entity.
Fragments IPREASSEMOKS Displays the number of IP
No datagrams successfully
Reassembled
reassembled.
Fragments IPREASSEMFAILS Displays the number of failures
Reassembly detected by the IP reassembly
No
algorithm for reasons such as,
Fails timed out, errors, and so on.
ICMP Statistics
Messages ICMPINMSGS Displays the total number of ICMP
No messages which the entity
Received
received.
Messages with ICMPINERRORS Displays the number of ICMP
messages which the entity
Format Errors
received but determined as
No
having ICMP-specific errors, such
as bad ICMP checksums, bad
length, and so on.
Messages with ICMPINCSUMERRORS
Checksum No
Errors
Dest. ICMPINDESTUNREAC
Displays the number of ICMP
Unreachable HS No destination unreachable
Msgs Recvd messages received.
Echo Messages ICMPINECHOS Displays the number of ICMP
No echo (request) messages
Recvd
received.
Echo Reply ICMPINECHOREPS Displays the number of ICMP
Messages No
echo reply messages received.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain
Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Text
Recvd
Messages Sent ICMPOUTMSGS Displays the total number of ICMP
No messages which this entity
attempted to send.
Out Error ICMPOUTERRORS Displays the number of ICMP
messages which this entity did
Messages
No not send due to problems
discovered within ICMP such as a
lack of buffers.
Dest. ICMPOUTDESTUNRE
Displays the number of ICMP
Unreachable ACHS No destination unreachable
Messages Sent messages sent.
Echo Messages ICMPOUTECHOS Displays the number of ICMP
No
Sent echo (request) messages sent.
Echo Reply ICMPOUTECHOREPS Displays the number of ICMP
No
Messages Sent echo reply messages sent.
ELCN_BRG Block - Soft Failures Tab
The Soft Failures tab displays various soft failure conditions for the ELCN Bridge hardware. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Soft Failures tab of the
configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Soft Failure Conditions
FTE Device Index BCDSWSTS True if the FTE
device index
Changed
switches have
been changed
since the device
was powered on. If
the FTE device
index switches are
changed and the
device is restarted,
the FTE IP address
may change.
Factory Data FACTDATAERR True if the factory
data in the device
Error
EEPROM is
missing or invalid
for the currently
loaded firmware.
Thermometer THERMERR True if the device
hardware
Failure
thermometer has
failed.
Enclosure TEMPCRIT True if the
enclosure
Temperature
temperature
Critical exceeds the
critical limit.
FPGA Hardware FPGAFAIL True if the device
detects a failure
Failure
with the FPGA
functionality.
WDT Hardware WDTHWFAIL True if the device
detects a failure
Failure
with the hardware
watchdog
functionality. Note
that this diagnostic
detects if the
hardware
watchdog is
functioning only.
Critical Task TASKHLTHMON True one or more
tasks fails to
Watchdog
update the critical
Warning task watchdog
within 5 seconds.
Uncorrectable RAMSWEEPERR True if an
Internal RAM uncorrectable
memory error has
Sweep Error been detected.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Corrected RAMSCRUBERRS True if a
correctable
Internal RAM
memory error has
Sweep Error been detected
within the last 24
hours.
Minimum MINHWREVSF True if device
hardware fails to
Recommended
meet the minimum
HW Revision recommended
hardware revision
for the currently
loaded firmware.
FTE Network FTENETWORKERR True if device
hardware fails to
Error
meet the minimum
recommended
hardware revision
for the currently
loaded firmware.
Partner Not FTEPARTNERNOTVISIBLE True if the
Visible on FTE redundant partner
is not visible on
Network the FTE network.
ELCN Bridge BRDNINCONGRUENTVIEWS The redundant
Partner has partner does not
see the same LCN
Different
nodes. Check LCN
Network View cable status.
Node Discovered NODELCNELCN Duplicate LCN
Node Addresses
on Both LCN and
Detected. The
ELCN second node with
the same LCN
node number will
not start up
properly. This
node will need to
be shutdown,
reconfigured, and
then reloaded.
LCD Displays LCDDISPLAYSF ELCN Bridge LCD
(on front panel at
Panel Errors
the physical UEA
box) is not
operational.
Power Supply PWRSUPPLYSF ELCN Bridge
power voltage not
Alarm
in normal
operating range
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Fan Fault FANFAULTSF ELCN Bridge
cooling fan is not
Condition
operational
Key switch in ‘C’ UEAKEYCONFSF The key on the
ELCN Bridge front
position
panel is in the ‘C’
(right most)
position, referred
to as configuration
mode. CAUTION:
ELCN Bridge
operational
parameters could
be changed.
4.25.3 ELCN Node (ELCNNODE) block
Descriptio The ELCNNODE block represents the ELCN Node hardware and is
n used for defining an ELCN Node, such as the ENIM and AM, in
Control Builder.
The ELCNNODE block is designed to be stand-alone and it
belongs to the independent block category.
The ELCNNODE block has the multiple tabs which represent the
parameters that are mostly for viewing the current status and
statistics values of an ELCN Node’s operation:
Function l In the Control Builder Project tree view, configuration parameters can be
configured. The state and statistical parameters are view or read only.
l The Main tab shows the unique addressing information.
l An ELCN Node may be redundant, if supported. If redundant, the value of the
“Module is Redundant” parameter should be selected.
l When loading the block, load the primary and the secondary if redundant
Parameters ALMENBSTATE LANAFAILED
ASSOCASSET LANAMACADDR
BCDSWSTS LANARXRATE
BECMPRICMD LANARXRATEMAX
BOOTIMAGEVER LANASILENT
CPUFREEAVG LANATXRATE
CPUFREELOWLM LANATXRATEMAX
CPUFREEMIN LANBBLOCKEDRATE
DBTRACEENABLE LANBBLOCKEDRATEMA
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
DBTRACEFLAGS1..6 X
DEVICEIDX LANBFAILED
DLINK1FAILED LANBMACADDR
DLINK1RXRATE LANBRXRATE
DLINK1RXRATEMAX LANBRXRATEMAX
DLINK1SILENT LANBSILENT
DLINK1TXRATE LANBTXRATE
DLINK1TXRATEMAX LANBTXRATEMAX
DLINK2FAILED LANRXERR
DLINK2RXRATE LANRXRATE
DLINK2RXRATEMAX LANRXRATEMAX
DLINK2SILENT LANTXERR
DLINK2TXRATE LANTXRATE
DLINK2TXRATEMAX LANTXRATEMAX
DLINKDUPEADDR MAXFTENODES
DLINKRXRATE MAXNODEID
DLINKRXRATEMAX MEMFREEAVG
DLINKTXRATE MEMFREECRITLM
DLINKTXRATEMAX MEMFREELOWLM
DSBLSYNCCMD MEMFREEMIN
EHBHWYNUM MINHWREVSF
ENABLEOPMTOELCN MODISREDUN
ENABLEOPMTOLCN MODTYPE
ENBLESYNCCMD NUMFTENODES
ENIMUCNNUM (ENIM only) NVSFREEAVG
EPLCGCH1BAUDRATE NVSFREECRITLM
EPLCGCH1PARITY NVSFREELOWLM
EPLCGCH2BAUDRATE NVSFREEMIN
EPLCGCH2PARITY PHWYPRTLCIPISRED
EPLCGMULTIBUFPIPELINE PLVERSION
EPLCGREDUNDCOMMSOPTIO RAMSWEEPERR
N
RAMSCRUBBERRS
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
EPLCGUSEROUTPUTSUPPRES RDNAUTOSYNC
S
RDNCMPT
ETH1SOFTFAIL
RDNCTLABILITY
ETH2SOFTFAIL
RDNDEVICEIDX
FACTDATAERR
RDNHISTREASON
FPGAFAIL
RDNHISTSTATE
FTEMARKAVGDEPTH
RDNHISTTIME
FTEMARTADDRCOUNT
RDNINHIBITSYNC
FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT
RDNISTIMEAX
FTEMARTMAXDEPTH
RDNLINKFAILED
FTENETWORKERR
RDNMACADDR
FTEPARTNERNOTVISIBLE
RDNISTIMEMAX
HWREVMAJ
RDNROLESTATE
HWREVMIN
RDNRXRATE
ICONSTATE
RDNRXRATEMAX
ICMPINCSUMERRORS
RDNSOTIMEMAX
ICMPINDESTUNREACHS
RDNSYNCPROG
ICMPINECHOREPS
RDNSYNCSTATE
ICMPINECHOS
RDNTXRATE
ICMPINERRORS
RDNTXRATEMAX
ICMPINMSGS
SCANGRPDTL
ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS
SCANPNTDTL
ICMPOUTECHOREPS
SECMODNAME
ICMPOUTECHOS
SECNAMESTRG
ICMPOUTERRORS
SECTMPNAME
ICMPOUTMSGS
SERIALNUM
IMAGEVER
SOFTFAIL
IMAGEVER_D
STATSRESET
INALM
SWITCHCMD
INTERLANFAILED
SYNCTIMEBEG
IPADDRESS
SYNCTIMEEND
IPINRECEIVES
TAG NAME
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IPINHDRERRORS TASKHLTHMON
IPINADDRERRORS TCPACTIVEOPENS
IPINUNKNOWNPORTS TCPATTEMPTFAILS
IPINDISCARDS TCPCONNTABLE
IPINDELIVERS TCPCURESTAB
IPOUTREQUESTS TCPESTABRESETS
IPOUTDISCARDS TCPINCSUMERRS
IPOUTNOROUTES TCPINERRS
IPREASSEMREQS TCPINSEGS
IPREASSEMOKS TCPOUTRESETS
IPREASSMFAILS TCPOUTSEGS
ISVIRTUALPLATFORM TCPPASSIVEOPENS
LANABLOCKEDRATE TCPRETRANSSEGS
LANABLOCKEDRATEMAX TEMPAVG
TEMPCRIT
TEMPHIGHLM
TEMPMAX
TEMPMIN
THERMERR
TNUMC3OUTCON
TNUMSMSCINCON
TNUMNTFRQUMAX
TOTALXRATEMAX
TOTALTXRATEMAX
TRNUMINMSGAVGPS
TRNUMINMSGMAXPS
TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS
TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS
UDPINDGRAMS
UDPINCSUMERRORS
UDPINERRORS
UDPLISTENERS
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
UDPNOPORTS
UDPOUTDGRAMS
UPTIME
WDTHWFAIL
XOVERFAILED
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for a
definition of each parameter.
Refer to the Experion LCN Overview and Implementation
Guide for details on configuring the ELCN platform blocks.
4.25.4 ELCN Appliance Node Configuration Form Reference
This section provides a summary of all user-visible parameters for the ELCN Appliance Node (ELCN_
NODE) Control Builder block. The parameters are grouped according to the tabs where they reside on
the configuration form.
For more details about these parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference.
Related Topics:
The following tabs are common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. For the
parameter descriptions of these common parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference
document.
l Server History tab
l Server Displays
l Control Confirmation tab
l QVCS tab
l Identification tab
ELCN_NODE Block - Main Tab
The Main tab is used to configure the ELCN Node block. This tab also displays important state
information and supports generation of commands to the ELCN Node through the parameters. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
[caption]
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
Tag Name <not an actual Yes The block is automatically
parameter> assigned a unique default
tag name when it is
created.
Default: ELCN_ <random
number>
Honeywell recommends
that you enter a unique
identification that is
meaningful to you and
that follows your network
naming conventions.
Item Name # <not an actual Yes Based on a relationship
parameter> established in Enterprise
Builder. Leave blank if a
relationship is not yet
established.
Associated ASSOCASSET # Yes Based on a relationship
Asset # established in Enterprise
Builder. Leave blank if a
relationship is not yet
established.
Application IMAGEVER Displays the current
Image version of Application
Version personality image
firmware in the UEA.
Example: EXP501.1-28.0
FTE Address Configuration
Device Index DEVICEIDX Yes Enter the unique FTE
Device Index number for
the ELCN Node.
For a redundant node, it
should always be an odd
number for the intended
primary.
Control Builder
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
automatically assigns the
next even number to the
secondary.
The Device Index
numbers in Control
Builder must match the
numbers that were
entered at the physical
primary and secondary
UEA boxes.
If they do not match, then
when you attempt to load
the primary and
secondary Control Builder
blocks, the load fails.
If they do match, then
upon a successful load,
the Device Index becomes
Read Only, and no
changes to the Device
Index will be allowed from
Control Builder.
Ethernet IP IPADDRESS FTE IP address derived
Address from the FTE Device
Index and the base IP
address (FTE IP Address =
base IP address + Device
Index).
Read Only.
The network uses floating
IP addresses for ELCN
Bridge and ELCN
Appliance Nodes. The
node in the primary role
uses the lower (odd) IP
address, and the node in
the secondary role uses
the higher (even) IP
address. This IP address
follows the primary when
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
a switchover occurs.
Node Configuration
ELCN Node ELCNNODETYPE Yes The type of node this
Type ELCN node is:
0: ENIM, 1:AM, 2: ELPCG,
3: EHB, 4: NG
EHB Node EHBHWYNUM Yes This is the
Number EHB address
on data Hiway.
ENIM UCN ENIMUCNNUM Yes EUCN Network Number
Node
Number
Live UCN UCNLIVESTR The actual UCN address
Node String
Val
Command / State
ELCNNODECOMM No ELCN_NODE device
AND Module Command
Module
Command Shutdown command puts
ELCN_NODE into a not
running state (offnet) and
makes it capable of
firmware load (which will
reboot the node). A
manual reboot of the
ELCN_NODE is required
when firmware load is not
performed.
Reset command reboots
the node and does not
require reloading of
firmware.
NODESTATESTR ELCN_NODE State
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
Node State
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
FAIL has failed
LOC is loading
LOAD from a
local
source
NET is loading
LOAD over the
LCN
network
NOT is not
CONFI configure
G d
OFF is
powered
off
OK is running
normally
PWR_ is
ON powered
on and
awaiting
load
QUALI has
F passed
self test
READY has
completed
loading
and is in
initializati
on
TERM is
terminatin
g
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
TEST is under
test
RDNROLESTATE Indicates whether the
module is operating as a
Redundancy
Primary, Secondary, or
Role
logically Non-Redundant.
RDNSYNCSTATE Redundant
Synchronization State.
Synchronizat
Shows the current
ion State
synchronization state.
SOFTFAIL True if diagnostics detects
one or more soft failure.
Soft Failures
Present (See
Soft Failures
Tab for
details)
Redundancy Configuration
EHB Migration Configuration
Enable OPM ENABLEOPMTOEL Yes The Control
to ELCN CN Builder does
not allow
deconfiguratio
n or deletion
of a Platform
Block when
the device is
running. This
parameter
enables the
deconfiguratio
n of the
Classic EHB
platform block
from Control
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
Builder. This
parameter is
enabled for
OPM from
Classic EHB to
ELCN-EHB.
It is applicable
to Classic EHB
only.
ELCNEHB Migration Configuration
Enable OPM ENABLEOPMTOLC Yes The control
to LCN N builder doesn’t
allow
deconfiguratio
n or deletion
of a platform
block when
the device is
running. This
parameter
enables the
deconfiguratio
n of the
ELCNNODE
EHB platform
block from
Control
Builder. This
parameter is
enabled for
backward
migration
from ELCN-
EHB to Classic
EHB.
It is applicable
to ELCN EHB
only.
Redundancy Configuration
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
MODISREDUN Yes Select the checkbox if this
ELCN Node hardware
Module is
module is redundant. The
redundant
Device Index, IP Address,
and LCN Node Number
are all incremented by
one (1) for the secondary.
SECMODNAME The secondary ELCN
Node is automatically
Secondary
assigned a unique default
Tag Name
tag name when it is
created - the Tag Name of
the primary followed by
the abbreviation SEC. The
Secondary Tag Name is
Read Only.
Default: <tag name of
primary>SEC
ELCN Configuration
ELCN ELCNMULTIIPADD Yes Default: 234.129.239.100
Multicast RSTR
The ELCN Multicast IP
Address
Address must match on
the ELCN Bridge and all
ELCN Nodes including
ELCN Appliance Nodes
(such as NIM and AM)
and Windows-based TPS
Nodes (ES-T, ESVT, ACE-T,
and EAPP) in order for
them to communicate.
CAUTION: Honeywell
strongly recommends
that you use the default
ELCN Multicast IP
Address and not change it
unless you are familiar
with the use of the IP
Multicast Protocol.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
If you decide to change
this value from the
default, then you will need
to change the value on
the ELCN Bridge and
every ELCN Node as well.
After the ELCN Bridges
and ELCN Nodes are
running, any changes to
the ELCN Multicast IP
Address should not be
done on-process.
Consult Honeywell or
your personnel familiar
with the use of the IP
Multicast Protocol and
Honeywell Fault Tolerant
Ethernet to determine the
repercussions of
changing the ELCN
Multicast IP Address.
LCN Node ELCNNODENUM Yes LCN node number of the
Number - primary ELCN Node, if
This this is the platform block
that corresponds to the
primary.
The secondary platform
block automatically
configures this LCN node
number in its “LCN Node
Number – Partner”
parameter.
LCN Node ELCNNODENUMP Yes LCN node number of the
Number - ARTNER backup ELCN Node, if this
Partner is the platform block that
corresponds to the
primary.
This node number does
not have to be odd or
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
consecutive. For example,
a valid LCN node number
for the primary can be 24
and a valid LCN node
number for the secondary
can be 30.
The secondary platform
block automatically
configures this LCN node
number in its “LCN Node
Number – This”
parameter.
Advanced Configuration
ALMENBSTATE Yes Used to enable or disable
all block alarms, including
Alarming
soft failures.
Enabled
TEMPHIGHLM Yes
Temperature
High Alarm
(degC)
CPUFREELOWLM Yes
CPU Free
Low Alarm
(%)
MEMFREELOWLM Yes
Main Ram
Free Low
Alarm (%)
NVSFREELOWLM Yes
NVS Free
Low Alarm
(%)
Hiway Emulation Configuration
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
DFNPHWYEM No Determines
whether the
Define
physical Hiway
Physical
to which the
Hiway
EHB belongs
is configured
on this EHB’s
form or on the
local partner
EHB’s form.
When this
parameter is
set to OFF, the
following
parameters
cannot be
configured in
the form.
l HWYNUM
l HWYNUM
PRT
l PHWYPRT
LC
l PHWYPRT
RMIP1
l PHWYPRT
RMIP2
Instead, they
are auto-
populated
while loading
the EHB
platform
block.
It is applicable
to ELCN EHB
also.
HWYNUM Yes This parameter
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
Logical specifies the
Hiway Num number by
which the
Hiway box
(TDC2000
Hiway) was
known on the
LCN when the
Hiway’s HG
was migrated
to EHB. This is
an LCN-local
number which
is not globally
unique.
In addition,
this parameter
is used to
indicate EHBs,
CEEs, and Box
HRBs which
are associated
with the same
Hiway
emulation
under the
same Experion
Server cluster.
It is applicable
to ELCN EHB
also.
HWYNUMPRT Yes This parameter
specifies the
Logical
logical Hiway
Hiway Num
number of the
Partner
EHB, if any,
which is
connected to
the same LCN
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
under the
same Experion
Server cluster
and which had
been
connected to
the same
physical Hiway
through a
partner HG.
This is an
LCNlocal
number which
is not globally
unique. When
DFNPHWYEM
is set to OFF,
HWYNUMPRT
remains
unconfigured
in the form.
Instead, when
the EHB
platform block
is loaded it is
populated
automatically
based on the
partner EHB
indicated by
the HWYNUM
parameter.
It is applicable
to ELCN EHB
also.
PHWYPRTLC No This parameter
specifies the
Local
tag name of
Partner
the EHB, if
any, which is
connected to
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
the same LCN
under the
same Server
cluster and
which had
been
connected to
the same
physical Hiway
through a
partner HG.
There can be
no more than
one other EHB
which replaces
an HG on the
same LCN and
the same
physical
Hiway.
It is applicable
to ELCN EHB
also.
PHWYPRTLCIP No This parameter
specifies the
Local
IP address of
Partner
the EHB
Address
indicated by
the
PHWYPRTLC
parameter. The
value of
PHWYPRTLCI
P parameter is
automatically
populated so
that it is always
consistent with
PHWYPRTLC.
It is applicable
to ELCN EHB
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configur Notes
able
also.
PHWYPRTLCIPISR No Indicates that
ED the local
Local
partner is
Partner is
redundant.
Redundant
ELCN_NODE Block - Redundancy Tab
The Redundancy tab displays redundancy-related information and allows redundancy commands to be
issued when the block is opened on the Monitoring tree in Control Builder. The Redundancy tab is
exposed only when the block is configured as redundant. The “Module is redundant” check box
(MODISREDUN parameter) must be checked on the Main tab of the block.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the
Redundancy tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Redundancy Status
Auto RDNAUTOSYNC Indicates whether auto
Synchronization synchronization is
State ENABLED or
DISABLED in the ELCN
Node. Auto
synchronization is
enabled upon receipt of
the Enable
Synchronization
command
(ENBLSYNCCMD).
When enabled, a
Primary automatically
attempts to synchronize
the Secondary, upon
receipt of any Auto-
Synchronization trigger
(in addition to the
Enable Synchronization
command). Auto
synchronization is
disabled either upon
receipt of the Disable
Synchronization
command
(DSBLSYNCCMD) or
detection of a
persistent
synchronization fault
condition (For example,
end-to-end checksum
failure, synchronization
hardware failure, and so
on). When disabled, the
user must explicitly
issue the Enable
Synchronization
command to reset any
persistent fault
condition and re-
attempt initial-sync.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Redundancy RDNCMPT Redundancy Partner
Compatibility Compatibility -
Indicates whether
redundant partner
modules are
compatible (from a
controller redundancy
perspective) and if not
compatible, provides a
reason why.
Inhibit Sync RDNINHIBITSYNC Redundancy Inhibit
Reason Synchronization -
Indicates the current
reason why initial sync
is inhibited.
Initial Sync RDNSYNCPROG Initial Sync Progress -
Process (%) Indicates the initial
synchronization
progress in terms of
percent complete.
Last SYNCTIMEBEG Last Synchronization
Synchronization Time. System-time that
Time module completed
initial synchronization.
Last Loss of SYNCTIMEEND Last Sync Lost Time.
Sync Time System-time that
module last lost
synchronization.
Redundancy RDNCTLABILITY Describes the module's
Controllability ability to control
relative to its redundant
partner.
Device Index RDNDEVICEIDX Serves as a unique
identifier that does not
follow the redundancy
role. This parameter
shows the Device Index
specified using buttons
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
on the hardware's front
entry panel.
Redundancy Statistics
Total Tx Rate (k RDNTXRATE
Bit/sec)
Total Rx Rate (k RDNRXRATE
Bit/sec)
Total Tx Rate RDNTXRATEMAX
Max (k Bit/sec)
Total Rx Rate RDNRXRATEMAX
Max (k Bit/sec
Max Initial Sync RDNISTIMEMAX Max Initial Sync Time -
Time (sec) Indicates the maximum
initial synchronization
time in seconds. This is
a high-water mark for
all the previous
successfully completed
initial-sync
attempts.
Max Switchover RDNSOTIMEMAX Maximum Switchover
Time (msec) Time - Indicates the
high-water mark with
regard to redundancy
switchover time, in
milli-seconds.
[Disable DSBLSYNCCMD* Used to disable
Synchronization] synchronization
(and/or disable auto-
synchronization). This
parameter has edge
trigger semantics and
always returns OFF
when read.
[Become BECMPRICMD* Used to command an
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Primary] unsynchronized
secondary to transition
into the primary role in
the absence of a
partner. This parameter
has edge trigger
semantics and always
returns OFF when read.
[Enable ENBLSYNCCMD* Used to command
Synchronization] initial synchronization
(and enable auto-
synchronization). This
parameter has edge
trigger semantics and
always returns OFF
when read.
[Initiate SWITCHCMD* Used to command
Switchover] switchover to a
synchronized pair of
redundancy modules.
This parameter has
edge trigger semantics
and always returns OFF
when read.
*
NOTE: The Redundancy commands can be performed at the Operator access
level; however, a Redundancy command should be performed only when
necessary and only when such action is intended by personnel familiar with its
purpose and effect.
Redundancy History
Time RDNHISTTIME Indicates wall clock
time of redundancy
history state change.
Event RDNHISTSTATE Indicates the last 16
milestones within
redundancy related
activities. Refer to the
corresponding
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
RDNHISTREASON entry
for additional
information (when
applicable).
Reason RDNHISTREASON Redundancy History
Reason - Provide
rational for the
occurrence of a
redundancy history
state. Includes rational
for the following:
IR : Initial Redundancy
Role Determination
IS : Commencing Initial
Sync
CMPT : Partner
Compatibility
ROLE : Redundancy
Role Change
SYNC : Loss-of-Sync
and Commencing
Initial Sync
Redundancy RDNLINKFAILED Indicates the status of
Link Failed the redundancy private
path between
redundant partners.
ELCN_NODE Block - System Time tab
The System Time tab displays information about the block’s time source and synchronization with that
time source. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the System Time
tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
System Time
Current System CURTIME No Displays the current
Time system time, as
communicated from
the Server. The format
is MM/DD/YY
HH:MM:SS.
Current System TIMESOURCE No Displays the current
Time Source time source in use for
time synchronization.
NTP Status (Network Time Protocol)
NTP Status NTPSTAT No Displays the NTP status.
NTP Server NTPADDRESS No Displays the IP address
Address of NTP server.
NTP Offset NTPOFFSET Clock offset between
(msec) NTP server and device,
in milliseconds.
NTP Maximum NTPOFFSETMAX High water mark of
Offset (msec) clock offset between
NTP server and device,
in milliseconds.
NTP Last NTPLASTSTRATUM
Stratum Value
System Time Synchronization Status
Time TIMESYNCSTAT No Time Sync Status:
Synchronization
---, ERROR, SKEWED,
Status
or SYNCED
Time of Last TIMELASTSYNC No Displays the time last
Time Sync module synced with
time source.
Skew at Last TIMELASTSKEW No The new difference
Time Sync between controller
(msec) time and new time.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Precision Time Protocol
Enable PTPENABLE Yes When enabled (ON), the
Precision Time PTP client should
Protocol attempt to synchronize
its local clock with a
PTP GrandMaster. For
EHPM, this value is
always set as ON and it
is not editable.
PTP Status PTPSTAT No Displays the current
status of the PTP time
synchronization.
PTP Master IP PTPMASTERIP No Displays the IP address
Address of the PTP
GrandMaster clock.
PTP Offset PTPOFFSET Clock offset between
(msec) PTP server and device,
in milliseconds.
PTP Maximum PTPOFFSETMAX High water mark of
Offset (msec) clock offset between
PTP server and device,
in milliseconds.
ELCN_ NODE Block - Statistics Tab
The Statistics tab displays various statistical parameters used for maintaining and monitoring data flow,
network statistics, and so on. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on
the Statistics tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
CPU Statistics
CPU Free CPUFREEAVG No Displays the rolling
(%) average of free CPU
not currently used for
processing by the
CPM.
Minimum CPUFREEMIN No Displays the historic
CPU Free minimum of the
(%) unused CPU
available.
Time Since UPTIME No Displays the elapsed
Power up time since module
power up or restart.
NVS Statistics
NVS Free NVSFREEAVG No NVS free running
(%) average, in percent.
NVS Free NVSFREEMIN No
Minimum
(%)
Initiating to TNUMSMSCINCON
SM SCs
Notification and Network Message Statistics
Notifications TNUMNTFRQUAVG No Displays the rolling
Rate average of
notification request
throughput.
Maximum TNUMNTFRQUMAX No Displays the
Notifications maximum of
Rate notification request
throughput since last
store of STATSRESET.
Responder TRNUMINMSGAVGPS No Low water mark for
Input Rate NVS free running
average, in percent.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Max TRNUMINMSGMAXPS No
Responder
Input Rate
Responder TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS No
Output Rate
Max TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS No
Responder
Output Rate
Responding TNUMC3OUTCON No Number of SM Input
to C300s Connections - This
parameter defines
the number of SMs
for peer targets.
[Reset All STATSRESET Used to reset all
Statistics] statistics.
Memory Statistics
Main Ram MEMFREEAVG No Main Ram Free (%)
Free (%)
Main RAM MEMFREEMIN No Main RAM Free
Free Minimum (%)
Minimum
(%)
Hardware Temperature
Enclosure TEMPAVG No
Temperature
(degC)
Maximum TEMPMAX No
Temperature
(degC)
Minimum TEMPMIN No
Temperature
(degC)
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
ELCN_NODE Block – Hardware Information Tab
The Hardware Information tab displays firmware information, hardware factory information, and the
MAC address related data for the ELCN Node. The following table summarizes the parameter data you
can monitor on the Hardware Information tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Firmware Version
Application IMAGEVER_D No Displays the current
Image Version version of Application
personality image
firmware in the UEA.
Example: EXP501.1-28.0
Boot Image BOOTIMAGEVER No Displays the current
Version version of Boot personality
image firmware in the
UEA.
Example: EXP501.1-28.0
Hardware Factory Information
Module Type MODTYPE No Displays the hardware type
of Universal Embedded
Appliance (UEA):<model
number> Univ Emb
Appliance
Serial Number SERIALNUM No Displays the UEA serial
number.
Programmable PLVERSION No Factory programmed
Logic Revision logic device version differs
from the boot/application
image version, (which is
updated with firmware
load) in that the hardware
has to be returned to the
factory for this version to
be updated.
Hardware HWREVMAJ No Displays the hardware
Version major version.
Hardware HWREVMIN No Displays the hardware
Revision minor revision.
Network Interface Address Information
FTE (Yellow) LANAMACADDR No Displays the media access
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
MAC Address control address of port A
(yellow port).
FTE (Green) LANBMACADDR No Displays the media access
MAC Address control address of port A
(green port).
Redundancy RDNMACADDR No Displays the media access
MAC Address control address of port
used for redundancy link.
ELCN_NODE Block - FTE Tab
The FTE tab displays statistics related to FTE communications and performance. It features parameters
associated with the MAC Address Resolution Table (MART), which deals with online media access
control (MAC) address mapping. Two separate MARTs are maintained, one for FTE nodes and the
other for non-FTE nodes. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
FTE tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Current FTE Traffic
Total Tx LANTXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(kBit/sec) transmission rate in
kilobits per second
(kbps) for port A
(yellow tree port) on
the FTE interface.
Total Rx LANRXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(kBit/sec) receive rate in kbps for
port A (yellow tree
port) on the FTE
interface.
Current FTE Traffic
FTE A Tx LANATXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(pkts/sec) transmission rate in
packets per second for
port A (yellow tree
port) on the FTE
interface.
FTE B Tx LANBTXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(pkts/sec) transmission rate in
packets per second for
port B (green tree port)
on the FTE interface.
FTE A Rx LANARXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(pkts/sec) receive rate in packets
per second for port A
(yellow tree port) on
the FTE interface.
FTE B Rx LANBRXRATE No Displays
Rate communication
(pkts/sec) receive rate in kbps for
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
port B (green tree port)
on the FTE interface.
FTE A LANABLOCKEDRATE No Packets per second
Block blocked (by CF9
Rate firewall) on FTE A
(pkts/sec) cable.
FTE B LANBBLOCKEDRATE No Packets per second
Block blocked (by CF9
Rate firewall) on FTE B
(pkts/sec) cable.
FTE Statistics
Number NUMFTENODES No Displays the current
of FTE number of FTE nodes
Nodes within the FTE
community.
Max MAXFTENODES No Displays the maximum
Number number of FTE nodes
of FTE that have been
Nodes detected within the
FTE community.
Max MAXNODEID No Displays the highest
Device device index supported
Index within the FTE
community.
FTE LANRXERR No Receive errors on FTE
Receive A cable.
Errors
FTE LANTXERR No Receive errors on FTE
Transmit B cable.
Errors
FTE MART Statistics
Address FTEMARTADDRCOUNT No Displays the number of
Count IP addresses contained
in the FTE MART.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Max FTEMARTMAXDEPTH No Displays the maximum
Depth depth that the FTE
MART has reached or
the highest number of
entries in the table.
Average FTEMARKAVGDEPTH No Displays the average
Depth depth of the FTE MART
or the average number
of entries in the table.
Address FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT No Displays the number of
Collisions collisions that have
occurred while hashing
the FTE MART.
Peak FTE Traffic
Total Tx LANTXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(kBit/sec) transmission rate in on
the FTE interface.
Total Rx LANRXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(kBit/sec) receive rate in kbps on
the FTE interface.
Peak FTE Traffic
FTE A Tx LANATXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(pkts/sec) transmission rate in
packets per second for
port A (yellow tree
port) on the FTE
interface.
FTE B Tx LANBTXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(pkts/sec) transmission rate in
packets per second for
port B (green tree port)
on the FTE interface.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
FTE A Rx LANARXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(pkts/sec) receive rate in packets
per second for port A
(yellow tree port) on
the FTE interface.
FTE B Rx LANBRXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(pkts/sec) receive rate in packets
per second for port B
(green tree port) on the
FTE interface.
FTE A LANABLOCKEDRATEMAX No Displays
Block communication
Rate Max receive rate in packets
(pkts/sec) per second for port A
(yellow tree port) on
the FTE interface.
FTE B LANBBLOCKEDRATEMAX No Displays
Block communication
Rate Max receive rate in packets
(pkts/sec) per second for port B
(green tree port) on the
FTE interface.
FTE failure indicators
FTE A LANAFAILED No Provides status
(Yellow) indicator for port A
Failed (yellow tree port) on
the FTE interface.
FTE B LANBFAILED No Provides status
(Green) indicator for port B
Failed (green tree port) on the
FTE interface.
InterLAN INTERLANFAILED No Provides status
Comm indicator for Inter-LAN
Failed communications.
Crossover XOVERFAILED No Provides status
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Cable indicator for crossover
Failed cable.
ELCN_NODE Block - ETH Tab
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the ETH tab of the configuration
form for the selected block and is for the NO-to-NG traffic. This is applicable only for ELCN NG node.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Current ETH Traffic
Total Tx DLINKTXRATE No Total packets transferred
Rate since Network Gateway was
(kBit/sec) loaded.
Total Rx DLINKRXRATE No Total packets received
Rate since Network Gateway was
(kBit/sec) loaded.
ETH 1 Tx DLINK1TXRATE No Displays the packets
Rate transmitted per second
(pkts/sec) over ETH 1 interface.
ETH 2 Tx DLINK2TXRATE No Displays the packets
Rate transmitted per second
(pkts/sec) over ETH 2 interface.
ETH 1 Rx DLINK1RXRATE No Displays the packets
Rate received per second over
(pkts/sec) ETH 1 interface.
ETH 2 Rx DLINK2RXRATE No Displays the packets
Rate received per second over
(pkts/sec) ETH 2 interface.
Eth 1 DLINKRXERR No Receive errors on ETH 1
Receive cable.
Errors
Eth 2 DLINK2RXERR No Receive errors on ETH 2
Receive cable.
Errors
Peak ETH Traffic
Total Tx DLINKTXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication
(kBit/sec) transmission rate in kilobits
per second (kbps) over
ETH/downlink network.
Total Rx DLINKRXRATEMAX No Displays maximum
Rate Max communication receive
(kBit/sec) rate in kilobits per second
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
(kbps) over ETH/downlink
network.
ETH 1 Tx DLINK1TXRATEMAX No Displays the maximum
Rate Max packets transmitted per
(pkts/sec) second over ETH 1
interface.
ETH 2 Tx DLINK2TXRATEMAX No Displays the maximum
Rate Max packets transmitted per
(pkts/sec) second over ETH 2
interface.
ETH 1 Rx DLINK1RXRATEMAX No Displays the maximum
Rate Max packets received per
(pkts/sec) second over ETH 1
interface.
ETH 2 Rx DLINK2RXRATEMAX No Displays the maximum
Rate Max packets received per
(pkts/sec) second over ETH 2
interface.
ETH Status
ETH 1 DLINK1SILENT No Displays whether ETH 1 is
Silent receiving packets.
ETH 2 DLINK2SILENT No Displays whether ETH 2 is
Silent receiving packets.
ETH 1 DLINK1FAILED No Displays whether ETH 1 is
Failed disconnected.
ETH 2 DLINK2FAILED No Displays whether ETH 2 is
Failed disconnected.
Duplicate DLINKDUPEADDR No Displays whether a
IP Address duplicate address is
Detected detected on the
ETH/downlink network.
ETH IP Addresses
Network ETH1IPADDRSTR No Displays the IP address for
Gateway the Network Gateway ETH
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
ETH1 IP 1 interface.
Add
Network ETH2IPADDRSTR No Displays the IP address for
Gateway the Network Gateway ETH
ETH2 IP 2 interface.
Add
ELCN_NODE Block – ELCN Node Status Tab
The ELCN Node Status tab displays the status of emulated board slots. The following table summarizes
the parameter data you can monitor on the ELCN Node Status tab of the configuration form for the
selected block.
User
Plain
Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Text
Slot#
Board SLOT#TYPE The type of board that is
Type installed in Slot #. Slots 2-4
where # is 2, 3, or 4
are the boards that are being
emulated by the device.
Board SLOT#BOARDSTATUS Slot # board has failed
Failed
where # is 2, 3, or 4
Board SLOT#SELFTEST Slot # board has passed self
Self test
where # is 2, 3, or 4
Test
Status
Status SLOT#STATUS Slot # registers. This data
reflects the slot register
where # is 2, 3, or 4
contents for each of the
emulated slots. During
operations, the register
contents change at a very high
rate, but the data is updated
only at the designated refresh
rate. Slot Register data is of a
diagnostic nature and is
normally of use only to
Honeywell Field Service
personnel.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
ELCN_NODE Block - ELCN Node Statistics Tab
The ELCN Node Statistics tab display statistics related to operation of the ELCN Node. The following
table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the ELCN Node Statistics tab of the
configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Current Traffic
LCN Tx Rate LCNTXRATE Data packets
[pkts/sec] transmitted to ELCN
ELCN Tx Rate ELCNTXRATE Data packets
[pkts/sec] transmitted to ELCN
ELCN Rx Rate ELCNRXRATE Data packets received
[pkts/sec] from ELCN
Errors (counts)
ELCN Invalid ELCNPACKETINV ELCN packet indicator
Packet missing in the received
ELCN packet header.
ELCN Invalid ELCNLNGTHINV Received ELCN packet
Length data length does not
match.
ELCN Invalid ELCNSRCINV ELCN Invalid Source
Source count. Source node >
127 in the received
ELCN packet
ELCN Out of ELCNSEQINV ELCN Out of Sequence
Sequence count. Sequence
number in the received
ELCN packet not
expected
ELCN ELCNCOMMINV ELCN Communication
Communication Error count. Transmit or
Error Receive socket error.
Detail in the event log.
Peak Traffic
ELCN Tx Rate ELCNTXRATEMAX Data packets
Max [pkts/sec] transmitted to ELCN
ELCN Rx Rate ELCNRXRATEMAX Data packets received
Max [pkts/sec] from ELCN
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
ELCN_NODE Block – UDP/TCP Tab
The UDP/TCP tab displays statistics related to open UDP and TCP connections associated with the
respective ELCN Node block. It features parameters used for maintenance and performance monitoring
purposes. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the UDP/TCP tab of
the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
UDP Statistics
Datagrams UDPINDGRAMS No Displays the total
Delivered number of UDP
datagrams delivered to
UDP users.
Datagrams UDPNOPORTS No Displays the total
for Unknown number of received
Ports UDP datagrams for
which there was no
application at the
destination port.
Datagrams UDPINERRORS No Displays the number
Dropped for of received UDP
Errors datagrams that could
not be delivered for
reasons other than the
lack of an application
at the destination port.
Datagrams UDPINCSUMERRORS No
with
Checksum
Error
Datagrams UDPOUTGRAMS No Displays the total
Sent to number of UDP
Applications datagrams sent from
this entity.
TCP Statistics
Active Opens TCPACTIVEOPENS No Displays the number
of times TCP
connections have
made a direct
transition to the SYN-
SENT state from the
CLOSED state.
Passive TCPPASSIVEOPENS No Displays the number
Opens of times TCP
connections have
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
made a direct
transition to the SYN-
RCVD state from the
LISTEN state.
Failed TCPATTEMPTFAILS No Displays the number
Connection of times TCP
Attempts connections have
made a direct
transition to the
CLOSED state from
either the SYNSENT
state or the SYN-
RCVD state, plus the
number of times TCP
connections have
made a direct
transition to the
LISTEN state from the
SYN-RCVD state.
Connections TCPESTABRESETS No Displays the number
Resets of times TCP
connections have
made a direct
transition to the
CLOSED state from
either the
ESTABLISHED state or
the CLOSE-WAIT state.
Current TCPCURRESTAB No Displays the number
Connections of TCP connections for
which the current state
is either
ESTABLISHED or
CLOSE- WAIT.
Segments TCPINSEGS No Displays the total
Received number of segments
received, including
those received in error.
This count includes
segments received on
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
currently established
connections.
Segments TCPOUTSEGS No Displays the total
Sent number of segments
sent, including those
on current
connections but
excluding those
containing only
retransmitted octets.
Segments TCPRETRANSSEGS No Displays the total
Retransmitted number of segments
retransmitted, that is,
the number of TCP
segments transmitted
containing one or
more previously
transmitted octets.
Segments TCPINERRS No Displays the total
Discarded For number of segments
Errors received in error. For
example, bad TCP
checksums.
Segments TCPINCSUMERRS No Displays the total
with number of segments
Checksum received in error. For
Errors example, bad TCP
checksums.
Reset TCPOUTRESETS No Displays the number
Segments of TCP segments sent
Sent containing the RST
flag.
ELCN_NODE Block – IP/ICMP Tab
The IP/ICMP tab displays statistics related to IP and ICMP protocol messages associated with (that is,
originating in or received by) the respective ELCN Node block. It features parameters used for
maintenance and status operations on the network. The following table summarizes the parameter data
you can monitor on the IP/ ICMP tab of the configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain
Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Text
IP Statistics
Datagrams IPINRECEIVES Displays the total number of input
received from datagrams received from
No
connected nodes, including those
Below received in error.
Datagrams IPINHDRERRORS Displays the number of input
datagrams discarded due to
Format Error
errors in their IP headers,
Drops including bad checksums, version
No
number mismatch, other format
errors, time-to-live exceeded,
errors discovered in processing
their IP options, and so on.
Datagrams IPINADDRERRORS Displays the number of input
datagrams discarded because the
Misdelivery
IP address in their IP header's
Drops destination field was not a valid
address to be received at this
entity.
This count includes invalid
No addresses, such as 0.0.0.0, and
addresses of unsupported
classes, such as Class E. For
entities which are not IP
Gateways and therefore do not
forward datagrams, this counter
includes datagrams discarded
because the destination address
was not a local address.
Unknown IPINUNKNOWNPORTS Displays the number of locally-
addressed datagrams received
Protocol
No successfully but discarded
Datagrams because of an unknown or
unsupported protocol.
Datagrams IPINDISCARDS Displays the number of input IP
datagrams for which no problems
Discarded for
were encountered to prevent their
Resrcs continued processing, but which
were discarded for another
No
reason. For example, discarded
for lack of buffer space. Note that
this counter does not include any
datagrams discarded while
awaiting re- assembly.
Datagrams IPINDELIVERS Displays the total number of input
Delivered datagrams successfully delivered
No
to IP user-protocols, including
Above ICMP.
Datagrams IPOUTREQUESTS Displays the total number of IP
No datagrams which local IP user-
Sent Out
protocols, including ICMP,
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain
Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Text
supplied to IP in requests for
transmission.
Out Datagrams IPOUTDISCARDS Displays the number of output IP
datagrams for which no problem
Discarded
was encountered to prevent their
No transmission to their destination,
but which were discarded for
another reason. For example,
discarded for lack of buffer space.
Datagrams IPOUTNOROUTES Displays the number of IP
Drops for No datagrams discarded because no
No
route could be found to transmit
Routes them to their destination.
Fragments IPREASSEMREQS
Displays the number of IP
Needing No fragments received which needed
Reassembly to be reassembled at this entity.
Fragments IPREASSEMOKS Displays the number of IP
No datagrams successfully
Reassembled
reassembled.
Fragments IPREASSEMFAILS Displays the number of failures
Reassembly detected by the IP reassembly
No
algorithm for reasons such as,
Fails timed out, errors, and so on.
ICMP Statistics
Messages ICMPINMSGS Displays the total number of ICMP
No messages which the entity
Received
received.
Messages with ICMPINERRORS Displays the number of ICMP
messages which the entity
Format Errors
received but determined as
No
having ICMP-specific errors, such
as bad ICMP checksums, bad
length, and so on.
Messages with ICMPINCSUMERRORS
Checksum No
Errors
Dest. ICMPINDESTUNREAC
Displays the number of ICMP
Unreachable HS No destination unreachable
Msgs Recvd messages received.
Echo Messages ICMPINECHOS Displays the number of ICMP
No echo (request) messages
Recvd
received.
Echo Reply ICMPINECHOREPS Displays the number of ICMP
Messages No
echo reply messages received.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
Plain
Parameter Name User Configurable Notes
Text
Recvd
Messages Sent ICMPOUTMSGS Displays the total number of ICMP
No messages which this entity
attempted to send.
Out Error ICMPOUTERRORS Displays the number of ICMP
messages which this entity did not
Messages
No send due to problems discovered
within ICMP such as a lack of
buffers.
Dest. ICMPOUTDESTUNRE
Displays the number of ICMP
Unreachable ACHS No destination unreachable
Messages Sent messages sent.
Echo Messages ICMPOUTECHOS Displays the number of ICMP
No
Sent echo (request) messages sent.
Echo Reply ICMPOUTECHOREPS Displays the number of ICMP
No
Messages Sent echo reply messages sent.
ELCN_NODE Block - Soft Failures Tab
The Soft Failures tab displays various soft failure conditions for the ELCN Node hardware. The following
table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Soft Failures tab of the configuration form
for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Soft Failure Conditions
FTE Device Index BCDSWSTS True if the FTE
device index
Changed
switches have been
changed since the
device was powered
on. If the FTE device
index switches are
changed and the
device is restarted,
the FTE IP address
may change.
Factory Data FACTDATAERR True if the factory
data in the device
Error
EEPROM is missing
or invalid for the
currently loaded
firmware.
Thermometer THERMERR True if the device
hardware
Failure
thermometer has
failed.
Enclosure TEMPCRIT
True if the enclosure
Temperature temperature exceeds
Critical the critical limit.
FPGA Hardware FPGAFAIL True if the device
detects a failure with
Failure
the FPGA
functionality.
WDT Hardware WDTHWFAIL True if the device
detects a failure with
Failure
the hardware
watchdog
functionality. Note
that this diagnostic
detects if the
hardware watchdog
is functioning only.
Critical Task TASKHLTHMON True one or more
tasks fails to update
Watchdog
the critical task
Warning watchdog within 5
seconds.
Uncorrectable RAMSWEEPERR True if an
Internal RAM uncorrectable
memory error has
Sweep Error been detected.
Corrected RAMSCRUBERRS True if a correctable
memory error has
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Internal RAM been detected within
Sweep Error the last 24 hours.
Minimum MINHWREVSF True if device
hardware fails to
Recommended
meet the minimum
HW Revision recommended
hardware revision for
the currently loaded
firmware.
FTE Network FTENETWORKERR True if device
detected an FTE
Error
network error; for
example, FTE cable
failure.
Partner Not FTEPARTNERNOTVISIBLE
True if the redundant
Visible on FTE partner is not visible
Network on the FTE network.
ETH1SOFTFAIL No Indicates whether
ETH1 interface is
receiving traffic (or
not). It shows True if
the redundant
partner is not visible
on the FTE network.
ETH2SOFTFAIL No Indicates whether
ETH2 interface is
receiving traffic (or
not). It shows True if
the redundant
partner is not visible
on the FTE network.
ELCN_NODE Block - Traces Tab
The Traces tab is used to configure the ELCN Node block. This tab also displays important state
information and supports generation of commands to the ELCN Node through the parameters. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain
Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Text
DBTRACEFLAG1 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value
indicating 32 flags each of which
can govern diagnostic tracing of
a specific area of interest.
DBTRACEFLAGS1 governs
tracing for platform application
DBTRACEFLAG2 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value
indicating 32 flags each of which
can govern diagnostic tracing of
a specific area of interest.
DBTRACEFLAGS2 governs
tracing for uea display application
DBTRACEFLAG3 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value
indicating 32 flags each of which
can govern diagnostic tracing of
a specific area of interest.
DBTRACEFLAGS3 governs
tracing for lcnp4emu application
DBTRACEFLAG4 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value
indicating 32 flags each of which
can govern diagnostic tracing of
a specific area of interest.
DBTRACEFLAGS4 governs
tracing for ELCNNODE type
dependent application as follows:
ENIM- epni2emu, NG- engiAemu,
EHB- ehbemu, ENB- enbemu
DBTRACEFLAG5 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value
indicating 32 flags each of which
can govern diagnostic tracing of
a specific area of interest.
DBTRACEFLAGS5 governs
tracing for ELCNNODE types as
follows: NG- engiBemu, else-
ftesysapp application
DBTRACEENABLE Yes This parameter
indicates whether
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain
Parameter Name Configurable Notes
Text
GTAC-directed
diagnostic tracing is
enabled. If the value
is true, it will trigger
a SoftFail on the
node, so that
operators/engineers
are aware that
diagnostic tracing is
enabled.
ELCN_NODE Block - EPLCG Tab
The EPLCG tab is used to configure the ELCN Node block. This tab also displays important state
information and supports generation of commands to the ELCN Node through the parameters. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurab Notes
le
Channel 1 Port Configuration
Baud Rate EPLCGCH1BAUDRATE Yes Baud rate
used in
communicatio
n with PLCs
attached to
the EPLCG
Field Port 1.
Parity EPLCGCH1PARITY Yes Serial parity in
communicatio
n with PLCs
attached to
the EPLCG
Field Port 1.
Channel 2 Port Configuration
Baud Rate EPLCGCH2BAUDRATE Yes Baud rate
used in
communicatio
n with PLCs
attached to
the EPLCG
Field Port 2.
Parity EPLCGCH2PARITY Yes Serial parity in
communicatio
n with PLCs
attached to
the EPLCG
Field Port 2.
EPLCG Options
Redundant EPLCGREDUNDCOMMSOPTI Yes When set to
Communicatio ON FALSE Ports 1
ns and 2 provide
two
independent
paths each
communicatin
g with a set of
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurab Notes
le
unique PLCs.
When set to
TRUE Ports 1
and 2 provide
redundant
communicatio
n path to a
single set of
PLCs.
Multi-Buffer EPLCGMULTIBUFPIPELINE Yes Perform data
Pipelining acquisition
using multiple
'pipelined'
buffers. Use
this option to
obtain
maximum
data
acquisition
performance
at the expense
of increased
PLC network
bandwidth
consumption.
By default,
data
acquisition
uses a single
non-pipelined
buffer to
reduce PLC
network
bandwidth
consumption
at the expense
of decreased
data
acquisition
performance.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurab Notes
le
User Output EPLCGUSEROUTPUTSUPPR Yes A value of
Suppression ESS False permits
user outputs
to PLC via
Analog
outputs,
Digital
Outputs and
Timer/Counte
rs. A value of
TRUE
suppresses
user outputs
to PLC via
Analog
outputs,
Digital
Outputs and
Timer/Counte
rs. Keepalives
are not
affected.
ELCN_NODE Block - EAMR Tab
The EAMR tab is used to configure the ELCN Node block. This tab also displays important state
information and supports generation of commands to the ELCN Node through the parameters. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected block.
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
EAMR Redundancy Statistics
Messages EAMRMSGSPERSEC Yes Averaged over 5
Per Second seconds. These
can be sent in
either direction,
primary or
secondary.
Data EAMRDATAPKTSPERSEC Yes Data packets are
Packets Per only issued from
Second the primary AM to
the secondary AM
Signal EAMRSIGPKTSPERSEC Yes Signal packets
Packets Per can be sent in
Second either direction,
primary or
secondary.
EAMR RDN- EAMRPERCENTOPTAVG Yes Averaged over 5
link seconds.
optimization Optimization
% value is the
reduction in
traffic as % of
overall traffic. For
example, if traffic
would normally
be 1000 data
packets, but the
optimization
reduced this
traffic to 900 data
packets, then this
value would be 10
(%).
EAMR RDN EAMRRDNXFERMBPERSEC Yes Averaged over 5
link seconds. This can
MBits/Sec be measured in
either direction,
primary or
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
User
Plain Text Parameter Name Configurable Notes
secondary. This
value can be used
to characterize
the load that
EAMR RDN link
may be expected
to place on a
virtual production
communication
link which, as
opposed to the
dedicated UEA
RDN wire, may be
shared with other
virtual
communications
across the same
virtual data
transport.
4.26 TCMI platform block
Descrip The TCMI platform block represents the TCMI hardware and is used
tion for defining a TCMI module, in Control Builder.
The TCMI platform block is designed to be stand-alone and it belongs
to the independent block category.
The TCMI platform block has the multiple tabs which represent the
parameters that are mostly for viewing the current status and
statistics values of a TCMI module’s operation:
Functio l In the Control Builder Project tree view, configuration parameters can be configured.
n The state and statistical parameters are view or read only.
l The Main tab shows the unique addressing information.
l A TCMI module is redundant. The value of the “Module is Redundant” parameter is
selected by default.
l When loading the block, load the primary and the secondary.
Parameters 24VPNSTS PTPENABLE
ACTUALSCANTIME PTPMASTERIP
ADDRCOUNT PTPOFFSET
ALMENBSTATE PTPOFFSETMAX
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
ASSOCASSET PTPROCESSOROVERRUN
AVGDEPTH PTPSTAT
BECMPRICMD RDNAUTOSYNC
BOOTIMAGEVER RDNCMPT
COMPOSITESTATE RDNCTLABILITY
COMPOSITEKEYSW RDNDEVICEIDX
COLLCOUNT RDNHISTSTATE
CPUFREEAVG RDNHISTTIME
CPUFREEMIN1 RDNINHIBITSYNC
CTRLCONFIRM RDNISTIMEMAX
CURRENTTIMESRC RDNMACADDR
CURRENTTIMESYNCSTS RDNROLESTATE
CURTIME RDNRXRATE
DEVICEIDX RDNRXRATEMAX
DOWNLINKFAIL RDNSOTIMEMAX
DSBLSYNCCMD RDNSYNCPROG
ENBLLOGICALENIM RDNSYNCSTATE
ENBLSYNCCMD RDNTXRATE
ENIMIPADDR RDNTXRATEMAX
EUCNAUTHGROUP REASONSET
EVENTMSGSENT REQUSTEDSCANTIME
EVENTMSGRETRIED SCANOVERRUN
EVENTRECEIVERDROPPED SCANPNTDTL
EVENTNAKRECEIVED SCANGRPDTL
EVENTTHROTTLEREQ SCANASSOCDSP
FANSTS SCANCTRLLVL
FILEPOSITION SECCANTTALKTOPRIONUC
N
FTEABLOCKRATE
SECSIGSECLVL
FTEARXRATE
SECMODNAME
FTEATXRATE
SECNOTSYNED
FTEBBLOCKRATE
SECONDARYSIG
FTEBRXRATE
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
FTEBTXRATE SERIALNUM
FTEGREENFAILED SOFTFAIL
FTEGREENFAILEDSF STATSRESET
FTEGREENSILENT SWITCHCMD
FTEGREENSILENTSF SYNCTIMEBEG
FTERECEIVEERRORS SYNCTIMEEND
FTETRANSMITERRORS SURPLUSSCNTIME
FTEYELLOWFAILED TCMIANDTCMKEYSWPOS
MISMATCH
FTEYELLOWFAILEDSF
TCMIAUTHGROUP
FTEYELLOWSILENT
TCMIAUTHSERVERIP
FTEYELLOWSILENTSF
TCMIAUTHSTS
HOSTSOESTS
TCMIDOWNLINKIP
HWREVMAJ
TCMIDOWNLINKRXERROR
HWREVMIN
TCMIDOWNLINKRXRATE
HWTEMP
TCMIDOWNLINKTXERROR
ICMPINCSUMERRORS
TCMIDOWNLINKTXRATE
ICMPINDESTUNREACHS
TCMIDRIFTVALUE
ICMPINECHOREPS
TCMIIPADDRLEFT
ICMPINECHOS
TCMIIPADDRRIGHT
ICMPINERRORS
TCMIMULTIIPADDR
ICMPINMSGS
TCMINODEDATE
ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS
TCMINODETIME
ICMPOUTECHOREPS
TCMINODETYPE
ICMPOUTECHOS
TCMINUM
ICMPOUTERRORS
TCMIPRIVATEPATHIP
ICMPOUTMSGS
TCMIPRIMARYKEYSWITCH
IMAGEVER_D
TCMIPRIVATEPATHRXERR
INTERLANFAILED
OR
IPADDRESS
TCMIPRIVATEPATHRXRAT
IPINRECEIVES E
IPINHDRERRORS TCMIPRIVATEPATHTXERR
OR
IPINADDRERRORS
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
IPINUNKNOWNPORTS TCMIPRIVATEPATHTXRAT
E
IPINDISCARDS
TCMISECKEYSWITCH
IPINDELIVERS
TCMISYNCHERNODE
IPOUTREQUESTS
TCMITIMESYNCFAIL
IPOUTDISCARDS
TCMKEYSWITCH
IPOUTNOROUTES
TCMPROGRAM
IPREASSEMREQS
TCMPROGRAMSTATE
IPREASSEMOKS
TCMVERSION
IPREASSMFAILS
TCPACTIVEOPENS
LANAMACADDR
TCPATTEMPTFAILS
LANBMACADDR
TCPCURESTAB
LCDDSPSTS
TCPESTABRESETS
LCNBATTERYFAIL
TCPINCSUMERRS
LCTIMESYNCFAIL
TCPINERRS
MAXDEPTH
TCPINSEGS
MEMFREEAVG
TCPOUTRESETS
MEMFREEMIN
TCPOUTSEGS
MODISREDUN
TCPPASSIVEOPENS
MODTYPE
TCPRETRANSSEGS
MAXDEVICEINDEX
TEMPAVG
MAXNOOFFTENODES
TEMPMAX
NODESTATESTR
TEMPMIN
NODETIMESYNCSTS
TIMESOURCE
NOOFFTENODES
TNUMC3OUTCON
NTPADDRESS
TNUMSMSCINCON
NTPLASTSTRATUM
TNUMNTFRQUAVG
NTPOFFSET
TNUMNTFRQUMAX
NTPOFFSETMAX
TOTALRXRATE
NTPSTAT
TOTALRXRATEMAX
NUMOFEVENTRECVRS
TOTALTXRATE
NUMOFSCANTABLEEVENTS
TOTALTXRATEMAX
NUMSIGS
Chapter 4 - Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types
NVSFREEAVG TPNCLKSRCMASTER
NVSFREEMIN TPNTIMESTR
OWNINGENIM TRNUMINMSGAVGPS
OVERTEMP TRNUMINMSGMAXPS
P2PEFFICIENCY TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS
P2PSCANPERIOD TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS
PEAKFTEABLOCKRATE TRICONDATE
PEAKFTEARXRATE TRICONEXMAINTREQ
PEAKFTEATXRATE TRICONTIME
PEAKFTEBRXRATE TRINODENUM
PEAKFTEBTXRATE TRIPRIMIP1
PEAKFTEBBLOCKRATE TRISECIP1
PERSONALITYDAY TRPLOPT
PERSONALITYMONTH TSAADATREADWRITEFAIL
PERSONALITYNAME UCNOVERRUN
PERSONALITYREV UCNNW
PERSONALITYVER UPTIME
PERSONALITYYEAR UDPINDGRAMS
PLVERSION UDPINCSUMERRORS
POLLTIME UDPINERRORS
PPREDUNLINKFAILPRICANTTALKT UDPLISTENERS
OSECONUCN
UDPNOPORTS
PRIMARYSIG
UDPOUTDGRAMS
PRIMTIMESYNCSRCIP
UEAKEY
PRISECKEYSWMISMATCH
UEAKEYCONFSF
UPTIME
WDTHWFAIL
XOVERFAILED
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for a definition
of each parameter.
CHAPTER
5.1 C300 Process Manager
5.1.1
5C300PM Platform Block
Descriptio The C300PM block represents the C300PM hardware and is used
n for defining the C300PM Controller in Control Builder. EUCN
points and strategies are executed in the C300PM Controller
environment.
The C300PM block has standard tabs like Main tab, EUCN tab,
Statistics tab, peer-to-peer communication and so on. These tabs
represent the parameters which are mostly for viewing the current
status of C300PM and statistics values. Parameters and
information in this tab can be modified or added as per the
requirements.
Function l The C300PM block defines the C300PM controller in the
Control Builder and represents this controller in the
Experion server.
l In the Control Builder Project tree view, identification data
and certain configuration parameters can be configured.
The C300PM state and statistical parameters are view or
read only.
l On the Main tab, the FTE Device Index shows the unique
identification of the module. The value of redundant module
parameter indicates whether the C300PM is redundant or
non-redundant and how it should be loaded.
l Once the C300PM block is loaded to the Monitoring tree,
the C300PM state reflects the state of the C300PM
Controller.
l The C300PM block functionality is similar to that of a C300
controller block. Also, the C300PM controller state cannot
be changed from the Control Builder; it can be changed only
from System Management dashboard.
l The C300PM block can directly process parameter read and
write requests initiated by CDA peer devices (C300 and ACE),
only after it is loaded to the Monitoring view.
l The C300PM Data Access parameter allows you to optionally
download the C300PM points to the Experion server so that
standard history can be collected through CDA. All the
C300PM points under an C300PM Controller are configured
as per the value of C300PM Data Access parameter (Peer to
Peer Only or Peer to Peer and ExpServer) defined on the
C300PM block in Control Builder.
l C300PM points and control functions are configured using
TPN configuration tools. The C300PM block must be
configured in Control Builder and loaded to the monitoring
side to enable:
l CDA peer access between the ACE/C300 Controller
and the C300PM Controller
l CDA data access to the C300PM points from the
Experion server
NOTE
Loading of the C300PM block to the Monitoring tree is
limited by the EHPM Connections license. For more
information on EHPM license, contact your Honeywell
representative.
Inputs CDA communication
Outputs Refer to the description.
Parameter ALMENBSTATE HWREVMAJ
s
ASSOCASSET HWREVMIN
AUTHSERVERIPADDR IMAGEVER
AUTHSTATE IMPORTSTATUS #
AUTOMATICPOINTIMPOR IMRAVGRESPTIMEP2PREAD
T
IMRAVGRESPTIMEP2PWRITE
AVGRDRRESPONSETIME
IMRAVGRESPTIMEDISPREAD
US
IMRAVGSTDDISPREAD
BACKUPRAMSCRUBERRS
IMRMAXRESPTIMEP2PREAD
BACKUPRAMSWEEPERR
IMRMAXRESPTIMEP2PWRITE
BADIPCSUM
IMRMAXRESPTIMEDISPREAD
BADUDPCSUM
IMRMAXSTDDISPREAD
BOOTIMAGEVER
INTERLANFAILED
CONNECTIONERROR
IPADDRESS
CONNECTIONEVTTIME
IPINRECEIVES
CDISPAVGCHPPS
IPINHDRERRORS
CDISPMAXCHPPS
IPINADDRERRORS
CHIGHREADAVGPPS
IPINUNKNOWNPORTS
CHIGHREADMAXPPS
CLOWREADAVGPPS IPINDISCARDS
CLOWREADMAXPPS IPINDELIVERS
CPUFREEAVG IPOUTREQUESTS
CPUFREEMIN IPOUTDISCARDS
CTRLCONFIRM IPOUTNOROUTES
CURTIME IPREASSEMREQS
CWRITEAVGPPS IPREASSEMOKS
CWRITEMAXPPS IPREASSEMFAILS
DATEPTIMPORT # IPFRAGOKS
DBTRACEENABLE IPFRAGFAILS
DBTRACEENABLESF IPFRAGCREATES
DBTRACEFILES[1..9] IPROUTINGDISCARDS
DBTRACEFLAGS[1..9] ICMPINMSGS
DBTRACEHELPTEXT ICMPINERRORS
DEBUGFLAGSET ICMPINDESTUNREACHS
DEVICEIDX ICMPINECHOS
DISPOVRLOAD ICMPINECHOREPS
DISPSUBCACHEFRFCTR ICMPOUTMSGS
DISPLAYSUBSCRMAXPPS ICMPOUTERRORS
DISPOVRLOAD ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS
EAGN ICMPOUTECHOS
EAPPCONNTONSTATUS ICMPOUTECHOREPS
EAPPNODEIP LANAFAILED
EAPPNODENAME LANAPAUSECOUNTS
ENBLLOGICALENIM LANATXRATE
EHPMCOMMAND LANBPAUSECOUNTS
EHPMDATAACCESS LANARXRATE
EHPMSTATE LANARXRATEMAX
EHPMSYNCSTATE LANATXRATEMAX
EHPM_ERRCODE LANBFAILED
EHPM_SELFTEST LANBRXRATE
ENIMIPADDRESS LANBTXRATE
FACTDATAERR LANBRXRATEMAX
FTEMARTADDRCOUNT LANBTXRATEMAX
FTEMARTMAXDEPTH LOGICALENIM
FTEMARTAVGDEPTH LOGICALENIMIPADDRESS
FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT LOGICALUCNNW
HOSTIPPRI LOGIENIMDATEPTIMPORT
HOSTNAMEPRI LOGIENIMIMPORTSTATUS
HPMSOFTFAIL MACADDRA
HPM_CNTRLPERSREV MACADDRB
HPM_CNTRLPERSVER MACADDRR
HPM_COMMPERSREV MAXFTENODES
HPM_COMMPERSVER MAXNODEID
HPM_FWREV MAXPTPFASTSKEW
HPM_HWREV MAXPTPSLOWSKEW
HPM_IOL_HWREV MAXSNTPSKEW
HPMNODENO MINHWREVSF
HPMSF_BBU_CKTY MODISREDUN
HPMSF_CMLDFAIL MODTYPE
HPMSF_COMMDIAO NCTLSLOT
HPMSF_COMMDIAT NPVSLOT
HPMSF_COMMFAIL NLOGSLOT
HPMSF_COMSTACK NDCSLOT
HPMSF_COM_CE NDEVSLOT
HPMSF_COM_SWE NPMSLOT
HPMSF_CTLSTACK NNUMERIC
HPMSF_CTL_CE $NNUMALM
HPMSF_CTL_NOTG NSTRING
HPMSF_CTL_SWE NTIME
HPMSF_CTRLDIAO NARRSLOT
HPMSF_CTRLDIAT NFASTCTL
HPMSF_CTRLFAIL NFASTPV
HPMSF_CTRLNRSP NFASTLOG
HPMSF_DRM_SBE NFASTDC
HPMSF_DUPIOLAD NFASTDEV
HPMSF_GBLRAMPE $NSFPMS
HPMSF_HPNADDR NONFTEMARTADDRCOUNT
HPMSF_HPNOVRUN NONFTEMARTMAXDEPTH
HPMSF_INCOMPFW NONFTEMARTAVGDEPTH
HPMSF_IO2PRSFL NONFTEMARTCOLLCOUNT
HPMSF_IOL2FAIL NOPERDB #
HPMSF_IOL2NRSP NUMFTENODES
HPMSF_IOLCBL1A NUMSIGS #
HPMSF_IOLCBL1B NUMSNTPSKEWEX
HPMSF_IOLCBL2A OWNINGENIM
HPMSF_IOLCBL2B PARTNERNOTVISFTE
HPMSF_IOLIBADR PLVERSION
HPMSF_IOLIDIAO PRIMARYSIG#
HPMSF_IOLIDIAT PROCESS_ID
HPMSF_IOLIFAIL PTPENABLE
HPMSF_IOLIFTAN PTPMASTERIP
HPMSF_IOLIPERR PTPSKEWTHLD
HPMSF_IOLIREQO PTPSTAT
HPMSF_IOLISTCO RAMSCRUBERRS
HPMSF_IOLIUNKN RAMSWEEPERR
HPMSF_IOLMAXER RCVNONRDRFRAMECOUNT
HPMSF_IOLNORSP RCVRDRREQUESTCOUNT
HPMSF_IOLOVRUN RCVRDRRESPONSECOUNT
HPMSF_IOLPCHKR RDNROLESTATE
HPMSF_IOLPRSFL RDNSYNCTATE
HPMSF_IOL_CABLE_A_ RDRRETRYCOUNT
FAIL
REASONSET #
HPMSF_IOL_CABLE_B_
ROMAPPIMGCHKSMFAIL
FAIL
ROMBOOTIMGCHKSMFAIL
HPMSF_IOL_HMRG
SECMODNAME
HPMSF_IOL_LMRG
HPMSF_IOL_TS_FAIL SECONDARYSIG#
HPMSF_KEYDISBL SECSIGSECLVL #
HPMSF_LCCHKSUM SERIALNUM
HPMSF_LCIOCDFL SIMSTATE
HPMSF_LCIONRDY SIMTARGET
HPMSF_LCIO_PWRF SIMULATEDIO
HPMSF_LCNOSCN SNTPADDRESS
HPMSF_LCSCB_LOST SNTPSKEWTHLD
HPMSF_LCSIOMOL SNTPSTAT
HPMSF_LCSYSERR SOFTFAIL
HPMSF_LCTSFLT TASKHLTHMON
HPMSF_LCVATFAL TCPACTIVEOPENS
HPMSF_LMBATFAL TCPPASSIVEOPENS
HPMSF_LMPCCOM TCPATTEMPTFAILS
HPMSF_LMPCCTL TCPESTABRESETS
HPMSF_MEMPTCHK TCPCURRESTAB
HPMSF_NOSYNCH TCPINSEGS
HPMSF_PCSLFTST TCPOUTSEGS
HPMSF_PLCOVRUN TCPRETRANSSEGS
HPMSF_PPXOVRUN TCPINERRS
HPMSF_PWRDROP TCPOUTRESETS
HPMSF_REDADCD TCPCONNTABLE
HPMSF_REDADDL TIMELASTSKEW
HPMSF_REDBYTE TIMELASTSYNC
HPMSF_REDCLRR TIMESOURCE
HPMSF_REDDTRK TIMESYNCSTAT
HPMSF_REDDTRN TOTALREQRESPCOUNT
HPMSF_REDFULL TNUMACEOUTCON
HPMSF_REDLOCK TNUMC3OUTCON
HPMSF_REDPGEN TNUMNTFRQUAVG
HPMSF_REDPTRN TNUMNTFRQUMAX
HPMSF_REDTRK TNUMUOCOUTCON
HPMSF_SMBATTFL TRNUMINMSGAVGPS
HPMSF_SMTSFLT TRNUMINMSGMAXPS
HPMSF_SOFTERR TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS
HPMSF_SPARE89 TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS
HPMSF_SPARE90 UCNADDRESS
HPMSF_SRMPTCHK UCNNW
HPMSF_SRMPTERR UDPINDGRAMS
HPMSF_STCKLIM UDPNOPORTS
HPMSF_SWITCHES UDPINERRORS
HPMSF_TSCLOCK UDPOUTGRAMS
HPMSF_TSIO2LAT UDPLISTENERS
HPMSF_TSIOLLAT UNEXPECTEDRDRRESPONSECOU
NT
HPMSF_TSUCNLAT
UPTIME
HPMSF_UART_ACC
WDTHWFAIL
HPMSF_UCNPRSFL
WDTSWFAIL
HPMSF_UCNSCPFL
XOVERFAILED
HPMSF_WDTOFF
PLATFORMTYPE
Reference See the Control Builder Parameter Reference Guide for
definitions of each parameter.
5.1.2 C300PM Configuration Form Reference
This section provides a summary of all user-visible parameters for a C300PM Controller. The
parameters are grouped according to the tabs where they reside on the configuration form. For more
details about these parameters, see the Control Builder Parameter Reference Guide .
C300PM Controller block
C300PM Controller block Main tab
The Main tab is used to configure (and display configuration of) the EHPM Controller. The Main Tab
contains all the parameters that must be configured when setting up a EHPM Controller. In addition, it
displays the important states of the EHPM Controller and supports the key commands associated with
operation of the EHPM Controller. Redundancy configuration can be entered only in the Project Tree.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the Main tab of
the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Main
Tag Name Tag Name Project Only System assigned or a configured
unique name. Consisting of up to 16
characters and at least one character
must be a letter (A-Z).
Item Name Item Name Project Only A non-unique name by which an
entity is known within the context of
the enterprise model.
EHPM-Experion IMAGEVER No Indicates the EHPM-Experion
Application Image application image version.
Version
Associated Asset ASSOCASSET Yes Allows user to select an asset from
those configured in the Enterprise
Model Database to set the Scope of
Responsibility (SOR) for the point.
Enable DEB PERFORMEBLOAD Yes
Operations
Platform Type PLATFORMTYPE Yes
Network Address Configuration
Device Index DEVICEIDX No Identifies the unique FTE Device
Index number configured on
switches in the module.
Ethernet IP IPADDRESS No IP address assigned to the module
Address based upon base IP address and
module device index.
Advanced Configuration
Alarming Enabled ALMENBSTATE Yes Used for setting the alarm reporting
function used when an alarm
condition is detected by the function
block.
State Information
EHPMCOMMAND Yes
EHPM State EHPMSTATE No Indicates the current state of the
controller.
Disable Memory DISABLEBATTERYALARM Yes
Retention Alerts
Redundancy RDNROLESTATE No Indicates the EHPM Controller's
Role current redundancy role.
Synchronization RDNSYNCTATE No Indicates the EHPM Controller's
State current synchronization state.
Soft Failures SOFTFAIL No Indicates the Soft Fail state for an
Present (See Soft EHPM Controller. It indicates any
Failures Tab for PowerQuicc side soft fails (which is
details) also visible in Soft Failures tab of the
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
EHPM block) in addition to any soft
fail from TPS side. Note that the Soft
Failures tab does not show any TPS
side soft failure, but the soft fail
indicator is on (red color), on the
Main tab indicating that this is a soft
fail from TPS side.
HPM Soft Failures HPMSOFTFAIL No Indicates the HPM Soft Fail state for
Present (See TPS an EHPM Controller.
Native Window
for details)
Memory BATTERYNOTOK No
Retention
Readiness
Redundancy Configuration
Module is MODISREDUN Project only Indicates that the EHPM Controller is
redundant part of redundant pair.
Secondary SECMODNAME Project only System assigned name based on tag
Module Name name with sec suffix for secondary
block.
Simulation Node Configuration
Load to SIMTARGET Project only Determines if the controller should
simulation be a physical EHPM or a simulated
Environment EHPM loaded to a SCE node.
NOTE All SIM-EHPM
blocks that share the
same Owning ENIM UCN
Network Number must
reside in the same SCE
node.
Host IP Address HOSTIPPRI Project only Indicates the IP address of the SCE
Node, that is hosting the SIM-EHPM.
Host Name HOSTNAMEPRI Project only Indicates the network name of the
SCE Node, that is hosting the SIM-
EHPM.
Temperature OVERTEMPTHLD Project only
High Alarm
(degC)
EHPM Chassis EHPMBACKPLANE Project only
EHPM File EHPMFILEADDR Project only
Address
EHPM Slot EHPMSLOTNUM Project only
Number
Simulation Node Operation
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Simulation State SIMSTATE No Indicates the current state of the
EHPM Controller in UniSim.
WIN32 Process PROCESS_ID No Indicates the process ID of the
Identifier SIMEHPM.EXE that is executing in
the SCE node.
C300PM Controller block EUCN tab
The EUCN tab represents the EUCN network and the C300PM specific parameters like EUCN Node
Number, HPM Node Number, current UCN Network Number, Device Index of Owning ENIM, ENIM IP
Address and so on. To support EHPM simulation, parameters related to UniSim server configuration
and connection status are added on the EUCN tab. A new Remote ENIM group is added using which
you can import EHPM points from Remote ENIM. The parameters on the EUCN tab are rearranged as
follows:
l EUCN Identification: includes parameters HPM node no, Authentication no, and Authentication
state for EHPM identification.
l EHPM Point Import Utility-Summary: includes option for automatic import of EHPM points from
Owning ENIM and Remote ENIM.
l Owning ENIM: includes parameters for Owning ENIM configuration.
l Remote ENIM: includes parameters for Remote ENIM configuration.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and/or configure on the EUCN tab
of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Owning ENIM
Device Index OWNINGENIM Yes Indicates the FTE device index value
of Owning that represents the device index of the
ENIM ENIM that owns the current EHPM. The
Owning ENIM contains point database of
the current EHPM.
ENIM UCN UCNNW No
Network
Number
ENIM IP ENIMIPADDRESS No Indicates the FTE IP address of owner
Address ENIM for the current EHPM. This ENIM
IP address is calculated based on the
owning ENIM device index entered.
Primary and secondary ENIMs are
connected using provided IP address
and provided IP address +1 respectively.
Date Of Last DATEPTIMPORT # No Indicates the time when import of EHPM
Import # points into ERDB and Experion Server
has completed. If the previous import
was completed through AutoImport
Service, then this timestamp closely
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
follows the time when ENIM was
checkpointed or restarted.
Import Status IMPORTSTATUS No Indicates the status of current import
# (automatic or manual) of the EHPM
points. It shows the status string for the
current stage of the EHPM point import.
EUCN Identification
HPM Node HPMNODENO Yes This value must be entered between the
Number range of 3 to 64. In this range the odd
numbers are configurable and even
numbers are not configurable
(redundant nodes are automatically
assigned with an even number). For an
EUCN network, there must be a unique
number for EHPM node number and the
same EHPM node number can be used
across different EUCN networks.
EUCN EAGN No EUCN authentication group number
Authentication defines the EUCN group on that physical
Number wire and only those nodes which belong
to this group and communicating with
each other.
Current UCN UCNADDRESS No Indicates the current UCN address. If the
Address EHPM is booting or in ALIVE state, then
HPM node number+64 is the value,
otherwise it is the same as HPM node
number.
Authentication AUTHSERVERIPADDR No Indicates the IP address of the ENIM
Server which is authenticating the EHPM
Controller.
Authentication AUTHSTATE No Indicates the actual state of the EHPM
State Controller while authentication is in
progress.
EHPM Point Import Utility –Summary
Enable AUTOMATICPOINTIMPORT Yes To optionally enable/disable the
automatic automatic import of EHPM points using
point import the auto-import service. If this option is
disabled/unchecked, then the EHPM
points cannot be imported automatically
and you have to import them using the
EHPM Point Import Utility.
No. Of Points NOPERDB # No Indicates the number of EHPM points
After Import # imported to the EHPM Controller in
ERDB.
EHPM Details
EHPM_ EHPM_SELFTEST No Indicates the self test message while the
Selftest EHPM Controller is booting.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
EHPM Error EHPM_ERRCODE No Indicates an error code if there is any
Code error during normal operation of the
EHPM.
Enabled SIMULATEDIO No Indicates that the EHPM Controller
Simulated IO executes simulated IO personality.
Partner is C300PMPARTNER No
C300PM
EHPM Experion Data Access
EHPM Data EHPMDATAACCESS Yes This parameter is used to optionally
Access download the EHPM points to the
Experion server so that Experion
applications and HMIWeb displays can
collect data through CDA. If you select
Peer to peer Only option, it enables
peer-to-peer data access between the
Experion controllers and the EHPM
points through CDA. If you select Peer to
peer and ExpServer, it enables read
access to the EHPM points through CDA
from Experion applications and HMIWeb
displays in addition to enabling peer
data access.
NOTE The EHPM block must
be loaded to the monitoring
side in Control Builder to
reflect the change in
parameter value.
NOTE If you select Peer to
peer and ExpServer option, it
flags the EHPM points as
combo points in the Experion
server. The EHPM Combo
Point configuration directs the
ESV-T or ES-T to resolve
names of requested EHPM
point parameters through the
SR first, and then, if not found
in the SR, through the TPN
Server. Once a parameter
name is resolved through the
SR, all read requests issued
by Experion applications and
HMIWeb displays to this
parameter are redirected
over CDA.
Disp DISPSUBCACHEFRFCTR Yes Indicates the cache fresh factor, that is,
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Subscription percentage of total read from display that
Cache FrshFt is cached and remaining to the EHPM
that is not cached. If value/option is
selected as 50, and there are 100 reads
from display, then 50% of requests is
served by cache.
Display DISPLAYSUBSCRMAXPPS Yes Defines the parameters per second limit
Subscription after which the EHPM begins to throttle
Max PPS subscribed CDA display clients load on
HPM Comm processors. When the total
sum of parameters per second from
subscribed CDA display clients exceeds
the configured
DISPLAYSUBSCRMAXPPS value, the
EHPM slows down internal polling rates
by a factor of two. For example, a CDA
display client subscribed at a 2 second
rate effectively executes at 4 second
subscription rate.
Remote ENIM
Enable Import ENBLLOGICALENIM Yes Allows import of EHPM points from the
Remote ENIM to Experion ERDB for the
specific EHPM. When Enable import
from Remote ENIM option is set as ON,
then all the remaining related
parameters for Remote ENIM and import
will be enabled.
ATTENTION This option is
not applicable for SIMEHPM.
UCN Network LOGICALUCNNW Yes Indicates the UCN network number of
Number the Remote ENIM.
Device Index LOGICALENIM Yes Indicates the device index of Remote
of Remote ENIM.
ENIM
Remote ENIM LOGICALENIMIPADDRESS No Indicates the IP Address of the Remote
IP Address ENIM.
Date Of Last LOGIENIMDATEPTIMPORT No Indicates the date of last import of points
Import # from the Remote ENIM to the configured
EHPM.
Import Status LOGIENIMIMPORTSTATUS No Indicates the import status for the EHPM
# point import from remote login to the
EHPM. Once the EHPM point import is
complete, it shows import status as
“Completed”.
UniSim Configuration
E-APP Node EAPPNODEIP Yes Indicates the IP address of the E-APP
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
IP Address Node in the UniSim system with which
the Simulation Control Environment
(SCE) node communicates. One E-APP
node represents one UCN network
number type. Also represents the path to
connect to an E-APP node. An
unsuccessful connection between SCE
node/SimEhpm.exe and E-APP node
results in an error.
E-APP Node EAPPNODENAME No Indicates the node name of the E-APP
Name Node in the UniSim system with which
the SCE node communicates.
E-APP EAPPCONNTONSTATUS No Indicates the result of connection
Connection establishment between Experion SCE
Status node and UniSim E-APP node.
Connection CONNECTIONERROR No Provides connection error information
Error that occurs between Experion SCE node
and UniSim E-APP node.
Time of Last CONNECTIONEVTTIME No Indicates the time of the most recent
Connection connection event established between
Evt # Experion SCE node and UniSim E-APP
node.
Scan Rate Configuration
Hardware PKGOPT Yes
Packaging
Option
SI Data Scan SCANPER Yes
Period
Scan Rate SCANRATE Yes
Sequence SEQPROC Yes
Processing
Rate
Simulation DISP_SIM Yes
Indicator
Option
C300PM Controller block System Time tab
The System Time tab displays information about the EHPM’s time source and synchronization with that
time source. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the System Time
tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
System Time
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Current System CURTIME No Displays the current system time, as
Time communicated to the ACE supervisory
controller, Control Processor Module in the
C200 Controller, C300 Controller and
Simulation Control Environment controller
from the Server. The format is MM/DD/YY
HH:MM:SS.
Current System TIMESOURCE No Displays the current time source in use for
Time Source module time synchronization.
SNTP Status
SNTP Server SNTPADDRESS No Displays the IP address of SNTP server.
Address
SNTP Status SNTPSTAT No Displays the SNTP status.
SNTP Skew SNTPSKEWTHLD No Sets the maximum skew tolerated between
Limit the module clock and SNTP time under
which gradual correction of the module clock
is allowed.
SNTP Skew NUMSNTPSKEWEX No Displays the number of times SNTP skew
Limit Exceeded threshold is exceeded.
Max SNTP MAXSNTPSKEW No Indicates the maximum skew recorded till
Skew present while synchronizing time from SNTP
server.
NTP Offset NTPOFFSET No
(msec)
NTP Maximum NTPOFFSETMAX No
Offset (msec)
SNTP Last SNTPLASTSTRATUM No
Stratum Value
System Time Synchronization Status
Time TIMESYNCSTAT No Displays the time synchronization status.
Synchronization
Status
Time of Last TIMELASTSYNC No Displays the time controller last synced with
Time Sync time source.
Skew at Last TIMELASTSKEW No The new difference between controller time
Time Sync and new time.
Precision Time Protocol
Enable PTPENABLE Yes When enabled (ON), the PTP client should
Precision Time attempt to synchronize its local clock with a
Protocol PTP GrandMaster. For EHPM, this value is
always set as ON and it is not editable.
PTP Status PTPSTAT No Displays the current status of the PTP time
synchronization.
PTP Master IP PTPMASTERIP No Displays the IP address of the PTP
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Address GrandMaster clock.
Max PTP MAXPTPSLOWSKEW No Dispalys the maximum skew (in
Positive Skew milliseconds) of the local clock for which the
local clock was slower than the master clock.
Max PTP MAXPTPFASTSKEW No Displays the maximum skew (in
Negative Skew milliseconds) of the local clock for which the
local clock was faster than the master clock.
PTP Skew Limit NUMPTPSKEWEX No Displays the number of times the PTP skew
Exceeded threshold has been exceeded.
PTP Skew Limit PTPSKEWTHLD No Displays (in milliseconds) the maximum
skew between the local clock and the PTP
GrandMaster clock, under which gradual
correction of the local clock will be allowed.
C300PM Controller block Statistics tab
The Statistics tab displays various statistical parameters used for maintaining and monitoring EHPM
data flow, network statistics and so on. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can
monitor on the Statistics tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
EUCN CPU Statistics
CPU Free CPUFREEAVG No Displays the rolling average
of free CPU not currently
used for processing by the
CPM.
Minimum CPUFREEMIN No Displays the historic
CPU Free minimum of the unused CPU
available.
Time Since UPTIME No Displays the elapsed time
Powerup since module powerup or
restart.
Notification and Network Message Statistics
Notifications TNUMNTFRQUAVG No Displays the rolling average
Rate of notification request
throughput for the EHPM.
Maximum TNUMNTFRQUMAX No Displays the maximum of
Notifications notification request
Rate throughput since last store of
STATSRESET.
Responder TRNUMINMSGAVGPS No
Input Rate
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Max TRNUMINMSGMAXPS No
Responder
Input Rate
Responder TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS No
Output Rate
Max TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS No
Responder
Output Rate
UCN Network Message Statistics
Receive RCVRDRREQUESTCOUNT No Displays the number of RDR
RDR rate request counts. Receive RDR
per second (raw counts with
rate conversion which
represent EHPM
data/message transfer
counts).
Send RDR RCVRDRRESPONSECOUNT No Displays the number of
rate responses in RDR per
second. Send RDR/second
(raw counts with rate
conversion which represent
EHPM data/message transfer
counts).
Receive RCVNONRDRFRAMECOUNT No Displays the count of non-
Non-RDR RDR frames (per second)
rate that include responses but
not RWR requests.
Total TOTALREQRESPCOUNT No Total send/receive UCN
send/receive message counter.
RDR Cycle AVGRDRRESPONSETIMEUS No Displays the total amount of
Time time (in seconds) it takes for a
request to receive the
corresponding response.
Unexpected UNEXPECTEDRDRRESPONSECOUNT No Displays the count of
RDR responses received for
Response requests that aren’t made.
Count
RDR Retries RDRRETRYCOUNT No Displays the count of
requests sent that do not
receive a response and is
retrieved.
Hardware Statistics
Enclosure TEMPAVG No Enclosure Temperature
Temperature (degC)
(degC)
Maximum TEMPMAX No Maximum Temperature
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Temperature (degC)
(degC)
Minimum TEMPMIN No Minimum Temperature
Temperature (degC)
(degC)
Main RAM MEMFREEAVG No Main Ram Free (%)
Free (%)
Main RAM MEMFREEMIN No Main RAM Free Minimum (%)
Free
Minimum
(%)
NVS Free NVSFREEAVG No NVS free running average, in
(%) percent.
NVS Free NVSFREEMIN No NVS Free Minimum (%)
Minimum
(%)
C300PM Controller block CDA Peer Connections tab
The Peer Connections tab contains data indicating the number of peer connections for responder types
between the ACE/C300 Controller and the EHPM Controller. Starting Experion R430, peer-to-peer
communication is supported between ACE/C300 Controller and the EHPM Controller, where the
ACE/C300 Controller acts as the initiator and the EHPM Controller acts as the responder. The following
table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the CDA Peer Connections tab of the
configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Peer Responding Connections
Responding to TNUMACEOUTCON No Displays the number of originator Application
ACEs Control Environments.
Responding to TNUMC3OUTCON No Displays the number of originator C300, and
C300s EHPM output connections.
Responding to TNUMUOCOUTCON No Displays the number of originator UOC output
UOCs connections.
C300PM Controller block Hardware/Software Information tab
The Hardware Information tab is used to display firmware information, hardware factory information,
and the MAC address related data for the EHPM module. The following table summarizes the
parameter data you can monitor on the Hardware Information tab of the configuration form for the
selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Firmware Version
Boot Image Version BOOTIMAGEVER No Displays the release version of
Experion module boot firmware
currently in the controller.
Application Image Version IMAGEVER_D No Displays the current personality
image version loaded in the EHPM
module.
Hardware Factory Information
Module Type MODTYPE No Displays the hardware type and
details like model number and
number of IOLINKS.
Redundancy Module Serial SERIALNUM No Displays the redundancy module
Number serial number.
Programmable Logic PLVERSION No Displays the Programmable Logic
Revision Revision.
Hardware Major Revision HWREVMAJ No Displays the hardware major
revision.
Hardware Minor Revision HWREVMIN No Displays the hardware minor
revision.
EHPM Firmware Revision HPM_FWREV No Displays the EHPM firmware revision
number number.
EHPM Hardware Revision HPM_HWREV No Displays the EHPM hardware
number revision number.
Communication Processor HPM_ No Displays the communication
Version of EHPM COMMPERSVER processor version of the EHPM
Personality personality.
Communication Processor HPM_ No Displays the communication
Revision of EHPM COMMPERSREV processor revision of the EHPM
Personality personality.
Control Processor Revision HPM_ No Displays the contoller processor
of EHPM Personality CNTRLPERSREV revision of the EHPM personality.
Control Processor Version HPM_ No Displays the contoller processor
of EHPM Personality CNTRLPERSVER version of the EHPM personality.
EHPM IO Link Hardware HPM_IOL_ No Displays the hardware revision
Revision HWREV number of IO link connected to the
EHPM.
Network Interface Address Information
MAC Address A MACADDRA No Displays the media access control
address of port A (yellow tree port).
MAC Address B MACADDRB No Displays the media access control
address of port A (green tree port).
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
MAC Address Redundancy MACADDRR No Displays the media access control
address of port used for redundancy
link.
C300PM Controller block FTE tab
The FTE tab is used to display statistics related to FTE communications and performance. It features
parameters associated with the MAC Address Resolution Table (MART), which deals with online media
access control (MAC) address mapping. Two separate MARTs are maintained, one for FTE nodes and
the other for non-FTE nodes. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on
the FTE tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
FTE
Address FTEMARTADDRCOUNT No Displays the number of IP addresses
Count contained in the FTE MART.
Max Depth FTEMARTMAXDEPTH No Displays the maximum depth that the
FTE MART has reached or the highest
number of entries in the table.
Average FTEMARTAVGDEPTH No Displays the average depth of the FTE
Depth MART or the average number of entries
in the table.
Address FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT No Displays the number of collisions that
Collisions have occurred while hashing the FTE
MART.
Current FTE Traffic
LAN_A LANATXRATE No Displays communication transmission
TxRate rate in kilobits per second (kbps) for
(kBit/sec) port A (yellow tree port) on the FTE
interface.
LAN_B LANBTXRATE No DIsplays communication transmission
TxRate rate in kbps for port B (green tree port)
(kBit/sec) on the FTE interface.
LAN_A LANARXRATE No Displays communication receive rate in
RxRate kbps for port A (yellow tree port) on the
(kBit/sec) FTE interface.
LAN_B LANBRXRATE No Displays communication receive rate in
RxRate kbps for port B (green tree port) on the
(kBit/sec) FTE interface.
FTE A Block LANABLOCKEDRATE No Packets per second blocked (by CF9
Rate firewall) on FTE A cable.
(pkts/sec)
FTE B Block LANBBLOCKEDRATE No Packets per second blocked (by CF9
Rate firewall) on FTE B cable.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
(pkts/sec)
FTE Statistics
Number of NUMFTENODES No Displays the current number of FTE
FTE Nodes nodes within the FTE community.
Max Number MAXFTENODES No Displays the maximum number of FTE
of FTE Nodes nodes that have been detected within
the FTE community.
Max Device MAXNODEID No Displays the the highest device index
Index supported within the FTE community.
IP Checksum BADIPCSUM No Displays the number of FTE IP
Errors messages which were received but
determined as having bad IP
checksums.
UDP BADUDPCSUM No Displays the number of FTE UDP
Checksum messages which were received but
Errors determined as having bad UDP
checksums.
FTE Receive LANRXERR No Receive errors on FTE A cable.
Errors
FTE Transmit LANTXERR No Receive errors on FTE B cable.
Errors
Flow Control Statistics
LAN_A LANAPAUSECOUNTS No
Pause
Counts
LAN_B LANBPAUSECOUNTS No
Pause
Counts
LAN_ LANATHROTTLECOUNTS No
A Throttle
Counts
LAN_ LANBTHROTTLECOUNTS No
B Throttle
Counts
LAN_A Busy LANABUSYCOUNTS No
Counts
LAN_B Busy LANBBUSYCOUNTS No
Counts
Non-FTE MART Statistics
Address NONFTEMARTADDRCOUNT No Displays the number of IP addresses
Count contained in the non-FTE MART.
Max Depth NONFTEMARTMAXDEPTH No Displays the maximum depth that the
non-FTE MART has reached or the
highest number of entries in the table.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Average NONFTEMARTAVGDEPTH No Displays the average depth of the non-
Depth FTE MART or the average number of
entries in the table.
Address NONFTEMARTCOLLCOUNT No Displays the number of collisions that
Collisions have occurred while hashing the non-
FTE MART.
Peak FTE Traffic
LAN_A LANATXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
TxRate Max transmission rate in kbps for port A
(kBit/sec) (yellow tree port) on the FTE interface.
LAN_B LANBTXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
TxRate Max transmission rate in kbps for port B
(kBit/sec) (green tree port) on the FTE interface.
LAN_A LANARXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
RxRate Max receive rate in kbps for port A (yellow
(kBit/sec) tree port) on the FTE interface.
LAN_B LANBRXRATEMAX No Displays maximum communication
RxRate Max receive rate in kbps for port B (green
(kBit/sec) tree port) on the FTE interface.
FTE A Block LANABLOCKEDRATEMAX No Displays communication receive rate in
Rate Max packets per second for port A (yellow
(pkts/sec) tree port) on the FTE interface.
FTE B Block LANBBLOCKEDRATEMAX No Displays communication receive rate in
Rate Max packets per second for port B (green
(pkts/sec) tree port) on the FTE interface.
LAN failure indicator
LAN_A LANAFAILED No Provides status indicator for port A
(Yellow) (yellow tree port) on the FTE interface.
Failed
LAN_B LANBFAILED No Provides status indicator for port B
(Green) (green tree port) on the FTE interface.
Failed
FTE A LANASILENT No
(Yellow)
Silent
FTE B LANBSILENT No
(Green) Silent
InterLAN INTERLANFAILED No Provides status indicator for Inter-LAN
Comm Failed communications.
Crossover XOVERFAILED No Provides status indicator for crossover
Cable Failed cable.
C300PM Controller block UDP/TCP tab
The UDP/TCP tab is used to display statistics related to open UDP and TCP connections associated
with the respective EHPM block. It features parameters used for maintenance and performance
monitoring purposes. The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the
UDP/TCP tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
UDP Statistics
Datagrams UDPINDGRAMS No Displays the total number of UDP datagrams
Delivered delivered to UDP users.
Datagrams UDPNOPORTS No Displays the total number of received UDP
for Unknown datagrams for which there was no application at
Ports the destination port.
Datagrams UDPINERRORS No Displays the number of received UDP
Dropped for datagrams that could not be delivered for
Errors reasons other than the lack of an application at
the destination port.
Datagrams UDPOUTGRAMS No Displays the total number of UDP datagrams
Sent to sent from this entity.
Applications
Local UDP UDPLISTENERS No Provides a table containing path information for
Listeners all open ports on the FTE interface.
TCP Statistics
Active Opens TCPACTIVEOPENS No Displays the number of times TCP connections
have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT
state from the CLOSED state.
Passive TCPPASSIVEOPENS No Displays the number of times TCP connections
Opens have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD
state from the LISTEN state.
Failed TCPATTEMPTFAILS No Displays the number of times TCP connections
Connection have made a direct transition to the CLOSED
Attempts state from either the SYNSENT state or the
SYN-RCVD state, plus the number of times TCP
connections have made a direct transition to the
LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state.
Connections TCPESTABRESETS No Displays the number of times TCP connections
Resets have made a direct transition to the CLOSED
state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the
CLOSE-WAIT state.
Current TCPCURRESTAB No Displays the number of TCP connections for
Connections which the current state is either ESTABLISHED
or CLOSE-WAIT.
Segments TCPINSEGS No Displays the total number of segments
Received received, including those received in error. This
count includes segments received on currently
established connections.
Segments TCPOUTSEGS No Displays the total number of segments sent,
Sent including those on current connections but
excluding those containing only retransmitted
octets.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Segments TCPRETRANSSEGS No Displays the total number of segments
Retransmitted retransmitted, that is, the number of TCP
segments transmitted containing one or more
previously transmitted octets.
Segments TCPINERRS No Displays the total number of segments received
Discarded in error. For example, bad TCP checksums.
For Errors
Reset TCPOUTRESETS No Displays the number of TCP segments sent
Segments containing the RST flag.
Sent
Current TCP TCPCONNTABLE No Provides a table containing path information for
Connections all currently connected clients of the FTE
interface.
C300PM Controller block IP ICMP tab
The IP/ICMP tab is used to display statistics related to IP and ICMP protocol messages associated with
(that is, originating in or received by) the respective EHPM block. It features parameters used for
maintenance and status operations on the network. The following table summarizes the parameter data
you can monitor on the IP/ICMP tab of the configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
IP Statistics
Datagrams IPINRECEIVES No Displays the total number of input
received from datagrams received from connected
Below nodes, including those received in
error.
Datagrams IPINHDRERRORS No Displays the number of input datagrams
Format Error discarded due to errors in their IP
Drops headers, including bad checksums,
version number mismatch, other format
errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors
discovered in processing their IP
options, and so on.
Datagrams IPINADDRERRORS No Displays the number of input datagrams
Misdelivery discarded because the IP address in
Drops their IP header's destination field was
not a valid address to be received at
this entity. This count includes invalid
addresses, such as 0.0.0.0, and
addresses of unsupported classes,
such as Class E. For entities which are
not IP Gateways and therefore do not
forward datagrams, this counter
includes datagrams discarded because
the destination address was not a local
address.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Unknown IPINUNKNOWNPORTS No Displays the number of locally-
Protocol addressed datagrams received
Datagrams successfully but discarded because of
an unknown or unsupported protocol.
Datagrams IPINDISCARDS No Displays the number of input IP
Discarded for datagrams for which no problems were
Resrcs encountered to prevent their continued
processing, but which were discarded
for another reason. For example,
discarded for lack of buffer space. Note
that this counter does not include any
datagrams discarded while awaiting re-
assembly.
Datagrams IPINDELIVERS No Displays the total number of input
Delivered datagrams successfully delivered to IP
Above user-protocols, including ICMP.
Datagrams IPOUTREQUESTS No Displays the total number of IP
Sent Out datagrams which local IP user-
protocols, including ICMP, supplied to
IP in requests for transmission.
Out IPOUTDISCARDS No Displays the number of output IP
Datagrams datagrams for which no problem was
Discarded encountered to prevent their
transmission to their destination, but
which were discarded for another
reason. For example, discarded for lack
of buffer space.
Datagrams IPOUTNOROUTES No Displays the number of IP datagrams
Drops for No discarded because no route could be
Routes found to transmit them to their
destination.
Fragments IPREASSEMREQS No Displays the number of IP fragments
Needing received which needed to be
Reassembly reassembled at this entity.
Fragments IPREASSEMOKS No Displayss the number of IP datagrams
Reassembled successfully reassembled.
Fragments IPREASSEMFAILS No Displays the number of failures
Reassembly detected by the IP reassembly
Fails algorithm for reasons such as, timed
out, errors, and so on.
Datagrams IPFRAGOKS No Displays the number of IP datagrams
Fragmented that have been successfully fragmented
at this entity.
Datagrams IPFRAGFAILS No Displays the number of IP datagrams
Fragmentation that have been discarded because they
Fails needed to be fragmented at this entity
but could not be. For example, they
could not be fragmented because their
Don't Fragment flag was set.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Fragments IPFRAGCREATES No Displays the number of IP datagram
Created fragments that have been generated as
a result of fragmentation at this entity.
Routing IPROUTINGDISCARDS No Identifies The number of routing entries
Entries which were chosen to be discarded
Discarded even though they are valid.
ICMP Statistics
Messages ICMPINMSGS No Displays the total number of ICMP
Received messages which the entity received.
Messages ICMPINERRORS No Displays the number of ICMP
with Format messages which the entity received but
Errors determined as having ICMP-specific
errors, such as bad ICMP checksums,
bad length, and so on.
Dest. ICMPINDESTUNREACHS No Displays the number of ICMP
Unreachable destination unreachable messages
Msgs Recvd received.
Echo ICMPINECHOS No Displays the number of ICMP echo
Messages (request) messages received.
Recvd
Echo Reply ICMPINECHOREPS No Displays the number of ICMP echo
Messages reply messages received.
Recvd
Messages ICMPOUTMSGS No Displays the total number of ICMP
Sent messages which this entity attempted to
send.
Out Error ICMPOUTERRORS No Displays the number of ICMP
Messages messages which this entity did not send
due to problems discovered within
ICMP such as a lack of buffers.
Dest. ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS No Displays the number of ICMP
Unreachable destination unreachable messages
Messages sent.
Sent
Echo ICMPOUTECHOS No Displays the number of ICMP echo
Messages (request) messages sent.
Sent
Echo Reply ICMPOUTECHOREPS No Displays the number of ICMP echo
Messages reply messages sent.
Sent
C300PM Controller block HPM Soft Failures tab
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Soft Failure Conditions
92 NO TOG FROM CTRL PROCESSOR HPMSF_CTL_NOTG No
37 CTRL PROC DIAG CYCLE HPMSF_CTRLDIAO No
OVERFLOW
23 PRIM/SECNDY DUPLICATE IOM HPMSF_DUPIOLAD No
ADDR
UCN ADDRESS CHANGE DETECTED HPMSF_HPNADDR No
34 CTRL UCN OVERRUNS HPMSF_HPNOVRUN No
71 IOL CABLE 1A FAILURE HPMSF_IOLCBL1A No
72 IOL CABLE 1B FAILURE HPMSF_IOLCBL1B No
67 IOL PROC RESUME NON-WAIT HPMSF_IOLIBADR No
TASK
69 IOL PROC DIAG CYCLE HPMSF_IOLIDIAO No
OVERFLOW
68 IOL PROC DIAG INIT TIMEOUT HPMSF_IOLIDIAT No
03 IOL WATCH DOG TIMER EXPIRED HPMSF_IOLIFAIL No
70 IOL PROC FTA MISSING, ILLEGAL HPMSF_IOLIFTAN No
66 IOL PROC TASK REQUEST HPMSF_IOLIREQO No
OVERFLOW
65 IOL PROC STC OVERRUN HPMSF_IOLISTCO No
64 IOL PROC KNOWN SF HPMSF_IOLIUNKN No
15 IOL MAX COMM ERRORS HPMSF_IOLMAXER No
EXCEEDED
14 NO RESPONSE FROM IOL#1 HPMSF_IOLNORSP No
33 CTRL IOL OVERRUNS HPMSF_IOLOVRUN No
18 NO PRIMARY IOL1 COMM TO HPMSF_IOLPRSFL No
SECNDY
16 IOL CABLE A FAILURE HPMSF_IOL_CABLE_A_ No
FAIL
17 IOL CABLE B FAILURE HPMSF_IOL_CABLE_B_ No
FAIL
26 IOL TIMESYNCH FAILURE HPMSF_IOL_TS_FAIL No
53 EXCESSIVE I/O LINK LOAD HPMSF_KEYDISBL No
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
52 EXCESSIVE CTL CPU LOAD HPMSF_LCIONRDY No
58 IOL PF BUF SIZE EXCEEDED HPMSF_LCSCB_LOST No
61 UCN PS BUF SIZE EXCEEDED HPMSF_LCSIOMOL No
59 IOL PS BUF SIZE EXCEEDED HPMSF_LCVATFAL No
60 UCN PF BUF SIZE EXCEEDED HPMSF_PCSLFTST No
51 EXCESSIVE COM CPU LOAD HPMSF_PLCOVRUN No
35 CTRL POINT PROCESSOR HPMSF_PPXOVRUN No
OVERRUNS
45 REDUN PRIVATE PATH INIT HPMSF_REDADDL No
ERROR
40 CTRL REDUN DATA TRACKING HPMSF_REDDTRK No
ERR
39 CTRL REDUN DATA TRANSFER HPMSF_REDDTRN No
ERR
50 ALT. REDUN CABLE APPLIED HPMSF_REDLOCK No
13 PRIVATE RAM PARITY CIRCUITRY HPMSF_SOFTERR No
89 EHPM REDUN PORT NOT HPMSF_SPARE89 No
CONNECTED
12 REDUNDANCY/TEST SWITCH HPMSF_SWITCHES No
HANGE
25 TIMESYNCH CLOCK ERROR HPMSF_TSCLOCK No
/DRIFT
27 TIMESYNCH IOL #1 LATCH ERROR HPMSF_TSIOLLAT No
28 TIMESYNCH UCN LATCH ERROR HPMSF_TSUCNLAT No
19 NO PRIMARY UCN COMM TO HPMSF_UCNPRSFL No
SECDNY
20 NO SECNDY UCN COMM TO HPMSF_UCNSCPFL No
PRIMARY
C300PM Controller block EHPM CDA Data Access Statistics Tab
C300PM Controller block Point Mix tab
The Point Mix tab is used to display parameters that give the maximum number of points that can be
created in C300PM block.
The configuration of the following parameters should match with UCN node-specific configurations.
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
Control Configuration
No. of NCTLSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Regulatory Control Slots
Regulatory that has a configurable range of 0 to 250.
Control
Slots
Before reducing the number of Regulatory
Control Slots, delete all configured points
within the slot range being eliminated.
No. of NPVSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Regulatory PV Slots that has a
Regulatory configurable range of 0 to 400. Before reducing the number
PV Slots of Regulatory PV Slots, delete all configured points within
the slot range being eliminated.
No. of NLOGSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Logic Slots that has a configurable
Logic Slots range of 0 to 400. Before reducing the number of Logic
Slots, delete all configured points within the slot range
being eliminated.
No. of NDCSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Digital Composite Slots that has a
Digital configurable range of 0 to 999. Before reducing the number
Composite of Digital Composite Slots, delete all configured points
Slots within the slot range being eliminated.
No. of NDEVSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Device Control Points that has a
Device configurable range of 0 to 400. Before reducing the number
Control of Regulatory Control Slots, delete all configured points
Points within the slot range being eliminated. Before reducing the
number of Device Control Slots, delete all configured
points within the slot range being eliminated.
No. of NPMSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Process Module Slots that has a
Process configurable range of 0 to 250. Before reducing the number
Module of Process Module Slots, delete all configured points within
Slots the slot range being eliminated.
No. of NNUMERIC Yes Displays the No. of Numerics that has a configurable range
Numerics of 0 to 16384. Entry must be a multiple of 16. If a multiple of
16 is not entered, the NNUMERIC is clamped to the next
higher multiple of 16. Before reducing the number of Box
Numerics, delete all configured points within the slot range
being eliminated.
No. of $NNUMALM Yes Displays the No. of HPM BOX Numerics Slots that need to
Alarmable be processed for PV Trip Point Alarming. It has a
Numerics configurable range of 0 to least of (NNUMERIC or 2047).
Entry must be a multiple of 4. If a multiple of 4is not entered,
the $NNUMALM is clamped to the next higher multiple of 4.
Before reducing the number of Alarmable Box Numerics,
rebuild all tagged box Numerics within the slot range being
eliminated to COMPONNT Point Form.
No. of NSTRING Yes Displays the No. of Strings in HPM Box Data that has a
Strings in configurable range of 0 to 16384. Entry must be a multiple
HPM Box of 16. If a multiple of 16 is not entered, the NSTRING is
Data clamped to the next higher multiple of 16.
No. of NTIME Yes Displays the No. of Times in HPM Box Data 1 that has a
Times in configurable range of 0 to 16384. Entry must be a multiple
Plain Text Parameter User Notes
Name Configurable
HPM Box of 32. If a multiple of 32 is not entered, the NTIME is
Data 1 clamped to the next higher multiple of 32.
No. of NARRSLOT Yes Displays the No. of Array Slots that has a configurable
Array Slots range of 0 to 500. Before reducing the number of Array
Slots, delete all configured points within the slot range
being eliminated.
Fast Control Configuration
No. of Fast NFASTCTL Yes Displays the No. of Fast Regulatory Control Slots that has a
Regulatory configurable range of 0 to 200 but cannot exceed
Control NCTLSLOT.
Slots
No. of Fast NFASTPV Yes Displays the No. of Fast Regulatory PV slots that has a
Regulatory configurable range of 0 to 500 but cannot exceed
PV slots NPVSLOT.
No. of Fast NFASTLOG Yes Displays the No. of Fast Logic Slots that has a configurable
Logic Slots range of 0 to 100 but cannot exceed NLOGSLOT.
No. of Fast NFASTDC Yes Displays the No. of Fast digital Composite Slots that has a
digital configurable range of 0 to 999 but cannot exceed
Composite NDCSLOT.
Slots
No. of Fast NFASTDEV Yes Displays the No. of Fast Device Control Points that has a
Device configurable range of 0 to 100 but cannot exceed
Control NDEVSLOT.
Points
No. of $NSFPMS Yes Displays the No. of HPM Process Module slots that need to
Semi Fast be processed twice a second. The number of Semi Fast
Process Process Module Slots has a configurable range of 0 to 100,
Module but cannot exceed NPMSLOT.
C300PM Controller block Soft Failures tab
The Soft Failures tab is used to display various soft failure conditions for the EHPM Controller hardware.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor on the Soft Failures tab of the
configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Soft Failure Conditions
Memory BATTERYNOTOKSFTAB No
Retention Not
Available
Factory Data FACTDATAERR No Displays the factory data checksum.
Error
ROM Application ROMAPPIMGCHKSMFAIL No Displays softfail condition.
Image
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Checksum
Failure
WDT Hardware WDTHWFAIL No Displays the WatchDog Timer
Failure Hardware Failure.
WDT Refresh WDTSWFAIL No Displays the WatchDog Timer
Warning Software Failure.
ROM Boot Image ROMBOOTIMGCHKSMFAIL No Displays softfail condition.
Checksum
Failure
Debug Flag DEBUGFLAGSET No Displays Soft Fail condition, which
Enabled indicates that the image loaded to the
module was built with one or more
debug flags asserted.
Diagnostic DBTRACEENABLESF No
Traces Enabled
Thermometer THERMERR No True if the device hardware
Failure thermometer has failed.
Non-Genuine DEVGENUINE No
Hardware
Detected
NVS/Retention NVSMEDIAERR No
Restart Media
Error
Critical Task TASKHLTHMON No A key task within the controller is
Watchdog executing less frequently than
Warning normal.
Partner Not PARTNERNOTVISFTE No Indicates redundant module partner
Visible On FTE is not visible on FTE.
Uncorrectable RAMSWEEPERR No Displays status of detected RAM
Internal RAM errors.
Sweep Error
Corrected RAMSCRUBERRS No Displays status of detected RAM
Internal RAM errors.
Sweep Error
Uncorrectable BACKUPRAMSWEEPERR No Displays status of detected errors in
User RAM backup RAM.
Sweep Error
Corrected User BACKUPRAMSCRUBERRS No Displays errors detected within
RAM Sweep backup RAM that are corrected
Error through a scrub operation.
Minimum HW MINHWREVSF No
Revision
Current Conditions
FTE Network FTENETWORKERR No True if device detected an FTE
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Error (see FTE network error; for example, FTE cable
Tab) failure.
Partner Not PARTNERNOTVISFTE No Indicates redundant module partner
Visible On FTE is not visible on FTE.
Network
Enclosure TEMPCRIT No True if the enclosure temperature
Temperature exceeds the critical limit.
Critical
CPU Free CPUFREECRIT No
Critical
NVS Free Critical NVSFREECRIT No
Main RAM Free MEMFREECRIT No
Critical
WDT Refresh WDTSWFAIL No
Warning
Critical Task TASKHLTHMON No
Watchdog
Warning
C300PM Controller block Traces Tab
The Traces tab is used to configure the C300PM Controller block. This tab also displays important state
information and supports generation of commands to the C300PM Controller through the parameters.
The following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
GTAC-Guided Diagnostic Traces
Trace DBTRACEFLAGS1 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value indicating 32 flags
Flags 1 each of which can govern diagnostic tracing of a
specific area of interest. DBTRACEFLAGS1
governs tracing for platform application
Trace DBTRACEFLAGS2 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value indicating 32 flags
Flags 2 each of which can govern diagnostic tracing of a
specific area of interest. DBTRACEFLAGS2
governs tracing for uea display application
Trace DBTRACEFLAGS3 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value indicating 32 flags
Flags 3 each of which can govern diagnostic tracing of a
specific area of interest. DBTRACEFLAGS3
governs tracing for lcnp4emu application
Trace DBTRACEFLAGS4 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value indicating 32 flags
Flags 4 each of which can govern diagnostic tracing of a
specific area of interest. DBTRACEFLAGS4
governs tracing for ELCNNODE type dependent
application as follows: ENIM- epni2emu, NG-
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
engiAemu, EHB- ehbemu, ENB- enbemu
Trace DBTRACEFLAGS5 Yes A numeric unsigned 32-bit value indicating 32 flags
Flags 5 each of which can govern diagnostic tracing of a
specific area of interest. DBTRACEFLAGS5
governs tracing for ELCNNODE types as follows:
NG- engiBemu, else- ftesysapp application
Trace DBTRACEFLAGS6 Yes
Flags 6
Trace DBTRACEFLAGS7 Yes
Flags 7
Trace DBTRACEFLAGS8 Yes
Flags 8
Trace DBTRACEFLAGS9 Yes
Flags 9
GTAC-Guided Diagnostic File Count
Trace DBTRACEFILES1 Yes
Files 1
Trace DBTRACEFILES2 Yes
Files 2
Trace DBTRACEFILES3 Yes
Files 3
Trace DBTRACEFILES4 Yes
Files 4
Trace DBTRACEFILES5 Yes
Files 5
Trace DBTRACEFILES6 Yes
Files 6
Trace DBTRACEFILES7 Yes
Files 7
Trace DBTRACEFILES8 Yes
Files 8
Trace DBTRACEFILES9 Yes
Files 9
Diagnostic DBTRACEENABLE Yes This parameter indicates whether GTAC-directed
Traces diagnostic tracing is enabled. If the value is true, it
Enabled will trigger a SoftFail on the node, so that
operators/engineers are aware that diagnostic
tracing is enabled.
C300PM Controller block Server History tab
The Server History tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected EHPM block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Access Levels
Control SCANCTRLLVL Yes Indicates Server control level to be
Level associated with this function.
History Configuration
Number of HIST.NUMPARAMS Yes Defines number of history parameters
History to be included in History Configuration
Parameters table.
Parameter HIST.PARAM Yes Valid parameter name for a parameter
associated with the given point that is to
be collected and stored as historical
data at predetermined intervals.
Description No Provides a brief description of the
entered parameter.
FAST HIST.FAST Yes Select the Fast type of history
collection.
STD HIST.STD Yes Select the Standard type of history
collection.
EXTD HIST.EXTD Yes Select the Extended type of history
collection.
Gating HIST.GATEPARAM Yes Optional gating parameter to define
Parameter conditions under which data for this
parameter should be collected.
Gate State HIST.GATEVALUE Yes Defines the gate state for the
configured gating parameter.
Create New N/A Launches the Server scripting
or Edit configuration utility.
Existing
Server
Scripts
(Button)
Parameter History Options
History type HIST.FAST HIST.STD No For the selected parameter, lists the
HIST.EXTD HIST.EXC available history types.
l Fast
l Standard
l Extended
l Exception
Collection HIST.FASTCOLLRATE Yes For the selected parameter, defines the
Rate HIST.STDCOLLRATE collection rate for each history type.
HIST.EXCCOLLRATE
Offset HIST.EXCOFFSET Yes (Optional) Applicable only to Standard
HIST.STDOFFSET history and Exception history. For the
selected parameter, defines the offset
value, which enables the data
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
collection to be staggered.
PHD HIST.FASTPHDCOLLRATE Yes For the selected parameter, defines the
Collection HIST.STDPHDCOLLRATE PHD Collection strategy.
HIST.EXTDPHDCOLLRATE l Default
HIST.EXCPHDCOLLRATE
l Override
l Disable
C300PM Controller block Server Displays tab
Delete this text and replace it with your own content.
C300PM Controller block Control Confirmation tab
Delete this text and replace it with your own content.
C300PM Controller block QVCS tab
Delete this text and replace it with your own content.
C300PM Controller block Identification tab
Delete this text and replace it with your own content.
CHAPTER
COMMON TABS
5.1 Server History tab 782
5.2 Server Displays tab 783
5.3 Control Confirmation tab 785
5.4 QVCS tab 785
5.5 Identification tab 785
5.6 Dependencies tab 786
5.7 Projected Parameters tab 788
5.8 Block Pins tab 788
5.9 Configuration Parameters tab 788
5.10 Monitoring Parameters tab 788
5.11 Block Preferences tab 788
5.12 Template Defining tab 788
5.1 Server History tab
The Server History tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected C200/C200E block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Access Levels
Control SCANCTRLLVL Yes Indicates Server control level to be
Level associated with this function.
History Configuration
Number of HIST.NUMPARAMS Yes Defines number of history parameters
History to be included in History Configuration
Parameters table.
Parameter HIST.PARAM Yes Valid parameter name for a parameter
associated with the given point that is
to be collected and stored as historical
data at predetermined intervals.
Chapter 6 - Common tabs
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Description No Provides a brief description of the
entered parameter.
FAST HIST.FAST Yes Select the Fast type of history
collection.
STD HIST.STD Yes Select the Standard type of history
collection.
EXTD HIST.EXTD Yes Select the Extended type of history
collection.
Gating HIST.GATEPARAM Yes Optional gating parameter to define
Parameter conditions under which data for this
parameter should be collected.
Gate State HIST.GATEVALUE Yes Defines the gate state for the
configured gating parameter.
Create New N/A Starts the Server scripting configuration
or Edit utility.
Existing
Server
Scripts
(Button)
Parameter History Options
History type HIST.FAST HIST.STD No For the selected parameter, lists the
HIST.EXTD HIST.EXC available history types.
l Fast
l Standard
l Extended
l Exception
Collection HIST.FASTCOLLRATE Yes For the selected parameter, defines the
Rate HIST.STDCOLLRATE collection rate for each history type.
HIST.EXCCOLLRATE
Offset HIST.EXCOFFSET Yes (Optional) Applicable only to Standard
HIST.STDOFFSET history and Exception history. For the
selected parameter, defines the offset
value, which enables the data
collection to be staggered.
PHD HIST.FASTPHDCOLLRATE Yes For the selected parameter, defines the
Collection HIST.STDPHDCOLLRATE PHD Collection strategy.
HIST.EXTDPHDCOLLRATE l Default
HIST.EXCPHDCOLLRATE
l Override
l Disable
5.2 Server Displays tab
The Server Displays tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. The
Chapter 6 - Common tabs
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected C200/C200E block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Point Detail SCANPNTDTL Yes By default, a Display template is already entered
Display into Point Detail Display box (for example,
sysDtlFTEB.htm). This template can be used for
creating your own display or it can be used as is,
provided your function block name matches
name built into detail display that is supplied as
a template.
Group SCANGRPDTL Yes By default, a Display template is already entered
Detail into the Group Detail Display box (for example,
Display sysGrpFTEB.htm). This template can be used for
creating your own display or it can be used as is,
provided that your function block name matches
name built into detail display that is supplied as
a template
Associated SCANASSOCDSP Yes Name of the Server display to be associated
Display with this function block.
Trends
Number of TREND.NUMPARAMS Yes Defines the number of trend parameters to be
Trends included in the Trends Configuration table.
Trend # TREND.NUMBER Yes Defines Trend number to be associated with this
trend parameter
Trend TREND.POSITION Yes Defines color of pen that is used to trace
Position assigned parameter on Station Trend display.
Trend TREND.PARAM Yes Valid parameter name for a parameter
Parameter associated with given point that is configured for
trend collection.
Description No Provides a brief description of the entered
parameter.
Groups
Number of GROUP.NUMPARAMS Yes Defines the number of group parameters to be
Groups included in Groups Configuration table.
Group # GROUP.NUMBER Yes Defines Group number to be associated with this
group parameter.
Pos # GROUP.POSITION Yes Defines number of position configured
parameter will occupy in the Station Group
display.
Group GROUP.PARAM Yes Valid parameter name for a parameter
Parameter associated with the given point that is configured
in the system.
Description No Provides a brief description of the entered
parameter.
Chapter 6 - Common tabs
5.3 Control Confirmation tab
The Control Confirmation tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder.
If you have an optional Electronic Signature license, you can configure electronic signature information
for the tagged block through this tab on the block's configuration form in Control Builder. Please see the
online help and the Server and Client Configuration Guide for information about the data on this tab.
The Electronic Signature function aligns with the identical Electronic Signatures function that is initiated
through Quick Builder and Station for Server points. When this block is loaded to a controller, its control
confirmation configuration (electronic signatures) is also loaded to the Server. This means you can view
the control confirmation configuration for this tagged object in Station and also make changes to it. If
you make changes through Station, you must initiate an Upload or Upload with Contents function
through the Controller menu in Control Builder for the object in the Monitoring view to synchronize
changes in the Engineering Repository Database (ERDB).
5.4 QVCS tab
The QVCS tab is common to all modules in Control Builder. If you have an active Qualification and
Version Control System (QVCS) license, this tab shows current QVCS information. For more information
about the data on this tab, refer to the online help and the Qualification and Version Control System
User's Guide.
5.5 Identification tab
The Identification tab is common to all configuration forms for tagged blocks in Control Builder. The
following table summarizes the parameter data you can monitor and configure on this tab of the
configuration form for the selected C200/C200E block.
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
Name Name Yes Unique block name consisting of up to 16 characters
to identify the block. At least one character in the
name must be a letter (A-Z).
Description DESC Yes Descriptive text that appears on detail and group
displays to uniquely describe this particular function
block
Block BLCKCOMMENT1 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment 1 of up to 40 characters.
Block BLCKCOMMENT2 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment 2 of up to 40 characters.
Block BLCKCOMMENT3 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment 3 of up to 40 characters.
Block BLCKCOMMENT4 Yes Comment to be associated with this block consisting
Comment 4 of up to 40 characters.
Library N/A No Identifies Control Builder Library that is the source
Chapter 6 - Common tabs
Plain Text Parameter Name User Notes
Configurable
for template.
System No Identifies System Template that is the source for this
Template block.
Base No Identifies Base Template that is used for this block.
Template
Created By CREATEDBY No Identifies user who created block, if operator security
is implemented. Otherwise, may just show Default
login.
Date DATECREATED No Indicates date and time template was created. If this
Created block is in Version Control System, shows date and
time initial version of template was created.
Last MODIFIEDBY No Identifies user who made last modifications to block,
Modified if operator security is implemented. Otherwise, may
By just show default login. If this block is in Version
Control System, modifications apply to last version of
block.
Date Last VERSIONDATE No Indicates date and time last modification was made
Modified to block's configuration. If this block is in Version
Control System, modification date and time applies
to last version of block.
5.6 Dependencies tab
The Dependencies tab is on the configure parameters form. Selecting the Dependencies tab brings up
the following dialog, which shows the derivation hierarchy of this template and the sub-templates and
instances that are dependent on it.
l The derivation hierarchy (the list of base templates, and base templates of the base templates,
ultimately winding back to the original Honeywell system template).
l A list of sub-templates derived from the template.
l A list of instances instantiated from the template and their current life cycle state (loaded, assigned).
Template names are preceded by their library name. Column widths may be adjusted to view longer
library and template names. The list may be sorted by dependency type, life cycle state, or the module
name. The tree view shows the exact derivation relationship of all dependants.
Chapter 6 - Common tabs
Figure 6.1 Dependencies tab, List View
Figure 6.2 Dependencies tab, Tree View
Chapter 6 - Common tabs
5.7 Projected Parameters tab
The Projected Parameters tab is common to all modules in Control Builder. Refer to the online help and
Control Building User's Guide > Appendix B - Hierarchy Building > Parameter Projection Overview and
Using the Projected Parameters Tab for more information about the data on this tab.
5.8 Block Pins tab
The Block Pins tab is common to all function blocks in Control Builder. Lets you choose the available
parameters that you want to expose as input/output pins on the function block in Control Builder.
5.9 Configuration Parameters tab
The Configuration Parameters tab is common to all function blocks in Control Builder. Lets you choose
the available parameters that you want to appear on the face of the function block in the Project tab in
Control Builder.
5.10 Monitoring Parameters tab
The Monitoring Parameters tab is common to all function blocks in Control Builder. Lets you choose the
available parameters that you want to appear on the face of the function block in the Monitoring tab in
Control Builder.
5.11 Block Preferences tab
The Block Preferences tab is common to all function blocks in Control Builder. Lets you change several
block-viewing preferences including the color of the block's faceplate.
5.12 Template Defining tab
The Template Defining tab is common to all function blocks in Control Builder. Lets you define the block
as a template block.
Use this tab to prevent value changes in the Recipe Step instances. For example, the management of
the value range (Min Value and Max Value) can be enforced in the user templates, when the changes
are disabled in the instances by adding them in the template defining tab.
NOTICES
Trademarks
Experion®, PlantScape®, SafeBrowse®, TotalPlant®, and TDC 3000® are registered trademarks of
Honeywell International, Inc.
ControlEdge™ is a trademark of Honeywell International, Inc.
OneWireless™ is a trademark of Honeywell International, Inc.
Matrikon® and MatrikonOPC™ are trademarks of Matrikon International. Matrikon International is a
business unit of Honeywell International, Inc.
Movilizer® is a registered trademark of Movilizer GmbH. Movilizer GmbH is a business unit of
Honeywell International, Inc.
Other trademarks
Microsoft and SQL Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Other brands or trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners.
Trademarks that appear in this document are used only to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no
intention of trademark infringement.
Third-party licenses
This product may contain or be derived from materials, including software, of third parties. The third
party materials may be subject to licenses, notices, restrictions and obligations imposed by the licensor.
The licenses, notices, restrictions and obligations, if any, may be found in the materials accompanying
the product, in the documents or files accompanying such third party materials, in a file named third_
party_licenses on the media containing the product.
Documentation feedback
You can find the most up-to-date documents on the Honeywell Process Solutions Support website at:
http://www.honeywellprocess.com/support
If you have comments about Honeywell Process Solutions documentation, send your feedback to:
[email protected]
Use this email address to provide feedback, or to report errors and omissions in the documentation. For
immediate help with a technical problem, contact HPS Technical Support through your local Customer
Contact Center, or by raising a support request on the Honeywell Process Solutions Support website.
How to report a security vulnerability
For the purpose of submission, a security vulnerability is defined as a software defect or weakness that
can be exploited to reduce the operational or security capabilities of the software.
Honeywell investigates all reports of security vulnerabilities affecting Honeywell products and services.
To report a potential security vulnerability against any Honeywell product, please follow the instructions
at:
https://www.honeywell.com/en-us/product-security.
Support
For support, contact your local Honeywell Process Solutions Customer Contact Center (CCC). To find
your local CCC visit the website, https://www.honeywellprocess.com/en-US/contact-us/customer-
support-contacts/Pages/default.aspx.
Training classes
Honeywell holds technical training classes that are taught by process control systems experts. For more
information about these classes, contact your Honeywell representative, or see
http://www.automationcollege.com.
You might also like
- Centum Data Access Library: User's ManualNo ratings yetCentum Data Access Library: User's Manual9 pages
- Control Builder Components Reference PDF FreeNo ratings yetControl Builder Components Reference PDF Free368 pages
- Safety Considerations Guide For Trident v2 SystemsNo ratings yetSafety Considerations Guide For Trident v2 Systems110 pages
- 9720115-003 Emulator Users Guide v1.1.0 PDFNo ratings yet9720115-003 Emulator Users Guide v1.1.0 PDF68 pages
- TriStation 1131 Developer S Guide v4 9 0 PDFNo ratings yetTriStation 1131 Developer S Guide v4 9 0 PDF734 pages
- Deltav Scalable Process System Class I Division 2 Installation InstructionsNo ratings yetDeltav Scalable Process System Class I Division 2 Installation Instructions10 pages
- FSC To Safety Manager Migration Solution NoteNo ratings yetFSC To Safety Manager Migration Solution Note2 pages
- AM Algorithm Engineering Data AM09601 PDFNo ratings yetAM Algorithm Engineering Data AM09601 PDF171 pages
- SQL Success - Database Programmi - Stephane Faroult100% (8)SQL Success - Database Programmi - Stephane Faroult503 pages
- Deltav V11.3 Release-Delivers!: I/O On DemandNo ratings yetDeltav V11.3 Release-Delivers!: I/O On Demand2 pages
- WP DeltaV Software Update Deployment PDFNo ratings yetWP DeltaV Software Update Deployment PDF8 pages
- Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor User's Guide 2.10.0No ratings yetEnhanced Diagnostic Monitor User's Guide 2.10.0246 pages
- Application Development Guide EP-DSXX16No ratings yetApplication Development Guide EP-DSXX16522 pages
- 9720098-010 TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference (Nov 2010)No ratings yet9720098-010 TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference (Nov 2010)512 pages
- Server - and - Client - Configuration - Guide - EPDOC-X127-en-500 538No ratings yetServer - and - Client - Configuration - Guide - EPDOC-X127-en-500 5381 page
- Installation and Setup: Alarm and Event AnalysisNo ratings yetInstallation and Setup: Alarm and Event Analysis107 pages
- TPS Process Network R688.2: Software Change NoticeNo ratings yetTPS Process Network R688.2: Software Change Notice46 pages
- Planning and Installation Guide For Tri-GP v2 Systems33% (3)Planning and Installation Guide For Tri-GP v2 Systems306 pages
- User's Manual: GC1000 Mark II Process Gas ChromatographNo ratings yetUser's Manual: GC1000 Mark II Process Gas Chromatograph77 pages
- Experion HS Application Development GuideNo ratings yetExperion HS Application Development Guide405 pages
- 1788HP-En2PA-R User Manual v1.00.02 Link Device PANo ratings yet1788HP-En2PA-R User Manual v1.00.02 Link Device PA30 pages
- NDS - 5000 and NDS - 6000 Hardware Manual SYSTECH PDFNo ratings yetNDS - 5000 and NDS - 6000 Hardware Manual SYSTECH PDF39 pages
- Experion CEE-based Controllers and I/O: Doc EP03-290-400No ratings yetExperion CEE-based Controllers and I/O: Doc EP03-290-40043 pages
- pmt-hps-experion-backup-and-restore-user-s-guide-epdoc-x111-en-520GNo ratings yetpmt-hps-experion-backup-and-restore-user-s-guide-epdoc-x111-en-520G227 pages
- PMT Hps FDM Troubleshooting Guide Ep FDM 12440No ratings yetPMT Hps FDM Troubleshooting Guide Ep FDM 12440130 pages
- Wonderware Application Server Scripting GuideNo ratings yetWonderware Application Server Scripting Guide148 pages
- Micrologix Contrologix ALE111 Comm Example Rev1No ratings yetMicrologix Contrologix ALE111 Comm Example Rev140 pages
- Control Builder Components Reference EPDOC-XX15-en-430No ratings yetControl Builder Components Reference EPDOC-XX15-en-430386 pages
- 1 2 3 4 5 A Modular PID Control Simatic: ManualNo ratings yet1 2 3 4 5 A Modular PID Control Simatic: Manual212 pages
- Modicon Libraries Equipment Module Components User GuideNo ratings yetModicon Libraries Equipment Module Components User Guide152 pages
- Ground Handler Amadeus Solutions For Ground HandlersNo ratings yetGround Handler Amadeus Solutions For Ground Handlers12 pages
- Investigating the Impact of Incorporating Iron Splinters as an Admixture in Concrete Mixtures on Compressive StrengthNo ratings yetInvestigating the Impact of Incorporating Iron Splinters as an Admixture in Concrete Mixtures on Compressive Strength6 pages
- Introduction and Overview: Download Completed ProjectNo ratings yetIntroduction and Overview: Download Completed Project11 pages
- Ata 31 Electronic Instrument Display System (Eisids)No ratings yetAta 31 Electronic Instrument Display System (Eisids)138 pages
- Robotic Technologies in Concrete Building Construction: A Systematic ReviewNo ratings yetRobotic Technologies in Concrete Building Construction: A Systematic Review10 pages
- Pixel Circle Oval Generator (Minecraft) - DonatNo ratings yetPixel Circle Oval Generator (Minecraft) - Donat6 pages
- 2RSCN02 NETWORK MANAGEMENT-syllabus-2019-20 13062019 AVKNo ratings yet2RSCN02 NETWORK MANAGEMENT-syllabus-2019-20 13062019 AVK2 pages
- AguaSense An Automated Fishpond Monitoring and Filtration SystemNo ratings yetAguaSense An Automated Fishpond Monitoring and Filtration System51 pages
- FrontAccounting 2.4.7 Instruction Sheet EnglishNo ratings yetFrontAccounting 2.4.7 Instruction Sheet English2 pages
